JP2022076919A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can suppress the decline in game interest.SOLUTION: At the end of an "enemy tank destruction ready-to-win" performance and a "giant tank ready-to-win" performance, there are a first period in which the visibility of a decorative symbol is reduced, a second period after the first period in which the decorative symbol is invisible or difficult to recognize, and a third period after the second period in which the visibility of the decorative symbol increases compared with that in the second period. It is possible to execute a performance that makes the background image in the first period and the background image in the third period different.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 397

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a ball game machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") and a rotating cylinder type game machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of executing a display effect of switching an effect image according to a game situation has been known (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-3400037

However, if the effect image is suddenly switched in such a display effect and the player feels a sense of discomfort, there is a risk that the interest in the game will be reduced.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest in gaming.

The gaming machine according to [Means 1] is
A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
A determination means for determining whether or not the lottery result by the lottery means is advantageous, and
A display means capable of performing a predetermined display and
The display means can display a predetermined display based on the determination result of the determination means, and is provided with an effect control means for variablely controlling the decorative pattern.
Specific reach production is possible,
When the specific reach effect is performed, it is possible to execute a special effect that changes the visibility of the decorative pattern.
The special effect execution period includes a first period in which the visibility of the decorative symbol is lower than before the special effect is executed, and a period after the first period, in which the decorative symbol is executed. A second period in which it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern, and a third period in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved as compared with the second period, which is a period after the second period. Is included,
It is possible to make the background display different between the first period and the third period in which the special effect is executed.
The size of the decorative design in the first period and the decorative design in the third period are different.
A gaming machine characterized in that the background display in the third period is dynamically displayed.
(See, for example, the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect described in paragraph 3542, etc., FIG. 397, etc., and the "giant tank reach" effect described in paragraph 3700, etc., FIG. 416, etc.). According to the gaming machine according to "Means 1", the player can visually recognize the background display so that the background display can be switched smoothly without any discomfort, and the background display can be switched appropriately to suppress the deterioration of the interest. It becomes possible.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the interest in gaming.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. be. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the outer upper hinge member. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the lock member in the outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a front view of the staging operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the staging operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the back. It is explanatory drawing which saw the staging operation unit from the direction which the central axis of an operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut along the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). FIG. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the staging operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. (A) is a view of the staging operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is explanatory drawing which shows, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit. (A) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. It is sectional drawing which cut at the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. Is. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the back. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as viewed from behind by disassembling. It is explanatory drawing which enlarges and shows the part of the function display unit from the front with the game board attached to the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to a game ball rental device connection terminal board which relays an electric connection between a payout control board constituting a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display and a sound control unit. It is a block diagram which shows the power-source system of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit and the like of a payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout control input circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the continuation of FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram which shows the payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows the CR unit input / output circuit. It is an input / output diagram which shows various input / output signals with a main control board, and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the door frame side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a payout control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from a main control board to a peripheral control board. It is a table which shows the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table which shows an example of various commands from a payout control board received by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the process at the time of power-on of the main control side of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LOCKN signal history creation process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of connection recovery processing. It is a timing chart explaining the timing of outputting the connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (step S114). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st start port passing process (step S5322). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd start port passing process (step S5234). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process (step S5238). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process (step S5280). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot determination process (step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a jackpot determination table, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a symbol determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st variation pattern setting process (step S5282). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol variation processing (step S5283). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop processing (step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passing process (step S5402). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the ordinary symbol ordinary processing (step S5403). It is a figure which showed the whole of the game board of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view and the back view of the face substrate of the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the face cover part of the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a perspective view which showed the state which the rabbit accessory of this embodiment is in a standby position. It is a figure which showed an example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example about the rabbit role of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the whole of the game board in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the stump box part of this embodiment and its exploded view, the front view of the rear wall cover, and the front view of the rear wall substrate. It is a figure which showed the stump box part and its exploded view, the front view of the rear wall cover, and the front view of the rear wall substrate in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the Example about the grass accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example about the grass accessory in the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the front view, the perspective view, and the exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory in the modified example of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the Example about the mountain accessory of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the board back grass role of this embodiment. In the stump box portion shown in FIGS. 129 (A) and 130 (A) of the present embodiment, the box upper wall portion, the box right wall portion, the box lower wall portion, and the box left wall portion are moved from the standby position to the moving position, respectively. It is a figure which showed the state which moved. It is a figure which showed the example which provided the stump plate part which is fixedly provided in place of the 1st grass movable part and the 2nd grass movable part, without providing the stump board part in front of the stump box part of this embodiment. be. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 148 of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 149 of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 149 of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the modification of FIG. 149 of this embodiment. (A) and (B) are views showing an example of the configuration of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 151 of the present embodiment, and (C) and (D) are views of the box rear wall portion of FIG. 152 of the present embodiment. It is a figure which showed the example of the configuration. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows schematically the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state of the moving state of the frame movable body and the light emitting effect state with the passage of time. It is a figure which shows schematically the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, and the change of the state of the moving state of the frame movable body and the light emitting effect state with the passage of time. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is the figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views, (E) and (F) are right side views. be. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are the front view, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) and (D) are plan views. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine of the modification of this embodiment, and (A) and (B) are right side views. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart of the modification which shows the operation mode, the display state, and the light emission effect state in each effect pattern in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game board in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the game panel in 2nd Embodiment. It is an enlarged right front perspective view of the game panel in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded front perspective view of the area cover member in 2nd Embodiment. It is the arrangement plan view of the obstacle nail in the right side game area in 2nd Embodiment. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member in 2nd Embodiment. In the second embodiment, it is a cross-sectional view of an obstacle nail in the right game area, (a) is a cross-sectional view of a place where one obstacle nail is housed in a penetration portion, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of two obstacle nails. A cross-sectional view of a portion housed in the penetrating portion is shown, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of a portion where three obstacle nails are housed in the penetrating portion. It is a front view which shows an example of a nail sheet. It is a front view which shows an example of the usage form of a nail sheet. An example of the installation mode of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. In the figure, (c) shows a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is attached to the existing member, and (d) shows a cross-sectional view when the area cover member is integrated with the existing member. In the installation example of a plurality of types of area cover members in the third embodiment, (a) is an installation mode of the area cover member in which the right penetrating portion is shifted inward, and (b) is an installation mode in which the left penetrating portion is inward. The installation mode of the shifted area cover member is as follows: (c) is the installation mode of the region cover member in which both penetrating portions are shifted inward, and (d) is the installation mode of the region cover member in which the right penetrating portion is shifted outward. However, (e) shows an installation mode of the area cover member in which the left penetrating portion is shifted outward, and (f) shows an installation mode of the area cover member in which both the penetrating portions are shifted outward. ing. In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. However, (c) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 180 degrees and both penetrations are shifted inward, and (d) is an installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the right and both penetrations are inward. The front view shows a staggered installation mode in which the area cover member is rotated 90 degrees to the left and both penetrating portions are staggered inward. In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of an installation method of the area cover member, and (b) is a front view showing an example of an installation state of the area cover member. However, in (c), the installation mode in which the area cover member is moved downward and the penetrating portions on both sides are shifted downward is shown in the front view. In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, the shapes of the penetrating portions to be variously applicable are shown in the front view in (a) to (d). In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is an installation mode of the area cover member for accommodating two obstacle nails in the penetrating portions on both sides, and (b) is two in the penetrating portion. The front view showing an example of the case where the area cover member is installed from the front side to the game panel in (c) is the installation mode of the area cover member in which both the penetrating portions are shifted inward while accommodating the obstacle nails of the above. (D) and (e) are cross-sectional views showing an example of the case where the area cover member is installed on the game panel from the front side. In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an example of a case where the area cover member is fixed from the rear of the game panel, and (b) is a front view showing an example in which the area cover member is fixed to the game panel. Cross-sectional views showing an example of the case of fixing from the rear of the above are shown respectively. In another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing a part of the left game area before the area cover member is installed, and (b) is the left side after the area cover member is installed. A front view showing a part of the game area is shown respectively. In another embodiment of the region cover member according to the third embodiment, (a) is a front view showing an installation mode of the region cover member formed by shifting the penetration portion downward, and (b) is an upper view of the penetration portion. The front view which showed the installation mode of the area cover member which was formed by shifting is shown respectively. It is an example of the installation mode of the decorative sticker on the area cover member, in which (a) is a front view showing the area cover member before the decorative seal is installed, and (b) is a mode in which the decorative sticker is attached to the entire circumference of the penetrating portion. (C) shows a front view showing a mode in which a decorative sticker is attached to a part around a penetrating portion, respectively. It is an example of the accommodation mode of the obstacle nail in the penetration portion formed in the region cover member, and (a) to (c) are in the penetration portion in which the convex portion is formed on the front side and the game panel side of the region cover member. The accommodation mode of the obstacle nail is shown in the cross-sectional view. It is an example of the accommodation mode of the obstacle nail in the penetration part formed in the area cover member, and (a) to (g) are the obstacle nail in the penetration part which formed the convex part in the central part of the cross section of a region cover member. The accommodation mode is shown in cross-sectional view. It is an example of the accommodation mode of the obstacle nail in the penetration part formed in the area cover member, and (a) to (d) are the obstacle nail in the penetration part which formed the convex part on the game panel side of the area cover member. The accommodation mode is shown in a cross-sectional view. It is an example of the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion formed in the region cover member, and in (a) to (d), the obstacle nail is accommodated in the penetrating portion forming the convex portion on the front surface side of the region cover member. Aspects are shown in cross-sectional views, respectively. It is an example of the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion formed in the area cover member, and in (a) to (e), the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion blocking the front side of the area cover member is a cross-sectional view. Each is shown in. It is an example of the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion formed in the region cover member, and in (a) to (c), the mode of accommodating the obstacle nail in the region cover member having ribs formed around the penetrating portion is a cross section. Each is shown in the figure. It is an example of the accommodation mode of the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion formed in the area cover member. It is shown. A front view of another embodiment of the area cover member in the third embodiment is shown. It is a figure which showed the pachinko machine in this embodiment, (A) and (B) are front views, (C) is a plan view, (D) and (E) are right side views. (A) and (B) are front views showing the pachinko machine of the modified example in this embodiment. (C) is a front view of the root vegetable frame movable body of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the production mode of the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which showed the effect mode in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the display mode of the game board side effect display device in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the obstacle nail and the panel board in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the obstacle nail, the panel board, and the game ball in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the panel board, the obstacle nail and the like in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the decorative member and the panel board in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the decorative member and the panel board in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the decorative member in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is a figure which showed the game board in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing in this embodiment. It is a perspective view of the housing in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example in the display area in this embodiment. It is a movement image figure of the own tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a movement image figure of the own tank displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the gaming state in this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the effect pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the effect pattern in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the effect pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the table of the effect pattern in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the moving image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display priority of the display image in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image displayed in the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display area in this embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the production example in this embodiment.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. It includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of the 20 to each other and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through hole 111 having a front-rear outer shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth, and a through port of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, which is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface below the door, and the player according to the game state that is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and changes as the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A production operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and a door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. And, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, the door frame left side unit 530, and the door frame right side unit 550. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper part of the front surface above the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4. And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse side that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. The L-shaped payout unit 800, the board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game balls that are detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and are guided by the ball guide unit 820 are paid out one by one based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. The payout device 830 and the game ball attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the game ball is stored according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the plate unit 320. It was discharged from the upper full tank path unit 850 to be discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal taxiway 861 that guides the game ball forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e are guided forward and the door frame 3 is full from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank taxiway 862 for guiding to the tank ball receiving port 274.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the lower part for bass inside. It is mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 having the speaker 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed inside. The payout control board box 950 and the like are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the gaming board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a into which the gaming ball is driven, and the gaming ball launched from the ball launching device 680 is placed on the upper portion of the gaming area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to be guided to the above, and a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 with the game ball stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launching device 680 causes the game ball to have a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning opening. Since the payout of the game ball can enhance the interest of the player, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front after being disassembled. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of the portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 extending to the left frame member 30 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end faces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are flush with each other. Has been done.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in front view, and a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It includes an upper part on the left end side of the front view of the curtain plate member 50 and a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side attached to the left frame member 30. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be opened and closed by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 attached to a position left and right from the center of the left and right on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right-sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50 is provided. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. It includes a connecting member 85 that is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40, and the upper hook hook member 90 and the lower hook hook member 91 to which the hook 703 for the outer frame of the locking unit 700, which will be described later, is locked. , Are prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 is provided with an engaging notch 11 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. The upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are mounted in the engaging notch 11. Further, the upper frame member 10 is provided with a mounting step portion 12 recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in the front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed so that the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness are the same as the left and right length and the upper and lower thickness of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with an engaging notch 21 that penetrates vertically and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. A lower left connecting member 85C and a lower right connecting member 85D, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are mounted in the engaging notch 21.

Further, the lower frame member 20 is provided with a front end notch 22 recessed rearward from the front surfaces of both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to have the same dimensions as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end notches 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of an extruded metal material such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in a shape symmetrical to each other in a plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from the position rearward to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end on the outer side surface in the left-right direction. It is provided with recesses 31 and 41 and protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surface of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are increased by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, in the protruding portions 32 and 42, the lower left lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface thereof. With these plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to enhance the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side open. The curtain plate member 50 has a rear extending portion 51 extending rearward in a flat plate shape near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size that allows a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51 so that a game ball can pass through. The vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rear extending portion 51 in a flat plate shape, and the vertical wall portion 54 bulging forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the vertical wall portion 54 and the front surface is upward. It is provided with a return portion 55, which is inclined toward the rear toward the rear.

The curtain plate member 50 is a lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side so that the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension portion 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. A horizontal portion 71, which will be described later, is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined so that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on a portion on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. It is provided with a unit 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned in a grid pattern by a plurality of ribs to increase strength and rigidity. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated inside.

[2-5. Upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
As shown in the figure, the upper hinge member 60 on the outer frame side of the outer frame 2 has a flat plate shape extending horizontally and a quadrangular outer shape of the upper fixing portion 61 and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. A plan view of the front extension portion 62, the bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 to the left and right center of the front extension portion 62 and penetrating vertically, and the upper fixing portion 61. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side and the lateral fixing portion extending downward from the end side extending from the left end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16 (b) and the like).

In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 by a screw in a state of being inserted from above into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 by inserting the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63 to form the main body frame 4. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 has a strip-shaped lock body 66a whose left and right sides extend back and forth with a predetermined width, and an operation unit protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending diagonally to the left front after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 66a, and a mounting hole penetrating up and down near the rear end of the lock main body 66a. It is equipped with 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

The lock member 66 is mounted at a position where the rear end of the lock body 66a is rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the mounting hole 66d. Further, in a state where the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the hanging portion 65 of 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

Further, the tip of the elastic portion 66c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, under normal conditions, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame, which will be described later, is formed in the portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

By operating the operation portion 66b, the lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. Then, by operating the operation unit 66b, the lock body 66a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the bearing groove 63 can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 behind the center in the front-rear direction. Only one game ball can pass through the rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, the hinge pin 73 under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and the horizontal portion 71 up and down. It is provided with a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 71 of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is columnar, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 73 of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 74 is formed to have substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

In the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51, and the horizontal portion 71. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by a screw (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion on the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into the main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. As a result, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca gradually narrows, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the cloaca 74. At this time, since the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C that connects the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

The connecting member 85 includes a flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86 extending horizontally, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either the left or right side of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. 86 includes a flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the extending portion of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center in the front-rear direction of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and the lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper lateral fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower lateral fixing portions 88 are provided apart from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the upper frame member 10 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the end portion of the upper frame member 10 in the left-right direction. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is a screw inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Is fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. The lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portion 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed in a state of being in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is fixed to the inner side surface on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D is inserted into the engaging notch 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surface of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. To.

[2-9. Locking mechanism for the upper hinge member on the outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, FIGS. 17 and 18 show the locking mechanism of the main body frame 4 with respect to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. It will be explained with reference to. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. 17B is an outer upper side view. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state which the hinge member on the main body side is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing the action of the lock member on the outer frame.

When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c comes into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock body 66a does not block a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a dogleg shape, and the tip portion of the lock body 66a does not block the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 into which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted.

In the support mechanism of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is in close contact with the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal axial support state, the centers of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest part of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. It is in a state.

In this normal shaft support state, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame that pivotally supports the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63, so that the hinge pin on the main body frame is in contact with the front end portion. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the center of rotation of the lock member 66).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame comes out along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape and comes into contact with the arcuate front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is applied. F is a component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the front end surface having an arc shape, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. Because the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side and the component force F1 face the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment to rotate the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is one of the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. The state of being sandwiched between the side inner surface is maintained.

Therefore, even in a normal bearing state or in a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent the elastic portion 66c from being plastically deformed due to creep, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from falling off from the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a abuts on the hanging portion 65 and further. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the forward extending portion 62.

Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate, the position where the rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1 or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extending portion 62. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the bearing groove 63 is placed on the main body frame from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame abuts on the right side surface of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock main body 66a resists the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

Then, when the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the locking main body 66a is released by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is accommodated in the space on the front side of the lock main body 66a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can rotate in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It becomes a held (locked) state in the state.

When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Security mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the part of the lower hinge member on the outer frame side]
Prevention of ball biting to prevent the game ball from being pinched between the security mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 when viewed from the front. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 is provided with a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is to be inserted into the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool comes into contact with the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the illegal tool from being further inserted to the rear side. , It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the lower hinge member 70 on the outer frame side.

Further, since the return portion 55 extending forward is provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 54, when an illegal tool in contact with the standing wall portion 54 bends upward, the tip of the illegal tool is provided by the return portion 55. Can be further turned forward, so that it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

By the way, when the vertical wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 open with respect to the outer frame 2. When the game ball falls on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the vertical wall portion 54, so that the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rear extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 and a left discharge hole 52 through which a game ball can pass. And, since the right discharge hole 53 is provided, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 or the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be discharged. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball is pinched between the two.

Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the circumference of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state and is not closed with the outer frame 2. A gap is created between the main body frame 4 and the gap, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed using the gap.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. 26 is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a cross-sectional view cut along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a cross-sectional view cut along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 300, the plate unit 320 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the effect operation unit 400 installed in the center of the plate unit 320, and the door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. The door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the 100, the door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side. It includes a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550.

The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side of the front view are attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinged and rotatable. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190. Lock between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward so as to be openable and closable. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for opening and closing, the ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 to send the game ball to the ball launcher 680, and the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. It is provided with a foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has not reached the game area 5a and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, but when the player rotates the rotatable handle 302, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 can be rotated according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with a strong strength.

Although the details of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the dish unit 320 is attached to the lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The staging operation unit 400 is attached to the front end at the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 has an upper plate 321 for storing game balls for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 321 and supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for pulling out the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of cash and prepaid card put into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to a player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card after deducting the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine, and cash put into the ball lending machine. The ball lending / returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 that can accept the player's operation when presenting the effect, and the lower plate 322. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal button 333 for discharging the game ball below the plate unit 320.

The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and presents the effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. Although the details of the effect operation unit 400 will be described later, the large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player and the door frame side effect that is visibly arranged in the operation button 410 from the player side and can display the effect image. It is equipped with a display device 460.

The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front left portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, although the details will be described later. It decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front right portion on the upper side of the dish unit 320 and on the right side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through port 111 ( It decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a). The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward from the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can illuminate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It decorates the upper part of the frame 3. Although the details of the door frame top unit 570 will be described later, the door frame top unit 570 includes a pair of upper speakers 573 separated to the left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that are decorated. The door frame top unit 570 can illuminate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so as to be openable / closable (hinge rotatable) with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the left side side of the front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 in which the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 in the left outer front surface of the through port 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through opening 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through opening 111, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through hole 111 having a rectangular shape extending vertically and penetrating back and forth in front view. , The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the main body frame 4 which is attached to both upper and lower ends on the left end side of the front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and protrudes forward from the door frame base 110. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160, which is mounted on the left side of the view and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front, and the glass unit 190, which is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, are detachably mounted. A glass unit mounting member 170 for the purpose of the door is provided.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the lower right corner of the front view, and is attached to the tubular handle mounting member 180 for mounting the handle unit 300 and the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. It includes 210, a ball feed unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feed solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312. Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display unit 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461). , The upper speaker 573, etc., and the door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the through hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 110 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting plate metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted and the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 are penetrating back and forth on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feed opening 115 for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 110 is to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, so that the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. It penetrates back and forth between the lower plate passage port 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front view so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111, so that the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 faces forward. The dish passage port 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the through port 111. It is provided with a speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates back and forth in the corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes a left-right extending upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a left-right extending middle reinforcement attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. The sheet metal 132, the vertically extending left reinforcing sheet metal 133 attached along the left side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and the vertically extending right reinforcement attached along the right side of the front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. It includes a sheet metal 134 and a locking locking portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is locked.

In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking locking portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage port 117 of the door frame base 110.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. The strength and rigidity are enhanced by the part, and the intrusion of an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a flat-blade screwdriver from the outside is prevented.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The hinge member 140 on the door frame side of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of projecting pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and separated vertically, and the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A pair of protruding pieces 141a in the columnar door frame upper hinge pin 142 and the door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrate the piece 141a and whose upper end is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. A disk-shaped flange member 143 attached at a position between the flange member 143 and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame are interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a. Is inserted, and is provided with a lock spring 144, which urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

Although not shown, the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and the shape of the side view is open to the front. It is formed in a character shape. In the hinge shaft bracket 141 on the door frame, a mounting piece connecting the pair of projecting pieces 141a to each other is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by a screw.

In the door frame upper hinge pin 142, a portion (upper end) protruding upward from the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Further, although not shown, the hinge pin 142 on the door frame has a portion that protrudes downward from the lower protruding piece 141a and is bent in the horizontal direction. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

The flange member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and the upper end thereof is in contact with the flange member 143 and the lower end thereof is in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward via the flange member 143. ..

The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state where the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protrudes downward. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of the piece 141a. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a horizontally bent portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142, and when the operator holds the portion and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144, the door frame The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, or is pulled out downward. Can be done. As a result, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the upper left end of the front view of the door frame 3 can be inserted. , The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is the door frame of the door frame side lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a attached to the door frame base 110 and extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. It is provided with a cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extension piece 151a.

The hinge shaft bracket 151 under the door frame has a flat plate-shaped mounting piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L shape. A mounting piece (not shown) is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 by screws in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151.

The lower end of the door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the lower end thereof narrows toward the bottom. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

In the door frame side lower hinge member 150, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the front view of the through hole 111. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side of the front view to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The lower decoration on the left side of the door frame extends vertically from the height of the lower side of the decorative board 161 on the left side of the frame and the decorative board 161 on the left side of the door frame to approximately the same height as the lower end of the passage port 117 for the upper plate. The board 162 and the like are provided.

The decorative substrate 161 on the left side of the door frame and the decorative substrate 162 on the lower left side of the door frame of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are each provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a capable of irradiating light forward on the front surface. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

The door frame left side decorative board 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and has a plurality of (mounted) LEDs 161a and 162a provided on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be illuminated and decorated.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 31 (b) and the like. The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for mounting the glass unit 190 detachably. The glass unit mounting member 170 has a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 172 and a protrusion 172.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted at a portion outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 on the lower side of the pair of speaker insertion ports 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110.

The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the protruding portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is outward from the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. In the positioned state, the glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the protruding portion 172 becomes glass. The glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110 in a state where it comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted.

Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 protrudes from the disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located in the protrusion 172. .. From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the protruding portion 172 is in a rotational position protruding downward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 restricts the movement of the glass unit 190 to the rear, so that the glass unit is mounted. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the entire protrusion 172 does not rotate upward from the base 171 and the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally lifted. not.

When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171 so that the protruding portion 172 is mounted on the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved to the rear, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle mounting member 180 is for mounting the handle unit 300 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 has a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of flanges that project into the cylinder portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181. In this example, it is provided with three) ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 181 by connecting the outer peripheral surface of the cylinder portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182. ..

The handle mounting member 180 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 112 by screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three ridges 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylinder portion 181 and the other two are provided on the lower side in the cylinder portion 181. These three ridges 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle mounting member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three ridges 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

Since the axis of the cylinder portion 181 extends vertically to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle mounting member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 to form the cylinder portion. The axis of 181 is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 118, and the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. It comprises two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

The glass frame 191 includes a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners of the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 191b and. The mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

In the glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by being brought into contact with the rear surface.

When the glass unit 190 is removed from the door frame base 110, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 110.

The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 201 and the rear projecting piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear projecting piece 202 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 201 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the gaming board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball (the game ball launched by the ball launcher 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 202 of the security cover 200, and is inside the game area 5a. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball into.

The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. As a result, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

When the security cover 200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, which will be described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder mounting portion 113 located between the through hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in front view, and cooperates with the locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is used for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 has a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending back and forth, and a locking unit that is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates a key inserted in the keyhole 211a. It includes a rotation transmission member 212 that transmits to the key cylinder 710 of 700, and a cylinder mounting plate metal 213 that mounts the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130).

The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting the corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key can be either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

The rotation transmission member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notched portions 212a that are notched. The rotation transmission member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thereby, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the keyhole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a rectangular shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is penetrated from the rear at a position substantially center in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting plate metal 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side of the front view is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing plate metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side of the front view is the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 of the reinforcing unit 130 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

When the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. It is inserted through 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 are housed in the box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 which is open to the rear. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of the staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the staging operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. 34 (a) is a front view of the staging operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34 (b) is a right side view of the staging operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 is an explanatory view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of part A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front portion of the plate unit 320 in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and can be pressed by the player and can present the effect image to the player. Is.

The staging operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central side excluding the outer peripheral edge, so that the player can press and operate the operation button 410, and the staging operation unit of the plate unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 mounted on the mounting portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. The base unit 430, which is attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and has the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 attached to the front side, and the base unit 430, which is visible from the player side through the operation button 410, are attached to the base unit 430. It is equipped with a door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and viewed from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having an outer shape slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the central side excluding the outer peripheral edge is transparently formed. The operation button 410 is formed on a transparent button lens 411 having a circular outer circumference and a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the central side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. It includes an annular button frame 412 that is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult for light to pass through.

The button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed on the surface side in a smooth curved surface shape without unevenness. The button lens 411 extends from the back surface to the center side (inside) with a predetermined length in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decorative portion 411a and the first button decorative portion 411a extend along the axis toward the center in a state of being recessed from the back surface in a cross-sectional arc shape at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b, which are provided.

As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 to the center side when assembled to the operation button 410, and a group on both the left and right sides is a group on both the upper and lower sides. It extends longer toward the center than the center.

The plurality of second button decorative portions 411b of the button lens 411 extend in an arc shape on the same circumference, and are formed three on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and project forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to unevenness having a W-shaped cross section or an arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality (six) frame openings 412a that penetrate in the front-rear direction and extend in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

The button base 413 has a substantially cylindrical main body portion 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body portion 413a, and a main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. Along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the guide boss portions 413c and the flange portions 413b, which are arranged in a columnar shape rearward along the outer periphery of the flange and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The detection pieces 413d, which project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in a plurality (three) in the circumferential direction, penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction on the outside of the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer circumference. A base opening 413e extending in the circumferential direction and forming a plurality (six) in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical extension from the front end of the main body portion 413a to the front so that the front end side is inside along the inner surface of the button lens 411. It is provided with an inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed to (center side).

The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. When the operation button 410 is pressed, these three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430.

The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, respectively, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed from the outer peripheral side to the inner side. The inner diameter of the front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward substantially coincides with the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed. The door frame side effect display device 460 is arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be visually recognized from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413c slidably inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button spring 438 inserted into the holding hole 431b of the unit base 431. Being urged forward. The operation button 410 is restricted from moving further forward by the front side of the outer peripheral edge abutting on the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438. By pressing against it, it moves backward until the rear end abuts on the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

Further, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 toward the center side in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. The portion 411a makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, the operation button 410 closes the front end opening of the cylindrical button base 413 with the button lens 411 and the button frame 412, and the operation button is provided with the button frame 412 attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A transparent portion whose rear is visible with respect to the outer diameter of 410 is formed so as to be narrowed from the outer circumference to the inside. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button of the base unit 430.

Further, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the staging operation unit 400, the rear end of the tubular button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative board unit 420 and is closer to the front surface of the decorative board unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively, is a button. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside to the inside of the base 413, and the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner side of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the light radiated forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decorative board unit 420, the operation button left inner decorative board 433 of the base unit 430, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decorative substrate 436 from being decorated with light emission other than the portion targeted for light emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a.

The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 and has a circular central opening 416a, and the frame main body 416 on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a from the front side. There is.

The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a having a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrating back and forth, and the center opening 416a penetrating back and forth on both the left and right sides of the center opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a and notched portions 416c having a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Is equipped. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the diameter on the outer peripheral side of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening 412a.

The six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on both the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, three each, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The cutout portion 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

Further, the frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner tubular portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner tubular portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is notched. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. It is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 38).

Further, the frame main body 416 extends outward on each of the upper left and right sides of the outer circumference, and includes a pair of mounting portions 416e to be mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (effect operation unit 400), the pair of attachment portions 416e and the left and right portions of the notch portions 416c are attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320.

The frame body 416 is made of metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on each of the left and right sides of the frame body 416 from the rear side. The front surface of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without unevenness, and a plurality of irregularities along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear surface side (see FIGS. 39 and 46). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

The frame top lens 418 is formed in a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front side of the frame top lens 418 is smoothly formed. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a are arranged in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side (FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). Light is refracted by these plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

In the frame unit 415, with the effect operation unit 400 assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 are the second LEDs 422b and 423b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 of the decorative board unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b, 423b, etc. mounted on them enable light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can illuminate and decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 with an open upper side, an operation button left outer decorative board 422 and an operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the board base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

The inner peripheral side of the board base 421 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed to be smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

The left outer decorative substrate 422 of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 on the front side and an inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the first LEDs 422a. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the line. The decorative substrate 423 on the right side of the operation button extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The right outer decorative board 423 of the operation button is on the front side of the plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. It comprises a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the line. The front and rear sides of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white.

The vibration motor 424 is attached with a weight 424a eccentric to the rotating shaft, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the staging operation unit 400, the cylindrical main body portion 413a rear end side of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 400, a frame is placed between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

Therefore, the decorative board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, respectively. At the same time, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be light-emitting and decorated by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively.

Further, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 to vibrate the entire staging operation unit 400.

[3-4f. Action effect of the staging operation unit]
The operation and effect of the staging operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory view showing a state in which the operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. 37. FIG. 45A shows a view of the staging operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, in which a part of the operation button is cut out and is intended to be hidden by a first button decoration portion of the operation button, a button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the part to hide by the 1st button decoration part of the operation button, the button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the staging operation unit. FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as a perspective view seen from the front, and FIG. 46 (b) is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the staging operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and is operated by the player. It is possible to entertain the player by having the player participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410.

The total height of the staging operation unit 400 is formed to be substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through port 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Further, the overall width of the staging operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The staging operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction on the lower side of the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

In the staging operation unit 400, the upper portion of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the staging operation unit 400 is attached to the plate unit 320, a gap is provided between the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. Is formed. That is, the staging operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper part of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed like this. As a result, in the staging operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is tilted so that it moves upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the player's head is arranged above the plate unit 320 (directing operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head. Therefore, when the player looks down from the game area 5a to the staging operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projective view from the direction parallel to the central axis CL). The operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

In the staging operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal state (when the operation button 410 is not pressed), the staging operation unit 400 has the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 of the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring 438. It is in contact with a portion of the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

In the normal state, the staging operation unit 400 projects forward from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis CL side) from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the shape of a curved surface (a part of a substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion protruding forward from the inner circumference (inside) of the button frame 412 is , Projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (front end) is the frame unit with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of the 415.

In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the staging operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he presses the button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

Since the outer diameter of the operation button 410 is formed to be much larger than that of the operation button for staging provided in the conventional pachinko machine, the vicinity of the peripheral edge away from the central portion of the button lens 411 is pressed. It is likely to be done. More specifically, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment is attached. Since the central axis CL is attached at an angle with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. 44, The portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis CL is pressed.

By the way, in the operation buttons for directing in the conventional pachinko machine, since the surface to be pressed by the player is formed on a flat surface, when the operation buttons are enlarged while the part to be pressed is a flat surface. , If you press a part that is off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed will tilt so that the pressed part will retract first, and the operation button will not be able to retract straight, so you can press the operation button. There is a risk that the pressing operation will not be possible.

On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) to be pressed by a player is bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight backward. Can be done. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. You can fully enjoy the staging to operate.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the staging operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since it is attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the weight 424a is rotated by the vibration motor 424 to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the part farthest from the mounted part. The entire staging operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is in contact with the staging operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged directly under the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) where the player is relatively easy to press, the operation button 410 is pressed against the player. It is possible to transmit strong vibrations, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the frame is formed until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed downward or hit. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like bending downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the staging operation unit 400 is restricted, and the staging operation unit mounting of the frame unit 415 mounting portion 416e and the dish unit cover 326 is restricted. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a or the like, and it is possible to prevent the staging operation unit 400 or the like from being damaged. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since the 400 etc. are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, suppress the deterioration of the player's interest, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. It can be suppressed.

As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that the player presses and operates is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, it is made into a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are higher than in the case, and even if the lens is hit hard, the impact can be dispersed over the entire button lens 411, and the lens is less likely to be damaged.

Further, as shown in FIG. 46, in the staging operation unit 400, the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decorative member 432 are made of transparent members. The front side (player side) is decorated with irregularities such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface side. ) Can be visually recognized. In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to see the rear side through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

Since the staging operation unit 400 includes a first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a is provided. This makes it difficult to see the rear part of the outer peripheral edge of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decorative portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button. Although a gap is located between the outer peripheral surface of the 432a, the gap on the outer periphery of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is opened from the front side (player side) by the first button decorative portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. As a result, even if the operation button internal decoration member 432 having a fixed position is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating, and the operation button 410 is seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button can be arranged without any problem in the transparent operation button 410, so that the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 is formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, thereby forming the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button are obscured and hidden. This makes it possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410 and, by extension, the staging operation unit 400 as a whole.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The second button inner decorative portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decorative member 432 arranged behind the inside of the operation button 410 extends into a variable octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 46, the uneven line of the first button decorative portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button inner decorative portion 432g intersect with each other and are geometrically arranged. The decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis CL extends), the first button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a are separated from each other. With the decoration part 432g inside the second button, it is possible to show the player a geometric pattern with a three-dimensional feeling with depth, and it is possible to enjoy the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410.

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration portion 411a is formed. Since the overlap between the line and the uneven line of the decorative portion 432 g in the second button changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

As described above, the effect operation unit 400 gives the player a moving and three-dimensional decoration by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), and behind the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decorative board 435 and the lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and by making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front of them emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the extending direction of the central axis CL, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, the light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. , Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing from the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410, and the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 of the decorative substrate unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are arranged, and by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light, the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are emitted and decorated. Can be done. As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are a cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. It is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416 of the 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d, and the operation is performed. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily.

Further, the staging operation unit 400 has a second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and an operation button right outer decoration board behind the frame side lens 417 facing from the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. It is located so that the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylinder portion 416d or the outside of the frame body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. ..

Further, in the staging operation unit 400, the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of them mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decorative substrate 437. The frame top lens 418 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light from the LED. From the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached, a flat plate-shaped light-shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower end rear of the frame top lens 418, and the frame. The light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47 (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 is a door frame base unit so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162 (door frame left side decorative board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left portion on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the front left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110.

The door frame left side unit 530 is a strip-shaped left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the left side of the front view of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the left unit base 531. It has a transparent strip-shaped left unit diffuser lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent one that is arranged in front of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and has a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end. On the left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and on the left unit that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decorative base 534, the left unit lower decorative base 535, which is attached to the lower front part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, and is shorter than the left unit upper decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 so as to cover the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535, and the left unit. It comprises a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the decorative cover 536.

The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side open, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating the front and rear in the front surface. As shown in the figure, the plurality of openings 531a have a circular hole and a square hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 (door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162) have a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located substantially in the center in the vertical direction when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective vertical wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the left-side reflective vertical wall portion 538, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. The reflective surface may be provided by providing the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538 itself from a reflective material such as metal or resin, or by attaching a reflective seal to the inner surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusing lens member 532A and a lower diffusing lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 has a front-view circular circular lens portion 532a corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a front-view quadrangular square shape corresponding to the square opening 531a. It is provided with a lens unit 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. It is formed.

The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. The circular lens portion 532a can irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a arranged at the rear to the front in the form of dots. The circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be luminescently decorated by the light radiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a.

The square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c that is concave rearward in a conical shape in the center of the front surface, and a front diffuser lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffuse reflection portion 532c on the front surface. The input lens portion 532e that bulges rearward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) and the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface as a whole toward the front as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases. It is provided with a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending line divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

The front reflection portion 532f of the square lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. These plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest portion is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, in which the mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape with a pointed rearward portion, and is formed in a saw shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The line extending radially extending in the circumferential direction coincides with the dividing line extending radially in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

In the state where the square lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the corresponding LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

In the square lens unit 532b, the light radiated forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the square lens unit 532b. Since the input lens unit 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel to the front, and the input light is used. Almost everything can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflector 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffusion reflection portion 532c is in the direction perpendicular to the axis extending in the front-rear direction (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffusion reflection portion 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in the above direction), and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the square lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c travels from the central side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection unit 532c) over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction.

When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in the square lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflecting portion 532f, it is forward by the surface of the front reflecting portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the rear surface of the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the square lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). As a result, the light reflected outward by the central diffuse reflection unit 532c over the entire thickness of the square lens unit 532b in the front-rear direction is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection unit 532f from the center side to the outside. Can be reflected.

Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is emitted forward from the square lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the lens.

In the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflection portion 532f, the square lens portion 532b divides a plurality of concentric grooves into a plurality of radially extending lines, and then divides the plurality of concentric grooves with the dividing line as a boundary. Since the concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light radiated from the front surface to the front of the square lens portion 532b has a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the front with more uniform light and shade. As a result, the multi-faceted decorative portion in front of the square lens portion 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be substantially uniformly luminescently decorated.

The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is located in front of the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. It is equipped with a multi-faceted decorative part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape having a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the polyhedral decoration part, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped parts are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron consisting of a plurality of triangles is arranged in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in a shape like that. The circular decorative portion and the multi-faceted decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-faceted decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

The left unit decorative lens member can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multifaceted decorative portion is forward from the square lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 by the light that the circular decorative portion is irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffuser lens member 532. Each lens is decorated with light emitted by the light.

The decorative base 534 on the left unit is a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically, and is formed in a square cylinder shape extending back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface of the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side to the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The decorative base 534 on the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed in a U-shape with the front view open upward. The lower decorative base 535 of the left unit is inclined from substantially the center in the vertical direction at the front end to the rear end so as to move backward as it goes upward. The decorative base 535 under the left unit is formed of a translucent member.

The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that the middle portion in the vertical direction is recessed rearward, and the lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the upper decorative base 534 of the left unit, and the left. It connects the dogleg-shaped part whose upper part is bent backward along the front end of the unit lower decorative base 535, the lower end of the upper dogleg-shaped part, and the upper end of the lower dogleg-shaped part. It is composed of a linear part and.

The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 537 extends vertically shortly, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of a translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51 (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the front, and (c) is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is a perspective view seen from. FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the upper side of the dish unit 320 and to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame right side unit 550 has a box-shaped right unit base 551 that extends vertically and is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front view of the through hole 111, and the front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 and the door frame right side decorative board 552 are mounted on the left side from the center of the front view on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the front side and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffuser lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left cover 555 attached to the right unit left diffuser lens member 555 so as to cover the left side of the 554 is provided.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is located on the front side of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 and on the right side of the front view of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right diffuser lens member 556 that is attached to the member 553 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 and is decorated. It is provided with a sheet-shaped right unit right decorative member 557 and a transparent flat plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. There is.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is arranged between the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and is shallow extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and the right are open. A box-shaped, opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a right-hand unit right-diffusing lens member 556 left-sided, the right-hand unit left light-shielding member 559 is attached so as to close the open right side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped right unit and a right light-shielding member 560.

Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedron-like decoration at the front end portion. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and the front end side of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decorative base 562 that penetrates back and forth, a transparent right unit cover 563 that is attached to the front side of the right unit decorative base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562, and a right unit cover. It includes a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of the 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to penetrate the right unit base 551 vertically, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle whose front view is elongated vertically, is short in the front-rear direction and extends in a rectangular tube shape, and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of a translucent member.

Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflective vertical wall portion 568 (see FIGS. 6 and 24) erected toward the front side from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through opening 111. ing. In the right-side reflective vertical wall portion 568, an inner surface having a flat surface shape and being provided so as to face the through-hole 111 is provided as a reflective surface capable of reflecting light. As for the reflective surface, the inner surface of the right reflective vertical wall portion 568 is provided from a reflective material such as metal or resin as well as the inner surface of the left reflective vertical wall portion 538, and the reflective surface is reflected to the inner surface thereof. It can also be provided by attaching a seal. As will be described later, the right reflective standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and is a portion that bears a part (right side portion) of the above-mentioned reflective standing wall portion 33.

The decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on a plurality of left LEDs 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and a center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is provided with a plurality of medium LEDs 552c and the like. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decorative member 554 to emit light and decorate via the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for causing the right unit right decorative member 557 to emit light and decorate via the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for illuminating and decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561.

The front and rear sides of the decorative substrate 552 on the right side of the door frame are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although not shown, the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100, and the decorative substrate 552A on the upper right side of the door frame is the decorative substrate 552B on the lower right side of the door frame. It is connected to the.

The right unit left diffuser lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the vertical and front-back directions, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in the front view. The rear wall portion 553b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side in the front view to the left, and a plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in the front view. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate 554, an input lens unit 553e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 553a and is provided in a plurality of vertical directions, and each of the main body 553a on the right side of the front view. A plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is centered in the vertical direction are provided.

The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved to the right in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 553a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its right end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

A plurality of notched portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 553d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 is formed substantially in the center of each of the vertical divisions when the left diffuser lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 553e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 553e are respectively located immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 553a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 553f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 553e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, the light radiated forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light so as to spread the light from the left LED 552a, and in the main body portion 553a, each input lens portion 553e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the right in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a hits the flat left surface in the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not radiated from the left surface of the main body 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body 553a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected to the left in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 553f, and is reflected outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 553f) of the main body portion 553a, the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the main body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light-shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side reflecting portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light irradiated to the right from the side reflecting portion 553f to the left on the left surface of the right unit left shading member 559. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 553a is emitted to the left, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arc-shaped groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 housed in the storage recess 553d on the left side of the main body portion 553a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the front left side (the side where the accommodating recess 553d is formed) of the main body portion 553a. A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 553f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decorative member 554 can be visually recognized. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 553f.

The right unit left decorative member 554 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffuser lens member 553, and has a similar configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. The portion 556b, the notch portions 556c which are notched in a square shape from the left end side of the rear wall portion 556b to the right and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the right side of the main body portion 556a on the right side of the front view. Front view of the main body 556a, the accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decorative member 557, the input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body 556a and is provided in the vertical direction. On the left side, a plurality of side reflection portions 556f are provided so that each input lens portion 556e is arranged in the vertical direction so as to be the center in the vertical direction.

Right unit The main body of the right diffusion lens member 556a has a side view shape in which the upper corner of the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is cut out diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved to the left in the front view from the rear end side to the front with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. It is slightly tilted. The front end of the main body portion 556a protrudes forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3.

The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to substantially the center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 abuts on the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

A plurality of notches 556c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the notch portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 have a square opening penetrating back and forth. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

The bottom surface of the accommodating recess 556d is formed on a flat surface, and the shape of the outer periphery substantially matches the outer shape of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 is formed substantially in the center of each of the right diffuser lens members when the right diffuser lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the input lens portion 556e is recessed forward so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It has a site and. These input lens portions 556e are respectively located immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. As a result, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be widely diffused in the main body portion 556a.

A plurality (six) of the side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection portion 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of these concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side close to the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface on the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicular to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflection portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed into a sharp triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces toward the center when cut in the radial direction with the input lens portion 556e as the center. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with the radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

In the right unit right diffuser lens member 556, the light radiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 flows from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. Being incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread, and in the main body portion 556a, each input lens portion 556e It will diffuse radially toward the front centering on.

Since the main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 so that the whole body moves to the left in the front view toward the front, the door frame The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and incident from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a hits the flat right surface in the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not radiated from the left surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body portion 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in the front view by hitting the saw-shaped side reflecting portion 556f, and is reflected outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (to the left in front view) from the right surface (side reflection portion 556f) of the main body portion 556a, but the right unit right shading member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body portion 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is emitted to the right side through the main body portion 556a. .. Therefore, from the right side of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side reflecting portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light emitted to the left from the side reflecting portion 556f are emitted to the left on the right side of the right light shielding member 560 of the right unit. Since the light that reflects toward the body and passes through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitting and decorated with good brightness. can.

Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, a plurality of concentric grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form a concentric arcuate groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (right side) is prevented from becoming light having concentric striped shades. It is possible to irradiate more uniform light to the right. As a result, the right unit right decorative member 557 housed in the storage recess 556d on the right side of the main body portion 556a can be lightly decorated substantially uniformly.

Since the right diffusion lens member 556 of the right unit is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body portion 556a when viewed from the front (the side where the accommodating recess 556d is formed). A pattern consisting of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves and radially extending lines of the portion 556f can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right decorative member 557 of the right unit, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right diffuser lens member 556 of the right unit can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right decorative member 557 of the right unit is transparent. Can be decorated by the side reflective portion 556f.

The right unit right decorative member 557 is formed in the shape of a thin sheet, and the decorations such as the maker logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo according to the production concept presented to the player on the game board 5 are translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decorations applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed so that the side view shape is substantially the same as the side view shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical and front-rear directions, a rear wall portion 559b protruding shortly from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in the front view, and rear. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a square shape from the right end side to the left in the front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals. It is provided with a plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

The main body 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a side view shape in which the upper corner on the front end side of a quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move, and has substantially the same outer shape as the main bodies 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556.

The rear wall portion 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and its left end extends to the right of the substantially center in the left-right direction of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit abuts on the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

A plurality of notches 559c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552. These plurality of notched portions 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notched portions 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 is satisfactorily emitted by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided with three sets of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance, with a pair of reinforcing portions 559d separated in the vertical direction at substantially the same height as the left and right widths. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563, respectively. These plurality of reinforcing portions 559d enhance the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

The shape of the right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit is such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is notched diagonally in a C-chamfer shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right light-shielding member 560 of the right unit closes the right opening opened to the right of the left light-shielding member 559 of the right unit formed in a shallow box shape in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

The right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body portion 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are the right units. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main bodies 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. The light radiated forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 and the right unit right shading member 560 is used to decorate the right unit. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are formed of a translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552, respectively. The left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right LED 552b corresponding to the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 are prevented from interfering with each other. It can be light-emitting and decorated only by the medium LED 552c.

Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged behind each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the right side decorative substrate 552 of the door frame can prevent light from interfering between the spaces, and the portion of the right unit decorative lens member 561 located in front of each space can be designated. , Each can be independently luminescently decorated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to divide the door frame into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and independently illuminate each of them.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b extending vertically and forming a plurality of polyhedra. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly in the front-rear direction. In the polyhedral decorative portion 561b, a plurality of square pyramid-shaped portions are arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a polyhedron composed of a plurality of triangles is arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape of a cuboid.

More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and multifaceted decorative portions 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Among the parts located in the front, one multi-faceted decorative portion 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decorative portion 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction in the three parts from the top, and the multi-faceted decoration is arranged in the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is light-emitting decorated by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged at the rear.

The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed in a shape that follows the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides of the right unit left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 near the front end and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. In the state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed of a translucent member.

The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decorative base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front side.

The decorative member 564 extends vertically shortly and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of a translucent member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decorative lens member 561) into four in the vertical direction.

The door frame right side unit 550, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward from the door frame left side unit 530 in a large plate shape, and slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 is independent of the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both the left and right protruding sides, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be decorated with light emission.

Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-shaped and protrudes greatly forward, when this pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It can exert an action effect like a partition between them. As a result, the player playing with this pachinko machine 1 can be made to have the illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and other players around him / her can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. Can be done.

Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 greatly protrudes forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment It can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out in the game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-emitting decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player.

Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball jam or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides are used. By illuminating and decorating the member 561 and the like in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of a defect to the staff of the game hall, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. FIG. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 56C is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. 56. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 which is attached to the center in the left-right direction on the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to both the left and right sides of the central base 571. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 and a pair of upper speaker 573s attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively. From the position closer to the center in the left-right direction to the vicinity of the center than the pair of openings 574a and the pair of openings 574a, which are box-shaped with the rear of the cage open and penetrate back and forth at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573. It has a plurality of (three left and right) slits 574b that extend and penetrate each other in the front-rear direction and are separated vertically, and are attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572. It includes a unit main body 271 and a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal, which is arranged on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 so as to close the pair of openings 574a. ing.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction and has translucency, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576 and the top middle decoration member 576. The door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576, which are attached to the front of the unit body 271 and close the plurality of slits 574b respectively. A plurality of transparent flat plate-shaped light guide members (three on each side) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit body 271 straddling the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration, which are attached to both the left and right sides and cover the front surfaces of the plurality (three) light guide members 578, respectively. The top middle left decorative member 581 and the top middle left decorative member 581, which are attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front side of each of the lens members 580 and extend from the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 to the vicinity of the central end of the opening 574a, respectively. It is provided with a top middle right decorative member 582.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of each of the left and right side surfaces of the unit body 271, and LEDs are mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top right decorative board 584, and a plurality (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit body 271 penetrate through each other. A pair of board bases 585 that are attached to the respective parts, and a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a that are attached to the front surface of the pair of board bases 585 and are located behind the slit 574b of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587, and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 respectively. It is provided with a pair of light-shielding members 588.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589 mounted on the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The unit so as to close the attached relay board cover 590, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. It is provided with a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

The central base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surface of each side base 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached obliquely so that the front surface of each of the door frame top unit 570 is moved rearward on the side closer to the center in the left-right direction in the state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

The unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that the lower portions near the left and right ends of the quadrangle extending to the left and right bulge downward. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed so that the shape of the front view is such that a quadrangle extending to the left and right is cut out in a trapezoidal shape narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit body 271 has a quadrangle whose shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and a portion having about 1/2 of the total width (length in the left and right direction) centered on the center in the left and right directions on the front end side of the quadrangle as the base. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward shortly with the front end side of the trapezoid as the long side. Therefore, in the unit main body 271, both sides of the portion protruding forward in the center in the left-right direction on the front surface connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the portion protruding forward. It is located behind (recessed).

The unit main body 271 is formed with an opening 574a penetrating back and forth at a portion on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to a position outside the portion protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height to the left and right and penetrating in the front-rear direction in the diagonally extending portion of the portion protruding forward in a trapezoid on the front surface. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend left and right from the vicinity of the front end of the portion diagonally extending forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, three each vertically separated from each other.

Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c notched from the rear end to the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d notched from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Is equipped. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. Further, the lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

Further, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at substantially the same position in the front-rear direction as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The front surface of the top right decorative portion 574f is formed so as to be located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit body 271 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion of the front surface of the unit body 271 that projects forward in the center in the left-right direction. The top middle decorative member 576 has a modified pentagon whose front view shape is bent so that the central portion in the left-right direction of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and the modified pentagon extends outward in the left-right direction from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the modified pentagon. It is formed in a shape that looks like a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

The front of the door frame top middle decorative substrate 577 is tilted so as to move backward as it goes downward so as to be along the front of the variable pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Attached to the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration substrate 577, and by making these LEDs emit light, the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light and decorate.

The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape that follows the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining that the side of the unit body 271 close to both ends in the left-right direction is the end side and the side close to the center is the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight portion extending straight to the left and right from the end side to the center side. It is composed of a 578a and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed so that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a and the height in the vertical direction becomes smaller in the arc portion 578b toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and a diffusion input portion 578d composed of a plurality of irregularities formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b. It is equipped with.

In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both outer ends in the left-right direction face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 or the door frame top right decorative board 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from both outer ends in the left-right direction, the light is emitted from the straight portion 578a. As it advances toward the center side, it is sequentially reflected forward from the end side by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of them in front of the straight portion 578a is light-emitting decorated.

Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused in the arc portion 578b due to the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is radiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be light-emitting decorated.

As described above, the light guide member 578 is the LED 583a, 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to illuminate and decorate the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front in a good (uniform) state.

The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, the unevenness of the square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via three light guide members 578.

The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit body 271. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that independently accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and both the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, unevenness of a square pyramid protruding forward is arranged in rows on the left and right.

The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is light-emitting decorated by LEDs 584a and 587 of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via three light guide members 578.

The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 579. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of a translucent member.

The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle right decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top right. It protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative lens member 580. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of a translucent member.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing to the right. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 583a can emit light independently. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 allows a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the left opening 574a of the unit body 271 via the straight portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing to the left. In the door frame top right decorative board 584, the LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surface of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 (see FIG. 59). ). Each of the three LEDs 584a can emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the right opening 574a of the unit body 271 in the top right decorative lens member 580 by means of the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 via the direct portion 578a of the three light guide members 578. It can be luminescently decorated.

The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the portion where the plurality of slits 574b are formed in the unit main body 271. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The substrate base 585 is formed from a side wall having a side view substantially square having sides extending vertically and front and back, a rear wall of a front view square extending outward at right angles from the rear side of the side wall, and the front end of the upper side of the side wall. An abbreviation that connects the upper wall of a substantially right triangle that connects the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall with the line connecting halfway to the upper side of the side wall as a hypotenuse, and the abbreviation that connects the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. It is formed in the shape of a triangular columnar box with a lower wall of a right triangle and an open space between the upper and lower hypotenuses. The board base 585 is attached to the unit body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit body 271. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so that the open portion is closed.

The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side from the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which a plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 586a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is mounted on the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 mounted on the rear side on the right side from the center of the left and right in the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585 so that the front surface moves forward toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 with respect to the surface extending to the left and right. It will be in a tilted state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled on the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. It becomes a state almost parallel to.

A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state where a plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 emits light from a plurality of LEDs 587a to illuminate and decorate a portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 near the top middle decorative member 576 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

The pair of light-shielding members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light-shielding members 588 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other by a translucent member. The light-shielding member 588 is placed between the upper and lower parts of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 arranged in rows corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. It is a partition. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587 located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decoration. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be satisfactorily luminescent and decorated in an independent state.

The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative board 577, a door frame top left decorative board 583, a door frame top right decorative board 584, a door frame top middle left decorative board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decorative board 587 on the top of the frame and the relay board of the door body of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided on the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are hollowed out backward. Therefore, the player can be illusioned that only the decorative member 576 in the top protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed on the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the vicinity of both ends in the left-right direction in which the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in good condition, and high-quality stereo sound can be enjoyed.

Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decoration by means of a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member. The entire front surface of the 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated satisfactorily. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can illuminate and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Action effect of door frame]
The operation and effect of the door frame 3 will be described. In the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the through holes 111 penetrating the front and rear of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 are made larger in the vertical and horizontal directions than those of the conventional pachinko machine. The height of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is reduced in accordance with the expansion of the through hole 111, and the width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left-right direction. Is made smaller. As a result, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen from the player (front) as widely as possible through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). , Corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

The door frame 3 is an effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through opening 111. The front surface (front surface of the front and lower decorative portion 326c of the plate) of the lower half (the part below the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be recessed (dish unit). It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 are positioned rearward from the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the staging operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the staging operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the center of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player is made to stand out and emphasize the staging operation unit 400. It is possible to draw a strong attention to the staging operation unit 400.

The door frame 3 tilts the staging operation unit 400 arranged in front of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces diagonally upward and forward. Since it is installed in the state, when the player sits down in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 is in a state of facing the player's head (face), and the player looks down and turns the staging operation unit 400. When you look at it, you can see the operation button 410 in a state close to the front, and you can see the large and round operation button 410 strongly, and you can raise the expectation for the production using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be fully enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the total height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move a hand for a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and the "quick press" of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is attached in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and it can be pressed to the left or right. It can be operated satisfactorily from either side or from the front, and the operation button 410 having good operability makes it possible to further enjoy the production using the operation button 410.

Further, since the door frame 3 is attached with the staging operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320, and is provided with a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the staging operation unit 400, the game is played. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated according to the state to generate vibration, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, which surprises the player and operates the operation button. The production using the 410 can be further enjoyed.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (directing operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath is less noticeable, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to seeing a conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and it is an appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention. It can be a powerful pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d which is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and the number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the staging operation unit 400, when the player puts his / her left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his / her left finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is large. It is possible to recognize by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that of the lower plate.

Further, the door frame 3 is a lower portion for pulling out the lower plate ball supply port 323c at which the game ball from the upper plate 321 is discharged to the lower plate 322 and the game ball of the lower plate 322 to a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The dish ball extraction hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outer side of the lower dish opening 326d (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in the front view. That is, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are provided with the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (right outside of the lower plate opening 326d) in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged behind the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a arranged below the front (directly in front of) the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Then, the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 is immediately discharged from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as it enters the lower plate 322. At this time, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, the flow of the game ball discharged from the upper plate 321 or the like through the lower plate 322 to the dollar box also I can't see it. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 and the game ball paid out from the payout device 830 with the upper plate 321 full are directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance of passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (driving operation of the game ball, directing image, etc.) and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, the door frame 3 arranges the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and also stands the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is curved diagonally so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball. It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by reflecting on the right wall portion. As a result, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is in the area on the left side of the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a without invading (lower plate first region A1), the lower plate 322 can be discharged without showing the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 with the lower plate 322 facing forward between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker port 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so that the main body frame 4 The sound from the lower speaker 921 in the board unit 900 can be satisfactorily output forward, and the sound produced by the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand in or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration due to the deep bass from the lower speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e to the player. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward from the right side of the through hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is doord. Since the right side unit 550 of the frame can exert an action effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. You can make the player feel as if you are there, and you can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without worrying about other players around you.

Further, since the door frame 3 can be decorated with light emission on the front end and the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which is plate-shaped and greatly protrudes forward, a game hall in which the pachinko machines 1 are installed side by side. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified even from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island equipment, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward in the center in the left-right direction in the upper door frame top unit 570 of the through opening 111, and also has front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. The shape is recessed so as to be hollowed out to the rear (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the 576 are positioned rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasize it. The interior decorative member 576 can be strongly noticed.

By the way, in the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, a pair of upper speakers separated to the left and right are provided, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is a pair of upper parts of the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through hole 111, whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. A top with a speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from both left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left-right direction through the front of the speaker cover 575. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be luminescently decorated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be totally decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 becomes inconspicuous at the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration is clearly different from that of the conventional pachinko machine. At first glance, the player can be made aware of the presence of the machine, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 can entertain the player with high-quality stereo sound. can.

As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided on the lower side and the upper side of the through port 111. Since each of them protrudes greatly forward in the center of the left-right direction, it is possible to show the player a unified decoration at the top and bottom where the virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction stands out, and the decoration with a sophisticated feel. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

Further, since the door frame 3 projects the top middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically in the center in the left-right direction to the front, the top middle decoration member 576. And when the effect operation unit 400 is light-emittingly decorated, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting line extending vertically at the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the line of sight of the player is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 63 is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 65 shows the game board of FIG. 63. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after disassembling. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing a portion of the function display unit enlarged from the front with the gaming board attached to the pachinko machine.

The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000 having a substantially square shape in front view and the outer periphery of the game area 5a is partitioned, and the rear end of the game area 5a attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the 1100, the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and the front surface of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 attached to the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that a game ball driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. It includes an upper 2300, a gate portion 2003 attached substantially in the center of the game area 5a, and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a second starting port 2004.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 which is box-shaped and has a square opening 3010a on the rear wall and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board-side effect display device 1600.

Further, the back unit 3000 has a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[5-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially vertically from the lower ends, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1008 recessed from the front end to the rear. In this security recess 1008, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3 is formed. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 200 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 202 and the security recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 projecting rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the mounting bosses 1010 and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1011 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1011 coincides with the notch 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates these notches 1011 and 1127 and is a lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 of the unit 860 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, FIG. 64, FIG. 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of fitting holes 1113 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. , Is equipped. These fitting holes 1113 and elongated holes 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a and are positioned with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1115 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 to the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step portion 1121 that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside of the holding step portion 1121 having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a through port 1122 that penetrates into the.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 is the panel holder 1120. It is almost the same surface as the front surface. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed so that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1110 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. It extends and includes a plurality of protruding pins 1123 that can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the elongated holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an engaging claw 1124 and an engaging piece 1125 that engage with the engaging step portion 1115 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 in the panel plate 1110, and is forward from the front of the holding step 1121. It projects toward it and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

The engaging piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engaging piece 1125 is on the upper side along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 in a state where a gap of a size that allows the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 to be inserted is formed between the engaging piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. It extends by a predetermined amount toward the center side). By engaging the engaging step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging piece 1125, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1126 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1126.

Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This cutout portion 1127 coincides with the cutout portion 1011 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutout portion 1127 penetrates the cutout portions 1011 and 1127 of the lower full tank path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal taxiway 861 and the full taxiway 862 face forward.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the panel holder is connected to the front component 1000. The 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a square insertion hole 1129 that penetrates in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the notch 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted through the insertion hole 1129.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second Embodiment of the game panel]
Next, the game panel 1150 of the embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a form different from that of FIG. 63, viewed from the front together with a front component, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 as viewed from behind. The game panel 1150 is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). The game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100.

The outer shape of the game panel 1150 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the outer shape of the front component 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in the front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the out port 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the out port 1151.

Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the lower end in the front view and is opened downward to have a notch portion 1152 having the same shape as the notch portion 1011 of the front component 1000 and a notch portion 1152 above the notch portion 1152 in the vertical direction. It is provided with a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

Further, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails penetrating the front and rear so that the positioning protrusions 1009 can be fitted at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component 1000. It is provided with a fixing hole 1154. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting boss 1010 of the front component 1000 into these plurality of mounting holes 1155, the game panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the game panel can be mounted between the front component 1000 and the game panel 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and rear for mounting the table unit 2000, similarly to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. ing.

The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. As a result, the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game ball discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to ensure such transparency in order to obtain various effects related to fraud countermeasures, which will be described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the outer side of the game area 5a in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 has a status display 1401 composed of one LED for displaying the game status, and four LEDs for displaying the normal lottery result drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A lottery is made by accepting a normal symbol display 1402 consisting of a normal symbol display 1402, a normal hold display 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the first starting port 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. The number display 1404, the second special symbol display 1405 consisting of eight LEDs displaying the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the second starting port 2004. A second special hold number indicator 1406 consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of game balls, and a big prize opening 2005 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like. It mainly includes a round display 1407 composed of three LEDs that display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. 62. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. ..

[5-7. Game board side production display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface of the front view, and a right fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface of the front view. The game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the back box 3010 into the 3010c, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lock the lock. The mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting a game ball into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a large winning opening 2005 that enables acceptance of game balls according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening opening 1126.

Further, the table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the out port 1126 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a large winning opening 2005, and a start port unit. The side unit lower 2200 mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the 2100 and having a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200. The upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 which is attached to a substantially center in the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004 are provided.

The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1126, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 opens upward with a size that allows only one game ball to be received at a time, and the large winning opening 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( (For example, 4 to 6) It extends to the left and right with an acceptable size, and is formed so that it can be opened and closed according to the game state.

The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit lower 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 capable of always accepting a game ball.

The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction in the upper left of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 in the game area 5a. In the state where the side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf portion is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (game area 5a). Can be guided to the center in the left-right direction of.

The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit lower 2200, slightly above the center of the front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. It is installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect unit and the like provided on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 can be visually recognized from the front through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting port 2004.

The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It cannot be invaded.

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 that is open so that the game ball in the game area 5a can enter and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It includes an open warp outlet 2522 and a stage 2530 that rolls a game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then discharges it into the game area 5a. The start port unit 2100 is arranged directly under the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lower side of the opening 3010a on the rear surface of the back box 3010. It is provided with a box-shaped effect drive board box 3042 that is rotatably attached around an axis extending to the left and right along the axis and houses the effect drive board.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 mounted upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a lower back front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a having an open front and a square penetrating the rear wall, and a flat plate frame-shaped projecting rearward at a distance from the peripheral edge of the opening 3010a. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and the two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed from the inside to the outside in the frame on the left side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. A cutout portion 3010d is provided, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the vertical direction on the right side of the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted.

The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size capable of fitting the game board side effect display device 1600 into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is slidably attached up and down on the left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from the rear.

Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like for mounting the movable staging units and the like at appropriate positions.

As the back unit 3000, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, and the like are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[6. Game content]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is generated by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. , Passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, the player is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and the more the handle 302 is rotated, the stronger the striking can be. , You can hit the game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes the obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown). It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is released forward. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located directly above the first start port 2002, so that it is accepted by the first start port 2002 with high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the large winning opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted by the starting port 2002 or the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike), On the downstream side thereof, the area provided with the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 will flow down.

Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second start port 2004 is set for a predetermined time ( For example, it will be in the open state for 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are discharged from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. To.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also called normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

Further, if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started, so that the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game balls are received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", "big hit", " A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hits", "small hits", "probability fluctuation hits", "time reduction hits", etc.) is performed. Then, the lottery special lottery result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the special lottery results drawn by accepting game balls in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 include "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and "5R big hit". There are "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit", "time reduction (time reduction) hit", "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", and the like.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. After the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is received from the payout device 830 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The game ball is paid out to the upper plate 321. Therefore, when the large winning opening 2005 allows the game balls to be accepted, by accepting the game balls in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The closing opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the big winning opening 2005 is entered. When any of the conditions of accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is satisfied, an opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game balls unacceptable in a closed state is specified. Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 are between the start of the special lottery and the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. (Ii) When the game ball is accepted in the starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the start of the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. To. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the special lottery result is suggested as an effect image that is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol sequence in a state where three symbol rows consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the left-right direction. The existing symbol rows are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective symbol rows are stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three symbol rows are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the lottery special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates). It is different from the time until the confirmed image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. Operation button 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorations of center accessory 2500, various decorations of back unit 3000, back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, back top left movable production unit 3200, back left movable production It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using the unit 3300, the back upper middle movable effect unit 3400, the back lower front movable effect unit 3500, etc. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. In the window portion of the door frame 3, the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present invention is in the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation buttons 410 in the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention, respectively.

Further, the decorative member inside the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are used in the second decorative body of the present invention in the present embodiment. The second button inner decorative portion 432 g of the operation button inner decorative member 432, the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, and the peripheral decorative member 478 correspond to the second decorative portion of the present invention, respectively. ..

Further, each LED and subscreen decorative board mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436 in the present embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is used as a light emitting body of the present invention, and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the present invention is used as a back decoration means of the present invention. The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 corresponds to the base portion of the present invention, respectively.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the staging operation unit 400 (or the second staging operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the screen unit 470 in the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A). 472a, sub-screen decorative member 476, peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) overlapped, the first button decorative portion 411a and the door frame side staging display device 460 overlapped, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decorative decoration with no perspective, it is possible to attract the player's attention strongly and to differentiate it from other pachinko machines. It can be a high pachinko machine 1.

Further, a decorative member 432 (or a door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), a door frame side effect display device 460, and the like are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). At the same time, since the unit base 431 (unit base 451) supports the button lens 411 so that it can be moved by the operation of the player, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move the button lens 411. Then, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) come close to each other or separate from each other. The first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 411a due to the change in the distance between the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g (or the peripheral decoration part 472a, the subscreen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.). It is possible to change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap with the decorative portion 432 g inside the button (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.), and the first button decorative portion 411a The decoration (intersection mode) by the decoration portion 432g in the second button (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and the player can be changed. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward on the side opposite to the decorative member 432 (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) inside the operation button, it is referred to as the first decorative body. Since a space is formed between the second decorative body and the second decorative body, the distance to the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the decorative member 432 inside the operation button when viewed from the player. The distance to the inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) will be significantly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. When the position of the player's eyes moves even when the player is not in the position, the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the peripheral decorative portion 472a, the subscreen decorative member 476, the peripheral decorative member 478, etc.) Since the crossing mode (overlapping condition) with the lens changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

Further, since the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center is provided on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent button lens 411, the center side where the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411 is not provided. Through the operation button on the back side, the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be visually recognized well, and the first button decoration unit 411a is radially arranged. The decoration can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) or the door frame inside the operation button can be directed through the center of the transparent button lens 411. It is possible to strongly direct the player's attention to the side effect display device 460.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button is provided with a decorative portion 432 g inside the second button having a plurality of polygonal decorations concentrically centered on the center, the button lens 411 is viewed from the outside. The decoration of the first button decoration part 411a and the decoration of the second button inner decoration part 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g The perspective of the decoration can be surely exhibited, and the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button inner decoration part 432g can be made conspicuous to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. can.

Further, since the decoration of the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button inner decoration portion 432g is provided. By decoration, the player's line of sight and interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 that can be seen in the center of the decoration member 432 inside the operation button, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. can.

Further, each LED (or subscreen decorative board 477) mounted on the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the operation button lower inner decorative board 436. When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decorative member 432 (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) in the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the decoration portion 432g inside the second button (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the light emitting decoration can also entertain the player. At this time, the operation button left inner decorative board 433, the operation button right inner decorative board 434, the operation button upper inner decorative board 435, and the lower operation button lower by the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED477a) of the decorative board 436 can be diffused, in the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button, the decorative board 433 on the left side of the operation button, the decorative board 434 on the right side of the operation button, and the operation button are on. In contrast to the direct light emitted from each LED (or LED477a) of the inner decorative substrate 435 and the inner decorative substrate 436 under the operation button, the first button decorative portion 411a is decorated inside the second button. The indirect light diffused by the portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) is used for luminescent decoration, whereas the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (sub-screen decorative member 476) is strongly luminescent and decorated. Since the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly light-emitting decorated, each LED of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. (Or, when the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button inner decorative portion 432 g (or the sub-screen decorative member 476) are viewed from the outside with the LED 477a emitted from the outside, the perspective is further emphasized. The decoration can be shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that strongly attracts the player's attention can be obtained.

Further, since the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the second effect display device 460A on the door frame side) is arranged in the direction in which the button lens 411 moves, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door) are arranged. It is not necessary to secure a space for the button lens 411 to move in a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (or the door frame) inside the operation button do not need to be secured. The side second effect display device 460A) can be expanded outward to make it as large as possible, and by making it larger, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (or the door frame side second effect display device) 460A) can be made to stand out. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the outside of the button lens 411, by arranging the frame unit 415 on the outside portion of the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal, which can enhance the decorativeness, improve the appearance, and strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, when the player hits the button lens 411 to give an impact to a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. As compared with the case, the applied impact force is easily dispersed over the entire button lens 411, so that the button lens 411 can be made hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, the game is interrupted, and it is possible to prevent some players from feeling frustrated and deteriorating their interest, and at the same time, the button lens 411 is damaged. By making it difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the door frame 3 in which the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 is visible from the front through the through hole 111, under the through hole 111. The outer diameter is 10 cm on the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward on the side. The operation button 410 that can be moved (advanced and retreated) by the player's operation in a circular shape of about 15 cm within the range of ~ 30 cm, and the decoration inside the operation button that can be seen from the front through the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. Since the member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the frame-shaped frame unit 415 in which the operation button 410 is arranged in the frame are attached, it is conventional. Since the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) having the largest possible operation button 410 can be seen at the position where the storage plate of the game ball is conspicuous in the pachinko machine, the player can see it at a glance. It is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is provided with a translucent second button decoration so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration part 411b, which are provided with the part 411b. The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for illuminating the frame side lens 417. It is provided with an inner tubular portion 416d of the frame main body 416 that partitions the decorative portion 411b, and a main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that separates the second button decorative portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411. Therefore, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411 by the inner cylinder portion 416d, the main body portion 413a, and the inner extending portion 413f, or the second LED 422b. , 423b can be prevented from illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently emitted and decorated. can. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly luminescent and decorated, respectively, and a good-looking luminescent effect can be produced. In addition, various patterns of light emission can be produced by appropriately combining extinguishing, lighting, blinking, brightness, color, etc. with respect to the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decorative portion 411b. It is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, to entertain the player, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the first LEDs 422a and 423a for light-emitting decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b for light-emitting decoration of the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are decorated on the left outside of one operation button. Since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450) in preparation for the board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423, the second button decorative portion. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided on the 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept as far away as possible from the second button decoration portion 411b, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently diverted. The second button decorative portion 411b can be irradiated in a diffused state. Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly luminescent and decorated, the appearance of the luminescent decoration of the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 can be improved, and the player's interest is strongly attracted. At the same time, it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, since the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outer decorative board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves forward and backward. The wiring connected to the right outer decorative substrate 423 of the operation button does not bend or extend, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken. Therefore, the operation button 410 can be moved (operation), and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be moved. The luminescent decoration can be entertained by the player without any problem, and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are provided through the transparent button lens 411. When looking at (door frame side second effect display device 460A), the outer edge of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration unit 411b. Is in a decorated state, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparently. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be light-emitting decorated in various patterns, so that the player's interest can be focused on the operation button 410 and the operation button 410. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and can be used for light emission effect, operation of the operation button 410, and door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460). It is possible to entertain the staging image or the like by the staging display device 460A) and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the button lens 411 (operation button 410) provided with the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge can be operated by the player, the operation button 410 is used by the player during the execution of the player participation type production. By allowing the player to operate the operation button 410, the operation of the operation button 410 (player-participation-type staging) can be enjoyed, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed. Then, at the time of executing the player participation type effect, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by illuminating the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained by participating in the player participation type production.

Further, since it is provided with a translucent main body portion 413a and an inner extending portion 413f in which only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 can be light-emitting and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second button decoration portion 413f in the operation button 410 is provided. The portion on the center side of the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and is arranged behind by brightening the center side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411). It is possible to prevent the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from becoming difficult to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitting decorated in a good state, and the decoration member 432 inside the operation button behind and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect) can be decorated by emitting light through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emitting effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, since the inner cylinder portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 provided with the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. It can be completely separated from the portion 411b by the inner tubular portion 416d. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the inner cylinder portion 416d, the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner cylinder portion 416d is located closer to the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 than the diffusion range, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outside Even if a gap is formed between the front surface of the decorative substrate 423, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b423b illuminates the second button decorative portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be realized in which the light can be reliably blocked by the inner cylinder portion 416d and the above-mentioned effects can be reliably achieved.

Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the rear side of the operation button 410. And the center side of the button lens 411 can be completely partitioned by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, at the end (rear end) near the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 in the main body 413a, the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 Since the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive into the rear end of the main body 413a, the light from the operation button 410 is completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411. Can be done. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a can make the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and decorate in a good state, and the decoration member 432 in the rear operation button and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can sufficiently enjoy the decoration, the light emission effect, and the like, and can suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is in front of the outer portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) inside the operation button is opened from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) inside the operation button. The member outside the effect display device 460A) and the rear side (back side) can be obscured by the second button decorative portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. Further, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is light-emitting decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the decoration member 432 in the operation button (the second effect on the door frame side) is compared with the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outside and the rear side of the display device 460A) are relatively dark, it is possible to make it difficult to see the members on the outside and the rear side of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the appearance of the player can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 is formed in an arcuate shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b to emit light, a light emission effect such that the light circulates around the outer edge of the operation button 410 and a light emission such that the light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect, the light emission effect that the light converges from the outside to the inside of the operation button 410, etc., it is possible to make the player less bored with various light emission effects, and the player is entertained. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 used for the game is driven into the game area 5a by the stored game ball in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3. Along with mounting, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321 to attach a predetermined size to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The remaining space of 326j is formed, and the portion corresponding to the lower plate first region A1 in the lower plate main body 325 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the remaining space of the mounting space 326j is arranged from that portion. Since the portion of the lower plate main body 325 corresponding to the lower plate second region A2 is extended to attach the lower plate 322 capable of storing the game ball, the lower plate 322 looks small when viewed from the front. Therefore, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively inconspicuous. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at first glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player. can.

Further, at the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate 325b extends upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery, and extends upward to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball are provided, the game ball in the lower plate 322 is prevented from coming into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game ball supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game ball stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not come into contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the game ball does not damage the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the interruption of the game due to the damage of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

Further, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A that regulate the movement of the game ball to the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322 to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading (spilling) from the lower plate main body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost or uncomfortable when the game ball invades the remaining space of the mounting space 326j, and the player's interest in the game can be prevented. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A cover the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325 in the lower plate 322, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 bounces in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it can be surely prevented from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely exhibited. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the portion of the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate main body 325, the player can use the lower plate main body 325 on the lower plate first region A1 side (lower plate opening). When a hand is put into the portion of the lower plate second region A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can restrict the fingertips and the like from invading the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j, and thus the fingertips. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and allowing the player to play in a safe state. Can be done.

Further, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the impact and pressure due to the contact of the game ball with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is surely damaged. Can be prevented.

Further, in the portion of the lower plate second region A2 in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is opened because the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is provided in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. In this state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly entered into the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box). It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the vertical wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent the player from coming into contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent damage to the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), reduce interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. By climbing the bottom, the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball in contact with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A surely restrict the movement of the game ball to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced to prevent them from being damaged.

Further, since at least the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are used as separate members, when the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower plate covers 340 and 340A. It is possible to reduce the increase in the burden on the game hall side in which 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface bulges most forward below the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game is performed such that a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like. After being prepared for the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 that has been taken out, the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most forwardly bulging part, and the upper plate 321 is attached to the plate unit cover 326. A storage plate capable of storing a game ball composed of a lower plate 322 and a lower plate 322 is provided, and the storage plates (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) are placed outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. It has a lower plate first area A1 located and a lower plate second area A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out, and the storage dishes (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) can be made smaller and less noticeable. can. Therefore, since the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) that stands out in the part where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine can be seen, the gaming machine different from the conventional pachinko machine for the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power, which can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is open. Although it becomes smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second region A2 located in the space behind the mounting space 326j which is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in the front view. Since the extension unit 325B, the second extension unit 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 in a range that cannot be seen from the front (lower plate second area A2). can. Therefore, contrary to the appearance from the front, a sufficient amount of storage of the game ball can be secured, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the lower plate cover 340, 340A, the first expansion portion 325B, and the second expansion portion having the lower plate second region A2 are added to the lower plate main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower plate first region A1. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, the second extension part 325C, etc. having different sizes are prepared in advance. By installing the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, which are sized according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, etc. The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacing) the lower plate covers 340, 340A, the first expansion unit 325B, and the second expansion unit 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the size of the space in the rear part depends on the amount of protrusion to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second) having different amounts of protrusion to the rear. The lower plate 322 that can be used for the staging operation unit 400A) can be used, and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b rising from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape recessed downward and is a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A have the cover standing wall portion 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325, various shapes of lower plate covers 340 and 340A are prepared in advance. By combining (mounting) the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, which have shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the space behind the mounting space 326j, various forms can be supported. It is possible to exert the same action and effect as described above.

Further, in the lower plate 322 composed of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325. Therefore, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on which the game ball is placed is the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where a large amount of the game ball is loaded due to storage. Boundaries (joints, dividing lines PL) are never located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate main body 325, even if a large number of game balls are stored, the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are separated from the lower plate main body 325. It does not act, and it is possible to prevent the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower plate main body 325.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game ball is below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is performed so as to receive the game ball in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided with the lower plate 321 and the lower plate 322, and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged in the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to see (make it difficult to see) from the front (player), the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clear and the appearance can be improved, which is of interest to the player. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract. Further, since it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the game in the lower plate 322 is made difficult for the player. It is possible to prevent the ball from being distracted by making it difficult to notice the flow of the ball, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 that guide the game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball extraction hole 322a and the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding portion 322c and the cushioning portion 322d, it is assumed that the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open. , The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a. It is possible to make the illusion that the game ball is discharged to the lower side (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, it is probable that more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is difficult to see from the front by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). In addition, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of the 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 are transferred to the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball. Because it can be smoothly guided to the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a by the guiding means such as the portion between the extraction hole 322a, the ball guide portion 322c, and the buffer portion 322d, and can be discharged to the lower part (dollar box) of the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the game ball from circulating in the lower plate 322, and it is possible to make sure that the game ball circulating in the lower plate 322 is difficult to see from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game ball in the lower plate 322, prevent the player from being distracted, and suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

Further, if the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a is left open, the game ball supplied to the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately noticed by the ball guide portion 322c or the like without being noticed by the player. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a, it is illusion that the game ball is discharged downward (dollar box) of the lower plate 322 without passing through the lower plate 322. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to see more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 from the front, the lower plate can be seen from the front. Since the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice the visible size with respect to the size of 322, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball as in the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward below the front view of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game in which a game ball is received by a general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. A large-scale staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) having the same height as the total height of the staging unit cover 326 is attached to the center of the front surface of the dish unit 320 in the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction. In addition to being provided with a portion 326a, the plate front lower decorative portion 326c below the center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is recessed so as to be scooped backward. Due to the shape, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) attached to the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a can be made to appear as if it greatly protrudes forward, and the staging operation unit 400 (second staging) can be seen. The operation unit 400A) can be made to stand out. Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the upper plate and the lower plate can be seen side by side in a position where the large effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is emphasized, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at first glance, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. A part of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is wrapped around to the rear, and the storage amount of the game ball (volume of the lower plate 322) in the lower plate 322 can be sufficiently secured. It is not necessary to play while worrying that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, and the player can concentrate on the game, and the game can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand into the lower plate 322 from the front, his / her fingertips are on the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the 322 (the front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game ball is sufficiently secured even by tactile sensation, and in the state where the game ball is stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322. Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the player, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player, to entertain the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest. Further, since the fingertips of the hands placed in the lower plate 322 do not easily touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort to the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine, and it is possible to reassure the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game ball even if the front side is small. In other words, since the portion on the front end side of the lower plate 322 is made smaller, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) where the lower plate 322 is open. It is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be provided while sufficiently securing the storage amount of the game ball in the lower plate 322, and the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be used. It can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the side and the upper side of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is covered with the lower plate cover 340, the player can enter the lower plate 322. It is possible to prevent the fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the plate unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) and injuring the player when the hand is put in. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

Further, since the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is arranged in the center of the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be installed from the player side. It can be a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be made more conspicuous and can strongly attract the attention of the player, and the decoration by the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) is easy to see. Then, the decoration and the staging of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the player's interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball supply port 323c that can communicate with the upper plate 321 and a lower plate ball extraction hole 322a that can be opened and closed and penetrates up and down, it is a conventional pachinko machine. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in the above, a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. You can play the game with a feeling like that, and you can let the player concentrate on the game and enjoy the game. Further, since the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball extraction hole 322a are arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), respectively, the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball supply port 323c are arranged when viewed from the front. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is not visible from the player side, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clearer to improve the appearance, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the attention of the player. It can be machine 1.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward at the lower side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 facing the game area 5a in the door frame 3. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting an effect to a player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326. The outer diameter of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside is attached, and the outer diameter of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded. An operation button 410 having a transparent button lens 411 that is about 15 cm in length and whose center bulges away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward) is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. A tubular button base 413 having a one-button decoration portion 411a, a second button decoration portion 411b, and a button frame 412 and protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side. Therefore, the decorative member 432 (door frame side second) inside the operation button is provided through the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, or the like. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the screen unit 470) of the effect display device 460A, and it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410, the decorative member 432 provided inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. can be further improved, and the player's appearance can be further improved. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, from the gap between the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) in the operation button by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Since it is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit) can be increased by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410. Even if the gap between the lens and the 470) is relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration part 411a or the like, so that the appearance is prevented from being deteriorated, and a large operation button having an outer diameter of about 15 cm is prevented. The 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without any problem. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be enlarged, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out, and the player's interest is strong. It can be a pachinko machine 1 that attracts and has high appeal.

Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) protruding from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side in a cylindrical shape is provided, the button lens 411 and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed from an angle, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield the outside of the operation button inner decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) and make it invisible. The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical shape) that bulges in the direction away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward), it is near the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The surface is a plane formed by the opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are lined up, that is, the advancing / retreating direction of the operation button 410. Since it is in a state of being inclined with respect to (a plane orthogonal to), light is easily refracted when viewed from the player's side. Therefore, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) are combined with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 provided on the outer peripheral edge. ), The outer edge and the back side of the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button can be made difficult to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 becomes large, so that the decorative member 432 and the door frame inside the operation button arranged in the operation button 410 are arranged. The side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be made larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device can entertain the player with the operation button 410. The 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be easily provided, and the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player can be realized.

Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is given a design (decorative property). Therefore, the operation button 410 is made to stand out in the pachinko machine 1 and is of interest to the player. This pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played.

Further, since the button frame 412 is opaque in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button is formed at the portion of the button frame 412. It is possible to reliably hide the back side of the operation button 410 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be performed. It is possible to improve the appearance by reducing the deterioration of the appearance of the button 410 and the like.

Further, a button frame 412 that is opaque over the entire circumference from the outer peripheral end of the button lens 411 to the inside with a predetermined width is provided, and the player cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 and the decorative member 432 (screen unit 470) inside the operation button on the operation button 410 can be made difficult to see from the side, the main body 413a and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button (screen unit 470) can be made difficult to see. It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved well.

Further, since the outer circumference of the button lens 411 is cylindrical, the outer circumference has no directionality as compared with the case of having a polygonal shape, so that the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type production using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In addition, since the operation button 410 is enlarged, it is easy to operate the operation button 410 without checking the position of the operation button 410 when performing a player participation type effect for the player to operate the operation button 410. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the player's interest is operated by presenting the effect image according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). In addition to being able to entertain the staging, it is possible to encourage the player to operate the operation button 410 by using the staging image and the light emitting staging by the staging display device 460 on the door frame side (second staging display device 460A on the door frame side). By actively participating and entertaining the player in the player participation type production, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest. Can be done.

In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is clearly different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, and the appeal to the player is high. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 raise expectations for the effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the first button decorative portion 411a is formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The button lens 411 in which the first button decorative portion 411a is not formed may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, an opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button is not limited to this and the button is not attached. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed on the portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412 over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first) so as to surround the entire outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. (2) A button base 413 (main body 413a) that protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the base unit 450) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative member 432 inside the operation button and the second effect on the door frame side are shown. At least one may protrude toward the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) so as to surround only a part of the entire circumference of the display device 460A. The shape of the button base 413 may be a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have at least decoration (flat decoration by sticking a sticker, printing, etc., three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or translucent. Further, the button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. When the button base 413 is transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side is subjected to light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism, and the like.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed from the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A) to the rear, and is connected to each other behind the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). It may be 322, or it may be dented rearward only from the right outer part of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A), and a part of it wraps around to the rear of the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). You may be there.

Further, in the above embodiment, the shape (shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) of the portion (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) where the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward in the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 is curved rearward. Although an example of denting in a shape is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the front surface may be dented in a polygonal prismatic shape or a polyhedral shape.

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and "operation dial, touch panel, etc." "With an operating device", "With a rotating body with decoration on the surface", "With a decorative body with decoration and a movable device that moves the decorative body", "Game Characters, items, logos, and decorations that imitate scenes (dioramas) in three dimensions according to the concept of the machine "," Characters, items, logos, and predetermined patterns according to the concept of the gaming machine , Etc. are decorated by a seal, printing, etc. ”, etc., and a member such as a unit or a panel may be attached. Further, the member to be mounted in the mounting space 326j (staging operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be mounted. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

Further, in the above embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is shown with the staging operation unit mounting portion 326a opened forward for mounting the staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). The dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit mounting portion 326a) for mounting the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. In addition, it is desirable to decorate the front surface of such a dish unit cover with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by sealing, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game ball in the plan view of the lower plate 322 is covered by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). An example of covering the lower plate with difficulty in viewing from the front is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of less than half of the storage area of the game ball in the lower plate 322 may be made difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be difficult to see from the front.

Further, in the above embodiment, the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are shown in an arc shape partially provided with respect to the circumferential direction. The second button decorative portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may be an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

Further, in the above embodiment, as the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the staging operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the decorative portion 432 g inside the second button may be a decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

Further, in the above embodiment, the decorative member 432 inside the operation button, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect arranged on the rear side through the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410. Although the display device 460A or the like is shown so that the rear member can always be visually recognized, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged in the front-rear (or upper and lower) is specified as a predetermined condition. A configuration having a variable light transmitting means that makes the rear side visible by satisfying the above may be used. Here, as the variable light transmission means, "a magic mirror that makes the rear side visible due to the difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side" and "a liquid crystal film that is transparent by turning the power on / off". It becomes opaque or becomes opaque so that the rear side can be seen. " The front member and the rear member may be relatively movable or may not be relatively movable.

By providing the variable light transmitting means on at least one of the front member and the rear member, only the front member or the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized in a normal state. The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. Then, in a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged behind the rear member) that could not be seen in a normal state can be seen, so that the front member can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the member on the rear side of the rear member can show an overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, the rear side of the front member is darkened to decorate only the front member. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the space between the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member can be shown to the player.

Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member under normal conditions, so that the decoration of the front member and the rear member can be seen. The decoration by the surface of the can be shown to the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member, and the front member and the rear member can be visually recognized. Through the member, the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member are provided with variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, under normal conditions, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, and the front member and the rear member can be shown. When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of a light emitting portion such as an LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The decoration with the rear member can be shown to the player. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED (or, the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as an LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, and the member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a decorative body such as a display device or a character) is passed through the front member and the rear member. Can be shown to the player. As a result, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages by appropriately selecting the portion to be brightened by the light of the light emitting portion, and various decorations can be enjoyed by the player.

In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror when the rear side is darkened, so that it is on the surface of the front member or the rear member. The glittering decoration can be shown to the player.

Further, in the above specific example, the variable light transmitting means has been described as something like a magic mirror, but even if it is made like a liquid crystal film, the same effect can be obtained. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (it has translucency), so that it can be transmitted between the front member and the rear member or after. If the rear side of the member can be brightened (or decorated with light emission) by the light of a light emitting part such as an LED, it is possible to show the player a wider variety of light emission effects and decoration effects. ..

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. FIG. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a game ball rental device connection terminal board that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is a block diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal display control unit.

As its control configuration, the pachinko machine 1 includes, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that controls the game including the payout of prize balls in addition to the generation processing of the control power supply (for example, + 5V). A second control unit SCG that produces an effect related to a game advanced by the first control unit MCG is provided.

More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment adopts a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of boards, and the main control board 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. , A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in explaining the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on and a predetermined time elapses from the time of power-on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in microprocessor that stores various control programs such as the main control program that is executed and controls game operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various types. A main control input circuit 1310b for inputting a detection signal from a detection switch, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage is mainly provided.

In addition to the built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and the built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM") of the main control MPU 1310a. It also has a built-in watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT1310af") for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in non-volatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only one in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out an ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, "built-in main control") that updates a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state among various random numbers related to the game. It is described as "hard random number circuit 1310an"). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value of 32767 is preset). The circuit is configured so that a predetermined value is not fixed as an initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value and inputs a clock signal to the main control MPU 1310a ( Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset described later, so that various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function that has a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information provided, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that does not have a reset terminal and does not have a reset function. And, it is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which a system reset signal from a main control system reset, which will be described later, is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting the various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The first start port sensor 4002 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, the second start port sensor 4004 for detecting the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004, and the general, as shown in FIG. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting the game ball entered in the winning opening 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. Further, the gate sensor 4003 for detecting the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, the count sensor 4005 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 attached and detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

The main control MPU 1310a is a main control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function based on the detection signals from each of these switches. A control signal is output from 1310ca to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, the first special symbol display 1403 is transmitted from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400. , 2nd special symbol display 1405, 1st special hold number display 1404, 2nd special hold number display 1406, normal symbol display 1402, status display 1401, and round display 1407. do.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. By outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main with a reset function. A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 4020 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 4020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a sends various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function, thereby controlling the payout from the main control output circuit 1310 cab without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the board 951. When the payout control board 951 normally completes receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Receive various commands as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. It is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310 bb without the reset function. , No reset function Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cc to the peripheral control board 1510.

Here, the main peripheral serial transmission port that transmits various commands as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is configured around the main control CPU core 1310aa, and in addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of the main control various serial I / O ports, provides a bus 1310ah. Circuits are connected via (see FIG. 79). The main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data, and is mainly composed of a transmission shift register 1310aea, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, and the like (FIG. FIG. 79). When the main control CPU core 1310aa sets a command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec, the serial management unit 1310aec issues a command set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb from the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310ea and transmission is started to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. In the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register 1310aeb has 32 bytes as a storage capacity. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec after setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is provided with BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Payout control board]
Among the first control unit MCG, the payout control board 951 that controls the payout of the game ball is, as shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, and the operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM") based on a detection signal output by the operation. .) Outputs a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on. Detection from the payout control MPU952a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in microprocessor that stores various control programs including payout control programs that control operations, a ROM that stores various commands, and a RAM that temporarily stores data, and various detection switches related to payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. It includes a CR unit input / output circuit 952e for exchanging various signals with the CR unit 6 and the 952d. The payout control MPU952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), a built-in ROM thereof (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM"), and the like. It also has a built-in watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

Under the control of the payout control MPU952a, the payout control program serializes various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence commands and error cancellation navigation commands are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. As a signal, serial data is output to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). Further, this payout control program is to be paid out after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed and the payout control is started. When an error occurs in operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

Further, this payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When the detection signal (main body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program issues a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. At the same time, when the detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input by the detection signals from the various detection switches to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, so that the various signals based on the information are various. It is configured as a circuit that is output from the output terminal.

The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the input information, and a payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function having no reset function without a reset terminal. And, it is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by resetting the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which signals based on the above are not output from the various output terminals at all. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit in which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function has information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information for outputting various signals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the based signal is output from its various output terminals.

The ball out detection sensor 827 that detects the out of the game ball in the supply passage of the ball guidance unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and the payout detection sensor 842 that detects the game ball discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the description described later, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as a rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 use the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is full is full is first the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply. It is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the board 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

The payout control MPU952a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in a serial data manner, or receives an operation signal (detection) of the operation switch 954. The signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU952a normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU952a outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, whereby the payout control without a reset function is performed. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cc to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally completes receiving various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The drive signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the status of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on the 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, the drive signal is output to the error LED display 860b from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function.

The error LED display 860b is a segment display, and displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically). At the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. When the number "3" is displayed, it means that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842). (Specifically, the number of retries for the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit). When the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279. Notifies that the game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection in any of the payout control board 951 to CR unit 6). Is disconnected), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (with prize ball stock (unpaid))" (specifically, a game ball that has not been paid out yet). The number of balls has reached a predetermined number).

Further, the payout control MPU952a outputs the number of balls of the game ball actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, whereby the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is output. The number of game balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 is output via a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC) (not shown), and the playground (hall) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error content related to the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in).
The external terminal plate 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to perform a hole. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310 that advances the game from the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 that controls payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the input / output circuit 952e. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented game ball, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball lending / returning display unit 330. It is output to the equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365, and this signal is input to the ball lending / returning display unit 330. Further, in the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental display unit 330, the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. ing.

The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power cutoff process even when the power is cut off. As for various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, the operation signal is sent to the predetermined payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and is triggered by the payout control MPU952a from the payout control built-in RAM. It is designed to be completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is also output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function, and is also output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without a reset function.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal board for renting game balls, etc.]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be exact, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay. The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the boards of the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869, between the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the payout control board 951, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay. The boards of the terminal board 880 and the boards of the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by each wiring (harness). Further, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a terminal board 869 for renting a game ball or the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC + 12V (hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”)) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. , The game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 is supplied to the payout control board 951, while the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880 are supplied to the frequency display board 365. ..

The frequency display board 365 has a push button switch 328 mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball lending display unit 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the lending balance display unit 363 of the ball lending unit 360.

In the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329, the ground LG from the CR unit 6 is electrically connected via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal board 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball rental device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the rental device such as a game ball. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via the terminal board 869.

The ball return display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged side by side in a row, and is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting method in which one digit of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven. The digit segment display is controlled to light up. By such lighting control, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays the error of the CR unit 6. The ball return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a one-digit segment display among the three-digit segment display, and the designated one-digit segment display. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for specifying the contents to be displayed by turning on are the CR unit 6 to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input via the board 880, the 1-digit segment display is sequentially emitted according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these 3-digit segment display is displayed. The contents of the light emitted from the device can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363.

A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball return display unit 330. In this CR unit lamp 365d, a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869 and a main door relay terminal board 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending signal TDL to make the CR unit lamp 365d emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the loan balance display unit 363. Further, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball rental display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869.

In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869. Then, the CR unit 6 is a one-time payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of loaned balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, which corresponds to an amount of 100 yen) in one payout operation. The BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU952a) into which BRDY and BRQ are input is a signal for notifying that one payout operation has started or ended, and is used as a game ball or the like rental device connection terminal board 869. PRDY, which is a signal to output to the CR unit 6 or to convey that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is transmitted to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is output to the CR unit 6 via 869. For example, if the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6 so that 200 yen worth of game balls are paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is to be performed twice in a row, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out in succession, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, among the first control unit MCG, the power supply board 931 will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 supplied from the pachinko island facility and capable of electrically connecting or electrically disconnecting an alternating current 24 volt (AC24V), and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power sources. , The launch control unit 953 that controls the launch by the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply control unit 935 improves the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a in which the power switch 934 is operated to rectify the AC 24 volt (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility. The power factor improvement circuit 935b, the smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power with the power factor improved by the power factor improvement circuit 935b, and various alternating currents for supplying the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various boards. It is equipped with a power supply creating circuit 935d for creating a power source.

[7-3-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The launch control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch intensity) of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether or not the launch (launch) of a game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. Further, in the launch control circuit 953a, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 are electrically connected, a CR connection signal to that effect is input via the payout control board 951. ..

The launch control circuit 953a adjusts the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and controls the output to the launch solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feed member of the ball feed unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. The control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control on the first control unit MCG based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and is shown in FIG. The effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 shown in 19, the peripheral control unit 1511 that exchanges control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 while controlling the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and hour / minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds, and a knob that rotates the volume of music, sound effects, etc. that flow from the lower speaker 921 and upper speaker 573. It is equipped with a volume adjusting volume 4140a that can be adjusted by operating.

[7-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls the production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and V from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, various LED light emission modes, etc.) that are continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed each time a blank signal is input. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of big hit game states and special Peripheral control SRAM 1511d for storing effect flag management information, etc., and peripheral control external watch dock timer 1511e for monitoring whether peripheral control MPU1511a is operating normally (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e"). It is described as.) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time when a momentary power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs). ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter, referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM") provided on the power supply board 931. As a result, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. When the gaming board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d because the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM is provided on the power supply board 931. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold it and lose its contents.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period (until the timer is up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board to a lamp via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 and outputting drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. Door-side motor drive for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or for outputting a drive signal to an electrical drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3. Data can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board motor to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, or the door frame. Peripheral control output of light emission data on the door side for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of 3 from the serial I / O port for the frame decorative drive amplifier board LED. It is transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 via the circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. The detection signal of is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , It is input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system goes out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. It is diagnosing whether or not it is.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various serials I for peripheral control, centering on the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. It is composed of a / O port 1511ae, a WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports for peripheral control 1511ag, a peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as a peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads and writes various data to peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Peripheral control Various data are read / written to / from the various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data to the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT1511af, and peripheral control parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the / O port 1511ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and is DMA0. It has four channels called DMA3.

Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae built in the peripheral control MPU1511a, and a peripheral control built-in WDT1511af. , Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, to independently transfer data between devices without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, while reading and writing to the storage device of the RAM 1511ab with built-in peripheral control via the internal bus 1511ah, various serial I / O ports 1511ae for peripheral control, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and Reads and outputs to / from an input / output device such as a peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Between the O port 1511ae, the WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, the input / output devices such as the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, without going through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In order to perform data transfer independently, while reading and outputting to storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h, various peripheral controls are performed. For input / output devices such as serial I / O port 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, via peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511ai. And read and write.

The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, WDT1511af with built-in peripheral control, various parallel I / O ports 1511ag for peripheral control, and input / output devices such as peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak. It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae are a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board, a serial I / O port for a motor drive board, a serial I / O port for a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. It has a serial I / O port for, a serial I / O port for a frame decorative drive amplifier board motor, a serial I / O port for a main control board, and a serial I / O port for acquiring information on an effect operation unit.

The peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. It has become. That is, when the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer is up) to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is reset. Will be taken. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as game board side motor drive latch signal and door side motor drive light emission latch signal, as well as output clear signal to peripheral control external WDT1511e, and play games. Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serialization is performed. A movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a is output. This LED is a high-brightness white LED, and is a confirmation lamp for notifying that the occurrence of a big hit game state is confirmed. In the present embodiment, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are directly connected electrically. It is possible to take noise countermeasures for LED lighting control, which is important for games. The LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as a substrate volume 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion.

In the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, notification sounds for notifying hall clerk and the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and fraudulent acts against the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game production are notified. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will be favorable to the player). The notification sound also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob part, from mute to the maximum volume. The volume of the sound can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume.
As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the sound, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 will be produced as more powerful, or the game will be in a game state that is advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and music. There are schedule data for sound generation that generates sound effects and the like, and schedule data for electric drive sources that generate drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data arranged in chronological order, and the order in which music and sound effects are played is defined. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is specified. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging the drive data of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid in a time series, and defines the operation of the electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid.

Some of the control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and some are copied to the various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some of them are read out and executed. Further, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when the power is turned on in the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copy is read out.

Further, the peripheral control ROM 1511b is used as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165 to correct the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects the decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, etc. are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165, which will be described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As described later, the luminance setting information includes the luminance adjustment information for adjusting the luminance range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, if six months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness is increased. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the power is turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. If December has already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, which is the effect display device on the game board side. When the 1600 backlight is turned on, the game board is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 85%, which is an additional 10% of the correction information acquired for this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores various information that is updated by executing various control programs and is to be backed up. It is stored in the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b, which exclusively store the copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca. Various control program copy areas 1511cd that exclusively store copies of various control programs, and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b are copied. Various control data copy areas 1511ce that are exclusively stored, and backup unmanaged work area 1511cf that exclusively stores information that is not backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. Is provided.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure), a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero, while backup is performed. For the managed work area 1511ca, backup first area 1511cc, and backup second area 1511cc, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the power-on state command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state is instructed (for example, it is instructed to start the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

The backup management target work area 1511ca is an effect information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady processing executed every time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, which will be described later. ) Is backed up as Bank0 (1fr), which is exclusively stored as a backup target, and production information (1ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt, which will be described later, occurs. It is composed of Bank0 (1 ms), which is exclusively stored as an object, and Bank0 (1 ms). Here, to briefly explain the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511cc to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. As will be described later, when the sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a is used for "(1fr)". Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the above can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a, in other words, one frame (1 frame) each time the V blank signal is input. Since the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effects described later). The backup information (1fr) is also used with the same meaning). As described later, "(1ms)" means "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and the like, since the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. Is a storage area in which is set, and in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is lit. It is a storage area in which the door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set, and in the reception command storage area 1511cc, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received commands are stored. It is a storage area to be set, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is a storage area in which various information acquired from the RTC control unit 4165 (RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC4165a described later) is set, and is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Is a storage area in which various schedule data corresponding to the received command are set based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

Bank0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai. A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak or the like is provided. In the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decorative drive amplifier board side motor, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is provided. It is a storage area to be set, and is for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 in the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. It is a storage area in which the motor drive data SM-DAT on the game board side is set, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. It is a storage area in which various information acquired such as the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cia is a detection signal from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400. Dial created based on various information acquired from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401, the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, etc. (for example, detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400). It is a storage area in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the operation unit 401, the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, etc.) are set. When drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the control board 1510 is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 are output based on the LOCKN signal to be output to convey that fact. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the frequency of defects and the state of occurrence of defects during connection with the effect display drive board 4450 is set.

In addition, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of Bank0 (1fr), the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the LED on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side, and the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the frame decoration drive amplifier board side of Bank0 (1ms). The transmission data storage area 1511bag on the motor drive board side is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady processing described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, the peripheral area of the previous time is executed. When the control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

When the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The door side emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. To. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time. When the previous peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the processing proceeds based on the door-side emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. It has become.

The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is opened to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511 caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. -The DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, the door side is set in the first area and the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. Motor drive data STM-DAT are set alternately. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is generated in the second area of the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is to proceed based on this.

When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Then, when the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Occasionally, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. It has become like.

Next, the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. The effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The effect information (1 ms) is copied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed and is stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1 ms). As the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is applied to the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. It is copied at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cc, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511cc, Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) are set as one pair, and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are set as one pair, so that a total of two pairs are managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1ms), which is a normally used storage area, is stored every time a 1ms timer interrupt is generated and every time the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed. It is copied to Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. This is performed depending on whether or not the contents of Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511 kb has Bank 1 (1 fr) and Bank 2 (1 fr) as one pair, and Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) as one pair, for a total of two pairs. It is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, one pair of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr), and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms). This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1fr), is used as the effect backup information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit is used for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac at high speed, and are stored in the normally used storage area Bank0 (1ms). The effect information (1 ms) is, as the effect backup information (1 ms), every time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the backup first area 1511 cc and the backup second area 1511 cc. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is used to copy at high speed, but the programs that execute the high-speed copy by these peripheral control DMA controllers 1511ac are standardized. That is, in this embodiment, the staging information (1fr) and the staging information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores the information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The content stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a power-on state command from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when the power is restored due to a momentary power failure or a power failure) (see FIG. 89). Indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even at that time, it is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the above-mentioned point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cc, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of the occurrence of the jackpot game state). Etc.) On the other hand, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

The backup management target work area 1511da is used for managing various information such as effect information (SRAM) (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of a jackpot game state and special effect flags), which is various information that is continued over days. It is composed of Bank0 (SRAM) that exclusively stores information) as a backup target. Here, to briefly explain the name of Bank0 (SRAM), as described above, "Bank" is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information, and is referred to as "Bank". Subsequent "0" means that it is a normally used storage area for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, "Bank 0" means that the size of the storage area normally used is set as the minimum management unit. The "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" provided in the area extending from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as the "Bank0". It means that it has a size. Since various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control SRAM 1511a is to be backed up in "(RAM)", "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", and "Bank3". , And "Bank 4", respectively (the effect information (SRAM) and the effect backup information (SRAM) described later are also used with the same meaning).

Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store the copy of the effect information (SRAM) which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc have two banks as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The effect information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is used as the effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). In addition, it is copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks constituting the page match.

Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

Further, in the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are set as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area, is stored in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page, and the backup second area. The 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair. Different ID coats are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. Liquid crystal display control unit]
FIG. 72 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and controls sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As described above, a sound source for controlling sounds such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in sound source"), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Speaker) 1512a with built-in sound source for control, various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, as well as various music and sound effects. To the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b that stores sound data, the audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the door frame side effect display device 460. The serialized drawing data is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and heads toward the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320. LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal. And, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is input, this signal is input. A forced switching circuit 1512f that connects the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input while the circuit is connected so as to transmit. It is equipped with. In the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as sprite data used for displaying screens and images described later, for example, ring-shaped image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and operation menu background image described later can be displayed. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display image data used to display at least one selection display item described later, tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described later, volume adjustment icon described later. Volume setting icon used for display In addition to image data, etc., the position of each part on the back of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the player's point of view. The service mode screen image data used for, the break timer setting screen image data used for displaying the break timer setting screen, and the break screen image data used for displaying the break screen are stored. The liquid crystal display and the sound control ROM 1512b also store the suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting that the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the staging operation unit 400 should be operated.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the screen data at the beginning of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various peripheral control RAMs 1511c. After extracting from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the first screen data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a displays the screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, each time a V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transfers the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to 1511cae, and set the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae to the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511. After extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, when a V blank signal is input, the head is headed according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. The next sound command data following the sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a inputs the sound command data arranged in time series into the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the first sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP1512a is a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74 based on the input screen data. The side character data and the upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data, and drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated. It also has a built-in VRAM (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM, and also for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transferred from channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a staging display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. The effect display is arranged near the lower part of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 Although the length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short because they are attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is peripheral as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, since the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450. Since the length of the wiring required for the path is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise. For this reason, for channel CH2, in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d is used by THine Electronics Inc. for "V-by-One (V-by-One). By adopting a differential communication method called "registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise.

The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), whereas the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side directing transmitter IC4610d, and is housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and a dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, the various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals on the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes. Based on this input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, and one screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1). The drawing data for the frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown), frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 for the image data for the effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" is the built-in VRAM containing the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

Further, the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. No peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is output to the peripheral control MPU1511a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). Peripheral control MPU1511a is configured to execute peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Further, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). This is a method of outputting drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in this frame buffer (built-in VRAM) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, when the above-mentioned sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP1512a has music stored in the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. 74. By extracting sound data such as and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set, and the music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track into which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data of the sound data and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume, the sound data of the notification sound and its volume are adjusted to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the staging sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a described above is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume is adjusted. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob portion of the volume 4140a.
The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to the setting mode described later.

In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP1512a include a plurality of in the sound source built-in VDP1512a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is calculated. Actually, it is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value and flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among a plurality of tracks. By synthesizing the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the set volume adjustment volume 4140a, the volume of the combined production sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Amplifies to the master volume value, and serializes this amplified production sound and outputs it as audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c. The maximum volume, which is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 4140a set as the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be used, is combined. The volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. ..

Here, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control of playing the notification sound is simple in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. First, the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub-volume value set for the mute, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined production sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually combined at the bottom. It is amplified to the master volume value which is the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and the notification sound are serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

That is, as for the sound actually flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the maximum volume notification sound is played. At this time, since the staging sound is muted, the staging sound does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the staging sound is proceeding according to the above-mentioned sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period elapses, the sound generation forcibly set to mute is generated. The volume of the effect sound progressing according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value of the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a (at this time, the dial of the effect operation unit 400). If the setting mode is entered and adjusted by operating the operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the sub-volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It is designed to flow.

In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound is played in order to notify the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the fraudulent act against the pachinko machine 1. Although the volume of the production sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound has elapsed for a predetermined period because the muted production sound is proceeding according to the schedule data for sound generation. When the sound stops flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start flowing again from the place where the notification sound starts to flow, but follows the sound generation schedule data until the time when the notification sound starts to flow and a predetermined period elapses. It starts to flow again from where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. LCD and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b draw the character data on the game board side for drawing in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the character data on the door frame side in the display area of the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a relay around the frame as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. Peripheral control output circuit (not shown) that is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the left side audio data is used as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are transmitted to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of a difference method between the left and right sides of the board extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left side audio data. Even if the negative signal is affected by noise, when combining the noise component on the positive signal and the noise component on the negative signal on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 to make one left side audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, it is possible to take measures against noise.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side staging transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input to the door frame side staging transmitter IC1512d. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals, a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal, and is a red video signal. , The green video signal and the blue video signal are each composed of 8 bits, for a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, so that the upper 6 bits of each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

Three video signals, red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal, which are drawing data output from channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and three sync signals, horizontal sync signal, vertical sync signal, and clock signal. When is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and a horizontal synchronization signal and a vertical synchronization signal. Three synchronization signals, a signal and a clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. with only a differential 1-pair cable. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring required for (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (No. 1). Since the length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path, it becomes extremely susceptible to noise.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, the opposite of the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 side. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game ball paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, on the lower side of the main body frame 4, the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit is arranged. In this way, various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn in the vicinity of the payout device 830, the full tank branch unit 770, the power supply board 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment that receives noise that has invaded the machine.

For this reason, for channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1, the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is described by THine Electronics Inc. By adopting a differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)", the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are used. As described above, a differential 1-pair cable is used as wiring for electrically connecting between the connections of the above, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is not just a parallel wire provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

Here, a case where a parallel wire is adopted as a differential 1-pair cable for electrically connecting between a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For channel CH2 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source, the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of channel CH1 of VDP1512a with built-in sound source. Even if it is a mechanism that is not easily affected by noise by adopting a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd., it is due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball only with such a hardware configuration. When the serial data in the parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the Pachinko Island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the effect display is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the drive board 4450, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected. , The drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with built-in sound source is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as a disordered one different from the normal one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, it looks like a so-called sandstorm. There is a problem that various images are displayed and it becomes impossible to recognize what kind of image it is.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The production transmitter IC1512d adopts a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. to make it less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twist pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1-pair cable. As a result, even if the serial data in the twist pair cable is affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise invading the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when the noise is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and is output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be reliably displayed in the door frame side effect display device 460. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image such as a sandstorm that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 And, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to 4, various wiring such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side shall be electrically connected to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Therefore, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after opening the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4 and removing various wirings, by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4, maintenance of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be performed. If the problem that has occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3'is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the door frame 3 having the problem, and the door frame 3 is used. By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3'side. It can be electrically connected to the board.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a differential type communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to the hardware configuration, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. A twisted pair cable that can be used is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and receiver. Specifically, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The boards with the board 4450 are electrically connected by twisted pair cables, whereas the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by harnesses. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are connected to each other. Wiring patterns for power supplies and other wiring patterns for various signals for transmitting various signals are mixed. Therefore, the above-mentioned video transmission wiring pattern is formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively, separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the path from the transmitter to the receiver straddles a plurality of relay terminal boards such as a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal board 882, it is used for video transmission formed on these multiple relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Occurs. Therefore, in the present embodiment, impedance matching is applied to the video transmission wiring patterns formed on these plurality of relay terminal boards.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the boards of the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The terminal board 882 and the effect display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twist pair cable, whereas the power supply wiring and other wiring that transmits various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cables, one of the wires is red and the other is gray, and of the harness, the wire that supplies power is red and the other wires are gray. .. The wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is in the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is designed to be transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 to be stored. In this forced switching circuit 1512f, in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Is differentially input to a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e. In this differential circuit 1512e, the LOCKN signal output request data is serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 , That is, it is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit these two signals, while being differential. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the conversion circuit 1512e, the circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been done. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , It is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while in the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are not input, a circuit connection is made so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, so that the door frame side effect transmitter is transmitted. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Peripheral control MPU1511a is demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 during the period when the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and in the customer waiting state. During the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the staging display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives serial signals (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later, and is serialized in various ways. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores a signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to a door frame side effect display device 460.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and if it determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it transmits a LOCKN signal to that effect, which will be described later, to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a to generate an image to convey that when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. It is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is used. It can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the 320, but when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, "a problem has occurred in the effect display device on the door frame side" to convey the problem. Please call the clerk. ”) Is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 by controlling the sound source built-in VDP1512a, and a notification sound to that effect (for example,“ a problem occurs in the door frame side effect display device. ” By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source and outputting it to the audio data transmission IC1512c, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured around the RTC4165a. The RTC4165a has a built-in RAM4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM4165aa"). The RTC4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (a button battery is adopted in this embodiment) as a drive power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM4165aa. That is, the RTC4165a is not supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) at all, but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and uses the acquired calendar information and time information as the peripheral control MPU1511a. The effect based on the effect can be developed by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and the effect display device 460 on the door frame side. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, a New Year countdown is performed. It can be mentioned that the screen to be executed is unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of shipment from the factory.

In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa stores and holds the LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa and adjusts the brightness of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments, and the game currently set. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the panel-side effect display device 1600 and the door frame-side effect display device 460, is included.

Further, in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa, in addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa as the date, hour, minute and second information. The input date and time information is also stored.

When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU1511a can be turned on / off or only turned on. It is designed to do.

Various information such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa are set in the manufacturing line of the gaming machine maker. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date and time information was input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time, which is the month, day, hour, minute, and second.

As described above, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM4165aa has the brightness setting information and the input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is of the LED type. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability that a big hit game state occurs at a low probability or a high probability).

Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information can be reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. It can be adjusted to the brightness of. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated and stored) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU1511a executes the above-mentioned luminance correction program, and when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type, the game board side effect. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. Peripheral control MPU1511a acquires input date and time information from RTC built-in RAM4165aa of RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and calendar information and time to specify the date and time. The current date and time is specified by acquiring the time information that specifies the minute and second, and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted in 5% increments from 100% to 70%. The luminance setting information having the luminance adjustment information for the purpose and the luminance of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is currently set is acquired. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

For example, if six months have already passed from the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, and from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is 80%, which is an additional 5% of the correction information acquired for the above. When 12 months have already passed since the date and time when the power of the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. When the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is added by 10% to 85%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so as to be the brightness.

The current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. The current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[7-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 4140a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 4140a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and an electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is used as the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a 1024-step value from a value 0 to a value 1023. In this embodiment, as described above, the 1024-step value is divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set so as to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In this way, music and sound effects are played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob portion. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to the music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 and a game production. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is produced as more powerful, or there is a high possibility that the game state will be advantageous to the player. Etc.), but the notification sound and the notification sound also flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and are muted. The volume from to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume to a low level, the production of music, sound effects, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is produced. Although the sound is reduced, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound.

In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

In this embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400 and the dial operation unit 401 By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated during the period during which the customer is waiting and the demonstration by the effect display device 1600 on the game board side is being performed, the setting mode is performed. Screen is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of the volume control volume 4140a from an analog value to a digital value, and the converted value is obtained. The value of the board volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track in which the sound data of the production sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP1512a. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and the notification sound, it is not reflected in the adjustment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a, and the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400. There are two methods, one is to adjust the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the board volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 4140a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make sure that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Then, it is the clerk in the hall who can rotate the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and it may be difficult to hear the music or sound effect, or the player may feel loud and the music or sound effect may be noisy. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 can be operated within a predetermined time, or the game board side effect display device 1600 can be demonstrated in a customer waiting state. If the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period during which the effect operation unit 400 is being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect, the staging operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to the desired level, and if the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and the music or sound effects are noisy, the staging operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, the pachinko machine 1 is in a waiting state for customers, and the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly performed (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled and the volume is initialized. In this volume initialization, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 4140a. As a result, if the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time feels that the volume adjusted is low and it is difficult to hear the music or sound effects, he / she sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 this time. The player who plays the game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the staging operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and last time, the player sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game. If the player who was playing the game feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game is the dial operation unit 401 of the staging operation unit 400. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply supplied to each control board and the like will be described. The ground (GND) of various boards and the ground (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the power cord, and the plug of the power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the electric power supplied from the pachinko island equipment is supplied to the power supply board 931 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control unit 935 and a emission control unit 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Section 953 is a circuit that drives and controls the launch solenoid 682 of the ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectifier circuit 935a, a power factor improvement circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply creation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 869 and also to the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a via the power supply board 931. The synchronous commutator circuit 935a is supplied from the pachinko island facility, rectifies AC 24 volts (AC24V), and supplies the power factor improvement circuit 935b. The power factor improving circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified electric power to create a direct current +37V (DC +37V, hereinafter referred to as “+37V”) and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the ripple of + 37V to be supplied, smoothes the + 37V, and supplies the + 37V to the launch control circuit 953a and the power supply creation circuit 935d of the launch control unit 953, respectively.

The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951. It supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses + 37 V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a drive power source, and has a launch strength (launch strength) commensurate with the rotational position of the handle 302. While controlling the drive current for launching (launching) toward the launching solenoid 682 and outputting it to the launching solenoid 682, the ball of the ball feed unit 250 is output by outputting a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250. The feeding member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

The power supply creation circuit 935d has DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”), and DC supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 24V”) is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system to which + 5V is applied and supplied is the + 5V power supply line, the power supply system to which + 12V is applied and supplied is the + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system to which + 24V is applied and supplied is the + 24V power supply line.

The + 5V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a, and is also applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. This + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is also supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951. That is, the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is forwarded by the diode PD0. Current flows toward the positive terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns from the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931 again. Is supplied and can be charged. As a result, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current is obstructed by the diode PD0 and does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, the stored contents are retained by supplying the payout VBB to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM. It has become so.

The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. It is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. That is, in the + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a current flows toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0, the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the positive terminal. The current is flowing toward. In this way, the capacitor BC0 is charged with + 5V supplied by the electrical connection method in which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 as the main VBB, so that the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is a diode. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by supplying the main VBB to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, the outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and then the voltage mainly supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

As shown in FIG. 75, three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951, and among these three types of voltages, + 12V and Two types of voltages of + 24V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and peripherally via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 76A, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. It is supplied to each of the 4180a. The lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal, and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the drive source drive circuit 4180a of the motor drive board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the panel 5.

The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b that creates a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 3.3V”) from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V created by the + 3.3V creation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, three types of voltages, + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V, which are supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Along with + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to various decorative boards of the door frame 3.

Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 13.V from + 12V. The + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to each of the various electronic components constituting the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And the door frame side effect display device 460, respectively. The voltage created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to the payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from the + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU952a of the payout control unit 952. The + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal for transmitting the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the game hall. Is. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. The +24 from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 without being used in the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V creation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. In the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, is created from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system to which + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g is applied and supplied becomes the + 5V power supply line. In the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310. The + 5V power supply line created by the creation circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and noise is removed from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU1310a. The + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and the + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e supplies + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. The power failure warning signal is input to the payout control MPU952a via the payout control input circuit 952b of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Further, the power failure warning signal is input to the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194 as shown in FIG. 76B via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. At the same time, the input is input to the decorative board of the door frame or the like via the frame decorative drive amplifier board 194.

In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies to one of the + 12V power supply line or the + 24V power supply line by monitoring the voltage applied to each of the two power supply lines, the + 12V power supply line and the + 24V power supply line. Compared to the case of monitoring the voltage to be applied, it is possible to more accurately grasp the signs of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit and the like of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and then the power supply, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU created by the main control board 1310 will be described. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and a communication interface circuit between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

The main control board 1310 includes the main control MPU 1310a, the main control input circuit 1310b, the main control output circuit 1310c, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and the main control board 1310g shown in FIGS. 69 and 75. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as peripheral circuits, as shown in FIG. 77, the main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal and the main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in this embodiment, 24 megahertz (MHz)). )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. This main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. In the main control 3-terminal filter MIC0, + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g was applied to the 1st terminal, the 2nd terminal was grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component was removed from the 3rd terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the 1st terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), so that the ripple (alternating current component folded by the voltage) is first removed. Is smoothed.

The + 5V output from the 3rd terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By connecting to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the like. When a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 causes a power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode MD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor MC3. The cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU1310a, and one end of the capacitor MC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus end of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor MR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the capacitor BC0 via the diode MD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, + 12V created by the power supply creating circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V creating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and + 5V is created. When the circuit 1310g cannot create + 5V, the charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is used. Although the main control MPU1310a does not operate because the current is obstructed by the diode MD0 and does not flow, the stored contents are retained by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the main control built-in RAM.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. You can do it. Specifically, when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V), the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses.

The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the MC6. Ripple is removed and smoothed by this capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU1310a and the main control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function are negative logic inputs, respectively, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function The main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. This VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further stripped of ripples and smoothed. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VDD terminal but also to the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal, which are output frequency selection terminals, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a 24 MHz clock signal from the F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to each of the A terminal, B terminal, C terminal, and ST terminal.

The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU1310a, and a 24 MHz clock signal is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to ground, and the D terminal, which outputs the frequency division of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b is from the vibration sensor 2405, the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the detection signal of the above, the circuit is such that an operation signal (RAM clear signal) or the like from the operation switch 954 provided in the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, a circuit in which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 is a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on, and the error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on). It has a function to perform. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of canceling the error of the payout control board 951, the main control is performed when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM, and a process of clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310, while when the operation switch 954 is operated, the logic is input from the payout control board 951. The operation signal with HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on is a pull-up in which one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC10 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit that outputs the operation signal from the operation switch 954 on the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission that transmits the operation signal from the operation switch 954. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic is input as LOW, while the operation switch 954 is operated. At this time, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic is input as HI.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, so that the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the transistor MTR0 is turned on by inputting the operation signal whose logic is HI by being pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, and the switch is switched. The circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Will be done. The main control MPU 1310a instructs to clear the RAM that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. Judge.

The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input via the payout control board 951. That is, the voltage between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V in order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The reliability of the signal is enhanced by using + 12V which is a voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensor 4002, and the second starting port sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistance. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance like the operation signal from the operation switch 954.

[9-5. Power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and when it detects a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, it sends a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning, in addition to the main control MPU1310a, a payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described first, followed by the monitoring of + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, the monitoring of + 12V power failure or momentary power failure, and the output of the power failure warning signal.

[9-5-1. Power failure monitoring circuit configuration]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistance MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495V is set in this embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (folded over the voltage) by the capacitor MC20. The AC component) has been removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type regulated power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to ground (GND).

The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one (MIC21A) is used to compare the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B) is used. , + 12V is used to compare the monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. A monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the positive terminal 3 of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the negative terminal 2 of the MIC 21A. A monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is a positive terminal of the MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is a negative terminal of the MIC21B. These comparison results are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. This D-type flip-flop MIC 22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in the present embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and + 5V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is Ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21, is grounded to ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 24V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V1 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR21 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the 3rd terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 24V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC23 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are the power failure detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 24V starts to drop from + 24V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power outage or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the monitoring of the + 12V power failure or momentary power failure is performed by comparing the monitoring voltage V2 of the comparator MIC21 with the reference voltage Vref by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21. As shown in FIG. 78, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied, has the other end and one end of the resistor MR24 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The other end of the resistor MR25, which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other end of the resistors MR24, MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25, one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is divided by + 12V by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the ripple is removed by the capacitor MC25 and smoothed. .. The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 are the power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) set in advance when + 12V starts to drop from + 12V when the power failure or momentary power failure occurs. At that time, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is set to be the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

The 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A described above. The preset of the D type flip flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is a terminal. As described above, the capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

When the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes larger than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal pulled up to the side and whose logic is HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is ground (GND). The signal pulled down to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, due to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal, and this stored value. (Logic) is output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal, and the value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal which is an output terminal. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latch state is released and the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal is input. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal (at this time, the logic of the signal output from 1Q is inverted, that is, the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is the same. (The logic signal is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal) On the other hand, when the signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the latch state is set. Further, in the D type flip flop MIC22, when a signal whose logic is HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal and the latch state is set, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. When the signal becomes Maintain the state of output from the 1Q terminal).

In the D type flip flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are grounded to the ground (GND), so that the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal is used. The circuit is configured so that the edge of the input clock signal does not change, and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the output terminal 1 of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 for monitoring a + 24V power failure or a momentary power failure and a + 12V power failure at the PR terminal which is a preset terminal. Alternatively, a signal from the 7th terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the momentary power failure, is input, and a signal is output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, based on these signals. The Vcc terminal, which is a power supply terminal, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal, is grounded to ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, is electrical to the outside. It is not connected.

In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, a power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal, which is a clear terminal, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The power failure clear signal is output started and stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed in the main control side power-on processing described later performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal with its logic LOW via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is a preset terminal, is inverted and the output terminal is output. Output from the 1Q terminal.

On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 is designed to set a latch state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the state in which the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is an output terminal of the D-type flip flop MIC 22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal. Further, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is reset. No function The main control output circuit 1310cc outputs the payout power failure warning signal to the payout control board 951 and outputs the peripheral power failure warning signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is a D type flip-flop. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR27, the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Main control via ICMIC23 (non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC23A) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR27, MR28, and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR20 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side and the transistor MTR 20 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20, so that the transistor MTR20 is Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure warning signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. It is input to PA1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, which outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22 to the payout control board 951 as a payout failure warning signal, is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR30, the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage via the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistance MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR34 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and is wired. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control unit 952 shown in FIG. 70 on the payout control board 951. In circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the input terminal and electricity of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in FIG. 70. Is connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR30, MR31, and the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33, MR34, and the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned ON / OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor in the previous stage The MTR 21 is turned off, the switch circuit in the front stage is also turned off, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the rear stage, is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32. By doing so, the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR21 is turned on. The switch circuit in the front stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the switch circuit in the rear stage is turned on. The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the front stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the rear stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), so that the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic as HI and becomes the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Upon input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR 21 in the previous stage is lowered to ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage, so that the transistor MTR 22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). A payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC 22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and is the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor MR35, the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. In, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 72. Be connected.

The circuit composed of the resistors MR35, MR36, and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit will also be turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side, and the transistor MTR23 is turned on. The switch circuit will also be turned on.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic is HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23, so that the transistor MTR23 Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic is HI. The peripheral power failure warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic is LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the peripheral power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is the peripheral control board. It is input to 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning signal, and the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC22. There is one transistor in each of the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal, and the power failure warning signal and peripherals input to the main control MPU 1310a. While the logic is the same as the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip flop MIC 22, is delivered to the payout control board 951. There is no reset function to output as a power failure warning signal. The main control output circuit 1310cc has two transistors, the front stage and the rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure warning signal is the logic of the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and its surroundings. The logic is the reverse of the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal input to the control board 1510, which is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

Further, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a is electrically connected via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310cc without the reset function is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the above, and is a payout control board via a wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is a pull-up resistor and an electrical one end of which is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the. This is because the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are the main control boards between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Since it is mounted on the 1310, the power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, whereas the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used. In order to suppress the influence of noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the boards of 951 and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the main control MPU 1310a, A power failure warning is given by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the payout control MPU952a and the peripheral control MPU1511a.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to the main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 is received as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. .. On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main payment serial data transmission signal, and do not have a reset function. No reset function by transmitting to circuit 1310cc The main control output circuit 1310cc transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951, and the TXB terminal mainly transmits the serial data to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. As a peripheral serial data transmission signal, it is transmitted to the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function, and the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function transmits a main peripheral serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition to the above-mentioned operation signal (RAM clear signal) being input to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout notifying that the above-mentioned main payment serial data reception signal has been normally received. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from various switches such as the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b. Each is entered, etc.

On the other hand, from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal indicating that the normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is completed is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main pay ACK signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951, or the drive signal is sent to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. Is output and a drive signal is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the start port solenoid 2107 via the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69 are displayed. Drive signals are output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and drive signals are output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to various indicators, and various information related to the game (game information). Is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, and various information (game information) related to the game is output from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between the main control board and the peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. ing. The main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise invading the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. The reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, in order to suppress the noise.

Specifically, the main control board 1310 makes the main control output circuit 1310 bb without a reset function function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly comprises resistors MR50, resistors MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 contains a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), and a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC) as communication interface circuits. It is mainly composed of.).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal is grounded to the ground (GND) to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50. It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). It is connected to the. As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is charged. As + 12V, it can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Since the charged charge is applied as + 5V, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41aea and complete the transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register 1310aea.

As described above, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the influence of invading noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V, which is a voltage higher than + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU1310a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as + 12V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41aea by the serial management unit 1310aec and transmits the command. When transmitted as main peripheral serial data from the shift register 1310ea, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, data for a maximum of 10 packets is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

The cathode terminal (terminal 3) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistor AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

The TXB terminal that outputs the main peripheral serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 77 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR50 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also to connect the resistance MR51. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistance MR51, the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistance MR52 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to ground (GND).

The circuit composed of the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. When it is pulled down, the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

+ 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 has the negative terminal as ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the grounded electrolytic capacitor AC10. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (terminal 6) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (terminal 4) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal (terminal 5) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main peripheral serial data transmission signal to be the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. It is input to the input terminal of.

As a result, as described above, when + 5V supplied from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 as + 5V. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is sent to the main control MPU 1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae can be completed, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal during transmission, that is, the main peripheral serial data is cut off. It is ensured that the signal is received by the peripheral control board 1510 without being missing or missing.

When the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the transistor. Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor AR11, and the logic becomes HI. The logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 while the serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR50, and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. Therefore, the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on. The voltage applied to the collector terminal is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main peripheral serial data transmission signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU1511a. .. As described above, the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main peripheral serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. It is the logic of.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage of + 12V applied via the diode MD50 is applied. However, measures are taken when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage and communication voltage drop. That is, for the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, a + 5V power supply line, a positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, and Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h, which is the first auxiliary power supply, By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of the MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and it is composed of the resistors MR50, the resistors MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50. For the main control output circuit 1310cc without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of this diode MD50. And the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, are electrically connected in parallel, so that a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the voltage is applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50. Even if the voltage drops, the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, which is the second auxiliary power supply, is applied, so that the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 to be disrupted and to prevent the command from being omitted, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the omission of a command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are all composed of the resistance MR50, the resistance MR51, MR52, and the transistor MTR50 as the main peripheral serial data. No reset function to function as a communication interface circuit 470μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cc. The capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is set to 220 μF. As a result, even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb are reset to function as an interface circuit as main peripheral serial data. Since transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 1310cc, the peripheral control board 1510 does not interrupt and omits a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. It can be received reliably without any problems.

[10. Circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control unit and the like, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input showing various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and various output signals to the external terminal plate 784. It is an output diagram. First, the payout control filter circuit 951a will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals with the main control board 1310, and various output signals to the external terminal board 784 will be described.

[10-1. Payout control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly comprises the payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control 3-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is applied to the 1st terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 grounded to the ground (GND). + 5V from the power supply board 931 is first smoothed by removing ripples (AC components folded by the voltage) by the capacitor PC0. The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V from which the noise component is removed.

The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each of them, ripples are further removed from + 5V output from the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 and smoothed. This smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the like, which will be described later. .. If a power failure or momentary power failure occurs at the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 will be power failure or momentary power failure. It is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after it is generated.

The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU952a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

Further, the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a is electrically connected to the anode terminal of the diode PD0 in addition to being electrically connected to the capacitor PC3. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a, and one end of the capacitor PC4 is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and the plus of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 via the resistor PR0. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and is applied to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in payout control and the capacitor BC1 via the diode PD0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of. As a result, as described above, when the + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid VBB. Since the electric charge is supplied to the payout control board 951 as a result, the current is blocked by the diode PD0 in the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but the payout control MPU952a does not operate, but the payout control MPU952a does not operate. The stored contents are retained by applying the pay VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the backup power supply circuit for supplying the backup power supply to the payout control built-in RAM is composed of the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout control unit]
In addition to the payout control MPU952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 resets as a peripheral circuit as shown in FIG. It mainly consists of a payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (in this embodiment, 8 megahertz (MHz)) that outputs a clock signal. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Payout control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively, and has a built-in delay circuit. The delay capacitance terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after the delay time elapses when the + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches the threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal, which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, respectively. The output terminal is an open collector output type, and is a capacitor whose one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and one end is grounded to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. This capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low-pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with a reset function. While each is input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic becomes the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function are each negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes smaller than the threshold value, the payout control MPU952a and the reset function The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. Further, the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Payout control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, the + 5V smoothed by removing the noise component by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCS terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. This VCS terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND), and the + 5V input to the VCS terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. Further, this smoothed + 5V is applied not only to the VCS terminal but also to the OE terminal which is the output enable terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from the OUT terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying + 5 V to its OE terminal.

The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal, which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU952a, and an 8 MHz clock signal is input to the payout control MPU952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to ground (GND).

[10-2-3. Payout control input circuit]
In the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619, and the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, the circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply board 931, the circuit in which the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit in which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input will be described, followed by the circuit in which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input, the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, and the circuit in which the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input. A circuit in which a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor is input and a circuit in which an operation signal from an operation switch is input will be described. Since the output terminals of various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279, the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 are open collector output types, various detections are made. Since the circuit configuration in which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, a circuit in which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described here.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame open switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) while the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 as shown in FIG. 1, and the door frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) when 3 is closed to the main body frame 4. The 2nd terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 via the resistor PR21. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR21, the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC20 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC20A) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 20 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via a resistor PR24. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR24, the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR 21 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. In addition to being pulled up to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, it is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26. ing. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR26, the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the door frame opening switch 618 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR21, PR22 and the transistor PTR20, the circuit composed of the resistors PR24, PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR26, PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame open switches. It is a switch circuit that turns ON / OFF by the detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR 20 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR23, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. To. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 21 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, since the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 22 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 20 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 21 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is raised to the + 5 V side, so that the transistor PTR 22 is turned on. However, the switch circuit will also be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 22 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, when the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, the door frame opening signal whose logic is HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal input to PA0 and whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned off, so that the door frame opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. , The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main body frame open switch is input]
The main body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)), and the switch is turned on (conducting) with the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. 1, and the main body frame is turned on. The switch is turned off (disconnected) while the 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. The 2nd terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the 1st terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the end and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR29, the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). .. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as the outer end frame door opening information output signal.

Further, the first terminal of the main body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29, and is also connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. It is pulled up to and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR31, the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is a + 12V power supply. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR 24 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing voltage fluctuations from the main body frame opening switch 619 due to a fluttering phenomenon in which the contacts constituting the main body frame opening switch 619 are repeatedly turned on and off for a short time.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR29, PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and the circuit composed of the resistors PR31, PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits that are turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619.

In the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is ON, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor is used. The PTR 24 will be turned off and the switch circuit will also be turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, since the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 24 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

In this way, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is HI is input to the external terminal board 784 by turning on the main body frame opening switch 619. The main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main body frame opening switch 619 is turned off in a state where the main body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 to make the logic. The outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state in which the door frame 3 is closed to the main body frame 4 and the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 are in the present embodiment. Even in the case of, since the main frame door opening signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 is the main frame door opening signal. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is open from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the main body frame 4 is open, which is a state that does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal is sent to the external terminal plate 784. Since it is input, this outer end frame door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 784, and the hall computer uses the outer end frame door opening information output signal to transmit the door frame. Although it is not possible to determine whether 3 is in the state of being released from the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is in the state of being released from the outer frame 2, the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is opened. It is possible to determine that a state that does not occur during a normal game has occurred.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, by adopting a normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on ( Even if the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited for some reason and the switch is turned on (conducting), the main body frame is turned on. 4 is in a state of being released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switch for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end can be output. The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

If the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are changed from the normally closed switch to the normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619'), , The door frame opening switch 618'turns on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and turns off (disconnects) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. .. The main body frame opening switch 619'turns on (conducts) when the main body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and turns off (disconnects) when the main body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618'is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, and the main body is released for some reason. Even if the frame opening switch 619'is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, even if the door frame opening switch 618'and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the wire is broken. The outer end frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). A circuit to which a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to and resists the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40A) is shaped and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR 40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a payout power failure warning signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR41, PR42, and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310.

As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of two types of voltages, + 12V and + 24V, from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or momentary power failure sign is detected, there is no reset function. The payout power failure warning signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310 kb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both of the conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes LOW. While the payout power failure warning signal is input to the payout control board 951, one of the conditions that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is larger than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is larger than the failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages. Occasionally, a payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the payout control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when either of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is smaller than the failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V. When there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the payout control board 951, so that the payout power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure warning signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In this way, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and / or + 24V voltage, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. When there is no sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of the + 12V and + 24V voltages, the payout power failure warning signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure warning signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V voltage, the power failure warning signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, so that the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e The logic of the payout power failure warning signal input to the payout control MPU952a and the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU1310a are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit where the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is transmitted to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of this full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor. The 3-terminal filter PIC50 for a full tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics.

The 2nd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is 3 for the full tank detection sensor via the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 41 after the noise component is removed in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR45, the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND), and one end to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of the electrically connected capacitor PC40. The capacitor PC 40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is a non-inverting buffer. Disbursement control via ICPIC40 (non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and formats and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40B) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a full tank signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full is full. In the present embodiment, when the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal that is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a in the payout control board 951 and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951, while the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball. , The voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931, and the logic becomes LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

When the accommodation space is not full in the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is applied to the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931. When the signal pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the full tank signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the accommodation space is full with the stored game ball, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 passes through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 to the payout control board. When the signal pulled down to the ground (GND) side in 951 and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the above-mentioned transistor PTR 41, the transistor PTR 41 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR47, and the full tank signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit composed of the resistor PR45, the resistor PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Although the circuit configuration was used, the detection signals from various detection switches such as the ball burnout detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 are T-type filter circuits such as the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without going through it. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, it is compared with the ball out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, etc. provided in the payout device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full, and the payout control MPU952a is a full tank detection sensor. Based on the detection signal from 279, when it is determined that the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. That is, when noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU952a is a game ball in which the accommodation space is stored and is not full, but the payout motor 834 In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body, and even though the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is full, the payout motor 834 is driven. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue paying out the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834 In some cases, the load is abnormally applied to the dispenser motor 834, causing abnormal heat generation and failure, or the mechanism for transmitting the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834 to the rotational movement of the payout rotating body fails. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the circuit configuration is configured so that the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is first removed by the noise component in the 3-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which the operation signal from the operation switch is input]
The 1st and 2nd terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage via a resistor PR49 and electrically. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR49, the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). In addition to being electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, the 4th terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage via the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC40C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a via. When the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the front and rear stages are turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the rear stage changes, and the signal is used as the RWMCLR signal and is the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Is entered in.

In addition, the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and are electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 in the previous stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR55, the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56, one end of which is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 that is electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a as a RAM clear signal.

The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contacts constituting the operation switch 954 repeatedly turn on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit having a function of absorbing the fluctuation of the voltage from the operation switch 954 by the above.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR49, PR50, and the transistor PTR42 is the switch circuit in the front stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors PR52, PR53, and the transistor PTR43 is the switch circuit in the rear stage, and the resistors PR55, PR56, and the transistor PTR44. The circuit composed of is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

As described above, the operation switch 954 is used in the RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is operated when clearing the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM), or when an error is notified after the power is turned on, it is operated to clear the error, and the power is turned on. A function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from time, and an error cancellation after the power is turned on (after the period during which the function as RAM clear has elapsed, that is, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). It has a function. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is a RAM clear signal in the function of clearing the RAM within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, while after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on). In the function of canceling the error in), it becomes an error clearing signal.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd and 4th terminals, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn on the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned on. When the voltage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is judged that it is not an instruction, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, the error is cleared. Judge that it is not an instruction.

When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic is HI is the transistor PTR44 when the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. The transistor PTR44 is turned on by being input to the base terminal of, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Entered. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is LOW. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, it does not instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic is LOW is the transistor in the previous stage because the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, which are the output terminals of the operation switch 954, are pulled down to the ground (GND) side. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR 42 to turn off the transistor PTR 42 in the previous stage, and the switch circuit in the previous stage is also turned off. When the voltage is raised to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RWMCLR signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU952a performs RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. It is determined that the signal is to be instructed, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed from the time the power is turned on), if the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, the error is cleared. Judge that it is an instruction.

Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation that the output terminal of the operation switch 954, the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the logic becomes LOW. A signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. When the RAM clear signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on, as described above, this logic is HI. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that when the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, it is instructed to perform RAM clear that erases the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Payout motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC60. The power input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and the + 5V power supply line, respectively, and +12 and + 5V are applied, respectively. It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the terminal 3 and the terminal 10 which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, respectively, and is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout motor 834. Based on the voltage switching signal connected to the voltage switching circuit 952da and input to the voltage switching input terminal, + 12V or + 5V is used as the motor drive voltage via the Zener diode PZD60, and is the cathode terminal of the drive ICPIC60. It is supplied to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and is also supplied to the payout motor 834.

The drive ICPIC60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th and 7th terminals, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are grounded to ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60. At the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, the payout motor drive signal is input via the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal, and 11th terminal, which are the collector terminals of the drive ICPIC60, are the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, respectively. When the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal, and 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC60, via the resistors PR60 to PR63, it is an excitation signal. A certain drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the drive ICPIC60 via resistors PR60 to PR63. It is designed to be output to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the exciting current flowing through each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a counter electromotive force is generated. If this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC60, the drive ICPIC60 will be damaged. Therefore, as protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the front stages of the 3rd and 10th terminals which are the cathode terminals of the drive ICPIC60. The circuit configuration is adopted.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals with the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 has the BRDY, which is a ball lending request signal, and the BRQ, which is a one-time payout operation start request signal, via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal board 869 from the CR unit 6. , And the predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 connects to the rental device such as a game ball. An EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, via the terminal board 869. And is output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuits for inputting / outputting these various signals and the like are mainly composed of photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are built-in).

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. Occasionally, the photocoupler PIC 70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71, and is also connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR71. In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

In addition to being electrically connected to the resistor PR71, the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and a non-inverting buffer. FIG. 80 via ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a shown in 1. When the transistor PTR 70 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 changes, and the signal is input as the CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). It is electrically connected to the other end of the. When the transistor PTR71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply board 931 as a CR connection signal.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR 70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. To.

The circuit composed of the resistors PR72, PR76, and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned ON / OFF by ON / OFF of the photocoupler PIC70.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is LOW is input to the power supply board 931. Ru.

On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic is HI is input to the power supply board 931. Will be done.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80B) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRDY signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of the BRDY from the CR unit 6.

The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71, but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photo When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80C) is formatted and output without inverting). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control MPU952a. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a.

When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on and therefore the photo The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the BRQ signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

The XS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. It is input from 952 kb to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR83 via a terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. It is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is changed, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as EXS.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the EXS whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83, and the logic becomes HI. The EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

The PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a is possible or impossible is transmitted to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85, one end of which is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a. When the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the output terminal without the reset function via the payout control output circuit 952 kb is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 via a pull-up resistor PR86 via a terminal plate 869 for renting a game ball or the like. It is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to its built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as a PRDY.

When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the PRDY whose logic is LOW is the CR unit. It is input to the built-in control device of 6. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, it is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without a reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to a predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86, and the logic becomes HI. The PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of the PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a via the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to the payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of the various input / output ports of the payout control MPU952a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 80, the RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as the main payout serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b. Will be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal, which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is transmitted to the payout control output circuit 952cc without the reset function as the payer serial data transmission signal. No reset function The payer serial data transmission signal is transmitted from the payout control output circuit 952 kb to the main control board 1310.

The RWMCLR signal, the payout failure warning signal, the door open signal, the full tank signal, and various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) described above are connected to each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU952a. In addition to each of the signals 1) and the like being input, for example, the main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that conveys the completion of normal reception of the above-mentioned payer serial data reception signal is transmitted via the payout control input circuit 952b. It may be input, or the detection signals from the ball burnout detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, and the like shown in FIG. 70 may be input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output from each output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU952a to the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function, respectively, and the EXS signal and the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952 kb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the voltage switching signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. It can be output, or the payout motor drive signal can be output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function can output the payout motor drive signal to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to this, for example, the payer ACK signal indicating that the above-mentioned main pay serial data reception signal has been normally received is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the payer is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. The ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310, or the drive signal of the error LED display 860b shown in FIG. 70 is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to the error LED display 860b, etc.

[10-3. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with the main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85A, the payout control board 951 has the payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door open signal, and the like described above. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, main pay ACK signal, and operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above. And 2 round big hit information output signal such as big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, start opening winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout failure warning signal, and the like related to the above are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to the external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the above-mentioned outer end frame door opening information output signal, the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as prize balls reaches 10 balls. The prize ball number information output signal output for each, the main prize ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, the jackpot information of the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. Game information signals such as output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistance of the external terminal board 784. That is, two signals, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and a prize ball number information output signal, are output to the external terminal board 784, and the number of main prize balls from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start opening winning information Eight signals called output signals are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951.

The signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall) (not shown), and the hall computer monitors the player's game or the like. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer shall perform the number of jackpots in which the round is twice (two-round jackpot). The number of big hits of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of big hits in which the number of rounds is 15 (the number of times of big hits in 15 rounds) and the number of big hits. For this reason, the hall computer cannot grasp the number of occurrences of 2-round jackpots and the number of occurrences of 15-round jackpots from the total number of jackpots, so that the number of jackpots actually generated by the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is not possible to know whether it is a 2-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players select whether or not to play the game by referring to the number of occurrences of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter. Some people do.

However, the number of occurrences of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may actually be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. It may be difficult to get a big hit for 15 rounds. In this way, the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the jackpot information output signal, the 15-round jackpot information output signal and the 2-round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer, so that the hall computer can determine the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot and the number of occurrences of the 2-round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of big hits in 15 rounds. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is 2 rounds or 15 rounds, and the data counter has 15 rounds. Since the number of big hits and the number of 2 round big hits can be displayed separately or only the number of 15 round big hits can be displayed as the number of big hit gaming states, it is possible to arouse the player's gambling spirit more than necessary. not.

In this embodiment, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence of the 2-round jackpot to the end, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is also the 15-round jackpot. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when a 2-round jackpot occurs, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output only for a predetermined period. Such a 2-round jackpot information output signal and 15-round jackpot information are output to the hall computer, and when a 15-round jackpot occurs, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer for a predetermined period. A method of outputting an output signal to a hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on the external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 that outputs various signals to the hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an arrangement of output terminals of an external terminal board.

As described above, the external terminal plate 784 has an outer end frame door opening information output signal, a prize ball number information output signal, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, and a 2-round jackpot information output signal. When the jackpot information output signal, the information output signal during probability fluctuation, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the start opening winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951, It outputs to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

Briefly explaining these various signals, the outer end frame door opening information output signal does not occur during a normal game by a player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. It is a signal that conveys that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is every time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to convey the fact, and enters various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal to notify each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on the ball has reached 10 balls, and the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a 15-round jackpot. It is a signal that conveys that it is in a state, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal that conveys that a 2-round jackpot has occurred, and the information output signal during probability fluctuation has a probability fluctuation. The special symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the signal is present, and the special symbol display information output signal is a variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display information output signal is in the finished (stopped) state, and the normal symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The time saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time saving state has occurred, and the starting port winning information output signal is the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 60. Alternatively, it is a signal to notify each time a game ball enters the second starting port 2004.

As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are arranged horizontally in a row on the external terminal board 784. The output terminal PT1 is white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal for notifying each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer uses the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball 10 each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball of the ball is paid out as a prize ball, and it is possible to count the number of the paid out game balls and grasp the total number of the game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT2 is colored in green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer end frame door opening information output signal is in a state in which the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open does not occur during the normal game. It is a signal to convey that, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT2 while the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open. When the outer end frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1 while the outer end frame door opening information output signal is input. / Or it can be grasped that the main body frame 4 is open.

The output terminal PT3 is grayed out and outputs a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is a signal to convey that it is in a state, and in this embodiment, the end (stop) of the variation display of the special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal PT3. Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the special symbol display information output signal and receives the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405, and count the number of times to count the number of times to count the number of times to perform the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of times that the special symbol is variablely displayed on the symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405.

The output terminal PT4 is colored in yellow and outputs a start opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start opening winning information output signal is a signal for notifying each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, and in the present embodiment, it is a signal to that effect. , Every time a game ball enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the starting port winning information output signal from the external terminal plate 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer performs the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2002 of the pachinko machine 1 each time the starting port winning information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game ball has entered the starting port 2004, and count the number of times the starting port winning information output signal is input to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls that have entered.

The output terminal PT5 is black and outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT5, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is generated. It is designed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input to grasp the total number of times the 15-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT6 is colored pink and outputs a two-round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the two-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round jackpot is occurring, and in the present embodiment, while the two-round jackpot is occurring from the output terminal PT6, the two-round jackpot information output signal is It is designed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot in the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp the state, and it is possible to count the number of times the two-round jackpot information output signal is input and grasp the total number of times the two-round jackpot has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT7 is colored in blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. As described above, the normal symbol display information output signal is a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 has finished (stopped) the variation display of the normal symbol. In the present embodiment, the output is output from the output terminal PT7 for 0.128 seconds at the end (stop) of the variation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives the normal symbol display information output signal, and when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the hall computer is the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variation display of the normal symbol has ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the variation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. You can know the number of times.

The output terminal PT8 is red and outputs a time-saving and medium-time information output signal. As described above, the time-saving medium information output signal is a signal indicating that the time-saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time-saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / medium information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer grasps that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / medium information output signal is input. At the same time, it is possible to count the number of times the information output signal is input during the time reduction and to grasp the total number of times the time reduction state has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT9 is colored orange and outputs an information output signal during probability fluctuation. As described above, the information output signal during probability fluctuation is a signal indicating that the probability fluctuation is occurring, and is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability fluctuation is occurring in the present embodiment. It has become so. When the information output signal during probability fluctuation from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer is in a state where the probability fluctuation occurs in the pachinko machine 1 when the information output signal during probability fluctuation is input. It is possible to grasp that there is, and it is possible to count the number of times that the information output signal is input during the probability fluctuation and to grasp the total number of times that the probability fluctuation has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60. It is a signal to notify every time the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball reaches 10 balls, and in this embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer receives 10 balls as prize balls from the pachinko machine 1 each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and to count the number of the game balls to be paid out to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. It should be noted that, for example, a ball of a game ball scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball based on a game ball entered into various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the large winning opening 2005. When the number reaches 20 or more and the main prize ball number information output signal is output multiple times, the main prize ball number information output signal is one for 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds x 2 times) seconds. Like a continuous signal, it is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

Of the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control boards. Various signals output on the 1310 side are arranged so as to be output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are each colored, and by electrically connecting the wiring having the connector provided in the same color to the output terminals PT1 to PT10, the other wiring is erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the connection from being targeted. Then, the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so as not to mix the various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and the various signals output on the main control board 1310 side. The output terminals PT1 and PT2 for this purpose are arranged in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and the output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer are provided on the external terminal board 784. By arranging in a row from the center left side to the right side, in this respect as well, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various outputs on the main control board 1310 side. It is possible to prevent accidental electrical connection with the wiring for transmitting the signal to the hall computer.

In this embodiment, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main prize ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are holed from the external terminal board 784, respectively. It is configured to tell the computer. This is, for example, a game ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game ball from the pachinko island equipment side is not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. If a big hit of 15 rounds happens to occur in the pachinko machine 1 when the remaining number is low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient. (Also, if ball clogging or ball clogging occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be resolved). Then, as described above, the number of prize balls information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side reaches 10 as the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. Since it is a signal to convey that fact for each, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 because the game ball cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game ball is not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. For example, a clerk in the hall checks a hose-shaped replenishment nozzle for supplying a game ball from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and identifies the position of the ball jam (also, it occurs in the payout device 830). By identifying the position of the ball jam and the position of the ball squeeze) and eliminating the problem, the game ball will be returned to the state of being paid out.

However, even if the clerk in the hall is working on the game, the game ball is paid out by the clerk in the hall after the 15-round jackpot is completed because the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress. When the payout control board 951 returns to the above state, the unpaid game balls are paid out one after another, and the payout control board 951 is in the period when the 15-round big hit is completed and the 15-round big hit is not generated. Outputs a prize ball number information output signal to notify that every time the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls, and transmits the signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, even though the 15-round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of gaming balls will be paid out. Therefore, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is driven and controlled by the payout control board 951 and actually paid out as a prize ball, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output by the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is based on a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning opening 2001, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect via the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784. , Adopted a mechanism to convey to the hall computer. As a result, even if the above-mentioned troubles (trouble such as ball clogging in the replenishment nozzle or the like, ball clogging in the payout device 830, ball clogging, etc.) occur, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payment in this gaming state. It is possible to accurately convey the relationship between the number of gaming balls to be released and the number of balls to be released to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Circuit of staging display drive board]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive board 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 mainly comprises the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V is a serial signal (serial data) by a differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. from the transmitter IC 1512d for directing the door frame side of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Is transmitted as a positive signal and a negative signal, and is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively. Noise can be separated from the negative signal. The positive signal and the negative signal from which noise is separated are input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. This resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the positive signal and the negative signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, and prevents the serial signal from being disturbed.

The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is restored to three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal (that is, it is restored to a parallel signal before serialization). As for the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, as described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a are each 8 bits. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are each 6 bits, a total of 18 bits, they are the upper 6 bits of each video signal.

The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V is a serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 as described above, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which a certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are also input in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits these two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. On the other hand, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The circuit is configured to connect the circuit so as to do so. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are connected. , The peripheral control board 1510 transmits to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the difference. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not input in the activation circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, so that the door is connected. The signal output from the frame-side effect transmitter IC 1512d is stored from the peripheral control board 1510 in the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V of.

The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, a door frame when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the differential circuit 1512e. From the side effect transmitter IC1512d, the serial signal (serial data) by the differential method called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is used as a positive signal and a negative signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, these two signals are input. It is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0, and is input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

As described above, the LOCKN signal output request data, which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side. During the period of display on the display device 1600 or the period of demonstrating by the game board side effect display device 1600 while waiting for customers, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display. In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 It is sent as an operation check request. Although the LOCKN signal output request data in the present embodiment is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e, the signal output from the door frame side directing transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zain Electronics stock. The data format is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal described later by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. In order to forcibly output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, from the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting the data, it is possible to confirm whether or not the device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to check whether or not there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

+ 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. 76 is supplied to the VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDS VDD terminal, PLL VDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, and the door. The GND terminal, GNDO terminal, LVDSGND application sheet, PLLGND terminal, EDGE terminal, OE terminal, MODE0, and MODE1 terminal of the frame-side staging receiver ICSDIC0 are each grounded to the ground.

The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a digital circuit, and a capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and the + 3.3V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the line.

The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and a capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the terminal and the GNDO terminal which is the ground for this TTL output, and is supplied to the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The LVDS VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for this LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDS VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power supply line.

The PLL VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and the PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLL VDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

The PDWN terminal tells that when + 3.3V is supplied (applied), the logic becomes HI and operates normally, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW and powers down. It is a terminal to convey. The PDWN terminal is supplied with +3.3V via the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded to the ground. This varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V power supply line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, at the rising edge. It is a terminal for designating either (the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or the falling edge (the logic transitions from HI to LOW), and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. By the way, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be specified.

The OE terminal indicates whether or not to allow output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and is described above in the present embodiment. As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it will not be possible to output.

The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both of them to the ground. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, are based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In a normal operating mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. be. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is established. This mode outputs a LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal to the effect that a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery) is requested to be transmitted. This shake hand mode is designed to switch automatically.

For example, three video signals (18-bit video signals), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restored to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal), a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, is abnormal for some reason. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is a damping resistor, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is used. It is input to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU1511a is a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d in order to convey to that effect to the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d when a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the image is provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 for the door frame side effect. It is transmitted to the receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) at the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d. The INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door. It may be directly connected electrically via the relay terminal board 882.

As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. It is a terminal that outputs a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the two. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 which is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and is peripheral. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In this embodiment, since the restored horizontal synchronization signal, vertical synchronization signal, and clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a DE signal that tells that the clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and the data output from the D0 terminal to the D17 terminal, which are data output terminals, are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR3 which is a damping resistor.

The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal that outputs the clock signal DCLK generated by the PLL circuit built in the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

The D0 terminal to D17 terminal have three video signals (18), a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal that outputs (bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D0 terminal to D5 terminal, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA0. The green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D6 terminal to D11 terminal, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 terminal to D17 terminal, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistor SDRA2.

The grounds of the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to each other and are the same ground. It has become.

[13. Various commands related to transmission and reception of the main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. FIG. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board of FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command, which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, is described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board are described, and the main control board receives the command. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has detection signals from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69. When input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communication with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 which are storage plates. When a device that pays out a game ball as a rental ball) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), a main control board. The prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951 include commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number), and command 10H specifies one prize ball and command 11H. In, two prize balls are specified, ..., In command 1EH, 15 prize balls are specified. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage plates) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko machine is installed. When 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the payout control board 951 is used from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to Command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be sent to, command 20H specifies one prize ball, command 21H specifies two prize balls, ..., Command 2EH wins. Fifteen spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 drives the payout motor 834 to control the payout of the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 88 (c), and a self-check is specified in this command 30H. After the command is transmitted, the transmitting side transmits the command 30H and checks whether or not the ACK signal is input when the ACK signal to be output as confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the receiving side for a predetermined period. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a status indicating the type of the command have a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). It is composed of a mode showing a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, the various commands are related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the special figure 2 tuning effect, the jackpot related, the power on, the normal electric role effect related, the notification display, and the state. It is divided into display and others.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 entrainment production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 1 tuning effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 tuning effect end, and change state designation regarding the first special symbol display 1403. These various commands are assigned "A * H" as a status and "** H" as a mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command specifies the loss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is instructed to end the special drawing 1 tuning effect, and the variable time state designation command is to instruct the probability and the time saving state. The probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state, a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state, and a low probability time saving state. It is composed of a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state. Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than that in the low probability state (normal game state), and the time saving state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. By shortening the time for variable display of the symbol compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state) and stopping and displaying the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result, the normal lottery result by the normal lottery described later at a predetermined time can be displayed. The number of stop display times is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and the period for opening and closing the pair of movable pieces of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60 is compared with the non-time saving state (normal gaming state). By increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60 for a long time, it is possible to obtain a lottery opportunity for a special symbol without reducing the number of balls held (in other words). Compared to the non-time saving state, more decisions are made as to whether or not to open / close the pair of movable pieces, and when opening / closing the pair of movable pieces, the period of opening / closing of the pair of movable pieces should be lengthened. As a result, the acceptance rate (entry rate) of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is increased).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 fluctuation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special diagram 1 synchronization effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state specification command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 entrainment production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and the classification is divided into the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69 as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named special figure 2 tuning effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 tuning effect end regarding the second special symbol display 1405. These various commands are assigned "B * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designation command specifies the miss, the specific jackpot, and the non-specific jackpot. , The end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect indicates the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Big hit related]
As shown in Fig. 89, the categories related to jackpots include jackpot opening, jackpot 1 open Nth display, jackpot 1 closed display, jackpot 1 count display, jackpot ending, jackpot symbol display, and jackpot opening. , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending commands. These various commands are assigned "C * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The jackpot opening command indicates the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is the start during the opening of the jackpot 1 in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100 shown in FIG. 60). (Opening or opening start of the Nth round of the large winning opening 2005) is instructed, and the large winning opening 1 closing display command between the rounds starts while the large winning opening 1 is closed (large starting port unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is being closed or the closing is started), and the large winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 (shown in FIG. 69). The number of game balls that have entered the jackpot 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005) is transmitted, the jackpot ending command indicates the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is the jackpot. It instructs the display of symbol information.

Further, the small hit opening command indicates the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is the start during the small hit opening (during the opening of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit, or The small hit count display command is used to indicate the start of opening), and the small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (when the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). The small hit ending command indicates the start of the small hit ending.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for opening the jackpot 1 is when the jackpot 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (starting port unit 2100). It is sent at the time of opening the Nth round of the big winning opening 2005), and the big winning opening 1 closing display command is sent at the time of closing the big winning opening 1 (starting closing of the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100). The large winning opening 1 count display command is used when the large winning opening 1 is opened and when the count changes to the large winning opening 1 (when the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 is opened and the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005). Is transmitted by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot ending, and the jackpot symbol display command is sent when the jackpot symbol display command is opened (when the jackpot unit 2100 opens the jackpot 2005). ) Is sent.

Further, the small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is transmitted at the time of opening the small hit (at the time of opening the large winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 at the time of the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium / large winning opening (when the game ball entered in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is sent. , Sent at the start of the small hit ending. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the power-on category includes commands named power-on state and power-on main control return destination. These various commands are assigned "D * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The power-on state command indicates the start of the RAM clear effect and the game state. The power-on state command is used for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Includes information instructing that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. In), the information indicating which of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) is to be restored. , Information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, and. When creating so-called max type, middle type, and Amadeji type, for example, the model code of this pachinko machine is for the copyright of which work, and what kind of game specifications (for example, probability fluctuation occurs). In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine), etc.). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is to specify the series code to specify which type is the max type, middle type, or Amadeji type indicating the model type, and to specify the copyright of the work. In addition to the copyright code of the game specification and the game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the probability change in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited. It is mainly composed of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which the above occurs.

The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The main control return destination command at power-on is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. ing.

The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is when the main control board is powered on (in addition to when the power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure. Also included.). Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, the main control side power on time process described later is executed, and the peripheral control board command in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process. In the transmission process, the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Fuzu-tuned production-related]
The normal symbol tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. It is composed of commands related to the device 1402, which are named as the start of the normal map synchronization effect, the designation of the normal symbol, the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the specification of the state at the time of fluctuation. These various commands are assigned "E * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The normal map synchronization effect start command instructs the start of the normal figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern specified in the mode, and the normal symbol designation command specifies the off, specific jackpot, and non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variable time state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and time saving states include a low probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a low probability state and a high probability time saving state indicating that the time saving state is a high probability state. It consists of a state, a low-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a low-probability state and not a time-saving state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates that it is a high-probability state and not a time-saving state (usually). As the gaming state, a low-probability non-time saving state is set).

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the normal symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of the normal symbol 1 fluctuation, the normal symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the normal symbol synchronization effect, and the normal symbol synchronization effect end command is transmitted. , Is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is confirmed), and the command for specifying the variable state is sent immediately after the normal symbol winning information is specified. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The normal electric service effect-related is related to a pair of movable pieces of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, which is opened and closed by the drive of the starting port solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. As shown in 89, it is composed of commands named opening per normal figure, open display for normal electric power, and ending per normal figure. These various commands are assigned "F * H" as a status and "** H" as a mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The opening command per normal figure indicates the start of the opening per normal figure, and the open normal power display command starts while the normal power is open (a pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per normal figure indicates the start of the ending per normal figure.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per drawing is transmitted at the start of the opening per drawing, and the opening display command is sent when the opening is open (a pair of movable pieces are left and right by driving the starting port solenoid 2107). It is transmitted at the time of expanding in the direction), and the ending command per normal figure is transmitted at the start of the ending per normal figure. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the notification display category is composed of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned a status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The winning abnormality display command is issued when a game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100 even though it is not a big hit (even though it is not a big hit) other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). Is detected by the count sensor 4005), and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, electrical in the path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. When there is a connection abnormality, it is instructed to start the connection abnormality notification, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When an electrical connection with 4005 or the like is broken or short-circuited, the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display is instructed to start, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command causes an abnormality in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69. This is to instruct the start of the magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when the above occurs. Further, when an abnormality occurs in the vibration sensor 2405, a vibration detection switch abnormality display command instructing the start of the vibration detection switch abnormality notification is transmitted.

Further, in the door opening command, the door frame 3 is directed to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70. When the door is in the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. This is to instruct the end of the door opening notification when the door is in the closed state. On the other hand, in the main body frame opening command, the main body frame 4 is directed to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The main body frame opening notification is instructed when the main body frame is opened, and the main body frame closing command is issued to the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619. It is instructed to end the main body frame opening notification when it is in the closed state.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the big winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. When there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to, the disconnection / short circuit error display command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Of these, it is transmitted when any of them is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in a closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The main body frame opening command is transmitted when the main body frame opening is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a state of being opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619), and the main body is sent. The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display division consists of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and frame status 2 command. There is. These various commands are assigned a status of "7 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, respectively, and detailed description thereof will be described later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, "7 * H" is displayed as shown in FIG. Set it as a status and set the received command as it is as a mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, the additional information "7 * H" is added to these received commands. Formates the command into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

The formatted frame state 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame state changes, and when the error release navigation is performed, the error release navigation command is sent when the error release navigation is performed, and the frame state 2 command is sent when the power is restored. , And when the frame state changes. The formatted frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related category is composed of various commands named tests. This test command is assigned "8 * H" as the status and "** H" as the mode ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). It inspects various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194).

As the transmission timing of the test command, it is transmitted at a time other than RAM clear and RAM clear when the main control board power is turned on. Specifically, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the execution and main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. others]
In other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, start opening winning, fluctuation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory look-ahead effect, and Special symbol 2 Consists of a command named memory look-ahead effect. These various commands are assigned a status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. It is determined in advance by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

The start opening winning command indicates the start of the starting opening winning effect, and is the start of the effect when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004, respectively, and the variable shortening operation end designation command is variable. The state transition from the shortened operation state to the variable shortened non-operation state is instructed, and the high-probability end designation command is instructed to shift the state from the high-probability state to the low-probability state. Is still used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 when the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 60. The number of balls that have not been held (number of holds) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is such that 0 to 4 special symbols 2 are held (the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60). The second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 conveys the number of balls (holding number) that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 The number of balls (the number of balls (reserved number) that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60 and has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400) is transmitted. Yes, the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command pre-reads the special symbol 1 hold before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Based on the first special symbol display 1403, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect for notifying the notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command has the function of holding the special symbol 2 to display the second special symbol of the display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405, it is instructed to start the look-ahead effect of pre-reading and notifying the notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent to notify the effect, and the command to specify the end of the fluctuation shortening operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the fluctuation is confirmed after the specified number of fluctuation reductions have been completed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed), and the high-probability end designation command is sent. , Sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the out-of-order stop period has elapsed) after digesting the high probability number of times in the case of "high probability N times", and the special symbol 1 storage command changes the number of balls on hold for special symbol 1. When (the game ball enters the first start port 2002 and there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400, the first start is further performed. It is transmitted when a game ball enters the mouth 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings is used for variable display of a special symbol by the first special symbol display 1403 and the number of holdings decreases). , The special symbol 2 storage command is used when the number of balls on hold for special symbol 2 operation changes (a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 displays a change in the special symbol. When there is a hold number that has not been used yet, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the hold number increases, or when the hold number increases, the special symbol changes on the second special symbol display 1405. It is sent when the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it for display), and the normal symbol storage command is sent when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 operation changes (when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the number of reserved balls is reduced), the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400 is displayed. When there is a hold number that has not yet been used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display 1402, and when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 and the hold number increases, or from the hold number, the normal symbol display 1402 When the number of reserved balls is reduced by using it to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command is sent when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 operation is increased (the game ball is placed at the first start port 2002). It is sent when the number of reserved balls has increased after entering the ball), and the special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command is issued when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 operation increases (when the number of reserved balls enters the second starting port 2004 and the number of reserved balls is increased). When it increases), it will be sent. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

By the way, as described above, the start opening winning command is used when the starting opening is won (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or when the game ball enters the first starting opening opening 2002, or the second starting opening opening. When the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 transmit to that effect mainly by voice. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment is designed to be used not only for voice notification from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also for monitoring the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command, and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 do not notify by voice.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 consists of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority is set in the order of the frame state 2.

The frame state 1 command (corresponding to the error occurrence command) includes out-of-ball, full tank, stock of 50 or more, connection error and CR not connected, and bit 0 (B0, "B") when out of ball. Represents a bit.) Is set to a value 1, a value 1 is set to bit 1 (B1) when the tank is full, a value 1 is set to bit 2 (B2) in stock of 50 or more, and a connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in the bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in the bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. Bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command are set to have a value of 1 in B5, a value of 0 in B6, and a value of 0 in B7.

The error release navigation command (corresponding to the error release command) includes a ball, payout detection sensor error, and retry error. In the case of a ball, bit 2 (B2) is set to a value of 1, and the payout detection sensor. In the case of an error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 is defective. The "retry error" indicates that the inconsistent game balls are repeatedly paid out by the retry operation. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error clear navigation command have a value of 0 for B0, a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B5, and a value of 1 for B6. And the value 0 is set in B7.

The frame state 2 command is prepared during ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command have a value of 0 for B1, a value of 0 for B2, a value of 0 for B3, a value of 0 for B4, a value of 1 for B5, a value of 1 for B6, and so on. The value 0 is set in B7.

As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power recovery, the frame state change, and the error release navigation, and the error release navigation command is transmitted at the error release navigation, and the frame state 2 command is transmitted. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control section main process of the payout control section power-on process, which will be described later.

[14. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control-side power-on processing of FIG. 92, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on processing, and the main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a random number for determining a big hit to be used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not to generate a reach (out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Random number for reach determination to be used for determination, and variation for use in determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol shown in FIG. 69, which is variablely displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. A random number for the display pattern, a random number for the jackpot symbol to be used for determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when the jackpot game state is generated, and this jackpot. A random number for determining the initial value for a big hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of a random number for a symbol, and a random number for determining a small hit game. A random number for a small hit symbol to be used for determining a small hit symbol, a random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining an initial value of this random number for a small hit symbol, and the like are prepared. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a normal symbol hit to be used for determining whether or not to open / close the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, and a random number for determining a normal symbol hit. Random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol to be used for determining the initial value of Random numbers for variable display patterns are available.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the random numbers for jackpot determination are updated by the hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by the software.

For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by the hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 69. As described above, in the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, first, the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a is set to one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU1310a. do. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a hits the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is designed to be set as a random number for judgment.

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter". The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In this embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated at the time of turning on the power, or in the process of turning on the power on the main control side, which will be described later, the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by considering the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the total is stored in the main control side power cutoff process (power down). When clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is the main control MPU1310a shown in FIG. Extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and performs the initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal symbol hit judgment random number based on the extracted ID code. It is a mechanism to execute and set this derived fixed value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value derivation process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and is a non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU1310a. The ID code is stored by storing the ID code in the first security measure that the ID code cannot be rewritten even if an external device is used, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the above and a two-step security measure by.

Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally obtains a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and inputs an ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter that illegally acquires and updates the random value for normal symbol hit judgment and the normal symbol hit judgment value match, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a'provided with the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value match is also completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in another game board 5', that is, another pachinko machine 1', so it was disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval obtained and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 60 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece possessed by the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 60. It is not possible to generate a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 by opening and closing the.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set at a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Then, the above-mentioned main control program performs the main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control program sets the RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit).

Following step S10, the main control program sets the initial value and the start setting of the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, the watchdog timer control register built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “ It is described as "WDT control register"), the timer set value is set, the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is started, and the watchdog timer clear register built in the main control MPU1310a is reached until the time measured by the main control built-in WDT1310af reaches the time set by the timer set value. Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. On the other hand, when the WDT1310af with built-in main control is started and the time is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, the timer clear setting value is set. The time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time by the WDT1310af with built-in main control by the time set by the timer set value and starting the time again. It is possible to monitor whether or not it is.

Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In this electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is started to be output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is composed of a comparator MIC 21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC 22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage between + 24V and the reference voltage or comparing the voltage between + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result becomes HI when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

In the electric power clearing process, first, the power failure clear signal is output to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, so that the power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function with its logic as LOW. Will be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latch state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is input. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately from the time the power is turned on until the specified voltage is reached. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning signal. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer). Has been done. The determination of whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is performed based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the above-mentioned D type flip-flop MIC 22, as the power failure warning signal.

If there is no power failure warning signal input even after waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on, the main control program sends a power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. Stop the output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a CLR terminal which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, with its logic as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. Is entered in. Thereby, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC 22 in the latch state. The D-type flip-flop MIC 22 outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal, which is an output terminal, when the state in which the logic is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is latched as LOW.

Following step S14, the main control program is in a state in which the RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on (when the power is turned on on the game side). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error release navigation command (first error release command) based on the operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to the main control MPU 1310a. It depends on whether or not it is done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that the operation switch 954 does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 operates. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated by determining that the RAM is cleared.

In step S16, the main control program sets the value 1 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is being operated (step S18). On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16, the main control program sets the value 0 in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute the RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) built in the main control MPU 1310a for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. It is in a state (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side). The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG determines whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability fluctuation and the unpaid prize ball stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU1310a. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs a wait time wait process (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system that controls the drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510, which is shown in FIG. 72, is activated (boot). I'm waiting until). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting.

Following step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is performed based on this power failure warning signal. When there is an input of the power failure warning signal in the determination of step S24, the main control program returns to the determination of step S24 again, and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the input of the power failure warning signal continues. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

When the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination in step S24, the main control program determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step S28, in the main control program, the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power off time processing (power off) described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When they match, this main control program determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information, checksum value (sum value), backup flag BK-FLG value, and other game backup information in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power cutoff process described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not the power is turned off, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed and a value of 0 when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 is calculated and the determination of step S30 is performed when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. , Will be described in detail later.

When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery ( Step S34). In this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in the predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state where the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the "reset" is the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the fraudulent means (for example, the cheating person is on the hem of the arm). The state in which the main control board 1310 is irradiated with the high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device) and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset and then restored is also included.

Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, checksum value (sum value), etc. are changed as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum values (sum values) do not match in step S30. Or, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power cutoff process is not normally completed, the main control program is used for all of the main control built-in RAM. Clear the area (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear process triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (the payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program performs by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Instead, the main control program may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. Further, the main control MPU 1310a performs processing when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 indicates RAM clear and the game information is erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power is turned off. When it is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit judgment based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from is performed, and this fixed value is set as the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination to be used for determining the initial value of the above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit. do.

Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channel and transmission channel) for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a. ), The communication speed is set and the presence / absence of parity is set in the transmission serial port prescaler, and the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission are set in the transmission serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control program sets the test signal output port initialization (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine test institution, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

Following step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU1310a to update the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state by hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring random numbers, the hardware random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Other values in the numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and when all the values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again. Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without duplication. When the main control MPU 1310a acquires a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when this latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a random number for jackpot determination.

Following step S48, the main control program makes reservation settings for commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to convey that the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. 89 The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, game information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information may be stored. be. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later. A detailed description of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described later.

Following step S50, the main control program sets interrupt enable (step S52). With this setting, the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control program receives an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, that is, when the main control side main process is started. Execution of the game control side RAM clear process triggered by receipt is restricted (normal operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to input the detection signal input by the operation of the operation switch 954 to the error release navigation command for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on as described above. The RAM clear process is executed with the input as an opportunity (operation control means when the power is turned on on the game control side), and the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted even if the error release navigation command is input after the predetermined time has elapsed (the execution of the RAM clear process is restricted). (Game control side normal operation control means), it is handled as a release switch for canceling the error notification associated with the generated error. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used to cancel the error generated in the payout operation, is used as a game storage unit instead of the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit) for a predetermined time from the time when the power is turned on. Functions as an operation unit for executing RAM clear processing for starting initialization of the main control built-in RAM (and the payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later), or after the lapse of the predetermined time, a game It can function as an operation unit for canceling an error that occurs in the ball payout operation.

Next, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S54 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step S54, the main control program performs the non-winning random number update process (step S56). In this non-winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for reach determination, random number for variable display pattern, random number for determining initial value for big hit symbol, random number for determining initial value for small hit symbol, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, the random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by the software. The above-mentioned random number for determining normal symbol hit, random number for determining initial value for determining normal symbol, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processes of steps S54 to S56 are referred to as "main control side main process".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process in which the output of the power failure clear signal is started is performed in the power failure clear process in step S14. As a result, the main control program can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop MIC 22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S60, the main control program includes a start port solenoid 2107, an attacker solenoid 2108, a first special symbol indicator 1403, a second special symbol indicator 1405, and a first special hold number indicator 1404 shown in FIG. 69. , The second special hold number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407, and the like are stopped (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value described above, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control program sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit), so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) from being updated.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. After that, the main control program again performs this main control side power-on processing under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power cutoff process".

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU1310a) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the main control side power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S30, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S32, whether or not the main control side power cutoff process is normally completed. Is inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

Here, it will be described that the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, the case where the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22 and the subsequent processing is proceeded. The problem in is explained.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power supply from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The charged charge is applied as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. That is, even if the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power outage, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V, so that the power supply from the pachinko island equipment is supplied. The main control side power cutoff process can be completed within a period of about 7 ms from the time when the power is cut off. This is because a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs when the player is playing a game, that is, when the main control side main process or the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed, and the pachinko island equipment is used. When the power is cut off, the main control side power cutoff process can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72. The waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the device 460 starts (boots) is started to be timed, and immediately before the waiting time is reached. If a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the charge charged in the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a, but within a period of about 7ms, step S42. The interrupt initial setting is performed in step S52, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Therefore, even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side It may not be possible to complete the power-off processing on the main control side in the power-on processing. Therefore, the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is not stored, and the main control side power-on processing is started again at the time of power recovery.

Then, at the time of this power recovery, the main control side power-on processing is started, the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure, and then the main control built-in RAM is completed in step S28. When the value calculated based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs are compared and judged in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, even if the operation switch 954 is operated by the hall clerk at the time of power restoration and there is no intention indication by the hall clerk to clear the RAM, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared). ) There is a problem that it will be.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, the process is provided. The determination in step S24 is returned again, and the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure warning signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. Although the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20 before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process in S22), the determination in step S24 is returned again and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. Therefore, the game can be advanced. It is not possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and the check sum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it is determined that the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 and the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64 match. Therefore, there is no need to initialize the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized at the time of power recovery.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), the pachinko machine is being played while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is proceeding with the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, the backup process for storing the game information due to the progress of this game by supplying the power supply by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU1310a. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power cutoff processing composed of the infinite loop, the main control MPU 1310a is main. When the control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the value calculated and stored in the checksum in step S64) match. Since the determination is made, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

Further, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control built-in RAM is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af to reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. While the main control side power cutoff processing can be started again without updating at all, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, until now. As you can see, it is possible to reliably complete the power cutoff process on the main control side within the "power supply securing period in the event of a momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by the hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the Pachinko Island facility is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure during the process of turning on the power of the main control side at the time of power recovery, and the main control MPU 1310a is used. The charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal, as + 5V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Therefore, if the main control side power cutoff process cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If the power failure warning signal is input, the determination returns to step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, step S24 By repeatedly performing the determination of, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT1310af activated in step S12, and the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared again. By making it impossible to start the time measurement, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af. The main control MPU1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af by such software, so that the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then in step S52. It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process (control flow) in which interrupt permission is set and the timer interrupt process on the main control side is started, which will be described later. I adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure in this way, the part covered by software so that the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM is not changed at all, and the main control side power supply The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) can be divided into two parts, one is the part covered by hardware so that the disconnection process is surely completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In order to convey the command, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. As described above, this power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 69. In other words, the problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the main control return destination command at power-on is turned on is not performed in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the screen of the jackpot game state (for example, the screen of the jackpot game effect) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 60, the main control board 1310 Drives the attacker solenoid 2108 to cause a momentary power failure or a power failure when the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is opened by the opening / closing member 2005a, and when the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 steps. In the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. The driving of the solenoid 2108 is started, and the large winning opening 2005 shifts from the closed state to the open state by the opening / closing member 2005a.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be subjected to the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and restored according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state instructed by the power-on state command received from. It is not possible to display at all which round of the jackpot game state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 and is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a large winning opening 1 count display command that conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is issued. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, the number of rounds) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310 finishes the fourth round (fourth round) in the big hit game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is stopped and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2005a. Peripheral control from the main control board 1310 to indicate the transition from the closed state to the closed state (that is, the start of closing between the rounds of the large winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100). When the transmission is transmitted to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2005a. A command to indicate the transition from the state to the open state (that is, the start of opening the fifth round of the grand prize opening 2005) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. do. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of starting 5 rounds of the big hit game state from the screen according to the above-mentioned probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be.

Further, for example, a screen for informing the player that the game ball is in a game state in which the game ball can be accepted and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, that the movable piece is expanded) is displayed to the second start port 2004. The main control board 1310 drives the start port solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 displays and controls the display (screen to be transmitted to the player) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. (Ii) When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the pair of movable pieces of the starting port 2004 are expanded in the left-right direction, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 becomes the main in step S34. The start port solenoid 2107 is restored to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the control built-in RAM. The drive is started and the pair of movable pieces rises substantially vertically to the state of being expanded in the left-right direction.

However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers at the time of power recovery, so that a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which the gaming ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 on the game board side and returned, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the screen indicating the presence in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and the game ball is received at the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs at the time of power restoration. In some cases, it may be forgotten that the game state is possible, and in such a case, the game state is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen instructing the game (that is, the screen instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player cannot know what kind of game the player should play.

As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the gaming state immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), a power-on state command is used. And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-mentioned example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is released from the state of being closed by the opening / closing member 2005a. Since it is possible to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the state is changed to the current state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen that specifies that it is the 4th round of the jackpot game state (that is, the screen showing how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but in a big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2005a. A screen that tells you that there is a message (for example, a screen that tells the player that "It's a big hit. The big prize opening is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big prize opening.") It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to play a game in which the game ball is inserted into the grand prize opening 2005 after the power is restored. For example, in the above-mentioned example, in a state where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is favorable to the player, a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the game returns. When electricity is turned on, a screen telling that the starting port solenoid 2107 is started to be driven and the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction as the return destination of the main control board 1310 (for example, "movable pieces" The peripheral control board 1510 displays the display device 1600 on the game board side to convey the message "The game is being expanded. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the open start port." It is possible to instruct a player who sits in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the area to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored. As a result, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and the power is restored thereafter, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310 side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine misunderstands that the pachinko machine's system seems to be in a frozen state and has failed when a momentary power failure or power outage occurs and then the power is restored. It can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is composed of the above-mentioned backup processes, steps S58 to S68, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control side power cutoff process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on are created as shown in FIG. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in a state of being memorized in. In these commands, in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later, the power-on state command is first transmitted, and then the power-on main control return destination command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the power-on state command is issued as the first command from the main control board 1310. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated to clear the RAM, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power is generated. (Including the recovery time), any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving states, high-probability time-saving states, low-probability non-time-saving states, and high-probability non-time-saving states (probability and time-saving states) is restored. It is composed of information indicating whether to do so and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem will be described when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

As mentioned above, the model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and amadeji type as the pachinko machine 1 (to be exact, the main control board 1310). In addition to the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs), the number of changes in the special symbol is limited (for example,). It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (so-called ST machine), etc., in which the probability fluctuation occurs after 30 times or 70 times).

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works may coexist.
Then, the worker of the production line is responsible for the copyright of any of the copyrights of the multiple types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F). It is difficult to know whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line in order to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misunderstandings that it is flowing to the production line. For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is on the manufacturing line. It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and for the copyright of the same work, any model type (max type, middle type, or Amadeji type). It is also not possible to confirm whether it is a type) and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine that, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed. The 1310 will be sent to the game board assembly line for mounting the main control board 1310 on the game board 5 with the 1310 mixed. Therefore, the worker of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on but also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit the power-on state command including the information indicating the power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified into the power-on and the power-on main control return destination command shown in FIG. And are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Then, these commands are transmitted in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which will be described later.

As a result, the worker of the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device becomes the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, the above-mentioned max type, middle type, indicating the model type, which constitutes the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. And the series code for specifying which type of Amadeji type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state will be In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited, and the game specification code. By visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the above, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 is for the copyright of which work, and which of the same work is copyrighted. What type of machine (max type, middle type, and Amadeji type), and what kind of game specifications (when probability fluctuations occur, that state will continue until the next big hit game state occurs. It is also possible to determine whether it is a game specification or ST machine). As a result, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor and accurately determining the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, the worker can sort each of the main control boards 1310 for the copyright of the work and succeed. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the worker of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 to the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process shown in FIGS. 92 and 93.

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, on the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the timer interrupt process on the main control side, which is the routine, the second register bank from the first register bank used in the main control main process in the power-on process on the main control side is used. Switch the register bank to the register bank of. In this embodiment, it is not necessary to save each register on the stack when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, is started.

Following step S100, the main control program performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later is the normal time described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is lit according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. Performs time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the payer ACK signal indicating that the signal has been normally received is input. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step S102, the main control program performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001 shown in FIG. 60, as shown in FIG. 60. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005, and FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 60. The detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball entering the second start port 2004 shown in FIG. 60, in FIG. 60. The detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 shown, and the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 for detecting fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. 69, FIG. The fact that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted by the vibration sensor 2405 that detects the fraudulent act that caused vibration to the game machine shown in 69 and the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 is read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and the detection from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 and other categories is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004. And the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

In this embodiment, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2001, and a detection signal from the count sensor 4005 that detects the game ball that has entered the large winning opening 2005. , A detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2002, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2004. , And the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 is first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed. The second time, each is read again. Then, the result read for the second time and the result read for the first time are compared. It is determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read in the fourth time is compared with the result read in the third time. It is determined again whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no game ball.

As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program first detects the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. False detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. by performing a total of two readings, a double reading for comparison over the third time and a double reading for comparison over the second to fourth times. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 is improved. be able to.

Following step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining an initial value for a jackpot symbol, which is updated by the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. .. On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter counts up only every time the winning random number update process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for determining the normal symbol hit and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit are also updated by this winning random number update process.

For example, the counter that updates the random number for normal symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value. The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination, the random number for determining the initial value for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that updates the random number for determining the normal symbol hit. ..

In the present embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are not used in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number is updated in the random number update process and the random number update process in step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is the routine, but the processing time of this routine becomes uneven each time the interrupt timer occurs. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for reading the input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and paying out the game ball based on the input information is created and paid out as the prize ball. When the number of scheduled game balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey that fact, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or mainly. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 may be created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball. Has reached 10 balls, so in order to convey that fact, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Or, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. Create a self-check command to send to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command to pay out 15 balls as a prize ball, the number of balls to be paid out will be added to the next number of balls. In the prize ball control process, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls by reading input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area is added, and the number of balls of the added game balls is added. When has reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to convey that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S108, the main control program performs frame command reception processing (step S110). On the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into the status display shown in FIG. To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on the detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the above-mentioned frame command reception process, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to convey that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display in FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error cancellation). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command referred to here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error release navigation command corresponds to the first error release command.

Following step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005). , A winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 as an abnormal state is created, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S112, the main control program performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. (Random number value) is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a, and the acquired random number value is set as a random number for jackpot determination. Then, whether or not the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. It is determined (determined whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the probability variation hit determination value (determination of whether or not a probability variation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 with a high probability. A value of 32767 is set, and the value is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a) and the main control built-in. When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the ROM matches, the random number for jackpot determination (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU1310a). Is included in the jackpot judgment range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 4002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol is displayed according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is set so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area. do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as related to the big hit shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, big winning opening 1). A closing display command, a big winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. The output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set to open and close the 2005a, and it is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the number of times (round) that the big winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is twice. When this is the case, the output of the lighting signal to the two-round display lamp 1407a is set so as to light the two-round display lamp 1407a of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. When the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b is set so as to turn on the 15-round indicator lamp 1407b of the round indicator 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the state display 1401 is set so as to be stored or the presence or absence of the occurrence of the probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color, and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S114, the main control program performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

The gate information storage area is provided with a 0th section to a 3rd section (4 sections), and gate information is stored in the order of the 0th section, the 1st section, the 2nd section, and the 3rd section. It has become like. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, the gate information is stored in the 3rd section of the gate information storage when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal. do.

The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first to second sections of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the 0th section. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-mentioned gate information is set so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the holding ball. The output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is taken out from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is judged whether or not it matches the judgment value per normal symbol (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are expanded in the left-right direction, so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variation display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified to be related to the normal symbol tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. In addition to storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol, and the output information is described above. It is stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric service effect shown in FIG. Is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. , When the value of the extracted normal symbol hit judgment random number does not match the normal symbol hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation is based on the above-mentioned normal symbol variation display pattern random number. A display pattern is determined, various commands classified in relation to the normal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, stored as transmission information in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area, and normally according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the symbol display 1402, and the output information is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area.

Following step S116, the main control program performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program, for example, outputs a main payment ACK signal when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. A drive signal is output to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens and closes the opening and closing member 2005a of the big winning opening 2005, and a drive signal is sent to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as time-saving and medium-time information output information and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the payout control board 951.

Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program reads transmission information from the transmission information storage area described above and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in FIG. 1 related to the synchronization effect and various commands classified in the special figure 2 synchronization effect-related, as shown in FIG. 89, created by the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. A big prize is won based on the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball that has entered the big prize opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected by various commands classified into commands and big hits. Large winning mouth 1 count display command equivalent to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric power production, Fig. 90 Various commands classified into notification display (door open command, door frame close command, main body frame open command, main body frame close command, etc.) and various commands classified into status display (frame state 1 command, error cancellation) shown in Navi commands and frame status 2 commands), various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And the sum value calculated by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the main control program transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which configure various commands as main peripheral serial data. As described above, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as + 5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 shifts at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310a a to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. It can be transferred to the register 41aea and transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main peripheral serial data. When the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the power is restored in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the power-on processing on the main control side shown in FIG. In addition, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information, as shown in FIG. , Status, status, which configures the power-on status command, sends to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configures the main control return destination command when power-on. The mode and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the game information is read from the game backup information in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the process when the power of the main control side is turned on, and the game information is accommodated. Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after the transmission of various commands according to the game information is completed, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error generation command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control unit). ) Is sent a frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command) (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 An error release navigation command (second error release command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 A main body frame opening command (second main body frame opening command) is transmitted to (effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 ( A main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit) (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the main body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Further, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives a door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 by the receiving port of the RXA terminal, the peripheral control board 1510 (effect control). A door closing command (second door closing command) is transmitted to (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT1310af in step S22 is cleared by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU1310a. As a result, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT1310af is cleared. Then, by restarting the time counting by the main control built-in WDT1310af, the main control MPU1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT1310af.

As described above, the main control board 1310 is a backup for storing the game information due to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information for which the backup process is executed as the return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310. In this routine, the peripheral control board 1510 issues the main control return destination command at power-on in FIG. 89, which indicates the drive state of the start port solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108, which are the electrical drive sources by the port output process of step S118 in this routine. It can be output to. That is, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. Based on the power-on recovery information set in the work area of the control built-in RAM, the power-on state command and the power-on main A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is used as the main peripheral serial data. Is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then the peripheral control board 1510 is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value to configure the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration to the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the main control return destination command when the power is turned on from the main control board 1310. The effect can be displayed in the display area of. As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the player is playing a game, and then the power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure is restored immediately after the power is restored. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a solid state, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by being seen by the player in such a state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a failure by promptly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored.

Further, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, FIG. 92. The entire area of the main control built-in RAM is surely cleared in step S38 in the main control side power-on processing. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is made in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the same process, the power-on state command classified into the power-on as shown in FIG. And the main control return destination command at power-on are created and stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main peripheral serial data. The main control board is inspected in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which is sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then constitutes the main control return destination command when the power is turned on. Send to the inspection device of the process. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process constitutes information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , The series code for specifying which of the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and Amadeji type indicating the model type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications. (For example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is limited (ST). Based on the game specification code for specifying the machine), etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process.

[16-1. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 95. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs the peripheral control unit power-on processing as shown in FIG. 95. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the staging control program performs initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the staging control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output from the main control board 1310 in, for example, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later by setting the interrupt enable, as shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes possible to receive various commands such as a command related to the control of the game effect and a command related to the state of the pachinko machine 1.

In the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is backed up by Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc. 1fr) is compared, and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), is compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. ), The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms), and the production backup information (1ms), which is the content backed up in Bank4 (1ms), are compared and compared. When the contents match, the effect backup information (1fr), which is the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the normally used storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and , When the production backup information (1 ms), which is the content stored in Bank 1 (1 ms) for Bank 0 (1 ms), is copied back and used as a hot start, but the compared contents do not match ( That is, when there is a mismatch), the value 0 is forcibly written to each of the normally used storage areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), to make a cold start.

Further, in the hot start / cold start determination process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73 is also backed up by Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) are compared, and the effect backup information (SRAM), which is the content backed up in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM), in the backup second area 1511dc is compared. When the compared contents match, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73. ) Is copied back to make a hot start, while when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value is set with respect to Bank0 (SRAM), which is a normally used storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to make it a cold start. Following such a hot start or cold start, a value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 to clear zero. After performing this initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72, and resets to the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

Following step S1000, the staging control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the date and the time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. 72, and FIG. 73 In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in the above, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage unit, and the current time information is set in the time information storage unit. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 so that the brightness of the LED is included in the acquired brightness setting information. The processing of adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 to turn it on is performed. As described above, the brightness setting information includes brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range in which the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, ranges from 100% to 70% in 5% increments. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600, is included.

In the luminance setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75%, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is turned on by adjusting the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. It lights up by adjusting the brightness. In the brightness setting process of this liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 described above is performed. It is not done at all. This is because a correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% each time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent it from being done.

In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM4165aa of the RTC4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after the current time information acquisition process is performed so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1002, the staging control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the part V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. There is.

Following step S1006, the staging control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU1511a. I try not to take it.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the staging control program performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the staging control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the staging control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 72. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is started, the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is shown in FIG. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 is created by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the transmission data storage area 1511caa on the lamp drive board side. The first byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the start address is sent to the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to and write to the transmit buffer register of. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side emission clock signal SL-CLK to synchronize with 1 byte of the transmission shift register. Data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board, the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and plays a game. In synchronization with the board-side emission clock signal SL-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Further, in the lamp data output processing, the staging control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. 72. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the transmission data storage area for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73. Door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by the lamp data creation process described later. It is in the set state.

Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of serial I / O port for frame decoration drive amplifier board LED as a requirement factor of peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and transmission data storage area for frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED. The first byte of the door-side emission data STL-DAT stored at the start address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the I / O port and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK of the transmission shift register. Transmission of 1 byte of data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED). The 1-byte data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the 1-byte data is exhausted in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side emission data STL-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511cab for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED is divided into 1 byte each, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is written by transferring the data to the transmission buffer register of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port via the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmission buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side emission clock signal STL-CLK, for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 410 based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, etc. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is displayed as a game effect. It is decided as appropriate whether or not it is reflected in.

Following step S1014, the staging control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and 2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP1512a. It is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output processing, when drawing exceeding the drawing capacity of the sound source built-in VDP1512a is performed, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a delay in the processing time, but although so-called frame dropping occurs, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 by the lamp data output processing in step S1012. Various effects from the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by the effect of the plurality of LEDs and the plurality of LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production by music and sound effects according to.

Following step S1016, the staging control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP1512a in the sound data creation process described later to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of notification sounds and notification sounds are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP1512a is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c faces the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data in which the right audio data is a positive signal and a negative signal. At the same time as transmitting, the left side audio data is transmitted toward the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as differential serial data having a positive signal and a negative signal. As a result, music, sound effects, and the like that match various effects are reproduced in stereo from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the notification sound and the notification sound are also reproduced in stereo.

Following step S1018, the staging control program performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the staging control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data is stored in the sound source built-in VDP1512a. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the light emission data at which number from the first light emission data is emitted from various LEDs. Update the pointer to indicate whether it is an aspect.

Further, in the scheduler update process, sound data such as music and sound effects, and sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in a time series constituting the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae are instructed. The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data is output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a from the first sound command data among the sound command data.

Further, in the scheduler update process, from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. Update the pointer to indicate which drive data is to be output. Electrical drive source The drive data of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid that constitutes the schedule data is the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt that is repeatedly executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. Updated with motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive process that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. It updates the pointer to the data and updates the pointer each time it executes its own processing. That is, since the drive data instructed by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, the pointer is originally instructed in the motor and solenoid drive processing for some reason. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be used, the drive data that should be originally instructed is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process.

Following step S1020, the staging control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program receives information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. The command is analyzed for various commands received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing (command receiving means) described later (command analysis means). The effect control program includes screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, and sound based on information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. do. Further, in the effect control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command for instructing the start of the start port winning effect, and the number of reserved symbols. A normal symbol memory command for identifying (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of the symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start hold changes, and a large prize opening 2005 The large winning opening 1 count display command (large winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame state 1 command (second error occurrence command,) indicating the content of full tank shown in FIG. It analyzes whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command (command analysis means), and recognizes which game state it is currently in. Further, in this effect control program, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing are the main body frame open command, the main body frame close command, the door open command, or the door frame close. Analyze whether it is a command or not. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc in the reception command analysis processing. , The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cc. The various commands are classified into, as shown in FIG. Various commands to be executed, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric function production, various commands classified to be related to the normal electric service production, various commands classified to the notification display shown in FIG. 90, and the above-mentioned door frame opening command. , Door frame closing command, main body frame opening command, main body frame closing command, error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the second error canceling command), frame status 1 command (corresponding to the second error occurrence command), etc. There are various commands that are classified, various commands that are classified as test-related, and various commands that are classified as others.

Following step S1022, the staging control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process in step S1022 includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90, various commands are included. Peripheral control unit 1511 sets the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification, to the peripheral control unit 1511. It is extracted from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Further, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above is classified into the state display shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error release navigation command (second error release command), for example, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side. The effect display device 1600 (effect device), the door frame side effect display device 460 (effect device), and the lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and the speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (the effect device). Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the staging control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program acquires the current time information in step S1002 and sets it in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, and stores the information in the calendar information storage unit. The stored calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the staging control program performs pre-reading staging control processing (step S1027). The look-ahead effect control process executes the process related to the look-ahead effect based on the effect command analyzed in the receive command analysis process in step S1022. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, when a special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or a special symbol 2 storage look-ahead effect command (hereinafter, “look-ahead effect command”) is received, the look-ahead effect is executed. Make settings. The details of the look-ahead staging control process will be described later.

The look-ahead effect command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when the game ball wins in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. In the present embodiment, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the look-ahead effect command, the look-ahead effect execution flag is set in the receive command analysis process in step S1022. In the look-ahead effect control process, if the look-ahead effect execution flag is set, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the content of the look-ahead effect command. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the pre-reading effect command is received from the main control board 1310, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect is actually executed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Then, when the look-ahead effect is executed, the mode of the hold display of the start storage is changed as the look-ahead effect (normal look-ahead effect). In addition, after the normal look-ahead effect is executed, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a continuous look-ahead effect is executed in which the mode of the hold display is changed every time the start memory in which the variable display is executed in advance is exhausted. do. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect is performed, and at the same time, it is determined whether or not to execute a continuous look-ahead effect. The predetermined condition may be, for example, a case where the number of undigested start memories is a certain number or more, or a case where the expectation that the result of the variable display game based on the start memory to be read ahead is a big hit is high. You may.

It should be noted that the content of the look-ahead effect not only changes the display mode of the start memory, but also displays the display effect on the door frame side effect display device 460 such as changing the character display and the background, the light emission of the lamp, and the sound output from the speaker. , It may be an effect such as the movement of a movable body.

Following step S1027, the staging control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. The game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 based on the light emission data. The DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. At the same time, the door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is provided to the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511. Alternatively, it is created by extracting from various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and set in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73.

Following step S1028, the staging control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data, creates sprite data, and creates a game board side effect display device. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the staging control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. Sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU1511a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to control the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time this sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. 73 is activated to adjust the volume. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the knob portion of 4140a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from the value 0 to the value 1023. In this embodiment, the value of 1024 steps is divided into seven and managed as the board volume 0 to 6, the board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the board volume 0 to the board. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The VDP1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and the sound data is transmitted as serialized audio data in the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

In addition, the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the rotation operation of the knob, and the sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is built in by programming the volume from mute to maximum volume. The VDP1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the substrate volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and can smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 4140a to set the volume low, the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem has occurred in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a loud volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk and the like from becoming less likely to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's fraudulent activity due to the notification sound. In addition, based on the current board volume set by adjusting the volume based on the rotation operation of the knob, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so that it does not interfere with music or sound effects, while the advertising sound is played. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be produced as more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

Following step S1032, the staging control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program converts the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 into the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc. In addition to copying and backing up each, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511ca, which are included in the Bank 0 (1fr). Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc as the effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae as the effect backup information (1fr). Copy at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cc by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and specify the copy from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and specifies Bank0 (1fr). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1fr) in the second area 1511cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr), the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1fr).

Further, in the backup process, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is backed up for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit routine process is executed. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is set to Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db at high speed by using the effect information (RAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the effect backup information (SRAM). And the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and specify the copy from the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the terminal address of) are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in the Bank0 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to the Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc, and specifies the copy to the Bank0 (SRAM). ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (SRAM) in the second area 1511dc. All are copied in order from, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (RAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (RAM) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511dc (Bunk4). All copies are made in order from the start address of SRAM).

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -The value 0 is set in FLG and initialized, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from setting the value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. Peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU1511a can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 96 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit stationary processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. When the execution of the process is completed, the value is set to 0.

When the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). End this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been executed. Occasionally, in step S1050, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, but this is because the V blank signal is input and the V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed. When the value 1 is set in the signal detection flag VB-FLG, the peripheral control unit steady processing currently being executed is executed as the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since it is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 95 is steady in step S1009. By setting the value 1 to the processing flag SP-FLG, it is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the peripheral control unit power supply in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit V blank, which is this routine, indicates that the execution of peripheral control unit steady processing is completed by setting the value 0 to the flag SP-FLG during steady processing in step S1038 in the on-time processing (peripheral control unit steady processing). By transmitting to the signal interrupt processing, whether or not the constant processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, that is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. It is designed to determine whether it is completed or not. In other words, it is a measure when the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so that the processing fails.

As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady processing this time, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. It will be in a state of waiting until the V blank signal of is input. That is, the time for executing the current peripheral control unit steady processing that has failed the processing is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by starting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady processing, but if the peripheral control unit steady processing of this time that the above-mentioned processing failed exists, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is 64 times. It is designed to be executed only 32 times. That is, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 97. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 95, in which the 1ms interrupt timer is activated in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms timer interrupt is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is the signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal. , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation processing in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive process, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in a time series constituting the schedule data. Of the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72 according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. The pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in the time series, and the pointer is updated every time the motor and solenoid drive process is executed.

Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame-decorated drive amplifier board motor is started, first, the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c is input. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the effect operation unit 400 based on the drive data instructed by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series. The door-side motor drive data STM-DAT is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the motor on the amplifier board side. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored at the start address of the region 1511caf is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK to transmit the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is generated (in this embodiment, the serial I / O for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor). The 1-byte data written in the transmit buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmit shift register, and the 1-byte data is exhausted in the transmit buffer register and becomes empty.), Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa When the bus is not used, the remaining door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the transmission data storage area 1511caf for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor is stored in byte by byte, external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller. The serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor is written by transferring to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai. The data of the transmitted buffer register is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board is used. Continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor.

Further, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Here, too, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. When the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is started, first, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the electrical drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the external peripheral control RAM 1511c are configured. Of the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a series, a motor for moving various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 based on the drive data indicated by the pointer. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting the drive signal to the or solenoid is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is also shown in the figure. It is set in the transmission data storage area 1511cag on the motor drive board side of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in 73. The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the start address of the transmission data storage area 1511ca on the motor drive board side. The first byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to be one of the transmission shift registers. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register for the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is used). The written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register, and the transmission buffer register runs out of 1-byte data and becomes empty.) The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is using the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag is sent byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the data of the written transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. In synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, 1-byte data of the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 can be acquired.

Following step S1106, the staging operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input. The operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511kai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the peripherals shown in FIG. 73 are created. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. , That is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Drawing state information acquisition From the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the storage area 1511cak, the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are acquired, and the effect display device on the door frame side. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cc and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively, and backed up. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control SRAM 1511d are copied to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. Each time it is backed up, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, and movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah included in Bank 0 (1 ms) to be backed up. , And the effect information (1 ms), which is the content stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 kai, is used as the effect backup information (1 ms) around Bank 1 (1 ms) and Bank 2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511 cc. The control DMA controller 1511ac copies at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank 3 (1 ms) and Bank 4 (1 ms) in the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). All the stored contents are continuously copied in order from the start address of Bank1 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 cab by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is the peripheral control DMA controller. Specify a copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the request factor of 1511ac to Bank2 (1ms) of the backup first area 1511cc, and use Bank0 (1ms) from the content stored in the start address of Bank0 (1ms). ), The contents stored in the terminal address are copied continuously by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 2 (1 ms) in the backup first area 1511 kb.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies a copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1ms) is specified. ), The contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte). The start address of Bank3 (1 ms) in the second area 1511 cc. Copy everything in order from, and specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) as the requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Then, the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) are continuously backed up by predetermined bytes (for example, 1 byte) in Bank4 of the second area 1511cc (Bunk4). Copy everything in order from the start address of 1ms).

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 95, various processes related to the above-mentioned effects of steps S1012 to S1032 are executed as the progress of the effect within a period of about 33.3 ms. are doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1ms timer interrupt processing, restarting the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms Timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU1511a and the sound source built-in VDP1512a Even in the production lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[16-1--4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control to incorporate the main peripheral serial data into the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the receive buffer by the serial I / O port for the board, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte, and the total is used. Is assigned the calculated sum value.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 98 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, within the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received, the peripheral area is used. 1 byte of information received from the receive buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU1511a is taken in (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the receive buffer, and when the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data is fetched from the receive buffer, the value is 1, and the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data is set. When it is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data is taken out from the receive buffer, it becomes a value 3. The initial value 0 of the reception counter SRXC is set when the power is turned on or the like.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data, has been fetched from the receive buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data are sequentially input from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

When the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3 in step S1206, that is, a mode in which the status is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, the mode is still the second byte of the main cycle serial data, and the third byte of the main cycle serial data. When the sum values are not sequentially fetched from the receive buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main cycle serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data can be received is set.

On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3 in step S1206, that is, the mode which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data following the status which is the first byte of the main cycle serial data, and 3 of the main cycle serial data. When the sum value, which is the byte th, is sequentially taken out from the receive buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data already taken out from the receive buffer in step S1202 are regarded as numerical values and the total (sum value). ) Is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step). S1214). The thumb value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the game balls rub against each other and are charged, they are electrostatically discharged and generate noise, so that the pachinko machine 1 is affected by the noise. It is in a slingshot environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the status allocated as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data on the peripheral control unit 1511 side are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is judged whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is affected by noise and changed to the main peripheral serial data different from the normal one between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. be able to.

In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main peripheral serial data is received. The status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are shown in FIG. 73, and the reception command storage area 1511cc of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. (Step S1216), and the routine is terminated. This receive command storage area 1511cc is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main cycle serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main cycle serial data are the receive command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cc. This "peripheral control unit receive ring buffer" is a buffer used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected, and data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when the end of the buffer is reached, it returns to the beginning. Remember. The peripheral control MPU1511a is allocated as the status allocated as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data received when stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216, and as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. The mode is stored in association with the specified mode, and the sum value allocated as the third byte is discarded.

On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received is exceeded. Occasionally, or in step S1214, if the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already fetched from the receive buffer in step S1202, and the sum value calculated in step S1212 do not match, this routine is used as it is. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal executed when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, which is shown in FIG. 75, is input from the main control board 1310. Interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates a 2-microsecond timer (step S1320), and a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning) is started. It is determined whether or not the signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1320 has elapsed 2 microseconds. When 2 microseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. When the signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is the routine, is started.

When the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is started in step S1304 and the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off in sequence. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU1511a can operate even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU1511a can receive the commands being transmitted for a period of at least 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the reception command storage area 1511cc (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is started. ) Stores the received command.

Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup process of this command, the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in the Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

Briefly explaining the high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is peripheral. The request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac specifies that the content stored in the reception command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) is copied to the reception command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc. Then, from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example). 1 byte) in succession, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the first area 1511cc, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify a copy of the contents stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the receive command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc, and set it to Bank0 (1fr). From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr), a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) is continuous. Then, all copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cc.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cc included in the Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in the Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify the copy to the received command storage area to be stored, and store the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) in the terminal address of the received command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All the contents are copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the second area 1511cc, which is continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), and the peripheral control MPU core. The content stored in the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank 0 (1fr) as a requirement factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is transferred to the reception command storage area included in Bank 4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specify a copy, and specify the contents from the contents stored in the start address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the receive command storage area 1511cc included in Bank0 (1fr). All copies are made in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc in succession of bytes (for example, 1 byte).

Following step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) has been input (step S1312). When the power failure warning signal is input in this determination, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. ..

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely in this way, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e. Is not output, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

In this way, when the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues in the infinite loop as determined by step S1312, the WDT clear processing is executed in step S1314 to perform peripheral control immediately before the power failure state occurs. The MPU1511a is not reset. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure warning signal is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear process is not executed. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is the routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs for more than a period of 2 microseconds, the determination in step S1302 is passed. If the input of the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not continued and is canceled in the infinite loop by the determination by S1312, the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to deal with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation process]
Next, the LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one of the drawing state information acquisition processes in step S1110 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation process, the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, this LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame provided in the effect display drive board 4450. This is a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal history creation process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 has the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 has a capacity, and the history of the LOCKN signal is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511c as the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. It is remembered.

Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , Requests transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is not abnormal data (normal). Data), and predetermined data for confirming (recovering) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the pattern (SYNC pattern) is not requested to be transmitted.

When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is used as the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7 one bit at a time.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine is terminated.

On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, the LOCKN signal detection history information is shifted (step S1508). In the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, the same processing as the shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read in step S1500 is performed. Signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on. Shifts from to the most significant bit B7 bit by bit.

When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set in the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine is terminated.

In this way, each time this LOCKN signal history creation process is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process to be executed as one of the warning processes in step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem between the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the connection failure determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73, as shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). As described above, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. As described above, in this LOCKN signal, the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. It is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. And, that is, a signal to be output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

Following step S1520, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and in the present embodiment, it is "00001111B (" B "represents a bit)", and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and B3 to B0 of the lower 4 bits have a value of 1. In the determination in step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value do not match, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the routine is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match, the peripheral control board 1510 There is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Is determined and the value 1 is added to the communication check counter CC-CNT (increment, step S1524). The communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times in the determination of step S1522 that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem each time this routine is executed. (Counting the cumulative number of times). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. It is designed to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT immediately before the moment or power failure.

Following step S1524, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, but the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number of times. When the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, the communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value 0 (step S1528), and this routine is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1526, it is determined that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set in the communication error flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is terminated. The communication error flag CC-FLG is the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. It is a flag indicating whether or not a problem has definitely occurred. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state of being in the state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to a value of 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, and the power is restored. At times, it is restored to the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG immediately before the moment or power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery process]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one of the warning processes of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. This connection recovery process is executed following the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. And, that is, when a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, while the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that fact.

When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95, as shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step). S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, the number of screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is instructed to be output to the sound source built-in VDP1512a. To determine if the pointer has been updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the effect is proceeding along the screen generation schedule data, so it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is running, while the screen generation schedule. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointer updates are completed, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been started. In this determination, a period during which the start-up screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state are performed. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the customer is waiting or during the period during which the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed, the process proceeds to step S1542 described later, while the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side. When it is not the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating in the customer waiting state (when it is simply in the customer waiting state), It is designed to end this routine as it is.

When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is running, this routine is terminated as it is, while the screen generation schedule data is followed in step S1540. When the effect is completed and all pointer updates are completed, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is not started, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, the communication check counter CC-CNT is used for the door frame side staging provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in each time the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 is executed. Count up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Counting the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem has occurred even once.

When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, this is the case as it is. While terminating the routine, even once it is determined in step S1542 that the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT and the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective, and the transmitter and the transmitter. It is a flag indicating whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection of the above has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0, respectively.

When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If the value has not been reached, SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is terminated. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side directing transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is provided for the door frame side directing. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and is for the door frame side effect. It restores the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

On the other hand, when the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the communication error display process is performed. Perform (step S1548) and end this routine. In this communication error display process, in order to convey that a problem has definitely occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. Performs the process of drawing to. For example, the message "There was a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call the clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, in the communication error display processing, a period during which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state is performed. During this period, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted from the peripheral control MPU1511a as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is LOCKN in order to confirm whether or not a problem has occurred. A LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, and a notification image (for example, "A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the clerk.") Is a game. Along with performing processing to display in the display area of the panel side effect display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device") is repeatedly emitted from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. Perform flow processing. At this time, the process of turning on all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be performed.

Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side staging transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 103.

First, a decorative pattern that is variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 60 will be briefly described. The variable display of the decorative symbol is executed by the part steady processing or the like, and the main control side of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball into the first starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 60 by the main process, the timer interrupt process on the main control side shown in FIG. When the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the start opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 60 is 1 to 15 rounds. In each round, a game ball enters the large winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). The round is digested, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out every time one game ball enters the large winning opening 2005.

The result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is from the main control board 1310. By controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 based on the command, the left decorative symbol is on the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the central decorative symbol is in the center. , And the variable display of the right decorative symbol is started on the right side, and after a predetermined time has passed, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is stopped. At this time, the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66 can be recognized by the player. The result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery can be confirmed also in the symbol or the second special symbol. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are translucent so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. The reel rotates from the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative symbol from the upper center to the lower center of the display area, and the right decorative symbol from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, they correspond to the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol that are stopped and displayed. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are opaque so that the background image at the position is difficult to see. As described above, the first special symbol or the second special symbol which is started and stopped by the variable display on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol, which are displayed in a variable display start and stop display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are synchronized with each other.

The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002, or the second lottery drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 for transmitting the special lottery result is received, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled based on the received command, so that the game board side shown in FIG. 60 is shown as shown in FIG. 103. When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit for the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 95 is steady. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the first screen among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Because the pointer is updated to indicate which screen data is output from the data to the VDP1512a with built-in sound source, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is updated, the screen generation schedule data is followed. Since the production is in progress, the screen generation schedule data is being activated, and while the screen generation schedule data is being activated, that is, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. Even if the connection recovery process shown in FIG. 102 is executed in the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. In the determination of step S1540 in this connection recovery process, the routine is forcibly terminated as it is.

As a result, the communication check counter CC-CNT can be used until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the receiver and the receiver even once, the SYNC pattern output process in step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not performed. The process of recovering the connection between the user and the player is not performed, and the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed. Since the message "There was a problem with the side effect display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, it tells that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 is an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Is displayed.

When the variation display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral control unit power is turned on as shown in FIG. 95. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the steady process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, while the screen generation schedule data has not been started and the screen generation schedule data has not been started in the scheduler update process, the power of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. Peripheral control unit of time processing In the determination of step S1540 in the connection recovery processing shown in FIG. 102 executed as one processing of the warning processing of step S1024 in the steady processing, the process proceeds to the processing of step S1542 in the same processing, and the communication check counter CC-. When the CNT value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the communication check counter is used. When the value of CC-CNT is not 0, that is, when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, the process of step S1544 in the same process is performed. When the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0, that is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When it has not been reached, the process proceeds to the process of step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine is terminated, while the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1). That is, when there is a certain problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the process proceeds to the process of step S1548 in the same process, the above-mentioned communication error display process is performed, and the routine is terminated. In other words, while the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When there is a problem with the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver even once, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. When (that is, there is definitely a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver), the communication error display process is always performed, so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. A problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device. Please call the clerk. ”Is displayed and notified, and the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys the data is enabled.

In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is displayed again. During the interval period until the start of, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, as described above. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data, is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect are used. A state in which there is a problem in the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be the above does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is always performed to connect the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, the cumulative number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective while the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. When the signal is reached (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective), the communication error display process is always performed so that, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. The process of displaying and notifying the message "There was a problem with the door frame side staging display device. Please call the clerk."

When the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is activated, the left decorative symbol and the central decorative symbol are activated. , And until the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side staging provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times it is determined that a problem has occurred between the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, the process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, and the connection recovery process is performed. The communication error display process of step S1548 is not performed, and for example, the message "There is a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device is used. The 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d.

In this way, the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are displayed again. During the interval period until the variation display of the symbol is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that conveys that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data is enabled. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter is displayed. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side staging receiver ICSDIC0, which conveys that the drawing data received from the IC1512d is abnormal data, is invalidated. This is information that the player is most interested in the combination result of the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol being stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is beneficial to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot game state in which is given is generated, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed correctly due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it becomes impossible to draw, the left decorative symbol, the central decorative symbol, and the central decorative symbol are displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, instead of interrupting the effect and recovering to the correct drawing state. By stopping and displaying the decoration pattern on the right side, the drawing of the player's most interesting information is completed.

In this respect, the period during which the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the customer waiting state. During the period of demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case of transmitting the LOCKN signal output request data to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is used for a period during which the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in a customer waiting state. During this period, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver.

When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into a positive signal and a negative signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, it is differential as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the conversion circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the forced switching circuit 1512f is circuit-connected so as to transmit the two signals. Two signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the two received signals are the LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is, in the first place, the LOCKN signal output request data. As described above, since the data format is different from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is transmitted to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Output to control MPU1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a tells the effect display drive board 4450 that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is assumed that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the effect display drive board 4450 has a problem. The notification image (for example, "There was a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call the clerk.") Is controlled by the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to display the effect display device on the game board side. By outputting to 1600 and outputting a notification sound (for example, "There is a problem in the door frame side effect display device") to the audio data transmission IC1512c by controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound is played from a speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly flowing from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3 can be used for notification. At this time, all the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided in the game board 5 may be turned on.

As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the forced switching circuit 1512f may receive the LOCKN signal output request data by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The LOCKN signal output request data is connected so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can output the LOCKN signal as a response signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that there is no problem in the door frame side effect display device 460, while LOCKN. When no signal is input, it can be determined that the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem because the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. Then, when the peripheral control MPU1511a determines that a problem has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a can execute the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process of FIG. 102 as a notification process. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, it can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. The clerk in the hall can check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem before the player plays the game, and the check can be done without any trouble. ing. Therefore, it is possible to find a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 without any trouble.

Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that there is, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver provided in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (recovering) the connection between ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect. When the receiver ICSDIC0 cannot normally receive the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, a communication problem occurs between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the receiver ICSDIC0 receives the image. The LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 in order to convey that the drawn drawing data becomes abnormal data. As a result, the peripheral control MPU1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input sends a connection confirmation signal to inform that the predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is started to be transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. By outputting to the frame-side staging transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate communication problems between image communications. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage and eliminate the defect. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by discovering and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460.

Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and outputs the image to the door frame side effect display device 460 receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the effect control microprocessor outputs the LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which conveys that a communication problem has occurred between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input controls the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication problem. Generates the message "There was a problem with the door frame side effect display device. Please call the clerk." It can be displayed and notified. In other words, the peripheral control MPU1511a detects a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect between image communications at an early stage, and notifies the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect. Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall or directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall has a problem. Work can be started at an early stage to resolve the problem. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play by detecting and eliminating the defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 at an early stage.

Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in this state does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication problem between image communications. Is transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. , It is possible to keep outputting repeatedly. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period when the game is not started and stopped, the communication problem can be resolved.

The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided with the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side provided on the effect display drive board 4450 during the period (interval period) from timing K1 to timing K2. There is a case where the connection between the effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the above state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal and solving a communication problem between image communications is performed. A connection confirmation signal indicating that transmission from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is sent to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the cumulative number reaches the cumulative number upper limit CC-LMT. While the output is continuously repeated, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts to change the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, and the game is played. When the progress of the above is started again, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped, and when the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU1511a is stopped and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is predetermined. Data pattern (SYNC pattern) can be stopped to be transmitted to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, and the image generated by the sound source built-in VDP1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 can be output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. It has become like. As a result, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is not progressing by displaying the start and stop, it is possible to move toward the direction in which the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol or the second special symbol game on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 when the connection confirmation signal is repeatedly output only during the period when the progress of the game is not executed. Even if the first special symbol or the second special symbol game is started to fluctuate and the progress of the game is started again, the distortion (distortion of the image) of the effect progressing on the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 is still present. Every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and ends the progress of the game again (every time the period (interval period) of the timing K1 to the timing K2 is reached), the game can be made to be resolved.

According to the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start port 2002 and a second start, which is a start area in which a game ball launched by a ball launching device 650 toward a game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5 is provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on the ball entering the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor that controls the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the prize ball commands of FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), which are payout commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control MPU952a of 70 is implemented.

The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about the game even after the power is cut off.

The payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (a payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes the operation switch 954 of FIG. 70. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on side process of FIG. 92 is performed, the information about the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is erased. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit is turned on, the payout control built-in RAM is used. The RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as the RAM clear signal for erasing the stored information regarding the payout, and the main control side power supply of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. If the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the turn-on process is performed (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time when the power is turned on) has elapsed, the error generated for the payout device 830 is cleared. As an error canceling signal for this purpose, the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is not output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor, but is output to the payout control MPU952a which is a payout control microprocessor. ..

As described above, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power on side process of FIG. 92 is performed, the game stored in the main control built-in RAM is stored. When the RAM clear signal of FIG. 77 for erasing the information related to the above is output to the main control MPU1310a which is a game control microprocessor and is operated within the period from the time when the power is turned on to the time when the payout control unit power is turned on. A RAM clear function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing information related to payout stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and a RAM clear function of FIG. 92 from the time the power is turned on. When the operation is performed after the period during which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process (or the period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed from the time the power is turned on) has elapsed, the payout device 830 is operated. An error canceling function that outputs the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control microprocessor 952a without outputting it to the main control MPU1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, as an error clearing signal for clearing the generated error. Since it is provided in combination, the pachinko machine 1 can be provided with two different functions, a RAM clear function and an error clear function, by operating one operation switch 954. Therefore, it is possible to provide a RAM clear function and an error clear function while contributing to cost reduction.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the control related to the game progress and the production will be summarized.

As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1 and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 has a display mode (design, various background images, characters, characters, etc.) of the effect display device 1600 based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310. It controls the display mode and operation mode of various members (such as the effect operation unit 400 and the movable member) that contribute to the effect.

In particular, in the main control board 1310, a special symbol process process is performed each time the interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second start opening winning processes are performed. In this first / second start opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize at the starting opening, and when it is determined that a winning has been won, the number of holdings on the corresponding special symbol side is increased by one. Will be done.

If the processing flag is 0 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable start process is executed. In this fluctuation start processing, on the condition that the number of pending hits is 1 or more, the jackpot determination in the pending state is digested and executed, and the result of this jackpot determination (winning, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to "1".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 1 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (identification symbol) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display based on the result of the jackpot determination memorized above and the current gaming state, etc. After determining and setting the fluctuation time of the special symbol (variation time from the start of the variation display to the stop display, etc.) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 2 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the variable process is executed. In this variable processing, the timer monitors the variable time determined and set in the variable pattern setting process, and based on the time-out, the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display is displayed. To stop. After that, when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is a jackpot, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the jackpot determination stored in the fluctuation start processing is not a jackpot (loss). The process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is 3 when the first / second start opening winning process is completed, the jackpot game process is executed. In this jackpot game process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to set the mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of the winning jackpot. Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2005a is controlled. In addition, when the jackpot game ends, processing is performed to stop the operation of the condition device, and when the winning jackpot type is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability change state. After updating the game status flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing is restarted.

As the fluctuation pattern, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and the effect that appears on the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510. It can determine the type of pattern. In the present embodiment, the plurality of types of fluctuation patterns can be classified into a fluctuation pattern for jackpot fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern for missed reach fluctuation, and a fluctuation pattern for missed fluctuation. The jackpot fluctuation is a fluctuation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol is developed so as to finally stop and display the jackpot symbol after the reach effect. The production to be performed is executed. The out-of-reach variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and it is determined by the reach determination based on the reach random number that the reach is to be performed. An effect is executed in which the variable display of the symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed. The loss variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is to be performed. In the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is not performed. , The effect that the variation display of the decorative symbol is finally disengaged and the symbol is fixedly stopped and displayed is executed. Further, the fluctuation pattern is defined so that it is possible to specify which of the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is the fluctuation pattern.

That is, in the peripheral control board 1510, by acquiring game information such as the result of the jackpot determination from the main control board 1310 and referring to it, it is possible to appear such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 makes the effect display device 1600 appear the variation pattern of the decorative pattern based on the acquired game information, and also changes the effect display (background and reserved image) related to the degree of expectation. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating a movable member such as the movable staging unit 3100 after the backside are executed.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the operation information for the operation button 410 and the operation information of the player in the vicinity of the opening window, and can execute the control related to the effect according to the information.

Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114).

Now, assuming that the main control program has been shifted to the special symbol and special electric accessory control process (FIG. 94: step S114), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. 104. (YES in step S5231) on condition that the detection signal by the start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start port 2002), the random number for determining the first big hit is acquired from the above random number counter. A first start port passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5232). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second start port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol (YES in step S5233). A second start port passage process such as acquiring a second big hit determination random number) from the random number counter and storing it in the second special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5234).

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is controlled is set (step S5235), and if the jackpot executing flag is set, the jackpot gaming state is controlled. The jackpot control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110,
-When the result of the determination processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting either "8R probability variation jackpot A" or "8R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes the game after opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005 is repeated 8 times. Control to 8R jackpot game state,
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "16R probability variation jackpot", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that nine game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 16 times to control the 16R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "8R probability variation jackpot B", the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or when it is detected by the count sensor 4005 that 9 game balls have won in the big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times to control the 8R big hit game state.
-When the result of the judgment processing regarding the display mode when the variation display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "2R normal jackpot", the big prize opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes after the game is repeated twice is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handed hitting is more advantageous to the player than left-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and right-handed is more advantageous than right-handed in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As mentioned above, left-handedness is advantageous for the player. In this regard, in the left-handed state, even if a jackpot is won as a result of a lottery for the first special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, a jackpot game that is open for a long time of up to 8 rounds. Only the state (generally 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

On the other hand, in the right-handed state, if a big hit is won in the lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). ), The expected value of the prize ball that can be obtained when the big hit is won, such as the big hit game state of 16 rounds open for a long time (about 2000 game balls can be obtained) is executed. Therefore, when the transition to the right-handed state is controlled, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected than when the player is in the left-handed state.

In the big hit control process, in order to start such open control of the big winning opening 2005, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting the fluctuation number counter described later, and the like are performed.

Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such opening control of the jackpot 2005, as shown in FIG. 110, there is a high probability according to the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the jackpot game. Executes each set process of flag and time saving flag.

The high-probability flag is a flag indicating that the state is in a high-probability state, and is used in the big hit determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Probability change big hit, 8R Probability change big hit B) is set when the game state is finished, and when the next big hit is made, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process (not shown) Will be reset with.

The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time saving control (high probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state. The first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 16R probability variation jackpot A, 8R probability variation jackpot B) is ended, and when the next jackpot is reached. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown). Alternatively, when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the big hit after the low probability time saving state occurs, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later is performed. Or, it is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

The fluctuation count counter is a counter that indicates the number of fluctuations of the special symbol after the fluctuation count counter is reset, and is used in the first fluctuation pattern setting process (second fluctuation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112, which will be described later. It is a thing, and it is updated (for example, count-up) when the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is changed, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B). It is reset when starting the jackpot game state based on.

If the big hit executing flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then whether or not the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set as the process of step S5236. To determine. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, a process of opening the large winning opening 2005 for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds) is performed.

Here, in the small hit control process (step S5240b), unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), after such opening control of the big winning opening 2005 is performed, the high probability flag, the time saving flag, and the time saving are performed. Each set process such as the number of times counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

If the small hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is set. On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

On the other hand, when the value of the second special hold number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is played so that the lottery for the second special symbol that is in the pending state is not lost (unless the value of the second special reserved number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the pending status of the lottery, only the lottery for the second big hit judgment random number will be performed continuously without interruption (priority execution).

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the player only maintains the driving of the game ball (right-handed) to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time-saving state (high probability time-saving state). Only the lottery (judgment processing) for the random numbers for determining the two big hits can be continuously performed without interruption.

In addition, the special figure game (design variation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to the one executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). However, for example, the execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 and the start prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are generated is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. I just need to be able to decide.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S5322).

Now, assuming that the first start port sensor 4002 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the first start port 2002 in the process of step S5231, as shown in FIG. 105. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5421, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for jackpot determination, random number for reach determination, random number for jackpot symbol, random number for variable display pattern). ) Is obtained from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" which is (upper limit value) (step S5242). If it is determined in the process of step S5422 that the number of reserved first special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to make the state of S5243 to S5245, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the first special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the first special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 side (information on winning for pre-reading determination, information on the symbol type for pre-reading determination). Information, information on the variation pattern number for pre-reading determination, etc.) are generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5422, when it is determined that the number of reserved first special symbols is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S5234).

Now, assuming that in the process of step S5233, the second start port sensor 4004 is in the ON state and it is determined that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 106. In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (random number for second jackpot determination, random number for second reach determination, for second jackpot symbol). Random numbers, random numbers for the second variation display pattern) are acquired from the above random number counter.

Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special hold number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the hold number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S5252). In the process of step S5252, if it is determined that the number of reserved second special symbols is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol (lottery for the second special symbol) is newly suspended. In order to bring the state to the above, the following steps S5253 to S5255 will be performed.

That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is stored in the second special symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special hold number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Store in.

Then, the second special figure look-ahead process for executing the look-ahead effect on the second special figure side is executed, and the process is terminated (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or the degree of expectation thereof) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed and the content of the effect. It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information about the stop symbol of the special symbol as information suggesting the type of the jackpot game. For example, information on the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group, the normal reach group, the latent hit group among the symbol types, and the small hit group among the fluctuation patterns, may be transmitted as a look-ahead command.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the reserved number of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by terminating the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variation display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

When the number of reserved first special symbols changes based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002, a command for instructing the number of reserved first special symbols in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). (First hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, when the number of reserved second special symbols changes based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2004, the number of reserved second special symbols is instructed by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). The command to be executed (second hold number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process are the same. Since it is a program module of the above and only the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

1. 1. The big hit judgment random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and based on the read big hit judgment random number, lottery processing for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. 1st special symbol normal processing (step S5280)

2. 2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) in which the process of determining the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the result of the determination process of the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped. )

3. 3. Execution corresponding to the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the random number for the variation display pattern and the special symbol on the effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S5282) in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display to be performed.

4. First special symbol variation processing (step S5283) that waits until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped.

5. The mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing (step S5284) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol

The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 108, first steps S5301. As the process of, it is determined whether or not there is a change display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variation display of the first special symbol in the hold state, it is then stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S5302. The earliest memory of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the random number for the first jackpot determination, the random number for the first reach determination, the random number for the first jackpot symbol, the random number for the first variation display pattern). The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM of the same main control. Next, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, the first special hold number counter is counted down, and the first special is stored in each storage area of the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM. First-in, first-out (First-In) random numbers related to the display mode when the symbol variation display is stopped (for example, first jackpot determination random number, first reach determination random number, first jackpot symbol random number, first variation display pattern random number) The shift operation is performed in the mode of First-Out).

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reservation storage area a to first special symbol reservation storage area d), and a start winning prize is given to the first start port 2002. Random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the first special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). .. Similarly, the second special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol reservation storage area a to second special symbol reservation storage area d), and responds to the occurrence of a start prize to the second start port 2004. The random numbers extracted by the above are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a start prize is generated when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, and the first one is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the storage area of is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held can be identifiable and stored, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). ..

After that, as the process of step S5305, the big hit determination process, which is the determination process for the hit or miss of the big hit, is performed based on the read-out first big hit determination random number. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot determination process (step S5305).

If the current gaming state is a high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5311), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is shown in FIG. If the jackpot determination table is selected (step S5312) and the current gaming state is a low probability state (step S5311), the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) is selected (step S5313) and selected. The jackpot determination table is compared with the jackpot determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5314).

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the jackpot determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state is low probability for each type of special random number (first jackpot determination random number, second jackpot determination random number). The jackpot judgment table for low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and the high used when the gaming state is high probability time (high probability non-time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a jackpot judgment table at the time of probability. Then, in the low-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 204 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 65332. The first big hit judgment random numbers (65536 types) are associated with each other so as to match the deviation judgment value indicating that the first big hit judgment random number of the type is the above loss (big hit probability at low probability; generally). "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. In the reference big hit judgment table at the time of low probability, 204 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers match the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit was won, and 65332 kinds of second big hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned loss. The above-mentioned second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability at the time of low probability; approximately 1/321).

Further, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number, 2040 types of first jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value, and 63496 types of first jackpot determination random numbers are used. The above-mentioned first big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers match the off-determination value (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). On the other hand, in the high-probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating that the above is lost. The random numbers for determining the second big hit are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; approximately 1/32). The jackpot judgment value (of the jackpot judgment value) set in the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the first jackpot determination random number and the jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number. The number of big hits may be the same and the big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is the same), or the number of big hit judgment values may be different (the big hit probability is different). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the low probability and the big hit judgment table at the high probability may be different (they may be different). ..

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a big hit as a result of comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the random number for big hit determination read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5315). ), Set the jackpot flag indicating that the fluctuation has won the jackpot (step S5316), and end the jackpot determination process.

Further, when it is determined in step S5315 that the jackpot has been lost, the random number for jackpot determination read out matches the small hit determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won based on the selected jackpot determination table. Whether or not it is determined (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (second special symbol process processing) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read out (small hit probability; 0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (a loss determination is made).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that the result is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the built-in ROM of the main control, and is used when the gaming state is in the high-probability non-time saving state. It is provided with a reach determination table in a high-probability time-saving state used in the case of the above, and a reach determination table in a low-probability state used when the gaming state is a low-probability state (low-probability non-time-saving state).

Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, it matches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach determination random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicating that 71 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. The above reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, it matches the reach judgment value indicating that all 72 types of reach judgment random numbers do not reach. In this way, it may not match the reach determination value indicating reach.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the low probability state, five types of reach judgment random numbers including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and to match the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating reach is higher in the low probability state than in the high probability time reduction state, and can be obtained with a predetermined probability.

Further, in the reach judgment table in the high probability non-time saving state, five types of reach judgment including the same reach judgment random number as the reach judgment random number set in the reach judgment table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination value indicating that the random number for reach is reached and the reach determination value indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the high-probability non-time-saving state, the reach determination value indicating reach is the same as in the low-probability non-time-saving state.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it is determined that the reach is lost (YES in step S5120). , The reach flag indicating that the fluctuation becomes reach is set, and the process is terminated (step S5121).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 111. The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B) and reads out the random number for the first jackpot symbol in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. And the selected symbol determination table are compared with each other to determine the jackpot symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped (step S5332).

As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the first special symbol side, random numbers for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200 random numbers) for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot). Random numbers for the first big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), the symbol determination table on the second special symbol side has a random number for the second jackpot symbol for the determination result (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot). Here, a total of 200 random numbers for the second big hit symbol) are stored in the form of being associated with each other.

In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the type of the big hit is determined by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired random number for the big hit symbol. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the first jackpot symbol and the type of jackpot determined based on the random number for the second jackpot symbol are set to be different. .. More specifically, the distribution rate (allocation) between the probabilistic jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state is the same, but for the first jackpot symbol. The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number. ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and production contents for each type of jackpot.

1. 1. After the big hit symbol combination appeared on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2005 was opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2005, nine game balls won a prize. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and this 8R big hit game. After the state, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state, a battle production (battle victory production) in which a specific character wins is performed, and the high probability 8R probability variation jackpot A controlled by the effect mode shown in the game board side effect display device 1600 that it is a relatively advantageous state in the time saving state.

2. 2. After the big hit symbol combination appeared on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2005 was opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2005, nine game balls won a prize. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and this 8R big hit game. After the state, the variable display of the special symbol is controlled to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or a big hit is won within the period until it is digested 100 times), and the 8R big hit game state is executed. During the period, a battle effect (battle defeat effect) is performed in which a specific character is defeated, and in a low-probability time-saving state, it is controlled to the effect mode indicated by the game board side effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state. 8R normal jackpot to be done

3. 3. After the big hit symbol combination appeared on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2005 was opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2005, nine game balls won a prize. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 16 times, the game ball is controlled to the 16R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and this 16R big hit game After the state, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state, the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds). The game board side effect display device 1600 shows that the game board side effect display device 1600 shows that the additional challenge effect (successful effect) is performed and the state is relatively advantageous after a predetermined period has elapsed after being controlled to the high probability time saving state. 16R probability variation jackpot controlled by production mode

4. After the big hit symbol combination appeared on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2005 was opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2005, nine game balls won a prize. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005 eight times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R big hit game state in which the game ball can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and this 8R big hit game. After the state, it is controlled to a high probability time saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state, the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (whether it becomes 16 rounds). The game board side effect display device 1600 shows that the game board side effect display device 1600 shows that the additional challenge effect (failure effect) is performed and the state is relatively advantageous after a predetermined period has elapsed after being controlled to the high probability time saving state. 8R probability variation jackpot B controlled by the production mode

5. After the big hit symbol combination appeared on the game board side effect display device 1600, after the big winning opening 2005 was opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or after the big winning opening 2005, nine game balls won a prize. By repeating the opening / closing pattern (round game) that closes when detected by the count sensor 4005, the game ball is controlled to the 2R big hit game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2005, and after this 2R big hit game state. Controls the variable display of the special symbol to a low probability time saving state until it is digested 100 times (or wins a jackpot within the period until it is digested 100 times), and during the execution period of the 2R jackpot game state. 2R that performs a battle effect (battle defeat effect) in which a specific character is defeated, and is controlled by the effect mode indicated by the game board side effect display device 1600 that it is in a relatively disadvantageous state in a low probability time saving state. Normal jackpot

In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball with the second special symbol. Except for the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the first special symbol display 1403, and the big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol is generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, the game ball does not win the first starting port 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, and unless there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 Only the variation display is executed, and a big hit (16R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

Also, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the opening and closing pattern that opens the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 8 times, whereas only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern of opening the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) 16 times.

If the 8R probability variation jackpot A is determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 8R probability variation jackpot A symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R normal jackpot is determined, the 8R normal jackpot symbol is selected as the jackpot symbol. decide. Although not shown, if the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the jackpot symbol. If the B symbol is determined and the 2R normal jackpot is determined, the 2R normal jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

Further, if the big hit flag is not set in the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit flag is set as the process of the next step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol (the mode when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped) is set. After determining (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

Further, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a lost symbol as an mode when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. do.

Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is one of the above lottery results (type of big hit, small hit, missed reach, missed) as the process of step S5337. (May indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol)) is set to the determination result notification command corresponding to each of the lottery results so that the instruction (may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S5338, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

The peripheral control MPU1511a displays and controls the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (left, middle, and right decorative symbols are variablely displayed and left decorative symbol → right decorative symbol →. Stop and display in the order of the middle decorative symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol and stopped and displayed at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU1511a is determined to be a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative symbols are aligned when a type other than the 2R normal jackpot is won as a jackpot. On the other hand, when a 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined to be a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as the other symbols). In addition, when the reach loss is specified, the missed symbol with reach (the combination of the same symbols with the left and right decorative symbols "0" to "9" but different middle decorative symbols; reach loss. (Design), and if the outlier is specified, it is decided to be the outlier symbol without reach (a combination in which at least the left and right decorative symbols are different symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols). The stop symbol determined in this way is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

In any case, when a hit is obtained as a result of the progress of the game, the peripheral control MPU1511a makes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit time appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. After the start of the game, the effect display during the big hit game will appear.

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first fluctuation pattern setting process (step S5282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first fluctuation pattern setting process should be performed, the jackpot flag is set in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 112. If this is done (step S5341), a variable pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the type of big hit determined in step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag is selected. If is set (step S5343), the variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at the time of reach (step S5345) is selected. When (not shown) is selected (step S5346) and none of the big hit flag, the small hit flag, and the reach flag is set, that is, when the normal loss (the loss without performing the reach effect) occurs, the time of the loss occurs. (Not shown) is selected (step S5347).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set, and variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation timer (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. As a result, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed by the first special symbol display 1403 for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect control is performed by the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

The variation pattern table of this example is used as a random number for jackpot determination (random number for first jackpot determination, random number for second jackpot determination) and a random number for jackpot symbol (random number for first jackpot symbol, random number for second jackpot symbol). Multiple types are provided for each judgment result based on. Further, in the fluctuation pattern set in each fluctuation pattern table, a plurality of fluctuation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for the fluctuation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. It is stored in a form associated with each random number for the first variable display pattern. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a reads out the variable pattern table selected from the plurality of types of variable pattern tables according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing. By comparing with the random number for the variable display pattern and acquiring the variable time information associated with the random number for the variable display pattern read out from this table, the above special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) Determine the fluctuation pattern of. As a result, the determination process for the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

However, as described above, in this example, since the small hit is not won, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59. Random numbers for different types of variable display patterns are set as judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with low jackpot expectation is executed, and 18 types of random numbers for variable display patterns have high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that any one of the super reach effects is executed.

The super reach effect (SP effect) has a higher expectation of a big hit than the normal reach effect, and for a player who wants to generate a big hit game state, the player for the big hit game state when the super reach effect is executed. Expectations are increasing. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of a big hit, and the player's expectation for the big hit gaming state even if a loss is finally displayed. Will be able to increase. However, in reality, in order to sufficiently raise the player's expectation for the jackpot game state, a high-expected advance notice effect, which is a lottery separate from the fluctuation pattern, appears during the period when the super reach effect is being executed. It is required to do (combine).

In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the first jackpot and the random number for the first jackpot symbol and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state are obtained. A fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set in common with. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, which is provided corresponding to the random number for determining the second big hit and the random number for the second symbol and is used to determine the variation time of the second special symbol, the time reduction state is 0.1 seconds or more. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as a non-time saving state. In this way, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and the game ball is awarded to the second starting port 2004 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the time-saving state. At the same time as urging, the player has secured time for the second starting port 2004 to win the game ball.

In addition, when 0.1 seconds is selected from the fluctuation time when the second special symbol is lost, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at intervals of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) is selected. It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process.

That is, the game ball hit to the right is supplied to the region directly above the gate portion 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area into the gate portion 2003 in a time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), a hit as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%). The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation where the second starting port 2004 can be continuously accepted (a time saving state in which almost all the game balls driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be accepted by the second starting port 2004). Even if there is, every time those game balls are accepted, control is executed so that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another with a high jackpot probability (probability in a high probability state) of around "about 1/32". It will be possible.

In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game ball is fired at intervals of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the starting port 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in this example, as described above, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of the second special symbol coming off based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 shows the fluctuation time of the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.) extremely. It can be set to a short 0.1 second. That is, in this case, when a loss is obtained, the symbol variation is completed in a time (0.1 seconds) less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball, so that 0.6 seconds. Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are accepted into the second starting port 2004 one after another, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being ejected without being subjected to the lottery process. ..

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol variation processing (step S5283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 113, first steps S5371. As the process of, the variation timer in which the variation time according to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process for the variation pattern (step S5282) is set is subtracted by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery fluctuation time has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, this process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

If the fluctuation time timer is not 0 even though the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until the time when the symbol should be fixedly stopped). Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the process of steps S5371 and S5372 is performed.

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S5284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as shown in FIG. 114, first steps S5381. As the process of, the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403 is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

Further, when the big hit flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit gaming state (step S5387). The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time for displaying the start of the big hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the jackpot executing flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, and if the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is set. When the time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation count counter is reset, and the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step). S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the jackpot executing flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the jackpot game in the above-mentioned jackpot control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, the jackpot start command (8R probability variation jackpot A command, 8R normal jackpot command, 16R probability variation) according to the type of jackpot (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B, 2R normal jackpot B) Set the jackpot command, 8R probability variation jackpot B command, and 2R normal jackpot command). As a result, the effect of the jackpot game state (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of the jackpot instructed by the jackpot start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like.

On the other hand, in the process of step S5386, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the state is in the low probability time saving state (step S5390). Then, when it is in the low-probability time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled in the low-probability time-saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) (here). Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol digested after being controlled to the low-probability time-saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low-probability time-saving state is satisfied. The function is stopped to shift to the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state) (step S5392).

Then, after the processing related to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), the small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is started. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the start of the small hit game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit executing flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts the first special symbol process flag to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. At the time of updating to (step S5394), this process is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) described above determines that the small hit execution flag is set. The small hit game state will be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (NO in step S5393), it is regarded as a loss, and the first special symbol process without performing the processing related to the big hit or the small hit. This process ends when the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step S5394). That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit executing flag and the small hit executing flag are not set (steps S5235 and S236), and a new game is played according to the pending situation. Processing related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 115, the main As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM. do.

Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. A normal symbol normal process (step S5403) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number.
2. 2. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which a lottery process for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number.
3. 3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S5405) that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped.
4. The variation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop processing (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit a normal figure", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S5407) for executing a process for controlling the

The normal symbol process flag is operated so that its initial value indicates that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S5402).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state in the process of step S5401 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. 116, the above As the process of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

If it is determined in the process of step S5411 that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S5412 to S5414 are performed in order to put the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols into a new pending state. Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S5412, the normal hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the process of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the normal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S5414, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the reserved number of the ordinary symbols is the maximum value, the variation display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, as the processing of step S5421, as shown in FIG. 117. Based on the counter value of the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, then, as the process of step S5422, the normal symbol is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers with variable figures) are read from the same RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The random numbers (ordinary random numbers, variable random numbers in the normal figure) related to the display mode in the above are shifted in the first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 are sequentially extracted from the first (first) area. Remember. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variation display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the fluctuation display control hold of the normal symbol occurs is identifiable and stored, and the hold of the fluctuation display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first). ..

Next, if the current gaming state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a normal drawing hit determination table (not shown) at the time saving time (not shown). In step S5426), if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state) (step S5425), a non-time-saving normal figure hit determination table (not shown) is selected (not shown). Step S5427), the selected normal symbol hit determination table is compared with the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5428).

The normal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU1310a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (high probability time saving state). It is equipped with a non-time-saving normal map hit determination table used in the case of time (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, all the 255 kinds of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random number was won, and the normal figure is used. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is always won, and the movable piece is opened and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. It controls acceptance as much as possible. Not all of the 255 types, but more ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be made to match the judgment value per normal figure indicating that the normal random numbers have been won.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the normal random number, it may match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that all 255 types of normal random numbers have been won per normal number. The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal map, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. In this way, in the non-time saving time, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is not won in the normal drawing, so that the pair of movable pieces are opened and the second start is started. There is no possible control over the acceptance of the game ball into the mouth 2004. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is the winning. At that time, the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds so that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, and then moved forward again. (Ii) The acceptance of the game ball into the starting port 2004 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the normal random number read in step S5422 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S5429). ), After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S5430), the normal symbol hit as a mode (normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped. The symbol is determined (step S5431), while the normal symbol changes when it is determined to be out of order as a result of comparison between the selected ordinary symbol hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal processing. The out-of-normal symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) at the time of control stop is determined (step S5432). Then, when the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process flag is updated so that the process is transferred to the above-mentioned ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process is terminated.

Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to obtain the peripheral control unit steady processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing (received command analysis processing)). In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and the effect according to the game situation can be executed.

More specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a first determines whether or not a start-up prize has occurred, and when in that situation, controls the hold display and the look-ahead effect according to the start-up prize. After that, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern specification command reception waiting process, effect symbol change start process, effect symbol change process, effect symbol change stop process, jackpot display process , The big hit in-game process, and the big hit end effect process are executed.

Fluctuation pattern specification command reception wait process: During the period from the main control MPU1310a to the reception of the variation pattern command related to the variation pattern, it is applied to the effect (demo effect, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variable state and the control related to the jackpot is not performed. While performing control, when a fluctuation pattern command related to the fluctuation pattern is received from the main control MPU1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation start processing.

Staging symbol variation start processing: Various effect contents (effect pattern, notice effect, etc.) in the symbol variation period are determined based on the variation pattern command, and the decorative symbol variation is started based on the determined effect content. To control. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the effect symbol change.

Processing during effect symbol change: Controls to start various effect contents determined in the effect symbol change start process at each timing during the symbol change period, and when the change time ends, the value of the process flag is set to the effect symbol. Update to the value corresponding to the fluctuation stop processing.

Staging symbol fluctuation stop processing: Controls to stop the fluctuation of decorative symbols based on the reception of a command (symbol confirmation command) instructing to stop all symbols, and to derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, when the decorative symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot display process, and when the decorative symbol is stopped at the lost symbol, the value of the process flag is changed to the variable pattern specification command reception waiting process. Update to the value corresponding to.

Big hit display processing: Controls an effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game is started. After that, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the processing during the big hit game.

Process during big hit game: Controls various effects during the period when the big hit game state occurs. When the jackpot game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the jackpot end effect processing.

Big hit end effect processing: In the effect display device 1600, the effect (display effect for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended, etc.) is controlled during the period from the end of the big hit game state to the variable permissible state. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the process of waiting for the variable pattern specification command reception.

Here, the control of the look-ahead effect and the timer effect executed at the time of starting winning will be described.

When the game ball wins the start winning opening, the main control board 1310 executes the first starting opening passing process (FIG. 105) or the second starting opening passing process (FIG. 106) according to the starting winning opening, and starts. A random number value is extracted (acquired) as a memory (steps S5241 and S5251). Then, in the first special figure look-ahead process (S5245) or the second special figure look-ahead process (S5255), the special symbol 1 storage look-ahead effect command or the special symbol is based on the extracted random number value or the lottery result based on the random number value. 2 The storage look-ahead effect command (see FIG. 90, hereinafter, “special figure look-ahead effect command”) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the special figure look-ahead effect command, it determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect based on the received command. The command from the main control board 1310 is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (FIG. 98). Then, the received command is analyzed by the received command analysis process (S1022) of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 95).

Upon receiving the special figure look-ahead effect command, the peripheral control board 1510 executes the look-ahead effect control process in the receive command analysis process. In the look-ahead effect control process, a process for executing a normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display and a process for executing the timer effect and the background effect described above are executed. The look-ahead effect control process may be called by the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 95) by setting a flag indicating that the look-ahead effect command has been received in the receive command analysis process. good.

In the process for executing the normal look-ahead effect for changing the start memory display, a lottery is performed based on the special figure look-ahead effect command, and the mode of the start memory display after the change is selected based on the lottery result. At this time, the mode of the start memory display may be changed only when the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the special figure look-ahead effect command shifts to the reach state. The mode of the start memory display changes, for example, a color or a shape. Then, a normal look-ahead effect setting process for changing the mode of the start memory display is executed. In the normal look-ahead effect setting process, a setting is made to change the display color of the start memory display, and a setting is made to output a sound effect, turn on a lamp, or move an accessory at the timing of the change. .. The processing for executing the timer effect and the background effect will be described later.

The timer effect is a pre-suggestion effect that indicates that the execution time of the lottery result or the suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of winning for a specific start memory is approaching by the countdown display. There are roughly two types of timer effects, which are controlled as one of the above-mentioned look-ahead effects, and the variation display for a specific start memory is performed before the variation display for the specific start memory is started. A timer effect that spans multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a look-ahead timer effect) that counts down the period up to a predetermined timing, and is controlled based on a fluctuation pattern unlike the above-mentioned look-ahead timer effect, and is a specific start memory. A timer effect that does not span multiple fluctuations (hereinafter referred to as a timer effect within the fluctuation) that counts down the period from the predetermined timing after the fluctuation display for the specific start memory to another timing of the fluctuation display for this specific start memory. ,have. That is, both the look-ahead timer effect and the in-variation timer effect are advance notification effects in which the symbol variation for a specific start memory is not completed, and a countdown display is performed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the count display is 0. However, the look-ahead timer effect is different from the variable timer effect because it displays a countdown on the display screen over a plurality of symbol variations. In addition, various values may be set for the initial value of the countdown display performed in the look-ahead timer effect and the in-variation timer effect, but the average value of the initial values used in the look-ahead timer effect is used because it spans multiple fluctuations. The value is relatively larger than the average value of the initial values used in the variable timer effect. Since the present embodiment includes a characteristic element for the look-ahead timer effect, the look-ahead timer effect will be described in detail below.

In the process for executing the look-ahead timer effect, first, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead timer effect. Since the look-ahead timer effect is a look-ahead effect that can be executed over a plurality of fluctuations as described above, it is sufficient to execute the look-ahead timer effect before the variation display corresponding to the received special figure look-ahead effect command is started. Determine if the time is secured. That is, it is determined whether the total of the fluctuation times of all the start storages reserved until the fluctuation is started is the specific time or more (40 seconds or more in this embodiment). Further, the effect content is determined together with whether or not the look-ahead timer effect can be executed, based on the hit of the start memory of the effect execution target and the fluctuation pattern of the start memory. In addition, the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is also determined when the effect content is determined. The execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect is, for example, at the variable start time corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target, or before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. Either at the start of the reach of the variation corresponding to the stored start memory, or at the end of the variation corresponding to the start memory stored before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target is set.

The look-ahead timer effect is composed of a timer count effect that displays a countdown and a timer end effect that is executed when the time is up. The timer counting effect and the timer end effect are continuously executed. Further, although the execution time of the timer counting effect, that is, the execution timing of the timer end effect differs depending on the length of the timer counting effect, it is in the process of being changed with respect to the start memory that is the read-ahead target, and is before or after the reach occurs. It will be various timings.

When the execution of the look-ahead timer effect is determined, first, the execution time of the timer counting effect is determined. The execution time of the timer counting effect is determined based on the time from the start winning to the start of the variation corresponding to the start memory of the look-ahead effect target. For example, in the present embodiment, 10 seconds is added to the total fluctuation time of the start memory held before the start memory of the look-ahead effect target, and it is set as the execution timing (start timing) of the look-ahead timer effect. The predetermined time calculated by subtracting the time based on the time is set as the execution time (initial value of the countdown display) of the timer counting effect. Further, the content of the effect to be executed as the timer count effect (countdown effect pattern) is set. As the effect pattern during the countdown, for example, a pattern 1 in which the light emitting mode of a specific lamp provided on the game board 5 is gradually changed to a high-speed blinking as the countdown display progresses, or a specific pattern 1 provided on the game board 5 is provided. Examples include pattern 2 in which the emission color of the lamp is changed as the countdown display progresses, pattern 3 in which a specific movable body provided on the game board 5 is operated as the countdown display progresses, and these patterns 1 to 3 are pre-reading. It corresponds to the degree of expectation of the fluctuation of the production target, and is set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the degree of expectation for hitting increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is easier to select in the case of hitting than in the case of hitting, and pattern 2 is different from the case of hitting. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is easier to be selected in the case of hit than in the case of off.

After setting the content of the effect to be executed as the timer counting effect (countdown effect pattern), the content of the timer end effect (countdown effect pattern) is set. In the timer end effect, for example, the characters "End !!" are superimposed on the identification symbol in the color according to the expectation (for example, the expectation increases in the order of black → blue → red) on the display screen. It displays for a predetermined time and makes sure that the player knows that the time has expired. As the effect pattern after the countdown, for example, the pattern 1 in which the character color of "End !!" is black, the pattern 2 in which the character color of "End !!" is blue, and the character color of "End !!" A red pattern 3 and the like can be exemplified. These patterns 1 to 3 correspond to the degree of expectation of a change in the look-ahead effect target, and are set by lottery. For example, it is set so that the degree of expectation for hitting increases in the order of pattern 1 → pattern 2 → pattern 3, pattern 1 is easier to select in the case of hitting than in the case of hitting, and pattern 2 is easier to select in the case of hitting and hitting. Both cases are selected at the same rate, and the pattern 3 is easier to be selected in the case of hit than in the case of off. The post-countdown effect pattern is not limited to this, and not only the character color but also the character may be decorated or the character may be displayed, and the content of the message may be different for each. It may correspond to different expectations.

By the way, in a gaming machine, a plurality of boards on which electronic components are mounted are mounted. Of these, the main board and the payout control board provided on the back side of the gaming machine are generally housed in a colorless and transparent case, and their inspection and confirmation are easy. On the other hand, in the light emitting decorative substrate used for the movable or non-movable decorative member mounted on the game board panel, the surface facing the player side on the front side is a lens that reflects and scatters the light from the light emitting decorative substrate. Members and the like are provided, and the rear surface side is attached to the game board panel in a state facing the effect display device attached to the game board panel. In addition, on the rear surface side of the light emitting decoration board, there are connectors, control elements, drivers, resistors, capacitors, etc. for connecting a flat cable for receiving control signals from peripheral control means in order to realize the function of light emitting decoration. Electronic components are mounted. When such a gaming machine is installed in a gaming store, it is difficult to confirm whether or not a defect has occurred in the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate in the installed gaming machine. .. This is because the rear surface of the light emitting decorative substrate faces the surface forming the display area of the staging display device. Therefore, the means for solving such a problem is shown below.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the entire game board 5 in this embodiment. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and a game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the game panel 1100 includes a game area 5a, a rail member 5950, and a game panel opening 1100a. The game panel opening 1100a is formed by providing the game panel 1100 with a physical opening in a punched shape. A space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 on the front side, and a plurality of accessories are arranged in layers in this space. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind them, a rabbit accessory 6000 is provided behind them, and a mountain accessory 6500 is provided behind them, and a mountain accessory is provided. A game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind the 6500. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be obtained.

FIG. 119 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 119 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 119 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the rear side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as a face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped to imitate the mouth of a rabbit. The left and right front legs of a rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030 which is a plate-shaped member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, which imitates a body portion of a rabbit, is provided.

FIG. 120 (A) is a front view of the face substrate 6020. FIG. 120 (B) is a rear view of the face substrate 6020. The face substrate 6020 is a plate-shaped member composed of a printed circuit board, and the front surface and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 are entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting an electric circuit provided on the surface. .. Further, the LED constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED constituting the second face light emitting unit 6023b are on the front side of the face substrate 6020, and the control element 6025, the driver 6026, and the first are on the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020. A resistor 6027a to a sixth resistor 6027f, a first capacitor 6028a, a second capacitor 6028b, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

As shown in FIG. 120 (A), the face substrate 6020 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and two rectangular portions extend upward as the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 on the upper side forming the rectangle. It has a rectangular shape. The horizontally long rectangular portion imitates the face of a rabbit, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 imitate the ears of a rabbit. In the state where the face cover portion 6010 is attached to the face substrate 6020, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are not covered by the face cover portion 6010, and the face substrate 6020 is exposed.

The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a first ear decoration portion 6021a and a second ear decoration portion 6022a that imitate the inside of a rabbit's ear, respectively. The first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing with brown ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and are visible areas in brown. ing. In the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, the regions other than the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are covered with the white protective film described above. Further, electronic components such as the control element 6025 are not mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the first selvage portion 6021 and the second selvage portion 6022, and the printed circuit board is used only for decoration. ..

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b. Specifically, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are each composed of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the face substrate 6020. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b can emit light by being controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, but the details will be described later.

The face substrate 6020 is provided with a mouth decoration portion 6024. Specifically, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is formed by printing with pink ink on the white protective film on the front surface of the face substrate 6020, and the shape imitating the mouth of a rabbit can be visually recognized in pink. It has become. The front surface of the face substrate 6020 is configured so that the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are brown, the mouth decoration portion 6024 is pink, and the other regions are white.

FIG. 120 (B) is a view showing the rear surface side of the face substrate 6020. As described above, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is entirely covered with a white protective film for protecting the circuit as in the front surface of the face substrate 6020. On the upper left and right of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are located at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front side. The dotted line indicating the mounting location and the character strings "LED1" and "LED2" indicating the name of the mounted member are formed by printing with black ink on the white protective film, respectively. .. Further, the driver 6026 is surface-mounted between the character string "LED1" and the character string "LED2". Further, under the driver 6026, the character string "DR1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

A capacitor 6028 (first capacitor 6028a and second capacitor 6028b) is surface-mounted between the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the dotted line indicating the mounting location of the second face light emitting unit 6023b. Further, corresponding to the first capacitor 6028a and the second capacitor 6028b, the character strings "C1" and "C2" are formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

Resistors 6027 (first resistance 6027a to sixth resistance 6027f) are surface-mounted on the lower left side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, corresponding to the first resistance 6027a to the sixth resistance 6027f, the character strings "R1" to "R6" are formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink.

A control element 6025 made of a microcomputer is surface-mounted on the right side of the region where the resistor 6027 is mounted. Further, corresponding to the control element 6025, the character string "IC1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink. The control element 6025 drives the driver 6026 based on the control signal from the peripheral control board 1510, and controls the lighting of the LED constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the LED constituting the second face light emitting unit 6023b.

The connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the lower right side of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. Further, corresponding to the connector 6029, the character string "CN1" is formed by printing on a white protective film with black ink. The control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the control element 6025 via the connector 6029, and the power from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the face board 6020. The electric power supplied to the face substrate 6020 via the connector 6029 is supplied to the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the LEDs constituting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and the like.

The control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 each have a black main body portion and a metal terminal portion. Further, the metal terminal portion of the control element 6025, the driver 6026, the resistor 6027, the capacitor 6028, and the connector 6029 is surface-mounted on the face substrate 6020 by soldering. In FIG. 120 (B), the main body of these electronic components is shown in black, and the metal terminals and solder included in these electronic components are shown in white.

FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the face cover portion 6010. The face cover portion 6010 has a box-shaped shape with an open rear, and is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The face cover portion 6010 includes a face cover portion front portion 6011 constituting the front surface, a face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 constituting the upper surface, a face cover portion right surface portion 6013 constituting the right surface, and a face cover constituting the lower surface. It is composed of a lower surface portion 6014 and a left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion constituting the left surface.

As shown in FIGS. 119 to 121, on the front side of the face cover portion front portion 6011 constituting the front surface of the face cover portion 6010, a first face light scattering portion 6011a and a second face light scattering portion 6011a imitating the eyes of a rabbit are present. A face light scattering unit 6011b is provided. The first face light scattering unit 6011a is provided at a position where it overlaps with the first face light emitting unit 6023a provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Further, the second face light scattering unit 6011b is provided at a position where it overlaps with the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided on the front surface of the face substrate 6020 in front view. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 119 (A), the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b are viewed from the front of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, respectively. The outer shape of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in front view is surrounded by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b, respectively. It is configured as follows.

The first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b emit light from the first face by forming a fine lens cut or forming a satin finish on the front surface side of the front surface portion 6011 of the face cover portion. When the light emitted from the portion 6023a or the second face light emitting portion 6023b is incident, it is formed by a rough surface capable of diffusely reflecting the light. The front surface portion 6011 of the face cover portion is the light incident on the portions other than the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b, such as the first face light scattering portion 6011a and the second face light scattering portion 6011b. There is no structure that diffusely reflects light, and the face substrate 6020 located at the rear is configured to be directly visible from the front. In the face substrate 6020, the rectangular portion forming the region excluding the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 and the rectangular portion forming the face cover portion 6010 have the same vertical and horizontal flow, and are exactly overlapped in the front view. It is provided at the position. The face substrate 6020 is screwed from behind to screw holes provided in the upper surface portion 6012 of the face cover portion, the right surface portion 6013 of the face cover portion, the lower surface portion 6014 of the face cover portion, the left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion, and the like. It is attached with.

The rear surface of the face cover portion front surface portion 6011 and the face light emitting portion 6023 are provided at a predetermined distance (about 1-2 mm). With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the face light emitting unit 6023, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the face light emitting unit 6023 fails due to the heat generated by itself. Become. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted in relation to the light emitting portion and the member such as the cover provided corresponding to the light emitting portion.

As described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 is composed of a face substrate 6020, a face cover portion 6010 that covers the front of the face substrate 6020, and a body portion 6030 provided at the lower end of the face substrate 6020. On the front side of the face substrate 6020, LEDs functioning as the first face light emitting portion 6023a and the second face light emitting portion 6023b are surface-mounted, and the face cover portion constituting the front side of the face cover portion 6010 covering the front thereof, respectively. The first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b provided on the front surface portion 6011 are configured to irradiate light. Further, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, electronic components such as a control element 6025, a driver 6026, a resistor 6027, a capacitor 6028, and a connector 6029 are surface-mounted.

A flat cable (not shown) is connected to the connector 6029, and a control signal for driving the LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 mounted on the front surface of the face board 6020 is received from the peripheral control board 1510. Further, from the flat cable, electric power for driving each electronic component mounted on the face board 6020 is supplied. The control element 6025 controls the driver 6026 based on the control signal received from the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emitting mode of the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023.

The LED constituting the face light emitting portion 6023 is formed by enclosing three LEDs, a red light emitting LED chip, a green light emitting LED chip, and a blue light emitting LED chip, with a colorless and transparent resin. .. Further, the LED constituting the face light emitting unit 6023 is provided with three metal terminals serving as an anode of each LED chip and three metal terminals serving as a cathode. Further, when a current flows from the driver 6026 to the anode of each LED chip, each LED chip can be in a light emitting state. Specifically, by controlling the current flowing through each LED chip by the driver 6026, it is possible to emit red, green, and blue independently.

Further, a resistor 6027 is provided between the circuit connecting the driver 6026 and the anode of each LED chip as a limiting resistor for adjusting the current flowing through the LED chip. Specifically, the first resistor 6027a to the third resistor 6027c constitute the driver 2026 and the face light emitting unit 6023b, respectively, between the circuits connecting the driver 2026 and the anode of each LED chip included in the LEDs constituting the face light emitting unit 6023a. The fourth resistor 6027d to the sixth resistor 6027f are provided between the circuits connecting the anodes of the respective LED chips included in the LEDs. By providing the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f corresponding to the anode of each LED chip in this way, the current flowing through each LED chip is adjusted, and if a short circuit occurs inside the LED, the circuit is overloaded. It prevents the flow of electric current.

Further, the first capacitor 6028a is provided in parallel with the power supply terminal provided in the control element 6025, and the second capacitor 6028b is provided in parallel with the power supply terminal provided in the driver 6026, so that the control element 6025 and the driver 6026 are stably provided. It has a function to operate it.

The rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled to move between the standby position on the lower front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movement position near the center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 by a drive mechanism (not shown). It is possible to do. This drive mechanism is also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Then, the predetermined game content is notified to the player according to the movement mode and the light emission mode of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, and the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b mounted on the face substrate 6020 are in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position. Is lit in red to make the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b lit in red, so that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit. It may be configured to suggest that expectations are higher than normal. In addition, also in another embodiment, an example is shown in which a part of the accessory or a member constituting the accessory is movable, and the light emitting portion included in the accessory is controlled to a predetermined light emitting mode. May function as an effect, and by the effect, a configuration may be adopted that suggests that the expected degree of stop display is higher than usual in a mode in which the stop mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit.

As described above, in the light emitting decorative substrate (face substrate 6020) provided in such a decorative member (rabbit accessory 6000), there is a possibility that a defect may occur in the light emitting function. For example, in the process of surface mounting on the printed circuit board constituting the face board 6020, the amount of solder on the solder surface was insufficient, and the circuit on the printed circuit board and the mounted electronic components were not properly electrically connected. In some cases, there is a risk that the electronic components mounted on the back side of the printed circuit board will come into contact with other members or tools during assembly at the factory, and the mounted electronic components will be missing. In addition, there is a risk that electronic components may fail due to deterioration over time after the gaming machine is installed in a gaming store.

For example, in an LED functioning as a face light emitting unit 6023 capable of full-color light emission by emitting three colors of red, blue, and green in multiple gradations by a driver 6026, one of six metal terminals is electrically operated. When the connection is lost, one of the three colors is intended to emit light in a controlled manner, but in reality, only two colors are emitted and one color is emitted. In the case of, a non-light emitting state will occur. Such a state may occur when the LED chip fails and current does not flow, or when the resistor 6027 functioning as a limiting resistor is missing from the face substrate 6020 and the circuit is disconnected. ..
Such a situation may give the player who plays the game the impression that the movable decorative member does not look good. In particular, when a plurality of LEDs are controlled to emit light in the same color, there is a possibility that only the defective LED emits light in different emission colors. In addition, there is a risk of causing a situation in which the player misunderstands the degree of expectation of a big hit.

Further, the flat cable connected to the connector 6029 provided on the face board 6020 is bent many times due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative member, so that the strength of the predetermined portion of the flat cable deteriorates. It is also conceivable that the flat cable will be disconnected and the signal transmission and power supply to the rabbit accessory 6000 will not be performed properly. Alternatively, it is conceivable that the connector 6029 may be damaged due to repeated stress applied to a part of the connector 6029 due to the repeated movement of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this case, an unintended control signal is sent to the rabbit character 6000, and an unintended light emitting mode is shown to the player, or the power supply is not completely performed. In that case, the face light emitting unit 6023 provided in the rabbit accessory 6000 moves from the standby position to the moving position or moves from the moving position to the standby position in the off state without taking the lighting mode. There is a risk that the appearance of the rabbit will be poor.

Therefore, in the present invention, when the gaming machine is turned off, the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600 is visible in black, and the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 located in front is reflected on the surface thereof. It is configured to be reflected. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is configured to mirror-reflect the incident light. Alternatively, a colorless and transparent reflector (reflection sheet) is installed in the vicinity of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to cover the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, this reflector may be configured to specularly reflect the incident light. With such a configuration, if there is any abnormality in the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 located in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the rear. The content of the abnormality can be confirmed by visually recognizing. Alternatively, it can be confirmed whether or not an abnormality has occurred.

FIG. 122 (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 122 (A), the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the gaming machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown.

In this example, the rabbit accessory 6000 is arranged on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the front surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the face board 6020 provided on the rabbit accessory 6000. It is configured to be located at a predetermined distance (specifically, about several cm) from the back surface. In the example shown in FIG. 122A, a part of the driver 6026 mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020, the first resistance 6027a, and the entire second resistance 6027b are the display areas of the game board side effect display device 1600. It shows the state reflected in.

Note that FIG. 122A shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized from an oblique upper right position, but it is also possible to visually recognize the mounting mode of other electronic components by looking into the rabbit accessory 6000 from another angle. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized as looking into the center of the left-right direction from above, it is possible to visually recognize the entire driver 6026, the entire first capacitor 6028a, and the entire second capacitor 6028b. Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is visually recognized from the diagonally upper left, it is also possible to visually recognize the entire connector 6029 or the flat cable connected to the connector 6029. In this example, it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f, but this point will be described later.

FIG. 122B is a perspective view showing a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position. In FIG. 122B, the rabbit accessory 6000 is provided in the gaming machine so that the electronic components mounted on the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 are reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. An example is shown. In this example, it is difficult to visually recognize the electronic components such as the control element 6025, the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, and the entire driver 6026 and the first capacitor 6028a are used. It is possible to confirm the mounting mode only for a part and a part of the second capacitor 6028b. The method of visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 will be described later.

As described above, in the gaming machine in the power-off state, the back surface of the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 as a decorative means is configured to be reflected in the display area of the gaming board side effect display device 1600. It is possible to check the status of the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face board 6020 even after the gaming machine is installed in the gaming store. Further, since the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a white protective film and can be visually recognized in white, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is visually recognized in black can be visually recognized. It is structured so that it is easy to do.

An example is shown in which the entire surface and the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are covered with a white protective film, but the configuration is such that the circuit on the face substrate 6020 is covered with a light-colored protective film such as cream, not limited to white. You may. This is because the difference between light and dark is clearer when the light-colored protective film is used than when the dark-colored protective film is used, with respect to the display area of the game board-side effect display device 1600, which is black. Therefore, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized.

In the process of coloring the face board 6020, after creating a circuit structure by copper plating on the printed circuit board, a white protective agent is adopted as a protective agent to protect the wiring structure, and a place where a through hole is provided is provided. Except for this, it is desirable to apply this protective agent to the entire surface of both sides of the printed circuit board to form a white protective film so that the entire surface of the face substrate 6020 is white. When a protective agent other than white is used as the protective agent to protect the wiring structure, white ink is applied on the non-white protective agent so that the surface of the face substrate 6020 becomes white. You may. Alternatively, by combining these aspects, a white protective agent is applied to form a protective film, and then a white ink is applied onto the white protective film to make the surface of the face substrate 6020 whiter. It may be configured as follows. By forming the face substrate 6020 in such an embodiment, it is possible to make the face substrate 6020 visible in white. The same method can be adopted not only when the substrate is white but also when it is desired to be visible in other colors such as black and green. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate has a specific color.
Although an example in which the entire surfaces of the face substrate 6020 are white is shown, only a part of the region where the color of the face substrate 6020 is white may be used. Only a predetermined area on which the electronic component on the rear surface is mounted may be white. The back of the face substrate 6020 is covered with a thin plate-shaped cover, and the cover is provided with a punched-shaped opening so that the electronic component whose mounting mode is to be confirmed can be visually recognized. Therefore, the rear surface of the face board 6020 and a specific electronic component whose mounting mode is to be confirmed may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. When a colorless and transparent cover is used as such a cover, light is diffusely reflected on the surface of the cover, and the visibility of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 is lowered. Further, when a colored opaque cover is adopted as such a cover, the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 are hidden by the cover, and it becomes extremely difficult to confirm the mounting mode. .. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a punched opening so that at least a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be visually recognized. With such a configuration, while protecting the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 with a cover, it is possible to confirm the mounting mode from the opening provided in the cover for the electronic components whose mounting mode is to be confirmed. can. Further, by providing such an opening, it is possible to release the heat generated from the electronic component mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 to the outside, and the mounted electronic component may be damaged or deteriorated by the heat. It is possible to suppress the occurrence. It is preferable to configure the cover so that the electronic components do not protrude from the opening in a state of protruding rearward from the surface forming the back surface of the cover. Further, as the color of the cover, a black opaque or a dark opaque one may be adopted. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to visually recognize the white face substrate 6020 exposed from the cover.

It is desirable that the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 has a difference in brightness from the color of the protective film covering the face substrate 6020. Specifically, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be a bright color such as white or cream, and the color of the electronic component mounted on the face substrate 6020 may be a dark color such as black or dark blue. With such a configuration, the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be easily visually recognized with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 which is black. Further, since the face board 6020 is light-colored and the mounted electronic components are dark-colored, the face board 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted on the face board 6020 and the face board 6020. It becomes visible separately from the electronic parts.

The LED capable of multicolor light emission is made of a white member in order to increase the reflectance. In this case, if the color of the face substrate 6020 is white or bright, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mounting mode of the LED mounted on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020. As described above, when the mounted electronic component is white, the color of the face substrate 6020 may be black or dark. In this case, the face board 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is difficult to see, but the LED mounted on the face board 6020 is easy to see. Alternatively, the mounted electronic component or the electronic component before mounting may be coated with black or dark ink so that the electronic component is mounted on the white or light-colored face substrate.

As used herein, white refers to a color that becomes visible when an object is uniformly (about 100 to 80%) diffusely reflected by visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light. Further, the bright color refers to a color that can be visually recognized as, for example, cream or light gray by absorbing a specific wavelength region to some extent and diffusely reflecting the remaining wavelength region. On the other hand, black refers to a color that becomes visible when an object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of incident natural light and diffusely reflects a part (about 20 to several%). There is. In addition, dark color is black because most of the visible light of all wavelengths is uniformly absorbed and only a part (about 20 to several%) is diffusely reflected, but the light absorption rate is different in a specific wavelength region. It refers to a color that is close to the color, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as dark blue.

In the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 122 (A) and 122 (B), it is preferable to configure the rabbit accessory 6000 so that it can be manually moved from the standby position to the upward moving position. In this case, the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not immovable by the lock mechanism at the time of power failure, and the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 is not provided with a so-called light guide plate. It is configured as follows.

As a configuration for manually moving the rabbit accessory 6000, first, the immovable state will be described. In general, if the movable decoration is configured to be freely movable between the moving position and the standby position, when a large acceleration is applied to the movable decoration when the gaming machine is transported or installed in a game store. In addition, the movable decoration may be damaged. Therefore, a mechanism is provided to lock the movable decoration when the movable decoration is in the standby position when the power is on, and when the power is turned off while the movable decoration is locked, the movable decoration is provided by the lock mechanism. A method of immobilizing the body is considered. However, when such a lock mechanism is provided, it becomes difficult to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, it is possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand by configuring it so as not to provide such a lock mechanism.

Next, a light guide plate will be described as a configuration for manually moving the rabbit accessory 6000. The light guide plate is a plate-shaped decorative member that allows a player to visually recognize a mode in which a predetermined pattern is shining by diffusely reflecting light incident from a side surface in a predetermined pattern provided on the surface. Further, such a light emitting pattern is configured to be visible to the player as a predetermined effect. However, when such a light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, it becomes difficult or impossible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 as a movable decorative body by hand. Therefore, by configuring the opening 1100a of the game panel so as not to provide such a light guide plate, it is possible to move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand.

With such a configuration, the clerk can directly move the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand through the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100 at the time of power failure, and the face substrate can be used. It is possible to reflect different areas on the rear surface of the 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 122 (A), after moving the rabbit character 6000 upward by hand, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized so as to look into the rabbit character 6000 from below. This makes it easy to confirm the mounting mode of the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f, which were difficult to see until then. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 122 (B), by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 upward by hand, the control element 6025 mounted on the lower half of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020, which was previously invisible, Electronic components such as the first resistor 6027a to the sixth resistor 6027f can be visually recognized.

An example is shown in which the light guide plate is not provided in the game panel opening 1100a provided in the game panel 1100, but when the light guide plate is provided in the game panel opening 1100a, the entire game panel opening 1100a is covered with the light guide plate. Instead, it may be configured to cover only a part of the game panel opening 1100a. Specifically, when the standby position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the lower front of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is the center front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the guide is provided. It is preferable to arrange the light plate so that only the upper half of the game panel opening 1100a is covered. In this way, even if the light guide plate is provided, since a part of the game panel opening 1100a is not covered with the light guide plate, the function of exerting the effect of the light guide plate and the rabbit character By manually moving the 6000, both functions such as being able to change the area in which the face board 6020 is reflected with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600 can be achieved at the same time.

An example was shown in which the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed by directly moving the rabbit accessory 6000 by hand, but the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate is guided so that the hand cannot be inserted. The light plate may be enlarged, and in this case, the rabbit character may be moved by an article smaller than the hand. For example, a rod-shaped member having a diameter of about 5 mm or a thin plate-shaped member having a width of about 1 cm and a thickness of about 1 mm can be inserted into a region of the game panel opening 1100a not covered by the light guide plate to move the rabbit accessory 6000. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the area of the game panel opening 1100a that is not covered by the light guide plate may be set to a size that allows such a rod-shaped member or a plate-shaped member to be inserted. It suffices if an opening of about 0.0 cm and a length of 1.0 cm is provided. With such a configuration, the area covered by the light guide plate of the game panel opening 1100a can be widened, and the area where the effect using the light guide plate can be produced can be expanded.

If the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is not provided with a lock mechanism that makes it immovable at the time of power failure, and if the game panel opening 1100a is not provided with a light guide plate, the clerk is hand or elongated. An example in which the rabbit accessory 6000 can be directly moved by the member is shown, but when the accessory in the standby position is made immovable by the lock mechanism at the time of power failure, or the game panel opening 1100a is completely covered. When the light guide plate is provided as described above, the rabbit accessory 6000 cannot be manually moved, and the area in which the face substrate 6020 is reflected is changed with respect to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. I can't. Such a problem is a big problem in the case where the electronic component mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 is not reflected at all or hardly reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the rabbit character is in the standby position. Will be.

Therefore, in such an example, by turning off the power switch provided on the gaming machine while the initial check of the movable decorative body executed when the power is turned on is being performed, the control unit and the driving unit of the gaming machine are turned off. When a state where power is not supplied to the machine is forcibly created, the movable decoration in a position other than the standby position does not return to the standby position by its own weight, and the power switch is turned off. It is advisable to configure the switch so that it stops at a position slightly moved by its own weight from the position where. A specific example is shown below.

At the time of the initial check, the lock mechanism of the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is first released to move from the immovable state to the movable state, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 starts moving to the upper moving position. do. After the rabbit character 6000 completes the movement to the upper movement position, it stays in the movement position for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds), then starts moving to the lower standby position, and then the rabbit character 6000 waits. It stops at the position, and the lock mechanism changes the movable state to the immovable state, and the initial check is completed. Even when the game is started and the rabbit character 6000 is moved as an effect according to the start prize etc., the rabbit character 6000 in the standby position first becomes movable from the immovable state, and then the rabbit character 6000 is moved. Is controlled to move between the standby position and the moving position in a predetermined movement mode, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is controlled to be moved to the standby position, and then the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the unlocked state to the locked state. And.

In a gaming machine having such a configuration, by intentionally generating an electric power failure state, the clerk does not move the rabbit character 6000 directly by hand, but is mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 included in the rabbit character 6000. It is possible to reflect the electronic components on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, since the rabbit character 6000 is configured to stay in the moving position for a predetermined time at the time of the initial check, the rabbit character 6000 is forcibly turned off at the timing when the rabbit character 6000 stays in the moving position. Can be stopped at the moving position as it is, and the timing of turning off the power switch provided in the gaming machine and turning off the power is not severe. Further, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

In the initial check, not only does it stay at the moving position for a predetermined time, but also when moving from the waiting position to the moving position, a predetermined position between the waiting position and the moving position (for example, between the waiting position and the moving position). At the position), the rabbit accessory 6000 stays for a predetermined time (about 2 seconds) and then moves to the moving position. If so, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to stay in a predetermined position. With such a configuration, the rabbit accessory 6000 can be easily stopped at different positions, and the electronic components reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from different angles. Will be. Further, since the rabbit accessory 6000 can be stopped at a predetermined position, it is possible to pattern the confirmation operation of the face substrate 6020.

An example of keeping the rabbit accessory 6000 in a moving position or a predetermined position for a predetermined time at the time of initial check is shown. In these examples, the face substrate 6020 is in a state where the rabbit accessory 6000 stays in the moving position or a predetermined position. The first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b provided in the above may be configured to light in a predetermined manner. Alternatively, at the start of the initial check, the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, and the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b are lit in a predetermined manner before starting the movement to the moving position. You may. For example, as a light emitting mode, it is preferable to light the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in the same color. In this case, white is desirable as the emission color. With such a configuration, the clerk can confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the light emitting mode of the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b, and if there is an abnormality in the light emitting mode, the rabbit. It is possible to visually check the back surface side of the face substrate 6020 with the gaming machine in which the accessory 6000 is in a predetermined position or a moving position in a power-off state, and confirm what kind of abnormality has occurred. In addition, when a player complains about the light emitting mode, it is possible to quickly identify the cause of the abnormality.

Although an example of lighting the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b in the same color is shown, it is preferable to provide three or more face light emitting units 6023 and configure each to emit light in the same color. Further, the emission color at this time may be configured to include at least white. In such a configuration, if any of the resistors provided corresponding to the plurality of face light emitting units 6023 is missing, one face light emitting unit 6023 is different from the other plurality of face light emitting units 6023. It emits light in different colors (for example, if a resistor provided in series with an LED chip capable of emitting green light is missing, the LED can only emit blue and red, which is a mixture of those colors. The aspect of emitting light in reddish purple can be visually recognized.) Therefore, it is possible to easily identify the defective face light emitting portion by the emission color.

When the power failure state is forcibly generated, the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in a state where it is not in the standby position. When the power is turned on in such a state, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be once moved to the standby position, and then controlled so as to start the initial operation check as described above again from the beginning. With such a configuration, it is possible to stop the rabbit accessory 6000 at an appropriate position where the back surface of the face substrate 6020 can be easily visually recognized.

Various embodiments can be considered for the mode of the rabbit character 6000 itself, the movement mode of the rabbit character 6000, and the positional relationship between the rabbit character 6000 and the game board side effect display device 1600. A plurality of examples are shown below.

FIG. 123 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the area of the face substrate 6020 reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600 is changed by moving the rabbit accessory from the lower standby position to the upper moving position. In this example, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 constitute the rabbit accessory 6000, and although it is possible to move between the standby position and the moving position, the body portion 6030 is a game panel. It is configured not to move relative to 1100. FIG. 123 (A) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, and in this state, only the upper half of the back surface of the face board 6020 is reflected on the game board side effect display device 1600. .. Further, the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f are not reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 because the body portion 6030 is located immediately behind these electronic components. FIG. 123 (B) shows a state in which the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position. In this state, almost the entire back surface of the face substrate is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to slowly rotate about the front-rear direction by a drive mechanism (not shown). Alternatively, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be manually configured to rotate about the front-back direction. With such a configuration, it is extremely easy to visually recognize the control element 6025, the fifth resistance 6027e, and the sixth resistance 6027f, which are originally located below the face substrate 6020 and it is difficult to confirm the mounting mode. Become.

FIG. 124 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are provided as separate bodies with respect to the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000. The first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 have a vertically elongated rectangular shape. During the operation of the rabbit accessory 6000, the face cover portion 6010 and the face substrate 6020 do not move, and the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 move to the upper moving positions to perform a predetermined effect. Will be done.

FIG. 124 (A) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the standby position, and in this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 has the first ear portion 6021. Only a part of the electronic components mounted on the back surface of the face substrate 6020 in a state of being hidden by the second ear portion 6022 is reflected. FIG. 124 (B) shows a state in which the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are in the moving positions. The whole area is reflected. By moving the member between the member whose mounting mode of the electronic component is desired and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in this way, the visual mode of the member whose mounting mode of the electronic component is to be confirmed is changed. Is possible. Although aspects of the rabbit accessory 6000 have been described in other examples, these aspects may be applied to the first selvage portion 6021 and the second selvage portion 6022 in the example shown in FIG. 124.

FIG. 125 shows an embodiment of the rabbit accessory 6000. In this embodiment, the body portion 6030 of the rabbit accessory 6000 is vertically elongated. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the standby position, the body portion 6030 is configured so that the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the rabbit accessory 6000 are invisible, and when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the body portion is configured. The rabbit character 6000 will be located above 6030. In this state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so that almost the entire back surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected.

In the embodiments described so far, the area of the face cover portion 6010 of the rabbit accessory 6000 does not change, but the member corresponding to the face cover portion 6010 is composed of an opaque member in the state of being moved to the moving position. In addition, in the movable decorative member that expands in the horizontal direction with respect to the game panel 1100 to increase the area seen from the front view, the area seen from the front view increases, so that the effect display device 1600 on the game board side increases. It may be difficult to visually recognize the reflection of the substrate on the display area. Therefore, when such a movable decorative member is adopted, the area of the front view may be manually reduced in a state where the power is forcibly cut off at the time of the initial check. Alternatively, the state before the area when viewed from the front is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) so that the area when viewed from the front does not increase when the area is moved to the moving position during the initial check. Later, it may be configured so that the area when viewed from the front is large. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to confirm the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is cut off.

An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. On the other hand, it is not preferable for the player to visually recognize the state in which the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 is reflected. For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, when an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is executed, an electron mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 by the player is executed. The parts will be visible, and there is a risk that the player will be in a state of excitement even though he is trying to excite by performing the production. Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for the purpose of dividing the game when a so-called reach loss occurs, in which the decorative symbol stops in a manner showing a loss after forming a reach state. Even when the effect of darkening almost the entire surface is executed, the electronic components mounted on the rear surface of the face board 6020 are visually recognized by the player, and the player is in a disappointing state of being out of reach. In addition, there is a risk that the player will be in a state of excitement.

Therefore, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is located in the standby position at the timing of executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, such reflection is visually recognized. It is advisable to adopt a configuration that suppresses it. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, since the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are located between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6021 are located. It is hidden by the ear portion 6022, and the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is suppressed. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, since the body portion 6030 is located between the face substrate 6020 and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is hidden by these members and is hidden by the game board side effect display device 1600. The reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area is suppressed.

In the example shown in FIG. 123, when performing an effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the driver 6026, the first capacitor 6028a, the second capacitor 6028b, and the like are used by the player. It may be visible. Therefore, by displaying something only in the lower front part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is excited according to the effect of darkening the display area. Will be. In the lower front of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, it may be configured to display a decorative pattern, display the number of holds, or display the hold image showing the expected degree of jackpot related to the change. .. In this case, the color of the image may be darker or the size of the image may be made smaller than when the decorative pattern, the number of holdings, or the holding image is displayed. Further, instead of displaying these statically, they may be displayed dynamically like an animation. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the reflection generated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 inconspicuous during the game.

After the darkening effect is started, the rabbit accessory 6000 may be moved from the standby position shown in FIG. 123 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 123 (B) while the darkening effect is being performed. The first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 may be moved from the standby position shown in 124 (A) to the moving position shown in FIG. 124 (B), or from the standby position shown in FIG. 125 (A) to FIG. 125 (B). It may be configured to move the rabbit accessory 6000 to the movement position shown in 1. However, in this case, the electronic components mounted on the back side of the face substrate 6020 are easily visible.

Therefore, when performing an effect of moving the rabbit character 6000 from the lower standby position to the upper movement position, the area overlaps with the rabbit character 6000 in the front view in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to display the reflection-suppressed image that suppresses the reflection. In this way, when the rabbit accessory 6000 moves, the image on which it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the reflection of the face board 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed on the game board side effect. By displaying the image in the display area of the device 1600, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is excited.

The size of the reflection suppression image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the same size as the rabbit character 6000 in front view, or one size larger (about 1-2 cm) than the rabbit character. It is assumed that the outer shape of the reflection-suppressed image and the outer shape of the rabbit accessory 6000 completely overlap each other in the front view, or the reflection-suppressed image is displayed in a manner of about 1-2 mm protruding from the periphery of the rabbit accessory in the front view. It is good to do it. Further, the reflection suppression image may be composed of white or light color. By making it white or bright, it is possible to make the reflection inconspicuous. In addition to white or light color, black or dark color may be used to form the reflection suppression image. Further, the reflection suppression image may be an image that is dynamically displayed.

The timing for starting the display of the reflection suppression image may be before the start of the darkening effect, at the start of the darkening effect, or when the rabbit character 6000 starts moving during the darkening effect. When the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved from the standby position to the moving position, the reflection suppression image may be configured to be moved while maintaining the positional relationship with the rabbit accessory 6000. The reflection suppression image should be displayed until the darkening effect is completed. For example, if the rabbit accessory 6000 is stopped at the standby position during the darkening effect, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image. After that, even when the rabbit accessory 6000 returns from the standby position to the moving position, it is preferable to continue displaying the reflection suppression image as long as the darkening effect is performed.

In addition to preparing a plurality of modes of such a reflection suppression image, assign different jackpot expectations to the mode of the reflection suppression image, and display one of the reflection suppression images when the rabbit character moves. Then, it may be configured to function as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. For example, blue and red may be prepared as the colors of the reflection suppression image, and the red reflection suppression image may be configured to show that the expectation of a big hit is higher. In this case, since the player pays attention to the display mode of the reflection suppression image itself, even if some electronic components are reflected, it is possible to make such reflection less noticeable. ..

Although the point of displaying the reflection suppression image when moving the rabbit accessory 6000 has been described, the above-described embodiment may be applied even when the first ear portion 6021 and the first ear portion 6022 are moved. good.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 124, it is desirable that the colors of the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are black or dark. Further, it is desirable not to mount electronic components on the back surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022. When mounting electronic components on the back surfaces of the first selvage portion 6021 and the second selvage portion 6022, it is desirable to make the electronic components darker in color. With such a configuration, the rear surfaces of the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, which are members for suppressing the reflection of the face substrate 6020 on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, are the game board. Even if the reflection is reflected in the display area of the side effect display device 1600, the reflection can be made difficult for the player to notice.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 125, it is desirable that the color of the back surface of the body portion 6030 is dark. Further, it is desirable that no electronic component is mounted on the back surface of the body portion 6030. When mounting electronic components on the back surface of the body portion 6030, it is desirable to use a dark color. With such a configuration, even if the rear surface of the body portion 6030, which is a member that suppresses the reflection of the face substrate 6020, is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the player due to the reflection. The effect on can be reduced.

The moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 at the time of the initial check may be configured to be in front of the central portion of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. In this case, the reflection on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be confirmed from all the directions of up, down, left, and right, and the entire area on the rear surface of the face board 6020 can be visually recognized.

On the other hand, when executing the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved to the front of the center of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving to the position, it may be configured to execute this effect. In this case, the rabbit character 6000 is located exactly in the middle of the direction of the player's line of sight and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the player moves his face to forcibly reflect the rabbit character 6000. Unless the aspect is visually recognized, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the state reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is visually recognized by the player. When the effect of darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is finished, the rabbit character 6000 is waited from the moving position after brightening the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. By moving to the position, the influence on the player due to the reflection can be reduced.

As an example of the member reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is shown, but the rear surface of the member other than the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000 is played. By reflecting the image on the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the state of the rear surface of the member may be confirmed. For example, the rear surface of a relay board (not shown) provided for transmitting a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the face board 6020 and supplying power from the power supply board 931 is an effect display on the game board side. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the device 1600. Further, on the back surface of the relay board, a connector or a control element to which a flat cable used for transmitting a control signal or supplying electric power is connected is surface-mounted. It is preferable to configure these so as to be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is any abnormality in the electronic components mounted on the relay board.

An example is shown in which the relationship between the standby position and the moving position of the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the vertical direction. However, the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable in the front-rear direction, and is located between the rear standby position and the front moving position. It may be configured to move. Alternatively, the rabbit accessory 6000 provided below the front surface of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 rotates about the rotation axis provided below the rabbit accessory 6000, whereby the rabbit accessory 6000 is rotated. It may be configured to be movable so that the upper part of the 6000 is moved so as to be tilted forward. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be movable between the standby position where the rabbit accessory 6000 is in a positional relationship parallel to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movement position where the upper part of the rabbit accessory 6000 is moved so as to tilt forward. You may. Even in such a configuration, by moving the rabbit accessory 6000 from the standby position to the moving position, the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be widened. Is possible.

An example is shown in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, but the rabbit accessory 6000 is configured to be fixedly provided. The game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable. For example, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be movable rearward, or the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be rotatable around a predetermined movable axis. Alternatively, the entire game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to be horizontally movable in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 fixedly provided in the moved direction may be positioned. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 even for a fixedly provided rabbit character. Become.

An example in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is fixedly provided and the rabbit accessory 6000 is movable with respect to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the game board side with respect to the fixedly provided rabbit accessory 6000. Although an example in which the effect display device 1600 is movable is shown, both the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to be movable. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to move backward, and the rabbit accessory 6000 may be configured to move forward. Alternatively, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the rabbit accessory 6000, which are not overlapped in the front view, may be moved so as to approach each other in the horizontal direction so as to be in the overlapped state in the front view. good. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the area of the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Although an example in which one game board side effect display device 1600 is provided is shown, a plurality of effect display devices may be provided. Then, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 may be reflected in at least one of the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices. Further, the surface formed by the display area of one effect display device and the surface formed by the display area of the other effect display device are configured to face different directions, and the rabbit accessory 6000 can be moved to the front side thereof. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 can be reflected from different angles in the display areas of the plurality of effect display devices, and it becomes easy to find the cause of the abnormality.

Further, by configuring a plurality of movable effect display devices to be provided and moving the effect display device, the display area of the effect display device or a plurality of effects in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 included in the rabbit accessory 6000 is at least one is provided. It may be configured to be reflected in the display area of the display device.

An example is shown in which the rear surface of the face board 6020 is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is forcibly turned off, but during a so-called demonstration in which the player has not played the game for a predetermined time. By darkening almost the entire display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the rear surface of the face board 6020 may be reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 126 shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 118. In this embodiment, the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIGS. 118 to 125 is provided is not in the lower center on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, but on the lower left front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. It has become. Further, a stump accessory 6100 having a shape imitating a stump is provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600. As the whole of the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board 5 and the game panel 1100 on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600 as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 118, and a plurality of spaces are formed in this space. The characters are arranged in layers. Specifically, from the front side, at a position close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second A cloud accessory 6750 is provided. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. There is. Further, a first grass accessory 6470 and a second grass accessory 6475 are provided behind them, and a third grass accessory 6480 is provided behind them so as to overlap the third grass accessory 6480 behind them. A fourth grass character 6485 is provided, a rabbit character 6000 and a stump character 6100 are provided behind them, a mountain character 6500 is provided behind these, and a game board side effect display is provided behind the mountain character 6500. A device 1600 is provided. By arranging a plurality of accessories in layers in this way, a sense of depth can be obtained.

A stump portion 6200 having a shape imitating a stump and a first grass movable portion 6360 and a second grass movable portion 6370 having a shape imitating grass are provided in front of the lower right side of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the stump portion 6200. The stump accessory 6100 is configured as a unit by the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370.

FIG. 127 shows the stump accessory 6100. A first grass movable portion 6360 is provided on the front left side of the stump portion 6200, and a second grass movable portion 6370 is provided on the front right side of the stump portion 6200. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are each formed of a plate-shaped, green transparent synthetic resin. In the first grass movable portion 6360, the surface formed by the green transparent synthetic resin is exposed at the outer edge portion excluding the lower end portion thereof, and the member located at the rear is seen through and can be visually recognized. On the other hand, a first grass decoration portion 6360a coated with green ink is provided on a portion other than the lower end portion and the outer edge, and the rear portion of the first grass decoration portion 6360a is invisible. .. The second grass movable portion 6370 also has the same configuration as the first grass movable portion 6360, and includes a second grass decoration portion 6370a.

The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are shown in a state in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located in front of the stump portion 6200 as shown in FIG. 127 (A). As shown in 127 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200. It is possible to take the state of being moved to. The first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 can be moved by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In the state shown in FIG. 127 (A), the end face forming the right end of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the end face forming the left end of the second grass movable portion 6370 are in contact with each other, and the stump portion 6200 located rearward. The lower half is difficult to see. At this time, a part of the stump opening 6210a is provided with a region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360 is not provided and a second grass decoration portion 6370a of the second grass movable portion 6370. It is configured to be visible through the non-existent area. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall substrate 6352 provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352. A part of the wall light emitting unit 6354 is configured to be visible.

In this state, as the first light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set as a light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is not provided with the first grass decorative portion 6360a of the first grass movable portion 6360. The area and the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided are irradiated, and the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the first grass movable part 6360 is not provided and the second grass movable part are irradiated. The second grass decoration portion 6370a of the portion 6370 may be configured so as to pass through an area not provided and to take a state of being irradiated to the player.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 127 (B), the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left from the state where it is located in front of the stump portion 6200, and the second grass movable portion 6370 is positioned in front of the stump portion 6200. Since it is in a state of being moved to the right from the state of being in a stump portion, the visibility of the lower half of the stump portion 6200 is enhanced. In this state, the stump box portion 6300 is visible from the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump portion 6200. In this state, the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 provided behind the stump opening 6210a, and the rear wall provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The light emitting unit 6354 has changed from a state in which it is difficult to see to a state in which it is easy to see, as compared with a state before the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move.

In this state, as the second light emitting effect, the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is set as a light emitting mode, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 passes through the stump opening 6210a and is directed toward the front where the player is located. It may be configured so that it can take a state of being directly irradiated. In the second light emitting effect, the first grass movable portion 6360 passes through the region where the first grass decoration portion 6360a is not provided and the second grass movable portion 6370 is not provided with the second grass decoration portion 6370a. Compared with the first light emission effect in which the player is irradiated with light, it is possible to give the player a visually stronger stimulus.

It should be noted that the first gaming state and the second gaming state (for example, the probabilistic gaming state, the time-saving gaming state, and the jackpot gaming state) that are more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state). ) Is possible, in the case of the first gaming state, the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed, and the period during which the first light emitting effect is executed is configured to be longer than the period during which the second light emitting effect is executed. In this case, it is preferable to configure the period in which the second light emission effect is executed longer than the period in which the first light emission effect is executed. Alternatively, the first light emitting effect is executed for a relatively long period in the first gaming state as compared with the second gaming state, and the second gaming state is relatively longer than the first gaming state. The second light emitting effect may be configured to be executed during the period. Further, even if only the first light emitting effect is performed in the first gaming state, both the first light emitting effect and the second light emitting effect are performed, or only the second light emitting effect is performed in the second gaming state. good. The second light emitting effect, which is visually more stimulating than the first light emitting effect, functions as an effect that gives the player a sense of interest (a production that gives a special feeling), and is therefore used only in an advantageous gaming state. Or, when the game is in an advantageous state, the effect period is used for a longer period of time, so that the player's interest can be improved.

In this way, in the second gaming state, which is advantageous to the player, the player will experience a visually strong stimulus for a longer period of time than in the first gaming state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. , It is possible to further increase the excitement of the player who is in an excited state due to the occurrence of an advantageous state.

FIG. 128 (A) shows the stump portion 6200. The stump portion 6200 is composed of a stump plate portion 6210 which is a colored opaque plate-shaped member provided on the front side and a box-shaped stump box portion 6300 provided on the back side. The stump plate portion 6210 is a plate-shaped member having an outer shape imitating a wooden stump, and a stump opening 6210a is provided in the center thereof.

FIG. 128B shows the positional relationship between the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump box portion 6300 in a front view. In the figure, the stump plate portion 6210 and the stump opening portion 6210a are shown by dotted lines. The front side of the stump box portion 6300 is arranged so as to correspond to the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210, and imitates a state in which a hole is formed on the side surface of the stump.

FIG. 129 (A) shows the stump box portion 6300. The stump box portion 6300 includes a box upper wall portion 6310 that constitutes the upper wall, a box right wall portion 6320 that constitutes the right wall, a box lower wall portion 6330 that constitutes the lower wall, and a box that constitutes the left wall. It is composed of a left wall portion 6340 and a box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the rear wall. The box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a trapezoidal shape in a plan view, the back side and the front side are parallel, and the length of the front side is longer than the back side. It is composed long. The box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are provided so that the front side is inclined outward. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, a sense of depth can be obtained.

FIG. 129 (B) is a diagram showing a state in which the stump box portion 6300 is disassembled. The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side and a rear wall substrate 6352 located on the rear side. In this figure, a dotted line with respect to the rear wall substrate 6352 schematically shows a location where the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 included in the rear wall cover 6356 is located.

FIG. 129 (C) is a front view of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover 6356 has a horizontally long rectangular shape and is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. A rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 having a shape imitating a root vegetable is formed on the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356. The rear wall cover light scattering section 6358 is composed of a first rear wall cover light scattering section 6358a shaped like a root vegetable root and a second rear wall cover light scattering section 6358b shaped like a root vegetable leaf.

FIG. 129 (D) is a front view of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 is a horizontally long rectangular printed circuit board. The front and rear surfaces of the rear wall substrate 6352 are white. A rear wall light emitting unit 6354 configured by surface-mounting a plurality of LEDs is provided on the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall substrate 6352 has the same size as the rear wall cover 6356 when viewed from the front. The light emitted from the LED constituting the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface forming the rear wall substrate 6352. The rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided at a position where it overlaps with the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 in front view. Specifically, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a corresponds to the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables, and the second rear wall cover light scattering having a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf. A second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is provided corresponding to the portion 6358b. As shown in FIG. 127 (A), in a state where the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are located in front of the stump portion 6200, each LED constituting the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is used. 1 It is configured to be provided at a position that does not overlap with the area where the first grass decoration part 6360a of the grass movable part 6360 is not provided or the area where the second grass decoration part 6370a of the second grass movable part 6370 is not provided. It is good to do it. In this case, even if the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is set to emit light as an effect, the player is not directly irradiated with light, so that a visually weak stimulus is given to the player.

The rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the front surface of the rear wall substrate 6352 are not completely in contact with each other, but are provided at a predetermined interval (about 1-2 mm). At this time, it is desirable to set the distance between the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356 and the rear wall substrate 6352 so that the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b do not come into contact with the rear surface of the rear wall cover 6356. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to dissipate the heat generated in the rear wall light emitting unit 6354, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 fails due to the heat generated by itself. It will be possible.

The stump accessory 6100 is used for an effect of notifying the expectation of a big hit in a gaming machine. Specifically, from the state where the stump opening 6210a is difficult to see, the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, so that the stump opening 6210a becomes easy to see. Whether or not, then, when the stump opening 6210a is in a state where it is easy to see, the light emission of the box rear wall portion 6350 located on the back side of the stump box portion 6300 which becomes visible through the stump opening 6210a. What is the mode (for example, whether the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 appears to shine red or white, or the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located in the rear with the light turned off. It is configured to suggest that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol is expected to be stopped and displayed in a mode indicating a big hit, depending on whether it looks white. For example, in each of the light emitting modes of the rear wall substrate 6352, the expected degree of stopping display may be set so that the stopping mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit. With such a configuration, the player can be greatly interested in the light emitting mode of the rear wall substrate 6352.

An example was shown in which the light emission mode of the rear wall substrate 6352 informs the expectation level of the stop display in a mode in which the stop mode of the changing decorative symbol indicates a big hit. Such notification may be performed by setting the light emitting mode different from that of the unit 6354b.

For example, by not emitting light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a but causing the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit light weakly in green, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is white. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is shaped like a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. Further, by causing the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a to emit light lightly in white and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit light weakly in green, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is white and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player. Further, by causing the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a to emit light weakly in red and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b to emit light weakly in green, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having a shape imitating the root of root vegetables is formed. The second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, which is red and has a shape imitating a root vegetable leaf, is green and can be visually recognized by the player.

The reason why the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a emits light weakly is that the light emitted from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a does not strongly decorate the portion other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a. Because. Further, the reason why the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is weakly emitted is that the light emitted from the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b does not strongly decorate the portion other than the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b. Because. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize an effect as if substantially only the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 is in the light emitting mode.

By adopting such a light emitting mode, it is possible to realize an expression imitating a root vegetable radish in the first light emitting example and the second light emitting example, and a root vegetable carrot in the third light emitting example. Further, in the first light emitting example, the color of the rear wall substrate located behind the first rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358a and the color of the first rear wall substrate are not emitted even though the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a is not emitted. The shape of the wall cover light scattering portion 6358a makes it possible to express a predetermined motif (in this example, the root portion of a radish). Further, in the relationship between the second light emitting example and the third light emitting example, a plurality of motifs (radish and carrot in this example) are expressed by making the light emitting color of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a different. It is possible to do.

An example is shown in which the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b are made to emit light weakly, so that it is possible to realize an effect as if substantially only the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 is in the light emitting mode. However, in such an effect, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit strong light, so that the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall are all over the inner surface of the stump box portion 6300. It may be configured so that the light from the light emitting unit 6354b reaches strongly. In this case, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b may be configured to emit light in the same color (for example, white).

Even if the light from the rear wall substrate 6352 is reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 so as to be visible to the player. good. For example, in the transparent synthetic resin constituting the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, a light scattering unit capable of scattering each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300. It may be configured to be. Alternatively, in the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340, plating or the like forming a metal thin film such as aluminum on at least each inner surface constituting the stump box portion 6300. The reflective portion may be formed by subjecting the treatment. With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently reflect the light emitted from the rear wall substrate 6352 and radiated to the entire inner surface of the stump box portion 6300 toward the player. Further, in this case, the white rear wall substrate 6352 itself also has a function of diffusely reflecting light forward.

The rear wall substrate 6352 constituting the box rear wall portion 6350 is visible in white via the colorless and transparent rear wall cover 6356. Therefore, when the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move to the moving positions and the box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized from the stump opening 6210a, the rear wall light emitting portion. Even when the 6354 is turned off, the player can visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as a state in which the box rear wall portion 6350 is decorated with the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself. Further, the rear wall cover 6356 is provided with a rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 that imitates the shape of root vegetables, and even when the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 does not emit light, the shape of the rear wall cover light scattering unit 6358 allows the rear wall cover to emit light. The rear wall portion 6350 of the box can be visually recognized by the player as it is decorated.

Although the example in which the rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358 has a shape imitating the shape of a root vegetable is shown, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 may be configured to be a light scattering portion. Alternatively, in the rear wall cover 6356, the entire front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 is made into a smooth shape without providing a portion for scattering the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. May be configured to pass as it is. Even with such a configuration, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 itself makes it possible for the player to visually recognize the box rear wall portion 6350 as a decorated state as in the above-mentioned example.

An example is shown in which the box rear wall portion 6350 of the stump box portion 6300 is provided with the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, Either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to have a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 or the rear wall cover 6356. Alternatively, with respect to at least one of the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 constituting the stump box portion 6300. It may be configured to provide a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 constituting the stump box portion 6300 may be provided. , The box left wall portion 6340 and the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be provided with a configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, in these examples, when the predetermined wall portion is provided with the configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, the other wall portions are not provided with the configuration corresponding to the rear wall light emitting portion 6354. It may be configured to provide only the configuration corresponding to the rear wall cover 6356.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin, and the stump plate portion 6210 is transparent or Formed from a translucent synthetic resin, when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 are in the standby position, the rear wall light emitting part 6354 is put into a light emitting state, so that the rear wall light emitting part 6354 The rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be illuminated by the emitted light. With such a configuration, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 passes through the stump plate portion 6210, and the player can visually recognize the state in which the stump plate portion 6210 is decorated with the light. Even if the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the stump plate portion 6210 constituting the stump box portion 6300 are formed of colored transparent or colored translucent synthetic resin. good. For example, these may be formed of a brown synthetic resin. Further, the rear surface of the stump plate portion 6210 may be printed with a tree pattern shape with brown ink so as to form an opaque or translucent region in a part of the stump plate portion.

Although the example in which the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 is white is shown, other colors may be adopted. For example, the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 may be brown as in the stump plate portion 6210. In such an embodiment, by turning off the light emitting portion 6354a on the first rear wall, the root vegetables to which soil is attached can be expressed in the light scattering portion 6358 on the rear wall cover.

When the first grass movable portion 6360 moves to the left and the second grass movable portion 6370 moves to the right, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate portion 6210 is exposed, and the box rear wall portion located rearward. An example in which the 6350 becomes visible is shown, but the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are rotated around the left and right directions of the lower ends of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. It is configured to be driveable so that the upper part falls forward, and when the upper part of the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 falls forward, the stump opening 6210a provided in the stump plate part 6210 is exposed. , The box rear wall portion 6350 located at the rear may be configured to be visible.

An example is shown in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are provided in front of the stump portion 6200, but only one of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 is provided in front of the stump portion 6200. The stump opening 6210a may be exposed by moving to the right or left movement position. Alternatively, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are configured as an integral member, and the member moves to the right or left moving position so that the stump opening 6210a is exposed. It may be configured.

The box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rear wall substrate 6352 and a rear wall cover 6356, but the rear wall cover 6356 may be rotatably configured. Specifically, the upper side of the rear wall cover 6356 is used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) is configured to rotate the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 so as to be in contact with the inner surface of the box upper wall portion 6310. The left side of the wall cover 6356 may be used as a rotation axis, and a drive source (not shown) may be used to rotate the front surface of the rear wall cover 6356 so as to be in contact with the inner surface of the left wall portion 6340 of the box. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 is located on the front side of the rear wall substrate 6352, and the rear wall substrate 6352 can be visually recognized by the player via the rear wall cover 6356. The box rear wall portion 6350 can be visually recognized by the player in any of the embodiments in which the rear wall cover 6356 is not located on the front side of the 6352 and the rear wall substrate 6352 is directly visible. Further, since the stump accessory 6100 is located at the lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600 when viewed from the player's point of view, the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated around the upper side or the left side to rotate the rear wall cover 6356 after movement. Cover 6356 becomes inconspicuous. It should be noted that the right side or the variable may be rotated as an axis.

The rear wall substrate 6352 may have a shape larger than that of the rear wall cover 6356. For example, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to have the same size and shape as the stump plate portion 6210 so that the outer edges of the rear wall substrate 6352 overlap each other in front view. In this case, the rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape that is enlarged from the original shape to the periphery. In this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, it is irradiated from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall are irradiated. The light reflected backward by the unit 6340 or the like can be reflected again toward the player in front.

Further, the light emitting portion may be provided in a portion other than the region covered by the rear wall cover 6356. For example, in the stump plate portion 6210, a light emitting portion is provided in front of the rear wall substrate 6352 behind the portion imitating the root or the portion imitating the cut end of the tree so that the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 emits light at the same time. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, it is possible to further enhance the effect of causing the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 to emit light. Alternatively, such a rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured so that no light emitting unit other than the rear wall light emitting unit 6354 is provided. Also in this case, in the portion where the white rear wall substrate 6352 is extended to the periphery, the light reflected rearward by the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the like is emitted. It becomes possible to reflect toward the player in front again.

In the example shown with reference to FIG. 129, the box rear wall portion 6350 is composed of a rectangular rear wall cover 6356 provided on the front side and a rectangular rear wall substrate 6352 provided on the back side. On the other hand, in the example shown below using FIG. 130, the box rear wall portion 6350 is the rear wall cover 6356 located on the front side, the rear wall substrate 6352 located in the middle, and the rear wall plate portion 6380 located on the back side. I tried to compose from. In this example, the rear wall cover 6356 has a shape imitating root vegetables, the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a having an outer shape imitating the roots of root vegetables, and the second rear having an outer shape imitating root vegetables leaves. A wall cover light scattering unit 6358b is provided. The rear wall cover 6356 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the color of the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be visually recognized.

The rear wall substrate 6352 has a shape imitating a root vegetable as a whole, and is composed of a first rear wall substrate 6352a imitating a root part of a root vegetable and a second rear wall substrate 6352b imitating a leaf portion of a root vegetable. A white protective film is formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the first rear wall substrate 6352a by a white protective agent. Further, a green protective film is formed on the front surface and the rear surface of the second rear wall substrate 6352b by a green protective agent. Four LEDs are surface-mounted on the first rear wall substrate 6352a as the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a. Further, two LEDs are surface-mounted on the second rear wall substrate 6352b as the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b. A rear wall cover 6356 is attached to the front surface of such a rear wall substrate 6352. Further, the rear wall plate portion 6380 has a rectangular shape, and a rear wall substrate 6352 is attached to the front surface thereof. Then, in this example, the rear wall of the stump box portion 6300 is formed by the rear wall plate portion 6380.

Even if the first rear wall board 6352a and the second rear wall board 6352b are configured as separate printed circuit boards and attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380, respectively, the first rear wall board 6352a and the second rear wall board 6352b can be configured to function as the rear wall board 6352. Alternatively, the printed circuit board 1 may be coated with a white protective agent and a green protective agent separately to form the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b.

In the stump box portion 6300 having such a configuration, it is preferable to perform an effect of moving the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 to the moving position as described above. Further, also in this embodiment, as the light emitting mode when the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b are used for the staging, a weak light emitting mode that makes it visible as if the root vegetables are emitting light and a weak light emitting mode are used. A strong light emitting mode that makes it visible as if the entire stump box portion 6300 is emitting light may be adopted.

Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, the color and shape of the first rear wall substrate 6352a and the second rear wall substrate 6352b cause the stump box portion 6300 to be in the stump box portion 6300. It is possible to express a predetermined motif. In this example, the first rear wall substrate 6352a is white through the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a that imitates the root portion, and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b that imitates the leaf portion. The rear wall substrate 6352b is visible in green. In this way, one decorative body can be configured only by the outer shape of the substrate and the color of the substrate.

In this example, a plurality of grass accessories 6400 are provided below and in front of the game board side effect display device 1600 on the front side of the rabbit accessory and the stump accessory.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, as described above, the first grass accessory 6470 to the fourth grass accessory 6485 are provided as the grass accessory 6400 between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a. There is. Hereinafter, a plurality of embodiments of such a herbaceous material 6400 will be shown.

The grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 131 (A) is composed of a grass substrate 6420 having a colored opaque, plate-like shape, and an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422. The light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 131 (B) includes a grass substrate 6420 having a colored opaque, plate-like shape, and an outer shape imitating grass. In this example, the grass substrate 6420 includes a grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424. The light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is formed by an LED surface-mounted on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In the examples shown in FIGS. 131 (A) and 131 (B), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 imitates grass, and the outer shape itself has a function of decoration. White may be adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 by causing the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to emit light in green or brown. As the color of the grass substrate 6420, green or brown may be adopted. Green can represent the color of living grass, and brown can represent the color of dead grass. Thereby, the decoration imitating the grass can be realized by both the color and the shape of the grass substrate 6420.

Further, as the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420, an LED having the same color as the grass substrate 6420 is adopted. Specifically, when the grass substrate 6420 is white, a white LED is adopted as the LED to be mounted. With such a configuration, the LED mounted on the grass substrate 6420 can be made inconspicuous. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the LED is provided as the light emitting portion on the substrate.

The light emitted from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is emitted toward the front perpendicular to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the effect that makes the player feel a strong image visually. When the grass front cover 6440, which will be described later, is provided, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is radiated horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured to be implemented in. With such a configuration, the light is emitted toward the upper end portion of the grass front cover 6440, so that the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is transmitted to the entire grass front cover 6440. , The effect as if the entire grass front cover 6440 was shining can be visually recognized by the player. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

On the other hand, the light emitted from the LED constituting the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 provided on the grass substrate 6420 is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the player can visually recognize the effect as if the halo was shining on the grass substrate 6420. When the grass back cover 6460, which will be described later, is provided, light is emitted toward the upper end of the grass back cover 6460. Therefore, the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 extends to the upper end of the grass back cover 6460. The light emitted from the cover is transmitted, and the player can visually recognize the effect as if the entire grass back cover 6460 was shining. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light emitting portion is provided on the substrate.

Through holes (not shown) constituting an electronic circuit are provided on the front surface and the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. Further, the metal constituting the electronic circuit provided on the printed circuit board is exposed in the through hole, and when copper is used as the metal, the through hole is visually recognized in brown, which is the color of copper. .. Here, if at least a part of the grass substrate 6420 is visible to the player, the through hole may also be visible to the player. In particular, when white is adopted as the color of the grass substrate 6420, brown, which is the color of the through hole provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, is visually recognized by the player, and the function as a decoration of the grass substrate 6420. There is a problem that it is damaged. Therefore, in order to solve such a problem, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, the through holes may be arranged so as to be scattered on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 instead of being concentrated at a predetermined position on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, by arranging the through holes along the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 or by arranging them on an extension of the contour line forming the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, the through holes have the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to visually recognize it as if it were a part. By arranging through holes linearly in the same shape as the outer shape inside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420, a decorative shape imitating grass may be formed. Further, one or more patterns of similar colors to the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. Alternatively, one or more patterns having the same shape as the through holes may be formed on a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. For example, when the through holes are brown and circular, one or more circular patterns may be formed on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 with brown ink. It is desirable that the above-mentioned example be applied to all through holes provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, but it may be applied to at least a part of the through holes, and even in that case, the grass substrate 6420 may be applied. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the function as a decoration of the is impaired. In addition, a through hole may be provided in the substrate provided in the accessory in another example, and the embodiment relating to such a through hole may be applied.

FIGS. 131 (C) to 131 (E) show an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is attached to the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440. The grass front cover 6440 is made of synthetic resin, and the outer shape is a decorative shape that imitates grass. Further, the portion on which the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is configured to be covered by the grass front cover 6440 in front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 131 (C), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and a part of the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 131 (D), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 have the same size, and the entire front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440. In the example shown in FIG. 131 (E), the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The front cover 6440 is in a protruding state.

In the example shown in FIG. 131 (C), the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 both realize a decorative aspect imitating grass. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of depth. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 131 (D) and 131 (E), the grass substrate 6420 located at the rear can be visually recognized by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent or colorless transparent synthetic resin. May be. In that case, a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of depth.

FIGS. 131 (F) to 131 (H) show an example in which a grass substrate cover 6460 is attached to the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420, and a grass accessory 6400 is configured by the grass substrate 6420 and the grass poster cover 6460. The grass back cover 6460 is made of synthetic resin, and the outer shape is a decorative shape that imitates grass. Further, the portion on which the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 is mounted is configured to be covered with the grass substrate cover 6460.

In the example shown in FIG. 131 (F), the size of the grass substrate 6460 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass substrate cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 131 (G), the grass substrate 6420 and the grass substrate cover 6460 have the same size, and the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass substrate cover 6460. In the example shown in FIG. 131 (H), the size of the grass substrate 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the rear of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass substrate 6460, and the grass is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. The rear cover 6460 is in a protruding state. In this example, the outer shape of the grass back cover 6460 is visible from the front.

In the example shown in FIGS. 131 (F) and 131 (G), the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be rotatable about the vertical direction. For example, the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to enable the effect that the grass accessory 6400 is rotated 180 degrees and the grass back cover 6460 faces forward. With such a configuration, the visual mode as shown in FIGS. 131 (C) and 131 (D) can be obtained, and the same effect as the example shown in FIGS. 131 (C) and 131 (D) can be obtained. Become. In the example shown in FIG. 131 (H), a decorative aspect can be realized by both the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 and the outer shape of the grass back cover 6460. In addition, it is possible to give a sense of depth.

132 (A) to 132 (G) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 131 (C). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is smaller than that of the grass substrate 6420, but further, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 132 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes without diffuse reflection. There is. The transparent portion 6442 of the grass front cover, which will be described later, is also configured to pass light without being diffusely reflected by the same configuration. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the grass front cover 6440 can be directly visually recognized.

In this example, by setting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 to a light emitting state, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be in a state of being decorated with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is made to emit green light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be decorated in green.

In the example shown in FIG. 132 (B), the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 is formed by an upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and a lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The colorless and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the colored transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front thus formed. The grass front cover 6440 may be configured by assembling the cover colored transparent portion 6442b. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a colored transparent sticker is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 or a colored transparent printing is applied to the grass front cover colored transparent. Part 6442b may be formed. An example was shown in which a colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover is formed by attaching a colored transparent seal or printing a colored transparent portion on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440. A colored transparent seal may be attached to a part of the cover or a colored transparent printing may be performed to form the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover may be the same color as or substantially the same color as the grass substrate 6420, and in this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 less noticeable as a printed circuit board. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the colored transparent portion is provided.

In this example, the white grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Further, by locating the green grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in front of the white grass substrate 6420, the white grass substrate 6420 can be made to appear green. Further, by locating the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 becomes difficult to see from the player, and the front of the grass substrate in the off state. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes excited by directly viewing the light emitting unit 6422 by the player. On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned on, the intensity of the light from the light source is alleviated by the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, so that the player may feel dazzling. It becomes possible to deter. Further, by causing the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate to emit light, the entire grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 can be in a state of being decorated with the emission color.

In FIG. 132 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 132 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. In this example, when the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the modes of white, green, and white from above in front view.

In the example shown in FIG. 132 (D), the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover 6440 includes, in this example, the grass front cover light scattering section 6444. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and is composed of a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a provided at the upper part and a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided at the lower part. Has been done. The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by subjecting at least one of the front surface or the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 to a lens cut or satin finish. Preferably, it is desirable to form the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a on the front surface or both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Since the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is made translucent by applying lens cut and satin finish, the shape of the member located at the rear is difficult or impossible to see, but its color. Is visible to the player without change. Although the example in which the light scattering portion is formed on the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is shown, the light scattering portion may be formed on the colored transparent synthetic resin. In this case, the member located at the rear is visually recognizable in a manner in which the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin located at the front is mixed. Further, the color of the colored light scattering portion 6444b of the grass front cover may be the same as or substantially the same as that of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, it is possible to make the grass substrate 6420 less noticeable as a printed circuit board. Further, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, a light scattering portion may be provided so as to border the end portion forming the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. In this case, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 can be diffusely reflected at the ends of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460, so that the grass accessory 6400 can be viewed from the front. The outer shape of the can be emphasized. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the light scattering portion is provided.

In this example, since the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 becomes difficult to see from the player and is turned off. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player becomes excited by directly visually recognizing the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is turned on, the light from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colorless light scattering unit 6444a, so that the player feels dazzling. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of.

The grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, but with such a configuration, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed only on the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. Compared to the case where the electronic components are mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the electronic components (LEDs constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate) appear to be blurred, so that the presence of the electronic components becomes less noticeable and the player It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes a mess. When the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed on both the front surface and the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440, an electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 (LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422). ) Can be made less noticeable. In addition, the color of the grass substrate 6420 at the rear can be visually recognized through the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, and while blurring the shape of the electronic component mounted on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, the color of the grass substrate 6420 is utilized as a decoration. It is a mode that plays the function of.

In FIG. 132 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 132 (D), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in the form of white, green, or white from above in front view.

The example shown in FIG. 132 (F) is an example in which the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132 (B) is modified. In this example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided in place of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. The colorless and transparent synthetic resin forms the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the opaque synthetic resin forms the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 form the grass front. Cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a seal or printing is applied to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear part cannot be seen, thereby forming an opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. You may. In addition, by applying a sticker or printing on a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440 so that the rear surface cannot be seen, the rear surface is not formed on the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 but on a part of the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440. It may be configured to form the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 by applying a sticker or printing that makes it invisible. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440, the aspect of the front side of the part to which the seal or printing is applied becomes visible. For example, when the grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colored transparent synthetic resin, it is possible to make the color of the colored transparent synthetic resin visible while making the rear of the grass front cover 6440 invisible. .. Further, when the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is provided on the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is visible and the rear of the grass front cover 6440 is invisible. Is possible. Yellow or brown may be adopted as the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the opaque portion is provided.

In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white, and the white color of the grass substrate 6420 is indirect through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. It is visually recognizable. On the other hand, with respect to the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the color of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be visually recognized regardless of the color of the grass substrate 6420. An example of adopting yellow or brown as the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover has been shown, but in this embodiment, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on the dead grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is in a light emitting state, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a with the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. For example, by adopting green as the emission color, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, and the mode in which grass grows. Can be expressed.

As the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light may be adopted. For example, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is composed of a synthetic resin whose whole is plated with an aluminum thin film, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 configured in this way and the grass front cover colorless and transparent composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. By assembling the portion 6442a, the grass front cover 6440 may be configured. Alternatively, the entire grass front cover 6440 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a silver seal is attached to a part of the front surface of the grass front cover 6440, printing is performed with a silver paint, or a portion plated with an aluminum thin film is formed. By providing it, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be formed. The opaque portion formed in silver in this way has a function of reflecting light. In addition, a colored paint may be applied to the opaque portion formed in silver, or a colored transparent sticker may be attached. For example, by applying a thin layer of yellow paint, it is possible to make the opaque portion visible in gold. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when providing an opaque portion or a reflective portion.

In the example shown in FIG. 132 (F), the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is configured to be visible in silver. In this case, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the front surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is visible in silver, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the grass substrate 6420 are visible in white. It is possible to express the mode of frost or snow on the grass.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted forward from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is reflected rearward by the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is white, the light reflected rearward in the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is scattered by being incident on the grass substrate 6420, and finally the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover are scattered. Will be decorated. In this way, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate can be efficiently used for decoration. By providing a colored transparent layer on the front layer of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 can be visually recognized in silver and a predetermined color.

FIG. 132 (G) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 132 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in the form of white, silver, or white from above in front view.

FIG. 133 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 132 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass can be expressed by the portion that can be visually recognized in white by the grass substrate 6420 and the green aspect by the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. It has become.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as a light emitting mode, it is desirable that the light emitting color is the same as or the same as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, for example, green or yellowish green. It is desirable to emit light. In this case, it is possible to perform an effect in a dynamic manner while keeping the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover as it is. Further, the light reflected without passing through the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover decorates the white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized in green.

FIG. 133 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b in the example shown in FIG. 133 (A). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in the form of white, green, or green can be expressed from above. Further, since the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b is located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422, the color of the grass substrate 6420 mixed with the green color of the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b can be visually recognized. , The light emitting portion 6422 itself on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is used as a light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is scattered by the grass front cover colored light scattering unit 6444b to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. It becomes possible to make it an aspect. Further, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

In FIG. 133 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 133 (B), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion. This is an example transformed into 6442b. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in the form of white, green, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate passes through the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, and some of the light does not pass through. It reflects and scatters in the grass front cover light scattering section 6444, and the grass front cover light scattering section 6444 can be used as a decorative mode. Further, the diffusely reflected light reaches the exposed white grass substrate 6420, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

FIG. 133 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 133 (B). As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, grass in the form of white, green, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is set as the light emitting mode, the light emitted from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is reflected on the back surface of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is formed. It can be a decorative mode. Further, the reflected light decorates the exposed white grass substrate 6420, so that the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , Can express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 133 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 133 (D), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. As the color of the grass front cover 6440, it is preferable to adopt green. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown, silver, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover can be used as the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover or reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, so that the exposed white color is obtained. By decorating the grass substrate 6420, it is possible to decorate the white grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it becomes possible to decorate the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. , Can express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 134 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 132 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white or white aspect from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover can be used as the decorative mode. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is scattered on the back surface of the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, so that the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate can be decorated. It is possible to decorate the 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. It is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 134 (B) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 in the example shown in FIG. 134 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, white, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, the light scattering portion 6444 on the front cover of the grass can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. Further, by scattering light on the back surface of the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. Will be. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and the mode in which grass grows can be obtained. Can be expressed.

FIG. 134 (C) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 134 (B), the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. This is a modified example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of white, yellow, brown, silver, or white from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light scattered by the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, and the white grass. It is possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass substrate 6420 with green, and the mode in which grass grows can be obtained. Can be expressed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 134 (A) to 134 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 134 (D) is an example in which the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 134 (C). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated by the light reflected on the back surface of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, and the white grass. It is possible to decorate the substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express an aspect in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 132 (A) to 134 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured in. Further, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 includes a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although it is provided in a position where only one of the members is covered by the front view, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is configured to be arranged behind the position forming the boundary line of these members. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it inconspicuous to the player that the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted on the grass substrate 6420 in the off state.

For example, in the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 132 (B), an LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is provided behind the boundary line formed by the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. When it is configured to be arranged, the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate becomes inconspicuous. It will be possible for the player to clearly see it.

Similarly, the relationship between the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the relationship between the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover and the colored front cover. Relationship with light scattering part 6444b, relationship between grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b and grass front cover opaque part 6446, relationship between grass front cover colorless light scattering part 6444a and grass front cover opaque part 6446, grass front cover colored light Even in the relationship between the scattering portion 6444b and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 It is possible to make the presence of the LEDs constituting the above inconspicuous.

Further, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover, the relationship between the portion where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, and the grass substrate 6420 are exposed. Relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colorless light scattering part 6444a of the grass front cover, the relationship between the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the colored light scattering part 6444b of the grass front cover, the part where the grass substrate 6420 is exposed and the grass front Even in relation to the cover opaque portion 6446, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is arranged behind these boundary lines, the presence of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is provided. Can be made inconspicuous.

In the above-mentioned combination, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the light of the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is emitted. In combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, it is possible to efficiently transmit to the member forming the boundary line.

The light from the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 may be irradiated perpendicularly to the grass substrate 6420, or the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 is mounted. You may irradiate in the direction perpendicular to the tangent line of.

For example, when both are members capable of transmitting light, such as a combination of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the LED constituting the front light emitting portion 6422 of the grass substrate is used. The light irradiation direction may be configured to irradiate the grass substrate 6420 perpendicularly. On the other hand, in the combination of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the member forming the boundary line in combination with the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, the boundary line at the position where the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is mounted is It may be configured to irradiate light in the direction of a member that is perpendicular to the tangent line and that forms a boundary line in combination with the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover.

When a rectangular LED is used as the LED constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, the longitudinal direction of the LED coincides with the direction of the boundary line or the close battle of the boundary line at the position where the LED is arranged. It is good to arrange it like this.

When the two parts forming the boundary line are formed by one member, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 does not protrude in the front view at the part corresponding to the boundary line and has a size of about the same width. It may be configured to provide a V-shaped groove. With such a configuration, when the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is visually recognized from the front, the LED constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 is refracted and visually recognized by the V-shaped groove. Therefore, it is possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate inconspicuous. The shape is not limited to the V-shaped groove and may be any structure that can be refracted. On the other hand, when a boundary line is formed by combining a plurality of members, the LEDs constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate are refracted and visually recognized without providing such a groove. It is possible to make the presence of the LED constituting the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the substrate inconspicuous.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 132 (A) to 134 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having a larger outer shape than the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured in. This gives a sense of depth. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the grass substrate 6420 is decorated by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself, and the grass substrate 6420 is also decorated by the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. Will be. In particular, when the grass substrate 6420 is white and light of a color other than white is irradiated from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be changed to the irradiated color to make it visible.

Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting unit is turned off. By mounting the LED constituting the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate on the grass substrate 6420 so that the light is emitted horizontally upward with respect to the surface forming the grass substrate 6420, the upper part of the grass substrate 6420 is formed. More light can reach the edges.

135 (A) to 137 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 131 (D). In these examples, the size of the grass substrate 6420 and the size of the grass front cover 6440 are the same, but further, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 135 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover can be directly visually recognized. Further, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white form can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color.
For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the grass substrate 6420 in green, expressing the mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 135 (B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 135 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 135 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in a green or white aspect can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 135 (D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 135 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white or white aspect from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 135 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 135 (D), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of modification to the portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a white or white aspect from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 135 (F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 135 (G) shows, in the example shown in FIG. 135 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 136 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the green aspect can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 136 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express green or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 136 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (E). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this case, the grass front cover 6440 has a green grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express green or green grass from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 136 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in the form of green, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 136 (E) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (G). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 137 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in a white form can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 137 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (F). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of white or green, yellow or brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 137 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (G). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the light emitting color of the grass substrate front light scattering portion 6422, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 are decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 137 (A) to 137 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 137 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 135 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover to the end forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400. The light reaches and it becomes possible to decorate the end of the grass accessory 6400 with a predetermined color. More specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 is viewed from an angle, the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 appears to be exposed, so that the exposed portion can be visually recognized in a manner shining with a predetermined emission color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the end portion forming the outer periphery of the grass accessory 6400 with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass is growing. In addition, even in the case where another grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is provided, it can be visually recognized in such an embodiment.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 135 (A) to 137 (D), the outer shapes of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 having the same size as the grass front cover 6440 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. At the same time, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate also decorates the grass substrate 6420. Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, the color of the grass front cover 6440 and the color of the grass substrate 6420. The decoration is performed by a color in which both of the above are mixed, and further, the decoration is performed on the grass substrate 6420 by the light emitted from the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting unit is turned off.

138 (A) to 140 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 131 (E). In these examples, the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420, the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover 6440, and the grass front cover 6440 is outside the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420. Although it is configured in a protruding state, a modified example of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 138 (A), a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass front cover 6440 is smoothly molded without any treatment such as lens cutting or satin finish, and is configured so that the light passing through the grass front cover 6440 passes through without diffuse reflection. There is. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 located behind the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 in green, expressing the mode in which grass is growing. can.

FIG. 138 (B) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, and green from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 138 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 138 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of green transparent, green, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

FIG. 138 (D) is an example in which a part of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a in the example shown in FIG. 138 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, and white from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover 6440. Can be decorated in green, and the mode in which grass grows can be expressed.

In FIG. 138 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 138 (D), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express grass in a colorless translucent, white, or white manner from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 138 (F) is an example in which a part of the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, yellow or brown or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 138 (G), in the example shown in FIG. 138 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the grass substrate 6420 that can be seen through the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a are decorated in green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 139 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (A). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of green transparent and green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 139 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (D). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express grass in the form of green transparent, green, or green from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 139 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 139 (B), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6444b. This is an example of being transformed into a portion 6442b. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of green translucent, green, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 becomes visible through the grass front cover colored light diffusion portion 6444b, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover 6440. It is possible to decorate and with green, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 139 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (F). Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, grass in the form of green transparent, green, yellow, brown or silver can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In FIG. 139 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 139 (D), the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. This is an example. As the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover, green may be adopted. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or green can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is decorated with green. Is possible, and it is possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 140 (A) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express the grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 140 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (F). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of colorless transparent, white, yellow or brown or silver from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

FIG. 140 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6444a of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (G). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated, and the white grass substrate 6420 can be decorated with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, the grass substrate 6420 that can be visually recognized through the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is decorated with green. It becomes possible to express the mode in which grass grows.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 140 (A) to 140 (C), by forming the grass front cover 6440 with a colored transparent synthetic resin, the grass front cover colored light scattering is replaced with the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. Part 6444b may be configured. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

FIG. 140 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover in the example shown in FIG. 138 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, or silver can be expressed by the entire grass accessory 6400.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, so that the light reaches the end forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. Is reached, and it becomes possible to irradiate light upward or backward at the upper end of the grass substrate 6420. This makes it possible to decorate other members by irradiating them with light of a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422, it is possible to decorate the members located above and behind the end portion forming the outer peripheral portion of the grass substrate 6420 with green. In this example, it can be said that the grass substrate 6420 is provided not to decorate the grass accessory 6400 itself but to decorate other members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 138 (A) to 140 (D), the outer shape of at least one of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 is configured to be visible to the player as a decorative shape. Further, in the grass front cover 6440, the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are formed. A decorative shape is also formed at the boundary line.

Further, since the color of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover and the light scattering portion 6444 of the grass front cover, the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself is used for decoration. The light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate also decorates the grass substrate 6420. Further, the light emitted from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is reflected between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 located on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420, so that the light is emitted toward the end portion of the grass substrate 6420. Is configured to reflect, so it is possible to indirectly illuminate a member that constitutes the grass front cover 6440 and is not located in front of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422. Further, each member constituting the grass accessory 6400 in different colors can be used as a decorative mode when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off and when the light emitting unit is turned off.

141 (A) to 141 (D) show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 131 (H). In these examples, the grass substrate rear surface light emitting unit 6424 is provided on the rear surface of the grass substrate 6420. In addition, the size of the grass back cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass board 6420, the front surface of the grass back cover 6460 is covered with the grass board 6420, and the grass back cover 6460 protrudes outside the outer shape of the grass board 6420. Although it is configured, a modification of the specific structure of the grass front cover 6440 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 141 (A), a colorless and transparent back cover 6460 is provided behind the white grass substrate 6420. The surface forming the grass cover 6460 is not treated with lens cuts or satin finishes, and is formed smoothly. In this example, the entire grass front cover 6440 functions as the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, the grass substrate 6420 and the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass posterior cover located behind the grass substrate 6420 can be directly visually recognized. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in a colorless transparent and white form from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, it is possible to decorate the colorless transparent portion 6462a on the rear cover of the grass. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed part of the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass substrate in front view with green, and grass is growing. The aspect can be expressed.

FIG. 141 (B) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 141 (A). As the color of the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass back cover, green may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, it is possible to express grass in the form of green transparent and white from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to the light emitting mode, it is possible to decorate the colored transparent portion 6462b on the rear cover of the grass. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the colored transparent portion 6462b of the grass posterior cover with green, and the grass is growing. The aspect can be expressed.

FIG. 141 (C) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the colorless light scattering portion 6464a of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 141 (A). Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, it is possible to express a colorless translucent, white grass from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is used as the light emitting mode, it is possible to decorate the colorless light scattering portion 6464a on the rear cover of the grass substrate. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the exposed portion of the colorless light scattering portion 6464a of the grass substrate in front view with green, and grass grows. Can express a certain aspect.

FIG. 141 (D) is an example in which the colorless transparent portion 6462a of the grass back cover is transformed into the opaque portion 6466 of the grass back cover in the example shown in FIG. 141 (A). As the color of the opaque portion 6466 of the grass back cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. Further, it is preferable to adopt white as the color of the grass substrate 6420. With such a configuration, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is in the extinguished state, the grass in the form of yellow, brown, silver, or white can be expressed from above.

On the other hand, when the light emitting portion 6424 on the rear surface of the grass substrate is set to emit light, the light is reflected between the white grass substrate 6420 and the opaque portion 6466 of the grass substrate, so that the light reaches the end forming the outer periphery of the grass substrate 6420. It becomes possible to decorate the periphery of the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 with a predetermined color. For example, by adopting green as the emission color of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate, it is possible to decorate the periphery of the end portion of the grass substrate 6420 with green, and it is possible to express an aspect in which grass is growing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 141 (A) to 141 (D), the outer shapes of the grass substrate 6420 and the grass back cover 6460 having a larger outer shape than the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized by the player as decorative shapes. It is configured. This gives a sense of depth.
Further, since the grass substrate 6420 is in an exposed state, the decoration is performed by the color of the grass substrate 6420 itself. Further, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is set to emit light in a predetermined color, the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 reaches the upper end portion of the grass posterior cover 6460, and the upper end portion of the grass posterior cover 6460. Can be visually recognized as being decorated with a predetermined color.

142 (A) to 143 (G) show a modified example of the example shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to 132 (G). Specifically, in the examples shown in FIGS. 142 (A) to 142 (B), the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a grass substrate opening 6426 having a decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit, and the grass is grass. The rear part is visible through the substrate opening 6426.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 142 (C) to 142 (E) and FIGS. 143 (A) to 143 (G), the grass front cover 6440 is located in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover 6440 is located. Is provided with a decoratively shaped grass front cover opening 6448 that imitates the head of a rabbit, and the grass substrate 6420 is visibly configured via the grass front cover opening 6448.

Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 142 (F) to 142 (H), the grass posterior cover 6460 is located behind the grass substrate 6420, and the grass substrate 6420 has a decorative grass imitating the head of a rabbit. A board opening 6426 is provided and is provided. The grass posterior cover 6460 is visibly configured via the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 142 (A) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 131 (A). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a punched-hole-shaped physical opening. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the rear can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 142 (B) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 131 (B). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed in such a manner that the grass substrate 6420 is provided with a physical opening in the shape of a punched hole, and a member located rearward through the grass substrate opening 6426 is directly visible. There is. The substrate grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the rear can be directly seen from the grass substrate opening 6426.

FIG. 142 (C) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 131 (C). The grass front cover opening 6448 is formed by providing a punched hole-shaped physical opening in the grass front cover 6440, and the grass substrate 6420 located rearward is directly visible through the grass front cover opening 6448. It is configured to be possible. The grass front cover opening 6448 is shaped to imitate the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass front cover openings 6448 may be provided. In this example, a grass front cover first opening 6448a and a grass front cover second opening 6448b smaller than the grass front cover first opening 6448a are provided. ing.

The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be directly visible via the above. On the other hand, the grass front cover second opening 6448b is located at a position that does not overlap with the grass substrate front second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting portion 6422c forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view. It is provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass front cover 6440 but also in the grass front cover opening 6448. Further, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized from the grass front cover opening 6448, and the shape of the grass front cover opening 6448 and the color of the grass substrate 6420 visible from the grass front cover opening 6448 can be used. The decoration is done.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass exposed at the end surface forming the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The substrate 6420 is directly decorated with the light emitted from the first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c.

FIG. 142 (D) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 142 (C). Further, FIG. 142 (E) is an example in which the size of the grass front cover 6440 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 142 (C). Also in these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same aspect as the grass front cover opening 6448 in the example shown in FIG. 142 (C).

FIG. 142 (F) is an example in which the grass substrate opening 6426 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 131 (F). The grass substrate opening 6426 is formed by providing a punched hole-shaped physical opening in the grass substrate 6420, and the grass posterior cover 6460 located rearward through the grass substrate opening 6426 can be directly seen. It is configured. The grass substrate opening 6426 has a shape that imitates the head of a rabbit. A plurality of grass substrate openings 6426 may be provided. In this example, a grass substrate first opening 6426a and a grass substrate second opening 6426b smaller than the grass substrate first opening 6426a are provided. The grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 is not provided around the grass substrate first opening 6426a. Further, a grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and a grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b are provided so as to sandwich the left and right sides of the grass substrate second opening 6426b.

With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a decorative shape not only in the outer shape of the grass substrate 6420 but also in the grass substrate opening 6426. In addition, the grass back cover 6460 can be visually recognized from the grass substrate opening 6426. Further, the decoration is performed by the shape of the grass substrate opening 6426 and the color of the grass back cover 6460 visible from the grass substrate opening 6426.

When the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting unit 6424b are set to emit light, the grass posterior cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b becomes the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting unit 6424a. It is decorated with the light emitted from the second light emitting portion 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, the grass posterior cover 6460 exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a is decorated with the light emitted from the grass substrate rear surface first light emitting portion 6424a and the grass substrate rear surface second light emitting portion 6424b, but the grass posterior cover 6460. The amount of light that reaches is smaller than that of the portion exposed from the second opening 6426b of the grass substrate. Therefore, the portion exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a of the grass back cover 6460 is decorated with a smaller amount of light than the portion exposed from the grass substrate second opening 6426b of the grass posterior cover 6460.

It should be noted that the first light emitting unit 6424a on the rear surface of the grass substrate may be turned off, and only the second light emitting unit 6424b on the rear surface of the grass substrate may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, green). In this case, the portion exposed from the grass substrate first opening 6426a of the grass cover 6460 is not substantially decorated because light hardly reaches it, and the grass substrate second opening of the grass cover 6460 is not substantially decorated. Only the part exposed from 6426b can be decorated.

FIG. 142 (G) is an example in which the size of the grass back cover 6460 is modified to the same size as the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 142 (F). Further, FIG. 142 (H) is an example in which the size of the grass back cover 6460 is larger than that of the grass substrate 6420 in the example shown in FIG. 142 (F). Also in these examples, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the same embodiment as the grass substrate opening 6426 in the example shown in FIG. 142 (F).

FIG. 143 (A) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132 (A). In this example, a colorless and transparent grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the white grass substrate 6420. The grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided at a position overlapping the grass substrate front first light emitting portion 6422a forming a part of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 in front view, and the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is configured to be directly visible via the above. On the other hand, the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover does not overlap with the second light emitting portion 6422b on the front surface of the grass substrate and the third light emitting portion 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate, which form a part of the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. , Is provided at a position overlapping with the grass front cover 6440.

In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover, and the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover is used. By interposing, the grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. Therefore, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the shape imitating a rabbit formed by the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover is not conspicuous. Further, since the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 is composed of white LEDs having the same color as the grass substrate 6420, the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420 stands out. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices the existence of the light emitting unit 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face of the grass is brown and is decorated, but the unexposed portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the vicinity of the center of the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the grass substrate 6420.

FIG. 143 (B) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132 (B). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, but the grass front cover opening is formed in the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b. 6448 is provided. Green may be adopted as the color of the colored transparent portion 6442b of the grass front cover. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover, and the green grass front cover colored transparent portion. By passing through 6442b, the white grass substrate 6420 is visible as green. This makes it possible to express the aspect as if there is a white rabbit in the green grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face of the grass is brown and is decorated, but the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as green in the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover. Alternatively, when green, which is the same color as the colored transparent portion of the grass front cover, is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass exposed at the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face forming the substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is decorated with a green emission color and has the same color as the colored transparent part of the grass front cover, so that the mode as if the rabbit was hidden in the grass is expressed. be able to.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate.

In FIG. 143 (C), in the example shown in FIG. 143 (B), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b is attached to the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example transformed into. In this example, it is possible to express white, green, and white grasses from above in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 143 (A).

FIG. 143 (D) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132 (D). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, but the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is formed by the grass front cover. An opening 6448 is provided. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening portion 6448 of the grass front cover, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a. The white grass substrate 6420 can be visually recognized as white. This makes it possible to express an aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in white grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. Although the end face of the grass is green and is decorated, the white grass substrate 6420 is visually recognized by the player as white in the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when green is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c, the end faces forming the grass front cover 6440 and the grass front cover second opening 6448b are green. However, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. This makes it possible to express an aspect as if there is a white rabbit in the green grass.

In FIG. 143 (E), in the example shown in FIG. 143 (D), the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6442a is attached to the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a is attached to the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion 6444a. This is an example of being transformed into the part 6442a. In this example, it is possible to express white, white, and white grasses from above in front view. Further, regarding the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 143 (A).

FIG. 143 (F) is an example in which the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover 6440 in the example shown in FIG. 132 (F). In this example, the grass front cover 6440 is formed by the upper grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the lower grass front cover opaque portion 6446, but the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided in the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. It is provided. As the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover, yellow, brown or silver may be adopted. In this example, when the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate is turned off, the grass substrate 6420 is directly visible in white through the opening 6448 of the grass front cover, and the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover is yellow. It is visible in brown or silver. This makes it possible to express the aspect as if a white rabbit is hiding in yellow, brown or silver grass.

When the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate is set as the light emitting mode, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the end surface forming the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover and the portion where the first opening portion 6448a of the grass front cover is provided is the grass substrate. The mode is directly decorated by the light emitted from the front first light emitting unit 6422a. For example, when yellow or brown is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, or when the blinking mode of white is adopted as the emission mode, the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a is provided. The end face forming the exposed grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is decorated in a yellow, brown or white blinking mode. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. As a result, the grass front cover first opening 6448a and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 have the same decorative mode, and when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-mentioned extinguished state, it is as if the white rabbit has disappeared. Aspects can be expressed. On the other hand, when white is adopted as the emission color of the first light emitting portion 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, the grass substrate 6420 and the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover exposed at the portion where the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is provided. The end face is white and is decorated. Further, the portion of the grass substrate 6420 that is not exposed from the first opening 6448a of the grass front cover is visually recognized by the player as yellow, brown, or silver, which is the color of the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover. As a result, when the light emitting mode is changed from the above-mentioned extinguished state, the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the grass front cover first opening 6448a, which was visually recognized as white only by the color of the substrate, is provided. The white color can also be obtained by the light emitting color of the first light emitting unit 6422a on the front surface of the grass substrate, and the white rabbit can be expressed in a more emphasized manner.

On the other hand, when the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6422c are set as the light emitting mode, the end surface forming the grass front cover second opening 6448b is the grass substrate front surface second light emitting unit 6422b. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the third light emitting unit 6422c on the front surface of the grass substrate. On the other hand, with respect to the grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided, the entire surface of the exposed portion is not completely illuminated, and the portion forming the outer periphery of the exposed portion is the grass substrate. The mode is decorated with the light emitted from the front second light emitting unit 6422b and the grass substrate front third light emitting unit 6422c. For example, when white is adopted as the emission color of the grass substrate front surface second light emitting portion 6422b and the grass substrate front surface third light emitting portion 6422c, the opening is bordered on the end face forming the grass front cover second opening portion 6448b. The grass substrate 6420 exposed at the portion where the second opening 6448b of the grass front cover is provided is visually recognized by the player as white, which is the color of the substrate. Thereby, it is possible to express the aspect as if the white rabbit is hidden in the yellow, brown or silver grass by emphasizing the aspect.

In FIG. 143 (G), in the example shown in FIG. 143 (F), the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a is transformed into the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 is transformed into the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. This is an example. In this example, it is possible to represent white, yellow or brown or silvery, white grass from above in front view. Further, with respect to the provision of the grass front cover opening 6448, the same effect can be obtained by adopting the embodiment shown by exemplifying FIG. 143 (A).

In the examples shown in FIGS. 142 (A) to 143 (G), an opening (grass substrate opening 6426 or grass) having a decorative shape is provided in the decorative member provided in the front (grass substrate 6420 or grass front cover 6440). By providing the front cover opening 6448) so that the member provided at the rear can be visually recognized, the decoratively shaped opening is configured to be visible to the player in a prominent state. Further, since the color, transparency, and the like are different between the member provided in the front and the member provided in the rear, the shape of the opening can be further emphasized. Further, it may be configured to use the fact that such an opening is in a decorative state as an effect.
In the examples shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to 131 (H) and FIGS. 132 (A) to 132 (G), modifications in which an opening is provided are shown in FIGS. 142 (A) to 143 (G). However, in the examples shown in FIGS. 133 (A) to 141 (D), the opening may be similarly provided.

An example was shown in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided with a punched physical opening to form a grass front cover opening 6448 to form a region in which the rear can be seen. Instead of the method of providing, the outer shape of the visible region may be formed by the boundary line between the region where the rear is invisible or difficult to see and the region where the rear is relatively easy to see.

For example, the outer invisible region may be composed of the grass front cover opaque portion 6446, and the inner easily visible region may be configured by the grass front cover transparent portion 6442. Alternatively, the outer hard-to-see area is made up of the colored grass-front cover opaque portion 6446, the inner easy-to-see area is made up of the grass-front cover light scattering section 6444, or the outer hard-to-see area is made up of colored grass. The front cover light scattering unit 6444 constitutes the inner easily visible area with the grass front cover colored transparent part 6442b, and the outer hard-to-see area is composed of the colorless grass front cover light scattering unit 6444, and the inner side is formed. The easily visible area is composed of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the outer difficult-to-see area is composed of the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, and the inner easily visible area is composed of the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a. It may be configured by. Alternatively, the grass front cover 6440 is included in the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. At least two of them may be provided, and an inner easy-to-see area may be provided so as to straddle two or more of these areas. Even with such an embodiment, it is possible to provide an area having a decorative shape and having an easily visible rear portion.

In FIGS. 143 (B) to 143 (G), the location where the grass front cover opening 6448 is provided is 1 such as the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444, and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446. Although only the area was used, the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across a plurality of areas constituting the grass front cover 6440. Specifically, the grass front cover 6440 has a grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a, a grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, a grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, a grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, and a grass front cover opaque portion. At least two of the 6446s may be provided, and the grass front cover opening 6448 may be provided across two or more of these areas.
FIGS. 131 (A) to 143 (G) show examples in which the grass accessory 6400 can be visually recognized as a decorative mode in a light-off state or a light-emitting state, and these states are used as an effect in a game. For example, one of these states may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event in the gaming machine. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the player of a predetermined event by changing when these states change from the above-mentioned one state to the above-mentioned other state. As a predetermined event, for example, a jackpot expectation degree may be indicated, or a notice indicating that the operation button 410 can be operated may be used.

In FIGS. 131 (C) to 131 (E), FIGS. 132 (A) to 140 (D), and FIGS. 142 (C) to 143 (G), an example in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided in front of the grass substrate 6420. showed that. Further, in FIGS. 131 (F) to 131 (H) and 141 (A) to 141 (D), an example in which the back cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 is shown, but the front of the grass substrate 6420 is shown. Any one of the embodiments in which the grass front cover 6440 is provided in the grass substrate 6420 and any one embodiment in the embodiment in which the grass back cover 6460 is provided behind the grass substrate 6420 are configured to be combined. You may.

When the embodiments are combined, it is preferable to adopt the same size as the shape of the grass substrate 6420. Further, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are configured to be smaller than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 131 (C) and 131 (F), the grass front cover 6440 is used. It is advisable to combine the examples with the grass back cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 have the same size as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 131 (D) and 131 (G), they are regarded as the same size. , It is good to combine the examples. In this case, the front cover 6440, the grass substrate 6420, and the outer edge of the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, when the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are respectively larger than the grass substrate 6420 as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 131 (E) and 131 (H), the grass front cover 6440 is used. It is advisable to combine the examples with the grass back cover 6460 having the same size. In this case, the outer edges of the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 just overlap each other in the front view. Further, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 may be made of a synthetic resin of the same color, and when the grass front cover 6440 is made of a colorless transparent synthetic resin, the grass back cover 6460 is colorless and transparent. It is preferable to form it from the synthetic resin of. When the grass front cover 6440 is made of a green transparent synthetic resin, the grass back cover 6460 may be made of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the embodiments are combined, the grass substrate 6420 includes both the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424, but among the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424. One may be configured not to be provided. For example, when the examples shown in FIGS. 131 (E) and 131 (H) are combined, the grass front cover 6440 and the grass back cover 6460 are larger in front view than the grass substrate 6420. Therefore, it is possible to decorate the back cover 6460 with the light from the light emitting portion 6422 on the front surface of the grass substrate. It is also possible to decorate the grass front cover 6440 with the light from the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424. In this case, in the grass front cover 6440 and the grass rear cover 6460, it is desirable to provide a light scattering portion so as to border the end at the end forming the outer peripheral edge when viewed from the front. It should be noted that both the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 may be configured not to be provided. In this case, the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to have a function of relaying a signal from the peripheral control substrate 1510 to another accessory, for example.

Any one example in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400 may be applied to each of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 shown in FIG. 127. Specifically, the outer shapes of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 are not changed, and the region other than the first grass decorative portion 6360a constituting the outer region of the first grass movable portion 6360 is used. , A member constituting the outer region in any one example of the grass accessory 6400 and an inner region with respect to the first grass decorative portion 6360a constituting the inner region in the first grass movable portion 6360. It is good to apply it to the member. Further, with respect to the region other than the second grass decoration portion 6370a constituting the outer region in the second grass movable portion 6370 and the second grass decoration portion 6370a constituting the inner region in the second grass movable portion 6370. It is advisable to fit the member constituting the outer region and the member constituting the inner region in any one example of the accessory 6400.

Further, any one example of the grass accessory 6400 may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. For example, the example shown in FIG. 141 (B) may be applied to both the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. In this case, the white grass substrates 6420 on the left and right are in contact with each other to form the decorative body 1. In addition, the left and right green transparent grass cover 6460 are in contact with each other to form the decorative body 1. On the other hand, even when the first grass movable part 6360 and the second grass movable part 6370 move to the left and right, the left and right white grass substrates 6420 and the left and right green transparent grass back covers 6460 each form one decorative body as a single body. are doing.

In FIG. 126, the third grass accessory 6480 is provided and the fourth grass accessory 6485 is provided behind it, but the left half of the fourth grass accessory 6485 is located in front of the third grass accessory 6485 when viewed from the front. It is configured to be hidden by the grass character 6480. Here, any one example in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400 may be applied to each of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485. At this time, it is desirable that the size of the grass substrate 6420 included in the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 is the same. Further, one or both of the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 that can be provided by the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 are simultaneously produced as a light emitting mode as in the above-mentioned example. It may be configured.

The following is an example in which the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 141 (A) is adopted as the third grass accessory 6480, and the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIG. 138 (E) is adopted as the fourth grass accessory 6485. In this case, when the grass substrate rear surface light emitting portion 6424 included in the grass substrate 6420 of the third grass accessory 6480 provided in front emits light, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485, It is possible to illuminate the grass front cover colorless transparent portion 6442a and the white grass substrate 6420 from the front side. Further, the 4th grass accessory 6485 can efficiently diffusely reflect the light emitted from the 3rd grass accessory 6480 forward and enhance the interest of the player as an effect.

On the other hand, it is possible to decorate the back cover 6460 of the third grass accessory 6480 by irradiating light from the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 included in the fourth grass accessory 6485. At this time, only the peripheral portion such as the upper part of the grass back cover 6460 can be visually recognized as a decorated aspect by the player, but the light passes through the grass back cover 6460 and the light is rearward by the white grass substrate 6420. It diffusely reflects and is irradiated toward the fourth grass accessory 6485, and decorates the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a provided in the fourth grass accessory 6485.

In this way, the light is diffusely reflected alternately between the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear, so that the position of the light source cannot be seen by the player. It is possible to efficiently reflect light forward while arranging it. In particular, when a silver member capable of specularly reflecting light is adopted as the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 and the grass rear cover opaque portion 6466, it becomes possible to reflect light more efficiently.

An example was shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap each other in front view, but the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory are shown. It may be configured so that it completely overlaps with 6485 in front view. Further, the third grass accessory 6480 may be configured to be larger than the fourth grass accessory 6485. Then, in front view, the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be completely hidden behind the third grass accessory 6480. Alternatively, it may be configured to be arranged at a position where they are adjacent to each other but do not overlap in front view.

One or both of the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided behind may be movable as an effect. For example, an example was shown in which the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear partially overlap each other in front view. From this state, the third grass accessory 6480 And the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured so as to completely overlap each other in front view. In this case, one of the 3rd grass accessory 6480 and the 4th grass accessory 6485 moves in the left-right direction, so that the 3rd grass accessory 6480 and the 4th grass accessory 6485 completely overlap each other in the front view. The third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 move in the left-right direction so that the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 can be seen from the front. It may be configured so as to completely overlap with. In this case, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 may be configured to be able to move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in front view to a state in which they overlap. Further, the moving direction may be configured to be movable not only in the left-right direction but also in the up-down direction. In this case, it may be configured so that the grass can be moved upward or downward by the height of the grass itself. Even with such a configuration, the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 can be configured to be able to move from a state in which they do not overlap at all in front view to a state in which they overlap. Then, it is preferable to configure the structure so that the light emitting mode as in each of the above-mentioned examples can be taken in the state where the third grass accessory 6480 and the fourth grass accessory 6485 are overlapped with each other in the front view.

An example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable has been shown, but the movement of the grass accessory 6400 also causes the openings (grass substrate opening 6426 and grass front cover opening 6448) to be difficult to see or invisible. The change to a visible state may be adopted as an effect. Specifically, in relation to the third grass accessory 6480 provided in the front and the fourth grass accessory 6485 provided in the rear and provided with the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448, in front view. From the state where the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the 4th grass accessory 6485 are located behind the 3rd grass accessory 6480, the third grass accessory 6480 is rearward in front view. 4 The grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 provided in the grass accessory 6485 change to a state in which the grass substrate opening 6426 and the grass front cover opening 6448 can be visually recognized by the player. It is good to configure it so that.

Although the example in which the grass accessory 6400 is movable is shown, the grass accessory 6400 may be configured to be movable as an effect at a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, at this time, a predetermined image may be displayed as an effect in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Specifically, when the grass accessory 6400 moves from below to a position overlapping the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the outline of the grass accessory 6400 is imitated in accordance with the movement of the grass accessory 6400. The image may be configured to be moved and displayed upward. At this time, it is desirable to configure the plant so as to move while displaying an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400 slightly above the grass accessory 6400 in front view. With such a configuration, an image imitating the outline of the grass accessory 6400, the outer shape of the grass accessory 6400 composed of the grass front cover 6440 or the grass substrate 6422 or the grass posterior cover 6460, and the grass front cover 6440 are configured. There are multiple grass-like shapes expressed by the grass substrate 6420, which is smaller than the boundary line between the plurality of members or the transparent grass front cover 6440 and can be seen through the grass front cover 6440, from the top to the bottom. The provided decoration mode can be made visible to the player. In this way, one decorative mode can be realized as an effect by the three of the image displayed on the display device, the outer shape of the accessory, and the shape provided in the accessory. As shown in FIGS. 133 (B) and 138 (B), when the grass accessory 6400 has two shapes when viewed from the front, a total of four shapes realize one decoration mode as an effect. be able to.

The back surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be configured to mount the same electronic components as those included in the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, the grass substrate 6420 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the LEDs constituting the grass substrate front light emitting portion 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting portion 6424 are attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive, and power is supplied to the LEDs. Similarly, the wiring to be used may be configured to be attached to the grass substrate 6420 with an adhesive. In this case, the grass front cover 6424 is provided with the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, and the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b so that the wiring is difficult to see from the player. It may be configured so that the LED and the wiring are visually positioned behind them. In addition, by attaching a pattern of the same shape as the LED and wiring to the transparent grass substrate 6420 by printing or engraving, the LED and wiring will be difficult for the player to see while ensuring the transparency of the grass substrate 6420. It may be configured. In this case, by causing the grass substrate front light emitting unit 6422 and the grass substrate rear light emitting unit 6424 to emit light, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b, the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444a, the grass front cover colored light scattering portion 6444b, or the LED. Or, a pattern having the same shape as the wiring may be illuminated to be in a decorative state. With such a configuration, both the function of hiding the existence of LEDs and wiring and the function of decoration can be realized by these members.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 131 (C) to 143 (G), 1 grass substrate 6420 and 1 grass front cover 6440, or 1 grass substrate 6420 and 1 grass posterior cover 6460, or 1 Although an example is shown in which the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 constitute 1 grass accessory 6400, the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 are shown. At least one member of the above may be increased to a plurality to form one grass accessory 6400. For example, two grass boards 6440 may be attached to one grass substrate 6420 to form one grass accessory 6400, or two grass boards 6420 may be attached to one grass substrate cover 6440. You may make up 1 grass cover 6400. Further, when the grass substrate 6420, the grass front cover 6440, and the grass back cover 6460 are made into a plurality of parts, the embodiments shown in FIGS. 131 (C) to 143 (G) are independently applied to each of the plurality of members. May be applied. For example, in the mountain accessory 6500 described later, the front cover of 2 is provided on the substrate of 1, and an opening is provided in the front cover of 1 of them so that the substrate located at the rear can be visually recognized and the substrate is also opened. This is an example in which a part is provided.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 138 (A) to 140 (D), a grass front cover 6440 larger than the grass substrate 6420 is provided on the front surface of the grass substrate 6420. In this case, the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is visible through the grass front cover 6440, but the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is viewed from the front so that the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is difficult to see or cannot be seen. The grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 and the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 are provided at least in front of the grass substrate 6420, and the grass front cover colorless and transparent portion is provided in front of the portion other than the outer edge portion. 6442a, the grass front cover colored transparent portion 6442b may be provided. Even with such a configuration, the color of the grass substrate 6420 can be used for decoration. In this case, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 may be provided so as to cover the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 in a band shape. Alternatively, in the example shown in FIG. 138 (D), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is expanded upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light scattering. It may be configured to be covered by the portion 6444b. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 138 (E), the area occupied by the grass front cover colorless light scattering portion 6444b in the grass front cover 6440 is reduced upward, and the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is the grass front cover colorless light. It may be configured to be covered by the scattering portion 6444b. Further, also in FIGS. 138 (F) and 138 (G), similarly, by expanding or contracting the area occupied by the opaque portion 6446 of the grass front cover upward, the front of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is covered with the grass front cover. It may be configured to be covered by the opaque portion 6446. Alternatively, the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion so that at least a part of the outer edge portion of the grass substrate 6420 is covered by the grass front cover light scattering portion 6444 or the grass front cover opaque portion 6446 having a decorative shape. The same effect can be obtained even when the portion 6446 is provided.

Although FIGS. 118 and 126 show an example in which the grass accessory 6400 is provided in the area between the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100, the grass accessory 6400 is provided at a position other than this. It may be configured as follows. For example, the grass accessory 6400 may be provided in the area between the game panel 1100 and the glass unit 190. Alternatively, the grass accessory 6400 may be provided on the member constituting the door frame 3. For example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, and the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to provide grass accessories. In addition, not only the grass accessory 6400 but also other accessories may be configured to be provided at the same position as the grass accessory 6400.

In this way, in the grass accessory 6400, it is possible to perform an effect of making it visible in green, white, yellow, brown, silver, etc. by a plurality of members constituting the grass accessory 6400. It is possible to express the appearance of frost and snow on lush grass, dead grass, and dead grass. In addition, it is possible to express how the grass has changed from one of these aspects to another.

In the example shown in FIG. 126, the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of the mountain accessory 6500. Further, in these examples, the rabbit accessory 6000 has a face light emitting portion 6023, and the stump accessory 6100 has a first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and a second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b, and light is emitted from these light emitting portions. It is possible to take a staging state by irradiating the front. By the way, in these examples, the light from the light emitting portion is diffusely reflected by the member provided around the light emitting portion, and a part of the light emitted from the light emitting portion is directed to the rear, so that the light from the light emitting portion is emitted. There is a problem that the light cannot be efficiently irradiated forward and the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light is lowered. Therefore, the following is an example in which the utilization efficiency of the light from the light emitting portion can be improved by reflecting the light toward the rear on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 which is a decorative body.

FIG. 144 shows a modified example of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 119 and the like. FIG. 144 (A) is a front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 144 (B) is a perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. FIG. 144 (C) is an exploded perspective view of the rabbit accessory 6000. The rabbit accessory 6000 is configured as a unit by a face cover portion 6010 on the front side, a face substrate 6020 provided on the back side of the face cover portion 6010, and a body portion 6030. The face substrate 6020 has a first face light emitting unit 6023a and a second face light emitting unit 6023b as a face light emitting unit 6023 on the front surface. Further, the face substrate 6020 has a mouth decoration portion 6024 shaped to imitate the mouth of a rabbit. The left and right front legs of a rabbit are imitated on the vertical bottom surface of the face cover portion 6010, and the first arm portion 6016 and the second arm portion 6017 made of white opaque synthetic resin are attached. Further, at the lower end of the face substrate 6020, a body portion 6030 which is a plate-shaped member made of a white opaque synthetic resin, which imitates a body portion of a rabbit, is provided. Further, the face cover portion 6010 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the first face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering section 6011a and the second face light scattering are performed at positions corresponding to the first face light emitting section 6023a and the second face light emitting section 6023b, respectively. A portion 6011b is provided. Up to this point, the configuration is the same as that of the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 119 and the like.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 144 (A), the face substrate 6020 does not have the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022, and has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the face substrate 6020 is concave toward the rear formed by the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015 included in the face cover portion 6010. It is attached so that it fits into the part where it is. Further, in the face cover portion 6010, the upper surface of the face cover portion upper surface portion 6012 has a shape that protrudes upward at two places on the left and right, so that the first ear portion 6021 and the second ear portion 6022 are formed. Further, the first ear decoration portion 6021a and the second ear decoration portion 6022a are formed by printing on the front surface of the face cover portion 6010 with brown ink.

When the rabbit accessory 6000 takes such an embodiment, the light from the first face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b is diffusely reflected by the first face light scattering unit 6011a and the second face light scattering unit 6011b. After that, the upper surface portion 6012 of the face cover portion, the right surface portion 6013 of the face cover portion, the lower surface portion 6014 of the face cover portion, the left surface portion 6015 of the face cover portion, the first ear portion 6021, the first ear decoration portion 6021a, and the second ear portion 6022. In the second ear decoration portion 6022a or the like, there is a possibility that the light is reflected many times and the light is directed backward.

Further, even when the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a or the second rear wall light emitting section 6354b included in the stump accessory 6100 shown in FIGS. 127 to 130 emits light, the first rear wall light emitting section 6354a or the second rear wall emits light. The light from the light emitting portion 6354b is diffusely reflected by the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b, and then the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330. , There is a risk that the light will be reflected and directed backward at the box left wall portion 6340 or the like.

Therefore, an example of improving the light utilization efficiency by reflecting the light that has been directed backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 to the front again on the front side of the mountain accessory 6500 is shown below.

FIG. 145 (A) shows a mountain accessory 6500. The dotted line in the figure indicates the position where the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 are provided. Further, for the rabbit accessory 6000, the outer shape of the face substrate 6020 is also shown by a dotted line. The mountain accessory 6500 is composed of a mountain board 6520, a first mountain front cover 6540 provided on the front left side of the mountain board 6520, and a second mountain front cover 6560 provided on the front right side of the mountain board 6520.

The mountain board 6520 is composed of a printed circuit board whose front and rear surfaces are white. Further, on the front surface of the mountain board 6520, a plurality of LEDs constituting the mountain board front light emitting unit 6522 are mounted. Further, a mountain board opening 6524 is provided substantially in the center of the mountain board 6520 in the left-right direction. The mountain board opening 6524 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the mountain board 6520. Members located rearward can be visually recognized via the mountain substrate opening 6524.

The first Yamamae cover 6540 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin, and includes a first Yamamae cover colored transparent portion 6542, a first Yamamae cover colored light scattering portion 6544, and a first Yamamae cover opening 6548. There is. With such a configuration, the white mountain substrate 6520 can be visually recognized by the color of the first mountain front cover 6540. Specifically, the color of the first Yamamae cover 6540 may be blue. In this case, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on the mountain or the mountain has a glacier. The first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed by providing a punched physical opening in the first mountain front cover 6540. Further, the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is formed so as to straddle the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 and the first mountain front cover colored light scattering portion 6544. The mountain substrate 6520 located behind the first mountain front cover opening 6548 is visible in white. The second Yamamae cover 6560 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and includes a second Yamamae cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and a second Yamamae cover colorless light scattering portion 6564. With such a configuration, it is possible to express an aspect in which snow is piled up on a mountain or a mountain has a glacier. Further, the mountain board opening 6524 and the first mountain front cover opening 6548 each decoratively express the aspect of having a cave in the mountain by its shape.

On the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520, a mountain substrate front surface light emitting unit 6522a to a mountain substrate front surface ninth light emitting unit 6522i are provided as mountain substrate front light emitting units 6522. A colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the first light emitting portion 6522a on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colored light scattering unit 6544 for the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the second light emitting unit 6522b on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colored light scattering unit 6544 for the first mountain front cover is provided in front of the third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided by the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first mountain front cover colored light scattering unit 6544. are doing. A colored transparent portion 6542 of the first Yamamae cover is provided in front of the fourth light emitting portion 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a face substrate 6020 provided by the rabbit accessory 6000 in the standby position is located in front of the first Yamamae cover colored transparent portion 6542. There is. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the fifth light emitting unit 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the sixth light emitting portion 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover is provided in front of the seventh light emitting portion 6522g on the front surface of the mountain substrate, and a stump accessory 6100 is located in front of the colorless transparent portion 6562. A colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover is provided in front of the eighth light emitting portion 6522h on the front surface of the mountain substrate. A second mountain front cover colorless light scattering unit 6564 is provided in front of the ninth light emitting unit 6522i on the front surface of the mountain substrate.

The mountain accessory 6500 is a front view where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and is visible in white, and the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered by the colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue. The front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the colored light scattering part 6544 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue, and the mountain board 6520 is not located behind the colored transparent part 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is transparent in blue. A region that can be visually recognized in blue, a region that can be visually recognized in blue translucently without the mountain substrate 6520 located behind the colored light scattering portion 6542b of the first mountain front cover, and a mountain substrate opening 6524 that opens. The area where the rear member is visible in a hole shape, the area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the second mountain front cover colorless transparent portion 6562 and is visible in white, and the area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is visible are the first. It is composed of a region covered by the colorless light scattering portion 6564 of the 2 Yamamae cover and visually visible in white, and a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is not located behind the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the 2nd Yamamae cover and is visually visible. ing.

FIG. 145 (B) shows a state in which the above-mentioned rabbit accessory 6000 and stump accessory 6100 are provided in front of such a mountain accessory 6500. Behind the rabbit accessory 6000, there is an area where the mountain board 6520 is exposed and visible in white, and an area where the front of the mountain board 6520 is covered with the colored transparent portion 6542 of the first mountain front cover and is visible in light blue. The front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with the colored light scattering portion 6544 of the first mountain front cover to provide a region visible in light blue, and the first rabbit accessory 6000 provided in the front in these regions is provided. By diffusely reflecting the light from the face light emitting unit 6023a and the second face light emitting unit 6023b toward the front, it is possible to improve the light utilization efficiency. Further, behind the stump accessory 6100, a region where the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed and visually visible in white, and the front of the mountain substrate 6520 is covered with a colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover and is visually recognized in white. Regions are provided, and in these regions, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump accessory 6100 provided in front is diffusely reflected forward. Therefore, it is possible to improve the efficiency of light utilization. As described above, in this embodiment, one substrate is configured to have a plurality of reflection regions corresponding to each of the plurality of members including the light emitting portion.

When the mountain substrate 6520 located behind the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 is configured to reflect the light from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 forward in this way, the rabbit role is used. It is desirable to increase the reflection efficiency in the substrate region hidden by the object 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. Specifically, it is desirable to adopt white or bright color as the color of the mountain substrate 6520. Further, in the substrate area hidden by the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 may be exposed without providing a cover in front, or a colorless transparent cover may be provided when a cover is provided. It is good to configure it so that it does. In the example shown in FIG. 145 (A), the mountain substrate 6520 is exposed in the region corresponding to the right side of the front view of the rabbit accessory 6000. Further, in the region where the mountain board 6520 is exposed, electronic components such as the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 are not mounted on the front surface of the mountain board 6520. Further, in the region corresponding to the stump accessory 6100, the mountain substrate 6520 is either exposed or covered with the colorless transparent portion 6562 of the second mountain front cover. By adopting such an embodiment, it is possible to further increase the efficiency of light reflection to the front.

Of the mountain board front light emitting units 6522 provided on the mountain board 6520, the mountain board front first light emitting unit 6522a and the mountain board front fourth light emitting unit 6522d have the first mountain front cover colored transparent portion 6542 in front of the mountain substrate. For the front second light emitting unit 6522b and the mountain substrate front third light emitting unit 6522c, the first mountain front cover colored light scattering unit 6544 is in front, and for the mountain substrate front ninth light emitting unit 6522i, the second mountain front cover is in front. A colorless light scattering unit 6564 is provided. As described above, by providing a cover that is colored or scatters light in front of the light emitting portion 6522 on the front surface of the mountain substrate, the player is configured to prevent the light from the light emitting portion from being directly irradiated to the eyes of the player. On the other hand, the fifth light emitting unit 6522e on the front surface of the mountain substrate and the sixth light emitting unit 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate are not provided with a cover in the front and are exposed on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520. This is used to illuminate the stump accessory 6100 located in front of the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting unit 6522e and the mountain substrate front surface sixth light emitting unit 6522f, and the mountain substrate front surface fifth light emitting unit 6522e, This is because the light from the sixth light emitting unit 6522f on the front surface of the mountain substrate is not directly applied to the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the light emitting portion 6522 on the front surface of the mountain substrate inconspicuous. As described above, in the mountain board 6500, the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522 is not evenly arranged on the front surface of the mountain board 6520, but the first mountain front cover 6540 located in front of the mountain board front light emitting portion 6522. It is unevenly distributed corresponding to the second Yamamae cover 6560, the rabbit accessory 6000, and the stump accessory 6100.

FIG. 145 (C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. In this state, the mountain board front third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain board front fourth light emitting unit 6522d, which had been positioned to overlap behind the rabbit accessory 6000 in front view, are configured to be visible to the player in front view. Has been done. The rabbit accessory 6000 can not only emit light in the standby position as described above, but also emit light in a predetermined color as an effect even in the moving position. At this time, the game board side effect display device 1600 may display the effect with the same emission color as the emission color of the rabbit accessory 6000. For example, when the rabbit character 6000 is made to emit white light, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured to perform an effect of displaying a white line extending radially from the position where the rabbit character 6000 is located. May be good.

FIG. 145 (C) shows the rabbit accessory 6000 in a state of being moved from the standby position to the moving position by a dotted line. When viewed from the front, a third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain board and a fourth light emitting unit 6522d on the front surface of the mountain board are provided behind the rabbit character 6000, and even when the rabbit character 6000 is in the standby position, the rabbit character is provided. Even when the 6000 is in the moving position, it is possible to emit light in a predetermined color as an effect. For example, when the rabbit accessory 6000 is in the moving position, the mountain substrate front light emitting unit 6522 may be configured to emit light in white at the same time as displaying the white line on the game board side effect display device 1600.

When the third light emitting unit 6522c on the front surface of the mountain substrate and the fourth light emitting unit 6522d on the front surface of the mountain substrate are in the light emitting mode as the effect while the rabbit character 6000 is in the standby position, the upper surface of the face cover portion of the rabbit character 6000 Light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d passes through 6012, the face cover portion right surface portion 6013, the face cover portion lower surface portion 6014, and the face cover portion left surface portion 6015. , The contour of the rabbit's face is the light emitting mode. At this time, on the rear surface of the face substrate 6020 constituting the rabbit accessory 6000, the light emitted from the mountain substrate front surface third light emitting unit 6522c and the mountain substrate front surface fourth light emitting unit 6522d is diffusely reflected backward. Then, this light is again diffusely reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain accessory 6500. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the irradiated light.

In the example shown in FIG. 145, the mountain accessory 6500 is configured to be larger than the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 in the area in the front view, but the area in the front view is the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory. An accessory smaller than the object 6100 may be arranged behind the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100 so as to exhibit the same function as the mountain accessory 6500. For example, such an accessory may be arranged so as to fit within the region formed by the face substrate 6020 of the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump plate portion 6210 of the stump accessory 6100 in front view. Further, as such an accessory, for example, it is white like the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 131 (A), 132 (A), 135 (A), 141 (A) to 141 (D). The front surface of the grass substrate 6420 may be exposed, or the front surface of the white grass substrate 6420 may be covered with the colorless transparent portion 6442a of the grass front cover. Even in such a configuration, the exposed white grass substrate 6420 or the white grass substrate 6420 whose front surface is covered with the colorless transparent portion 6442a from the rabbit accessory 6000 or the stump accessory 6100. It is possible to diffusely reflect light forward.

In the rabbit accessory 6000 shown in FIG. 144, the entire face substrate 6020 is completely accommodated in the face cover portion 6010 when viewed from the front. Such an embodiment may be applied to the relationship between the grass front cover 6440 and the grass substrate 6420 in the above-mentioned grass accessory 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the grass front cover 6440 in a front view. Alternatively, it may be applied to the relationship between the grass cover 6460 and the grass substrate 6420 in the grass accessory 6400. In this case, the entire grass substrate 6420 is accommodated in the grass back cover 6460 in a front view. Specifically, for example, a plurality of substrates having a flower-like shape do not overlap with the rear surface of the grass front cover 6440 or the front surface of the grass rear cover 6460 in front view, and further, the grass front. It may be configured to be attached to the cover 6440 or the grass cover 6460 so that the entire board is completely fitted. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to realize decoration by a combination of the substrate and the grass front cover 6440 or a combination of the substrate and the grass rear cover 6460. In another example, such a configuration may be adopted when the substrate and the cover are provided.

As shown in FIG. 126, in the game board 5, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game panel 1100 provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600. There are multiple accessories in the space. Among these characters, the first giant tree character 6600, the second giant tree character 6650, the first cloud character 6700, the second cloud character 6750, and the board back grass character are located close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. 6800 is provided. These are visible through a colorless and transparent synthetic resin gaming panel 1100, and have a function of decorating the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100.

The first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree accessory 6650 are provided so as to cover the left and right sides of the back surface of the game panel 1100. Specifically, it is composed of a first giant tree accessory 6600 located on the left side of the back surface of the game panel 1100 and a second giant tree accessory 6650 located on the right side of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of a first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and a first giant tree leaf substrate 6630. The first giant tree trunk board 6610 is composed of a brown printed circuit board, and the first giant tree leaf board 6630 is composed of a green printed circuit board. A plurality of light sources composed of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the directions of these light sources are set to the right. The second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of a second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and a second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. The second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 is composed of a brown substrate, and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 is composed of a green substrate. A plurality of light sources composed of LEDs are arranged on the rear surfaces of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6680, and the directions of these light sources are set to the left. The first giant tree accessory 6600 is composed of the first giant tree trunk substrate 6610 and the first giant tree leaf substrate 6630, and the second giant tree accessory 6650 is composed of the second giant tree trunk substrate 6660 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680. However, for each of these substrates, the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to 143 (G) may be adopted.

The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are provided so as to cover above the back surface of the game panel 1100. The first cloud accessory 6700 and the second cloud accessory 6750 are each composed of a white printed circuit board. For each of these substrates, the structure according to the grass substrate 6420 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to 143 (G) may be adopted.

The first giant tree leaf substrate 6630 that constitutes the first giant tree accessory 6600 and the second giant tree leaf substrate 6680 that constitutes the second giant tree accessory 6650 are from the end of the game panel 1100, within the game area 5a, and further to the game. It is configured to be continuously visible to the player over the panel opening 1100a. Further, the second cloud accessory 6750 is configured to be continuously visible to the player from the outside of the game area 5a to the inside of the game area 5a and further to the game panel opening 1100a. On the other hand, the 1st giant tree leaf substrate 6630 constituting the 1st giant tree accessory 6600 and the 2nd giant tree leaf substrate 6680 constituting the 2nd giant tree accessory 6650 so as to overtake the upper left and upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. The game board side effect display device 1600 is configured so as not to look like a square. The mountain accessory 6500 is also provided so as to catch up with the lower left and lower right of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is configured so that the game board side effect display device 1600 does not look like a square. Further, the mountain accessory 6500 is provided at a position closest to the game board side effect display device 1600 among the accessories provided in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 146 shows the board back grass accessory 6800. The board back grass accessory 6800 is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100 so as to cover the lower part of the back surface of the game panel 1100. The board back grass accessory 6800 is composed of a board back grass substrate 6820 and a board back grass front cover 6840. The back cover 6840 may be made of, for example, a colored transparent synthetic resin, and specifically, a green transparent synthetic resin. Regarding the relationship between the board back grass substrate 6820 and the board back grass front cover 6840, the structures related to the grass substrate 6420 and the grass front cover 6440 of the grass accessory 6400 shown in FIGS. 131 (A) to 143 (G) are adopted. It may be configured to do so. Similarly, the structure related to the grass back cover 6460 may be adopted for the board back grass accessory 6800.

The board back grass accessory 6800 has a passing portion for passing a game ball that has passed through an opening provided in the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in a winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 located on the front side. As a result, a circular board back grass substrate opening 6824 and a board back grass front cover opening 6848 are provided. The game ball that has passed through the board back grass substrate opening 6824 and the board back grass front cover opening 6848 is detected by a sensor provided in the board back grass accessory 6800. Further, the sensor for detecting the game ball is attached below each passing portion and on the back surface of the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the existence of the sensor. As shown below, the back grass substrate opening 6824a to the back grass substrate first opening 6824a to the back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d are used as the back grass front cover opening 6848 to cover the back grass front cover. The first opening 6848a to the fourth opening 6848d of the back grass front cover are provided.

The first opening 6824a of the back grass substrate and the first opening 6848a of the front cover of the back grass are circular in the same size, and are provided at positions where they overlap each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate first opening 6824a and the board back grass front cover first opening 6848a. It forms a passing portion for passing through.

The front surface of the board back grass substrate second opening 6824b is not covered with the board back grass front cover 6840, and constitutes a passing portion for allowing the game ball to pass directly through the exposed board back grass board 6820.

The board back grass front cover second opening 6848b does not have the board back grass substrate 6820 located behind it, and only the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b constitutes a passing portion for directly passing the game ball. are doing. In this example, the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 is formed along the contour below the second opening 6848b of the board back grass front cover. With such a configuration, while making the shape of the board back grass substrate 6820 a decorative outer shape, a passage that guides the game ball that has passed through the board back grass front cover second opening 6848b to the sensor located below. It is possible to make it as difficult to see as possible.

The third opening 6824c of the back grass substrate and the third opening 6848c of the front cover of the back grass are circular in the same size, and are provided at positions overlapping with each other in the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c. It forms a passing portion for passing through. Then, in this example, two elliptical regions are formed on the board back grass front cover 6840 at the upper part of the passage portion formed by the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c. By doing so, the decorative shape imitating the head of a rabbit can be visually recognized. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 can be made. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation as being damaged.

The fourth opening 6824d of the board back grass substrate and the fourth opening 6848d of the board back grass front cover have the same size and shape, respectively, and have a shape in which two elliptical portions protrude from the upper part of the circular outer shape. Nothing. Further, these are provided at positions where they overlap each other in the front view of the board back grass accessory 6800. Then, the game ball moved to the back surface of the game panel 1100 by winning a prize in the winning opening provided on the front side of the game panel 1100 by the board back grass substrate fourth opening 6824d and the board back grass front cover fourth opening 6848d. It forms a passing portion for passing through. In this example, the shapes of the board back grass substrate third opening 6824c and the board back grass front cover third opening 6848c themselves are visually recognizable as decorative shapes imitating the head of a rabbit. In this way, by using the shape of the passing portion through which the game ball passes as a part of the decorative shape, the existence of the passing portion can be made inconspicuous, and the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 can be made. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation as being damaged.

In addition, it is preferable to arrange a tubular member formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in the passing portion through which the game ball passes so that the game ball can pass through. Further, it may be formed from a colored transparent synthetic resin of the tubular member, and the color of the synthetic resin may be the same as that of the board back grass front cover 6840 or the same color as the board back grass substrate 6820. With such a configuration, the presence of the tubular member can be made inconspicuous, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the decorative function of the board back grass accessory 6800 is impaired. ..

The 1st giant tree accessory 6600, the 2nd giant tree accessory 6650, the 1st cloud accessory 6700, the 2nd cloud accessory 6750, and the board back grass accessory 6800 are attached to the front of the game panel 1100, respectively. It is located behind the game panel 1100 in a manner straddling the rail member 5950. This makes it possible to visually recognize each accessory as a decoration without being aware of the existence of the rail member 5950. The entire rail member 5950 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Alternatively, the rail member 5950 may be composed of a plurality of members in the longitudinal direction, and at least one of the members may be composed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, the visibility of each accessory located behind is improved, and it is possible to expand the range in which decoration is performed. Further, the rail member 5950 may be formed of a synthetic resin having the same color as the accessory located behind. For example, when the board back grass accessory 6800 is visible in green, the rail member 5950 provided at a position overlapping the board back grass accessory 6800 in front view may be formed of a green transparent synthetic resin.

When the game ball driven into the game area 5a is charged, an electric discharge is generated at an unintended place, an electronic component is damaged due to a high voltage, or an electromagnetic pulse generated by the electric discharge causes an unintended illegal operation of the control element. There is a risk of controlling. In particular, a role provided with a printed circuit board on which electronic components are mounted, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, the second cloud accessory 6750, and the board back grass accessory 6800. When an object is provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100, such a situation is more likely to occur in the electronic components mounted on these boards.

Therefore, in the case of these accessories having a front cover, at least a part of the front cover may be configured to have a silver opaque portion formed by the above-mentioned metal thin film. More specifically, it is preferable to provide a front cover so that such an opaque portion is located in front of a portion where electronic components are mounted on the substrate. Further, each accessory may be provided so that the front surface of each accessory that may be affected by such a charged game ball does not come into contact with the back surface of the game panel 1100. Alternatively, in the area where the charged game ball rolls and falls and overlaps with the game area 5a in front view, at least the front surface of each accessory is provided so as not to touch the back surface of the game panel 1100. It may be configured.

Further, it is desirable that the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 and the ground path of the ground wire (not shown) provided on each accessory are as different paths as possible. For example, a ground wire (not shown) provided on the game panel 1100 may be finally installed on the island equipment via a ground circuit provided on each accessory, or conversely, a ground wire on each accessory may be provided on the game panel 1100. It is not preferable to finally install it in the island facility via the ground circuit. Therefore, it is preferable to provide a ground circuit board having a static elimination function at a predetermined position on the back surface of the gaming machine so that the ground path from the game panel 1100 and the ground path from each accessory merge on the ground circuit board. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the influence of the charged game ball driven into the game area 5a.

In FIGS. 118 and 126, an example in which the board back grass accessory 6800 is provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100, but instead of the board back grass accessory 6800, a mountain accessory 6500, a rabbit accessory 6000, and a stump role The object 6100 may be configured to be provided below the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also in this case, the light diffusely reflected backward from the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 can be reflected forward again to improve the efficiency of light utilization. In addition, using the function of reflection of the mountain board 6520, the winning opening unit equipped with other decorative accessories and the winning opening should be arranged in front of the mountain accessory in the same manner as the rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100. It may be configured as. Also in this case, the light emitted from the light emitting portion included in the decorative accessory or the winning opening unit and diffusely reflected backward can be reflected forward on the front surface of the mountain substrate 6520.

Further, by providing a plurality of columnar spacers on the back surface of the front cover constituting these accessories, the front surface of the substrate does not come into direct contact with the top of the spacer and does not come into direct contact with the back surface of the front cover. You may. Specifically, as the structure of each spacer, it is preferable to adopt a columnar structure having a height of about 2 mm and a diameter of about 2 mm vertically from the back surface of the front cover. In addition, the spacer may be integrally molded with the same material for the front cover. Further, when the front cover has a plurality of regions, the spacer may be configured to be provided in a region where the rear is more difficult to see. For example, it is preferable to integrally mold the colored transparent portion, the colored light scattering portion, and the spacer of the front cover with a green transparent synthetic resin. At this time, the spacer becomes transparent in green. Further, in this case, it is preferable not to provide a spacer in the colored transparent portion but to provide a spacer in the colored light scattering portion. By providing the spacer having such a configuration, the front cover and the substrate are arranged in parallel with the spacer height separated. With such a configuration, the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated by the front cover, and the substrate is decorated at a position several mm behind the front cover. At this time, since the substrate is located at the rear side as compared with the case where the portion closest to the back surface of the game panel 1100 is decorated with the substrate, the decorative effect is exhibited by the color of the substrate and the outer shape of the substrate. However, the presence of through holes and electronic components provided on the substrate can be made less noticeable to the player. Further, by separating the back surface of the game panel 1100 from the substrate, it is possible to reduce the influence of the electric discharge from the charged game ball and the electromagnetic pulse on the substrate.

The back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, and the second cloud role 6750 are each provided close to the back surface of the game panel 1100. .. Specifically, it is arranged on the front side of the intermediate position between the surface forming the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the back surface of the game panel 1100. Also, in the space between the board back grass role 6800, the first giant tree role 6600, the second giant tree role 6650, the first cloud role 6700, the second cloud role 6750, and the game board side effect display device 1600. Is provided with a rabbit accessory 6000 and a stump accessory 6100 as movable accessories. The rabbit accessory 6000 and the stump accessory 6100 may be provided at the lower part of the game panel 1100 on which the board back grass accessory 6800 is provided.

A light emitting part is provided on the front surface of the substrate in an accessory that does not have a front cover, such as the first giant tree accessory 6600, the second giant tree accessory 6650, the first cloud accessory 6700, and the second cloud accessory 6750. In this case, a scattering portion that scatters the light emitted from the light emitting portion may be formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100 that overlaps with the light emitting portion in the front view. Alternatively, even when a colored transparent or colorless transparent front cover is provided at a position overlapping the light emitting portion in front view, the scattering portion is similarly formed on the back surface of the game panel 1100. You may.

Although FIGS. 127 to 130 show an example in which the stump accessory 6100 is provided, the members constituting the stump accessory 6100 may be movably configured as an effect. For example, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, and the box rear wall portion 6350 that constitute the stump box portion 6300 may be configured to be movable as an effect.

In FIGS. 147 (A) to 147 (D), in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 129 (A) and 130 (A), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are moved from the standby positions, respectively. It is a figure which showed the state which moved to a position. FIG. 147 (A) shows an example in which the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box upper wall portion 6310 is in contact with the upper end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 147 (B) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved to the left rear until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 is in contact with the right end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 147 (C) shows an example in which the box lower wall portion 6330 is moved rearward until the front end portion of the box lower wall portion 6330 is in contact with the lower end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. FIG. 147 (D) shows an example in which the box right wall portion 6320 is moved to the right rear until the front end portion of the box right wall portion 6320 is in contact with the left end portion of the box rear wall portion 6350. In addition, only one wall portion of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be movable as shown in the figure, and the other wall portions may be configured to be immovable, or the box upper wall may be configured to be immovable. A plurality of wall portions among the portions 6310 to the left wall portion 6340 of the box may be configured to be movable, and for example, all of the upper wall portion 6310 to the left wall portion of the box 6340 may be configured to be movable.

With such a configuration, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall to the stump plate portion 6210, the first grass movable portion 6360, and the second grass movable portion 6370 provided in front of the stump box portion 6300. The irradiation mode of the light from the light emitting unit 6354b can be changed. For example, before moving the box upper wall portion 6310 backward, light is reflected on each inner wall of the stump box portion 6300, and the stump plate portion 6210 is illuminated with a shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300. The Rukoto. On the other hand, in the state where the box upper wall portion 6310 is moved rearward, the light from the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not reflected by the box upper wall portion 6310, so that the rear wall light emission The light radiated diagonally upward from the portion 6354 goes straight ahead and illuminates the back side of the stump plate portion 6210. Therefore, in addition to the shape corresponding to the front shape of the stump box portion 6300, the stump plate portion 6210 is also illuminated in the region above the front surface of the stump box portion 6300. By moving the box upper wall portion 6310 in this way, it is possible to change the illuminated area. Even when the box right wall portion 6320 to the box left wall portion 6340 are slid backward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the illuminated area is changed according to each moved wall portion. It is possible to make it.

Further, the box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured so as to be able to move in the front-rear direction while maintaining its inclination. For example, from the state shown in FIGS. 129 (A) and 130 (A), the upper end of the box rear wall portion 6350 is the front end of the box upper wall portion 6310, and the lower end of the box rear wall portion 6350 is the box lower wall portion 6330. The box rear wall portion 6350 may be configured to be movable forward so as to be in contact with the front ends. Further, it may be configured to be movable backward from the state shown in FIG. 129 (A).

Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350. For example, the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the side formed by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box rear wall portion 6350, the box left wall portion 6340. It may be configured to be rotatable about the side formed by the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box rear wall portion 6350. Then, by rotating the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 inward, the front surface of the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be covered by the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340, or the box is configured. By rotating the right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 outward, the box rear wall portion 6350 and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 may be configured to be in a parallel state. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape having the same size as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box rear wall portion 6350 has the same embodiment as the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340. It may be configured to be rotatable with respect to the above.

An example in which the rear wall portion 6350 of the box can be moved is shown. In the examples shown in FIGS. 129 (A) to 129 (D), the rear wall substrate 6352 provided with the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is fixedly provided and rear of the box. The rear wall cover 6356 constituting the wall portion 6350 may be configured to be rotatable or movable in the front-rear direction in the same manner as the box rear wall portion 6350 described above. When the rear wall cover 6356 is rotated, the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 can be directly applied to the stump opening 6210a without passing through the rear wall cover 6356. On the other hand, when the rear wall cover 6356 is moved forward, a distance is created between the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 and the rear wall cover 6356, and the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 spreads radially to the rear wall. It is possible to illuminate the entire cover 6356. When such an aspect is adopted, it is preferable that the region other than the first rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358a and the second rear wall cover light scattering portion 6358b in the rear wall cover 6356 is also a scattering portion. With such a configuration, the rear wall cover 6356 can be moved in the front-rear direction, so that a part of the rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated and the entire rear wall cover 6356 is illuminated. Can be made visible to the player.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 130 (A) to 130 (D), the rear wall plate portion 6380 is fixedly provided, and the rear wall substrate 6352 and the rear wall cover 6356 are attached to the rear wall plate portion 6380 in the above-mentioned box. Similar to the rear wall portion 6350, it may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction.

Examples have been shown in which the fixedly provided member may be movable, but in these examples, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the like after the member has finished moving before the start of the movement and later. The second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b may be continuously configured to maintain a predetermined light emitting mode. As a predetermined light emitting mode, for example, a mode in which the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b continue to light, periodically blink, or do not emit light is adopted. You may try to do it. Further, in the case of executing a light emitting mode such as continuous lighting or periodic blinking, the same color may be continuously emitted. With such a configuration, the light emitting mode of the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b is not changed, but the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356. By moving such a member, it is possible to change the effect mode visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, even if it is configured to change the light emitting mode of the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b in the period from the timing when the movement of the member is started to the timing when the movement of the member is finished. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to realize a more complicated production mode.

Although an example of moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect is shown from the state shown in FIGS. 129 and 130, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the rear of the box are shown. By moving the members such as the wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 as an effect, the moved predetermined member may be configured to be in the state shown in FIGS. 129 and 130. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to change the staging mode visually recognized by the player.

Although the example in which the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 move in the left-right direction and the like is shown, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured so as not to move. Even with such a configuration, the light emitting mode of the stump accessory 6100 can be diversified by moving members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356. Further, the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370 may be configured as one member. In this case, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a may be configured as one decoration portion, or may be configured as a plurality of decoration portions. Further, the first grass decoration portion 6360a and the second grass decoration portion 6370a are made colored and translucent by a method such as painting and sticking a seal, and when the light from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is irradiated forward, the first grass is used. The decorative portion 6360a and the second grass decorative portion 6370a may be configured to be in an effect state by being exposed to light.

Further, as shown below, the stump box portion 6300 and the stump plate portion 6381 form the stump accessory 6100 without providing the first grass movable portion 6360, the second grass movable portion 6370, and the stump plate portion 6210. It may be configured as.

FIG. 148 is an example in which the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided in front of the stump box portion 6300, and a fixed grass plate portion 6381 is provided in place of the first grass movable portion 6360 and the second grass movable portion 6370. Is shown. The grass plate portion may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. Further, the grass plate portion 6381 has a plurality of decorative portions. Specifically, a green grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a that imitates the outer shape of grass, a grass plate central decoration portion 6382a that imitates the shape of an animal's face, a grass plate top decoration portion 6382b, and a grass plate right decoration portion 6382c. It includes a decorative portion 6382d under the grass plate, a decorative portion 6382e on the left side of the grass plate, and a colorless and transparent grass plate colorless transparent portion 6381b which is a region other than these. The grass plate colored transparent portion 6381a, the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e are each made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It is configured by printing or attaching a seal to the front surface or the rear surface of the grass plate portion 6381. The shape of the animal's face and ears is linearly formed in the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a, and the rear wall substrate 6352 located at the rear can be visually recognized. On the other hand, the decoration part 6382b on the grass plate, the decoration part 6382c on the right side of the grass plate, the decoration part 6382d under the grass plate, and the decoration part 6382e on the left side of the grass plate have a shape imitating the face of an animal and are translucent or colored transparent that can transmit light. It is configured in.

In such a configuration, as described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, the box left wall portion 6340, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 are moved. By doing so, it is possible to change the lighting mode of the grass plate central decoration portion 6382a, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e. In particular, the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e were irradiated with light from a state in which almost no light was irradiated until then. It can be changed into a mode, and a shape imitating the face of each animal can be configured to be visible to the player.

The stump box portion 6300 has a box-shaped upper wall portion 6310, a box right wall portion 6320, a box lower wall portion 6330, a box left wall portion 6340, and a box rear wall portion 6350 as each surface and has no front surface. Although it has a shape, it may be configured to change the position, size, and shape of at least one of these members.

FIG. 149 shows a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 148. In this example, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box lower wall portion 6330 have a rectangular shape having the same width as the box rear wall portion 6350, and the box right wall portion 6320 and the box left wall portion 6340 are formed with respect to the box rear wall portion 6350. By providing the stump box portion 6300 so as to form a rectangular parallelepiped, the stump box portion 6300 is formed into a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and the stump plate portion 6210 is not provided so that the grass plate portion 6381 is located close to the front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. are doing. In such a configuration, as described above, as an effect, the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 is set as a light emitting mode, and the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are used. By configuring it to rotate or slide in the front-rear direction, it is possible to change the irradiation mode of the light emitted from the rear wall light emitting portion 6354 to the grass plate portion 6381. Further, in accordance with the rectangular parallelepiped shape of the stump box portion 6300, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c is moved to the left side and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e is moved to the right side as compared with the example shown in FIG. 148. It is installed at the above position.

150 to 152 show a modified example of the example shown in FIG. 149. In the examples shown in FIGS. 150 to 152, the shape and mounting mode of the box rear wall portion 6350 are different from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 150 (A), the box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be provided at a position shifted by half to the left in front view. FIG. 150 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 150 (A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 151 (A), the entire box rear wall portion 6350 is configured to be doubled in length in the left direction when viewed from the front. FIG. 151 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 151 (A). FIG. 153 (A) is a diagram showing the rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 151 (A). Further, FIG. 153 (B) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 151 (A).

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 152 (A), the rear wall portion 6350 of the box is configured to be reduced to half the size in the left direction in the front view. FIG. 152 (B) shows an enlarged state of the stump box portion 6300 in the example shown in FIG. 152 (A). FIG. 153 (C) is a diagram showing a rear wall cover 6356 in the modified example shown in FIG. 152 (A). Further, FIG. 153 (D) is a diagram showing the rear wall substrate 6352 in the modified example shown in FIG. 152 (A).

Under such a premise, the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b provided in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIGS. 150 (A) and 151 (A) (details are shown in FIG. 130 (A), FIG. FIG. 130 (B), FIG. 153 (A), and FIG. 153 (B)), the light emitting decoration state in which the grass plate center decoration portion 6382a and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e are illuminated from behind. It becomes possible to. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 to the rear, it is possible to bring the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b into a light emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the amount of light emitted to the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is reduced, so that the portion is relatively inconspicuous. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320 and the box lower wall portion 6330 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c and the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d are in a light emitting decorative state. can do. An example in which both the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are made to emit light is shown, but in the example shown in FIG. In the protruding region, it may be configured so as not to emit light. In this case, only the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a can be in the light emitting decorative state. From this state, as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, and the box lower wall portion 6330 may be configured to be moved rearward.

Further, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b provided in the stump box portion 6300 shown in FIG. 152 (A) (see FIGS. 153 (C) and 153 (D) for details) are emitted. In this state, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a can be in a light emitting decorative state illuminated from the rear. Here, by moving the box upper wall portion 6310 to the rear, it is possible to bring the grass plate upper decorative portion 6382b into a light emitting decorative state. On the other hand, the amount of light emitted to the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is reduced, so that the portion is relatively inconspicuous. Further, when the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are moved rearward instead of the box upper wall portion 6310, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c and the grass plate lower decoration portion are used. The 6382d and the left decorative portion 6382e of the grass plate can be set to the light emitting decorative state.

In this way, in the state where the grass plate center decoration portion 6382a is light-emitting decorated, the grass is moved backward by moving the box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 to the rear. The upper plate decorative portion 6382b, the grass plate right decorative portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decorative portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e can be in a light emitting decorative state. At this time, the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is in a light emitting decorative state due to a weaker amount of light than before. In this way, by setting the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e to the light emitting decorative state, some state in the gaming machine is suggested or notified. It may be configured as follows. For example, when four states having different advantages for the player are occurring or can occur, the decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate is set as a light emitting decorative state corresponding to the most advantageous state, which is the second most advantageous. The grass plate right decorative portion 6382c is set to the light emitting decorative state, and the grass plate left decorative portion 6382e is set to the light emitting decorative state corresponding to the third advantageous state. The decorative portion 6382d under the grass plate may be configured to be in a light emitting decorative state. With such an aspect, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation as to which wall portion will move in the state where the grass plate center decorative portion 6382a is light-emittingly decorated.

Alternatively, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are turned off, and the grass plate center decoration portion 6382a is not light emitting decorated. First, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 are turned off. After a predetermined time has passed by moving either the box lower wall portion 6330 or the box left wall portion 6340 to the rear, the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are set to emit light. good. With such a configuration, the player can see which of the grass plate upper decoration portion 6382b, the grass plate right decoration portion 6382c, the grass plate lower decoration portion 6382d, and the grass plate left decoration portion 6382e can be visually recognized. It is possible to notify in advance. In this case, each wall portion is provided in a state of being upright with respect to the front direction, and the player cannot always notice that each wall portion has moved. Therefore, the player who can notice the movement of any of the wall parts will watch the subsequent change to the light emitting decoration mode of any of the decoration parts with great expectation, and improve the interest of the game. Is possible.

Further, for example, in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (so-called normal gaming state, etc.), the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are set to the front position (non-operating position), and the front grass plate center decoration portion 6382a. Only the box upper wall part 6310 to the box left wall part are limited to the shipping decoration mode, and only when the player is in an advantageous state (for example, a probability fluctuation state, a time-saving game state, a jackpot game state). The 6340 may be moved rearward so that the decorative portion 6382b on the grass plate to the decorative portion 6382e on the left side of the grass plate are also irradiated with light to increase the area of the light emitting decoration mode. As a result, the appearance of the light emitting region can be changed according to the interest of the player, which is improved by shifting from the unfavorable gaming state to the advantageous gaming state.

In the example shown with reference to FIGS. 150 (A) and 152 (A), an opening is provided on the right side of the box rear wall portion 6350. In this case, for example, in the front-rear direction. The moving decorative member may be configured to appear and disappear from the opening.

With reference to FIGS. 150 (A) to 153 (D), an example is shown in which the rear wall portion 6350 of the box is provided by shifting it to the left, expanding or contracting it, but with respect to the upward direction, the right direction, and the downward direction. However, it may be configured to be staggered, enlarged or reduced in the same manner. Further, the structure of the stump box portion 6300 is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 129, and the example shown in FIG. 130 may be adopted.

In FIGS. 129 to 130, an example in which the first rear wall light emitting portion 6354a and the second rear wall light emitting portion 6354b are provided on the box rear wall portion 6350 is shown, but instead of the box rear wall portion 6350, the box upper wall portion 6310 is shown. -The box may be configured so that at least one wall portion of the left wall portion 6340 is provided with a configuration related to light emission such as a light emitting portion or a light scattering portion.

Specifically, in the modified example shown with reference to FIGS. 148 (A) to 153 (D), the box upper wall portion 6310 has a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130. May be provided to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300 and the grass plate portion 6381. At this time, at least one wall portion of the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 is moved backward as in the example shown in FIGS. 147 (A) to 147 (D). It is good to configure it to. With such a configuration, in the grass plate portion 6381, from the state where only the front region corresponding to the opening of the stump box portion 6300 is mainly illuminated, it is added to the front of the opening of the stump box portion 6300. It is also possible to illuminate the right side, the bottom side, and the left side. Although an example is shown in which a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion are provided on the box upper wall portion 6310 to illuminate the inside of the stump box portion 6300, the box upper wall portion 6310 is replaced with the box right wall portion 6320. In the box lower wall portion 6330 and the box left wall portion 6340, a light emitting portion and a light scattering portion may be provided, and the illumination mode may be changed by moving each wall portion.

The box upper wall portion 6310, the box right wall portion 6320, the box lower wall portion 6330, and the box left wall portion 6340 are each configured in a plate shape having the same thickness. The structure may be such that the inner wall of the wall portion is inclined outward so that the thickness of the wall becomes thin. With such a configuration, the light reflected in the stump box portion 6300 can be more reflected forward.

In order to move the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 to change the mode of irradiating the grass plate portion 6381 with light as described above, the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are colored and opaque. It is preferable to provide a reflective portion capable of reflecting light and a scattering portion capable of scattering light by forming the inner wall of the material with a thin film of aluminum. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the mode in which the mode of irradiating the grass plate portion 6381 with light changes more conspicuous. Even when the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box left wall portion 6340 are formed of a colorless transparent and colored transparent material and the inner and outer walls thereof are made smooth, the mode of irradiating the grass plate portion 6381 with light is changed. It is possible to make it.

As described above, the members such as the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350 and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movably deformed, but the movable member may be only one of these members. Alternatively, any plurality of members may be movable, or all members may be movable. For example, only the box upper wall portion 6310 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. Further, the box upper wall portion 6310 and the box right wall portion 6320 may be movable, and other members may be fixedly provided so as not to be movable. .. Further, all of the box upper wall portion 6310, the box rear wall portion 6350, and the rear wall cover 6356 may be movable. Even with such a configuration, the light emitting decoration mode for the grass plate portion 6381 can be changed.

The movement of the box upper wall portion 6310 to the box rear wall portion 6350, the rear wall cover 6356, and the like may be configured to be performed by a drive means (not shown) by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, it is preferable to configure the peripheral control board 1510 to control the light emission of the first rear wall light emitting unit 6354a, the second rear wall light emitting unit 6354b, and the like.

By exemplifying FIGS. 118 to 153, various movable bodies (rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) used for directing and decorating the game board 5 provided in the pachinko machine 1; hereinafter, movable bodies in the game board. Although the embodiment in which the pachinko machine 1 is provided is shown below, a movable body (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body) used for directing or decorating the door frame 3 provided in the pachinko machine 1 is shown. An embodiment to be provided is shown.

FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3 as a frame movable body with a right ear frame movable body 7100 that imitates the ears of an animal (specifically, a rabbit). An embodiment in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is provided is shown. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can move in the vertical direction, and the specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

154 (A) and 154 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 154 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 154 (D) and 154 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 154 (A), 154 (C), and 154 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. FIGS. 154 (B) and 154 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 project upward from the door frame top unit 570. FIG. 154 (D) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570.

In the present embodiment, a door frame top unit 570 is provided above the door frame 3. A glass unit 190 is provided in the central portion of the door frame 3, and the game area 5a located behind, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and various movable bodies in the game board are provided via the glass unit 190. (Rabbit character 6000, stump character 6100, etc.) are visible. A dish unit 320 and a handle unit 300 are provided at the lower part of the door frame 3. Further, the staging operation unit 400 is provided with an operation button 410, and can accept an operation input by the player. In the figure, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the like are not shown.

The door frame top unit 570 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape, and its upper surface, right side surface, and left side surface are the upper surface, right side surface, and left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 constituting the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so that it overlaps when viewed from the front. The door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white and translucent synthetic resin to a thickness of about several mm, and is capable of transmitting light. The door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 corresponding to the right ear frame movable body 7100 that can move up and down, and a door corresponding to the left ear frame movable body 7200 that can move up and down. The frame top unit is provided with an upper left ear opening 7010.

As shown in FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (E), the door frame top unit 570 according to the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. There is. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be described in the following description.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a vertically long rectangular shape in a front view, and has a front-facing right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and a rear-facing right ear frame movable body second surface 7120. ing. The first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body is made of the inner decorative portion 7112 of the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative resin made of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin on the inner side and the white translucent synthetic resin on the outer side. It has a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. The surfaces of the right ear frame movable body 7100 other than the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear frame movable body second surface 7120) are outside the first surface of the right ear frame movable body. It is formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the decorative portion 7114. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

Inside the right ear frame movable body 7100, a right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 is provided at a position overlapping with the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 in front view. Further, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 is provided at a position overlapping with the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 in front view. Specifically, the light emitting portion 7116 inside the movable body of the right ear frame is composed of a printed circuit board coated on both sides with a white protective film, and a light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player side is mounted on the surface thereof. Has been done. The right ear frame movable body inner light emitting unit 7116 and the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting unit 7118 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode toward the front under the control of the peripheral control board 1510, and the right ear frame can emit light. It is possible to illuminate the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion 7112 by the movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114 by the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118. Is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shown in FIGS. 154 (A), 154 (C), and 154 (D), respectively, by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. From the state of being stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 (first state), vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 154 (B) and 154 (E). It is possible to control to a protruding state (second state). The upper surface of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is formed flush with the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. Has been done. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shaped to imitate the ears of an animal, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to express the state in which the animal's ears move in a decorative manner by taking the state of the door.

In the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is formed of a white and translucent synthetic resin to a thickness of about several mm. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 154 (A), with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116 and the right ear frame When the movable body outer light emitting part 7118, the left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 is made to emit light vaguely. It is possible to make it visible to the player in the state of being in the state. The same structure may be adopted for the door frame top unit 570 in other embodiments, and in this case as well, the light emitted from the light emitting portion provided corresponding to the frame movable body is the door frame top. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the door frame top unit 570 in a state where the front surface and the side surface of the door frame top unit 570 are vaguely emitted by light reflected and scattered in the unit 570.

On the other hand, in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body inner light emitting portion 7116, the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118, and the left ear frame When the movable body inner light emitting portion 7216 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative portion possessed by the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110. 7112 and the right ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decorative part 7114, the left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7210 have the left ear frame movable body 1st surface inner decorative part 7212 and the left ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decorative part It is possible for the player to visually recognize the 7214 in a predetermined light emission effect state.

In this way, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body) move, a part of the frame movable body becomes the outer frame 2 or the door frame base unit 100. Since it is located above the top surface, it occupies more area for the player's view when looking up, and it seems that the volume of the housing has increased, giving the player unprecedented surprise and fun. It is possible to give to.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B), the game board side is matched with the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. Display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, for the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit). Operation reception mode of the player, right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7116, right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7118, left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7216, left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7218 (hereinafter, frame) An example of an effect that combines the light emitting modes and the like in the movable body light emitting unit) is shown.

FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B) show an operation mode of the frame movable body and a frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

In the time charts shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. Further, these points are described in the drawings of FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B), 170 (A) to 171 (B), 179 (A) to 180 (B), which will be described later, and these. The same applies to each drawing and the like obtained by modifying.

FIG. 155 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 155 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 156 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 156 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B), the mode in which the frame movable body moves, the mode in which the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the timing at which the operation reception to the operation unit becomes effective, and the operation instruction display are displayed. The timing at which the frame is started and the timing at which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off from the light emitting effect state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends and the timing at which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific examples of the effects in each effect pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). It is in a state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise at the same time. Is started (timing t7).

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is composed of an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. As for the frame movable body simulated image, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise as the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 rise. It is dynamically displayed in the manner in which it is used. The frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable according to the timing (timing t9) when the ascending of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 ends. The ascending of the image imitating the body 7200 is completed, and after that, it continues to be displayed in the mode indicating the stopped state (timing t9 or later). The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in a state where the ascent is completed at the timing t9 2 seconds after the start of the ascent at the timing t7 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or an ascending state). Become.

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. To. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") may be displayed. You may. The operation valid period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the state in which the light emitting effect is performed.

FIGS. 155 (A) and 155 (B) show an effect mode when the operation unit is operated at the timing t14 after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is effective is started (timing t9). Shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 155 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the light emitting unit of the frame movable body is normally turned off from the extinguished state. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the light emission effect state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the specific light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 155 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is out of order, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit is normally turned off from the off state. It will be in a light emitting state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In the specific light emission effect state, the player feels more stimulation when the light blinking mode is faster, the amount of light is stronger, or the number of colors is larger than the light emission mode in the normal light emission effect state. It is advisable to adopt a light emitting mode. In this way, the effect state of a specific light emitting mode different from the normal state is visually recognized by the player, which indicates to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit. Specifically, in the specific light emitting effect state, the inner portion of the frame movable body and the outer portion of the frame movable body may be configured to be in the light emitting effect state in different modes. For example, the inner portion of the frame movable body may be configured to be visible in a light emitting mode with stronger stimulation than the outer portion of the frame movable body. It should be noted that this definition of the specific light emitting effect state and the normal light emitting effect state may be configured to be applied to other embodiments.

In FIGS. 156 (A) and 156 (B), after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in a predetermined light emission effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 156 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18), the frame movable body light emitting unit is different from the normal light emission effect state. It will be in the production state. In this way, when the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the specific light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 156 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is in the normal light emission effect state. .. In this way, when the light emitting unit is in the normal light emitting effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B), the fluctuating decorative pattern corresponds to the special lottery result at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 155 (A) and 156 (A), the special lottery result is a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the staging pattern shown in FIGS. 155 (B) and 156 (B) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, "7", "6", "7") indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ) Stops and displays the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t22) when 2 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol stopped, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. ) To the storage position (first state). At the same time, the frame movable body simulated image has a display mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are lowered in accordance with the descending motion. At the timing (timing t24) when the movement of the frame movable body to the storage position is completed, the frame movable body simulated image becomes a display mode in which the descent is completely completed according to the actual descending motion of the frame movable body. The display ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light emitting state from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

FIGS. 157 (A) to 157 (C) show the moving state of the frame movable body when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 155 (A) is executed, the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, and the reception of the operation unit. It is a schematic diagram showing the change of the state, the state of the operation instruction display, and the state of the light emitting effect of the frame movable body with the passage of time. As described above, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 155 (A) is an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit when the special lottery result is a big hit.

FIG. 157 (A) shows the state at the timing t5, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, and the frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the normal light emitting effect state. The frame movable body simulated image is hidden, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 157 (B) shows the state at the timing t8, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, and the frame movable body is in the light emitting effect state from the storage position (first state) to the ascending position (second state). The frame movable body simulated image is a display that imitates the state of moving from the storage position (first state) to the ascending position (second state), and the operation unit is invalid. It is a period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 157 (C) shows the state at the timing t11, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) in the extinguished state, and the frame movable body simulated image is The display imitates the frame movable body located in the ascending position (second state), the operation valid period is started in the operation unit, and the image imitating the operation unit is displayed as the instruction display as the operation instruction display. ing.

FIG. 158 (A) shows the state at the timing t19, the decorative symbol is changing in the reach state, the frame movable body is in the ascending position (second state) in the special light emitting effect state, and the frame movable body is simulated. The image is a display that imitates the ascending position (second state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 158 (B) shows the state at the timing t23, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is moving from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, and the frame movable body simulated image is from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (second state). The display imitates the state of moving to the first state), the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden.

FIG. 158 (C) shows the state at the timing t28, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the special lottery result is a big hit. The frame movable body is located in the storage position (first state) in the special light emission effect state, the frame movable body simulated image is hidden, the operation unit is in the operation invalid period, and the operation instruction display is hidden. ..

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, the light emitting mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks. In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that has never existed in the past in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of a reach effect), which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. In addition, it is possible to give the player the feeling as if he / she has decided the special lottery result by changing the light emitting mode of the frame movable body light emitting unit triggered by the operation of the player to the operation unit. It becomes.

FIGS. 159 (A) to 159 (F) show deformation examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (E). 159 (A) and 159 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 159 (C) and 159 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 159 (E) and 159 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 159 (A), 159 (C), and 159 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state). Shows. FIGS. 159 (B), 159 (D), and 159 (F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 (C) and 159 (E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), respectively. It has a right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7240 on the side, and by rotating 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, the right ear frame movable body The 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 160 (A) to 160 (F) show deformation examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 159 (A) to 159 (F). 160 (A) and 160 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 160 (C) and 160 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 160 (E) and 160 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 160 (A), 160 (C), and 160 (E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. FIGS. 160 (B), 160 (D), and 160 (F) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570. ing.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 160 (C) and 160 (E), the frame movable body has a rotation axis on the back side and rotates 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side. By doing so, the frame movable body is in a state of being moved from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (E) show deformation examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (E). 161 (A) and 161 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 161 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 161 (D) and 161 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 161 (A), 161 (C), and 161 (D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. FIGS. 161 (B) and 161 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the upper part of the frame movable body is visible in the front view in the standby state (first state). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. In this way, in the standby state, a part of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the front view, so that it is possible to remind the player that the frame movable body moves. Further, during a normal game, only the right ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7118 and the left ear frame movable body outer light emitting portion 7218 are set to the normal light emitting effect state, and only when the specific light emitting effect state is set, the inside of the right ear frame movable body is set. The light emitting unit 7116 and the light emitting unit 7216 inside the movable body of the left ear frame may also be configured to emit light. Further, the frame movable body having another structure may be configured to adopt the same light emission pattern.

162 (A) to 162 (F) show deformation examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (E). 162 (A) and 162 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 162 (C) and 162 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 162 (E) and 162 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 162 (A), 162 (C), and 162 (E) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. ing. FIGS. 162 (B), 162 (D), and 162 (F) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 protrude upward from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). ing.

In this embodiment, the left and right frame movable bodies are adjacent to each other in the standby position (first state), and the upper part of the frame movable body can be visually recognized in the front view. In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the upper binaural openings 7040 of the door frame top unit. Further, the frame movable bodies are configured to be movable upward while being separated from each other in the left-right direction. In the state of being moved to the moving position (second state), the player can visually recognize the state as in FIG. 154 (B). In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E) show another embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided on the door frame top unit 570 constituting the door frame 3. Although the frame movable body is rotatable in the present embodiment, a specific structure and operation mode will be described later.

163 (A) and 163 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 163 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 163 (D) and 163 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 163 (A), 163 (C), and 163 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570. In FIGS. 163 (B) and 163 (E), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are clockwise when viewed from the right from the state shown in FIGS. 163 (A) and 163 (D). It shows a state in which the door frame top unit 570 is rotated 90 degrees and protrudes upward.

The door frame top unit 570 is made of white and translucent synthetic resin, and in the stored state shown in FIG. 163 (A), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are viewed from the player in front. It is configured to be invisible. On the other hand, when the player visually recognizes the door frame top unit 570 from diagonally above the front, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, respectively, as shown in FIG. 163 (C).

As shown in FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 and a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010. The shape of the upper right ear opening 7000 of the door frame top unit and the upper left ear opening 7010 of the door frame top unit is a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed in a plan view. Further, in the door frame top unit 570, there are a right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100, and a left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear frame movable body 7200. Is provided. Except for these points, the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment basically has the same structure as that described with reference to FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (E). ..

As shown in FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E), the door frame top unit 570 according to the present embodiment includes a right ear frame movable body 7100 on the left side and a left ear frame movable body 7200 on the right side in a front view. There is. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. Since the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have basically the same structure, only the right ear frame movable body 7100 may be described in the following description.

163 (A), 163 (C), and 163 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 is in the retracted state. The right ear frame movable body 7100 in the retracted state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 facing downward and the right ear frame movable body second surface facing upward. Has 7120 and. The first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body is made of the inner decorative portion 7112 of the right ear frame movable body first surface inner decorative resin made of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin on the inner side and the white translucent synthetic resin on the outer side. It has a right ear frame movable body first surface outer decorative portion 7114. On the other hand, the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body is entirely made of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear frame movable body 7100 are formed of the same white translucent synthetic resin as the outer decorative portion 7114 of the first surface of the right ear frame movable body. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has the same structure as the right ear frame movable body 7100.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 has a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. Further, the right ear frame movable body rotation shaft 7140 is attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The right ear frame movable body 7100 can rotate about the left-right direction by transmitting power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140. Is. The left ear frame movable body 7200 also has a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 having a similar structure, and the power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft. By being transmitted to the 7240, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can independently rotate at any angle clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the right by controlling a pulse motor (not shown). , It is possible to stop at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E), a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear frame movable body 7100 is provided in the door frame top unit 570. The right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit is installed in a state of being rotated clockwise by about 30 degrees from the horizontal plane when viewed from the right. The right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated on both sides with a white protective film, and is a movable body of the right ear frame located rearward under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. A light emitting diode capable of irradiating the first surface 7110 with light is mounted on the upper surface thereof. By causing the light emitting diode to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to make the first surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body into a predetermined light emitting effect mode. The left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit also has the same structure as the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shown in FIGS. 163 (A), 163 (C), and 163 (D), respectively, by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to change from the state of being stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 to the state of being stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. FIGS. 163 (B) and 163 (E) are examples thereof, in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right from the stored state and are vertical. In this state, the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame are facing the front and stopped. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are shaped to imitate the ears of an animal, and are housed in the door frame top unit 570 and vertically from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. By taking the above, it is possible to express the state in which the animal's ears are standing in a decorative manner.

Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized by the player in a rotated state by continuously driving a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Is. When rotating in this way, it is preferable to rotate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 a plurality of times in the same direction at a speed of about one rotation per second. It can be said that FIGS. 163 (B) and 163 (E) show the rotating state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be rotated a plurality of times clockwise when viewed from the right, or may be rotated a plurality of times counterclockwise when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 can be alternately visually recognized by the player. Further, the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 are alternately visible to the player.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, and are irradiated from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit. It has been shown that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be brought into a predetermined decorative state by light, and specific examples are shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 163 (A), 163 (C), and 163 (D), the left ear of the right ear frame movable body 1st surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 of the right ear frame movable body 7100. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit with the first surface 7210 of the frame movable body facing downward, the inside of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to make the entire door frame top unit 570 dimly emit light by the light reflected by. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white and translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B) and 163 (E), the left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 of the right ear frame movable body 7100. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit with the one surface 7210 facing forward, the light causes the right ear frame movable body first. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7110 and the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body are decorated. Also in this case, a part of the light emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit is in the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Since the door frame top unit 570 is illuminated from the inside by the reflected light, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly vaguely emitted state.

On the other hand, when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated and light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, irradiation is performed. The first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame, the second surface 7120 of the movable body of the right ear frame, the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame, and the second surface 7220 of the movable body of the left ear frame are alternately illuminated by the emitted light. It will be in the state of being done. In addition, the entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a slightly vaguely emitted state.

In this way, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are positioned or rotated in a stopped state above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100. By occupying an area for the field of view when the player looks up and looking as if the volume of the housing has increased, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprise and fun.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B), the game board side is matched with the specific operation mode of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the operation mode of the frame movable body. Display mode of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 displayed on the effect display device 1600, for the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit). An example of the effect of combining the operation reception mode of the player, the light emitting mode of the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, the light emitting mode of the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, and the like will be shown.

FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B) show an operation mode of the frame movable body and a frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the acceptance state of the operation part, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the light irradiation mode to the frame movable body.

FIG. 164 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 164 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 165 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 165 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B), the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), and the display of the frame movable body simulated image. The mode, the timing at which the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the light emission effect state to the extinguishing state are the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the rotating state (second state) to another state, and the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state. The timing may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific examples of the effects in each effect pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B), the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 in the initial state (before timing t0). It is in a state (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state), and specifically, the right ear frame is movable as shown in FIGS. 163 (A), 163 (C), and 163 (D). The first surface 7110 of the body and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame are in a state of facing downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between the timing t0 and the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are at the timing t9. At the same time, the rotation is started, and the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotation state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is composed of an image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and an image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The frame movable body simulated image is the same as the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 according to the rotation of the actual right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. It continues to be displayed dynamically in the form of rotating in the direction. The rotation speed of the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is also rotated at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the frame movable body (speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame are in a rotational state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 163 (B) and 163 (E), the right ear The image imitating the frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 also have the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 1st surface 7110 and the left ear of the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100, respectively. The image imitating the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 possessed by the image imitating the frame movable body 7200 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 as a frame movable body simulated image in a manner facing the front.

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. To. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") may be displayed. You may. The operation valid period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that irradiate the frame movable body with light are turned off from the state in which the light emitting effect is performed.

FIGS. 164 (A) and 164 (B) show an effect mode when the operation to the operation unit is performed at the timing t14 after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is effective is started (timing t9). Shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light to the frame movable body is emitted. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 164 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is the right ear frame movable body first. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the surface 7110 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body on the front side (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). Become. At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 becomes a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 164 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is out of order, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear frame movable body 7100 is the right ear frame movable body. A state in which the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the second surface 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the left ear frame movable body 2nd surface 7220 on the front side (hereinafter, may be referred to as a fourth state). ). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emitting effect state. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, the player is shown that the special lottery result is lost.

In FIGS. 165 (A) and 165 (B), after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body. The mode of irradiating the light with respect to the light becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 165 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 holds the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. The left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the first surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body facing the front side (third state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 becomes a specific light emitting effect state different from the normal light emitting effect state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 165 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 is the second surface of the right ear frame movable body at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. The left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the 7120 on the front side and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is stopped vertically with the second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body on the front side (fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emitting effect state. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, the player is shown that the special lottery result is lost.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B), the fluctuating decorative pattern corresponds to the special lottery result at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 164 (A) and 165 (A), the special lottery result is a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the staging pattern shown in FIGS. 164 (B) and 165 (B) in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”” indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ) Stops and displays the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol stopped, the frame movable body is the right ear frame movable body while maintaining the light emission mode of either the specific light emission effect state or the normal light emission effect state. The first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face forward (third state), or the right ear frame movable body second surface 7120 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 face forward. The state is changed from the facing state (fourth state) to the state in which the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face downward (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light irradiation state from the specific light emission effect state to the normal light emission effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the frame movable body is in the rotating state (the frame movable body is in the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the fact that the second state) is reached. In addition, in response to the special lottery result (for example, in response to the occurrence of reach effect), the frame movable body appears in a position that has never existed before, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. .. In addition, when the player operates the operation unit, the frame movable body is stopped in a predetermined stop state (third state or fourth state), and the mode of irradiating the frame movable body with light changes. It is possible to give the player the feeling that the special lottery result has been decided by himself / herself.

FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (E) show modified examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E). 166 (A) and 166 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 166 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 166 (D) and 166 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 166 (A), 166 (C), and 166 (D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. FIGS. 166 (B) and 166 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotating (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have a right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and a left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240, respectively. Further, the thickness of the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E). Further, the right ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7140 and the left ear frame movable body rotating shaft 7240 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. Further, the upper half of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is located at a position higher than the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100.

In the state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state), the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 face each other. positioned. On the other hand, in the rotated state, the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame rotates clockwise when viewed in a plan view, and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame rotates counterclockwise when viewed in a plan view. For example, in FIGS. 166 (B) and 166 (E), the first surface 7110 of the movable body of the right ear frame is rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed in a plan view, and the first surface 7210 of the movable body of the left ear frame is viewed in a plan view. It can be said that it shows a state of being rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise. In addition, by adopting such a rotation mode, the right ear frame movable body first surface 7110 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed in a plan view, and the left ear frame movable body first surface 7210 is viewed in a plan view. Compared to the case of rotating it around, even if the player or the clerk of the game store carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the movable frame, the hand or face is dragged to the rear of the game machine and is injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of. In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (E) show a modification of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (E). 167 (A) and 167 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 167 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 167 (D) and 167 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 167 (A), 167 (C), and 167 (D) show a state (first state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position. FIGS. 167 (B) and 167 (E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570.

Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided so as to be orthogonal to the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, there is a portion where a part of the door frame top unit 570 projects upward so as to cover the upper, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. are doing. Further, the right ear frame movable body 1st surface 7110 of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7210 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each colored (specifically pink) transparent composite. It is made of resin. Further, the second surface 7120 of the right ear frame movable body of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body second surface 7220 of the left ear frame movable body 7200 are each formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (E). .. By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if the player or the clerk of the game store carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the frame movable body, the hand or face is behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as being dragged and injured. In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

168 (A) to 168 (E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 167 (A) to 167 (E). 168 (A) and 168 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 168 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 168 (D) and 168 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 168 (A), 168 (C), and 168 (D) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are in the standby position (first state). FIGS. 168 (B) and 168 (E) show a state (second state) in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated from the door frame top unit 570.

Also in this embodiment, a part of the door frame top unit 570 projects upward so as to cover the top, left, right, and back of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. .. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100 or the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are integrally configured, and after they move forward. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to start rotating. FIG. 168 (D) shows a state before starting the forward movement, and FIG. 168 (E) shows a state where the forward movement is completed.

Also in the present embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be in the same state as the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 166 (A) to 166 (E). .. By providing a part that covers the frame movable body in this way, even if the player or the clerk of the game store carelessly brings his or her hand or face close to the frame movable body, the hand or face is behind the game machine. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as being dragged and injured. By covering the front of the upwardly projecting portion with a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 can be visually recognized, but the player and the clerk of the game store cannot contact each other. It may be configured as follows.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B). In this case, the upwardly projecting portion and the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the upwardly projecting portion and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be moved forward from timing t5 to timing t7, or from timing t7 to timing t7. It may go to the timing t9. Further, an image imitating a portion protruding upward may be used as a frame movable body simulated image, and may be configured to be displayed at the timing when the portion protruding upward starts to move. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to FIGS. 154 to 156, an embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided on the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. A modified embodiment of this embodiment is shown with reference to FIG. 171. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in place of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

169 (A) and 169 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIGS. 169 (C) and 169 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIGS. 169 (E) and 169 (F) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 169 (A), 169 (C), and 169 (E) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state). Further, FIGS. 169 (B), 169 (D), and 169 (F) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. It shows a state in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (F), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment has the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in the front view. It includes a left ear medial frame movable body 7400 and a left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. Since the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure, the following description describes them. Only the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 may be described as representatives.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (F) and FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E) described later, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 may be referred to as a frame movable body. Further, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are referred to as the inner frame movable body, and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are referred to as the outer frame movable body. There is.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction when the stored state is viewed in a plane. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 has the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 facing upward in the retracted state (first state) and forward in the protruding state (second state), and the stored state (first state). Has a second surface 7320 of the right ear medial frame movable body facing rearward in the protruding state (second state). The first surface 7310 of the movable body of the inner frame of the right ear is formed of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. The surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface, right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320) of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 other than the first surface 7310 of the right ear inner frame movable body are white translucent synthetic resin. Is formed by. The left ear medial frame movable body 7400 also has the same structure as the right ear medial frame movable body 7300.

The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is a movable body having a vertically long rectangular shape in front view, and the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 facing forward and the right ear outer frame movable body second facing backward. It has a surface 7370. The right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7360, the right ear outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7370, and other surfaces (upper surface, left side surface, right side surface) of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are white and translucent. It is made of synthetic resin. The left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also has the same structure as the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

Inside the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, a rectangular right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 is provided. Further, inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, a square-shaped right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 is provided.

The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380 are specifically composed of a printed circuit board coated on both sides with a white protective film, and are formed from a door frame top unit 570. A light emitting diode capable of emitting light toward the player side in a protruding state (second state) is mounted on the surface thereof. The right ear inner frame movable body light emitting unit 7330 and the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380 can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 have a right ear medial frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 and a left ear medial frame movable body rotation by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by a peripheral control board 1510. By rotating the shaft 7440 as a rotation axis 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right, the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 169 (A), 169 (C), and 169 (E), respectively. Vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 169 (B), 169 (D), and 169 (F) from the state of being stored in the standby position (first state). It is possible to control to a protruding state (second state).

On the other hand, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved upward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, so that FIGS. 169 (A) and 169 (C), respectively. ), From the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIG. 169 (E) to FIGS. 169 (B), 169 (D), and 169 (F). As shown, it is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which it vertically protrudes upward from the upper surface (second state).

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 each project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. When the state (second state) is reached, as shown in FIG. 169 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located inside the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It becomes visible to the player with the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 positioned inside. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shaped to imitate the animal's ear, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570. By taking the stored state (first state) and the state of protruding vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal's ears move. It is possible.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are independently housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and the door frame top unit 570 under the control of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to take a state of protruding vertically upward from the upper surface of the door (second state).

Further, in the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 project vertically upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, respectively. From the state (first state) in which the door frame top unit 570 is independently housed under the control of the peripheral control board 1510 in the state (second state), from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to change the state to a state in which it projects vertically upward (second state).

In the present embodiment, the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white and translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169 (A), with the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 housed in the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting unit 7380, left. When the light emitting portion 7480 of the movable body of the outer ear frame is made to emit light in a predetermined manner, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the front surface of the door frame top unit 570 in a state where the light is dimly emitted.

On the other hand, when the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame is movable. When the body light emitting part 7330, the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380, the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7430, and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7480 are made to emit light in a predetermined manner, the right ear inner frame The player can visually recognize the movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 in a predetermined light emitting state. It is possible to make it.

In the state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 protrude from the door frame top unit 570 (second state). Because the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is located so as to cover the back of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is located so as to cover the back of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. , The light emitted forward from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7480 is the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420. Even if it faces toward, it is diffusely reflected backward on the second surface 7320 of the right ear inner frame movable body and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and finally, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and Since light is diffusely reflected forward by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the right ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7380 and the left ear outer frame movable body light emitting portion 7480. It is possible to increase.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move, and the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100 move. Since it is located above the upper surface, it is possible to give the player an unprecedented surprise and fun as compared with the case of moving the movable body in the game board.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. Display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the specific operation mode and the operation mode of the frame movable body, the operation button 410 (hereinafter, Operation reception mode of the player for the operation unit), right ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7330, right ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7380, left ear inner frame movable body light emitting part 7430, left ear outer frame movable An example of an effect in which the light emitting mode and the like in the body light emitting unit 7480 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a frame movable body light emitting unit) are combined is shown.

FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B) show an operation mode of the frame movable body and a frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, respectively. It is a time chart which showed the state, the acceptance state of the operation unit, the display state of the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body light emitting unit.

FIG. 170 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 170B shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 171 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 171 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B), the timing at which the inner frame movable body changes from the stored state (first state) to the protruding state (second state), the frame movable body. The display mode of the simulated image, the timing at which the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing at which the operation instruction display is started, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit is turned off from the light emitting effect state are the same. On the other hand, the presence / absence of operation of the outer frame movable body, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, and the timing at which the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the extinguished state to the light emitting effect state or the specific light emitting effect state may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific examples of the effects in each effect pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), it is in a state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state). In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t4) between timing t0 and timing t7, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 occur. The rotation starts in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the right (timing t7).

At the same time, the display of a part of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer side. It is composed of an image imitating a frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 according to the rotation of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The imitated image is dynamically displayed in a rotating manner. Of the frame movable body simulated images, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have not yet been displayed at this stage. An image imitating the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, in accordance with the timing (timing t9) when the actual right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 finish rising. The display of the rotating mode of the image imitating the above is finished, and then the display continues in the mode indicating the stopped state (timing t9 or later). The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 may be in a state where the rotation is completed at the timing t9 2 seconds after the start of the ascent at the timing t7 (hereinafter, the second state and the ascending state). There is).

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. To. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") may be displayed. You may. The operation valid period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, all the frame movable body light emitting units are turned off from the light emitting effect state.

FIGS. 170 (A) and 170 (B) show an effect mode when the operation to the operation unit is performed at the timing t14 after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is effective is started (timing t9). Shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 170 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit changes from the off state to the normal light emission effect. It becomes a specific light emission effect state different from the state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start ascending from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and the ascending operation is performed 2 seconds later (timing t16). It becomes the completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped mode on the game board side effect display device 1600, As a new frame movable body simulated image, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the ascending motion of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From the timing t14 to the timing t16, the display mode showing the stored state changes to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed. In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state in the state where the rotation operation is completed (second state), and the specific light emitting effect is produced from the extinguished state. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) is changed to the state in which the ascending operation is completed (second state). , An image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, so that a special lottery is given to the player. The result will be shown to be a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 170 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is out of order, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the frame movable body light emitting unit emits normal light from the off state. It will be in the production state. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the stored state (first state), and no operation is performed. Further, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is obtained for the player due to the fact that the frame movable body light emitting portion is in the normal light emitting effect state and that the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a loss.

In FIGS. 171 (A) and 171 (B), after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in a predetermined light emission effect state according to the special lottery result.

FIG. 171 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body light emitting unit emits a specific light emission different from the normal light emission effect state. It will be in a directing state. At the same time, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start ascending from the state (first state) housed in the door frame top unit 570, and the ascending operation is performed 2 seconds later (timing t16). It becomes the completed state (second state). At the same time, in addition to the image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are already displayed in the stopped mode on the game board side effect display device 1600, As a new frame movable body simulated image, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are started to be displayed. The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the same manner as the ascending motion of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From the timing t18 to the timing t20, the display mode showing the stored state changes to the display mode in which the ascending operation is completed.

In this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state in the state where the rotation operation is completed (second state), and the specific light emitting effect is produced from the extinguished state. The state in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are housed in the door frame top unit 570 (first state) is changed to the state in which the ascending operation is completed (second state). , An image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and an image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed in an ascending manner on the game board side effect display device 1600, so that a special lottery is given to the player. The result will be shown to be a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 171 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and the frame movable body light emitting unit is in the normal light emission effect state at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends. In this case, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are maintained in the stored state (first state), and no operation is performed. Further, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are not displayed. In this way, the special lottery result is obtained for the player due to the fact that the frame movable body light emitting portion is in the normal light emitting effect state and that the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 do not operate. It will be shown that it is a loss.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B), the fluctuating decorative pattern corresponds to the special lottery result at a predetermined timing (timing t24) after the end of the operation valid period. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 170 (A) and 171 (A), the special lottery result is a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the staging pattern shown in FIGS. 170 (B) and 171 (B) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”” indicating that the special lottery result is lost. ) Stops and displays the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t26) 2 seconds after the decorative symbol is stopped, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. The movement from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (first state) is started while maintaining the light emitting mode. At the same time, in accordance with the descending motion of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame among the frame movable body simulated images The image imitating the movable body 7450 is a descending display mode. At the timing (timing t28) when the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed, the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 The image simulating the image has a display mode in which the descent is completely completed in accordance with the descending motion of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the display is completed.

At the timing (timing t30) 2 seconds after the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the storage position is completed, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame The movable body 7400 starts moving from the ascending position (second state) to the storage position (first state) while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. At the same time, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 was imitated in the frame movable body simulated image according to the movement of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 rotating and descending. The image and the image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a manner of descending while rotating. At the timing (timing t32) when the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the storage position is completed, the image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 The image simulating the image has a display mode in which the descent is completely completed in accordance with the descending motion of the actual right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the display is completed.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light emitting state from the specific light emitting effect state to the normal light emitting effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

In this way, by displaying the frame movable body simulated image at the timing when the frame movable body starts moving, the light emitting mode changes according to the operation of the frame movable body and the operation of the operation unit. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks. In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that has never existed in the past in response to the special lottery result, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. Further, after the inner frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the moving state (second state), the outer frame movable body is in the standby state (first state) triggered by the operation of the player to the operation unit. By changing from the state) to the moving state (second state) or not, it is possible to give the player the feeling as if he / she has decided the special lottery result. Further, in a situation where the inner frame movable body is first moved to the moving state (second state) and the player can notice that the moving state has been reached, the player is requested to operate the operation unit. As a result, the player can operate the operation unit with a sense of expectation as to whether or not the outer frame movable body is in the moving state (second state) following the inner frame movable body.

172 (A) to 172 (E) show a modified example of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (F). 172 (A) and 172 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 172 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 172 (D) and 172 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 172 (A), 172 (C), and 172 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed. 172 (B) and 172 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It shows a state of protruding upward (second state).

In this embodiment, in addition to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are also controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. By moving upward by a drive mechanism (not shown), the door frame top unit 570 is housed in a standby position as shown in FIGS. 172 (A), 172 (C), and 172 (D), respectively. It is possible to control from the first state) to a state (second state) in which the door frame top unit 570 projects vertically upward from the upper surface as shown in FIGS. 172 (B) and 172 (E). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at the position. In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. As shown with reference to FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (E), even in the frame movable body having the structure according to the present embodiment, the upper part of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. In the first state, a part of the door frame may be configured to protrude from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570.

173 (A) to 173 (E) show modifications of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 172 (A) to 172 (E). 173 (A) and 173 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 173 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 173 (D) and 173 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 173 (A), 173 (C), and 173 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is housed. FIGS. 173 (B) and 173 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. It shows a state of protruding upward (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 do not move upward, but move downward by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. From the state (first state) stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 173 (A), 173 (C), and 173 (D), respectively, FIG. 173 (B). , As shown in FIG. 173 (E), it is possible to control the door frame top unit 570 so as to vertically project upward from the upper surface or downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). be.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the door frame is located at a position corresponding to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. An upper left ear opening 7010 is provided on the top unit. Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the door frame top unit lower right ear opening 7020 is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the door frame is located at a position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. The lower left ear opening 7030 of the top unit is provided.

The frame movable body having such a structure may be configured to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure. In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t7), and the result of the special lottery. When is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of the game store. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is lost, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, so that the player feels awkwardness or embarrassment due to the result of the special lottery being lost. Can be reduced. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (F), the animal ears are decoratively represented by the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body, but FIG. 173 In the embodiments described with reference to (A) to FIG. 173 (E), the animal's ears are represented by the upwardly projecting outer frame movable body, and the animal's eyes are represented by the inner frame movable body. There is.

174 (A) to 174 (E), FIGS. 175 (A) to 175 (E) show FIGS. 172 (A) to 172 (E) and FIGS. 173 (A) to 173 (E). An example of modification of the frame movable body described above is shown. 174 (A), 174 (B), 175 (A), and 175 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 174 (C) and 175 (C) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 174 (D), 174 (E), 175 (D), and 175 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. In the present embodiment, each frame movable body is in a state of protruding downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) and a state of protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state). It is possible to take.

174 (A), 174 (C), and 174 (D) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state). There is. 174 (B) and 174 (E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state), and the outer frame movable body is the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) protruding downward from the lower surface of the door. FIGS. 175 (A), 175 (C), and 175 (D) show a state in which the inner frame movable body protrudes downward from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state), and the outer frame movable body is shown. Indicates a state (second state) protruding upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. FIGS. 175 (B) and 175 (E) show a state in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body protrude upward from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570 (second state).

In this embodiment, the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are driven by a peripheral control board 1510 (not shown). It is possible to move and stop each position from the first state to the second state by the mechanism.

On the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7002 on the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The second right ear opening 7004 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the position corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the first left ear opening 7012 on the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7014 on the door frame top unit is provided at the position.

Further, on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, the first right ear opening 7022 below the door frame top unit is located at a position corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and is located at a position corresponding to the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The lower second right ear opening 7024 of the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the lower first left ear opening 7032 of the door frame top unit corresponds to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. A second left ear opening 7034 below the door frame top unit is provided at the position.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

In this case, in a state where it is not clear whether or not the result of the special lottery will be a big hit, the inner frame movable body starts moving upward from the state (first state) protruding from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570. (Timing t7), the movement is completed at timing t9. FIGS. 174 (B) and 174 (E) show a state in which the movement of the inner frame movable body is completed. When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body starts moving upward from the state where the outer frame movable body protrudes from the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 (first state) (timing t14, timing 18, etc.). .. FIGS. 175 (B) and 175 (E) show a state (second state) in which the movement of the outer frame movable body is completed. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the outer frame movable body does not move. With such a configuration, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the outer frame movable body can be visually recognized by another player or a clerk of the game store. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is lost, the inner frame movable body moves but the outer frame movable body does not move, so that the player feels awkwardness or embarrassment due to the result of the special lottery being lost. Can be reduced.

An example is shown in which the inner frame movable body protrudes upward to be in the second state and then the outer frame movable body protrudes upward to be in the second state, but the relationship between the two may be reversed. In this case, the outer frame movable body starts the operation of projecting upward at the timing t7. After that, in the state where the movement is completed (timing t9), the states shown in FIGS. 175 (A) and 175 (D) are obtained. Further, at timing t14 and timing 18, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start moving upward. Two effect patterns in which the order in which the frame movable bodies operate is reversed may be made feasible. Further, it is better to set the jackpot expectation of the effect pattern in which the outer frame movable body operates first than the effect pattern in which the inner frame movable body operates first. For example, when the outer frame movable body operates first. It may be configured to surely become a big hit.

176 (A) to 177 (B) show deformation examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 169 (A) to 169 (F). 176 (A) and 176 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 176 (C) and 176 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 177 (A) and 177 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 176 (A), 176 (C), and 177 (A) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state (first state) in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed. 176 (B), 176 (D), and 177 (B) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear. It shows a state (second state) in which the outer frame movable body 7450 protrudes upward.

In this embodiment, the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are all controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is configured to be movable upward by rotating 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right by a drive mechanism that does not.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B). In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B), the inner frame movable body is in the second state and then the outer frame movable body is in the second state. In the frame movable body described with reference to 176 (A) to FIG. 177 (B), the order of movement of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body is reversed, and the outer frame movable body is moved from timing t7 to timing t9. After changing from the first state to the second state, the inner frame movable body may be configured to start changing from the first state to the second state at timing t14 or timing t18. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

With reference to FIGS. 163 to 165, an embodiment in which a frame movable body is provided on the door frame top unit 570 and a frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown. A modified embodiment of this embodiment is shown with reference to FIG. 180. In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit 570 includes a right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in place of the right ear frame movable body 7100, and replaces the left ear frame movable body 7200. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided.

178 (A) and 178 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIG. 178 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. Further, FIGS. 178 (D) and 178 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIGS. 178 (A), 178 (C), and 178 (D) show the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left in the door frame top unit 570. It shows a state in which the movable ear outer frame 7450 is housed (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state). Further, FIGS. 178 (B) and 178 (E) show the door frame top unit 570 to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body. It shows a state in which the 7450 protrudes upward (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state).

As shown in FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E), the door frame top unit 570 has a door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7000, a door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7010, and a door frame top unit on the right side. It has a light emitting unit 7050 and a left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit. Since these specific structures and functions are the same as those with reference to FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E), the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E), the door frame top unit 570 in the present embodiment has the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the left side and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 on the right side in the front view. It includes a left ear medial frame movable body 7400 and a left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. The specific structure and operation mode of these are shown below. Since the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 have basically the same structure, the following description describes them. Only the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 may be described as representatives.

FIGS. 178 (A), 178 (C), and 178 (D) show a state in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is in the retracted state. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 in the retracted state has a vertically long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the right ear medial frame movable body 1st surface 7310 facing downward and the right ear medial frame movable body 1st facing upward. It has two sides 7320. The first surface 7310 of the movable body of the inner frame of the right ear is formed of a colored (specifically pink) transparent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the second surface 7320 of the movable body of the inner frame of the right ear is formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 in the retracted state has a vertically long rectangular shape in which the vicinity of the center is hollowed out so as to surround the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a plan view, and the right ear outer side facing downward. It has a frame movable body first surface 7360 and a right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 facing upward. The first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body is formed of a white translucent synthetic resin. On the other hand, the second surface 7370 of the right ear outer frame movable body is formed of a gray opaque synthetic resin. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350.

The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 has a right ear medial frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 on the right side (inside) in a plan view. Further, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 has a right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 on the left side (outside) in a plan view. Further, the right ear inner frame movable body rotation shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotation shaft 7390 are located on the same axis. Further, the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7390 are attached near the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570. The left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have the same structure as the right ear inner frame movable body and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are powered by a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the right ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7340 and the right ear outer frame movable body. By being transmitted to the rotation shaft 7390, it is possible to rotate about the left-right direction as an axis. Further, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also have a left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and a left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490 having the same structure, and are peripheral to each other. Power from a pulse motor (not shown) controlled by the control board 1510 is transmitted to the left ear inner frame movable body rotating shaft 7440 and the left ear outer frame movable body rotating shaft 7490 to rotate about the left-right direction. It is possible. The right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are independently controlled from the right by controlling a pulse motor (not shown). It is possible to rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at any angle, or stop at any angle.

As shown in FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E), in the door frame top unit 570, the right side of the door frame top unit that illuminates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. A light emitting unit 7050, and a left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that illuminates the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are provided. The specific structure of the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit is the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E), and is therefore omitted. do.

The right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are respectively shown in FIG. 178 by a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. (A), the state of being stored in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570 as shown in FIGS. 178 (C) and 178 (D), and the state of being stopped at an arbitrary position rotated by a predetermined angle. Is possible. FIGS. 178 (B) and 178 (E) are examples thereof, and include the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. From the state, rotate 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right, and in a vertical state, the right ear inner frame movable body 1st surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body 1st It shows a state in which the first surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body face the front and are stopped. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are shaped to imitate the animal's ear, and are attached to the door frame top unit 570. By taking the state of being stowed and the state of being vertical from the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570, it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the ears of the animal are moving.

Further, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continuously have a drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It is also possible to make the player visually recognize it in a rotated state by driving it. When rotating in this way, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are rotated at a speed of about one rotation per second. It is advisable to rotate it multiple times in the same direction. 178 (B) and 178 (E) show the rotating state of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It can also be said to indicate. The rotation direction of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be rotated a plurality of times clockwise when viewed from the right, or may be rotated a plurality of times counterclockwise when viewed from the right. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 can be alternately visually recognized by the player. Further, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370 are alternately visible to the player. Further, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 are alternately visible to the player. Further, the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 and the left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 are alternately visible to the player.

Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be stopped or rotated at a predetermined position, inside the door frame top unit. Right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable by the light emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit. It has been shown that each body 7450 can be in a predetermined decorative state, and specific examples are shown below.

As shown in FIGS. 178 (A), 178 (C), and 178 (D), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 has the right ear medial frame movable body first surface 7310 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350. The first surface of the right ear outer frame movable body 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit with the 7460 facing downward, the light reflected in the door frame top unit 570 causes the door. It is possible to make the entire frame top unit 570 dimly emit light. This is because the door frame top unit 570 is made of a white and translucent synthetic resin.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 178 (B) and 178 (E), the right ear medial frame movable body 1st surface 7310 of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral body of the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350. The first surface 7360 of the frame movable body, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are forward. When light is emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit while facing, the light causes the right ear inner frame of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300. Movable body 1st surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7360 of right ear outer frame movable body 7400, left ear inner frame movable body 1st surface 7410 of left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer side It is possible for the player to visually recognize the state in which the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body of the frame movable body 7450 is decorated. Also in this case, a part of the light emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit illuminates the door frame top unit 570 from the inside. , The entire door frame top unit 570 can be visually recognized by the player in a state where the light is slightly vaguely emitted.

On the other hand, with the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 rotated, the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door. When light is emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the frame top unit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, and the right ear outer frame movable by the irradiated light. Body 1st surface 7360 and right ear lateral frame movable body 2nd surface 7370, left ear medial frame movable body 1st surface 7410 and left ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7420, left ear lateral frame movable body 1st surface 7460 The second surface 7470 of the movable body of the outer frame of the left ear is illuminated alternately.

As described above, above the upper surface of the outer frame 2 and the door frame base unit 100, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body Since the 7450 is positioned and rotated in a stopped state, it is possible to give the player unprecedented surprise and fun compared to the case of moving the movable body in the game board. ..

Then, with reference to FIGS. 179 (A) to 180 (B), the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 ( Hereinafter, it may be referred to as a frame movable body). The display mode of the image, the operation reception mode of the player for the operation button 410 (hereinafter, may be referred to as an operation unit), the light emitting mode in the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, the light emitting mode in the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, and the like. An example of combined production is shown.

179 (A) to 180 (B) show the operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside, and the game board side effect display, respectively. The display state of the frame movable body simulated image which is an image imitating the frame movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the outside and provided on the inside of the device 1600. The operation mode of the frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) and the frame movable body (right ear inner side) provided inside displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. The display state of the frame movable body simulated image, which is an image imitating the frame movable body 7300, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the acceptance state of the operation unit, and the operation instruction display displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a time chart which showed the display state of, and the irradiation mode of light to the frame movable body.

FIG. 179 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 179 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 180A shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 180B shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 179 (A) to 180 (B), the frame movable body provided on the outside and the frame movable body provided on the inside are changed from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state). ), The display mode of the frame movable body simulated image, the timing when the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, the timing when the operation instruction display is started, and the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body are turned off from the light emission effect state. The timing of the state is the same. On the other hand, the timing at which the operation instruction display ends, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the second state (rotational state) to another state, the light irradiation mode for the frame movable body changes from the off state to the light emission effect state or the specific light emission effect state. The timing may differ depending on the effect pattern. Hereinafter, specific examples of the effects in each effect pattern will be shown with reference to FIGS. 179 (A) to 180 (B).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 179 (A) to 180 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are In the initial state (before timing t0), it is in a state of being housed in the door frame top unit 570 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a first state or a standby state). Specifically, FIG. 178 (A), FIG. As shown in 178 (C) and FIG. 178 (D), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer side. The first surface 7460 of the frame movable body is in a state of facing downward. In this state, when the reach effect state corresponding to the special lottery result occurs at a predetermined timing between timing t0 and timing t5 (for example, timing t1), the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the left ear outer frame movable. The first surface 7460 of the body starts rotating at the same time at timing t5, and the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotating state). The rotation direction is clockwise when viewed from the right, and the rotation speed is the speed of one rotation per second.

At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. At the same time, the display of the door frame top unit simulated image, which is an image imitating the door frame top unit 570, is also started. Specifically, the frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, an image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and a left ear outer side. It is composed of an image imitating a frame movable body 7450. The frame movable body simulated image is an image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 according to the rotation of the actual right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The resulting image continues to be dynamically displayed in a manner that rotates in the same direction. The rotation speed of the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 also rotates at the same speed as the actual rotation speed of the outer frame movable body (speed of one rotation per second). Is displayed. As a result, when the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are in a rotational state facing the front as shown in FIGS. 178 (B) and 178 (E), The image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 each have the right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7360 possessed by the image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. The game board side production display device as a frame movable body simulated image in which the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7460 of the imitated image and the image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 faces the front. Displayed at 1600.

After the rotational state (second state) of the outer frame movable body is continued from timing t4 to timing t9, at timing t9, the inner frame movable body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400). Starts rotation at the same time, and the rotation is continued (hereinafter, may be referred to as a second state or a rotation state). Since the rotation mode of the inner frame movable body and the display mode of the image imitating the inner frame movable body are the same as those of the outer frame movable body, the description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, at the timing t9, the operation reception for the operation unit becomes effective, and the display of the image instructing the game board side effect display device 1600 to operate the operation unit (hereinafter, may be referred to as the operation instruction display) is started. To. As the operation instruction display, for example, an image imitating the appearance of the operation button 410 may be displayed, or a character string instructing to operate the operation unit (for example, a character string "push !!") may be displayed. You may. The operation valid period continues until the operation is accepted by the operation unit (timing t14 in the example shown below) or until a predetermined time elapses (timing t18). Further, at the timing t9, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit that irradiate the frame movable body with light are turned off from the state in which the light emitting effect is performed.

FIGS. 179 (A) and 179 (B) show an effect mode when the operation unit is operated at the timing t14 after the period during which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9). Shows. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t14, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the light to the frame movable body is emitted. The irradiation mode becomes a predetermined light emission effect state corresponding to the special lottery result.

FIG. 179 (A) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear medial frame movable body 7400, left ear lateral frame movable body 7450, right ear medial frame movable body first surface 7310, right ear lateral frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear medial frame movable body first, respectively. The surface 7410 and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body are placed on the front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). At the same time, the specific light emission effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emission effect state. It becomes a state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 179 (B) is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and when the operation unit is operated (timing t14), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame The movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, and the left ear inner frame movable body first. The second surface 7420 and the second surface 7470 of the left ear outer frame movable body are placed on the front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, may be referred to as the fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emission effect state. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, the player is shown that the special lottery result is lost.

In FIGS. 180 (A) and 180 (B), after the period in which the operation to the operation unit is valid is started (timing t9), the player does not operate the operation unit during the operation valid period. An effect mode is shown when the operation valid period ends at the timing t18 after a predetermined predetermined time has elapsed. In these effect patterns, the operation instruction display ends at the timing t18, the frame movable body that has been rotating until then automatically stops at a predetermined rotation angle corresponding to the special lottery result, and the frame movable body. The mode of irradiating the light with respect to the light becomes a predetermined light emitting effect state corresponding to the result of the special lottery.

FIG. 180A is an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit, and at the timing (timing t18) when the operation valid period ends, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left. The inner ear frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, respectively. The left ear outer frame movable body is in a state of being stopped vertically with the first surface 7460 on the front side (hereinafter, may be referred to as a third state). At the same time, the specific light emission effect in which the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is different from the normal light emission effect state. It becomes a state. In this way, when the light irradiation mode is set to the specific light emission effect state, it is shown to the player that the special lottery result is a big hit.

On the other hand, FIG. 180B shows an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost, and at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. , Left ear medial frame movable body 7400, left ear lateral frame movable body 7450, right ear medial frame movable body second surface 7320, right ear lateral frame movable body second surface 7370, left ear medial frame movable body second surface 7420, respectively. , The left ear outer frame movable body second surface 7470 is set to the front side and stopped vertically (hereinafter, may be referred to as a fourth state). At the same time, the light irradiation mode for the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 changes from the extinguished state to the normal light emission effect state. As described above, when the light irradiation mode is changed to the normal light emission effect state, the player is shown that the special lottery result is lost.

In this way, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, each frame movable body stops in the third state to indicate that it is a big hit, and when the result of the special lottery is a loss, each The frame movable body stops in the fourth state, and it is shown that the frame is lost.

In each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 179 (A) to 180 (B), the fluctuating decorative pattern corresponds to the special lottery result at a predetermined timing (timing t20) after the end of the operation valid period. Is stopped and displayed. For example, in the case of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 179 (A) and 180 (A), the special lottery result is a doublet mode (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) indicating that the result is a big hit. In the case of the staging pattern shown in FIGS. 179 (B) and 180 (B) in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the reach loss mode (for example, “7”, “6”, “7”” indicating that the special lottery result is a loss. ) Stops and displays the decorative design.

At the timing (timing t24) when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol stopped, the frame movable body can move the inner frame of the right ear while maintaining the light emitting mode of either the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. Body first surface 7310, right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 facing forward (third state) or Right ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7320, right ear lateral frame movable body 2nd surface 7370, left ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7420, left ear lateral frame movable body 2nd surface 7470 facing forward ( From the fourth state), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 are downward. The state is changed to the state facing (first state). At the same time, the display of the frame movable body simulated image ends.

When the special lottery result is a big hit, it is preferable to configure the frame movable body to change the light irradiation state from the specific light emission effect state to the normal light emission effect state at a predetermined timing during the big hit. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the normal light emitting effect state is continued, and the next decorative symbol change is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed at the timing when the frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the frame movable body is in the rotating state (the frame movable body is in the rotating state (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the fact that the second state) is reached. In addition, the frame movable body appears at a position that has never existed in the past in response to the special lottery result, which makes it possible for the player to feel great surprise and fun. Further, after the outer frame movable body changes from the standby state (first state) to the rotating state (second state), the inner frame movable body rotates from the standby state (first state) with the start of the operation valid period. The third state or the third state indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big hit for the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body after changing to the state (second state) and further triggered by the operation of the operation unit by the player. By changing to any of the fourth states indicating that the result of the special lottery is lost, it is possible to give the player the feeling as if he / she has decided the result of the special lottery.

181 (A) to 181 (E) show deformation examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E). 181 (A) and 181 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 181 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 18 (D) and 181 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 181 (A), 181 (C), and 181 (D) show the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It shows the state in the standby position (first state). 18 (B) and 181 (E) show a state in which the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 are rotated (FIGS. 181 (B) and FIG. The second state) is shown.

In this embodiment, the vertical thickness of the door frame top unit 570 is smaller than that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E), and the right ear inner frame is movable. The body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are configured to be visible from below.

Near the front end of the door frame top unit, a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit can irradiate light toward the rear. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are located rearward, can be set to a predetermined light emitting effect state. be.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 179 (A) to 180 (B). If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, the left ear outer frame. As shown in FIGS. 181 (B) and 181 (E), the first surface 7460 of the movable body may be in a stopped state (third state) facing the front. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420, and the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the front and is stopped (fourth state). Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

182 (A) to 183 (B) show a modification of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E). 182 (A) and 182 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 182 (C) and 182 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 183 (A) and 183 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 182 (A), 182 (C), and 183 (A) show the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It shows the state in the standby position (first state). 182 (B), 182 (D), and 183 (B) show the right ear medial frame movable body 7300, the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, and the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. It shows a rotating state (second state).

In this embodiment, the central portion of the door frame top unit 570 is hollowed out in the left-right direction, and can be visually recognized in a U shape when viewed from the right side. At the bottom of the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left-right direction, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are placed in the upper part of the door frame top unit 570 that is hollowed out in the left-right direction. Is provided with a right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively.

The right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 are inside the right ear in the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. 182 (A), 182 (C), and 183 (A). The first surface 7310 of the frame movable body and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410 are located so as to face each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have a shape in which the bottomed cylindrical shape in which a part of the side surface of the cylindrical shape is cut is inverted in the vertical direction. In the standby state (first state) as shown in FIGS. 182 (A), 182 (C), and 183 (A), in front of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400. , Right ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7360, left ear outer frame movable body 1st surface 7460 are located facing forward, and right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are located. It is configured to be invisible when viewed from the front. On the other hand, when the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are visually recognized from diagonally below in the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame located inside are visually recognized. It is possible to visually recognize the lower parts of the movable body 7400.

At the lower part of the door frame top unit 570, a right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350. Further, a left light emitting portion 7052 in the door frame top unit is provided corresponding to the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. The right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit can irradiate light diagonally forward and upward. As a result, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, which are located diagonally above the front, can be set to the predetermined light emitting effect state. It is possible.

In the frame movable body having such a structure, the effect pattern described above may be executed with reference to FIGS. 179 (A) to 180 (B). If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, as shown in FIGS. 182 (B), 182 (D), and 183 (B), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310 and the left ear inner frame. It is preferable that the first surface 7410 of the movable body faces the front and is stopped (third state). On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, it is preferable to set the right ear inner frame movable body second surface 7320 and the left ear inner frame movable body second surface 7420 to face the front and stop (fourth state). .. On the other hand, regarding the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, regardless of whether the special lottery result is a big hit or a loss, the right ear outer frame movable body second surface 7370, the left ear outer frame. It is preferable that the second surface 7470 of the movable body faces the player side. Further, a modified example of the time chart described later may be applied to a frame movable body having such a structure.

184 (A) to 184 (D) and FIGS. 185 (A) to 185 (B) show deformation examples of the frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 154 (A) to 154 (E). There is. 184 (A) and 184 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. 184 (C) and 184 (D) are plan views of the pachinko machine 1. 185 (A) and 185 (B) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 184 (A), 184 (C), and 185 (A) show a state (first state) in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are housed in the standby position. 184 (B), 184 (D), and 185 (B) show a state (second state) in which a plurality of frame movable bodies have moved to a moving position.

In the embodiment shown below, the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is provided in place of the door frame top unit 570, and the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600, the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, and the curtain plate bottom unit are provided. It is equipped with a right foot movable body 7700 and a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750.

The door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 has a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating a box composed of two members with a lid, and its right side surface and left side surface constitute an outer frame 2 and a door frame 3, respectively. It is provided so as to overlap the right side surface and the left side surface of the door frame base unit 100 in front view. Further, the upper surface of the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 is always located above the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit face decoration unit 7500 is a lid in a box composed of two members with a lid and a door frame top unit on-face movable body 7510, which is a lid box to be placed on top of the box composed of two members with a lid. It is composed of a door frame top unit and a lower face 7520, which is a body box to be covered with.

The door frame top unit face movable body 7510 has a lid box shape without a side surface on the back side, is provided so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520, and is controlled by a peripheral control board 1510. It is installed so that it can be moved up and down by a drive mechanism that does not. In addition, the side surface of the door frame top unit on the front side of the movable body 7510 has a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is decorated with the right eye of the door frame top unit in a shape that imitates the eyes of an animal robot. A portion 7512 and a door frame top unit left eye decoration portion 7514 are provided. The door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is provided with a right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 that imitate animal ears, similarly to the door frame top unit 570. Also in this embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are configured to be movable in the vertical direction.

The door frame top unit lower face 7520 has a box-like shape with a recess that can accommodate the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and has a door frame similar to the door frame top unit 570. It is provided in a state of being fixed to the upper part of 3. Further, the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 includes a door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 and a door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 near the center in the left-right direction on the front side surface portion of the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The door frame top unit, the movable nose under the face 7522, has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, but has a box shape with an open lower surface as if the sliding door of the chest of drawers was turned upside down. The door frame top unit, the movable nose under the face 7522, is movable in the front-rear direction. The door frame top unit, the lower nose movable body 7522, is a frame movable body that imitates the snout of an animal robot.

The door frame top unit facial movable body 7522 is provided so as to be covered by a side surface portion on the front side of the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510. Therefore, in the state of being covered by the side surface portion on the front side of the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (first state), the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is invisible. Further, the door frame top unit, the movable nose under the face 7522, is in a state where it cannot move forward.

The door frame top unit face movable body 7510 moves upward to be in the second state, so that the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520. The front surface becomes visible from the front, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 becomes movable forward.

The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front side of the bottom surface portion of the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520. The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 has a shape like a cylinder cut out in a fan shape, and is fan-shaped when viewed from the right side as shown in FIGS. 185 (A) and 185 (B). The side forming the central angle is provided so as to be located on the right side. The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 can rotate within a predetermined angle range with the side forming the central angle of the fan shape as the rotation axis. Further, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 does not have a curved surface located on the front side. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 184 (B) and 185 (B), when the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is rotated counterclockwise by about 35 degrees when viewed from the right side, The inside is configured to be visible.

The door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 changes from a state provided so as to be embedded in the door frame top unit lower face 7520 (first state) to a state of moving forward (second state). The door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is rotated about 35 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (first state) from the state where the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is housed in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state). By changing to (2 states), it is possible to decoratively express the state in which the animal robot imitates the state in which the mouth is open.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 and the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 are provided below the door frame top unit face decoration portion 7500 so as to project toward the front from the fronts of the left and right ends of the door frame base unit 100, respectively. ing.

The door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 is composed of a door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, a door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, and a door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630.

The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 has a box-shaped shape with a gap inside, and inside the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 can be moved. Is. The thickness of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 is about several mm, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 that move inside can be visually recognized.

The door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is formed in a pipe shape by a flexible synthetic resin. The length of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is about 50 cm, and by rotating a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) provided in the door frame top unit face lower portion 7520 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. It can be rolled up and down. FIGS. 184 (A) and 185 (A) show a state (first state) in which the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown).

The door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 is formed of two members in the shape of the alphabet L when viewed from the side and a cylindrical member that imitates the axis that locks them, and imitates a robot manipulator. It has a shape. Further, an end portion of the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is attached to this cylindrical member, and the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) described above. In the first state), the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located at the upper part in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610.

By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) in the direction opposite to the winding direction, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 is lowered in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, whereby the door frame side unit right arm is lowered. The lower arm portion 7630 is positioned at the lower part of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 due to its own weight. FIG. 184 (B) shows a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 is located at the lower portion in the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610. In the second state, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620, which was previously invisible, becomes visible.

The door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 has a symmetrical structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600. Specifically, the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 has the door frame side unit right arm upper arm. The door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, and has the same structure and function as the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630. Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650 will be omitted.

Further, regarding the door frame side unit left arm portion 7650, the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is wound up by a reel-shaped drive mechanism (not shown) as in the door frame side unit right arm portion 7600 (first state). By rotating the reel-shaped drive mechanism in the direction opposite to the winding direction, it is possible to take a state of being located at the lower part (second state). For example, FIGS. 184 (B) and 185 (B) show a state (second state) in which the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 is located at the lower part. In the second state, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670, which was previously invisible, becomes visible.

The entire or part of the outside (left side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 and the entire or part of the outside (right side when viewed from the front) of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 may be formed of opaque synthetic resin. , It may be configured to be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and then to be attached with a colored opaque seal or the like. The entire inside of the door frame side unit right arm case portion 7610 (right side when viewed from the front) and the entire inside of the door frame side unit left arm case portion 7660 (left side when viewed from the front) may be formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

With such a configuration, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620, the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670, and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 have moved. It becomes difficult for the left and right players to visually recognize the door, and it is possible for only the player who is playing the game with the pachinko machine 1 to enjoy the operation without the other players knowing that the door has been operated. In addition, as will be described later, when these frame movable bodies are operated for the purpose of suggesting a predetermined degree of expectation, even if the special lottery result is lost after these frame movable bodies are operated, other It becomes difficult for the player to see it, and it becomes difficult for other players to feel embarrassed.

The curtain plate member 50 has a curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 on the left side when viewed from the front, and a curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 on the right side when viewed from the front. The curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are the plate unit 320 in the standby position (first state) as shown in FIGS. 184 (A) and 185 (A). Each is located below the handle unit 300.

The curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 is composed of a curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 and a curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720. The shape of the right foot sneak portion 7710 of the curtain plate bottom unit is cylindrical. Further, the right foot tip portion 7720 of the curtain plate bottom unit has a rectangular parallelepiped shape imitating the shape of the foot, and the portion corresponding to the sole of the foot is provided with two circular recesses. The curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 is attached to the front surface of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneaker portion 7710. Therefore, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot tip portion 7720 operate integrally.

A drive mechanism (not shown) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 is provided in the lower part of the outer frame 2, and the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 can be moved in the front-rear direction. Further, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 can be rotated by a predetermined angle about the longitudinal direction of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 is moved forward by a predetermined distance from the state (first state) in the standby position shown in FIGS. 184 (A) and 185 (A), and then viewed from the front. It may be configured to operate in a stopped state (second state) by rotating it 90 degrees clockwise. FIGS. 184 (B) and 185 (B) show the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710 in the stopped state (second state) in this way.

The curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 has a symmetrical structure and function as the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. Specifically, the curtain plate bottom unit left foot sneak portion 7760 has the same structure and function as the curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak portion 7710, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip portion 7770 has the curtain plate bottom unit right foot. It has the same structure and function as the front part 7720. Therefore, detailed description of each member constituting the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 will be omitted.

By providing the frame movable body below the game machine in this way, the player does not visually recognize that the frame movable body has moved as in the conventional case, but rather on a part of the body such as the player's arm. When the frame movable body comes into contact with the frame movable body, it becomes possible to give the player an unprecedented perceptual experience such that the player recognizes that the frame movable body has moved.

With reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, an embodiment in which a plurality of frame movable bodies are provided in the pachinko machine 1 and they operate has been shown. Specifically, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, and the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524. , Door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620, door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630, door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670, door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680, curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, curtain plate From the state (first state) in which the bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 is in the standby position shown in FIGS. 184 (A), 184 (C), and 185 (A) as the frame movable body, respectively, FIG. 184 (B). ), The state changes to the state (second state) at the moving position shown in FIGS. 184 (D) and 185 (B). Further, each frame movable body can take a first state and a second state by controlling a drive means (not shown) provided corresponding to each frame movable body by the peripheral control board 1510. ..

Further, each frame movable body may be provided with light emitting means controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 so that the normal light emitting effect state and the specific light emitting effect state as described above can be obtained.

Each such frame movable body is used as an effect pattern shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B), an effect pattern shown in FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B), or an effect obtained by modifying these effect patterns. It may be applied to a pattern and configured to operate or emit light.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are provided on the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510. The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear in the state of being stored in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 (first state) after the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is placed in the second state located above. The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be in a state of protruding upward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time chart shown in FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B) and the time chart of a modified example thereof. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear correspond to the operation to the operation unit. The frame movable body 7200 may be configured to be in the first state to the second state.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is placed in the second state located above, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body is stored in the door frame top unit face lower part 7520 (first state). The 7522 may be configured to protrude forward (second state). Further, such an operation may be applied to the time chart shown in FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B) and the time chart of a modified example thereof. Specifically, in each time chart, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 is first changed from the first state to the second state, and the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body corresponds to the operation to the operation unit. The 7522 may be configured to go from the first state to the second state.

Further, after the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is configured to be changed from the first state to the second state. May be good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time chart shown in FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B) and the time chart of a modified example thereof.

Alternatively, after the door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 is changed from the first state to the second state, the door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522 is configured to be changed from the first state to the second state. May be good. Further, such an operation may be applied to the time chart shown in FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B) and the time chart of a modified example thereof.

FIGS. 186 (A) to 186 (K) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image applicable to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). It is a thing. It should be noted that FIG. 186 (A) collectively represents each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B).

FIG. 186 (B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t4, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed at the timing t6. After that, at the timing t7, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is started.

By configuring such an operation / display pattern as an effect so as to be executable, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is a notice that the frame movable body operates. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates, and the player who sees such a frame movable body simulated image can see the frame. The movement of the movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the movement. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures a finger or the like. In addition, it can be shown that a player who has placed a lightweight baggage or the like on the frame movable body moves them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage is dropped and the player is injured, or a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the frame movable body.

FIG. 186 (C) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the ascending motion of the ear frame movable body is completed at the timing t9, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t10, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t12. Is completed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the movement of the frame movable body to the ascending position (moving position). Therefore, if the player does not notice the movement of the frame movable body, the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the ascending position is suddenly visually recognized by such a player, which is a big surprise. It becomes possible to give to a person. Further, since the frame movable body simulated image is displayed after moving to the ascending position, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the moved frame movable body. In addition, the player can know how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 186 (D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t6, then the ascending operation of the frame movable body is started at the timing t7, and the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t8. Is completed, and the ascending operation of the frame movable body is completed at the timing t9.

With such a configuration, the display of the frame movable body simulated image is a notice that the frame movable body moves. It is possible to make the player recognize how the frame movable body operates. The movement of the frame movable body can be visually recognized from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misses the movement of the frame movable body. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches a movable frame body injures a finger or the like.

FIG. 186 (E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the ascending motion of the frame movable body is started at the timing t7, then the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t8, and the ascending motion of the frame movable body is completed at the timing t9. At the timing t10, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is completed.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can start moving unknowingly and surprise the player. In addition, it is possible to notify the player that the frame movable body has started to move.

FIG. 186 (F) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t3 to timing t7 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 186 (G) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 (4 seconds). On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, the player can recognize in detail how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 186 (H) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the ascending motion of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds), the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed from timing t9 to timing t13 (4 seconds). Will be. The frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 at half the speed of the actual movement of the frame movable body.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize in detail how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 186 (I) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed again from the timing t7 to the timing t9. Will be done. On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The number of times the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more, and for example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed at timings t3 to t5.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body moves.

FIG. 186 (J) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, after the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 (2 seconds), the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed again from the timing t9 to the timing t11. Will be done. On the other hand, the ascending operation of the frame movable body is performed from timing t7 to timing t9 (2 seconds). The number of times the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically displayed may be three or more, and for example, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed at timings t11 to t13.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to recognize how the frame movable body has moved.

FIG. 186 (K) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the actual timing t4 to timing t5, timing t5 to timing t6, and timing t6 to timing t7, which are the timings before the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, a total of three times. The frame movable body simulated image is changed from the display mode imitating the first state to the display mode imitating the second state at twice the speed of the frame movable body. It should be noted that such a display may be performed twice in total from timing t5 to timing t6 and from timing t6 to timing t7, or may be performed only once from timing t6 to timing t7.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize how the frame movable body moves in a short time. In addition, since the simulated image of the frame movable body is displayed quickly, the eyes become accustomed to seeing the movement of the actual frame movable body, and the player can fully enjoy the movement mode of the actual frame movable body. Is possible. In addition, it is possible to make the player more aware of the operation mode by performing the display a plurality of times.

Each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 186 (A) to 186 (K) may be configured to be executed in response to a predetermined situation in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the degree of expectation for the big hit and the frequency of its appearance may be different for each effect pattern. For example, when a predetermined reach effect occurs, one of the effect patterns described in FIGS. 186 (A) to 186 (K) is selected and executed. good. Further, the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 186 (A) has the highest frequency of appearance, and the frequency of appearance gradually decreases as the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 186 (B) to 186 (K) is used. The effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 186 (A) has the lowest expectation for a jackpot, and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 186 (B) to 186 (K) gradually has an expectation for a jackpot. May be configured so that the effect pattern to be executed is selected based on the jackpot lottery result. Further, each of the following modifications may be similarly configured to be executed with a predetermined degree of expectation and frequency of appearance.

With such a configuration, when an effect pattern for a frame movable body different from the normal appears, the degree of expectation for the jackpot from the player is not higher than the effect pattern of the normal frame movable body. It is possible to make you feel like.

It should be noted that some of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 186 (A) to 186 (K) may be combined and executed as an effect. In this case, it is preferable to combine the game board side effect display device 1600 so that a plurality of frame movable body simulated images are not displayed at the same time. For example, by executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 186 (K) from timing t4 to timing t7 and executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 186 (J) from timing t7 to timing t11, the effects of both effect patterns are achieved. It becomes possible to execute an effect pattern that can play both of the above.

187 (A) to 187 (E) are modified examples of the light emitting mode of the light emitting portion of the frame movable body which can be applied to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). It is shown. It should be noted that FIG. 187 (A) collectively represents each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B).

FIG. 187 (B) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. Further, in FIG. 187 (C), the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off at a timing (timing t5) before the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts to move from the standby position to the moving position. Shows the production pattern.

In this way, at the timing before the frame movable body is in the second state, the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off, and that state is until the operation to the operation unit is performed or until the end of the operation valid period. By maintaining the frame movable body, it becomes difficult for the player to notice that the frame movable body is moving from the standby position to the moving position. Then, in such a situation, when the player operates the operation unit, the frame movable body that has completed the movement to the moving position suddenly emits light from the off state (special light emission effect state or light emission effect). Since it becomes a state), it is possible to give a big surprise to the player.

FIG. 187 (D) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is turned off at the timing t9, but the light emission is suppressed. The state in which the light emission is suppressed may be, for example, light emission so that the blinking cycle is longer or the light amount is reduced as compared with the light emission effect state.

In this way, the same effect as in the case of turning off the light can be obtained by setting the state in which the light emission is suppressed instead of turning off the light.

FIG. 187 (E) shows an effect pattern in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is put into a specific light emission effect state instead of being turned off at the timing t9. This effect pattern may be selected only when the special lottery result is a big hit. An example is shown in which the light emitting portion of the frame movable body is set to the specific light emitting effect state at the timing t9 when the frame movable body is in the second state, but the timing t7 when the frame movable body starts the operation and the frame movable are shown. At the timing t5, which is the timing before the body starts the operation, the light emitting portion of the frame movable body may be set to the specific light emitting effect state.

By suddenly changing the state of the light emitting portion of the frame movable body to the specific light emitting effect state instead of turning off the light, the player can have a great expectation for the big hit.

188 (A) to 188 (E) show modified examples of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image applicable to the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B). It is a thing. It should be noted that FIG. 188 (A) collectively represents each effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 164 (A) to 165 (B).

FIG. 188 (B) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t7, and then at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) are started. Starts rotation and becomes a rotating state (second state).

As described above, the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move at the same speed as the rotation speed of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200. Is displayed. Therefore, after the display that the image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated twice between the timing t7 and the timing t9 is executed, the right ear frame movable body 7100 is executed. And the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually starts to rotate. The timing of starting the display of the frame movable body simulated image may be set to an earlier timing. For example, if the display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t5, the display imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are rotated four times. Later, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 actually start to rotate.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to be displayed before the frame movable body starts to operate, the display of the frame movable body simulated image serves as a notice that the frame movable body operates. .. In addition, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image allows the player to recognize how the frame movable body operates. Then, the player who sees such a frame movable body simulated image can visually recognize the movement of the frame movable body from the start of the movement. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the movement of the frame movable body. In addition, by repeatedly displaying the frame movable body simulated image before the frame movable body starts to move, it is possible for the player to surely recognize how the frame movable body moves. It becomes. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body injures a finger or the like. In addition, it can be shown that a player who has placed a lightweight baggage or the like on the frame movable body moves them to another position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the luggage is dropped and the player is injured, or a load is applied to the drive unit that moves the frame movable body.

FIG. 188 is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start to rotate and enter the rotating state (second state), and then the timing. At t11, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started.

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body to display a simulated image after the frame movable body starts to move, the player notices that the frame movable body has changed to the rotating state (second state). It is possible to make it difficult to get rid of. Therefore, if the player does not notice the change in the state of the frame movable body, the rotated frame movable body is suddenly visually recognized by the player, which can give the player a great surprise. It becomes.

FIG. 188 (D) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t7. From timing t7 to timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a high speed (twice per second). After that, at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start to rotate and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to rotate and display at a speed faster (twice the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts to move, the frame movable body It becomes possible to get used to the operation mode when the rotation state (second state) is changed.

FIG. 188 (E) is a time chart showing the operation patterns of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the display state of the frame movable body simulated image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. be. In this effect pattern, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started at the timing t5. From timing t5 to timing t9, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is performed at a low speed (half a rotation per second). After that, at the timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the standby position (first state) start to rotate and enter the rotating state (second state).

In this way, by configuring the frame movable body simulated image to rotate and display at a slower speed (half the speed) than the actual frame movable body before the frame movable body starts to move, the frame is movable. It is possible to let the player who feels that the motion mode is too fast when the body changes to the rotational state (second state) know the motion mode of the frame movable body.

A modified example of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image shown in FIGS. 186 (B) to 186 (E), an embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 169 to 171 and a modified example of those embodiments. It may be configured to be feasible as an effect pattern by appropriately applying it to the inner frame movable body in the above.

A modified example of the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image shown in FIGS. 188 (B) to 188 (E), an embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 178 to 180 and the like, and a modified example of those embodiments. It may be applied to either one of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the above, or may be applied to both of them in the same manner and configured to be feasible as an effect pattern.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 170 and 171 and FIGS. 179 and 180, the first frame movable body was changed from the first state to the second state, and then the state was maintained for a certain period of time. Later, the second frame movable body is configured to change from the first state to the second state. Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 170 and 171 it is configured to take a predetermined time when changing the first frame movable body from the first state to the second state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the mode in which the frame movable body changes the state.

In the above-mentioned production example with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, FIGS. 164 and 165, 170 and 171, and 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as the timing, the frame movable body simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same mode as the actual frame movable body change mode. As described above with reference to C), FIG. 186 (E), FIG. 186 (H), and FIG. 188 (C), the actual frame is at a timing before the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image is started. The movable body may be configured to start an operation of changing from the first state to the second state or to change from the first state to the second state.

With such a configuration, it is easy for the player who sees the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image to find the moving frame movable body without noticing that the actual frame movable body is moving. It becomes possible to do.

In the above-mentioned example with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, 170 and 171 and 179 and 180, respectively, the result of the special lottery is obtained by the player's operation on the operation unit during the operation valid period. Depending on the situation, the state of the frame movable body may change from the first state to the second state, or the state of the frame movable body may change from the second state to either the third state or the fourth state. ..

With such a configuration, the player determines the position of the operation unit and the position of the frame movable body whose state may change, and then operates with the line of sight to the frame movable body. It is possible to operate the operation unit at a timing desired by the player without looking at the unit. As a result, it is possible to reliably visually recognize whether or not the state of the frame movable body changes, and if the state of the frame movable body changes, what kind of state it changes.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, 170 and 171 and 179 and 180, respectively, an image instructing an operation to the operation unit is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Although it is configured, an effect pattern for displaying a special operation instruction image that can be displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be configured to be feasible in addition to the above example. For example, as the operation instruction image, the image of the frame movable body may be configured to be simultaneously displayed in a manner included in the image of the operation unit.

With such a configuration, when the player visually recognizes the special operation instruction image, the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and it can be recognized that the frame movable body always operates when the operation unit is operated. This makes it possible to operate the operation unit while keeping the line of sight on the frame movable body, and it is possible to fully enjoy the operation of the frame movable body.

In the above-mentioned examples with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, FIGS. 164 and 165, 170 and 171, and 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body includes a light emitting portion or is relative to the frame movable body. A light emitting part capable of irradiating light is provided separately from the frame movable body, and after the frame movable body changes its state, it is turned off at the same timing as the operation effective period starts, and the operation unit is operated. It is configured to be in a light emitting effect state according to a predetermined light emitting mode according to the timing and the end of the operation valid period, but as described with reference to FIGS. 187 (D) and 187 (E), the operation valid period. It is not always necessary to turn off the light, and it may be configured to be in a light emitting state that can be distinguished from the normal light emitting state. For example, by setting only the outer frame movable body to the extinguishing state and setting the inner frame movable body to the specific light emitting effect state, or by setting the right frame movable body to the extinguishing state and setting the left frame movable body to the specific light emitting effect state, a big hit. May be configured to notify that the occurrence of. Alternatively, all the frame movable bodies are turned off until the operation valid period, and the inner frame movable body is set to the light emitting effect state according to the occurrence of the operation valid period to notify that the operation valid period has occurred, and then the operation unit. Depending on the operation to or the end of the operation valid period, the light emitting effect state of all the frame-side movable bodies may be configured to be the light emitting effect state according to the special lottery result.

As described above, the light emitting state of the frame movable body changes to a different state according to the change of the state of the frame movable body, so that it becomes easy to grasp that the frame movable body has operated by the change of the light emitting mode. In addition, if at least a part of the frame movable body is illuminated, the player is less likely to get injured when the frame movable body moves, as compared with the case where the frame movable body is turned off. be

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, FIGS. 164 and 165, 170 and 171, and 179 and 180, respectively, the timing at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. At the same timing as, the frame movable body simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in the same mode as the actual frame movable body change mode, but FIG. 186 (B). ), FIG. 186 (D), FIG. 186 (F), FIG. 186 (G), FIG. 186 (I), FIG. 186 (K), FIG. As described above with reference, at a timing before the timing of starting the operation of changing the actual frame movable body from the first state to the second state or changing from the first state to the second state. , The frame may be configured to start the dynamic display of the movable body simulated image.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can be visually recognized in a state where the frame movable body operates in advance, so that every move of the frame movable body operation mode is overlooked. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation. In particular, such a configuration is effective when the frame movable body operates in a complicated manner as shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 170 and 171 or 179 and 180.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 and 170 and 171 respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the time when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (2 seconds). The simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body, but as described above with reference to FIG. 186 (K), the frame movable body simulated image is The speed at which the display mode imitating the first state changes to the display mode imitating the second state may be faster than the speed at which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state.

In this way, from the display mode in which the frame movable body simulated image imitates the first state in a time (1 second) shorter than the time (2 seconds) when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to imitate the second state, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, so that the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. In some cases, it is possible to fully enjoy the movement.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165 and FIGS. 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state, but FIG. 188 (D) is shown. As described above with reference, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode of rotating at a higher speed before the frame movable body is in the second state. For example, after displaying the frame movable body simulated image so as to make one rotation or a plurality of rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the frame movable body may be configured to be in the second state.

In this way, it is configured to dynamically display the mode in which the frame movable body simulated image makes one rotation in a time (0.5 seconds) shorter than the time required for the frame movable body to make one rotation (1 second). By doing so, the eyes become accustomed to the quick movement of the frame movable body simulated image, and it becomes possible to fully enjoy the rotational movement in the second state of the actual frame movable body.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156 and 170 and 171 respectively, the frame movable body has the same time (2 seconds) as the time when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (2 seconds). Although the simulated image is configured to be dynamically displayed at the same speed as the change mode of the actual frame movable body, refer to FIGS. 186 (F), 186 (G), and 186 (H). As described above, the speed at which the frame movable body simulated image changes from the display mode of the state imitating the first state to the display mode of the state imitating the second state is changed from the first state to the second state of the frame movable body. It may be slower than the changing speed.

In this way, the display of the state in which the frame movable body simulated image imitates the first state over a longer time (4 seconds) than the time (2 seconds) when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By configuring the display mode to change from the mode to the display mode imitating the second state, even if the movement of the frame movable body is felt to be too fast for the player, look at the frame movable body simulated image. By doing so, the player can recognize the operation mode.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165 and FIGS. 179 and 180, respectively, the frame movable body is configured to rotate once per second in the second state, but FIG. 188 (E) is shown. As described above with reference, the frame movable body simulated image may be dynamically displayed in a mode of rotating at a slower speed before the frame movable body is in the second state. For example, after displaying the frame movable body simulated image so as to make one rotation or a plurality of rotations at a speed of one rotation in 0.5 seconds, the frame movable body may be configured to be in the second state.
In this way, it is configured to dynamically display the mode in which the frame movable body simulated image makes one rotation over a longer time (2 seconds) than the time required for the frame movable body to make one rotation (1 second). By doing so, even if the rotation motion in the second state of the actual frame movable body is felt to be too fast for the player, the player recognizes the motion mode by looking at the frame movable body simulated image. It becomes possible.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156, and 170 and 171 respectively, the frame movable body simulated image is in the same manner as the mode in which the actual frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. However, the display that dynamically changes from the image showing the state imitating the first state to the image showing the state imitating the second state is configured to be performed only once. As described with reference to FIGS. 186 (J) and 186 (K), such a display of the frame movable body simulated image may be performed a plurality of times.

In the above-described example with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165 and FIGS. 179 and 180, the frame movable body simulated image is displayed at the same timing as the timing when the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. Is started, and during the period in which the actual frame movable body continues in the second state (rotational state), the frame movable body simulated image is dynamically rotated and displayed in the same manner as the change mode of the actual frame movable body. It is configured. Therefore, the frame movable body simulated image is repeatedly rotated and displayed so as to loop.

In this way, the mode in which the state of the frame movable body changes is dynamically displayed multiple times as a frame movable body simulated image, or when the frame movable body is in a state of changing periodically, it is adjusted to the state. By repeatedly and dynamically displaying the frame movable body simulated image in a mode of periodically changing the frame movable body, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks that the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state. Is possible.

FIGS. 189 (A) to 190 (B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). In the present embodiment, the change from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) is started in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t9). The point that the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the point that the precursor is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 before the operation valid period occurs, the point that the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or the operation is performed. It is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends (timing t18) without being performed. Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 189 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 189 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 190 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 190 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 189 (A) to 190 (B), the precursor display, which is a display suggesting that the operation valid period occurs, is started from the timing t7 in the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a precursor display, the character "push?" Is displayed as an image, and is continued until the timing t9 when the operation valid period starts. At the timing t9, the characters "push !!" are displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation valid period has started and the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t14) or when the operation valid period ends without any operation (timing t18), and instead, "!!" is displayed as a post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ends (timing t16 or timing t20).

On the other hand, at the timing t9, the frame movable body is turned off and the movement starts from the standby position (first state), and at the timing t11, the movement is completed (second state). Become.

In this way, before the frame movable body starts moving or during the movement, the player displays the display (precursor display or operation instruction display) that distracts the player from the frame movable body, so that the player can move to the operation unit. When the operation of is performed, the player's line of sight is guided to the frame movable body by changing from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state or the normal light emitting effect state. Then, since the player feels that the frame movable body has changed from the first state to the second state before he knows it, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the player can change the frame movable body to the second state by the precursor display or the operation instruction display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as feeling annoyed feelings. Further, since the frame movable body can be slowly moved, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

19 (A) to 192 (B) show modifications of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 189 (A) to 190 (B). In the present embodiment, from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) in accordance with the timing (t14) when the operation unit is operated or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t9). From FIG. 189 (A), the point where the change to the completed state (second state) is started, and the frame movable body changes to the second state only when the special lottery result is a big hit. It is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIG. 190 (B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 191 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 191 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 192 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 192 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 191 (A) and 191 (B), the operation unit is operated by the player while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction is displayed (timing t14). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the frame movable body is moved from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state), and is displayed after the operation (the second state). Timing t14 to timing t16), when the special lottery result is lost, an effect pattern is shown in which the frame movable body does not change from the standby position (first state) and only the display after the operation is performed. There is.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 192 (A) and 192 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t18) when the operation valid period ends, the frame movable body is in the standby position. While moving from the (first state) to the completed state (second state), display after the operation (timing t18 to timing t20), and if the special lottery result is lost, the frame movable body An effect pattern is shown in which only the display after the operation is performed without changing from the state in which is in the standby position (first state).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 191 (A) and 192 (A), from the state in which the movement of the frame movable body is completed (second state) to the state in the standby position (first state) at the timing t22. The movement is started, and the movement to the standby position is completed at the timing t24.

In this way, even after the player has operated the operation unit, the post-operation display is performed instead of the operation instruction display, so that the game can be played from the frame movable body that changes the state from the first state to the second state. It is possible to distract the person's consciousness. Then, by ending the post-operation display at the timing when the change of the frame movable body to the second state is completed, the player finally notices that the frame movable body is in the second state, which is large for the player. It is possible to give a surprise. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the player is irritated by the display after the operation that the frame movable body is in the second state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as feeling emotions. Further, since the frame movable body can be slowly moved, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

The timing for changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state is configured to be performed at the timing (timing t16) when the frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. You may. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B). In the present embodiment, the change from the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which the movement is completed (second state) is performed in accordance with the start of the operation valid period (timing t7). The point to start, the point where the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, the point where the precursor is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 before the operation valid period occurs, the point when the operation unit is operated (timing t11) or the operation. This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B) in that the post-operation display is performed when the operation valid period ends (timing t16). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 193 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 193 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 194 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 194 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B), the precursor display, which is a display suggesting that the operation valid period occurs, is started from the timing t5 in the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a precursor display, the character "push?" Is displayed as an image, and is continued until the timing t7 when the operation valid period starts. At the timing t7, the character "push !!" is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation valid period has started and the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends without any operation (timing t16), and instead, "!!" is displayed as a post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

On the other hand, at the timing t7, the inner frame movable body is turned off and the movement starts from the state of being in the standby position (first state), and at the timing t9, the movement is completed (second state). It becomes.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 193 (A) and 193 (B), an operation valid period occurs, and the player operates the operation unit while the operation instruction is displayed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the outer frame movable body is moved from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement state (second state), and is displayed after the operation. (Timing t11 to Timing t13) When the special lottery result is lost, the effect pattern is shown in which the outer frame movable body does not change from the standby position (first state) and only the display after the operation is performed. Has been done.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 194 (A) and 194 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) when the operation valid period ends, the outer frame movable body is in the standby position. Move from the state (first state) to the completed state (second state), display after the operation (timing t16 to timing t18), and if the special lottery result is lost, the frame can be moved. An effect pattern is shown in which the display is performed only after the operation without changing from the state in which the body is in the standby position (first state).

After that, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 193 (A) and 194 (A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t26 to the timing t28. Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t30 to the timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies. Operation ends.

In this way, the player's consciousness is raised by displaying the display (precursor display or operation instruction display) that distracts the player from the frame movable body before or during the movement of the inner frame movable body. It will be concentrated on the effect display device 1600 on the game board side. Further, even while the outer frame movable body is moving after the player has operated the operation unit, the post-operation display is performed instead of the operation instruction display that has been performed up to that point, so that the player's consciousness is raised. It will continue to be directed to the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player feels that both the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body have changed from the first state to the second state before they know it, which is a big surprise to the player. It will be possible to give. Further, even if it takes time to change the state of the inner frame movable body or the outer frame movable body from the first state to the second state, the inner frame can be moved by the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels annoyed when the body or the outer frame movable body is in the second state. Further, since the frame movable body can be slowly moved, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which a player who carelessly touches the frame movable body is injured.

The timing for changing the frame movable body from the extinguished state to the specific light emitting effect state is performed at the timing (timing t13 or timing t18) when the outer frame movable body completes the change from the first state to the second state. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice the change in the state of the frame movable body.

FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) show modified examples of the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B). In the present embodiment, from the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) at the time when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or the end of the operation valid period (timing t16). , The point where the change to the state where the movement is completed (second state) is started, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the point where the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed, and the operation validity period The point where the precursor display is performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7 before the occurrence, the display after the operation when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t11) or when the operation is not performed and the operation valid period ends (timing t16). This is different from the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 170 (A) to 171 (B). Regarding points other than these (for example, the light emitting effect state of the frame movable body and the stop timing of the decorative symbol), the effect mode is basically the same, so the description of the part where the effect mode is common is omitted. , The above-mentioned different parts will be mainly described below.

FIG. 195 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 195 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the player operates the operation unit during the period when the special lottery result is lost and the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. There is. FIG. 196 (A) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is a big hit and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing. FIG. 196 (B) shows an example of an effect pattern when the special lottery result is lost and the player does not operate the operation unit during the period when the operation reception for the operation unit is valid. ing.

In each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B), the precursor display, which is a display suggesting that the operation valid period occurs, is started from the timing t5 in the game board side effect display device 1600. .. As a precursor display, the character "push?" Is displayed as an image, and is continued until the timing t7 when the operation valid period starts. At the timing t7, the character "push !!" is displayed as an image as an operation instruction display indicating that the operation valid period has started and the operation unit is in the reception state. The operation instruction display ends when an operation is performed on the operation unit (timing t11) or when the operation valid period ends without any operation (timing t16), and instead, "!!" is displayed as a post-operation display. Display characters as an image. The display after the operation is continued for 2 seconds and then ends (timing t13 or timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 195 (A) and 195 (B), the operation unit is operated by the player while the operation valid period is generated and the operation instruction is displayed (timing t11). If the special lottery result is a big hit, the inner frame movable body changes from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state) (timing t11 to timing t13). If the outer frame movable body changes from the standby position (first state) to the completed movement (second state) (timing t15 to timing t17) and the special lottery result is lost. An effect pattern that does not change from the state in which the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is shown.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 196 (A) and 196 (B), when the special lottery result is a big hit at the timing (t16) when the operation valid period ends, the inner frame movable body is in the standby position. After changing from the state (first state) to the completed state (second state) (timing t16 to timing t18), the movement is completed from the state where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state). When the state (second state) is changed (timing t20 to timing t22) and the special lottery result is lost, the effect pattern that does not change from the state where the outer frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) is It is shown.

After that, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 195 (A) and 196 (A), the outer frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t26 to the timing t28. Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 195 (A) and 196 (B), the inner frame movable body completes the change from the second state to the first state from the timing t30 to the timing t32, and a series of frame movable bodies. Operation ends.

In this way, when the player operates the operation unit, the inner frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and then the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state. By changing to the state, the mode in which the frame movable body changes the state is slowly observed by the player, and from the player's point of view, the degree of excitement gradually increases over time.

The effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) are executed according to the gaming state. It may be configured.

For example, in the case of a normal gaming state (during non-probability fluctuation, non-time reduction, non-electric support, etc.) in which the average fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is relatively long, FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B). It is advisable to execute the effect pattern explained with reference to. In this case, since the production is performed in a state where a big hit is unlikely to occur, the player can thoroughly enjoy the movement of the frame movable body.

On the other hand, it is a state that can occur after a big hit occurs once, and the average fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is relatively short compared to the normal gaming state, which is a relatively advantageous gaming state for the player (during probability fluctuation). In the case of (time saving, middle, electric support, etc.), it is preferable to configure the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B) to be executed. In this case, the time from operating the operation unit to the second state of the frame movable body is short, and it is possible to shift to the big hit game state at a good tempo.

In the normal gaming state, only the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) can be executed, and in the state advantageous to the player, FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B). ) May be executed only for the effect pattern described with reference to).
Alternatively, in the normal gaming state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) is more than the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B). In a state in which the execution rate is high and is advantageous to the player, FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B) are used rather than the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B). It may be configured to increase the execution rate of the effect pattern described with reference to.

Further, the timing of executing the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) is configured to be executed at an earlier stage, not immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed. May be good. For example, before the decorative symbol forms the reach state, the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) is executed without stopping the decorative symbol, and the inner frame movable body and the outer side are executed. When the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, the decorative symbol may be configured to form a reach state. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the mode in which the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body operate over time gradually expects that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit. It will be possible to increase. It is desirable that the timing at which the decorative symbol forms the reach state is performed when the outer frame movable body is in the second state (for example, timing t24).

Further, after the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) is executed as an effect of whether or not a reach state is formed, immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped. Even if the timing is configured to execute the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B). good.

In this way, after the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) is executed as an effect of whether or not a reach state is formed, at the timing immediately before the decorative pattern is stopped. When the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B) and the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B) are executed, the effect pattern may be executed. As an effect pattern of whether or not a reach state is formed, as a modification of FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B), the frame movable body is simply produced as an effect without accepting an operation on the operation unit by the player. It may be configured to execute a moving effect pattern. In this case, the operation invalid period is continued as the acceptance state of the operation unit, and the precursor display, the operation instruction display, and the post-operation display are not performed as a matter of course. By executing the effect pattern of such a modified mode, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player finds it troublesome to operate the operation unit in a state where the expectation of a big hit is not so high.

In the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 193 (A) to 194 (B), an example of displaying the character "push?" As an image as a precursor display is shown, and the operation instruction display is performed on this image. It may be displayed so as to move to a position. In addition, it is advisable to move the frame movable body away from a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, as a precursor display, the position directly above or diagonally above the game board side effect display device 1600 is directed toward the central portion. It is preferable to configure the character "push?" To be moved and displayed, and to be stopped and displayed in the center. Further, as the post-operation display, the characters "!!" may be configured to move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a direction directly below or diagonally downward of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, it is possible to further distract the player's consciousness from the frame movable body above. As will be described later, when the frame movable body is provided below the game board side effect display device 1600, the precursor display and the post-operation display may be configured to move upward in the reverse manner.

In the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 195 (A) to 196 (B), an example in which the character "push?" Is displayed as an image as a precursor display is shown, and an operation instruction display is performed on this image. It may be displayed so as to move to a position. In addition, it is advisable to move the frame movable body so as to approach a certain position. For example, when the operation instruction display is performed in the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600, the characters "push?" Are moved and displayed from the lower part to the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 as a precursor display. It is good to configure it so that. Further, as a post-operation display, the character "!!" may be configured to move from the central portion of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the upper part of the game board side effect display device 1600. With such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be guided to the frame movable body, and the player can completely see the entire series of changes of the frame movable body.

Further, as the operation instruction display, the characters "!! Push !!" may be displayed as a special operation instruction display that occurs only when the special lottery result is a big hit. In addition, instead of the character "!!" as the display after the operation, the character "Push !!" which is the operation instruction display and the character "!! Push !!" which is the special operation instruction display continue to be displayed as they are. You may. In addition, in response to the special operation instruction display "!! Push !!", the characters "!? Push ?!" are displayed as a special precursor display, and "!!!!!" is displayed as a special post-operation display. The characters "!" May be displayed. In this way, the special characters displayed only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit are continuously displayed from before the operation validity period to after the operation of the operation unit, which gives the player a great sense of satisfaction. It becomes possible.

197 (A) to 197 (D), 198 (A) to 198 (C), 199 (A) to 199 (C), see FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). This is a modification of the effect pattern described in the above section. In these modifications, only one of the right ear frame movable body 7100 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the first frame movable body) and the left ear frame movable body 7200 (hereinafter, may be referred to as the second frame movable body). The point that the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body may be moved at different timings, and the first frame movable body imitates the first frame movable body. Although the frame movable body simulated image is displayed, the frame movable body simulated image that imitates the second frame movable body is basically not displayed for the second frame movable body, and the frame movable body is not related to the operation on the operation unit. The main difference is that the timing at which the frame movable body operates is not limited to the timing immediately before the decorative symbol stops.

The effect patterns shown in FIGS. 197 (A) to 197 (D), FIGS. 198 (A) to 198 (C), and FIGS. 199 (A) to 199 (C) are effects performed during the change of the decorative pattern. It is a pattern, and indicates a state in which a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, it is assumed that 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol at timing t0).

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A), the first frame movable body changed from the first state to the second state from the timing t5 to the timing t7, and maintained the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds). Later (timing t7 to timing t15), the second state changes to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). Further, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the first frame movable body, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. Then, the state changes from the second state to the second state (timing t5 to timing t17). On the other hand, the second frame movable body does not move from the standby position and maintains the first state. Further, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B), the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from the timing t5 to the timing t7, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (timing). t7 to timing t15), changing from the second state to the first state (timing t15 to timing t17). When the second frame movable body operates, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. On the other hand, the first frame movable body does not move from the standby position and maintains the first state. Further, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is not displayed.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. Since the image is displayed, the player can easily notice that the first frame movable body has moved. On the other hand, in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B), even when the second frame movable body is operated, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed. , It is difficult for the player to notice that the second frame movable body has moved.

When the first frame movable body or the second frame movable body operates, the expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the changing decorative symbol is a big hit is that the first frame movable body or the second frame movable body operates. It is preferable to configure the effect pattern so that the effect pattern is selected so as to be higher than in the case where it is not performed. For example, the expected degree when the first frame movable body operates and the expected degree when the second frame movable body operates may be set to 10%, respectively. In such a configuration, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed, so that the first frame movable body is in a state of operating with the eyes turned to the first frame movable body. The player who notices the big hit will have a feeling of expectation.

On the other hand, in order to notice the movement of the second frame movable body, it is necessary to look at the second frame movable body by looking away from the game board side effect display device 1600 on which the decorative pattern is displayed. Therefore, when it is frequently checked whether or not the second frame movable body is operating, or when the face is accidentally turned to the direction in which the second frame movable body is provided, the second frame movable body operates. You will notice that you are there. In this case, the player feels that he / she can know that he / she has a high expectation for the big hit by his / her own power, and as a part of the production that the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed. Compared to the case where one frame movable body is made to be visually recognized, a great sense of accomplishment is felt.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to further increase the player's interest in the frame movable body, and the player's interest, which has conventionally been within a predetermined range centered on the game board 5, is directed to the outside. It can be expanded.

In the staging patterns shown in FIGS. 197 (A) and 197 (B), an example is shown in which the expected degree when the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body are operated is the same 10%, but FIG. 197 (B). ), The expected degree when the second frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) may be set higher than the expected degree when the first frame movable body operates in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A). .. For example, it is preferable to configure the effect pattern so that the expected degree when the second frame movable body operates is 15% and the expected degree when the first frame movable body operates is 10%. With such a configuration, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating will feel a greater sense of accomplishment.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (C) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B). In this effect pattern, the time (timing t7 to timing t21) in which the second frame movable body is in the second state is 14 seconds, and in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B), the second frame movable body is the second. It is longer than 8 seconds, which is the time during which the state is in the state (timing t7 to timing t15). By making the time during which the second frame movable body is in the second state longer than the time during which the first frame movable body is in the second state, the player can move the second frame movable body to the second state. It becomes easier to notice because it is in two states.

The expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (C) may be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B) is 15% and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (C) is 25%. .. With such a configuration, the player feels a greater expectation as to how much the second state is maintained from the moment when he / she notices that the second frame movable body is operating. The timing at which the player notices that the second frame movable body is in the second state is not constant, and it may not be known when the second frame was in the second state, so the duration of the second state is not fixed. The longer it continues, the greater the expectation of the player.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although the embodiment in which the value is increased is shown, it may be configured to provide three or more effect patterns having different times in the second state. For example, an effect pattern that maintains the second state from timing t7 to timing t27 may be executed, and the expected degree of this effect pattern may be set to 30%.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (C), the longer the duration of the second frame movable body in the second state, the higher the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. Although it was configured to be high, it was configured to suggest the degree of expectation by the number of times the second frame movable body was in the second state, not by the duration in which the second frame movable body was in the second state. May be good. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (D) shows an example thereof. The effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (D) shows an example in which the second frame movable body operates twice from the first state to the second state, but the effect pattern in which the second frame movable body does not perform the second operation. Or, the effect pattern in which the third operation is performed after the second operation may be configured to be executable. Further, also at this time, it is preferable to configure so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of operations increases. For example, the expectation when the second frame movable body operates only once is 15%, the expectation degree when the second frame movable body operates twice is 25%, and the second frame movable body operates three times. It is preferable to configure it so that the expected degree when it operates is 35%. In this way, by configuring the configuration so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of movements of the second frame movable body increases, the player who notices that the second frame movable body is operating at an early timing is the first. The second frame movable body will be visually recognized with great expectation as to how many times the two frame movable body operates.

The effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A). In this effect pattern, the operation mode of the first frame movable body and the display mode of the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are the same as the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) (until timing t20). There is no difference in the production mode). On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t21, and becomes the second state from the timing t23 to the timing t33, and the timing It differs from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) in that it returns to the first state at t35. Further, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A), when the second frame movable body is moved, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A), one of the effect patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the change of the decorative symbol. The first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, then returns to the first state, and then the second frame movable body changes to the first state at the timing when a predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses. When the second state is not maintained (when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) is selected) and when the second frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (FIG. 198 (A)). When the effect pattern shown is selected).

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight once turns to the first frame movable body during the operation of the first frame movable body, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600, the first Since the two-frame movable body may move, it is possible to make the player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A) may be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A) is 25% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) is 10%. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the second frame movable body may move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect pattern shown in FIGS. 198 (B) and 198 (C) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A). This effect pattern is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) in that the operation of the first frame movable body and the display of the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body are performed a plurality of times.

In the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 198 (B) and 198 (C), the first frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t2, and is the first from the timing t4 to the timing t6. After becoming two states and returning to the first state at timing t8, the change from the first state to the second state is started again at timing t11, the second state is reached from timing t13 to timing t15, and the second state is reached at timing t17. It will be in the state of returning to the 1 state. Further, the dynamic display of the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is performed in synchronization with the operation of the first frame movable body.

After that, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t21, and becomes the second state from the timing t23 to the timing t33, and the timing It returns to the first state at t35. On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (B), the operation of the second frame movable body is not performed.

In a gaming machine capable of executing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (B) and the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (C), when one of the effect patterns is executed at a predetermined timing during the change of the decorative pattern. Is the second frame at the timing (timing t21) when the predetermined time (4 seconds) elapses after the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state and then returns to the first state (timing t17). There may be a case where the movable body changes from the first state to the second state, and a case where the second frame movable body maintains the first state and does not change to the second state.

With such a configuration, after the player's line of sight continues to face the first frame movable body when the first frame movable body operates, before the player's line of sight returns to the game board side effect display device 1600. Since the second frame movable body may move, it is possible to make the player who has little game experience recognize that the second frame movable body may move.

The expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (C) may be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (B). For example, the effect pattern may be selected so that the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (B) is 25% and the expectation level of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (C) is 35%. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the second frame movable body may move after the first frame movable body moves.

The effect pattern shown in FIGS. 199 (A) to 199 (C) is an effect pattern obtained by modifying the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A). This effect pattern is different from the effect pattern shown in FIG. 197 (A) in that the second frame movable body may operate at a timing prior to the operation of the first frame movable body.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 199 (A) to 199 (C), the timing at which the first frame movable body operates and the timing at which the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body is displayed are the same. .. Specifically, the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state from the timing t21 to the timing t23, and after maintaining the second state for a predetermined time (8 seconds) (timing t23 to timing t31). ), The second state changes to the first state (timing t31 to timing t33). Further, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state according to the operation of the first frame movable body, and is continuously displayed in the second state for a predetermined time. Then, the state changes from the second state to the first state (timing t21 to timing t33).

On the other hand, in each of the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 199 (A) to 199 (C), the operation mode of the second frame movable body is different as shown below.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (A), the second frame movable body continues to take the first state in the period from the timing t0 to the timing t39, and does not become the second state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (B), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t5, becomes the second state from the timing t7 to the timing t15, and becomes the timing t17. In, the state returns to the first state. In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (C), the second frame movable body starts changing from the first state to the second state at the timing t5, becomes the second state from the timing t7 to the timing t33, and becomes the timing t35. In, the state returns to the first state. In any of the effect patterns, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is not displayed.

The expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (C) is higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (B), and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (B) is set to be higher than the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (A). ) May be higher than the expected degree of the effect pattern. For example, the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (A) is 10%, the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (B) is 20%, and the expectation of the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (C) is 30. It is preferable to configure so that the effect pattern is selected so as to be%.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (B), the player may miss the operation of the second frame movable body when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (B) is executed. be. For the player who can visually recognize the movement of the second frame movable body, the player can recognize that the expectation degree is 20% by the subsequent movement of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, for the player who did not notice that the second frame movable body was operated, even if the first frame movable body was operated, the exact degree of expectation was not well understood.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (A) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (C), in the case of the effect pattern shown in FIG. The movable body remains in the moving position (second state). Therefore, the player who notices that the first frame movable body is in the second state by looking at the frame movable body simulated image imitating the first frame movable body confirms the state of the second frame movable body. When the second frame movable body is not operating at that time and is in the first state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is not so high. On the other hand, when the second frame movable body is operating at that time and is in the second state, it can be recognized that the degree of expectation is relatively high.

Comparing the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (B) with the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (C), when the player notices that the second frame movable body is operating and is in the second state, the second frame is second. The player will be interested in the fact that the first frame movable body may move while the frame movable body is in the second state. Then, when the first frame movable body operates and becomes the second state, the player can recognize that the degree of expectation is high. On the other hand, if the second frame movable body is in the first state before the first frame movable body is in the first state, the player recognizes that the degree of expectation is relatively low. It becomes.

In the effect pattern shown in FIG. 199 (C), the first frame movable body is set to the first state, and then the second frame movable body is set to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to entertain the player in a state desirable for the player, which has a high degree of expectation, for a long period of time.

Examples have been described with the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 154 as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, but the right ear as shown in FIG. 163 and the like. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively.

Examples of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 shown in FIG. 154 have been described as the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body, respectively, and are shown in FIGS. 169 and 178. One or both of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 as the first frame movable body, and either the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 or the left ear lateral frame movable body 7450. Alternatively, both may be used as the second frame movable body. The state in which either or both of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350 are in the second state is defined as the second state of the first frame movable body, and the left ear medial frame movable body is defined as the second state. The state in which either or both of the 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are in the second state may be configured to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern as the second state of the second frame movable body. ..

When the above-mentioned effect pattern is executed in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 169 and 178, one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state. Then, the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the first frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be adopted as an operation to be performed. Further, after changing the other of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 from the second state to the first state, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 Changing one of them from the second state to the first state may be adopted as an operation of changing the first frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

Similarly, when the above-mentioned effect pattern is executed in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 169 and 178, one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state. After the second state, the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is changed from the first state to the second state, and the second frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state. It may be adopted as an operation of two states. Further, after changing the other of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 from the second state to the first state, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 Changing one of them from the second state to the first state may be adopted as an operation of changing the second frame movable body from the second state to the first state.

In this way, the change in the state due to the continuous operation by the plurality of frame movable bodies may be collectively regarded as the change in the state of one frame movable body.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 are used as the first frame movable body, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are used as the second frame movable body. An example of changing the state is shown, but only one of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is configured to operate as the first frame movable body, and the other is not operated and is in a standby state. It may be configured to remain as it is. Alternatively, only one of the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is configured to operate as the second frame movable body, and the other is configured to remain in the standby state without operating. You may.

For example, of the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, only the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 is used as the first frame movable body to change the state, and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 and the left. The outer ear frame movable body 7450 may be configured to change the state as the second frame movable body.

In this case, the area visually recognized differs between the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body depending on the front view or the side view. Specifically, since the first frame movable body is composed of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the visible area is relatively small, and the second frame movable body is the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear. Since it is composed of the outer frame movable body 7450, the visible area is relatively large.

With such a configuration, when the state of the first frame movable body is relatively small, a frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the change in the state of the first frame movable body is displayed when the state is changed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the change in the state of the first frame movable body. On the other hand, when the state of the second frame movable body is relatively large, the state of the second frame movable body is changed by intentionally not displaying the frame movable body simulated image corresponding to the second frame movable body. When the player notices what he is doing, it is possible to give the player a greater surprise.

In the structure of the plurality of frame movable bodies described with reference to FIGS. 184 and 185, the above-mentioned effect pattern may be executed.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 may be used as the first frame movable body, and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 may be used as the second frame movable body. Further, the state in which the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. 184 (A), 184 (C), and 185 (A) is defined as the first state. , 184 (B), 184 (D), and 185 (B) may be configured to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern with the state at the moving position as the second state.

Alternatively, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm 7630 are used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 are used as the second frame. It may be a movable body. Further, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630, the door frame side unit left arm upper arm portion 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm portion 7680 are shown in FIGS. 184 (A) and 184 (A). C), the state in the standby position shown in FIG. 185 (A) is defined as the first state, and the state in the moving position shown in FIGS. 184 (B), 184 (D), and FIG. 185 (B) is defined as the second state. , The effect pattern described above may be executed.

For example, when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A) is executed, the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame side unit right arm lower arm portion 7630 become the door frame side unit right arm upper arm portion 7620 and the door frame. Side unit Right arm Lower arm 7630 is displayed, and after changing from the standby position (first state) to the moving position (second state), the standby position is displayed. It changes to a certain state (first state), and then the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7680 are replaced with the door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7670 and the door frame side unit left arm lower arm. After changing from the state in the standby position (first state) to the state in the moving position (second state) without displaying the frame movable body simulated image imitating 7680, the state in the standby position (first state). It will change to the state).

Alternatively, one or both of the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 and the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750 are set as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face decoration unit 7500 has the door frame top unit on the face. Body 7510, right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, door frame top unit face lower nose movable body 7522, door frame top unit face lower mouth movable body 7524 at least one of the second frame movable body May be. Furthermore, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700, the curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7750, the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the door frame top unit under the face. The first state is the state in which the movable nose 7522 and the movable lower mouth of the door frame top unit 7524 are in the standby positions shown in FIGS. 184 (A), 184 (C), and 185 (A), and FIG. 184 (A). B), the state at the moving position shown in FIGS. 184 (D) and 185 (B) may be set as the second state, and the above-mentioned effect pattern may be executed.

For example, the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700 may be used as the first frame movable body, and the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 may be used as the second frame movable body to execute the above-mentioned effect pattern. In this case, the frame movable body simulated image is not displayed for the door frame top unit face movable body 7510, which is larger in size than the curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7700. With such a configuration, when the player notices that the door frame top unit face movable body 7510 (second frame movable body) is changing the state, a greater surprise to the player. Can be given.

In addition to the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also used as the second frame movable body, and the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is stored below. After completing the upward movement from the above position, the movement from the state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the door frame top unit facial movable body 7510 is completed. The state may be set as the second state of the second frame movable body.

In this way, the player is provided with the first frame movable body and the second frame movable body at a position facing each other across the game area 5a and the game board side effect display device 1600. Is configured so that when one frame movable body is visually recognized, the other frame movable body is less likely to be visually recognized by the player. In particular, when the effect pattern as shown in FIG. 198 (A) is executed, the player's consciousness is concentrated on the first frame movable body, and the second frame movable body located at a distant position on the visual angle is in the field of view. It will not be able to enter. Then, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player who notices the state after the operation of the second frame movable body that the second frame movable body has changed to an unexpected state.

Although we have shown an effect pattern that does not display a frame movable body simulated image that imitates the second frame movable body when operating the second frame movable body, the frame movable body that imitates the second frame movable body is shown for a short time. It may be configured to display a simulated image. In this case, in a predetermined period in the latter half of the second half when the second frame movable body is in the second state, a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 for a short period (for example, 1 second). It may be configured to be displayed in. For example, it may be configured to display a frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body from the timing t30 to the timing t31 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the second frame movable body has operated.

Alternatively, the frame movable body simulated image imitating the second frame movable body may be displayed from the timing t33 to the timing t34 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 198 (A).

In such a configuration, the player can visually recognize the state in which the second frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state, and the player can see the second frame movable body. You will feel the regret that you could not enjoy the second state. This makes it possible to raise the attention consciousness that the second frame movable body may be moving unknowingly in the subsequent games.

Although the effect pattern in which the frame movable body operates is shown with reference to FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B), when the frame movable body is moved in this way, the player moves to an unexpected position. When the frame movable body is positioned after the movement, the player may violently bring his / her hand or head into contact with the frame movable body, which may injure the player or damage the frame movable body. On the other hand, in a gaming machine capable of operating a frame movable body, in addition to the operation of the frame movable body, various effects are performed on the game board 5 side, and the effects are executed in an excessive manner for the player. There is a risk that it will end up. The embodiments shown below are intended to solve such problems. 200 and 201, FIGS. 202 and 203, FIGS. 204 and 205, FIGS. 206 and 207, FIGS. 155 and 156, 164 and 165, 170 and 171 and 179 and 180, respectively. A variation example of the effect pattern described with reference to each is shown.

In each embodiment shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, 202 and 203, 204 and 205, 206 and 207, the volume of the variable staging sound is reduced from the normal state at a predetermined timing. It is configured to be in a suppressed state. The variable staging sound is a sound in which a predetermined musical piece is played according to the fluctuation of the decorative pattern and is recognized by the player as background music. For example, a musical piece consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and a performance sound of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, the variation result of the decorative pattern is all non-reach loss and the variation time is 10 on average. (In the case of about seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the playback of different songs may be started at the timing when the playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, the music that has been played up to that point may be faded out in the middle of playback in accordance with the change in the gaming state, and another music piece different from the music that has been played up to that point may be played back. In the present embodiment, by suppressing the volume of such a fluctuating effect sound in accordance with the timing at which the frame movable body operates, a state in which the effect becomes excessive is suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a special sound that evokes the movement of the frame movable body and the movement of the frame movable body is reproduced for a short time according to the timing of the movement of the frame movable body. .. As a special arousal sound, instead of emitting a sound that is recognized as a series of music that is played for a long time like a variable production sound, a sound effect (for example, a chime sound such as "ping pong") is played in one second. Alternatively, it is advisable to play a musical piece that finishes playing in a short period of time (for example, 2 seconds), or to play a sound like a continuous drum hit (for example, a sound such as "dokodokodoko ...") for a few seconds. Further, it is preferable that the sound constituting the special arousal sound does not include the musical instrument sound used as a part of the variable staging sound. Further, the special arousal sound is output at a predetermined volume without being affected by the output state of the variable effect sound. For example, the special arousal sound is output at a predetermined volume regardless of whether the volume of the variable staging sound is suppressed in the normal state or the volume of the variable staging sound is suppressed. Further, the volume of the special arousal sound may be louder than the volume of the fluctuating effect sound in the suppressed state. In the effect pattern described later, the state in which the special arousal sound is output may be maintained for about 10 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to repeatedly play such a sound effect or a musical piece whose reproduction ends in a short period of time so as to maintain the state in which the special arousal sound is output.

In this way, by suppressing the volume of the fluctuating effect sound according to the movement of the frame movable body and generating a special arousal sound, it is possible to prevent the effect provided to the player from becoming excessive. Become. Further, when the player comes into contact with the frame movable body, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged.

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 200 (A) to 201 (B), the variable effect is produced at the timing (timing t7) when the frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. It is configured so that the state of the sound is suppressed and the special arousal sound is output. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 202 (A) to 203 (B), the timing (timing t9) at which the frame movable body changes from the state in which the frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which rotation is started (second state). ), The state of the variable staging sound is suppressed, and the special arousal sound is output. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 204 (A) to 205 (B), the effect changes at the timing (timing t7) when the inner frame movable body starts moving from the standby position (first state) to the moving position. It is configured so that the state of the staging sound is suppressed and the special arousal sound is output. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 206 (A) to 207 (B), the timing (timing) at which the inner frame movable body changes from the state in which the inner frame movable body is in the standby position (first state) to the state in which rotation is started (second state). At t5), the state of the variable staging sound is set to the suppressed state, and the special arousal sound is set to the output state. Further, the output of the special arousal sound is configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). Further, the suppression state of the variable effect sound is also configured to end at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18).

In this way, at the timing when the frame movable body starts to move, the output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the normal state to the suppressed state, and the special arousal sound is changed from the non-output state to the output state, so that the effect state becomes excessive. It is possible to suppress this.

Further, as shown with reference to FIGS. 204 (A) to 205 (B), when a plurality of frame movable bodies can operate in order, at the timing when the second frame movable body starts to operate. , The output state of the variable effect sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special arousal sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the variable staging sound required for staging from being excessively stopped.

The timing for returning the output state of the variable effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing for turning off the output state of the special arousal sound are when the player operates the operation unit or the operation valid period ends. It is the timing that was done. This is because a predetermined time has passed since the frame movable body moved, so that it is less meaningful to suppress the fluctuation effect sound. The frame movable body simulated image is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 to form the frame. This is because the player notices that the movable body has moved.

On the other hand, the timing of returning the output state of the variable effect sound from the suppressed state to the normal state and the timing of changing the output state of the special arousal sound from the output state to the non-output state may be set when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged when the player comes into contact with the frame movable body. In the case of an effect pattern in which a plurality of frame movable bodies return to the first state at different timings, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the frame movable body, which is the latest in the first state, returns to the first state. It is advisable to return from the normal state to the normal state and change the output state of the special arousal sound from the output state to the non-output state.

Alternatively, the timing at which the output state of the variable effect sound is returned from the suppressed state to the normal state at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, while the special arousal sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state. May be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged when the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Alternatively, at the timing when the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends, the special arousal sound is changed from the output state to the non-output state, and the output state of the variable effect sound is returned from the suppressed state to the normal state. It may be when the frame movable body returns to the first state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured or the frame movable body is damaged when the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

When there are a plurality of frame movable bodies and there are multiple timings at which the frame movable bodies start to operate, as in the effect patterns described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205 and FIGS. 206 and 207, respectively, the plurality of frame movable bodies are present. It may be configured to output different special arousal sounds corresponding to each of the above.

In the effect pattern described with reference to FIGS. 204 and 205, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing when the operation to the operation unit is performed (timing t14) or the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). An example is shown in which the state is changed from the normal state to the normal state and the special arousal sound is set to the non-output state. It may be configured so that the sound output state may be continued.

For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 204 (A), the outer frame is movable until the timing t15 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the moving position, the timing t16 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the moving position, or the outer frame is movable. It may be configured to continue the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound and the output state of the special arousal sound until the timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or the timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. ..

Further, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 205 (A), the timing t19 when the outer frame movable body is moving to the moving position, the timing t20 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the moving position, or the outer frame is movable. It may be configured to continue the suppression state of the fluctuation effect sound and the output state of the special arousal sound until the timing t27 when the body is moving to the standby position or the timing t28 when the outer frame movable body completes the movement to the standby position. ..

On the other hand, in the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 204 (B) and 205 (B), the effect pattern is not deformed, and in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 204 (B), the effect shown in FIG. In the pattern, at the timing t18, the output state of the variable staging sound is changed from the suppressed state to the normal state, and the special arousal sound is changed to the non-output state.

In this way, when the outer frame movable body operates (that is, when the special lottery result is a big hit), the suppression state of the variable effect sound and the output state of the special arousal sound are set according to the operation of the outer frame movable body. By configuring it to continue, the player may be injured or injured when the player comes into contact with the outer frame movable body while moving to the moving position or in the state of moving to the moving position (second state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the outer frame movable body is damaged. In particular, since the outer frame movable body starts moving at the timing when the special lottery result is confirmed to be a big hit, the excitement felt by the player is very large. It is possible to make the player recognize that the outer frame movable body is operating without making the player excited.

The timing of outputting the special arousal sound may be limited. For example, the special arousal sound is output only during at least one of the period during which the frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state and the period during which the frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state. You may.

For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 200 (A) to 201 (B), the frame movable body is changed from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9). Outputs the special arousal sound only during at least one of the periods during which is changing from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t22 to timing t24), and does not output the special arousal sound during the other periods. It may be configured. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Further, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 204 (A) and 205 (B), the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9), the inner frame. The special arousal sound is output only during at least one of the periods during which the movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (the period from timing t30 to timing t32), and no special arousal sound is output during the other periods. It may be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Further, in the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 204 (A) and 205 (A), the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (timing t14 in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 204 (A)). To the period of timing t16, in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 205 (A), the period from timing t18 to timing t20), and the period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing t26 to timing t28). The special arousal sound may be output only in at least one period, and the special arousal sound may not be output in the other period. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

Further, the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the first state to the second state (the period from timing t7 to timing t9) and the period during which the inner frame movable body is changing from the second state to the first state (timing). (Period from t30 to timing t32), period during which the outer frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state (in the effect pattern shown in FIG. 204 (A), the period from timing t14 to timing t16, FIG. 205 (A). In the effect pattern shown, the special arousal sound is emitted only in at least one period of the period (period from timing t18 to timing t20) and the period in which the outer frame movable body changes from the second state to the first state (timing t26 to timing t28). It may be configured to output and not to output the special arousal sound during other periods. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body.

In each of the above-mentioned effect patterns, the state of the variable effect sound may be set to the suppressed state, and then the special arousal sound may be output with a slight delay. For example, the special arousal sound may be output 2 seconds after the variable effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 200 (A) to 201 (B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at the timing t7, and then the special arousal sound may be output at the timing t9. With such a configuration, the player can clearly recognize that the variable effect sound is in the suppressed state and that the special arousal sound has a property different from that of the variable effect sound.

Alternatively, in each of the above-mentioned effect patterns, the state of the variable effect sound may be set to the suppressed state at a timing predetermined time before the timing of outputting the special arousal sound. For example, it may be configured to suppress the fluctuation effect sound 2 seconds before the timing of outputting the special arousal sound. For example, in the effect pattern shown in FIGS. 200 (A) to 201 (B), the variable effect sound may be suppressed at the timing t5, and then the special arousal sound may be output at the timing t7. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to clearly recognize that the variable production sound is in the suppressed state and that the special arousal sound has a property different from that of the variable production sound.

The timing at which the output of the special arousal sound ends may be a predetermined timing. For example, the special arousal sound may be output only for the first 2 seconds after the frame movable body starts to move. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 200 (A) to 201 (B), the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t7, the output of the special arousal sound is started, and the output of the special arousal sound is output at the timing t9. It is good to configure it to finish. The variable effect sound may end at the timing when the operation unit is operated (timing t14) or at the timing when the operation valid period ends (timing t18). With such a configuration, the variable staging sound continues to be suppressed even after the timing at which the output of the special arousal sound ends, so that the player can easily recognize that the special arousal sound has been output.

It may be configured to suppress the fluctuation effect sound and output the special arousal sound before the operation of the frame movable body is started. For example, it may be configured to suppress the fluctuation effect sound and output the special arousal sound at the timing 2 seconds before the frame movable body starts the operation. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 200A to 201B, the variable effect sound is suppressed at the timing t5 and the output of the special arousal sound is started, and the frame movable body state is set at the timing t7. It may be configured to start the operation of changing from the first state to the second state. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

The operation valid period may be generated in accordance with the timing at which the operation of the frame movable body is started and the fluctuation effect sound is suppressed. For example, in the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 204 (A) to 205 (B), the operation valid period is generated at the timing t7, the operation instruction display is started, and the light emission effect state of the frame movable body is turned off. It should be configured as follows. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the frame movable body moves, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player comes into contact with the frame movable body and is injured.

The time charts shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B) by slowly rotating the frame movable body in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 163, 166, 167, and 168 by a predetermined angle. Alternatively, it may be operated like the frame movable body in the modified example of the time chart shown in FIGS. 155 (A) to 156 (B). For example, the frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 163 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. When moving to the standby position, it is advisable to rotate the frame movable body 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds.

Further, the outer frame movable body and the inner frame movable body in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 178, 181 and 182 and 183, respectively, are shown in the time charts shown in FIGS. 170 and 171 or FIGS. 170 and 171. It may be operated like the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body in the modification of the time chart shown in. For example, the outer frame movable body in the embodiment shown in FIG. 178 may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Furthermore, it is preferable to rotate the inner frame movable body 90 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds at the timing when the special lottery result is a big hit and the operation unit is operated or the operation valid period ends. .. When moving to the standby position, the inner frame movable body is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds, and then the outer frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right over 2 seconds. Rotate it 90 degrees around it.

The frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 154, 159, 160, 161 and 162, with reference to FIGS. 169, 172, 173, 174 and 175, and 176 and 177, respectively. The frame is movable in the state where the outer frame movable body described with reference to FIGS. 169, 172, 173, 174 and 175, and 176 and 177 is in the second state. The body or one or both of the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body may be configured to continue the vertical movement of about 1 to 2 cm or the rotation movement of about 5 degrees. With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to easily notice that the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body have moved to the second state.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 164 and 165, and FIGS. 179 and 180, the rotation direction of the frame movable body is clockwise when viewed from the right side. For this reason, compared to the case where the rotation direction of the frame movable body is counterclockwise when viewed from the right side, when the player or the like is placed on the frame, the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation.

On the other hand, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, and 179 and 180, the frame movable body may be configured to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the right side. With such a configuration, the rotating body is visually recognized as approaching the player, and the frame movable body can be visually recognized by the player in a powerful manner.

In the embodiments shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, and 179 and 180, the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are not rotated by 360 degrees or more in the second state, but are rotated a predetermined time. It may be configured to alternately repeat the clockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right and the counterclockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right within the moving range. For example, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B), 163 (E), 178 (B), and 178 (E), the frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body are centered on an upright state. The frame movable body, the inner frame movable body, and the outer frame movable body may be configured to repeat the rotation operation within a range of 45 degrees to the front side and 45 degrees to the rear side. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player or the like is placed on the frame.

In the inner frame movable body and the outer frame movable body shown in FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E), when the inner frame movable body performs a clockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right, it is outside. When the frame movable body performs a counterclockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right, and the inner frame movable body performs a counterclockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right, the outer frame movable body performs a counterclockwise rotation operation when viewed from the right. It may be configured to perform a clockwise rotation operation. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the hand or the like is caught in the door frame top unit 570 when the player or the like is placed on the frame.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 154 and 169, the frame movable body is provided with a light emitting portion, but the frame movable body is illuminated at a predetermined place outside the frame movable body (for example, inside the door frame top unit 570). It may be configured to have a light emitting portion to illuminate the frame movable body by the light emitting portion. Alternatively, both of them may be provided, and the frame movable body may be illuminated by the light emitting portion included in the frame movable body and the light emitting portion outside the frame movable body to bring about a predetermined effect state.

On the other hand, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 163 (A) to 163 (E) and FIGS. 178 (A) to 178 (E), the right side light emission in the door frame top unit corresponds to the frame movable body. Although an example is shown in which the unit 7050 and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit are provided in the door frame top unit 570, the light emitting unit is provided in the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, respectively, or the right ear By providing light emitting parts in the inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, respectively, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door The frame movable body may be configured to emit light in the same light emitting mode as the left light emitting unit 7052 in the frame top unit. Alternatively, both of them may be provided, and the frame movable body may be illuminated by the light emitting portion included in the frame movable body and the light emitting portion outside the frame movable body to bring about a predetermined effect state.

With reference to FIGS. 154 to 207, examples have been shown in which the frame movable body changes from the first state to the second state, or goes through the second state to the third state or the fourth state, but from the first state. A player or a clerk at a game store pushes the frame movable body in the middle of changing to the second state, or the frame movable body that has completed the change from the second state to the fourth state by using his or her hand. It may be configured so that it can be returned to the state where it is located (first state). In this case, when a sensor capable of detecting the position of the frame movable body is provided in a drive mechanism (not shown) for driving the frame movable body, and the frame movable body is positioned at the initial position at a timing when the frame movable body cannot be positioned at the initial position. May be configured so that the frame movable body stays in the initial position so as not to operate the drive mechanism any more, judging that the operation such as pushing is performed by the player or the clerk of the game store.

With such a configuration, the frame movable body can be returned to the initial position (first state) by the player or the clerk of the game store at an arbitrary timing. Further, even when a heavy article (such as a bag owned by a player) is placed on the frame movable body, the drive mechanism for operating the frame movable body is controlled so as not to operate the frame movable body. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the load on the drive mechanism. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player or a clerk of a game store is injured.

With reference to FIGS. 154 to 207, a modified example of the basic structure of the frame movable body and the structure of the frame movable body, a modified example of the basic control mode of the frame movable body and the control mode of the frame movable body are shown. However, a predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to a predetermined embodiment or modification of the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other examples or modifications regarding the structure of the frame movable body may be applied to a predetermined embodiment or modification regarding the structure of the frame movable body. Further, one or more other examples or modifications of the control mode of the frame movable body may be applied to a predetermined embodiment or modification of the control mode of the frame movable body.

Each effect example in the embodiment and each technical matter in each effect example may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Further, each technical item in each accessory configuration may be combined and applied to form an embodiment.

(Second Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the second embodiment will be described based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 208 to 235.

By the way, although a plurality of obstacle nails are installed in the rolling region of the game ball in the gaming machine, conventionally, the obstacle nail is illegally bent by a malicious player or the like, and the game ball is won a prize. There was a fraudulent act of illegally winning a lot of game balls into the winning opening, leading to a favorable direction.

For example, a fraudulent act of invading a game store after the store is closed, opening the door frame and bending the obstacle nail directly with a tool, etc. Fraudulent acts such as bending to guide the game ball in an advantageous direction were performed, and such fraudulent acts caused great damage to the game store. Hereinafter, embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for preventing fraudulent acts against obstacle nails.

FIG. 208 shows a front view of the game board 5'in the second embodiment, and FIG. 209 shows an exploded front perspective view of the game board 5'. As shown in the figure, the game board 5'in the present embodiment is mainly composed of a front unit 2000, a game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000.

The back unit 3000 is mainly composed of a movable effect unit 3600 that performs a movable effect by various movable members, and a game board side effect display device 1600 that is arranged behind the movable effect unit 3600 and displays game information and effect display as an image. Has been done. The effect produced by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the movable effect unit 3600 is configured to be visible to the player through an opening formed in the center of the game panel 1100.

As shown in the disassembled front perspective view of the game board 5'shown in FIG. 209 and the disassembled front perspective view of the game panel 1100 shown in FIG. 210, the panel plate 1110 has a front component 1000 on the front side thereof. The outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 are attached, and a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 and various winning devices (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002) are provided, and an opening extending to the center of the panel plate 1110. The front unit 2000 is fitted into the portion from the front and is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by a screw (not shown) from the front.

The panel plate 1110 in the present embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate having a thickness of about 10 mm. Examples of the material of the panel plate 1110 include a transparent synthetic resin plate such as a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, and a methacrylic resin.

Further, a plurality of obstacle nails 1200 are planted in the panel plate 1110 in the present embodiment, and the left game area 5'a and the right game area 5b correspond to the launch direction of the game ball, and the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails 1200. It is configured on the front. That is, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of FIG. 210, the right game area 5b is formed as the rolling area of the game ball launched by the player's right-handed strike, and the right side game area 5b is formed from the right side to the center of the panel plate 1110. The panel convex portion 1117, which is convex toward the opening of the panel, is integrally formed with the panel plate 1110. The obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted on the front surface side of the panel convex portion 1117 as shown in the layout plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG. 213.

As shown in the exploded front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 210, the table unit 2000 in the present embodiment is formed in a substantially annular shape by a colorless transparent acrylic plate having a thickness of about 2 mm, and is mainly formed. It is composed of a stage 2530, a warp outlet 2522, a large winning opening 2005, a flow path device 2700, a region cover member 2600 described later, and the like.

Further, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 211 and the disassembled front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 212, the game ball launched by right-handed strike is on the right side of the front view of the table unit 2000. A flow path device 2700 is provided for receiving and flowing down the flow path device, and the flow path device 2700 is provided with a first flow path forming member 2720a and a second flow path provided in parallel on the left and right sides as shown in FIG. 212. It is composed of a forming member 2720b.

Above the first flow path forming member 2720a and the second flow path forming member 2720b, a first flow path entry port 2710a and a second flow path entry port 2710b for receiving a game ball launched by right-handed hitting are provided, respectively. Further, a first flow path outlet 2730a and a second flow path outlet 2730b are provided at the lower part. Therefore, the game ball launched by right-handed entry enters the first flow path entry port 2710a or the second flow path entry port 2710b, and is discharged from the first flow path outlet 2730a or the second flow path outlet 2730b. Therefore, the game ball is configured to be discharged to the right side game area 5b formed on the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in the panel convex portion 1117 forming the right side game area 5b as described above, and more specifically, the arrangement plan view of the obstacle nails in FIG. 213. Obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are planted in an arrangement manner as shown in the above to form a flow path for a plurality of game balls. That is, three obstacle nails 1201, 1202, 1203 are planted at equal intervals above the panel convex portion 1117 in the left-right direction, and twelve obstacle nails 1204 to 1215 are substantially vertically two below the obstacle nails 1201, 1202, 1203. Obstacle nails are planted in close proximity. Further below, three obstacle nails 1216-1218 are planted in close proximity to each other in a substantially diagonal direction. In the present embodiment, the obstacle nails are planted in the above arrangement, but the arrangement is not necessarily limited to such an arrangement, and the obstacle nails may be appropriately planted at an arbitrary position. It is possible.

Further, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 211 and the disassembled front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 212, the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment includes the above-mentioned flow path device 2700 and the right side. The area cover member 2600 is attached so as to cover the game area 5b from the front side.

As shown in the figure, the region cover member 2600 of the present embodiment is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate having a thickness of about 2 mm extending in the vertical direction. With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize the rolling state of the game ball on the back side through the area cover member 2600 while covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b.

The thickness of the region cover member 2600 is not necessarily limited to the thickness in the present embodiment, and can be appropriately changed. The material constituting the region cover member 2600 is also, for example, a polycarbonate resin. It is also possible to use a colorless and transparent synthetic resin plate such as a polyarylate resin or a methacrylic resin.

Further, the area cover member 2600 is formed in a substantially planar shape on both the front surface and the back surface, and a penetration portion 2610 including the penetration portions 2611 to 2620 is formed as a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction at the lower front view position. ing. The penetrating portions 2611 to 2620 are configured to function as accommodating portions capable of accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 of the right game area 5b.

More specifically, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211 and the disassembled rear perspective view of the region cover member 2600 in FIG. 214, the front view circular through portion 2611 of the region cover member 2600. The nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated with respect to 2613, respectively, and the adjacent obstacle nails of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212-1215 are contained in the elongated through holes 2614 to 2618. The penetration portion 2619, which is accommodated two by two and has a longer hole than the penetration portions 2614 to 2618, is configured to accommodate the nail heads of the three obstacle nails 1216-1218. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a notch is formed at the right end portion of the area cover member 2600 in front view, and the nail heads of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the penetrating portion 2620. The unit is configured to be housed.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the region cover member 2600 in FIG. 214, a plurality of ball regulation protrusions 2640 are integrally formed on the rear surface side of the region cover member 2600, and the region cover member 2600 is integrally formed. By contacting the ball regulating protrusion 2640 that rolls on the back side of the game ball, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the game ball, prevent ball jamming, and regulate the rolling direction. ..

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 214, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the back side of the area cover member 2600 and can be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. It is fixed by a screw (not shown) on the back side of the area cover member 2600 so as not to be possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 214, the screw screwed to the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, 2633 from the rear of the game panel 1100 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. However, the screw screwed to the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 so that the screw cannot be accessed. More specifically, since the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screws, the front unit 2000 itself is once removed when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is configured so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110. With such a configuration, for example, it becomes difficult for a malicious player or the like to remove the area cover member 2600, and it is possible to suppress an act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

In addition, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 212, the first flow path entry port 2710a and the second flow path entry port 2710b, the first flow path outlet 2730a and the second flow path outlet 2730b. The area cover member 2600 is attached to the front side and covered to form each flow path. That is, since the area cover member 2600 is an indispensable component that constitutes a part of the flow path of the game ball, for example, a malicious player or the like removes the area cover member 2600 and plants it in the right game area 5b. Even if the installed obstacle nails 1201 to 1218 are bent improperly and the game is played as it is, the game ball cannot move as expected by design when the area cover member 2600 is removed, and the ball is jammed or around. It is configured so that it may lead to damage to parts and make it difficult to play a normal game. With such a configuration, it is possible to remove the area cover member 2600 and suppress an act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

Subsequently, FIGS. 215 (a) to 215 (c) show cross-sectional views of the planted portion of the obstacle nail in the right game area 5b. Specifically, the embodiment in which the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1209 and 1212 to 1218 planted in the panel convex portion 1117 are housed in the penetrating portion 2610 of the region cover member 2600 is illustrated. In, the nail head of each obstacle nail is configured to be accommodated within the thickness of the area cover member 2600.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the thickness of the area cover member 2600 is 2 mm, and the dimension (h) from the front surface of the panel convex portion 1117 where each obstacle nail is planted to the front surface of the area cover member 2600. Is about 18 mm. Further, the separation distance (w) between the center of the nail head of each obstacle nail and the end of each penetration portion 2610 of the area cover member 2600 is about 4 mm. Therefore, since the diameter of the nail head of the obstacle nail is about 4 mm, the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head and the open end of each of the penetrating portions 2610 is about 2 mm.

More specifically, the present embodiment will be described. In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 215 (a), the accommodation mode of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 with respect to the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 is shown in the cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is about 2 mm as described above. The center of the nail head and the center of each penetrating portion are configured to coincide with each other.

In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 215 (b), the accommodation mode of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 with respect to the penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 is shown in the cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the pair of obstacle nails 1204 to 1209 and 1212 to 1215 adjacent to each other to the open end of the penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 provided in the area cover member 2600 is the same as described above. It is about 2 mm.

In the cross-sectional view of FIG. 215 (c), the accommodation mode of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 with respect to the penetrating portion 2619 is shown in the cross-sectional view. In this case, the gap from the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1216 to 1218 to the open end of the penetration portion 2619 provided in the area cover member 2600 is about 2 mm as described above.

As described above, since the gap between the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nail and the open end of the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodating portion is only about 2 mm, a tool for bending the obstacle nail is used. It becomes difficult to insert, and even if the obstacle nail is bent improperly in some way, the outer peripheral end of the nail head of the obstacle nail and the open end of the penetration portion 2610 interfere with each other. The degree of bending is very limited, and as a result, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail. In addition, when the obstacle nail is bent improperly, the center position of the penetrating portion 2610 and the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail are eccentric. It will be possible to discover.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the description of each drawing, the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following embodiment configurations can be changed.

For example, the correspondence between the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion 2610 constituting the accommodation portion of the obstacle nail is as described above based on the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. The form is not limited to the form, and the form of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610 can be variously changed as follows.

In the example of the penetrating portion 2610a shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. It forms a small convex portion of the cross section. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstacle nail 1220 illegally, traces such as chips and dents are likely to remain in the convex portion, so that fraudulent activity can be easily detected. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

On the other hand, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a illustrated in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 229 (a) to 229 (g), a convex portion facing the obstacle nail 1220 is formed in the central portion of the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. There is. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstacle nail 1220 illegally, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily detected. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail. Further, as compared with the embodiment shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 228 (a) to 228 (c), the convex portion can be easily processed to form the convex portion.

Further, in the example of the penetrating portion 2610a shown in FIGS. 230 (a) to (d) and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 231 (a) to 231 (d), the area cover member 2600a in the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a. A small convex portion having a cross section is formed on either the front side or the panel plate 1110 side. According to such a configuration, when a tool or the like is forcibly inserted to bend the obstacle nail 1220 illegally, traces such as chips and dents remain in the convex portion, so that the illegal act can be easily detected. It is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending an obstacle nail.

Further, in the example shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (e), the front side of the region cover member 2600a in the inner peripheral surface of the penetrating portion 2610a is integrally closed with the region cover member 2600a. It forms a storage recess 2670 that accommodates the nail head. According to such a configuration, since the obstacle nail 1220 cannot be accessed from the front side of the area cover member 2600a, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail 1220. Furthermore, when the above-mentioned closed portion is destroyed and a tool or the like is inserted, the trace remains, so that it becomes easy to detect fraudulent acts and it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Will be.

Further, in the example shown in the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), a rib of about several millimeters may be provided at the open end of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the region cover member 2600a. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult to access the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220 housed in the penetration portion 2610a with a tool for illegally bending the obstacle nail, a piano wire, or the like, and the tool is forced. When such as is inserted, traces such as chips and dents remain on the rib, so that it is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. Further, by providing the rib, the strength of the penetrating portion 2610a can be increased, and the rigidity of the region cover member 2600a itself can be increased.

In addition, in this embodiment and the above-mentioned another embodiment, various embodiments of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail are exemplified, but the penetrating portion having a notched portion and the penetrating portion having a plurality of notched portions are various. It is possible to adopt various forms as long as it accommodates all or part of the obstacle nail in front view and functions as the accommodating portion, including the penetrating portion having a various shape.

Further, a decorative sticker with a decorative pattern may be attached to the front surface of the area cover member 2600 to improve the design of the area cover member 2600 itself, and the outer periphery of the nail head of the obstacle nail. When a tool or the like is forcibly inserted into the gap between the end and the open end of the penetration portion 2610, traces such as scratches and peeling remain on the decorative seal, which facilitates the detection of fraudulent activity. , It is possible to further suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. By attaching a decorative sticker with a through hole corresponding to the penetration portion 2610 to the surface of the area cover member 2600, the decoration of the game area (attached to the so-called game board) at the position behind the obstacle nail. In contrast to the conventional technique in which the cell sheet is only used for decoration (cell decoration), a decorative sticker with a through hole attached to the area cover member 2600 allows the gaming area close to the obstacle nail at the front position of the obstacle nail. The decoration will be realized. In addition, by adopting a decorative sticker attached to the area cover member 2600 together with the cell decoration, three-dimensional decoration is realized on both the rear side and the front side of the obstacle nail, which is an unprecedented game area. New decoration is possible. In this case, the area cover member 2600 is made of a transparent member, and the decorative sticker attached to the area cover member 2600 has a translucent portion that allows the rear cell decorative area to be visually recognized. It is preferable to do so. In the above embodiment, a sheet-shaped decorative seal has been described as an example, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to such a sticker, and the game area where the obstacle nail is planted or the area cover member 2600 is painted or plated. The decoration may be directly applied by a method such as processing.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is formed by itself and attached to the front surface side of the front unit 2000, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the embodiment, and the game panel 1100 is, for example. It may be formed integrally with various prize-winning devices, decorative members, and the like provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the trouble of attaching the area cover member 2600 in the manufacturing process of the gaming machine.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the flow path device 2700 and the right side gaming area 5b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the embodiment, and for example. The area cover member 2600 may be divided into a member that covers the flow path device 2700 and a member that covers the right game area 5b, and may be configured to be attached to the table unit 2000, respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the flow path device 2700 and the right side gaming area 5b are covered with the area cover member 2600, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the embodiment, and the left side gaming area 5'a is included. It is also possible to attach the area cover member 2600 to any position.

For example, the area cover member 2600a of the present invention can be attached to the gaming area shown in the front view of FIG. 225 (a) in the manner shown in the front view of FIG. 225 (b). More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a accommodates a substantially square penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called life nail 1230. Notch-shaped penetration 2650, notch-shaped penetration 2652 to accommodate the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232, and elongated hole shape to accommodate the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233. A through portion 2653 is formed, and the four boss portions 2660 integrally formed with the region cover member 2600a are fixed with screws from the back surface side of the panel plate 1110. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail for each obstacle nail which greatly affects the winning rate of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. Further, since the area cover member 2600a is fixed with screws from the back surface side of the panel plate 1110, the screws cannot be easily accessed, and it is possible to prevent the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail. ing. In this embodiment, the area cover member 2600a is provided so as to accommodate the obstacle nails planted around the first starting port 2002, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and other game areas. In addition, the area cover member 2600a may be provided, and further, the entire gaming area may be covered with a single area cover member 2600a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as shown in the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 211, the penetrating portion 2620 having the notched portion formed in the region cover member 2600 is described by the member forming the outer edge of the gaming region. Although it is configured so that the cross section of the cutout portion is closed, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment, and for example, a center accessory arranged in the game area or an outer wall surface of various winning devices is used. , The cutout portion of the penetrating portion may be closed. Further, the notch portion in the penetrating portion may be provided in any direction of the area cover member 2600. In this case, the notch portion is another component existing at a position facing the notch portion. It may be configured to close.

Further, FIG. 234 illustrates the installation mode of the area cover member 2600 in another embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the obstacle nails 1212 and 1213 are accommodated in the penetration portion 2617 which is the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail, and a notch portion is provided in a part of the penetration portion 2617. Is provided.

Then, in the aspect illustrated in FIG. 234 (a), it is shown that all the obstacle nails including the obstacle nails 1212 and 1213 are in the state position as designed, and there are two in the penetration portion 2617. By locating the nail head of the obstacle nail 1213 inside the line connecting the notch end portion 2617a, it is possible to visually recognize that the obstacle nail 1213 is in the state position as designed.

On the other hand, the aspect illustrated in FIG. 234 (b) shows a state in which the obstacle nail 1213 is illegally bent, and the nail head of the obstacle nail 1213 forms a line connecting the two notched ends 2617a. It is configured so that it is possible to easily visually recognize that the obstacle nail is bent illegally by visually recognizing it in the exceeded state. Note that FIG. 234 (a) shows an example in which the obstacle nail 1213 is inside the line connecting the two notch ends 2617a as designed, but the obstacle nail 1213 has two notches. The area cover member 2600 is formed so that the state of being located on the line connecting the ends 2617a (so that the obstacle nail 1213 overlaps the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a in the front view) is as designed. Even in this case, if the line connecting the two notched ends 2617a is crossed as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the fraud can be easily detected.

By the way, in a pachinko machine as a gaming machine, the ball ejection rate (winning degree) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the board surface of the gaming board. Depending on the payout rate, the number of customers will change significantly, which will greatly affect the sales of the game hall. Therefore, it is necessary to check the state of the obstacle nails at the time of installation of the gaming machine and at appropriate timings after the installation, and to adjust the obstacle nails as necessary. Therefore, conventionally, a nail sheet has been used to easily and accurately check the state of a plurality of obstacle nails and adjust the nails.

As the nail sheet, a translucent or transparent plastic film or paper material is used, and the nail sheet is formed in the form of a thin sheet. Then, a pattern corresponding to each obstacle nail is printed on the surface of the nail sheet in the same manner as the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails to be planted on the game board.

Then, in order to confirm the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails actually planted on the game board and the design gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet, conventionally, it is printed on the nail sheet together with the above gauge arrangement. Various accessory devices and various prize-winning devices are aligned on the upper surface of the various accessory devices and various prize-winning devices that are actually placed on the game board, and then overlapped, and the obstacle nails are planted on the game board. I was checking the gauge arrangement of.

However, in general, in addition to obstacle nails, various members such as multiple winning devices, windmills, stages, decorative members, etc. are arranged on the game board, and the various members are the amount of protrusion of the game machine in the front-rear direction. Is also various. Then, when the thin and freely deformable nail sheet is placed on the game board, it is quite difficult even for a skilled person to arrange the nail sheet so that the nail sheet is not twisted due to the unevenness of the back surface of the nail sheet. As a result, there has been a problem that it is not possible to accurately grasp the consistency between the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails planted on the game board and the gauge arrangement printed on the nail sheet.

Hereinafter, embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of relatively easily confirming the position of an obstacle nail.

FIG. 216 is a front view of the nail sheet 5000 corresponding to the game panel 1100 in the present embodiment. In the nail sheet 5000, the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail printing body 5200 and the patterns of various arrangement members around the obstacle nail printing body 5200 are printed in black on the A4 size transparent film sheet 5100.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 216, the first area is printed on the nail sheet 5000 so that the gauge arrangements at a plurality of locations on the game panel 1100 can be confirmed by utilizing the limited range in the nail sheet 5000. The body 5110 and the second area printing body 5120 are printed, and the gauge arrangement corresponding to the two obstacle nail planting areas and the peripheral arrangement member thereof are printed separately.

When confirming the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails actually planted by using the nail sheet 5000 shown in FIG. 216, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 217, the first area printed body 5110 is used. The outer edge of the area cover member 2600 printed on the surface and the plurality of penetration portions 2610 are accurately aligned and overlapped on the game panel 1100, and the printed obstacle nail printing body 5200 and the obstacle nail planted on the back surface. Check if there is any discrepancy with.

As described above, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment is shown in the enlarged front perspective view of the game panel 1100 in FIG. 211, the arrangement plan view of the obstacle nail in FIG. 213, and the disassembled rear perspective view of the area cover member 2600 in FIG. 214. As shown, the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1201 to 1203 are accommodated in the frontal view circular penetrating portions 2611 to 2613 of the area cover member 2600, respectively, and the elongated hole-shaped penetrating portions 2614 to 2618 are accommodated. , Two of the obstacle nails 1204-1209 and 1212-1215 that are close to each other are accommodated, and the penetration portion 2619 having a longer hole than the penetration portion 2614 to 2618 has three obstacle nails 1216. It is configured to accommodate up to 1218 nail heads. Further, a penetrating portion 2620 having a part of a notch is formed at the right end portion of the area cover member 2600 in front view, and the nail heads of two adjacent obstacle nails 1210 and 1211 are formed in the penetrating portion 2620. The unit is configured to be housed.

Further, as shown in the exploded rear perspective view of FIG. 214, mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are integrally provided on the back side of the area cover member 2600 so that the area cover cannot be removed from the front of the game panel 1100. It is screwed on the back side of the member 2600. Further, as shown in FIG. 214, the screw screwed to the mounting bosses 2630, 2631, 2633 from the rear of the game panel 1100 so that the area cover member 2600 cannot be easily removed from the back side of the game panel 1100. However, the screw screwed to the mounting boss 2632 is blocked by the panel plate 1110 so that the screw cannot be accessed. More specifically, since the mounting bosses 2630 to 2633 are screwed to the front unit 2000 fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screws, the front unit 2000 itself is once removed when the area cover member 2600 is removed. It is configured so that it must be removed from the panel plate 1110.

Further, as shown in the exploded front perspective view of the area cover member 2600 of FIG. 212, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment covers the flow path device 2700 and the right side gaming area 5b in which a plurality of obstacle nails are planted. It is provided on the game panel 1100 in this way, and forms a wide and flat surface on the game panel 1100. Due to such a characteristic configuration, when a very soft nail sheet 5000 is placed on the game panel 1100, it is stacked on the flat surface, which affects various members having different forward protrusions and obstacle nails. It is possible to stably stack the nail sheet 5000 on the game panel 1100 without receiving the nail, even if the person is not an expert, and without causing further twisting.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in the front view of FIG. 208, the big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the right game area 5b, and the big winning opening 2005 is not shown on the front side of the big winning opening 2005. A mouth cover member is provided. Similar to the area cover member 2600, the large winning opening cover member is formed so that the front side and the back side have flat surfaces, and the area cover member 2600 installed above the large winning opening cover member. It is installed so that the front side is flush with each other. With such a configuration, the area cover member 2600 and the large winning opening cover member make it possible to form a flat surface in a wider range on the game panel 1100, and a nail sheet 5000 is further placed on the game panel 1100. It is possible to stack them stably.

Further, as described above, the area cover member 2600 of the present embodiment accommodates the nail head of the obstacle nail as described above based on the enlarged front perspective view of FIG. 211 and the rear perspective view of the game panel 1100 of FIG. 214. A plurality of penetration portions 2610 having different shapes are formed, and in positioning when the nail sheets 5000 are overlapped, the shape of the penetration portion printed on the nail sheet 5000 is easily superimposed on the penetration portion 2610 on the back surface. Moreover, it is possible to accurately align the nail sheet 5000 and quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nail while observing the eccentricity between the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the description of each drawing, the present embodiment is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following embodiment configurations can be changed.

In the above-described embodiment, the area cover member 2600 is configured as a single member that covers the flow path device 2700 and the right side gaming area 5b, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the area cover member is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment. The member 2600 may be configured to be divided into a member covering the flow path device 2700 and a member covering the right game area 5b and provided on the game panel 1100. That is, even if the area cover member 2600 having a flat surface on the front side is divided and mounted on the game panel 1100, one large flat surface can be formed, so that the nail sheet 5000 can be stably used as the area cover member. It can be stacked on the front of the 2600.

Further, the area cover member 2600 may be formed integrally so as to cover a wider range of gaming areas, and such a configuration allows the nail sheet 5000 to be more stably stacked on the front surface of the area cover member 2600. Is.

Further, the area cover member 2600 in the above-described embodiment is composed of a single member capable of covering the flow path device 2700 and the right side game area 5b, but in addition, the area cover member 2600 is in the left side game area 5'a. Any range may be configured to be covered by a single area covering member or a plurality of area covering members, for example, a plurality of areas around the first starting port 2002 as shown in the front view of FIG. 225 (b). One example is to provide the area cover member 2600a for accommodating the obstacle nail. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily and accurately superimpose the nail sheets 5000 at any place on the game panel 1100, and it is possible to quickly confirm the gauge arrangement of the obstacle nails. Become.

(Third Embodiment)
Hereinafter, the third embodiment will be described based on the embodiments shown in FIGS. 208 to 235.

By the way, in pachinko machines as gaming machines, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed, but the obstacle nails are illegally bent by a malicious player or the like, and many game balls are illegally won in the winning opening. There was a fraudulent act. For the purpose of preventing such fraudulent activities, a decorative cover is provided on the winning opening device and the decorative cover is provided so that the obstacle nail for the introduction port, which has been conventionally planted directly above the winning opening device, is not bent illegally. A concentric regulation part was provided at the position corresponding to the obstacle nail for the introduction port. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-188259).

In general, the ball ejection rate (winning degree) is greatly affected by the adjustment of the obstacle nails planted on the surface of the game board, so many players have obstacles when choosing a game table to play. If there is a great deal of interest in the tilting direction of the nail and the condition of the obstacle nail is disadvantageous to the game, there is a tendency not to play the game with the game machine.

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned conventional technique, for example, as shown in FIG. 8 of JP-A-2008-188259, when a player looks into the state of an obstacle nail for an introduction port from the front, the said technique is applicable. Since the relative positional relationship between the obstacle nail for the introduction port and the regulation part forming the penetration part is grasped, the player can tell that the obstacle nail for the introduction port is tilted in a disadvantageous direction with respect to the winning of the game ball. When it was recognized, there was a risk that it would lead to a decline in interest.

Hereinafter, embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest.

In order to cope with the above-mentioned problems, in the present embodiment, as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 218, a region cover member 2600a provided with a penetration portion 2610a for accommodating the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 is provided. The biggest feature is the point.

The area cover member 2600a in the present embodiment exemplified in FIG. 218 has the same basic configuration as the above-mentioned second embodiment, and has the same embodiment as the area cover member 2600 in the second embodiment. The nail head of 1220 is housed in the penetrating portion 2610a.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a in the present embodiment is an obstacle nail 1219 planted in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, which greatly affects the degree of winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 under the above-mentioned problems. The nail head of 1220 is accommodated in the penetrating portion 2610a.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 218 (a), the area cover member 2600a is attached to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 are attached to FIG. 218 ( It is housed in the penetrating portion 2610a in the manner shown in b).

As a method of attaching the area cover member 2600a to the first starting port 2002, as shown in FIG. 218 (c), it is possible to attach the area cover member 2600a to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002 by using a well-known fixing method. It is possible. Further, as shown in FIG. 218 (d), it is also possible to integrally mold and attach the decorative member of the first starting port 2002.

As an example of this embodiment, FIG. 219 illustrates a plurality of embodiments in which the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a formed in the area cover member 2600a is shifted from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220. ing.

That is, in order to solve the above-mentioned conventional problem, the center of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219 and 1220 is placed on the area cover member 2600a without bending or adjusting the obstacle nail 1219 and 1220 actually planted. Is it more advantageous or disadvantageous than the actual planting state of the obstacle nail (such as the bending condition of the obstacle nail) by forming (eccentricizing) the penetrating portion 2610a centered on the position shifted from the position? It is intended to be visually recognized by the player.

For example, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219 (a), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side of the front view is shifted to the left side from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the eccentricity illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is spread outward, and to induce the player's willingness to play the game machine.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219 (b), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the left side of the front view is formed by shifting it to the right side from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward, and to induce the player to play the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219 (c), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on both sides is formed by shifting the center position of the obstacle nail 1219 and 1220 inward from the center position of the nail head. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward, and to induce the motivation to play the game machine.

On the other hand, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219 (d), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the right side of the front view is formed by shifting the center position to the right side of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is bent inward. The player who visually recognizes such an aspect thinks that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous when the game ball is awarded to the first starting port 2002. Since the obstacle nail 1220 on the right side is not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 with a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning mode and improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219 (e), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on the left side of the front view is formed by shifting it to the left side from the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nail 1219. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is bent inward. The player who visually recognizes such an aspect thinks that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, which is disadvantageous when the game ball is awarded to the first starting port 2002. Since the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 with a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning mode and improve the interest in the game.

Further, in the example shown in the front view of FIG. 219 (f), the center position of the penetrating portion 2610a on both sides is formed by shifting the center position to the outside of the center position of the nail head of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220. It is possible to make the player who sees the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are bent inward. The player who visually recognizes such an aspect thinks that the ball passage between the obstacle nail 1219 and the obstacle nail 1220 is narrowed, and is in a disadvantageous situation when the game ball is awarded to the first starting port 2002. Since the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are not bent inward, the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 with a normal winning frequency. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player a surprising winning mode and improve the interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 219 (a) to 219 (f), region cover members 2600a having different formation positions of the penetrating portions 2610a are manufactured and replaced as appropriate for the first starting port 2002. It is very troublesome because it needs to be attached to the decorative part of. Therefore, in the following, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to manufacture a plurality of area cover members 2600a and the time and effort required to store and replace the plurality of area cover members 2600a on the game store side based on FIGS. 220 (a) to 220 (e). An embodiment will be described.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 220 (a), in the present embodiment, four penetrating portions 2610a are formed in one area cover member 2600a, and two penetrating portions 2610a at the lower side are formed at two penetrating portions at the upper side. It is formed inside 2610a. Then, when the illustrated Δ-shaped mark is attached to the decorative portion of the first starting port 2002 with the mark facing upward, as shown in the front view of FIG. 220 (b), the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides The player can visually recognize the center position and the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides in the same state. Further, when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 180 degrees and the Δ-shaped mark is directed downward, the center positions of the penetrating portions 2610a on both sides are determined as shown in the front view of FIG. 220 (c). It can be placed inside the center position of the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides, which gives the player the illusion that the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward. It is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 220 (d), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the right and the Δ-shaped mark is installed toward the right side, the obstacle nail 1219 on the left side is spread outward. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220 (e), when the area cover member 2600a is rotated 90 degrees to the left and the Δ-shaped mark is placed toward the left side, the right side is displayed. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the obstacle nail 1220 is spread upward and slightly outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the visual mode for the player in various ways with one area cover member 2600a without increasing the number of members of the area cover member 2600a.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the description of each drawing, the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above embodiment, and the following embodiments can be changed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 221 (a), it is also possible to form an egg-shaped penetration portion 2610a in the region cover member 2600a and attach it to the first starting port 2002, which is shown in FIG. 221 (b). By moving the area cover member 2600a downward from the installation mode to the installation mode shown in FIG. 221 (c), the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220 on both sides are spread outward to the player who is visually recognized from the front. It is possible to make the illusion like this. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the gaming machine.

Further, the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the penetrating portion 2610a may have various shapes as long as the relative positional relationship between the penetrating portion 2610a and the obstacle nail can be visually recognized by the player. can do. For example, as shown in FIG. 222 (a), the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a can be a substantially square shape in which the R portion is arranged at the corner portion, and is also shown in FIG. 222 (b). It is also possible to make it square.

Further, the penetration portion 2610a of the present invention is not necessarily limited to a closed shape, and as shown in FIG. 222 (c), a penetration portion having a notch shape in the horizontal direction is formed to form an obstacle nail 1219. It may be configured to accommodate 1220 nail heads. Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (d), a notched penetration portion may be formed in an oblique direction to accommodate the nail heads of the obstacle nails 1219 and 1220.

Further, the penetration portion 2610a of the present invention may accommodate a plurality of obstacle nail heads in one penetration portion 2610a from the viewpoint of making the state of the obstacle nail visible. For example, in FIG. 223 (a). As shown in the figure, the shape of the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a is an elongated hole, and the nail heads of a plurality of obstacle nails 1221, 1222 (or 1223, 1224) are accommodated in one penetrating portion 2610a. It is also possible to configure it as such. Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (b), by forming the two elongated through holes 2610a in the area cover member 2600a at the inner position, the obstacle nails 1221 and 1222 can be visually recognized from the front of the player. It is also possible to give the illusion that the, 1223, 1224 are spread outward. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the gaming machine.

Further, in the various embodiments described above, the area cover member is targeted for an obstacle nail planted in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002, such as a so-called life nail that greatly affects the winning rate of the first starting port 2002. Although the installation mode of the 2600a has been described, the installation mode is not necessarily limited to the above-mentioned obstacle nails, and any obstacle nails to be planted in the game area can be used. The area cover member 2600a may be installed to accommodate the obstacle nail in the penetrating portion 2610a. That is, the player is made to visually recognize the relative positional relationship between the nail head of the obstacle nail and the penetrating portion 2610a provided in the area cover member 2600a, and it is disadvantageous whether the state of the obstacle nail is advantageous for the game. If it is possible to recognize whether or not the game is in such a state, it is possible to improve the motivation to play the game machine.

For example, another embodiment illustrated in the front view of FIGS. 225 and 226 shows an installation mode of the area cover member 2600a for accommodating a plurality of obstacle nails planted around the first starting port 2002. More specifically, in the illustrated embodiment, the area cover member 2600a has a substantially square penetrating portion 2651 for accommodating the nail head of the so-called jump nail 1231 and the nail head of the so-called life nail 1230. A notch-shaped penetration 2650 that accommodates the notch-shaped penetration portion 2650 that accommodates the nail heads of the two left guide nails 1232, and a length that accommodates the nail heads of the four right guide nails 1233. A hole-shaped penetration portion 2653 is formed, and the four boss portions 2660 integrally formed with the region cover member 2600a are fixed with screws from the back surface side of the panel plate 1110.

Then, the area cover member 2600a is provided in the manner shown in FIG. 225 (b) with respect to the game area shown in FIG. 225 (a). The area cover member 2600a provided in FIG. 225 (b) is configured so that the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 can be visually recognized by the player in a state that is neither advantageous nor disadvantageous. The nail head of the jump nail 1231 is located at the center of the penetrating portion 2651, and the nail head of the life nail 1230 is located below the penetrating portion 2650.

On the other hand, the area cover member 2600a shown in FIGS. 226 (a) and 226 (b) includes the area cover member 2600a in FIG. The formation correspondence of the penetrating portion 2650 accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is different, and the region cover member 2600a shown in FIG. 226 (a) has a penetrating portion 2651 accommodating the nail head of the jump nail 1231. It is shifted downward to form a long penetrating portion 2650 that accommodates the nail head of the life nail 1230. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 226 (a) has the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 first because of the corresponding positional relationship with each penetrating portion. It is possible to increase the motivation of the player to play the game by illusion that the player is in an advantageous state for winning the starting port 2002.

On the contrary, in the area cover member 2600a shown in FIG. 226 (b), the penetrating portion 2651 accommodating the nail head of the jump nail 1231 is shifted upward, and the penetrating portion 2650 accommodating the nail head of the life nail 1230 is accommodated. Are formed short. With such a configuration, the player who visually recognizes the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 shown in FIG. 226 (b) has the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 first because of the corresponding positional relationship with each penetrating portion. It is possible to increase the interest of the player in selecting the game machine to be played by the illusion that the player is in a disadvantageous state for winning the starting port 2002. In addition, even if it is visually recognized in a seemingly disadvantageous state, the actual state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is not bent in a disadvantageous state for winning, so the winning rate to the first starting port 2002 is high. It doesn't go down. Therefore, the player who played the game while visually recognizing that the state of the jump nail 1231 and the life nail 1230 is in a disadvantageous state is unexpected and uplifted with respect to the relatively good winning rate to the first starting port 2002. You can feel the feeling.

Further, the corresponding positional relationship between the life nail 1230 and the penetrating portion 2650 is not limited to the embodiment shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, and for example, as shown in the front view of FIG. 235, the life nail 1230 The state of the game nail depends on whether the nail head is located inside the line connecting the ends of the notch portion of the penetration portion 2650 or outside the line connecting the ends. It can also be configured to be grasped.

Further, the method of installing the area cover member 2600a on the game panel 1100 is not limited to the above-mentioned method of fixing to the decorative member of the first starting port 2002, and is, for example, the front view of FIG. 223 (c). As shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 223 (d) or FIG. 223 (e), the area cover member 2600a can be fixed to the panel plate 1110 from the front surface side with screws or the like. As a fixing method, the mounting boss may be integrally molded with the panel plate 1110 as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 223 (d), or the panel plate may be integrally molded as shown in the cross-sectional view of FIG. 223 (e). A screw hole may be provided on the 1110 side, and at that time, as shown in the front view of FIG. 223 (c), a mounting portion is arranged below the obstacle nail so as not to interfere with the rolling of the game ball. It is preferable to do so.

Further, the mounting mode of the area cover member 2600a to the panel plate 1110 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIGS. It is also possible to fix the area cover member 2600a, and because of such a configuration, the area cover member 2600a cannot be easily removed from the front side of the gaming machine, so that the act of illegally bending the obstacle nail is prevented. It is possible to prevent it.

In addition, in this embodiment and the above-mentioned another embodiment, various embodiments of the penetrating portion constituting the accommodating portion of the obstacle nail are exemplified, but the penetrating portion having a notched portion and the penetrating portion having a plurality of notched portions are various. It is possible to adopt various forms as long as it accommodates all or part of the obstacle nail in front view and functions as the accommodating portion, including the penetrating portion having a various shape.

By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 207 and the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by the display contents in the predetermined display means. By operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel the interest. However, some players find it troublesome to move their line of sight from a predetermined display means to the movable decorative means provided on the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine, and do not move their line of sight to the movable decorative means that has operated. In such a case, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to fully feel the interest of operating the movable decorative means.

Below, the player finds it troublesome to move his or her line of sight to the movable decoration means provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine, and the movable decoration provided on the frame that constitutes the outer shape of the gaming machine. An embodiment of a gaming machine capable of making a player feel a sufficient interest even when the line of sight is not moved to the means will be described.

236 and 237 show embodiments that are modified from the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 154. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, in the door frame top unit 570, in addition to the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, a frame movable body having a shape imitating a root vegetable is formed up and down. It is configured to have a root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that can move in a direction.

236 (A), 236 (B), 237 (A), and 237 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 236 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 236 (D) and 236 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 237 (C) is a front view showing the internal structure of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. 236 (A), 236 (C), and 236 (D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are in the standby positions in the door frame top unit 570. It shows the stored state. FIG. 236 (B) shows a state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved to the moving position. There is. FIG. 237 (A) shows a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are housed in the standby position in the door frame top unit 570, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved to the moving position. There is. 236 (E) and 237 (B) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 have moved to the moving position.

As shown in FIG. 237 (C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 that imitates a root vegetable leaf on the right side when viewed from the front. Further, it has a root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 that imitates the root of root vegetables on the left side when viewed from the front. The root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 are each made of a white translucent synthetic resin, and the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 is provided inside.

As shown in FIGS. 236 (A) and 236 (B), the lower end portion of the right side connecting linear member 7820 is attached to a predetermined position on the left side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. Further, the lower end portion of the left side connecting linear member 7830 is attached to a predetermined position on the right side of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 when viewed from the front. On the other hand, the upper end of the right side connecting linear member 7820 is connected to the right side vertical movement drive mechanism 7825. Further, the upper end portion of the left side connecting linear member 7830 is connected to the left side vertical movement drive mechanism 7835. The right connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are string-shaped and have a predetermined length.

Specifically, the right side connecting linear member 7820 and the left connecting linear member 7830 are composed of a tubular cable, and inside the right connecting linear member 7820, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. A signal line (not shown) and a feeding line (not shown) for supplying electric power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are provided. The signal line and the feeder line may be configured to be provided inside either the right side connecting line member 7820 or the left side connecting line member 7830. In addition, instead of transmitting a signal or supplying power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 by wire, a signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 wirelessly. A loop antenna or the like may be used to supply power to the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 from the door frame 3 side in a non-contact manner.

The right-side vertical movement drive mechanism 7825 and the left-side vertical movement drive mechanism 7835 each have a rotation mechanism (not shown), and a tubular cable is formed by rotating this rotation mechanism based on the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to wind up and down the right side connecting linear member 7820 and the left side connecting linear member 7830 configured by the above.

An opening (not shown) is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570, and by passing through the opening, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved downward from the state of being stored in the door frame top unit 570. It is possible to set it to be located on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600, or to be stored in the door frame top unit 570 from the state located on the front side of the game board side effect display device 1600. be. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 236 (A), in a state where the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570, the rotation mechanism is rotated in a predetermined direction. As shown in FIG. 237 (A), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be moved so as to be located at the front moving position of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, by rotating the rotation mechanism in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at the front moving position of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 237 (A). It can be moved so as to be located at the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 shown in 236 (A).

As shown in FIG. 237 (C), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 has a root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 inside. Specifically, the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 has a shape along the outer shape of the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 constituting the front surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. It consists of a white printed substrate. As a specific configuration of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, for example, the configuration described above may be adopted for the face substrate 6020. By driving and controlling a plurality of light sources (for example, full-color LEDs) mounted on the front side of the printed circuit board by the peripheral control board 1510, the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802 and the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804 can be controlled. It is possible to make the light emitting decoration mode of a predetermined light emitting color.

As the light emitting mode of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810, the rear wall substrate 6352 may be configured to adopt the same light emitting mode as the above-mentioned light emitting mode. For example, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a portion imitating the root of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810, emits light in white, and the root vegetable frame movable body No. 1 is a portion imitating a leaf. By causing a plurality of light sources corresponding to one cover portion 7802 to emit light in green, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made into a light emitting decoration mode imitating a radish. On the other hand, a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body second cover portion 7804, which is a part imitating a root, are made to emit red light, and a plurality of light sources corresponding to the root vegetable frame movable body first cover portion 7802, which is a part imitating a leaf. By making the light source of the root vegetable frame emit light in green, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 can be made into a light emitting decoration mode imitating a carrot.

An example in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 154 is shown. However, FIGS. 159 to 163, 166 to 169, 172 to 178, and 181 to 181 to FIGS. In the embodiment described with reference to 185, the embodiment provided with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be used. Further, in such an embodiment, the effect mode shown below may be executed. In the embodiment in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 can be operated, among these frame movable bodies. The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to move in response to the operation of at least one frame movable body (movement from the standby position to the moving position, change from the stopped state to the rotating state, etc.).

Hereinafter, an effect mode using the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239. 238 (A) and 238 (B) show the moving state of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), and simulated images imitating the first movable decorative means. It is a time chart which showed the display mode, the moving state of the 2nd movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). Further, FIGS. 239 (A) to 239 (C) are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such an effect mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 238, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. These points are the same in the time charts shown in the drawings such as FIGS. 242, 244, 245, and 249 to 253, which will be described later, and in the staging mode obtained by modifying them.

FIG. 238 (A) shows an effect mode using the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. do. At the same time, at the timing t7, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 239 (A) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state and the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t7. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 starts immediately after this (0.1 second later, etc.).

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image simulating the mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position is dynamically displayed.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the movement to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are also displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

FIG. 239 (B) shows a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable in a state where the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have completed the movement to the moving position at the timing t9. It shows a state in which a simulated image imitating the body 7200 is displayed in a mode imitating a state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. It will be positioned in a stationary state. At the same time, at the timing t14, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which have been displayed so far, is terminated.

FIG. 239 (C) shows a simulated image of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image of the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing t14. It shows the state of moving to the position where it overlaps with the position where it was in front view.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at the timing t22, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. From timing t22 to timing t24, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the standby position. At this time, the simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position is not displayed. At the timing t24, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 238 (B) is a game in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237 has a rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and a left ear frame movable body 7200 as shown in FIG. 163 and the like. It shows the production mode when applied to the machine.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t7, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It will be in reach. At the timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the stopped state in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. At the same time, at the timing t7, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Next, at timing t13, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t14, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. In this state, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 overlaps the display position of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 in the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. It will be positioned in a stationary state. At the same time, at the timing t14, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear frame movable body 7100, and the left ear frame movable body 7200, which have been displayed so far, is terminated.

Next, at timing t18, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t19, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. At the timing t24, the states of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

During the game, the player is in a state of continuing to watch a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in which the effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. A simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means is displayed on a predetermined display means in accordance with the drive control of the provided first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). As a result, the player is notified that the first movable decoration means is drive-controlled, so that the player does not notice that the first movable decoration means is drive-controlled. , The situation that the player cannot feel the interest caused by the drive control of the first movable decorative means, or the player carelessly contacts the first movable decorative means and is injured. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

On the other hand, a player who is reluctant to visually recognize the drive control of the first movable decorative means due to feeling tired directly indicates that the first movable decorative means is driven and controlled. Instead of visually recognizing, it is possible to virtually experience the operation of the first movable decorative means by seeing a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means displayed on a predetermined display means.

Further, since the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves to a position that overlaps with the display position of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means in the front view, the first movable To impose a burden such as moving the line of sight on a passive player who does not move the line of sight to the first movable decorative means even though he / she is aware that the decorative means is driven and controlled. Instead, it is possible to have people feel the excitement of moving the second movable decorative means. In addition, it is possible to have such a passive player regain the positiveness of the game.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured to move to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 at timing t13. , In addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame. An effect mode that continues to be located in the standby position in the top unit 570 may also be configured to be feasible. With such a configuration, after displaying the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 makes the right ear frame movable body 7100. An effect mode in which the simulated image and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to a position where they overlap with each other in front view, and an effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 continues to be located in the standby position. And can be executed.

Further, when the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves is executed, the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher than in the case where the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 does not move is executed. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, after displaying a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body) The first effect mode in which the 7800) is driven and controlled to move to a position that overlaps with the display position of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means in the front view, and the second movable decorative means are on standby. Since the second effect mode that continues to be located at the position is executed, the player is interested in whether or not the second movable decorative means moves.

Further, in the case where the first effect mode is executed and the case where the second effect mode is executed, the state in which the first effect mode is executed is more advantageous to the player (big hit state). When configured to increase the degree of expectation generated, it is possible to further increase the player's interest in the movement of the second movable decorative means.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B), the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600 from timing t13 to timing t14. Although it is configured, it may be configured to provide a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the front of the game board side effect display device 1600. For example, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position intermediate between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then returned to the standby position (timing t15). Or, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position between the standby position and the moving position (between timing t13 and timing t14), and then moved to the moving position (timing t15). May be configured to run. In this case, it is preferable to configure the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 so that the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to the moving position.

Alternatively, during the period (timing t14 to timing t18) from the completion of the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the game board side effect display device 1600 to the start of movement into the door frame top unit 570, the root vegetable frame movable body In addition to the mode in which the 7800 is stopped in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, the 7800 may be configured to move in a predetermined operation mode within the range in front of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to provide a plurality of operation modes when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves into the door frame top unit 570 and returns. For example, in addition to the effect mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 returns from the moving position to the standby position from the timing t18 to the timing t19, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is temporarily stopped at a position between the standby position and the moving position. (Between timing t18 and timing t19), and then the state of returning to the standby position (timing t20) may be configured to execute the effect mode.

The mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the standby position to the moving position, the mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves, and the mode in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves from the moving position to the standby position are shown. The operation mode combining the above operation modes may be adopted as a plurality of operation modes for operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Further, the degree of expectation that a big hit state may occur may be different depending on the plurality of operation modes.

With such a configuration, in addition to whether or not the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) moves, if it moves, drive control is performed in one of a plurality of operation modes. Therefore, in addition to whether or not the second movable decorative means moves, the player is interested in how the second movable decorative means moves.

Further, when the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) is generated differs depending on the operation mode, the player determines in what mode the second movable decorative means moves. It is possible to raise the expectation of.

The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be configured to be turned off until the movement of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the front is completed, and to be in a light emitting decorative state when the movement to the moving position is completed. .. Specifically, from timing t13 to timing t14, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is turned off, and at the timing t14 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is set to the light emitting decorative state. , It is preferable to continue the light emitting decoration state until the timing t18 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving to the storage position. Alternatively, it is preferable to continue the light emitting decoration state until the timing t19 when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 completes the movement to the storage position. As the light emitting decoration state, either one of the above-mentioned light emitting mode imitating radish and the light emitting mode imitating carrot may be selected based on the special lottery result.

In this way, after moving the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) to the moving position in front of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in the off state, the light emitting decoration is performed at the moving position. By making it in a state, it is possible to give a big surprise to the player. Further, by setting the light emitting decoration state based on the special lottery result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the special lottery result will be in an advantageous state (big hit) for the player. Further, when the second movable decorative means is stored in the standby position, the light emitting decorative state is continued, so that the interest in the first movable decorative means located on the extension line in the moving direction of the second movable decorative means is raised. It is possible to make the player hold it.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239, at the same time as the operation of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started, in the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. , The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 is started. Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238 (A), at the same time as the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the moving position is completed, the game board side effect display device 1600 is used. In the display area substantially in the center, a display is configured to complete the movement of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the moving position. Further, the right ear frame is movable from the standby position to the moving position as in the timing t9 to the timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 238 (A) and the timing t7 to the timing t14 in the embodiment shown in FIG. 238 (B). In the same manner as the operating state of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 located in the standby position from the non-rotating state to the rotating state, in these periods. , It is preferable to display a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200.

With such a configuration, the first movable decorative means is changed from the first state (the state located in the standby position) to the second state (the state located in the moving position or the rotating state). The state of (the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200) can be accurately grasped by visually recognizing a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600).

On the other hand, in a mode different from the operating state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200, a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed. It may be configured to do so.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 238 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 move and appear from timing t7 to timing t9. Although the target display is performed, this dynamic display may be configured to be performed again from timing t9 to timing t11, and further from timing t11 to timing t13.

In this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving state). Even after the change, the player can be first moved by dynamically displaying a simulated image imitating the operation mode of the first movable decorative means in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). It is possible to get interested in the operation of the decorative means. In the above-mentioned example, such a dynamic display is performed twice (a period from timing t9 to timing t11 and a period from timing t11 to timing t13), but the number of times of dynamic display may be one. It may be 3 times or more.

Further, at the timing t9 in the example shown in FIG. 238 (A), the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, and the effect display device on the game board side is separated. It may be configured to start moving upward in the display area of 1600 and then ascend in the display area to complete the movement out of the display area at timing t11. Further, from the timing t11 to the timing t13, the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to perform the same dynamic display. FIG. 240 (A) is a diagram showing the state of the timing t10 in such an embodiment, and the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is separated from the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. It shows the state of moving upward.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving position). After changing to the positioned state), in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear). A simulated image simulating the frame movable body 7200) is configured to move in a predetermined direction suggesting a position where the first movable decorative means is provided. Further, the first movable decorative means is configured to be located on an extension line in the moving direction of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means in the front view.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decorative means operates from the first state to the second state. In addition, the position where the first movable decoration means is provided can be directly suggested, and the player can be interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Further, the movement that cannot be the actual movement of the first movable decoration means is performed by a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, and in this respect as well, the player is interested in the movement of the first movable decoration means. It will be possible to have it brought to.

Alternatively, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the example shown in FIG. 238 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed on the door frame top unit 570. It may be configured to dynamically display the imitated simulated images so that they appear alternately. FIG. 240 (B) shows a state in which a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 is half stored with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570.

In this example, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body changes from the first state (standby state) to the second state (moving position). After changing to the positioned state), in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear). (Simulated image imitating the frame movable body 7200) is configured to be displayed in a mode of reciprocating and moving in a predetermined direction. Further, the first movable decorative means is configured to be located on an extension line in the direction of reciprocating movement in the front view.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the first movable decorative means operates from the first state to the second state. In addition, it is possible to suggest the position where the first movable decoration means is provided, and it is possible to make the player interested in the operation of the first movable decoration means. Further, the comical display of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means makes it possible for the player to be interested in the operation of the first movable decorative means.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 240 (A) and 240 (B), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is used. After changing from the first state (standby state) to the second state (state located at the moving position), in the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), the first movable decorative means is the first. In a mode different from the mode of changing from the state of It is composed.

With such a configuration, it becomes possible for the player to be interested in what the actual operation mode of the first movable decorative means is.

On the other hand, from timing t9 to timing t14 in the production mode shown in FIG. 238 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are dynamically displayed in predetermined colors. It may be configured to do so. For example, in a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100, an image in which the part imitating the inside of the ear is red and the part imitating the outside of the ear is white is displayed, and then the colors are exchanged to change the ear. The display operation of displaying an image in which the part imitating the inside of the ear is white and the part imitating the outside of the ear is red may be repeated a plurality of times (for example, the color is changed every second for a total of 5 times). .. Further, such a display operation may be simultaneously performed in a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. FIG. 241 (A) shows a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It is a figure which showed the state which displayed the image which the imitated part is red.

On the other hand, the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to continue to be displayed in a predetermined color without changing the colors. FIG. 241 (B) shows, as simulated images simulating the right ear frame movable body 7100, an image in which both the portion simulating the inside of the ear and the portion simulating the outside of the ear are pink, and the left ear frame movable body 7200. As a simulated image simulating the above, it is a figure showing an effect mode that continuously displays an image in which both the portion simulating the inside of the ear and the portion simulating the outside of the ear are pink.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in what the actual light emitting effect mode of the first movable decorative means is.

The degree of expectation that a big hit state may occur may be different depending on each effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 240 and 241. For example, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 240 (A) is configured so that the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher than the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 240 (B). May be good. Further, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 241 (A) is configured so that the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher than the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 241 (B). May be good.

Further, it may be configured to execute an effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 240 and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 241 are combined. For example, the effect described with reference to FIG. 240 (B) rather than the effect mode in which the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 240 (A) and the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 241 (A) are combined. The staging mode in which the mode and the staging mode described with reference to FIG. 241 (B) may be combined may be configured so that the expectation that a big hit state will occur is higher.

Further, it is preferable to configure the staging mode in which the expectation that the big hit state is generated is higher so that the ratio of the staging mode being executed is lower. For example, the ratio of the number of executions of the effect mode with the lower expectation that the big hit state occurs to the number of executions of the effect mode with the higher expectation that the big hit state occurs is 9: 1. It is good to set the execution ratio.

With such a configuration, a simulated image (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100) that imitates the first movable decorative means displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By having a plurality of display modes (simulated images imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200), the monotony as an effect is eliminated, and it becomes possible for the player to have an interest in the first movable decorative means. .. In addition, the act of directly visually recognizing the operation of the first movable decorative means and the act of visually recognizing a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means to know the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with an interest in which action to enjoy.

Further, since the display mode of the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means indicates to the player the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) will occur, the first movable decorative means is visually recognized. In particular, it is possible to remind the passive player of the presence of the first movable decorative means.

In addition, the higher the expectation that a state advantageous to the player (big hit state) will occur, the lower the rate at which the effect mode will be executed. Although many aspects are visually recognized, in rare cases (for example, once in 10 times), it is surprising to see an effect mode with a high degree of expectation and a low execution rate. Then, the player who visually recognizes the latter effect mode is excited by the fact that the expectation is high, and the player becomes more interested in the first movable decorative means.

The light emitting state of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 is emitted so as to be recognized in the same manner as the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to cause. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 241 (A), the outside of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be made to emit red light, or in the state shown in FIG. 241 (B), the right ear. The frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to emit light in pink.

As described above, the light emitting mode in the second state (state located at the moving position) of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body is predetermined. Simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200) displayed in the display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By making it the same as the image color of the image), the player who has visually recognized the predetermined display means quickly recognizes the first movable decorative means when he / she tries to visually recognize the first movable decorative means. Is possible.

In the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved in a configuration in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in an manner according to the result of the special lottery after the variation of the decorative symbol is started. It may be configured as follows.

For example, when operating the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the decorative symbol starts to change at the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the decorative symbol is changing from the state where the decorative symbol is changing. Is moved to the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is displayed in a variable manner in a reduced size. And may be configured to start displaying a simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further, root vegetables are moved from a position overlapping the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the frame movable body 7800 in the direction of storing it in the door frame top unit 570, the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right until then is moved to the approximate center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and then the original size. It is preferable to expand to the above to continue the variable display, and finally to stop the display in a manner suggesting the lottery result.

When such a variation mode of the decorative symbol is adopted, the variation of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times in the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600.

With such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of a predetermined display means (substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600), and the first movable decorative means (movable right ear frame). For a passive player who feels stress in visually recognizing the drive control of the body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200), a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means and the second movable The movement of the decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) makes the player feel that the movement of the line of sight is forced, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels stress.

The decorative symbol starts to change at the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and is smaller in size than the decorative symbol displayed at the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 at the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600. The game board side is in a state where the change display of the changing decorative pattern is continued in the upper right of the game board side staging display device 1600 from the state where the change of the decorative pattern is started and each decorative pattern is changed. The display of the decorative pattern displayed in the substantially center of the staging display device 1600 is temporarily terminated, and in the substantially center of the staging display device 1600 on the game board side, a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body. It may be configured to start displaying a simulated image imitating the 7200.

After that, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the standby position to a position overlapping the display area substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600, and further, the root vegetable frame is movable from the position overlapping the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600. After moving the body 7800 in the direction of storing it in the door frame top unit 570, the variable display of the decorative symbol in the substantially center of the game board side staging display device 1600 was resumed, and finally together with the decorative symbol displayed in the upper right. , It may be configured to stop and display each of the lottery results in a manner suggesting.

When such a variation mode of the decorative symbol is adopted, the variation of the decorative symbol is repeated a plurality of times in the substantially center and the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600.

With such a configuration, the line of sight of the player stays at a predetermined position of a predetermined display means (substantially in the center of the game board side effect display device 1600 on which a relatively large decorative pattern is displayed). , The first movable decorative means for a passive player who feels stress in visually recognizing the drive control of the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200). By displaying a simulated image imitating the above and moving the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800), it makes the player feel that the movement of the line of sight is forced, and the occurrence of a situation where the player feels stress is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

An example of displaying a small decorative pattern on the upper right of the game board side effect display device 1600 is shown, but it is configured to be displayed on the lower right or lower left of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is configured. The period of moving from the standby position to the moving position (timing t13 to timing t14 in FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B)), the period of moving from the moving position (timing t14 to timing t18), and the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. During the period of moving from the position to the standby position (timing t18 to timing t19 in FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B)), the small decorative pattern is configured so as not to be hidden by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. You may. Specifically, during these periods, it is preferable to configure the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 so that the small decorative design does not overlap in the front view.

In this way, the movement of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) causes the game board side effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined position (a relatively small decorative pattern is displayed) of the predetermined display means. By configuring the decorative pattern displayed in the lower right or lower left) so as not to be hidden, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a passive player feels that the production is excessive.

In the effect mode described later with reference to FIGS. 244 and 245, these display methods may be adopted when displaying a simulated image and a decorative pattern imitating a modeled body on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Corresponding to the display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in the game board side effect display device 1600. It may be configured to display the indicated waiting time. Hereinafter, a plurality of display modes will be shown with reference to FIGS. 242 (A) and 242 (B). FIG. 242 (A) shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238 (A). Further, FIG. 242 (B) shows a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238 (B).

The display of the standby time is, for example, "1" from timing t8 to timing t9 in the display area between the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. The numbers are displayed, the number "2" is displayed from timing t9 to timing t10, the number "3" is displayed from timing t10 to timing t11, and the number "4" is displayed from timing t11 to timing t12. From the timing t12 to the timing t13, the character string "GO !!" (note that the notation is abbreviated as "GO" in FIG. 242 (A)) may be displayed. In addition to displaying such numbers and letters, from timing t7 to timing t8, the character string "If root vegetables fall ...?" Is displayed as a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame. It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200.

Alternatively, from timing t7 to timing t13 without displaying such numbers and letters, the character string "If root vegetables fall ...?" Is displayed as a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame. It may be configured to be displayed in the display area between the simulated image imitating the movable body 7200.

Images suggesting the waiting time until the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates in this way (“1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, “GO !!”) By adopting a configuration in which the display is performed by a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) is to be visually recognized. It becomes possible for the player to recognize the timing at which the second movable decorative means operates, and the game in which the line of sight is moved to the first movable decorative means by displaying a simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a person overlooks the operation of the second movable decorative means. Further, for a passive player who does not move his / her line of sight to the first movable decorative means, the operation timing of the second movable decorative means is suggested, so that the line of sight is moved from the predetermined display means. It is possible to make the operation of the second movable decorative means wait without causing the movement.

Further, an image suggesting that the second movable decorative means operates at a predetermined timing at the same timing (timing t7) as the timing for displaying the simulated image imitating the first movable decorative means (“Root vegetables fall off”). By displaying "B ...?"), The player can simultaneously recognize that the first movable decorative means is operating and the second movable decorative means is operating, and moves the line of sight. In particular, the aggressive player has moved his or her line of sight to the first movable decorative means first, and is unaware that the display suggesting that the second movable decorative means operates is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation of the second movable decorative means is overlooked.

Further, by displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates adjacent to the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, the player can perform the second movable decoration. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which an image suggesting a waiting time until the means operates is not noticed.

An example of displaying an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decorative means operates in the display area between the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. However, the second movable decorative means operates so as to overlap one or both of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200. It may be configured to display an image suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decoration means operates or an image suggesting that the second movable decorative means operates.

By adopting such a configuration, an image suggesting that the player waits until the second movable decorative means operates and an image suggesting that the second movable decorative means operates are displayed. It is possible to further suppress the occurrence of situations such as not being aware of the situation.

Corresponding to the display of the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, when the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves in the game board side effect display device 1600. Although an example of displaying the waiting time to be shown is shown, the same suggestion may be made by sound instead of or in addition to such a display. For example, in the display area between the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200, the timing is as shown in FIGS. 242 (A) and 242 (B). The voice "Ichi" is output from t8 to timing t9, the voice "ni" is output from timing t9 to timing t10, the voice "san" is output from timing t10 to timing t11, and the voice "san" is output from timing t11 to timing t12. The voice "Yon" may be output, and the voice "Go" may be output from the timing t12 to the timing t13. Alternatively, from timing t7 to timing t13, the line "If you want to mess up" is output as voice, or some kind of melody (a melody of about 6 seconds that is completed at least at timing t13) is output. It may be configured.

By adopting a configuration that outputs a sound suggesting a waiting time until the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) operates in this way, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100) is adopted. , The player who intends to visually recognize the left ear frame movable body 7200) can visually recognize the timing at which the second movable decorative means operates even when the line of sight is moved to the first movable decorative means. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the operation of the first movable decoration means until just before the operation of the second movable decoration means.

Further, in the case of a player who does not move his / her line of sight to the first movable decorative means, he / she visually recognizes a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in which an effect based on the lottery result of the lottery means is performed. The act itself does not necessarily continue to be visually recognized by the predetermined display means by operating a mobile phone or a smartphone, but the operation timing of the second movable decorative means is audibly indicated to the player by sound. Therefore, it is possible to restore the motivation to visually recognize the predetermined display means and the second movable decorative means.

With reference to FIGS. 238 (A) and 238 (B), an embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves to a position where it overlaps with a simulated image imitating the left and right ear frame movable bodies in front view is shown. After moving the frame movable body 7800 to the moving position, it may be configured to periodically move up and down at the moving position. For example, in the four seconds from timing t14 to timing t18, the operation of moving up and then moving down once per second may be performed so as to repeat such up and down movements a total of four times. .. In the movement at this time, at least a part of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is viewed from the front in the area where the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the simulated image imitating the left ear frame movable body 7200 are displayed. It is preferable to configure it so that it moves within the range where it overlaps with.

In this way, the position where the simulated image imitating the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) and the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) was displayed. After moving to a moving position that overlaps with the front view, at least a part of the second movable decoration means moves so as to overlap with the area where the simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a passive player feels stress due to the movement of the second movable decorative means after the movement to the moving position.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237, since the player can directly contact the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the player is injured by the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has fallen downward. Or, there is a possibility that the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 may be pulled downward by the player and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 or the like may be destroyed. Therefore, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 236 and 237 will be described below with reference to FIG. 243. In this embodiment, it is difficult for the player to come into contact with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

243 (A) and 243 (B) are front views of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 243 (C) is a plan view of the pachinko machine 1. 243 (D) and 243 (E) are right side views of the pachinko machine 1. 243 (A), 243 (C), and 243 (D) show that the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are in the standby positions in the door frame top unit 570. It shows the stored state. 243 (B) and 243 (E) show a state in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 have moved to the moving position of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

As shown in FIG. 243, in the present embodiment, the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 that covers the moving area of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is provided. The root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 is provided in front of the door frame base unit 100 and below the door frame top unit 570, and has a square shape when viewed from the front and a right triangle shape when viewed from the side. The front part of the cover unit 7854 that covers the square part formed on the front by the cover unit frame 7852, the right side part 7856 of the cover unit that covers the right-angled triangular part formed on the left and right sides by the cover unit frame 7852, and the left side of the cover unit. It is composed of a face portion 7858.

The cover unit frame 7852 is made of a colored (specifically green) opaque synthetic resin. In addition, in order to increase the strength of the cover unit frame 7852, it may be made of metal. Further, the cover unit frame 7852 has a function of holding the cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left surface portion 7858.

The front surface portion 7854 of the cover unit, the right side surface portion 7856 of the cover unit, and the left side surface portion 7858 of the cover unit are each formed of a flat plate-shaped, colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The front portion 7854 of the cover unit is configured to be attached to the cover unit frame 7852 in a state of being tilted so that the upper portion thereof is located on the front side in a side view. The right side surface portion 7856 of the cover unit and the left side surface portion 7858 of the cover unit are provided so as to face each other at the left and right end portions of the gaming machine.

The player can visually recognize the operating state of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 via the colorless and transparent cover unit front portion 7854. Further, a player who plays a game on an adjacent gaming machine may visually recognize a state in which the game board side effect display device 1600 and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are operated via the cover unit right side surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858. It is possible.

In a gaming machine adopting such a configuration, the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 238 and the like may be executed.

In this way, the protective members (cover unit front portion 7854, cover unit right surface portion 7856, cover unit left surface portion 7858) are arranged so as to surround the moving area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). By making it difficult for the player to come into contact with the second movable decorative means and adopting a configuration in which the second movable decorative means can be visually recognized by the player via the transparent protective member, the second is used. While maintaining the visibility of the movable decorative means of the above and the impact given to the player when the second movable decorative means is operated, the situation where the player is injured by the movement of the second movable decorative means, and so on. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the second movable decorative means is destroyed by the player.

Although the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 154 is modified to provide the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850, FIGS. 159 to 163, FIGS. 166 to 169, and FIG. 172 are shown. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 178 and 181 to 185, an embodiment in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 are provided may be used. Further, in such an embodiment, each effect mode described in the present specification may be configured to be executed.

An example is shown in which the cover unit frame 7852 holds the cover unit front surface portion 7854, the cover unit right surface portion 7856, and the cover unit left surface portion 7858, but one or both of the cover unit right surface portion 7856 and the cover unit left surface portion 7858 may be used. It may be configured not to be provided. For example, the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854, or the cover unit frame 7852 may have only the cover unit front portion 7854 and the cover unit left side surface portion 7858.

In this way, the protective member (cover unit front portion 7854, or cover unit front portion 7854 and cover unit right side surface portion 7856, or cover unit front) so as to surround the moving area of the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800). The portion 7854 and the left side surface portion 7858 of the cover unit) are arranged to make contact with the second movable decorative means from the side (from the right side and the left side, or from the left side only, or from the right side only). By making it possible and adopting a configuration in which the player can visually recognize the second movable decorative means via the protective member, the visibility of the second movable decorative means and when the second movable decorative means operates. A situation in which the player is injured by the movement of the second movable decorative means while maintaining the impact on the player, or a situation in which the player impulsively destroys the second movable decorative means. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of. Further, since it is possible to contact the second movable decorative means from the side surface where the protective member is not provided, even if any abnormality occurs in the second movable decorative means, maintenance such as repair can be performed by the clerk of the amusement shop. Etc. can be done.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 236 to 243 and the like, the player is fully made to feel the interest of operating the movable decorative means provided on the frame body constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine. Even if this is not possible, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the interest felt by the player is reduced.

By the way, in the gaming machines described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 207 and the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-093655, the progress state of the game is shown to the player by the display contents in the predetermined display means. By driving the shaped body provided on the frame body constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing, it is possible to make the player feel the interest. However, there is room for improvement in the production mode when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame body.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of a gaming machine capable of making a player feel a sufficient interest even if the frame has a plurality of driveable shaped bodies will be described.

The gaming machines in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 172 and the like are the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 (hereinafter, “ear inner frame movable body”, which are frame movable bodies that imitate the inside of the ear. (Sometimes referred to as "body"), right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "ear outer frame movable body"), which are frame movable bodies that imitate the outside of the ear. These four frame movable bodies can independently take a state of being located in the standby position and a state of being located in the moving position.

Hereinafter, a first effect mode using the outer ear frame movable body and a second effect mode using the inner ear frame movable body will be described with reference to FIGS. 244, 245, 246, and 247. .. 244 and 245 are time charts for the first effect mode and the second effect mode, and FIGS. 246 and 247 are front views showing the state of the gaming machine at a predetermined timing of such an effect mode. ..

Hereinafter, the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 (A) and 246. The staging mode shown in FIGS. 244 (A) and 244 (B) has a movable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear outer frame movable body as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 172. The production mode applicable to the gaming machine is shown.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At timing t8, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upper moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To start. At the same time, at the timing t8, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 246 (A) shows a state in which the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t8. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started immediately after this (0.1 second later, etc.).

From timing t8 to timing t10, drive control is performed in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to the moving position and a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the moving position are dynamically displayed. Will be done.

Then, at the timing t10, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 complete the movement to the moving position. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are also displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

FIG. 246 (B) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left in a state where the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 have completed the movement to the moving position at timing t10. It shows a state in which a simulated image imitating a movable body 7450 on the outer side of the ear is displayed in a mode imitating a state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 continue to be positioned at the moving positions. At the same time, the display of the simulated image in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 is located in the moving position and the simulated image in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is located in the moving position is continued.

Next, at the timing t16, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and a simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are dynamically displayed in a mode of starting the movement to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 move to the standby position. A simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 moves to the standby position and a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. ..

At the timing t18, the movement of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 to the standby position is completed, and the door frame top unit 570 is housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the simulated image imitating the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after the state in which only the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed ends and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 (B) and 247. First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At the timing t5, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600.

FIG. 247 (A) shows a state in which the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is started at the timing t5. The display of the simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started immediately after this (0.1 second later, etc.).

From timing t5 to timing t7, a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the moving position and a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the moving position. Is displayed dynamically.

At the timing t7, a simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

FIG. 247 (B) imitates the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 in a state where the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are still housed in the door frame top unit 570 at timing t7. The simulated image and the simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed in a mode imitating the state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

Next, at timing t8, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are moved upward from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. Start moving.

Then, at the timing t10, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 complete the movement to the moving position.

FIG. 247 (C) shows a simulated image simulating the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left in a state where the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and the left ear medial frame movable body 7400 have completed the movement to the moving position at timing t10. It shows a state in which a simulated image imitating the movable body 7400 of the inner ear frame is displayed in a mode imitating a state in which the movement to the moving position is completed.

From timing t10 to timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 continue to be positioned at the moving positions. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 is located in the moving position and a simulated image imitating the mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is located in the moving position are displayed.

Next, at the timing t16, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are dynamically displayed in a mode of starting the movement to the standby position.

From timing t16 to timing t18, drive control is performed in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 move to the standby position. A simulated image that imitates the mode in which the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 moves to the standby position and a simulated image that imitates the mode in which the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 moves to the standby position are dynamically displayed. ..

At the timing t18, the movement of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 to the standby position is completed, and the door frame top unit 570 is housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display mode of the simulated image imitating the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the simulated image imitating the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 becomes the display mode in which the movement to the standby position is completed. Specifically, after the state in which only the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is displayed for a moment, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 also ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t18, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed ends and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are driven and controlled in the second production mode, are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350, which are driven and controlled in the first production mode. Compared to the body 7450, the area of the front view in the state of being moved to the moving position is smaller. Therefore, in the second effect mode, after starting to display a simulated image imitating the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the inside of the right ear. By controlling the drive of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, the volume feeling as an effect is supplemented.

It should be noted that the first effect mode and the second effect mode shown in FIGS. 244 (A) and 244 (B) are movable bodies in the inner ear frame, as in the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 172. Although an example of application to a gaming machine having a movable ear outer frame is shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 173. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body moves from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, the simulated image of the inner ear frame movable body is also displayed from above in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is a display mode that moves downward. Further, it may be applied to the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 174 and 175. In this case, since the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are moved from the lower standby position to the upper moving position, respectively, the simulated images of the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are also played. It is a display mode that moves from the lower side to the upper side in the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600. Alternatively, the inner ear frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are moved from the upper standby position to the lower moving position, respectively, and the simulated images of the inner ear inner frame movable body and the outer ear outer frame movable body are also on the game board side. It may be an effect mode in which the display mode moves from the upper side to the lower side in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (A). The staging mode shown in FIGS. 245 (A) and 245 (B) can be applied to a gaming machine having a rotatable inner ear frame movable body and an outer ear outer frame movable body as shown in FIGS. 178 and 181. The production mode is shown.

First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At the timing t8, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. .. At the same time, at the timing t8, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600. The right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic manner imitating a rotated state.

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotational state of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450, and the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left in the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of the simulated image imitating the movable ear outer frame 7450 is continued.

At the timing t18, the states of the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 change from the rotational state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, the second effect mode will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (B). First, at a predetermined timing before timing t0, the decorative symbol starts to change in the game board side effect display device 1600, and at timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols temporarily stop at the same symbol, and only the central decorative symbol changes. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4").

At the timing t5, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 is started on the game board side effect display device 1600. The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 in a dynamic manner imitating a rotated state.

At the timing t8, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 change from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotated state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. ..

From timing t8 to timing t18, the rotation state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left in the game board side effect display device 1600. The display of the simulated image imitating the movable inner frame of the ear 7400 is continued.

At the timing t18, the state of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 changes from the rotational state to the stopped state housed in the door frame top unit 570. At the same time, the display of the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 ends.

At a predetermined timing after timing t24, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

The right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, which are driven and controlled in the second production mode, are the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7350, which are driven and controlled in the first production mode. Compared to the body 7450, the maximum area visually recognizable in the front view in the rotated state is smaller. Therefore, in the second effect mode, after starting to display a simulated image imitating the right ear medial frame movable body 7300 and a simulated image imitating the left ear medial frame movable body 7400, after a lapse of a predetermined time, the inside of the right ear. By controlling the drive of the frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body, it is configured to supplement the voluminous feeling as an effect.

As described above, the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450) provided on the frame body and the second modeled body (right ear inner frame movable body 7300) provided on the frame body. In a game machine capable of driving and controlling the left ear inner frame movable body 7400), the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) starts displaying a simulated image imitating the second modeled body. It is configured to start driving the second model at the timing when time has passed. As a result, even when a plurality of shaped bodies are provided on the frame body, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the production using the second shaped body. Further, by displaying a simulated image imitating the second model in advance on the predetermined display means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the drive control of the second model. ..

In addition, among the plurality of shaped bodies (first modeled body and second modeled body) provided in the game machine, the size of the modeled body itself and the amount of visual change when the modeled body is driven and controlled are relative. In performing the drive control of the second model, which is small and the drive control is inconspicuous, the second model is displayed at the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the display of the simulated image imitating the second model is started. It is configured to start driving the model. As a result, it is possible to visually increase the sense of volume in the production using the second model, in which the amount of visual change when the size and drive control are small is small and the drive control is inconspicuous. Become. Further, by displaying a simulated image imitating the second model in advance on a predetermined display means, the drive of the second model is likely to be overlooked due to its relatively small size and the like. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the control.

Further, at the timing corresponding to the drive of the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and left ear outer frame movable body 7450), a simulated image imitating the first modeled body is displayed by a predetermined display means (game board). By displaying it on the side effect display device 1600), it is possible to show the player that the first modeled body is driven and controlled.

Hereinafter, a modification of the first effect mode and the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 244 will be described with reference to FIG. 248.

FIG. 248 (A) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the first modeled object in the first staging mode described with reference to FIG. 244 (A). In the first modification, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t7 to timing t9. Further, in the second modification, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from timing t9 to timing t11. Further, in the modification 3, the display for changing the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9, and then the display simulating the second state is performed. Ends at the timing t11, and displays the simulated image of the first modeled object from the first state to the second state from the timing t11 to the timing t13.

As described above, the timing of starting the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled object may be slightly different from the timing of starting the drive control of the first modeled object. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled body is finished may be set before the timing at which the first modeled body is in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

FIG. 248 (B) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second staging mode described with reference to FIG. 244 (B). In the first modification, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t8. Further, in the modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t9.

In this way, as a simulated image of the second model, an image simulating the state in which the second model is driven and controlled to be in the second state is suddenly displayed, and the drive control of the second model is performed. It may be configured to continue displaying until the start timing. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

Hereinafter, a modification of the first effect mode and the second effect mode described with reference to FIG. 245 will be described with reference to FIG. 249.

FIG. 249 (A) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the first modeled object in the first effect mode described with reference to FIG. 245 (A). In the first modification, the simulated image of the first model is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t18. Further, in the second modification, the simulated image of the first model is displayed from the timing t9 to the timing t18. Further, in the modification 3, the simulated image of the first model is displayed from the timing t7 to the timing t13.

As described above, the timing of starting the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled object may be slightly different from the timing of starting the drive control of the first modeled object. Alternatively, the timing at which the display of the simulated image imitating the first modeled body is finished may be set before the timing at which the first modeled body is in the first state. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

FIG. 249 (B) shows a modified example of the display mode of the simulated image of the second modeled object in the second staging mode described with reference to FIG. 245 (B). In the first modification, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t8. Further, in the modification 2, the simulated image of the second modeled body in the second state is displayed from the timing t5 to the timing t9.

In this way, as a simulated image of the second model, an image simulating the state in which the second model is driven and controlled to be in the second state is displayed, and the drive control of the second model is started. It may be configured to continue to display until the timing when it is displayed. Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 244 (A) and 245 (A), a simulated image imitating the first modeled body in the first effect mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. However, in the first effect mode, the simulated image imitating the first model may not be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a display area in a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600), for example, in the vicinity of the center of the predetermined display means without reducing the decorative pattern. It becomes possible to continue to display.

Alternatively, in the first effect mode, instead of displaying the simulated image imitating the first modeled body, the display indicating that the first modeled body is driven and controlled may be performed. For example, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to display "maybe my ears have popped out ?!" or "look up ?!".

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player does not notice that the first modeled body is driven and controlled.

In the first modeled body and the second modeled body, the second modeled body has a smaller area in the front view in the drive-controlled state and is less conspicuous. Before the second model is driven and controlled, a simulated image imitating the second model is displayed, but even if the second model is inconspicuous in other aspects, the second model is also displayed. It may be configured to display a simulated image imitating a modeled body.

When the amount of movement in the vertical or horizontal direction when the drive is controlled is shorter in the second model than in the first model, the second model is less noticeable. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 246 and 247, the first modeled body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body 7450) is driven and controlled from the standby position upward. When the second model (right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400) is driven and controlled to move 5 cm upward from the standby position at 10 cm, the drive control of the second model is It is less noticeable than the first model. In such a case, by displaying a simulated image of the second modeled body, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect.

In this way, when the moving distance of the second model is smaller than the moving distance of the first model when the drive is controlled, the second model is prior to the drive control of the second model. By displaying the simulated image of, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect.

Alternatively, if the movement speed when the drive is controlled in the first model body and the second model body is slower in the second model body, the drive speed is driven in the rotatable first model body and the second model body. When the angular speed when rotated by control is slower in the second model, when the drive control time in the first model and the second model is shorter in the second model, etc. , The simulated image of the second model may be displayed prior to the drive control of the second model. In this case as well, it is possible to secure a sense of volume as an effect in the effect using the second model.

It is configured to dynamically display the simulated image imitating the second modeled body multiple times, and to show the player the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit depending on the number of times of dynamic display. May be good. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 244 (B), it is possible to execute an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed from the timing t3 to the timing t5 in addition to the dynamic display performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7. It may be configured in. Further, from the timing t1 to the timing t3, the effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed may be executably configured. Further, in addition to the dynamic display performed from the timing t5 to the timing t7, the effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed from the timing t7 to the timing t9 may be executably configured. Further, from the timing t9 to the timing t11, an effect mode in which the same dynamic display is performed may be executably configured.

In this way, the dynamic display of the simulated image imitating the second model is repeatedly executed before or after the drive control of the second model, and a state advantageous to the player is generated depending on the number of repetitions. By making the configuration suggesting the degree of expectation, it is possible to further increase the voluminous feeling as an effect on the second modeled body, and in addition, the operation of the second modeled body provided on the frame body. Either the act of directly visually recognizing itself or the act of visually recognizing a simulated image imitating a second model displayed on a predetermined display means to know the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur. It is possible to provide the player with the interest of enjoying the game.

In addition, a plurality of simulated images having different display modes are prepared in advance as simulated images imitating the second model, and the player is expected to win a special lottery result depending on the type of the displayed simulated image. It may be configured as shown. For example, when a large simulated image imitating the second model and a small simulated image imitating the second model are prepared in advance, and a large simulated image imitating the second model is displayed. May be configured so that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher. Alternatively, a white simulated image imitating the second model and a red simulated image imitating the second model are prepared in advance, and the red simulated image imitating the second model is displayed. If it is done, the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit may be higher.

In this way, it is possible to execute a plurality of different display modes as the dynamic display mode of the simulated image imitating the second model, and suggests the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur depending on the type of the displayed simulated image. By making the configuration as such, the variation of the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second modeled body is increased, the volume feeling as an effect can be further increased, and the frame body is provided. The act of directly visually recognizing the movement itself of the second modeled body and the expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur by visually recognizing a simulated image imitating the second modeled body displayed on a predetermined display means. It is possible to provide the player with an interest in which of the acts of knowing the degree is to be enjoyed.

In addition, when suggesting the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur by the display mode of the simulated image imitating the second model, the second model is driven and controlled. The operation itself of the second model has the same operation mode, but the operation mode of the second model is different, and the expectation that a state advantageous to the player is generated depending on the operation mode of the second model. It may be a configuration suggesting.

In the second effect mode, after the simulated image imitating the second model is displayed, the second model is driven and controlled, but even if the effect mode in which the simulated image is not displayed is configured to be feasible. good. For example, from timing t5 to timing t18 in the second effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 244 (B) and 245 (B), the display mode of the simulated image of the second model is continued without being displayed. It should be configured as follows.

In this way, the first effect mode is configured to be feasible in addition to the first effect mode and the second effect mode by the third effect mode without displaying the simulated image of the second modeled body. It is possible to provide the player with an unexpected and tense effect that the second model, which is relatively inconspicuous as compared with the model, is driven unknowingly.

When driving the first modeled object, it may be configured to output an arousing sound indicating that the first modeled object is driven. For example, in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 244 (A) and 245 (A), the first is from timing t6 to timing t8, which is the timing before the first model is driven and controlled. It may be configured to output a wake-up sound indicating that the model is driven. Alternatively, the arousal sound indicating that the first model is driven is output from the timing t6 to the timing t10 so that the arousal sound is output even after the first model is driven and controlled. It should be configured. Alternatively, the arousal sound indicating that the first model is being driven is output from the timing t8 to the timing t12 so that the arousal sound is output after the drive control of the first model is started. It should be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, the player can be driven by driving the first model having a relatively large size and movement amount among the plurality of models (first model and second model). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as When driving the second model, a simulated image imitating the second model is displayed, so that such an arousal sound is not output.

With reference to FIGS. 244 (A), 245 (A), and the like, an example of outputting a wake-up sound in a predetermined period (timing t6 to timing t8 or timing t6 to timing t10) has been shown. As described above, the configuration related to the special arousal sound may be adopted with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201.

In driving the second model, as a BGM during fluctuations in either or both of the display period of the simulated image imitating the second model and the period during the drive control of the second model. It may be configured to suppress the volume of the output variable effect sound. For example, in the second staging mode described with reference to FIGS. 244 (A) and 244 (B), the fluctuating staging sound is output in the normal mode until the timing t5, and a simulation imitating the second modeled body is performed. In the period from the timing t5 to the timing t8, which is the period from the display of the image to the start of the drive control of the second model, the variable staging sound is output in a mode more suppressed than the normal mode. It should be configured. Alternatively, until the timing t5, the variable staging sound is output in a normal manner, and the period from the display of the simulated image imitating the second model to the end of the drive control of the second model. In the period from the timing t5 to the timing t18, the variable effect sound may be output in a mode more suppressed than the normal mode. In the suppressed state, the volume may be reduced to half or less as compared with the normal state.

By displaying the simulated image imitating the second model in this way and changing the output state of the variable staging sound from the normal state to the suppressed state, a plurality of models (first model and second model) are displayed. It is possible for the player to concentrate on driving or being driven by the second model, which has a relatively small size.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 244 to 247 and the like, by providing a plurality of shaped bodies in the frame body, the size of each shaped body and the movable range when the individual shaped bodies are driven can be determined. Even if it is restricted, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels less entertaining when the individual model is driven by itself.

By the way, in the gaming machine described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 207 and the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-093655, the movable decorative means provided in the frame constituting the outer shape of the gaming machine is operated. This makes it possible for the player to feel the interest. However, if the player does not notice the operation of such a movable decorative means, there is a possibility that the player may injure the player by bringing his head or finger into contact with the movable decorative means. there were.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured by the movable decorative means will be described.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode and the second effect mode applicable to the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 243 will be described with reference to FIGS. 250 (A) and 250 (B). The root vegetable frame movable body 7800 in the present embodiment is provided in the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 as described with reference to FIGS. 243 (A) to 243 (E), and the player comes into contact with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800. Is configured to be difficult.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 250 (A).

In the first effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Then, at the timing t5, the output of the arousal sound notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. To start.

From timing t7 to timing t9, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the moving position. At this time, the arousal sound is also continuously output.

At timing t9, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 complete the movement to the moving position. At the same time, the output of the arousal sound continuously output from the timing t5 ends.

Next, at the timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping with the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at the timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the standby position. At the timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, a second effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 250 (B). In the second effect mode, unlike the first effect mode, no arousal sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start the operation at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Next, at the timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the same time, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the upward moving position by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510.

At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping with the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. On the other hand, at the timing t23, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the moving position is completed.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed.

Next, at the timing t28, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start moving from the upper moving position to the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570.

From timing t28 to timing t30, drive control is performed in which the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 move to the standby position. At the timing t30, the movement of the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 to the standby position is completed.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7850 of the gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 243 are described below, and the rotatable right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear described with reference to FIG. 163. A first effect mode and a second effect mode that can be applied to a gaming machine having a frame movable body 7200 and that can be executed in the applied gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 251 (A) and 251 (B). do.

Hereinafter, the first effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (A).

In the first effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Then, at the timing t5, the output of the arousal sound notifying that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operated is started. Next, at timing t7, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. Let me.

At the timing t9, the output of the arousal sound continuously output from the timing t5 ends.

Next, at the timing t21, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping with the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Then, at the timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state where the rotation is stopped and the left ear frame movable body is housed in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

Hereinafter, a second effect mode using the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 will be described with reference to FIG. 251 (B). In the second effect mode, unlike the first effect mode, no arousal sound is output. Further, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, and the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 are configured to start the operation at the same time.

In the second effect mode, first, the change of the decorative symbol is started in the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing before the timing t0, and at the timing t4, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped at the same symbol. It becomes a reach state (for example, "4 ↓ 4") in which only the decorative pattern in the center fluctuates.

Next, at the timing t21, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the standby state housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the rotating state by the drive control by the peripheral control board 1510. Let me.

At the timing t21, at the same time, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts moving from the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570 to the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570. .. At the timing t22, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed. From the timing t22 to the timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is positioned in a stationary state at a position overlapping with the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view.

Next, at timing t25, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 starts to change from the state in which it is in the moving position moved downward from the door frame top unit 570 to the state in which it is in the standby position housed in the door frame top unit 570. .. At timing t26, the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the standby position is completed. Then, at the timing t30, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 change from the rotating state to the state where the rotation is stopped and the left ear frame movable body is housed in the standby position.

At a predetermined timing after timing t30, the symbol (for example, "444") indicating that the change of the central decorative symbol that was being changed is completed and the result of the special lottery is a big hit, or the result of the special lottery is A symbol (for example, "454") indicating that the item is lost is stopped and displayed.

In the first and second staging modes described with reference to FIGS. 250 (A) and 250 (B), or with reference to FIGS. 251 (A) and 251 (B), the first described. In the effect mode of 1 and the second effect mode, the operation mode of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is common. On the other hand, in the first effect mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate with the output of the arousal sound, and then the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 operates after a lapse of a predetermined time. On the other hand, in the second production mode, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 start the operation at the same timing as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 without the output of the arousal sound. It is configured.

As described above, when the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200) provided on the frame body operates independently, the arousal sound is output in advance, so that the game is played. Since the person pays attention to the first movable decorative means, the player may be injured by contacting the first movable decorative means due to the player's careless movement (for example, standing up). It is possible to suppress the occurrence.

On the other hand, when the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is operated together with the first movable decoration means, the arousal sound is not output. This is because the player's consciousness is directed to the vicinity of the predetermined display means by moving the second movable decorative means to a position where the second movable decorative means overlaps the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view. This is because it becomes difficult for a person to perform a careless movement, and even if the first movable decorative means provided on the frame body operates, the player is less likely to be injured.

An example of outputting a wake-up sound in a predetermined period (timing t5 to timing t9) is shown with reference to FIGS. 250 (A), 251 (A), and the like. It may be configured to adopt the configuration related to the above-mentioned special arousal sound with reference to 201 and the like.

FIG. 252 shows a modified example of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 250. Further, FIG. 253 shows a modified example of the effect mode described with reference to FIG. 251. In these modifications, in the second effect mode, at the timing t22 when the movement of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 to the moving position is completed, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are moved to the moving position. It is configured to start the move operation.

In this way, at the timing when the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) starts to operate and moves to a position where it overlaps with the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) in front view, the second is By starting the operation of the movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear frame movable body 7200), the player's consciousness is directed toward the vicinity of the predetermined display means, and the player is careless. It becomes difficult to perform the movement, and even if the first movable decorative means provided on the frame body operates, the player is less likely to be injured.

The second production mode may be configured so that the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit is higher than that of the first production mode. Further, the frequency at which the first effect mode is executed may be higher than the frequency at which the second effect mode is executed. For example, out of 100 special lottery, the first effect mode is performed about 5 times (executed with a probability of 5%), and the second effect mode is performed about once (executed with a probability of 1%). It may be configured to be done.

In this way, in the first production mode in which the execution frequency is high and the expectation is low, which is a big hit, the first movable decorative means (right ear frame movable body 7100 and left ear) that frequently occurs by outputting the arousal sound is output. The movement of the frame movable body 7200) is aroused to the player. In particular, since the degree of expectation is low and the player's attention to the first movable decorative means is distracted, it is effective to perform such arousal.

On the other hand, in the second production mode in which the execution frequency is low and the expectation of a big hit is high, the arousal sound is not output, and the operation of the second movable decoration means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) together with the first movable decoration means. I'm letting you. In this case, since the expectation of a big hit is high, the player's line of sight is concentrated in the vicinity of the predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600) to which the second movable decorative means moves, and careless movement ( Since it becomes difficult to perform (such as standing up), it is not necessary to output a wake-up sound when operating the first movable decorative means.

On the other hand, since the clerk of the amusement shop can visually recognize that the first movable decorative means has been operated from a distance, there is a high possibility that a state advantageous to the player (a big hit state as an example) will occur. It becomes possible to provide a predetermined service (such as exchange of a dollar box or processing of a stop in a fixed-quantity gaming machine) to a player.

In addition, if the arousal sound is output in a state where the expectation is high, it is possible that the player will be in a state of excitement, but by not outputting the arousal sound, the occurrence of such a situation is suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

The arousal sound is output in the early stage and the middle stage of the change of the decorative pattern, but it is preferable to configure so that the arousal sound is not output in the middle stage of the change of the decorative pattern.

With such a configuration, no extra sound is output at the end of the fluctuation in which the variation result of the decorative symbol is shown, and the player can concentrate on the mode in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined display means. ..

In the first effect mode, when the arousal sound is output, the variable effect sound may be suppressed. For example, in the period from timing t5 to timing t9 and the period from timing t4 to timing t10 in the first effect mode shown in FIGS. 250 and 251 the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed from the normal state to a small volume. It is good to say.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the variable effect sound is suppressed until the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 moves downward, and the suppression of the variable effect sound is released at the same time as the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 falls and moves. You may. For example, in the period from timing t18 to timing t21 and the period from timing t18 to timing t26 in the second effect mode shown in FIGS. 250 and 251 the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed from the normal state to a small volume. It is good to say.

With such a configuration, in the first effect mode, the arousal sound is output in a state where the variable effect sound is suppressed, so that the player can operate the first movable decorative means. Will be effectively notified.

Further, in the second effect mode, the movement of the second movable decoration means is performed by setting the variable effect sound to be suppressed in a predetermined period before the second movable decoration means starts moving. It becomes easier to convey to the player.

An example of suppressing the fluctuating staging sound in a predetermined period is shown with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251. However, as a configuration related to the fluctuating staging sound and the arousing sound, the above-mentioned is described with reference to FIGS. 200 and 201. It may be configured to adopt the configuration related to the variable effect sound or the special arousal sound.

In the first effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to display that the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 operate. For example, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 240 (A), a simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are imitated in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display for moving the simulated image upward may be configured to be displayed from timing t5 to timing t9 in the first effect mode described with reference to FIGS. 250 and 251.

On the other hand, in the second effect mode, the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured not to perform such a display when the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 are operated.

By performing such a display, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the first movable decorative means operates in the first staging mode. On the other hand, in the second effect mode, by preventing such a display when the first movable decorative means operates, it is possible to prevent the effect around the predetermined display means from becoming excessive. Can be done. It should be noted that the predetermined display means is not limited to a simulated image imitating the first movable decoration means, but another image (for example, an image of an upward arrow) is indicated in an embodiment in which the position where the first movable decoration means is provided is suggested. It may be configured to be displayed in.

In the first effect mode and the second effect mode, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 that has been moved to the moving position is moved to the standby position based on the operation of the player to a predetermined operation unit (push button, lever, etc.). It may be configured so that it can be done. For example, in the first effect mode and the second effect mode, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit at the timing t23, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is moved from the moving position from the timing t23 to the timing t24. It is good to move it to the standby position.

In this way, the time during which the second movable decorative means (root vegetable frame movable body 7800) is located at the moving position may be changed according to the operation by the player. This makes it difficult for other players to notice that the second movable decorative means is operating, and there is a high expectation that another player will generate a state advantageous to the player (big hit state). It is possible to suppress the occurrence of situations such as harassment based on distortion.

In the first effect mode and the modification of the second effect mode in FIGS. 252 and 253, when the player operates the predetermined operation unit, the operation to the predetermined operation unit is not performed, as compared with the case where the player does not operate the predetermined operation unit. The first movable decorative means may be configured to be driven early. That is, in the modified example in FIGS. 252 and 253, the player who repeatedly plays the second movable decorative means whose operation is started before the operation of the first movable decorative means sees this effect many times. Therefore, we cannot wait for the operation of the first movable decorative means. For this reason, the operation of the second movable decorative means is not always performed for a certain period of time before the first movable decorative means is operated, but the operation of the second movable decorative means is started by operating a button. By making it possible to drive the first movable decoration means at an appropriate timing after it is done, the first movable decoration means is quickly operated for the player who is watching the same effect many times. It will be possible to give an opportunity to let them do it and suppress the decline in interest. It should be noted that the process of returning the second movable decorative means to the standby position may be started by such a predetermined operation, or even if a predetermined operation is performed, the second movable decorative means may be performed at a predetermined timing. The process of returning the movable decorative means of 2 to the standby position may be started.

According to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 250, 251 and the like, the player's attention can be produced based on the lottery result without outputting the arousing sound when the first movable decorative means is operated. It is possible to direct the player's consciousness to the vicinity of the predetermined display means to be performed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player is injured by the first movable decorative means.

In the above-described embodiment, the left and right ear frame movable bodies are highly expected to generate a big hit, which is a state advantageous to the player, by executing a predetermined production mode among a plurality of different production modes. Although it was shown that the player is notified by operating the above, the player is configured to be notified of the degree of expectation that other game contents other than the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur. You may.

For example, although it is certain that the jackpot will be a big hit, it may be configured to notify the content of the profit given to the player during the jackpot. As the content of the profit, for example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit or may be configured to notify the amount of profit.

Alternatively, it may be configured to notify the content of the profit given to the player after the big hit. For example, it may be configured to notify the type of profit given to the player after the big hit, or may be configured to notify the amount of profit given to the player after the big hit. ..

In this way, the amount of profit given to the player in the state advantageous to the player (as an example, given to the player) is not limited to the degree of expectation that a state advantageous to the player (a big hit state as an example) will occur. Expectations for the number of balls to be played, the number of times the big winning opening is opened, etc., and the state that is advantageous to the player after the state that is advantageous to the player is completed (for example, the probability change state and the electric chew support) The degree of expectation that a state) will occur, and the type (for example, probabilistic state or electric chew support state) and amount (for example) of the profit given to the player in a newly generated game after the state advantageous to the player ends. As an example, even when it is configured to notify the number of fluctuations in which the probabilistic state is continued and the number of fluctuations in which the electric chew support is continued), the same effect as that of each of the above-described embodiments can be exhibited.

The right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 indicate that there is a high expectation that a big hit, which is a state advantageous to the player, will occur by executing a predetermined production mode among a plurality of different production modes. , Right ear medial frame movable body 7300, right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, left ear medial frame movable body 7400, left ear lateral frame movable body 7450, etc. , It may be configured to include that it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a jackpot as the expectation that a jackpot will occur (100% jackpot will occur). For example, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the first effect mode is executed, a 50% jackpot is generated, and when the second effect mode is executed, a 100% jackpot is generated. It may be configured to occur.

In the above-described embodiment, the right ear frame movable body 7100, the left ear frame movable body 7200, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7400. When the simulated image imitating the body 7450 or the like is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is also displayed at the same time, but the door frame top unit 570 is used. After displaying the simulated simulated image for several seconds (for example, 2 seconds) in advance, it may be configured to start displaying the simulated image imitating the right ear frame movable body 7100 to the left ear outer frame movable body 7450. .. For example, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 238 (A), a simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 may be displayed from timing t5 to timing t7.

Further, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 is not moved while being fixedly displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, and the right ear frame is movable with respect to the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570. Body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear medial frame movable body 7300, right ear lateral frame movable body 7350, left ear medial frame movable body 7400, left ear lateral frame movable body 7450 It should be configured to do so.

In this way, movable decorative means and driveable shaped body (right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner side). A unit (door frame top unit 570) that stores and holds movable decorative means and a driveable model, as well as displaying simulated images that imitate the frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450). By configuring to display a simulated image imitating the above, it becomes easier for the player to understand the operation mode and drive mode of the movable decorative means that can be operated and the movable model body that can be driven.

In particular, a simulated image imitating a movable decorative means that can be operated or a unit that stores or holds a movable shaped object (door frame top unit 570) is displayed on a predetermined display means (game board side effect display device 1600). By displaying the movable decorative means in a fixed manner in a predetermined area, it becomes possible for the player to easily understand the operation mode and the drive mode of the movable decorative means and the driveable model.

In addition, a unit that stores and holds the movable decorative means that can be operated and the movable model that can be operated before the timing of displaying a simulated image that imitates the movable decorative means and the driveable model. By displaying a simulated image imitating (door frame top unit 570), the player's expectation for the operation of the movable decorative means and the driving of the modeled body is increased. In addition, since the player can visually recognize the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the model body from the timing when the operation of the movable decorative means and the drive of the model body are started, the player can operate the movable decorative means and drive the model body. Can be enjoyed for a longer time.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the simulated image imitating the door frame top unit 570 may not be displayed.

Instead of the operation of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800, the rabbit accessory 6000 described with reference to FIG. 118 and the like is configured to operate in the same manner (for example, in the vertical direction), and the various production modes described above are executed. It may be configured to do so. In this case as well, it is possible to achieve the same effect as each of the above-mentioned staging modes.

Right ear frame movable body 7100, left ear frame movable body 7200, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, left ear outer frame movable body 7450 are door frame top units. Although an example of operation between the state of being housed in the 570 and the state of protruding upward from the door frame top unit 570 has been shown, the change of such a state is not limited to the change of another state. .. For example, the right ear frame movable body 7100 and the left ear frame movable body 7200 may be configured to operate from a state in which half protrudes from the door frame top unit 570 to a state in which all of them protrude from the door frame top unit 570.

In this way, from the first state in which the first movable decorative means is located in the first position (the state in which it is housed in the door frame top unit 570, the state in which it is half protruding from the door frame top unit 570), it is moved to the second position. The above-mentioned effect can be obtained even when the door frame is configured to operate between the second state (the state in which the door frame top unit 570 is completely protruded) and the second state in which the door frame is located.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 238 and 250, the state in which the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is housed in the door frame top unit 570 and the front view with respect to the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600. Although an example of operation with a state located at an overlapping position has been shown in, the change of the state is not limited to such a change of the state and may be a change of another state. For example, from the state where the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 is located at a position where it overlaps with the substantially lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view, it overlaps with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. It may be configured to operate in a position where it is located.

In this way, the second movable decorative means overlaps with the first state (the state housed in the door frame top unit 570, substantially the lower part of the game board side effect display device 1600) in front view, where the second movable decorative means is located in the first position. It is configured to operate between the second state (positioned at the position) and the second state (positioned at a position overlapping with the substantially center of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view). Even if this is the case, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved.

As an effect display performed in the display area of the effect display device, a look-ahead effect display performed over a plurality of variable displays of a decorative symbol is known in response to the occurrence of a specific hold. The variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific hold that caused the look-ahead effect display is stopped in a manner in which the decorative symbol indicates the occurrence of a big hit as compared with the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the look-ahead effect display is not performed. The probability of being displayed is set high. For this reason, the player has a feeling of expectation that a big hit may occur when the look-ahead effect display is executed.

On the other hand, in the display area of the effect display device, a variable display of the decorative symbol is performed, and a plurality of effect displays corresponding to the decorative symbol on which the variable display is performed (for example, the variable decorative symbol indicates a big hit). An effect display showing the degree of expectation that is stopped and displayed in the mode) is also performed. Therefore, the player can use the look-ahead effect display that suggests the variation display result of the decorative symbol several times ahead, as well as the variable display mode of the decorative symbol that is currently changing and the display content of the effect display corresponding to the decorative symbol that is currently changing. At the same time, it is necessary to visually check.

In such a situation, although the fun as a game can be enhanced, there may be a problem that the player cannot sufficiently grasp the contents indicated by these staging displays. In particular, since the player is in a situation where he / she pays attention to the variable display of the currently changing decorative pattern and various effect displays corresponding to the variable display, the look-ahead effect display is relatively inconspicuous, and the look-ahead effect display is displayed. There is a problem that the player may not be aware of what is being executed and the fact that the decorative pattern corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is about to start changing.

Therefore, in the following, when executing the look-ahead effect display, it is easy for the player to understand that the look-ahead effect display is being executed and that the timing at which the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the look-ahead effect display is started is approaching. The embodiment is shown.

Hereinafter, various images displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is performed when the look-ahead effect display is executed, will be described with reference to FIG. 254.
Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 from the start to the change stop of the change display of the decorative symbol performed when the result of the special lottery performed in response to the winning of the first start port 2002 is lost. An example of the effect in the display area of FIG. 254 (A) to FIG. 254 (F) will be described. In addition, FIGS. 254 (A) to FIGS. 254 (A) to FIG. It will be described with reference to 254 (D), FIG. 254 (G), and FIG. 254 (H).

FIG. 254 (A) shows a state in which three decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which the reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed is displayed. In addition, it shows a state in which there are three holds corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "3" as the left decorative design and the decorative design with the number "5" as the middle decorative design are at equal intervals from the left at approximately the center of the display area in the vertical direction. , The decorative symbol with the number "2" as the right decorative symbol is shown in a stopped display state. The decorative pattern is a vertically long rectangular shape and has a background area (white part in the figure) consisting of an image forming the outer shape of the decorative pattern, and a number area consisting of an image showing any number from "1" to "9" (a number area (white part in the figure)). It is composed of the black part in the figure). As shown in the figure, the number area is located in the center of the background area.

It is preferable to compose an image having a color different from the color of the background area and the color of the number area constituting the decorative pattern. For example, the color of the background area may be white and the color of the number area may be black. The rectangular contour portion forming the outer shape of the background region may be black.

At the bottom of the display area, the hold display area, the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area are set from the left, and in the figure, the hold display area is set. A state in which the reserved image is displayed in the display area and the reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area to the third reserved display area is shown. Although the fourth reserved display area is shown by a dotted line in the drawing for explanation, the dotted line is not actually displayed in the display area as the display state, and the reserved image is displayed in the following drawings. Basically, such a dotted line showing the planned position is not shown.

In FIG. 254 (A), the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the decorative symbols of "3", "5", and "2" that have been stopped and displayed. Further, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is a reserved image corresponding to the next variable display after the variable display corresponding to the reserved image is completed. Further, the hold image displayed in the second hold display area is a hold image corresponding to the next change display performed after the change display corresponding to the hold image displayed in the first hold display area is completed. be. Further, the hold image displayed in the third hold display area is a hold image corresponding to the next change display performed after the change display corresponding to the hold image displayed in the second hold display area is completed. be.

FIG. 254 (B) shows a display state at the start of variation of the decorative symbol corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area described with reference to FIG. 254 (A).
Specifically, the upper end of the decorative symbol whose display order is one before is below the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol whose display order is one later than the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. The bottom edge is displayed. In addition, the display of the hold display ends.
The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area are always displayed in front of the decorative symbol. The shape of the reserved image and the reserved image is a perfect circle, and the color is basically white. Further, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.

FIG. 254 (C) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are in the variable display. Each decorative symbol is displayed in a manner of scrolling downward in the display area.

Specifically, for a decorative symbol that is being displayed in a variable manner, the lower side of the decorative symbol is first displayed on the upper side of the display area, and then the decorative symbol moves downward to the display area. The entire decorative symbol is displayed, and after the lower end of the decorative symbol reaches the lower edge of the display area, only a part of the upper side of the decorative symbol is displayed, and finally, the decorative symbol is displayed. The upper end of the decorative symbol reaches the lower edge of the display area, and the decorative symbol is not displayed. In this way, each decorative symbol changes its display state from a state in which it is not displayed in the display area to a state in which it is displayed in the display area and then a state in which it is not displayed in the display area.

The order in which they are displayed is set from the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol. Specifically, after the decorative symbol with a certain number (for example, "1"), the decorative symbol with the next number (for example, "2") appears in order from the upper side of the display area. It will be displayed in. The order of the numbers attached to the decorative patterns is "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9". .. Next to the decorative symbol with the number "9", the decorative symbol with the number "1" is displayed in the display area. For example, in FIG. 254 (C), as the left decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol with the number "1" on the lower side and the left decorative symbol with the number "2" on the upper side are displayed. Is shown, but both left decorative symbols scroll downward and move, and the left decorative symbol with the number "2" is followed by the left decorative symbol with the number "3". , Will appear from the top of the display area.

Although it has been described with reference to FIG. 254 (B) that the display of the reserved image previously displayed in the reserved display area is terminated at the same time as the change of the decorative symbol is started, the display of the reserved image is terminated. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left while being enlarged, and is displayed as the reserved image in the reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. At the same time, the reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area is displayed so as to move to the left, and is displayed as a reserved image in the first reserved display area. Such enlargement of the reserved image and movement of the reserved image to the left are performed over a predetermined time (for example, 0.67 seconds). FIG. 254 (C) shows the state after the movement of such a reserved image.

FIG. 254 (D) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are being displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the decorative symbol with the number "2" added to the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Further, it shows a state in which a new reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002.

Here, the temporary stop display will be described. The temporary stop display is a display mode of a decorative symbol that displays a decorative symbol with a predetermined number as if it had stopped at or near the display position where the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. Is. Specifically, for example, a decorative symbol with a predetermined number is gently moved up and down so that the number attached to the decorative symbol can be clearly seen based on the display position where the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed. Temporary stop display of the decorative pattern is performed by displaying it as moving or displaying it as shaking. In this way, by performing the temporary stop display, the player can visually recognize the decorative symbol being displayed as if it is stopped, and the player can confirm the number attached to the decorative symbol. .. When the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed, the vertical movement or shaking is not displayed in this way, and the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped state.

When variable display is performed so that the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is the decorative symbol that is finally displayed as a stop, or the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped is moved and displayed so as to scroll downward again. A variable display may be performed so that the decorative pattern with other numbers is finally stopped and displayed, but the details will be described later.

In FIG. 254 (D), arcuate lines are attached to the upper left and lower right of the left decorative symbol with the number "2", which is the left decoration with the number "2". It is a line indicating that the symbol is in the state of being temporarily stopped. Further, in other drawings, such an arcuate line may be attached to the decorative symbol, which also indicates that the decorative symbol is in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 254 (E) shows a state in which the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, following the left decorative symbol. Specifically, the decorative symbol with the number "2" as the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "4" as the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed.

FIG. 254 (F) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. In accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which had been temporarily stopped until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "7" attached to the middle decorative symbol are used in the drawing. As for the symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "4" added to the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed indicating that the special lottery result was lost is shown. In the state where the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbols displayed above and below each decorative symbol are not displayed during the change or temporary stop. The stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and after that, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area is newly started. To. The reserved image displayed on the reserved image ends at the same timing as the timing at which the new decorative symbol change starts.

FIG. 254 (G) shows a state in which the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and the middle decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, following the left decorative symbol, from the display state shown with reference to FIG. 254 (D). ing. Specifically, the decorative design with the number "2" on the left decorative design and the decorative design with the number "2" on the right decorative design are temporarily stopped and displayed, indicating that a reach state has occurred. It shows the state.

FIG. 254 (H) shows a state in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the middle decorative symbol, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, which had been temporarily stopped until then, are also stopped and displayed. In addition, in accordance with the stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the left decorative symbol and the decorative symbol with the number "2" attached to the middle decorative symbol are displayed in the figure. As for the symbol, the decorative symbol with the number "2" added to the right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed indicating that the special lottery result was a big hit is shown. In the state where the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, as shown in the figure, the decorative symbols displayed above and below each decorative symbol are not displayed during the change or temporary stop. After the stop display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is stopped. After that, the jackpot gaming state is started, and at the timing when the jackpot gaming state ends, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is resumed, and thereafter, it corresponds to the reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area. The variable display of decorative patterns is newly started.

As described above, in the variation display example of the decorative symbol described with reference to FIG. 254, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed in response to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. From the state, after the variable display is started, the variable display is performed for a predetermined time, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped in this order, and then the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are also stopped and displayed at the same time as the stop display of the middle decorative symbol. In addition, by stopping the decorative symbols with the same numbers as the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the player is shown that the special lottery result is a big hit. Further, by stopping the decorative symbols having different numbers as at least one decorative symbol from the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the player is shown that the special lottery result is lost.

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 254 will be described with reference to the production examples shown in FIGS. 255 and 256. FIG. 255 is a diagram showing a time chart in this staging example, and FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing of a display area of the game board side staging display device 1600 in this staging example. In FIG. 256, the variable display mode of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, the display mode of the hold image in the hold display area, and the display mode of the hold image in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area are shown. Unless otherwise specified, the display mode is the same as described with reference to FIG. 254. It should be noted that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of the effect in the present embodiment. In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol has stopped changing. FIG. 256A is a diagram showing this state, and shows a state in which the decorative symbols with the numbers “6”, “4”, and “5” are stopped and displayed from the left. From this state, when the timing t0 is reached, the variable display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is newly started. FIG. 256B is a diagram showing a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t1) after the start of variable display, and shows a state in which variable display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is performed. There is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 255 (A), t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. It should be noted that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 255, at the timing t2, the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 2002, and a new hold occurs. Further, with this start winning as an opportunity, the look-ahead effect display is started at the timing t2. In addition, corresponding to the look-ahead effect display, a specific reserved image having a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of the normal reserved image. The color of the specified reserved image is green. FIG. 256C shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t3) after the look-ahead effect display is started at the timing t2. Further, the third reserved display area shows a state in which a specific reserved image having a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves is displayed instead of a normal reserved image having a circular shape.

In the look-ahead effect display, the look-ahead effect image that surrounds the display area in a frame shape is displayed in a manner of hiding a part of the decorative pattern that is variablely displayed so as to scroll downward and move. The look-ahead effect image is an image in which a plurality (specifically, six) are arranged so as to project a shape imitating a pine branch with leaves toward the inside of a horizontally long rectangular frame. The color of the look-ahead effect image is slightly lighter green than the color of the specific reserved image.

The display of the look-ahead effect image and the display of the specific reserved image are performed based on the special lottery result acquired when the game ball wins the first starting port 2002, and only the normal reserved image having a perfect circular shape and white color is displayed. The execution ratio as an effect is set so that the probability of a big hit is higher when the pre-reading effect image and the specific reserved image are displayed than when they are displayed. For example, when a normal reserved image is displayed, the probability of becoming a big hit is 0.3%, and when a look-ahead effect image and a specific reserved image are displayed, the probability of becoming a big hit is 10.0%. It is configured to be.

With such a configuration, the player displays the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image, and when the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image is changed, the normal reserved image is displayed. It is expected that the decorative symbol will be stopped and displayed in a stop mode indicating that a big hit occurs as a result of the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, as compared with the case where the decorative symbol corresponding to the reserved image is changed. You will have a feeling.

From timing t2 to timing t4, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed while the pre-reading effect image is displayed, but the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are variablely displayed. The look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the right decorative pattern. Therefore, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are displayed in a variable manner with a part of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol hidden by the look-ahead effect image. The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area are displayed. The specific reserved image is displayed further in front of each decorative pattern and pre-reading effect image.

At timing t4, all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed. FIG. 256 (D) shows a display state in which all the left decorative symbols to the right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed at the timing t4. At the timing when the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the context of the display of the look-ahead effect image and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is reversed, and the left decorative pattern to the right decorative pattern is in front of the look-ahead effect image. It will be in the state displayed on the side. The reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the first reserved display area, the normal reserved image displayed in the second reserved display area, and the third reserved display area are displayed. The specific reserved image is displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols located above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed. For example, in FIG. 256 (D), as the left decorative symbol, only the decorative symbol with the number "1" is stopped and displayed, but the number "1" is added until just before the timing t4. The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is on the upper side of the decorative pattern, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is on the lower side of the decorative pattern with the number "1". It is displayed. With such a configuration, only the decorative design that is stopped and displayed can be visually recognized by the player in a conspicuous state.

The stop display of the decorative symbol is continued from timing t4 to timing t5. Further, during this period, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At timing t5, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the timing when a new variable display of the decorative design is started, the front-back relationship between the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative design-right decorative design is switched again, and the pre-reading effect image is displayed in front of the left decorative design-right decorative design. The display mode is as follows.

At the timing when the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the decorative symbols located above and below each decorative symbol are no longer displayed, but at the timing when a new variable display of the decorative symbols is started, each decoration is displayed. The display of decorative symbols located above and below the symbol is also resumed. For example, in FIG. 256 (D), as the left decorative symbol, only the decorative symbol with the number "1" is stopped and displayed, but at the timing t5, the upper side of the decorative symbol with the number "1" is displayed. The lower part of the decorative pattern with the number "2" is displayed, and the upper part of the decorative pattern with the number "9" is displayed below the decorative pattern with the number "1". The downward movement display of each decorative pattern is started instantly.

After that, similarly, the context of the pre-reading effect image and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is switched according to the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and the stop of the variable display. For example, in the period from timing t4 to timing t5, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image is continued, but the period from timing t9 to timing t10 and timing t14 Similarly, in the period from to timing t15, the display mode in which the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the look-ahead effect image is continued.

At the timing t15, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the start winning prize that triggered the display of the look-ahead effect image and the specific reserved image is started. In FIG. 256 (E), at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t16) after the timing t15, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol, and the specific reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area. Indicates the displayed state.

At the timing t25, the decorative symbols with the numbers "2" are temporarily stopped and displayed as the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol, respectively, and a reach state occurs. At this time, the variable display state in which the intermediate decorative symbol is scrolled downward and moved and displayed is maintained. Further, at the timing t25, the display of the pre-reading effect image that has been displayed up to that point ends, and the pre-reading effect image is not displayed. FIG. 256 (F) shows a display state at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t26) after the reach state is generated and the display of the look-ahead effect image is completed at the timing t25.

At the timing t33, the intermediate decorative symbol that has been variablely displayed in the display mode according to the special lottery result is in the variable stop state. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the decorative symbol with a number other than "2" is stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol. If the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol with the number "2" is stopped and displayed as the middle decorative symbol.

FIG. 256 (G) shows a state in which the decorative symbol with the number “3” as the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t33. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area ends. On the other hand, the stop display state of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is continued until the game ball newly wins the first starting port 2002.

On the other hand, FIG. 256 (H) shows a state in which the decorative symbol with the number "2" as the intermediate decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t33. After that, at the timing t34, the display of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol ends with the display of the reserved image displayed in the reserved display area, and the game shifts to the jackpot game state.

In this embodiment, the pre-reading effect image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern is displayed on the front side of the pre-reading effect image during the stop display of the decorative pattern. ing.

By adopting such a configuration, the player can visually clearly grasp the start and stop of each variation display, so that the decorative pattern corresponding to the specific reserved image can be grasped without confirming the movement of the specific reserved image. It becomes possible to recognize that one has approached the fluctuation display of.

Further, the area occupied in the display area of the look-ahead effect image is larger than the area occupied in the display area of the specific reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image is closer to the stop position of the decorative symbol than the specific reserved image. Since it is displayed, even if the player is focusing on visually recognizing the variation mode of the decorative symbol, it is possible to recognize that the variation display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the specific reserved image has been approached by one. ..

Further, by displaying the decorative symbol and the look-ahead effect image at the overlapping positions, it is possible to increase the size of both the decorative symbol and the look-ahead effect image, and it is possible to improve the utilization efficiency of the display area. Further, the display can be optimized by configuring the image to be displayed on the front side to be switched between the decorative pattern and the look-ahead effect image according to the conditions.

Specifically, during the change of the decorative pattern, the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side, so that the timing at which the change display corresponding to the look-ahead effect image is performed is approaching, which is great for the player. You can have a sense of expectation. On the other hand, while the change of the decorative symbol is stopped, the stop mode of the decorative symbol is not obstructed by the look-ahead effect image, and the entire decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed can be clearly shown to the player. ..

By the way, in the present embodiment, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted from the front in the obstacle nail through holes 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Specifically, the obstacle nail 1201 is held by the panel plate 1110 by engaging the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c provided at the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 so as to bite into the panel plate 1110. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and it is possible to visually recognize the movable accessory and the light emitting decorative portion arranged behind the panel plate 1110 via the panel plate 1110. However, by engaging the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c with the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is scratched or cracked, resulting in a cloudy portion (hereinafter, these are collectively referred to as a whitening portion HKB). In some cases), these parts become visible to the player, and there is a problem that the aesthetic appearance is deteriorated. This is a problem that cannot occur when an obstacle nail is planted on a wooden game board as in the past.

The applicant has examined in detail the cause and location of such whitening part HKB. First, the manufacturing method and structure of the game panel 1100, which is a premise that the whitening portion HKB is generated, will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 and 258.

FIG. 257 (a) is a side view showing the obstacle nail 1201 to be planted on the panel plate 1110. FIG. 257 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the panel plate 1110 and the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 as viewed from the right. FIG. 257 (c) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 from the right side. FIG. 257 (d) is a cross-sectional view of a portion A around the obstacle nail 1201 planted on the panel plate 1110 where a whitening portion HKB may occur, viewed from the right. FIG. 257 (e) is a cross-sectional view taken from the right as an example of a state in which a whitening portion HKB is actually generated around an obstacle nail 1201 planted on a panel plate 1110. FIG. 258 (a) shows the dimensions of each part constituting the obstacle nail 1201, and FIG. 258 (b) shows the glass plate 192, the obstacle nail 1201, and the panel plate 1110 in a state where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted on the panel plate 1110. It is sectional drawing which showed the dimension in each of the shown members. In addition, some reference numerals are omitted in the figure.

The structure and shape of the obstacle nail 1201 will be described with reference to FIG. 257 (a). The obstacle nail 1201 is entirely made of brass and has a certain elasticity. Further, in an irradiation environment of white light, the whole is visually recognized as having a yellowish metallic luster. When viewed from the left side, the obstacle nail 1201 is from the obstacle nail head 1201a, the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e. It has become. The length L1 of the obstacle nail 1201 is 27 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail head 1201a is a dome-shaped round head shape, and is a perfect circular shape when viewed from the front. The diameter L2 of the obstacle nail head 1201a in the front view is 4 mm, and the thickness L3 in the side view is 1 mm. The shape of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is a cylindrical shape. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm. The diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 2 mm. The shape of the obstruction nail spiral shape portion is substantially a cylindrical shape. The length L7 of the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c is 4 mm. The diameter of the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d is a cylindrical shape. The length L8 of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d is 1 mm. Further, the diameter L6 of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d is 2 mm, which is the same as the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. The shape of the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e is a conical shape. The length L9 of the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e is 1 mm.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 257 (b) and 258 (b), the structure of the panel plate 1110 before the obstacle nail 1201 is planted will be described. The panel plate 1110 is formed of a colorless and transparent acrylic plate material. The front surface and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 are formed smoothly, and it is possible to clearly see the member located behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate 1110 may be made of a plate material made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, and a methacrylic resin. The thickness L10 of the panel plate 1110 is 10 mm. The panel plate 1110 is provided with an obstacle nail through hole 1110a for planting the obstacle nail 1201. The obstruction nail through hole 1110a has a cylindrical shape, and its diameter L11 is 2 mm. The obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a becomes slightly cloudy and is visible to the player.

Next, a method of planting the obstacle nail 1201 in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 (c) and 258 (b). The obstacle nail tip 1201e of the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the entire obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e are inside the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. Obstacle to the panel plate 1110 by applying a force toward the rear (right side in the figure) until a part of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is located in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. The planting of nail 1201 is completed. The obstacle nail 1201 is planted by a nail gun. The length L4 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is 20 mm, of which the length L12 of the portion located in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is 3 mm, not located in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the panel plate 1110. The length L13 of the portion located on the front side of the front surface is 17 mm. FIG. 257 (c) shows a state in which the obstacle nail 1201 has been planted on the panel plate 1110.

The distance L14 between the tip of the obstacle nail tip 1201e and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is 1 mm. With such a configuration, even if the manufacturer of the gaming machine or the clerk of the game store carelessly touches the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 by the obstacle nail tip 1201e, the obstacle nail 1201 may cause an injury. It is possible to prevent.

The shape of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is such that it penetrates the panel plate 1110 because the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is scraped when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel plate 1110. This is to remove the acrylic resin powder from the rear of the panel plate 1110 to the outside.

As described above, the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d are 2 mm. Similarly, the diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is also 2 mm. On the other hand, the diameter of the obstruction nail spiral shape portion 1201c is slightly larger than 2 mm. Therefore, when the obstacle nail 1201 is pushed into the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is slightly deformed by the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c. When the obstacle nail 1201 has been pushed in, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the obstacle nail 1201 is firmly held with respect to the panel plate 1110. ..

The diameter L11 of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is slightly larger than the diameter L5 of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b and the diameter L6 of the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and is larger than the diameter of the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c. May be configured to be slightly smaller. In this case, in a state where the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c is engaged with the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. There will be a slight gap between the and. In such a configuration, when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is elastically deformed, the obstacle nail 1201 is allowed to be elastically deformed by the amount of this gap. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the obstacle nail 1201 breaks when the game ball repeatedly collides with the obstacle nail 1201.

By the way, in the process of planting the obstacle nail 1201, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c moves backward in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, so that the inside of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 is damaged. There is a problem that it is visually recognized as white.

Further, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is formed by cutting the panel plate 1110, and has a shape that penetrates the panel plate 1110. By being formed by cutting, the inner surface of the through hole is rough and visible white. In particular, since the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e is planted while staying in the panel plate 1110, the rearmost portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is visually recognized in a state where the obstacle nail through hole 1110a itself is whitened.

Further, when the obstacle nail 1201 has been planted, the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is elastically deformed to maintain the engagement state with the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, but the limit of the elastic deformation is exceeded. In some cases, cracks may occur outward from the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a with which the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c engages.

Further, in a game in a gaming machine installed in a game store, when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 many times, the kinetic energy of the game ball is transferred to the obstacle nail through hole 1110a of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b. It is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a through the portion located inside, and a crack may occur on the front surface side of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. In addition, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In addition, in a gaming machine installed in a game store, an illegal act of forcibly bending an obstacle nail 1201 is performed in an attempt to make the winning rate at a predetermined winning opening in a situation that is advantageous to oneself, or a game is played. After the store clerk cleans the front of the panel plate 1110 with the door frame 3 open, when the door frame 3 is moved in the closing direction to close the door frame 3, the cleaning tool or the like is removed from the door frame. There is a possibility that an event such as accidentally pinching between 3 and the obstacle nail 1201 may occur. Even in such a case, a large force is applied to the obstacle nail 1201, and the force is applied to the obstacle nail through hole 1110a through the portion of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b located in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. It is transmitted to the inner wall, and a crack may occur on the front side of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. In addition, cracks may occur around the portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a where the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c engages (inside the panel plate 1110).

In FIG. 257 (d), A indicates a portion where the whitening portion HKB can be generated in this way due to a collision of the game ball YGK or the like. Further, FIGS. 257 (e) and 258 (b) show an example of a state in which the whitening portion HKB actually occurs. FIGS. 257 (e) and 258 (b) show a state in which the force applied to the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b is transmitted to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a and a whitening portion HKB is generated on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. ing. Further, it shows a state in which the whitening portion HKB is generated inside the panel plate 1110 starting from the portion where the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c is engaged in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. As shown in FIG. 258 (b), the diameter L15 of the game ball YGK is 11 mm, the thickness L16 of the glass plate 192 is 3 mm, and the distance L17 between the glass plate 192 and the obstacle nail 1201 is 2 mm.

Further, the longer the operating period in the amusement store, the higher the possibility that the whitening portion HKB in the panel plate 1110 will occur. In addition, once the whitening part HKB occurs, the structure of the synthetic resin around the whitening part HKB weakens, the whitening part HKB gradually expands from that part, and when viewed from the front, the obstacle nail 1201 A situation may occur in which the whitening portion HKB extends outward around the center.

The shape of one whitening portion HKB generated in this way is generally planar, and the area thereof is approximately 1-2 square mm, but a plurality of whitening portions HKB centered on one obstacle nail 1201. May occur radially in front view. In addition, such whitening portion HKB may occur in each of the plurality of obstacle nails 1201.

Further, the occurrence of such a whitening portion HKB may weaken the engagement strength of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a with the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c. In this case, the mode of impact when the game ball collides with the obstacle nail 1201 becomes weaker than that expected at the shipping stage of the pachinko machine 1 (even if the game ball hits the nail, it does not bounce much and absorbs the momentum. There was a possibility that the winning rate to the winning opening would change.

In addition, in the game of the game machine installed in the game store, a situation may occur in which the obstacle nail 1201 breaks due to the operation in the game store for a long period of time. In this case, the entire game board 5'is used. It will be replaced.

In this way, when the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the panel plate 1110 made of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, a predetermined movable accessory and a predetermined light emitting decorative portion located behind the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized. As a result, while the aesthetic appearance is improved, there is a problem that the vicinity of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a in which the obstacle nail 1201 is to be planted looks white, which deteriorates the aesthetic appearance. Conventionally, a gaming machine in which a pilot hole is provided in a transparent synthetic resin gaming board and a game nail is driven into the pilot hole is known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-161638). However, it did not solve the problem that the engagement part between the game nail and the game board and the prepared hole became cloudy and visually recognized, which deteriorated the aesthetic appearance. On the other hand, the generation of the whitening portion HKB in the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 1 has been dealt with by a method such as mixing rubber with the material of the acrylic plate (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-104622), but the pachinko machine 1 When the whitening part HKB is installed in a game store and is used for a game for a long period of time, the whitening part HKB is generated, or the whitening part HKB gradually increases from the generated whitening part HKB. As for, it was not expected to occur, and there was room for improvement in this respect. The means for solving these problems are shown below.

In the embodiment shown below, the panel plate 1110 described with reference to FIG. 225 (a) and the obstacle nail 1201 have a structure near a site where the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 are planted. Is a modified embodiment of. In this modification, the area cover member 2600a is not provided.

FIG. 259 shows an embodiment in which a rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. FIG. 259 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. In the figure, the obstacle nail head 1201a is not shown. Therefore, the circle indicating the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 shown in the figure is actually the obstacle nail 1201 of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232. 1 The thickness of the body portion 1201b is shown. It can also be said that this indicates the thickness of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. It should be noted that these points are the same in the drawings illustrating the embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259.

FIG. 259 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 259 (a). In FIG. 259 (b), a cross section obtained by cutting a portion where a life nail 1230 located on the left side in a front view is planted is schematically shown. It should be noted that this point is the same in each drawing for explaining the embodiment which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259.

FIG. 259 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. The tilt angle in this cabinet diagram is 45 degrees. In the figure, the fine structure of the obstacle nail 1201 such as the obstacle nail head 1201a, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, and the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e is omitted from the illustration, and the entire obstacle nail 1201 is shown by one cylinder. ing. In this cylinder, the portion shown by the solid line indicates the obstacle nail head 1201a in the obstacle nail 1201 and the portion of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b located in front of the panel plate 1110. Further, in this cylinder, the portion shown by the dotted line is the portion of the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b located inside the panel plate 1110, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d, and the obstacle nail. The tip portion 1201e and the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a are shown. It should be noted that these points are the same in the drawings for explaining the modified example obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259.

In FIG. 259 (a), the whitening portion HKB is not shown. Further, also in FIG. 259 (c), although the whitening portion HKB is not shown, the whitening portion HKB is generated around the portion shown by the dotted line of the obstacle nail 1201. Further, in FIGS. 259 (a) to 259 (c), the first starting port 2002 is not shown. It should be noted that these points are the same in the drawings for explaining the modified example obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259.

The rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate may be formed by cutting the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 with a thickness of about 1 mm. As the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate, a lens cut shape or a satin finish shape may be adopted. The light emitted by the pachinko machine 1 from the front or the rear with respect to the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate thus formed, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the store of the game store, or the light installed in the store of the game store. When the light from the other gaming machine is incident, the light is diffusely reflected on the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and is visually recognized as whitish.

As shown in FIGS. 259 (a) and 259 (c), the portion of the panel plate 1110 provided with the obstacle nail through hole 1110a was visually recognized from the front or diagonally above the left with respect to the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate. In this case, it will be visually recognized by the player in a state where it overlaps with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate.

In this way, behind the obstacle nail 1201 planted as a life nail 1230, a jump nail 1231, and a left guide nail 1232 on the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), a bright color visual recognition portion (panel plate back rough surface portion). By locating 1110b), it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB in the vicinity of the planting site of the obstacle nail 1201 inconspicuous by the bright color visual recognition portion that is visually recognized in white.

It should be noted that white is visible when visible light of all wavelengths of natural light radiated to a predetermined object is diffusely reflected uniformly (about 100 to 80%) by the predetermined object regardless of the wavelength region. It refers to the color that is said to be. In addition, bright color means that, of the natural light radiated to a predetermined object, the predetermined object partially absorbs the light in a specific wavelength region and at the same time, the light in the remaining wavelength region is roughly diffusely reflected. , A color that is visible in cream, light gray, bright yellow, etc. On the other hand, black means that the surface of a predetermined object uniformly absorbs most of the visible light of all wavelengths of the natural light irradiated to the predetermined object, and a part of the irradiated natural light (20 to several). %) Refers to a color that becomes visible when diffusely reflected. In addition, dark color means that most of the wavelength range of natural light irradiated to a predetermined object is uniformly absorbed, and only a part of the irradiated light is diffusely reflected (about 20 to several%). However, in a specific wavelength region, it refers to a color that is close to black because the light absorption rate is different, for example, a color that can be visually recognized as dark blue. These definitions may be adopted as definitions of each color in the present specification. In the embodiment described in the present specification, the white portion may be light-colored or the bright-colored portion may be white. For example, instead of irradiating white light from a predetermined light emitting member, it may be configured to irradiate bright color light. Further, the black portion may be darkened, or the dark portion may be black.

FIG. 259 (d) is a diagram showing a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (a). In the example shown in FIG. 259 (d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110, and the white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel plate 1110 to introduce the panel. The introduced white light is diffusely reflected in the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the plate. In this case, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate is visible to the player with white light. The light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be configured to be controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510. Further, a light emitting portion similar to that of the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 is provided on the side or upper side of the panel board 1110 instead of below the panel board 1110 so as to replace or add to the panel board lower light emitting board 2400. The light emitting portion provided in this way may be configured to emit light in the same manner as the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate.

With such a configuration, the amount of light emitted from the lighting equipment installed in the store of the game store was weak, and the light of the game machine installed in the store of the game store was weak (for example, the game was played). The amount of light emitted by the gaming machine is reduced, or the amount of light emitted by the gaming machine is reduced by the player adjusting the amount of light even if the gaming machine is playing. Even in this case, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized as one, and the whitening portion HKB near the planting site of the obstacle nail 1201 is visible. It is possible to make it inconspicuous. In this state, the whitening portion HKB itself also diffusely reflects the introduced white light and is visually recognized as white, but the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is larger than the whitening portion HKB. Since a large amount of light is diffusely reflected behind the whitening portion HKB, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the whitening portion HKB becomes conspicuous.

Although a plurality of embodiments obtained by modifying the embodiments described with reference to FIG. 259 are shown below, the technical contents shown in one embodiment may be applied to the technical contents shown in other embodiments.

Although an example of introducing white light from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the side of the panel plate 1110 is shown, it may be configured to introduce yellow light instead of white light. .. In this case, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate is in a state of being visually recognized in yellow by the player due to the introduced light. In addition, the whitening portion HKB is also in a state of being visually recognized in yellow by the introduced light. By the way, as described above, the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass and has a yellowish metallic luster. Therefore, the colors of the rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion HKB on the back of the panel plate and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized in similar colors, and the presence of the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. This is because in the pachinko machine 1, the obstacle nail 1201 has been used for several decades, so that the portion of the obstacle nail 1201 located in front of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the obstacle nail head 1201a and the obstacle nail No. 1). This is because the player is less likely to feel uncomfortable with respect to the color and shape of the body portion 1201b (the portion not buried in the panel plate 1110).

Although it has been shown that the obstacle nail 1201 is made of brass, another metal obstacle nail 1201 may be configured to be planted on the panel plate 1110. For example, a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 visually recognized as having a grayish white metallic luster or a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 visually recognizable as a reddish metallic luster may be implanted in the panel plate 1110.

When the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the color of the light introduced from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be white. In this case as well, the colors of the whitening portion HKB and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized in similar colors, and the presence of the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. ..

Similarly, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper is adopted, the color of the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be red or orange. In this case as well, the colors of the whitening portion HKB and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized in similar colors, and the presence of the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. .. In the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper, the color of the light introduced from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be white.

As described above, the color of the metal constituting the obstacle nail 1201 and the color of the metal constituting the obstacle nail 1201 from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) with respect to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110). By introducing a similar color and irradiating the diffused reflection part (panel plate back rough surface part 1110b) and whitening part HKB located behind the obstacle nail 1201 with light, the diffused reflection part (panel plate back rough surface part 1110b) and whitening Since the portion HKB and the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized in similar colors, the presence of the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiments shown below, the materials of the life nail 1230 described with reference to FIGS. 259 (a) to 259 (d), the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are all different from the same metal. In this embodiment, the metal has a metallic luster color, and the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is configured to change color from a predetermined color at a predetermined timing.

Specifically, in the drawings of FIGS. 259 (b) and 259 (c), a stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is used as the left guide nail 1232, a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used as the jump nail 1231, and brass is used as the life nail 1230. The obstacle nails 1201 made of stainless steel are adopted respectively. Further, the color of the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 changes at a predetermined timing in the order of white, green, red, and yellow from the off state.

In this case, the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and irradiated to the obstacle nail 1201 by the diffused reflection of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is visually recognized by the obstacle nail 1201 under the ambient light in the amusement shop. The amount of light is set so that the change in the visible hue of the obstacle nail 1201 is small compared to the color to be applied. For example, the obstacle nail 1201 is yellow even when the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is red with respect to the obstacle nail 1201 which is visually recognized as a yellowish metallic luster under the ambient light in the game store. Visible as a tasty metallic luster.

With such a configuration, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is turned on in white from the off state to be in the light emitting state, so that white light is introduced to the side lower surface of the panel plate 1110. In this case, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that it can be visually recognized in white. In addition, the whitening portion HKB is also in a state of being visually recognized in white by the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel, so that the white light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are formed. It reflects diffusely reflected white light and is visually recognized with a grayish-white metallic luster having a color similar to that of the panel plate 1110 and the whitening portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left side guide nail 1232 and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster due to the adoption of the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper. Further, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster due to the adoption of the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are reddish metallic luster obstacle nails 1201 due to the light introduced into the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. As a yellowish metallic luster obstacle nail 1201, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the nail in a conspicuous state. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a lapse of a predetermined time, the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate changes the light emitting state from white to green, so that green light is introduced to the lateral lower surface of the panel plate 1110. In this case, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that the surface is visible in green. In addition, the whitening portion HKB is also in a state of being visually recognized in green by the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel, so that the green light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects the diffusely reflected green light and is visually recognized with a greenish metallic luster having a color similar to that of the panel plate 1110 and the whitening portion HKB. Therefore, the presence of the left side guide nail 1232 and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster due to the adoption of the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper. Further, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster due to the adoption of the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass. These jump nails 1231 and life nails 1230 are reddish metallic luster obstacle nails 1201 due to the light introduced into the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. As a yellowish metallic luster obstacle nail 1201, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the nail in a conspicuous state. In particular, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized more conspicuously because the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate located at the peripheral edge is visually recognized in green, whereas it is visually recognized in reddish metallic luster, which is a complementary color. It will be in a state of being. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a lapse of a predetermined time, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 introduces red light to the lateral lower surface of the panel plate 1110 by changing the light emitting state from green to red. In this case, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that the surface is visible in red. In addition, the whitening portion HKB is also in a state of being visually recognized in red by the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel, so that the red light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are formed. It reflects diffusely reflected red light and is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster. Further, the jump nail 1231 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper, so that the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the light diffusely reflected by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b can be obtained. It is reflected and visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster of a color similar to that of the panel plate 1110, the whitening portion HKB and the left guide nail 1232. Therefore, the presence of the left side guide nail 1232, the jump nail 1231, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the life nail 1230 is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster due to the adoption of the brass obstacle nail 1201. The light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the light diffusely reflected by the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate make it visible to the player in a conspicuous state as a yellowish metallic luster obstacle nail 1201. It is possible to make it. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

After a lapse of a predetermined time, the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate introduces yellow light to the lateral lower surface of the panel plate 1110 by changing the light emitting state from red to yellow. In this case, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate diffusely reflects the introduced light, so that the surface is visible in yellow. In addition, the whitening portion HKB is also in a state of being visually recognized in yellow by the introduced light. As described above, the left guide nail 1232 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel, so that the yellow light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are separated. It reflects diffusely reflected yellow light and is visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster. Further, since the life nail 1230 adopts the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass, the light introduced into the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the light diffusely reflected by the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate are emitted. It is reflected and visually recognized with a yellowish metallic luster of a color similar to that of the panel plate 1110, the whitened portion HKB and the left guide nail 1232. Therefore, the presence of the left side guide nail 1232, the life nail 1230, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized with a reddish metallic luster due to the adoption of the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper. The light introduced from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate to the panel plate 1110 and the light diffusely reflected by the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate make it visible to the player in a conspicuous state as an obstacle nail 1201 having a reddish metallic luster. Is possible. Therefore, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

In the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) in this way, a predetermined light switched to a different color at a predetermined timing is introduced from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) to the rear of the obstacle nail 1201. By irradiating the diffusely reflecting portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) and the whitening portion HKB located, the diffusely reflecting portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized in the same color as the predetermined switched light color. It will be in a state to continue.

Further, by forming the plurality of obstacle nails 1201 with metals of a plurality of colors, light of a predetermined color is introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) at a predetermined timing. The obstacle nail 1201 of the first predetermined color is visually recognized by the player in a state of being inconspicuous as a similar color to the predetermined light color, and the obstacle nail 1201 of the second predetermined color is conspicuous as a different color to the predetermined light color. It is visually recognized by the player in the state.

Further, the predetermined light introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) at a predetermined timing becomes a different predetermined light, and the color of the light irradiated to the obstacle nail 1201 changes, so that the first predetermined color is obtained. The obstacle nail 1201 of the second predetermined color is visually recognized by the player in a state of being conspicuous as a different color with respect to a different predetermined light color, and the obstacle nail 1201 of the second predetermined color is inconspicuous as a similar color with respect to a different predetermined light color. It is visually recognized by the player.

In this way, the color of the light emitted to the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) located behind the obstacle nail 1201 changes, so that the obstacle nail 1201 is switched between a conspicuous state and an inconspicuous state. Since it is visually recognized by the player, it is possible to change the visual mode of the player with respect to the obstacle nail 1201.

In this way, as the color of the predetermined light introduced into the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) changes, the color is different from the predetermined color so that the player can visually recognize the color in a conspicuous state. Since the obstacle nail 1201 is changed in a fluid manner, the player can obtain a visual interest such as chasing the obstacle nail 1201 in a conspicuous state with his / her eyes, and at the same time, the player's attention is distracted. As a result, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made relatively inconspicuous.

An example is shown in which the whitening portion HKB and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b are visually recognized in a predetermined color by the light of a predetermined color introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 with respect to the panel plate 1110. The light emitting state of the lower light emitting substrate 2400 in a predetermined color may be configured to maintain the lighting state from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off.

With such a configuration, the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitening portion HKB, or the diffuse reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) and the whitening portion HKB, and the obstacle nail 1201 have similar colors. Since it is visually recognized by the color of, the presence of the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

An example is shown in which the light emitting board 2400 below the panel plate is kept lit in a predetermined color while the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, but the light introduced from the light emitting board 2400 below the panel board suggests a decorative or gaming state. It may be configured as follows. For example, at a predetermined timing during power-on to the pachinko machine 1, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be changed from a state of being lit in a predetermined color to a state of blinking in a predetermined color. Alternatively, the light intensity may be increased or decreased while the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is lit in a predetermined color. With such a configuration, the light introduced from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate can be used for decoration and suggestion of a gaming state. When the player starts the game and the main control board 1310 detects that the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, and the second starting opening 2004, or the first starting opening. The special lottery result drawn by winning a prize in the second starting port 2004 may be a big hit, and the big hit game state in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes a predetermined number of times may be started as a predetermined timing. .. It is preferable to return to the original light emitting state at the timing when the player finishes the game or when the jackpot game state ends. Alternatively, the special lottery result may be configured to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit due to such a change in the light emission mode.

In this way, by changing the light emitting mode of the light introduced from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) to the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110) to a different light emitting mode according to the gaming state. The light introduced into the transparent plate portion can be used as light for decorating the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) and the whitening portion HKB while making the presence of the whitening portion HKB less noticeable. ..

As the color of the light introduced into the panel plate 1110, light of a predetermined color other than white or a color having a color tone similar to that of the obstacle nail 1201 may be adopted. For example, the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass may be configured to select and introduce one of blue, green, and red light. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper may be configured to select and introduce any one of blue, green, and gold light. In these cases, the color of the light and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 visually recognized in the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized by the color of the light introduced by the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion HKB. Since the colors of and are not the same, the effect is limited in that the presence of the whitening portion HKB is made inconspicuous. On the other hand, since it is possible to introduce a plurality of different colors into the panel plate 1110, it is possible to increase the decorative variety.

On the other hand, the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 may be configured to introduce blue, green, red, or gold light. In this case, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized by the color of the introduced light, and the introduced light partially reaches the obstacle nail 1201, so that the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b The color of the light visually recognized in the whitening portion HKB and the color of the obstacle nail 1201 will be visually recognized in the same color, and while making the presence of the whitening portion HKB less noticeable, a plurality of different colors will be obtained with respect to the panel plate 1110. It is possible to increase the decorative variety because it is possible to introduce.

From the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, light of one color out of a plurality of colors is introduced into the panel plate 1110, and a special lottery is performed according to the color of the light introduced into the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion HKB. It may be configured to perform a light emission effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the result of is a big hit. This light emitting effect may be configured to start at a timing before the result of the special lottery is shown to the player by stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol.

For example, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of brass is adopted, as the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110, as the first expected color indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (for example, 10%). Blue light is adopted as the second expected color with a medium jackpot expectation (for example, 30%), and gold light is adopted as the third expected color indicating that the jackpot expectation is high (for example, 70%). It may be configured to do so.

Further, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of pure copper is adopted, the light introduced from the panel plate 1110 from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is blue as the first expected color indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (for example, 10%). Use light as the second expected color with a medium jackpot expectation (eg 30%) and red light as the third expected color with a high jackpot expectation (eg 70%). It may be configured in.

Further, when the obstacle nail 1201 made of stainless steel is adopted, as the light introduced from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110, as the first expected color indicating that the jackpot expectation is low (for example, 10%). Blue light is used as the second expected color with a medium jackpot expectation (for example, 30%), and white light is used as the third expected color with a high jackpot expectation (for example, 70%). It may be configured to do so.

In this way, when the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized in a predetermined color based on the result of the special lottery, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is given a light emitting color with a relatively low expectation of a big hit. When the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is made to emit light with a light emitting color having a relatively high expectation of a big hit as compared with the case of emitting light, the color of the rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion HKB on the back of the panel plate and the color of the obstacle nail 1201. It is preferable to configure so that and can be visually recognized in similar colors.

In this way, when the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) emits light with a light emitting color with high expectation of big hit, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b) are executed. ) And the color of the whitening part HKB are visually recognized as similar colors, so that the whitening part HKB can be made inconspicuous, and when a high-expected light emission effect is performed, the whitening part HKB is present. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player notices and the player's interest is enhanced by the high-expected light-emitting effect.

It should be noted that the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is normally turned off, and at the timing suggesting the expected degree of jackpot (for example, the timing of occurrence of the reach state), one of the first expected color to the third expected color is expected. It may be configured to emit light for a predetermined time (for example, for 2 seconds) to introduce light of one of the expected colors from the first expected color to the third expected color into the panel plate 1110.

The color of the light emitted by the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be changed from the first expected color to the second expected color at the timing before the special lottery result is suggested by the stop of the decorative symbol. .. Further, after changing from the first expected color to the second expected color, the color may be further changed to the third expected color. Further, the first expected color may be changed to the third expected color, or the second expected color may be changed to the third expected color. In addition, such a change in the expected color may actually increase the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit.

The light emitting effect by the first expected color to the third expected color may be configured to be executed until the variable display of the decorative symbol indicating the result of the special lottery is completed. Specifically, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the variable display indicating the result of the special lottery is displayed until the timing when the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, or the variable display corresponding to the next special lottery result. May be configured to continue the light emission effect until the start of. On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the light emitting effect is continued even at the timing when the variable display indicating that the decorative symbol is a big hit is stopped, and the big hit game state. May be configured to continue the light emission effect even after the start of. In this case, it is preferable to set the start of a predetermined round during the big hit game state and the end of the big hit game state as the timing to end the light emission effect.

When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the player is shown that the result of the special lottery is a big hit (for example, a special character is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, or At the timing (such as when a special sound effect is output), the light emission effect state of the first expected color or the second expected color may be changed to the light emission effect state of the third expected color. In this case, it is preferable to set the start of a predetermined round during the big hit game state and the end of the big hit game state as the timing to end the light emission effect.

In this way, the light emission effect by the third expected color is executed at the timing when it is confirmed that the state is advantageous to the player (big hit game state), and the light emission effect is continued even during the advantageous state to the player (big hit game state). By executing a light emission effect using the third expected color, the whitening portion HKB is made inconspicuous, and the player is less likely to notice its existence, so that a state advantageous to the player (big hit game state) occurs. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player's interest is heightened during the timing when the fact is confirmed or during the occurrence of a state advantageous to the player (big hit game state).

It is configured so that the state of the light emitting board 2400 below the panel plate can be changed from the off state to the light emitting state or from the light emitting state to the off state according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk of the game store. You may. Alternatively, the intensity of the amount of light emitted by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided in a plurality of stages, and the amount of light emitted by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk of the game store. The strength may be configured to be changeable. Alternatively, a plurality of colors of light emitted by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 are provided, and the color of the light emitted by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is set according to the operation of the operation button 410 by the player or the store clerk of the game store. It may be configured to be changeable. As the emission color that can be selected at this time, yellow, white, red, or the like may be adopted. Moreover, you may combine these. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate and the whitening portion HKB with light having an appropriate color and an appropriate amount of light so that the whitening portion HKB is inconspicuous.

This is due to the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed in the store of the game store and the amount of light from other game machines installed in the store of the game store (especially the game machines installed back to back with respect to the pachinko machine 1). This is because it does not necessarily have a sufficient amount of light to illuminate the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate and the whitening portion HKB. For example, when the amount of light from lighting equipment or other gaming machines is sufficient, and the light from these multiple light sources is mixed and white, and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and the whitening portion HKB are illuminated. If there is, it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous even when the state of the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is set to the extinguished state. It is also possible to reduce the power consumption of the pachinko machine 1.

On the other hand, the color of the light from the lighting equipment installed in the store of the game store and the light from other game machines installed in the store of the game store (especially the game machines installed back to back with respect to the pachinko machine 1). The color of is not always close to white, and for example, a phenomenon may occur in which the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate and the whitening portion HKB are illuminated by ambient light that is blue or green. In this case, by operating the operation button 410 so as to emit light from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 with a color similar to the color of the metal constituting the obstacle nail 1201, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the whitening portion It is possible to visually recognize the HKB and the obstacle nail 1201 in similar colors. For example, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, yellow light is emitted, and when the pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, red or orange light is emitted to irradiate the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400. It is good to do it. By adjusting the amount of light emitted by the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate to the extent that the color of the light from the lighting equipment and other gaming machines is not noticeable, the whitening portion HKB is made inconspicuous and the pachinko machine 1 is consumed. It is possible to reduce power consumption.

It should be noted that such changes in the light emitting state, the light emitting color, and the amount of light may be configured to be feasible while the player is playing the game. For example, it may be configured so that the light emitting state, the light emitting color, and the amount of light can be changed by operating the operation button 410 while the decorative pattern is changing or the jackpot game state. Further, although the operation button 410 is an operation button for staging, a dedicated button for changing the color and amount of light may be provided on the front surface of the dish unit 320. Further, it may be configured so that this button can be operated without opening the door frame 3.

In this way, the color and amount of light emitted from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) can be adjusted by operating the operating means (operation button 410, etc.) that can be operated by the clerk of the amusement store. Therefore, it is possible to change the light emitting state of the diffusely reflecting portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate) to a light emitting state in which the whitening portion HKB is inconspicuous.

An example of performing a light emitting effect by emitting light from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in a predetermined color while the decorative pattern is fluctuating has been shown. May be good. For example, it may be configured to start the light emitting effect at a predetermined timing during the big hit game and end the light emitting effect at a predetermined timing during the big hit game. In the light emitting effect, for example, it may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation regarding the game state that occurs after the end of the big hit game state (for example, the degree of expectation that the probability fluctuates after the big hit game state).

In this way, the light emitting means (panel) is based on the third expected color, which is a higher expected light emitting color as a light emitting mode indicating the expected degree of the gaming state generated after the end of the state advantageous to the player (big hit gaming state). By making the light emitting substrate 2400) under the plate emit light, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the player notices the existence of the whitening portion HKB when the light emission effect with high expectation is performed, and the height is high. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as pouring water on the player's interest that has increased due to the expected light emission effect.

By providing a panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b behind the obstacle nail 1201 or introducing light of a predetermined color from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 to the panel plate 1110, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b can be visually recognized in a predetermined color. However, there is a problem that the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a (a portion forming a hemispherical spherical surface) is visually recognized as the color of the metal constituting the obstacle nail head 1201a. In particular, when the amount of light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store or other gaming machines is weak, the rear of the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized in bright color, so that only the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a is visible. It is visually recognized in a darker color than the light color and becomes conspicuous, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

Hereinafter, an embodiment is shown in which the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a is made inconspicuous by irradiating the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a with light from the side, the upper side, the lower side, the front, and the like.

The door frame right side unit 550 shown in FIG. 6 or the like may be set to emit light, and the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a may be illuminated by the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550. When the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is turned off, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate is visible in bright color. Therefore, the color of the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 may be white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized by the color of the emitted light, so that the color of the light emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 May be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate. When the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 is in a light emitting state, the door frame right side unit 550 is in a light emitting state, and when the panel plate lower light emitting board 2400 is in a light off state, the door frame right side unit 550 is turned off. It is good to say. In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 and the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to make the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a inconspicuous. ..

In this way, an irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front is provided, and white or bright light from the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400) is used. In a state where the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) diffusely reflects light, the irradiation means irradiates the obstacle nail 1201 with white or bright light from the front to make the obstacle nail head 1201a conspicuous. It can be made difficult.

By the way, when the door frame right side unit 550 is set to emit light, only the right side of the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a is irradiated with light in front view, and the left side of the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a is exposed. It is still visible in dark colors and is in a conspicuous state. Therefore, the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 may be controlled to have a structure symmetrical with the door frame right side unit 550 so as to have the same light emitting state as the door frame right side unit 550. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the entire front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a with light, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a even more inconspicuous. It is desirable that the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 match the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light.

In this way, a plurality of irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, door frame left side unit 530, etc.) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front are provided, and light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400). In a state where the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) diffusely reflects the light due to the light from, a plurality of irradiation means irradiate the obstacle nail 1201 with light from different angles in front of the obstacle nail head. The portion 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Although the embodiment in which the door frame right side unit 550 is in a light emitting state is shown, the obstacle nail head 1201a is generated by light from another member capable of emitting light in place of or in addition to the door frame right side unit 550. It may be configured to irradiate the front surface of the door with light. Also in these other members, it is preferable to match the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light with the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400.

Further, when the light is emitted from the door frame right side unit 550 toward the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a, the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be left in the extinguished state without being in the light emitting state. This is because when the obstacle nail head 1201a is irradiated with light from the front, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate and the whitening portion HKB are also irradiated with the light at the same time. In this case, it is preferable to irradiate the obstacle nail head 1201a with white light from the front, or to irradiate the obstacle nail 1201 with light having a color similar to the color of the metal constituting the obstacle nail 1201. Further, when the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a is irradiated with light not only from the door frame right side unit 550 but also from other members capable of emitting light, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is also used. May be left in the extinguished state without making the light emitting state.

In this way, the irradiating means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front is provided, and the irradiating means is obstructed in the extinguished state of the light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400). By irradiating the nail 1201 with white or bright light from the front, the white or bright light from the irradiating means is also irradiated to the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b), and the diffused reflection portion emits light. Even when it is configured so that it can be in a state of diffuse reflection, the obstacle nail head 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Further, a light emitting portion capable of irradiating light downward is provided on the lower surface of the door frame top unit 570 described with reference to FIG. 24 and the like, and the light is irradiated toward the obstacle nail head 1201a. You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light above the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a inconspicuous. Further, the light emitted from the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the staging operation unit 400 described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 37 can be irradiated not only diagonally forward but also diagonally backward. It may be configured to irradiate light toward the obstacle nail head 1201a via the frame top lens 418. The frame top lens 418 may be made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate the lower part of the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a with light, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a inconspicuous. It is desirable that the door frame top unit 570 and the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the staging operation unit 400 match the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light.

In this way, irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front is provided on at least one of the upper side and the lower side of the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 is provided from the front. Even when it is configured to irradiate light, the obstacle nail head 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Instead of the door frame top unit 570 and the effect operation unit 400 described with reference to FIGS. 24 and 37, the door frame top unit 570, the effect operation unit 400, and FIG. 154 described with reference to FIG. 154 are used. A similar configuration may be adopted in an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to the above-described embodiment so as to irradiate the front light of the obstacle nail head 1201a. In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 154, the operation button 410 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and a light emitting means is provided in the operation button 410 to emit light to the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a. It may be configured to irradiate.

The frame movable body provided in the door frame top unit 570 may be configured to irradiate the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a with light. For example, the rear surface of the printed substrate constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 described with reference to FIGS. 173, 174, and 175, and the left ear inner frame movable body. A light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface of the printed substrate constituting the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430 of the body 7400, and the rear surface of the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable. The rear surface of the body 7400 is made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin, respectively, and the light from the light emitting diode mounted on the printed substrate constituting the right ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7330 and the left ear inner frame movable. The light from the light emitting diode mounted on the rear surface of the printed substrate constituting the left ear inner frame movable body light emitting portion 7430 of the body 7400 may be configured to illuminate the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a. .. Further, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIG. 174 are similarly deformed in the same manner as the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400. It may emit light.

In this way, as an irradiation means (door frame right side unit 550, etc.) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front, a movable movable body (right ear outer frame movable body 7350, left ear outer frame movable body, etc.) 7450, right ear inner frame movable body 7300, left ear inner frame movable body 7400, etc.) and operable operating means (operation button 410, etc.) are adopted so that the obstacle nail 1201 is irradiated with light from the front. Even when configured, the obstacle nail head 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

Further, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 described with reference to FIGS. 181 (A) to 181 (E). Light from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, which are provided in the door frame top unit 570 so as to irradiate toward, illuminates the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a. It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 181 (B) and 181 (E), the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame movable body first surface 7410, after the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body is turned to the front and stopped (third state), the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit are placed. It is good to make it emit light. Of the light emitted from the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting part 7052 in the door frame top unit, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, left. A part of the light that is not irradiated on either the first surface 7410 of the movable body of the inner ear frame or the first surface 7460 of the movable body of the outer frame of the left ear is irradiated to the lower part of the game area 5a.

With such a configuration, the right ear inner frame movable body first surface 7310, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360, and the left ear inner frame in a state of being stopped facing the front (third state). The first surface 7410 of the movable body and the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body can be irradiated with light to be in a decorative state, and the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the lower part of the game area 5a. It is possible to irradiate the upper part of the head with light from the left and right directions, and it is possible to make the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a inconspicuous without providing a new light source.

Further, when the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is turned off, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate is visible in bright color, so that the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side in the door frame top unit are visible. The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 7052 may be white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized by the color of the emitted light, so that the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door frame The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head The front surface of the portion 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Further, from the state (first state) in the standby position shown in FIGS. 181 (A), 181 (C), and 181 (D), the right ear inner frame movable body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, and the left ear. After turning the inner frame movable body 7400 and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450 10 degrees clockwise when viewed from the right side and stopping, the right light emitting part 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting in the door frame top unit The unit 7052 may be made to emit light. Of the light emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, most of the light emitted downward from the door frame top unit 570 is movable in the inner frame of the right ear. The entire game area 5a is irradiated without being blocked by the body 7300, the right ear outer frame movable body 7350, the left ear inner frame movable body 7400, and the left ear outer frame movable body 7450.

With such a configuration, it is possible to irradiate light from the left and right directions above the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the entire game area 5a, and the obstacle nail head can be irradiated from the left and right without providing a new light source. It is possible to make the front surface of the portion 1201a inconspicuous.

Further, when the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is turned off, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate is visible in bright color, so that the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side in the door frame top unit are visible. The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 7052 may be white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized by the color of the emitted light, so that the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door frame The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head The front surface of the portion 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Further, the right ear inner frame movable body 7300 and the left ear inner frame movable body 7400 are set to the standby positions (first state) shown in FIGS. 181 (A), 181 (C), and 181 (D), and are on the right. After the movable ear outer frame 7350 and the left outer frame movable body 7450 are stopped facing the front as shown in FIGS. 181 (B) and 181 (E) (third state), the inside of the door frame top unit is set. The right light emitting unit 7050 and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit may emit light.

Of the light emitted from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, the right ear outer frame movable body first surface 7360 and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460. A part of the light not irradiated to any of them is irradiated to the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a.

With such a configuration, the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body and the left ear outer frame movable body first surface 7460 in the state of being stopped facing the front (third state) are decorated by irradiating light. In addition to being able to be in a state, it is possible to irradiate light from the left and right directions above the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a planted in the upper part of the game area 5a and the lower part of the game area 5a, and a new light source is provided. It is possible to make the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a inconspicuous without any problem. Further, in the central portion of the game area 5a in the vertical direction, the light from the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit is the first surface 7360 of the right ear outer frame movable body. Since it is blocked by the first surface 7460 of the left ear outer frame movable body, it is hardly irradiated. As a result, light is reflected on the front surface and the back surface of the glass unit 190 and the surface of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the amount of light that is perceived as "dazzling" is incident on the player's eyeball. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the player's visibility to the game board side effect display device 1600 is impaired.

Further, when the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate is turned off, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate is visible in bright color, so that the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the left side in the door frame top unit are visible. The color of the light emitted from the light emitting unit 7052 may be white. On the other hand, when the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is in a light emitting state, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is in a state of being visually recognized by the color of the emitted light, so that the right light emitting portion 7050 in the door frame top unit and the door frame The color of the light emitted from the left light emitting portion 7052 in the top unit may be the same color as the color of the light emitted from the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate.

In this way, by matching the emission color and emission timing of the emitted light in the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the right light emitting unit 7050 in the door frame top unit, and the left light emitting unit 7052 in the door frame top unit, the obstacle nail head The front surface of the portion 1201a can be made less noticeable.

Further, the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 described with reference to FIGS. 236, 237, 243 and the like may be configured to irradiate the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a with light. In this case, a light emitting diode is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 made of a white printed circuit board, and is mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 with the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 positioned at the moving position. The light from the light emitting diode may be configured to illuminate the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a. In this case, in order to protect the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810, a cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin may be provided on the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800.

It should be noted that the light emitting diode is not mounted on the rear surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810, and only the cover member made of colorless transparent or milky white synthetic resin that protects the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810 is provided. May be good. In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to the front in the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 composed of the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 located at the moving position and the white printed substrate. The light diffusely reflected backward illuminates the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a. In this case, it is preferable to use white or a color similar to the color of the obstacle nail as the display color used for the background image and the character image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Alternatively, as the background image or character image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, an image in which the ratio of red, green, and blue is equally divided may be used. This is because the back surface of the root vegetable frame movable body 7800 and the root vegetable frame movable body light emitting unit 7810 made of a white printed substrate diffusely reflect and mix these lights, so that the color of the light illuminating the obstacle nail 1201 is white. Because it becomes.

In this way, an irradiation means (such as the game board side effect display device 1600) capable of irradiating the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the rear is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201 and light can be reflected to the obstacle nail 1201. Even when a reflecting means (root vegetable frame movable body light emitting portion 7810, etc.) is provided in front of the obstacle nail 1201 so as to irradiate the obstacle nail 1201 with light from the front, the obstacle nail head 1201a is made inconspicuous. be able to.

The shape of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate represents a snowy mountain. In this way, by adopting a shape that imitates the shape of some kind of article or a geometric shape as the shape of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b also functions as a part to be decorated. It is possible to make it. In the present specification, the members and parts having the same shape and diffusely reflecting white or light represent a snowy mountain. In addition, members and parts having a similar shape and metallic luster represent glaciers. In the case of other colors, it indicates plants growing in the mountains and rocks exposed as the mountain surface.

As described above, even if the outer shape of the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) is decoratively shaped, the obstacle nail head 1201a can be made inconspicuous.

The method of planting the obstacle nail 1201 in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110 is shown, but when a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 are planted adjacent to each other, between the adjacent obstacle nails 1201. In this area, both the effect of elastic deformation of the panel plate 1110 caused by one of the planted obstacle nails 1201 and the effect of elastic deformation of the panel plate 1110 caused by the other planted obstacle nail 1201 Will join. Therefore, the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur between the adjacent obstacle nails 1201. In particular, when the obstacle nail 1201 and the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232 are provided adjacent to each other so that the game ball does not pass, such as the left guide nail 1232, such a whitening portion HKB Is likely to occur. It should be noted that there is a high possibility that the whitening portion HKB will also occur in the right side guide nail 1233.

Therefore, in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, the entire left side guide nail 1232 is configured to be located in the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of one panel plate in a front view. With such a configuration, even if the whitening portion HKB is generated in a portion where the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur, the generated whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. For the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as life nails 1230 and the two obstacle nails 1201 planted as jump nails 1231, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate was provided corresponding to each obstacle nail 1201. It may be configured to provide each.

It is preferable that the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate and the effect display device 1600 on the game board side are configured so as not to overlap with each other in the front view. With such a configuration, the visibility of the game board side effect display device 1600 is not impaired. On the other hand, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to overlap each other in a front view. With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize at least a part of the periphery of the game board side effect display device 1600 in a decorative manner.

The technical items in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 may be combined. For example, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in one embodiment may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the light emitting means in another embodiment. Further, the technical matters in each embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 may be adopted in other embodiments described later. Further, in the case of the embodiment having the panel plate rear light emitting substrate 2420 instead of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the panel plate rear light emitting substrate 2420 is replaced with the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the same manner as the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400. It may be configured to emit light in the manner described in the above.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, in the panel plate 1110, the boundary between the portion where the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided and the portion where the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is not provided is a combination of a plurality of straight lines. It is configured as follows. Specifically, by using a plurality of straight portions having the same length as the obstacle nail 1201, a boundary between a portion where the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided and a portion where the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is not provided is formed. Has been done.

In this way, the boundary between the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, etc.) and the rear visual recognition portion (portion where the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, etc. is not provided) makes it easy to visually recognize the rear from a plurality of straight lines. The obstacle nail 1201 which is rod-shaped and the boundary between the diffused reflection part and the rear visual recognition part are visually similar to each other. Therefore, the obstacle nail 1201 and the diffused reflection part are more integrated. It becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the whitening portion HKB, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In addition, instead of making all the boundaries a straight line shape, at least a part of the boundaries may be a straight line shape.

Further, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 260 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate described with reference to FIG. 259 is deformed into a mesh shape. FIG. 260 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 260 (b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 260 (a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the left side guide nail 1232 are the second from the right. The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position where it does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate in front view. Further, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at a position where a part of the two obstacle nails 1201 overlaps with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate in front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 260 (b), the portion of these obstacle nails 1201 planted in the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized so as to overlap at least a part of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate. In this way, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b in an integrated manner while further ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

Further, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 261 shows an embodiment in which the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate described with reference to FIG. 259 is modified to be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 261 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 261 (b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate has a decorative shape imitating a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 261 (a), of the obstacle nails 1201, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the first obstacle nail 1201 from the right and the life nail 1230 among the left guide nails 1232 are on the back of the panel plate. It is provided at a position where it does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b in front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 261 (b), the portion of these obstacle nails 1201 planted in the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized so as to overlap at least a part of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate. In this way, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b in an integrated manner while further ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

Further, instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, a panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and a panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110 may be provided. FIG. 262 is modified so as to provide a panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and a panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d having different roughness instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIG. 259. An embodiment is shown. FIG. 262 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 262 (b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d having a relatively coarse roughness is provided above and below the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c having a relatively fine roughness. The visual mode of the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel plate and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate is different. The boundary between the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel plate and the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate has a decorative shape imitating a mountain range. As shown in FIG. 262 (a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the obstacle nails 1201 from the first to the third from the left of the left guide nails 1232 are positioned so as to overlap the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate in front view. It is provided in. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 on the left side are provided at positions overlapping with the first rough surface portion 1110c on the back of the panel plate in front view. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 262 (b), the portion of the left guide nail 1232 planted in the panel plate 1110 in the obstacle nail 1201 from the first to the third from the left is the first rough surface portion on the back of the panel plate. It can be visually recognized so that at least a part of it overlaps with 1110c. Further, the portion planted in the panel plate 1110 in the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the life nail 1230 on the left side is the second rough surface portion 1110d on the back of the panel plate. Can be visually recognized as overlapping at least in part.

It should be noted that the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d are not provided depending on the degree of roughness, but the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel are provided due to the difference in roughness. The plate back second rough surface portion 1110d may be provided. For example, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c may be formed by satin finish processing, and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d may be formed by lens cut processing. Even in this case, it is possible to make the visual appearance mode of the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d different.

In this way, a plurality of diffusely reflecting portions (panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c and panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d) having different viewing modes are provided so that the decorative shape can be visually recognized at the boundary between the plurality of diffused reflecting portions. Even in such a case, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b can be made visible to the player in an integrated manner, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d), the embodiment in which the white light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel plate 1110 is shown, and FIGS. 260 to 262 are shown. In the modification described with reference to the present invention, the white light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be configured to be introduced into the panel plate 1110.

Although an example in which the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110 with reference to FIG. 259, the incident light can be mirror-reflected in place of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b. An example of the modification so as to provide the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate will be described with reference to FIG. 263.

FIG. 263 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 263 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 263 (a). FIG. 263 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 263 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110.

The metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be formed by plating the back surface of the panel plate 1110. The metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be provided with a plating layer having a grayish white metallic luster and visually recognizable in silver by a plating process using aluminum as a material. Alternatively, a panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e having a reddish metallic luster is provided by a plating process using pure copper as a material, or a yellowish metallic luster is provided by a plating process using brass as a material. The metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, which is visually recognized in gold, may be provided. As the shape of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, it is preferable to adopt the same shape as the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate. The thickness of the plated thin film formed by the plating process is about 0.2 mm, but it is exaggerated in the figure. This point is the same in the other embodiments described later and the drawings showing the other embodiments.

In this way, the metallic luster portion (also the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate made of metal) is provided behind the metal obstruction nail 1201, so that the obstruction nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion have a metallic luster. Since it is visually recognized integrally with the metal, the whitening portion HKB located between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion can be made inconspicuous in the front-rear relationship.

As shown in FIG. 263 (d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be configured to introduce light into the panel plate 1110 and reflect the light introduced in the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate. Further, the light emitting mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

Further, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be formed in a mesh shape. FIG. 264 shows an embodiment in which the shape of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate described with reference to FIG. 263 is deformed into a mesh shape. FIG. 264 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 264 (b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), among the obstacle nails 1201, the obstacle nail 1201 functioning as the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side and the left side guide nail 1232 are the second from the right. The obstacle nail 1201 is provided at a position where it does not overlap with the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate in front view. Further, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the life nails 1230 are provided at a position where a part of the two obstacle nails 1201 overlap with the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate in front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 264 (b), these obstacle nails 1201 can be visually recognized so as to overlap at least a part of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate. In this way, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate in an integrated manner while further ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear.

Further, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be formed from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 265 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 263 is modified to form from a plurality of decorative shapes. FIG. 265 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 265 (b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate has a decorative shape imitating a shuriken. As shown in FIG. 265 (a), of the obstacle nails 1201, the two obstacle nails 1201 functioning as the first obstacle nail 1201 from the right and the life nail 1230 among the left guide nails 1232 are on the back of the panel plate. It is provided at a position where it does not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b in front view. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 265 (b), these obstacle nails 1201 can be visually recognized so as to overlap at least a part of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate. In this way, while further ensuring the visibility of the decorative member located at the rear, it becomes possible for the player to visually recognize the obstacle nail 1201 and the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate in an integrated manner, and as a result, whitening is achieved. The part HKB can be made inconspicuous.

An example is shown in which the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate is provided in a flat shape, but if the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate mirror-reflects light, only the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate stands out. There is a risk that the sense of unity between the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate and the obstacle nail 1201 will be diminished. This tendency becomes more remarkable as the area of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate becomes larger. Therefore, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 264, the panel plate back surface metallic luster portion 1110e may be formed in a mesh shape. Alternatively, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 265, a plurality of panel plate back metallic luster portions 1110e may be provided so as to reduce the area of one panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. For example, each of the obstacle nails 1201 may be configured to have an independent panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e. Alternatively, by scraping a part of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate generated by the plating process, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be configured to reflect light more diffusely. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the visual sense of unity between the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate and the obstacle nail 1201.

Further, instead of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate are provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to be visually recognized with different metallic lusters. It may be configured as. In FIG. 266, instead of the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e described with reference to FIG. 263, the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f and the panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110g which are visually recognized with different metallic lusters are shown. An embodiment modified so as to provide and is shown. FIG. 266 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 266 (b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110 g is provided above and below the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f. Further, the boundary between the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate has a decorative shape imitating a mountain range.

For the panel plate back 1st metallic luster part 1110f and the panel plate back 2nd metallic luster part 1110g, the plated part made of aluminum and visible in silver, the plated part made of pure copper and visible in reddish color, and brass. It is possible to appropriately combine the plated portion made of metal and visually recognizable in gold with respect to both the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the panel plate. Specifically, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is composed of a plated portion that is visually recognized in silver, and the second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the panel plate is visually recognized in a plated portion or gold that is visually recognized in a reddish color. It may be configured by a plated portion. Alternatively, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is composed of a plated portion that is visually recognized in gold, and the second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the panel plate is visually recognized in silver or a plated portion that is visually recognized in reddish color. It may be configured by. Alternatively, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate is composed of a plated portion that is visually recognized in a reddish color, and the second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the panel plate is a plated portion that is visually recognized in silver or a plated portion that is visually recognized in gold. It may be configured by.

A combination may be adopted in which the metallic luster of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate obtained by the predetermined plating process and the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 have similar colors. For example, when an obstacle nail made of stainless steel and visually recognizable in silver is adopted as the obstacle nail 1201, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 may be plated so as to be visually recognizable in silver. When a pure copper obstacle nail 1201 is used as the obstacle nail 1201, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 may be plated with a reddish metallic luster. When a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used as the obstacle nail 1201, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 may be plated so as to be visible in gold. In this way, by configuring the color of the obstacle nail 1201 to match the color of the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, the color of the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate are integrated as a decorative portion. It will be visible to the player, and the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Similarly, the metallic luster of one of the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the panel plate and the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 have similar colors. A combination may be adopted. For example, when an obstacle nail made of stainless steel and visually recognizable in silver is adopted as the obstacle nail 1201, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is subjected to a plating process that is visually recognizable in silver, so that the first metallic luster on the back of the panel plate is applied. One of the portion 1110f and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate is formed so that it can be visually recognized with the same silver metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the panel. It is preferable to perform a plating process in which the other of the second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the plate is visually recognized as having a metallic luster other than silver (reddish metallic luster or gold color).

When a brass obstacle nail 1201 is used as the obstacle nail 1201, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is subjected to a metallic luster process that is visible in gold, so that the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back surface of the panel plate and the panel are used. One of the 2nd metallic luster portions 1110g on the back of the plate is formed so that it can be visually recognized with the same golden metallic luster as the obstacle nail 1201, and the 1st metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the 2nd metallic luster on the back of the panel plate. The other of the metallic luster portions 1110 g may be subjected to a plating process that is visually recognizable with a metallic luster other than gold (reddish metallic luster or golden color).

As described above, the metallic luster of the obstacle nail 1201 and the first metallic luster portion (for example, the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate) and the second metallic luster portion (for example, the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate). ), The color of the obstacle nail 1201 and one of the first metallic luster portion and the second metallic luster portion are integrated by configuring the metal luster to match the metallic luster of either one. It will be visible to the player as a decorative aspect, and the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Further, since the metallic luster is still visible in the metallic luster portion of either the first metallic luster portion or the second metallic luster portion, the other metallic luster portion is also referred to as the obstacle nail 1201. It is visually recognized almost integrally, and the whitening portion HKB can be made more inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263 (d), an embodiment in which the light emitted from the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is introduced into the panel plate 1110 is shown, but FIGS. 264 to 266 are shown. In the modification described above, the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be configured to be introduced into the panel plate 1110.

With reference to FIGS. 259 to 262, an embodiment in which a diffused reflection portion (panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d) is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is shown. However, the diffused reflection portions in these embodiments are subjected to the plating processing described with reference to FIGS. 263 to 266, and the metallic luster portions (panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, panel plate back first metal) are subjected to the plating process. The glossy portion 1110f and the second metallic luster portion 1110g on the back of the panel plate may be provided. Further, in the embodiment having a plurality of diffusely reflecting portions as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 261 and 262, the metallic luster portion is similarly provided for at least one diffused reflecting portion. good. The other diffusely reflecting portion (rough surface portion 2410a of the decorative member behind the panel plate) may be similarly plated. Alternatively, another metallic luster portion may be formed by such a method so as to have an uneven shape.

In such a configuration, the metallic luster portion is not flat but has an uneven shape. Therefore, the metallic luster portion receives ambient light or light from a light emitting means (panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, etc.). Diffuse reflection is possible on the front surface of the surface, and the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion are visually recognized more integrally, so that the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Further, by providing both the diffused reflection portion and the metallic luster portion, the diffused reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB are visually integrally visually recognized, and the metallic luster portion and the metal obstacle nail 1201 are visually integrated. Since it is visually recognized, the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

By the way, a charged game ball may roll on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Such an event occurs in the game machine island, which is composed of a plurality of pachinko machines installed, when the game ball is lifted and polished, the game ball and other members (polishing cloth used for polishing, and the island). The game ball becomes charged with static electricity due to friction with the synthetic resin or the like constituting the flow path of the above-mentioned flow path, and the game ball thus charged may be launched into the game area 5a. A discharge phenomenon may occur from a charged game ball toward the surroundings, but when the discharge phenomenon occurs, a high-frequency electromagnetic pulse is generated around the position where the discharge phenomenon occurs and electrons located in the surroundings. It may cause a component to malfunction or cause an electronic component to malfunction.

In order to prevent such a problem from occurring, it is behind the panel plate back metal glossy portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metal glossy portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metal glossy portion 1110g, and when viewed from the front. Electronic components and electronic elements may be arranged at overlapping positions so that these metallic glossy portions can be used as shield members for protecting the electronic components and electronic elements. For example, sensors such as the vibration sensor 2405, the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the magnetic detection sensor 4024 are located behind and in front of these metal glossy portions. It is recommended to place them in a position where they overlap visually.

In this way, the electronic parts or electrons are positioned so as to overlap with the metallic luster portion (panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110 g) in front view. By arranging at least one of the elements, it is possible to give the metallic luster portion used for decoration a function of protecting the electronic component or the electronic element.

Further, the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f, and the panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110 g are provided on the game board 5'by a predetermined metal cable or the like (for example). , The circuit ground of the peripheral control board 1510) may be configured to be electrically connected. When the first metallic luster portion 1110f on the back of the panel plate and the second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the panel plate are electrically connected, only one of them is provided in the game board 5'. It may be configured to be electrically connected to the ground of.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259, an example in which the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of the panel plate is provided by cutting the back surface of the panel plate 1110 has been shown, but instead of such a method, the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is provided. On the other hand, by printing a predetermined white or bright pattern or attaching a sticker with a predetermined white or bright pattern, light can be diffusely reflected on the back of the panel board. It may be configured to provide the part 1110h. As the shape of such a pattern or the seal, it is preferable to adopt the same shape as the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, and the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263, an example is shown in which the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated to provide the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back surface of the panel plate. Instead of such a method, the panel plate is provided. A metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate is provided by printing a predetermined pattern visually recognizable with metallic luster on the back surface of 1110 or attaching a seal having a predetermined pattern visually recognizable with metallic luster. It may be configured as follows.

Although an example in which the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110 with reference to FIG. 259, the panel plate back surface bright color visually recognized in white or bright color instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b is shown. An example of the modification so as to provide the visual recognition portion 1110h and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate capable of specularly reflecting the incident light will be described with reference to FIG. 267. As for the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 263 may be adopted.

FIG. 267 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 267 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 267 (a). FIG. 267 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 267 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110.

According to such a configuration, the diffused reflection portion (panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h) and the whitening portion HKB are visually visually recognized integrally, and the metallic luster portion (panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e) and metal are visually recognized. Since the obstacle nail 1201 manufactured by the manufacturer is visually recognized integrally, the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

The metal obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be configured to have a metallic luster of a similar color. For example, when the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, it is preferable to adopt the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e which is visually recognized in silver. Alternatively, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, it is preferable to adopt the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e which is visually recognized in gold. With such a configuration, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate and the metal obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized more visually and integrally.

The metal obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate may be configured so as not to have a metallic luster of a similar color. For example, when the stainless steel obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, which is visually recognized as having a reddish metallic luster, may be adopted. Alternatively, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate, which is visually recognized in silver, may be adopted. Even in this case, since the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate match in terms of metallic luster, the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate should be visually recognized as one. Can be done.

The light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be made to emit light in a predetermined color, and the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate may be introduced from below the panel plate 1110. FIG. 267 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided. For example, it may be configured to emit white or yellow light on the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate. Further, the light emitting mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

An example of introducing the light emitted from the light emitting substrate 2400 below the panel plate from below the panel plate 1110 is shown, but the light is emitted forward behind the bright color viewing portion 1110h on the back of the panel plate and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate. A predetermined light emitting means for irradiating may be arranged so as to illuminate the panel plate back bright color viewing portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e from the rear. It is formed into a thin film by reducing the thickness of the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, or by increasing the amount of light emitted forward from a predetermined light emitting means. By passing the light radiated from the rear to the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h and the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, the light radiated from the predetermined light emitting means is used to visually recognize the panel plate back bright color. It is possible to decorate the portion 1110h and the metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate.

The embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b described with reference to FIGS. 259 to 262 are applied to the member or portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) that diffusely reflects light in other embodiments. It may be adopted. Similarly, the embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel plate back metal luster portion 1110e described with reference to FIGS. 263 to 267 are the same as those of the members and parts having metallic luster in other embodiments (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metal). It may be adopted in the glossy portion 2410b). Further, the embodiments and technical matters relating to the panel board back bright color visual recognition unit 1110h described with reference to FIG. 267 may be adopted for the members and parts visually recognized in bright colors in other embodiments.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 263 and 267, a manufacturing method in which an obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel plate 1110 after plating, printing, or the like is applied to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is adopted. good. This is because if the back surface of the panel plate 1110 is plated or printed after the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel plate 1110, the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a may be plated. This is because the ink used for printing adheres to the inner wall of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, which deteriorates the aesthetic appearance of the panel plate 1110. By the way, after the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is subjected to plating processing, printing processing, etc., the light is directed forward at a position behind the panel plate 1110 that employs a manufacturing method in which the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is provided in the panel plate 1110. When a predetermined light emitting means for irradiating is arranged, light leaks forward from the gap between the rear end of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a and the obstacle nail tip portion 1201e, so that the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is arranged. The leaked light may be visually recognized by the player in an annular shape, and the aesthetic appearance may be deteriorated. The means for solving such a problem are shown below.

FIG. 268 is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 267, in which the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is installed behind the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate rear substrate is provided in front of the panel plate rear substrate 2420. An embodiment is shown in which a configuration is adopted in which a light emitting unit 2425 illuminates a panel board back bright color viewing unit 1110h from the rear.
FIG. 268 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 268 (b) is a cabinet view showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 268 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 268 (a). FIG. 268 (d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

The panel board rear substrate 2420 is composed of a printed circuit board whose front and rear surfaces are white. A plurality of panel plate rear substrate light emitting portions 2425 are provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear substrate 2420. The panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 is composed of a plurality of light emitting diodes surface-mounted as a light source on the front surface of the panel plate rear substrate 2420. The direction of the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 is the normal direction of the panel plate rear substrate 2420, and the light is emitted vertically toward the front.

As shown in FIG. 268, in the present embodiment, a decoratively shaped panel plate back bright color viewing unit 1110h is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and behind the panel plate back bright color viewing unit 1110h, A panel plate rear substrate 2420 having the same outer shape as the panel plate back bright color viewing unit 1110h is provided. Further, by causing the light emitting portion 2425 of the substrate behind the panel plate to emit light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate the bright color viewing portion 1110h on the back of the panel plate from the rear. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, the left side guide nail 1232, and the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 are provided at positions where they do not overlap in front view.

With such a configuration, the bright color visual recognition unit (for example, the panel plate back bright color visual recognition unit 1110h) is decorated with the light from the light source (for example, the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425) provided at the rear. can do. Further, the amount of light leaking forward from the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a can be reduced, and the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is visually recognized by the player in an annular shape. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of aesthetics.

A light emitting diode that irradiates light toward the side of the mounting surface may be adopted as the light emitting portion 2425 on the rear substrate of the panel plate. In this case, since the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 is emitted in the direction parallel to the panel plate rear substrate 2420, it is possible to irradiate the entire panel plate rear substrate 2420 with light. It is possible to prevent unevenness in the amount of light irradiation on the front surface of the panel plate rear substrate 2420.

The embodiment relating to the panel board rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIG. 268 may be adopted for the panel plate rear substrate 2420 and the white substrate on which the light emitting diode is mounted in another embodiment.

Although the example of the bright color visual recognition portion 1110h on the back of the panel plate is shown, such a configuration may be adopted not only in the decoration visually visible in bright color but also in the decorative portion provided in a thin film on the back surface of the panel plate. .. In particular, in the case of black / dark decorative parts, the appearance of light leaking forward is more noticeable than in white / light colored decorative parts, but even in this case, the deterioration of aesthetics should be suppressed. Is possible. When a plurality of decorative parts are provided and have a relatively bright decorative part and a relatively dark decorative part, the decorative part closer to light color is provided at a position where the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative part overlap with each other in front view. It is good. With such a configuration, it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the aesthetic appearance that occurs when the rear end portion of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a is visually recognized by the player in an annular shape.

A diffused reflection portion that diffusely reflects light (for example, a rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate) may be provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110, or a metallic luster portion (for example, a metallic luster portion 1110e on the back of the panel plate) that is visually recognized as having a metallic luster may be provided. An example is shown in which the whitening portion HKB around the obstacle nail 1201 is made inconspicuous by providing a bright color visual recognition unit (for example, a panel plate back bright color visual recognition unit 1110h) that can be visually recognized in bright color. A modification of the embodiment described with reference to 259, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, which is close to the back surface of the panel plate 1110 and diffusely reflects light, is visually recognized by metallic luster, or is visually recognized by light color. 269 will be described with reference to FIG. 269.

FIG. 269 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 269 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a). FIG. 269 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 269 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by subjecting a lens cut process or a satin finish to the front surface side. The rough surface portion 2410a of the decorative member behind the panel plate diffusely reflects ambient light so that it can be visually recognized in a whitish color. The reason why the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is that the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is arranged closer to the whitening portion HKB as compared with the case where the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the rear surface. This is because it can be visually recognized more integrally with the whitening portion HKB.

The rough surface portion 2410a of the decorative member behind the panel plate is configured to be located behind the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 planted on the panel plate 1110. There is.

In this way, the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion of the panel plate rear decorative member) is behind the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 on the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110). By locating the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) equipped with 2410a, etc., the whitening portion HKB near the planting site of the obstacle nail 1201 can be made inconspicuous by the diffused reflection portion visually recognized in white. It will be possible. Further, by providing the diffused reflection portion on the front surface of the decorative member, the distance between the diffused reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB can be made closer, and the diffused reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB can be visually recognized more integrally. In this embodiment or another embodiment, the front surface of the diffused reflection portion (rough surface portion 2410a, etc. of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410a, etc.) provided in the decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is metal-plated to have unevenness. It may be configured to form a certain metallic luster portion.

As shown in FIG. 269 (d), the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 was irradiated with light of a predetermined color (for example, white or yellow) by the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, and was irradiated on the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. It may be configured to reflect light. Further, the light emitting mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak. Even so, the rough surface portion 2410a of the decorative member behind the panel plate can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

With reference to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, which is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. An embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member has a metallic luster portion 2410b instead of the plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG. 270.

FIG. 270 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 270 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 270 (a). FIG. 270 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 270 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b formed by being subjected to a plating process on the front side. The metallic luster portion 2410b of the decorative member behind the panel plate diffusely reflects ambient light, so that the metallic luster is visually recognized. Even with such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

As shown in FIG. 270 (d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is configured to reflect the introduced light. May be good. Further, the light emitting mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the decorative member behind the panel plate and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally with the metallic luster, and as a result, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

With reference to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, which is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to have the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b in addition to the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a will be described with reference to FIG. 271.

FIG. 271 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. 271 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 271 (a). FIG. 271 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 271 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm, and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a formed by subjecting a lens cut process and a panel plate formed by being plated. The rear decorative member has a metallic luster portion 2410b on the front side. The rough surface portion 2410a of the decorative member behind the panel plate diffusely reflects ambient light so that it can be visually recognized in a whitish color. Further, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the decorative member behind the panel plate diffusely reflects ambient light, so that the metallic luster is visually recognized.

As described above, a decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member) provided with a diffused reflection portion (panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, etc.) and a metallic luster portion (panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) behind the obstacle nail 1201. By locating 2410 etc.), the diffused reflection part and the whitening part HKB are visually visually recognized as one, and the metallic luster part and the metal obstacle nail 1201 are visually visually recognized as one, so that the whitening part is whitened. The part HKB can be made less noticeable. In this embodiment or another embodiment, a decorative member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, etc.) is subjected to a lens cutting process, and a part thereof is plated to give an uneven metallic luster portion (panel). The plate rear decorative member may be configured to form the metallic luster portion 2410b).

As shown in FIG. 271 (d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 with light, and irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. It may be configured to reflect the emitted light. Further, the light emitting mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak. Even so, the metallic luster portion (for example, the metallic luster portion 2410b for the rear decorative member of the panel plate) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and the diffused reflection portion (for example, the rough surface portion 2410a for the rear decorative member for the panel plate) can be visually recognized. ) Can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b are provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, but the panel plate is provided. An embodiment in which at least one of the rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 will be described with reference to FIG. 272. ..

272 (a) to 272 (c) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA showing a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271 (b). FIG. 272 (a) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified so that the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is on the rear surface side and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is on the front surface side. ing. FIG. 272 (b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface side and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b on the rear surface side. ing. FIG. 272 (c) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to have both the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b on the rear surface side. .. In addition, although only the cross-sectional view is shown in FIGS. 272 (a) to 272 (c), it has a decorative shape as shown in FIG. 271 (a) when viewed from the front. .. Further, this point is the same in other embodiments showing the embodiment with reference to the cross-sectional view.

In this way, the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) and the metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) are provided at a distance in the front-rear direction to provide the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a). For example, since the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is visually recognized in a three-dimensional shape having a sense of depth, the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, the portion where the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is formed is designated as the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. The portion where the 2410b is formed may be configured to be the rough surface portion 2410a of the decorative member behind the panel plate.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 272 (a) and 272 (b), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b are respectively the panel plate rear decorative member. Although it was provided on the front side and the rear surface side of the 2410, a plurality of rough surface portions 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and a plurality of metallic luster portions 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member are provided, and the front side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided. An embodiment modified so as to be provided on both the rear surface side and the rear surface side will be described with reference to FIG. 273.

273 (a) to 273 (b) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA showing a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 272 (a). FIG. 273 (a) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to have the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on both the front surface side and the rear surface side. FIG. 273 (b) shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified so that the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is provided on both the front surface side and the rear surface side.

In this way, by providing a plurality of diffusely reflecting portions (rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member) at a distance in the front-rear direction, a plurality of diffusely reflecting portions visually recognized in white can be visually recognized in three dimensions. The visual sense of unity between the diffused reflection portion and the whitening portion HKB can be enhanced, and the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable. Further, by providing a plurality of metallic luster portions (panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b) at a distance in the front-rear direction, the plurality of metallic luster portions can be visually recognized three-dimensionally. The visual sense of unity with the obstacle nail 1201 can be enhanced, and the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 272 and 273, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel. The panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b provided on the rear surface of the plate rear decorative member 2410 are provided so as not to overlap with each other in front view, but at least a part thereof. May be deformed so as to overlap each other in the front view, and the embodiments in which the heads are deformed are shown below.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, but the panel is provided on the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified so as to provide the metallic luster portion 2410b of the plate rear decorative member will be described with reference to FIGS. 274 (a) to 274 (e).

274 (a) to 274 (e) are cross-sectional views taken along the line AA showing a modified example of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269A (a), respectively. In FIG. 274 (a), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b is provided on the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. The embodiment modified to is shown. In FIG. 274 (b), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion is provided only on a part of the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified to provide 2410b is shown. In FIG. 274 (c), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a part of the front surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion is provided on the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified to provide 2410b is shown. In FIG. 274 (d), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided only on a part of the front surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion is provided on the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified to provide 2410b is shown. In FIG. 274 (e), the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a is provided on the front surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion is provided only on a part of the rear surface side of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. An embodiment modified to provide 2410b is shown.

With such a configuration, the diffused reflection portion (for example, the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member) or the metallic luster portion (for example, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member) is behind the whitening portion HKB in the front view. At least one of them will be located, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In particular, as shown in FIGS. 274 (a), 274 (d), and 274 (e), the metallic luster portion (for example, the panel plate rear decoration) is behind the diffused reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a). When the member metal luster portion 2410b) is configured to be located, the game board side effect display device 1600 and other light emitting decorations are attached to the diffused reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a) from the rear. Since the light from the member is not irradiated, the rough surface portion 2410a of the decorative member behind the panel plate can be visually recognized as whiter.

Although only the cross-sectional view is shown in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 272 to 274, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b in these embodiments are shown. As the front view shape of the above, the front view shape in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271 may be adopted. In this case, the boundary between the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member is visually recognized in a decorative shape imitating a mountain range.

With reference to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, which is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 itself is modified to be formed of a milky white resin will be described with reference to FIG. 275.

FIG. 275 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. 275 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 275 (a). FIG. 275 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 275 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of the milky white synthetic resin is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The thickness of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is 2 mm. The decorative member 2410 behind the panel plate is visually recognized as milky white.

In this way, when the bright color viewing unit (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is arranged behind the transparent plate portion (panel plate 1110), the lens cut or the lens cut is performed on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. The whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous without performing processing such as plating.

In addition, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a shown in another embodiment may be provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. With such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Further, instead of arranging the panel board rear decorative member 2410 made of milky white synthetic resin behind the obstacle nail 1201, a translucent or opaque panel board made of light-colored (white, yellow, flesh-colored, etc.) synthetic resin. The rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201.

As shown in FIG. 275 (d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 reflects the irradiated light forward. You may. Further, the light emitting mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak. Even so, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be visually recognized as whitish, and as a result, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In addition, a light-colored printing part may be provided on the front surface of the panel board rear decorative member 2410, which is made of dark-colored (black, navy blue, etc.) synthetic resin and is visible as translucent or opaque, or a light-colored sticker may be attached. It may be configured in. Further, it is preferable to arrange such a bright-colored printed portion and a bright-colored sticker so as to be located behind the obstacle nail 1201. Further, a predetermined decorative shape (for example, a plurality of rows of mountain-shaped decorative shapes as shown in FIG. 271) may be provided by such a bright-colored printed portion or a sticker. Alternatively, a part of a predetermined decorative shape may be provided by a printed portion or a seal having a metallic luster.

With reference to FIG. 269, an example is shown in which a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, which is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and has a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a on the front surface. An embodiment in which the plate rear decorative member 2410 is modified to be formed of the metal itself will be described with reference to FIG. 276.

FIG. 276 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 276 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 276 (a). FIG. 276 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 276 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing an embodiment in which the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is provided below the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a metal plate material is arranged behind the panel plate 1110. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a thickness of 2 mm. The decorative member 2410 behind the panel plate is visually recognized as having a metallic luster. As the metal constituting the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to use a metal such as stainless steel, pure copper, or brass. Further, as the metal constituting the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to use a metal that can be visually recognized in a color similar to that of the material of the obstacle nail 1201.

Also. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be formed by bending the metal plate material into a bellows shape or deforming it into a predetermined decorative shape by a mold. At this time, it is advisable to process the metal plate material so that the depth appears in the front-rear direction. With such a configuration, the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) visually recognized by the metallic luster is visually recognized by the player with a feeling of unevenness, and the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) is visually recognized. ) And the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized more integrally. Further, by providing a transparent top coat portion in a predetermined color (for example, red or yellow) on the front surface of the stainless steel flat plate, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a metallic luster (for example, copper) having a predetermined color. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized by color (color, gold).

As shown in FIG. 276 (d), the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 with light, and the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 reflects the irradiated light. You may. Further, the light emitting mode or the like shown in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259 (d) may be adopted as the light emitting mode or the like of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 in the present embodiment. With such a configuration, when the light emitted by the pachinko machine 1, the light from the lighting equipment installed in the game store, or the light from other game machines installed in the game store is weak. Even so, the decorative member (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized with metallic luster, and as a result, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 268, an example is shown in which the panel plate rear board light emitting unit 2425 provided on the front surface of the panel plate rear substrate 2420 illuminates the panel plate back bright color viewing unit 1110h from the rear. However, an embodiment modified so as not to have the bright color visual recognition portion 1110h on the back of the panel plate will be described with reference to FIG. 277.

FIG. 277 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 277 (b) is a cabinet diagram showing the structure of the panel board rear substrate 2420 by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 277 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 277 (a). FIG. 277 (d) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the panel board rear board 2420 made of a white printed circuit board is configured to be directly visible via the panel board 1110. Even with such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous by the panel plate rear substrate 2420 that is visually recognized in white. The light emitting diode mounted on the front surface of the panel board rear substrate 2420 may be a light-colored diode. In addition, dark elements (IC that controls the light emitting diode, driver that drives the light emitting diode, etc.) can be mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear board 2420, or can be viewed from the front with the obstacle nail 1201 on the front surface of the panel board rear board 2420. It is good to mount it in a position where it does not overlap. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the whitening portion HKB becomes conspicuous because the dark-colored element and the whitening portion HKB are visually recognized in close proximity to each other.

In this embodiment, a light emitting diode that irradiates light to the side may be adopted as the light emitting portion 2425 on the rear substrate of the panel plate. In this case, it is possible to irradiate the entire front surface of the panel plate rear substrate 2420 with the light from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425.

An embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 277 are combined will be described with reference to FIG. 278.

FIG. 278 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. 278 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 278 (a). FIG. 278 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin and having a lens cut treatment on the front surface is arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201, and further behind the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion. A white panel board rear substrate 2420 having 2425 is arranged. With such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable, especially in the light-off state of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 composed of the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the white printed circuit board in which the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 can diffusely reflect the light. Since the light is uniformly irradiated to the entire rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member, the utilization efficiency of the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is enhanced. Is also possible.

An embodiment in which the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 271 and the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278 are combined will be described with reference to FIG. 279.

FIG. 279 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 279 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 279 (a). FIG. 279 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, a panel plate rear decorative member 2410 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin is arranged behind the obstacle nail 1201, and a white panel plate having a panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is further behind the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. The rear substrate 2420 is arranged. Further, the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is composed of a panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and a panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. The light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 is emitted forward through the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a. On the other hand, when the light emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 irradiates the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, the light is directed toward the rear on the back surface of the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. The light is reflected and returned to the white panel plate rear substrate 2420, and is finally irradiated forward through the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a.

With such a configuration, the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally, and the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a and the white surface portion 2410a located behind the whitening portion HKB can be visually recognized. The whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous by the panel plate rear substrate 2420.

As the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 279, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 271 to 274 may be adopted.

Further, as the light emitting mode of the panel plate rear substrate 2420 in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the light emitting mode of the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 may be adopted.

Further, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 278 and 279, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be an integral decorative unit.

In the panel plate rear substrate 2420, an element for controlling or driving the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 (IC for controlling the light emitting diode, light emitting diode) is provided at a position where it overlaps with the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b in front view. It may be configured to mount a driving driver, etc.). In this case, these elements are located behind the metallic luster portion 2410b of the decorative member behind the panel plate. A dark-colored element may be adopted as such an element.

With such a configuration, even when the game ball charged with static electricity flows into the board surface of the game board 5 and a discharge is generated at a predetermined position to generate an electromagnetic pulse, the decorative member behind the panel plate is generated. It is possible to reduce the influence of the electromagnetic pulse on these elements located behind the metallic luster portion 2410b. Further, since it is not visually recognized adjacent to the obstacle nail 1201, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In addition, instead of mounting these elements on the front surface of the panel plate rear board 2420, these elements may be mounted on the rear surface of the panel board rear board 2420. In this case as well, the same effect can be obtained.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 279, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 provided with the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 is located behind the obstacle nail 1201. Therefore, it is possible to directly illuminate the periphery of the obstacle nail 1201 with a stronger amount of light than the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 described with reference to FIG. 259 and the like.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 279, when the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 is made to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, white, red, yellow) and with a strong light amount, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is emitted. And the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be made visible in a predetermined color, and the whitening portion HKB can also be made visible in a predetermined color. Further, with respect to the obstacle nail 1201 having a metallic luster, the light from the panel plate rear substrate 2420 located at the rear is mirror-reflected (particularly in the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b), so that the metal originally constituting the obstacle nail 1201 is formed. It will be visually recognized in a predetermined color, not in the color of. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB more inconspicuous. In addition, when the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 emits light with a strong light amount in this way, each embodiment applied to the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 is applied to the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425, and is predetermined. It may be emitted at the emission color and emission timing of.

Light of a predetermined color does not reach the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a, which is a part of the obstacle nail 1201, from the panel plate rear substrate 2420. In that case, as described above, the door frame right side unit 550 or the like does not reach. It is preferable to irradiate the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a with light of the same color as a predetermined color by the member located in front of the obstacle nail 1201. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the front surface of the obstacle nail head 1201a is conspicuous.

The color of the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member and the emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 may be associated with each other to produce a light emitting effect, and the expected degree may be suggested depending on the light emitting mode. At this time, in the case of an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, it is preferable to configure the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 to emit light in a color similar to the color of the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. Further, in the case of an effect in which the degree of expectation is relatively low, it is preferable to configure the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 to emit light in a color different from the color of the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b.

For example, when the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member visually recognized in gold is provided, yellow light is emitted from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 as an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation. It is good to do it. Further, as an effect with a relatively low degree of expectation, it is preferable to configure the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 to irradiate blue light. With such a configuration, in an effect with a relatively high degree of expectation, a predetermined color (panel plate rear decorative member metal) irradiated from the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b and the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425. The panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, which is decorated by the light of the glossy portion 2410b and the same color), is visually recognized by the player, and the whitening portion HKB is also the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster. Since it is in a decorative state with the same color as the portion 2410b, it will be visually recognized by the player as a whole. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the whitening portion HKB is visually recognized and the player's expectation for a big hit, which has been raised by the relatively high expectation, is reduced. Further, since the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member and the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member are visually recognized integrally in similar colors, it is possible to give a visual impact to the player. .. Specifically, the area that was perceived as a separate area is perceived as an integrated area, and it seems that the area is visually increased.

When the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member, which is visually recognized as having a silver metallic luster, is provided, the emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 in the production having a relatively high expectation is not yellow. It may be configured to adopt white color. Similarly, when the panel plate rear decorative member metal luster portion 2410b, which is visually recognized as having a reddish metallic luster, is provided, the emission color of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 in a relatively high expectation effect is yellow. It may be configured to adopt red color instead.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 277 to 278, the panel plate rear substrate light emitting portion 2425 provided on the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is configured to be arranged around the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. May be good. For example, two panel board rear board light emitting parts 2425 may be placed at positions facing each other across the obstacle nail 1201 (position of 180 degrees), or the angle may be shifted by 120 degrees around the obstacle nail 1201 to the rear of the three panel plates. It is preferable to configure the substrate light emitting unit 2425 so as to be arranged. In FIGS. 277 (a) and 278 (a), three panel plate rear substrate light emitting portions 2425 are formed around the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nail 1201 on the rightmost side of the left guide nail 1232 when viewed from the front. It is provided so that it is evenly illuminated from the surroundings.

With such a configuration, light of a predetermined color is collected from the surroundings with respect to the obstacle nail first body portion 1201b, the obstacle nail spiral shape portion 1201c, and the obstacle nail second body portion 1201d constituting the obstacle nail 1201. It is possible to irradiate without. On the other hand, when only one panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 is arranged around the obstacle nail 1201, the portion where the light from the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 is difficult to reach sandwiches the obstacle nail 1201. It occurs on the side opposite to the side where the light emitting portion 2425 on the rear substrate of the panel plate is provided, and the aesthetic appearance of the obstacle nail 1201 is spoiled. This tendency is particularly remarkable in the case of a member whose rear member (panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear substrate 2420) is visually recognized in white as in the present embodiment. When irradiating the light from the plurality of panel plate rear substrate light emitting units 2425, it is preferable that the light emitting modes of the panel plate rear substrate light emitting units 2425 are the same. For example, it may be configured so that the light emitting portions 2425 on the rear substrate of the plurality of panel boards all light up in the same predetermined color (white, red, yellow, etc.).

With reference to FIGS. 259 to 279, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, and the panel plate rear are referred to. An example of arranging the decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, and the like is shown. In addition, the region cover member 2600a described with reference to FIG. 225 and the like is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The area cover member 2600a is provided with at least one of a diffused reflection portion similar to the rough surface portion 2410a of the panel plate rear decorative member, a bright color visual recognition portion, and a metallic luster portion similar to the metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member. It may be configured. By adopting such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable. In addition, these rough surface portions and metallic luster portions are formed in a band shape so as not to interfere with the visual recognition of the rolling of the game ball, and the width thereof is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball during rolling. It is preferable to configure the game ball so that the rough surface portion and the metallic luster portion do not completely hide the game ball.

These diffused reflection portions and metallic luster portions may be provided on the back surface of the glass plate 192 instead of the region cover member 2600a. Alternatively, in the embodiment having a plurality of glass plates 192, a rough surface portion or a metallic luster portion thereof may be provided between the glass plate 192 and the glass plate 192.

By hiding the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 with these diffused reflection portions and metallic luster portions, it is difficult to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 when the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized from a predetermined angle. Alternatively, it may be configured to be invisible.

By providing the diffused reflection portion, the bright color visual recognition portion, and the metallic luster portion in front of the whitening portion HKB, the obstacle nail 1201 is sandwiched between the metallic luster portion located in the front and the metallic luster portion located in the rear. It becomes possible to further enhance the sense of unity between the obstacle nail 1201 and the metallic luster portion. Further, when the whitening portion HKB is visually recognized from a predetermined angle, the whitening portion HKB is hidden by the metallic luster portion and the diffused reflection portion. Further, even if the whitening portion HKB is in a visible position, it is sandwiched between the diffused reflection portion and the bright color visual recognition portion located in the rear and the diffused reflection portion and the bright color visual recognition portion located in the front, and the whitening portion is in a visible position. HKB can be made less noticeable.

With reference to FIGS. 268 to 279, an embodiment in which one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are arranged behind the panel plate 1110 to make the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous. As shown above, as an effect, one or both of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be movable or rotateable. Further, this movement effect may be configured to be executed by control by the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the movement effect may be configured to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. The drive mechanism for moving or rotating the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be configured to be driven and controlled by the peripheral control substrate 1510.

By the way, when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are configured to be movable in this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 located at the standby position may be used. There is a possibility that the whitening portion HKB, which has been inconspicuous until then, becomes conspicuous when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 move to the moving position. Therefore, in order to prevent the whitening portion HKB from becoming conspicuous, the following embodiments may be adopted.

FIG. 280 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is deformed so as to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 280 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the standby position. FIG. 280 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves upward by a predetermined distance (10 mm) on a surface parallel to the panel plate 1110 by moving from the standby position to the first moving position. It is located at a position where it overlaps with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in the front view. FIG. 280 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves upward by a predetermined distance (20 mm) on a surface parallel to the panel plate 1110 by moving from the standby position to the second moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is located at a position where it does not overlap in the front view.

In this way, when the decorative member having the diffused reflection portion (for example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410) moves from the standby position to the first moving position in the movement effect, the obstacle nail 1201 is rearward of the panel plate in front view. By locating it so as to overlap with the decorative member 2410, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous.

When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is moved to the first moving position, it is desirable that all the obstacle nails 1201 can be maintained in a state of being overlapped with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in the front view, but some obstacles. Even when only the nail 1201 is positioned so as to overlap the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in the front view, the whitening portion HKB can be maintained in an inconspicuous state.

When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves to the second moving position, which is a position farther than the first moving position, the large amount of movement causes a large impact on the player, but the figure is shown in the figure. The obstacle nail 1201 shown in 280 (c) and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 do not overlap each other in the front view. Therefore, the execution frequency of the effect of moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 from the standby position to the first moving position and then returning it to the standby position without moving it to the second moving position, and the panel plate rear decorative member. As for the execution frequency of the effect of moving the 2410 from the standby position to the second moving position and then returning to the standby position, it is preferable to configure the effect to increase the execution frequency of the former effect. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the frequency of occurrence of a situation in which the whitening portion HKB is conspicuous while realizing diversification of the staging mode in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is moved.

When moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 integrally. Alternatively, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be moved integrally. Then, in a state where the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the first moving position or the second moving position, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be put into a light emitting effect state.

Further, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is set to different light emitting states depending on whether the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the first moving position and the second moving position, and the panel plate rear is rearward. The decorative member 2410 may be configured to be in a light emitting effect state in which it is visually recognized in different light emitting states. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed at the same time corresponding to this light emission effect state. Further, the effect image may be displayed differently when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the first moving position and when it is in the second moving position. The external shape of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 located at the first moving position and the second moving position, and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, one character or an integrated effect, etc. It may be configured to represent. For example, as a special effect image, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 representing the mountain range may be configured to display a mode in which it rains or a mode in which snow is piled up as a special effect image. Further, it may be configured so that different jackpot expectations are suggested depending on the plurality of such production modes.

With such a configuration, the player's interest is directed to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the game board side effect display device 1600 located in the direction in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has moved. Even if the decorative member 2410 moves to the second moving position and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 in front view, it is possible to distract the player's consciousness from the whitening portion HKB. Will be.

Although an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269 is shown, the embodiment is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269, and the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 270 to 279. In the same manner, it may be deformed. Further, the embodiment may be applied to the modified examples of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269. Further, a modification of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be applied to the panel plate rear substrate 2420. Even in these cases, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

FIG. 281 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are deformed so as to be movable in the vertical direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278.

FIG. 281 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 278 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position.

FIG. 281 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 278 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. The decorative member 2410 behind the panel plate moves upward by a predetermined distance (20 mm) on a surface parallel to the panel plate 1110 by moving from the standby position to the moving position. In this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the rear of the panel plate Although the decorative member 2410 is located at a position where it overlaps with each other in the front view, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are located at a position where they overlap with each other in the front view.

FIG. 281 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 278 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is in the moving position. The panel plate rear substrate 2420 moves upward by a predetermined distance (20 mm) on a surface parallel to the panel plate 1110 by moving from the standby position to the moving position. In this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear substrate are moved. Although the 2420 is located at a position where it does not overlap in the front view, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are located at a position where they overlap in the front view.

In this way, at a certain timing, only one of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is configured to move from the standby position to the moving position, and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate are configured to move. It is preferable to configure both 2420s so that they do not move to the moving position at the same time. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be alternately moved so as to appear and disappear in the vertical direction.

With such a configuration, even when the moving effect of moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420 to the moving position is executed, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear are executed. Since it is positioned so as to overlap with one of the substrates 2420 that did not move in front view, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitening portion HKB is inconspicuous. An embodiment of moving the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 from the standby position to the moving position is shown. However, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is provided in place of the panel plate rear substrate 2420 and overlaps in the front-rear direction. The two panel plate rear decorative members 2410 may be moved in the same manner. Further, the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided instead of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the two panel plate rear substrates 2420 overlapping in the front-rear direction may be similarly moved. Further, the positions of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 in the front-rear direction may be reversed, and the panel plate rear decorative member 2420 may be provided in the front and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be provided in the rear in the same manner. .. Further, a plurality of decorative units including the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be arranged in an overlapping manner and moved in the same manner.

FIG. 281 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 278 (a), showing a state in which both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 move upward by a predetermined distance (20 mm) on a surface parallel to the panel plate 1110 by moving from the standby position to the moving position. Both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are located at positions where they do not overlap with each other in front view with respect to the nail 1201. In this case, the whitening portion HKB around the tip portion of the obstacle nail 1201 may be conspicuous.

Therefore, in a state where both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the moving positions, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is set to emit light in a predetermined emission color to make the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. It may be configured to be in a light emitting effect state. Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, a special effect image may be displayed at the same time corresponding to this light emission effect state. The external shape of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 located at the moving position and the special effect image displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 may be configured to represent one character or the like. In addition, the same embodiment as the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 280 may be adopted.

With such a configuration, the player is interested in the game board side located in the direction in which the panel board rear decorative member 2410, the panel board rear board 2420, the panel board rear decorative member 2410, and the panel board rear board 2420 are moved. Since it faces the effect display device 1600, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 move to the moving position, and the obstacle nail 1201 does not overlap with the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 in front view. Even if it becomes a state, it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous.

Although the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278 is shown, the embodiment is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278, but is similarly modified with reference to FIG. 279. You may. Further, the embodiment may be applied to the modified examples of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 278. In this case as well, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

A predetermined pattern or the like is applied to the front surface of the movable panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel plate rear substrate 2420 at positions where they overlap with the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. A decorative member that is visually recognizable in bright color or metallic luster is provided, and the decorative member is visually recognizable when both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved from the standby position to the moving position. It may be configured to be possible. Even when only one of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is provided, the same decorative means may be adopted. With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitening portion HKB is inconspicuous even when both the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving positions.

At a position behind the movable panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the movable panel plate rear substrate 2420, which overlaps with the obstacle nail 1201 in front view, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not a decorative member. Or a drive mechanism (arm, pinion, rack, etc.) for driving the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be provided. In this case, the drive mechanism is formed of a colorless transparent or white opaque synthetic resin, and the obstacle nail 1201 and the drive mechanism are in a state where the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are moved to the moving position and stopped. It is preferable to configure it so that it is located at a position where it overlaps with a portion having a predetermined shape (preferably a non-planar shape such as unevenness) in front view. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a state in which the whitened portion HKB is inconspicuous. If the drive mechanism is formed of a black / dark synthetic resin, the whitened portion HKB becomes very conspicuous. In this case, characters and patterns may be printed on the front surface of the drive mechanism in white so that they overlap with the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. The flat cable and flexible board that transmit control signals and power from the peripheral control board 1510 to the panel board rear board 2420 are white, and the panel board rear decorative member 2410 and the panel board rear board 2420 move to the moving position. It may be configured so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the flat cable or the flexible substrate are positioned so as to overlap each other in the front view. In addition, when only one of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 is provided, the same configuration may be adopted.

FIG. 282 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is movably deformed in the front-rear direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 282 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the front standby position. FIG. 282 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in a rearward moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves rearward by a predetermined distance (5 mm) from the panel plate 1110 by moving from the standby position to the moving position, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are viewed from the front. It is located at an overlapping position.

In this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be configured to be movable in the front-rear direction so as to be able to take a state of being away from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 and a state of being close to it. When the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are close to each other, the panel plate 1110 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are separated from each other. It is possible to make the whitened portion HKB less conspicuous than the state.

For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to a rearward moving position so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are separated from each other. It should be noted that, during the predetermined period in which the player is playing the game, the time during which the movement effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is being executed (the time during which the player is located at the moving position) has a high jackpot expectation. It is preferable to configure it shorter than the time when the indicated movement effect is not executed (not located at the movement position). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous during the time when the effect indicating that the jackpot expectation that occupies most of the game time is high is not executed.

On the other hand, the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 282 (b) may be set as the standby position, and the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 282 (a) may be set as the moving position. It should be noted that the time during which the player is performing the effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high (time at the moving position) during the predetermined period during which the player is playing indicates that the jackpot expectation is high. It is shorter than the time when the effect is not executed (it is not located at the moving position). In this case, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to the front moving position so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are close to each other. .. With such a configuration, the whitening part HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the player notices the existence of the whitening part HKB when the movement production with high expectation of big hit is performed, and the big hit is expected. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as pouring water on the player's interest, which has been enhanced by the high-degree movement effect.

FIG. 283 shows the shape of the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 having a depth in the front-rear direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269, and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be moved in the vertical direction. A modified embodiment is shown.

FIG. 283 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position. FIG. 283 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves upward by a predetermined distance (10 mm) on the surface parallel to the panel plate 1110 by moving from the standby position to the moving position. Even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 move upward. It is located at a position where the 2410 and the 2410 are closer to each other in the front-rear direction than when they were in the standby position and overlap each other in the front view. In addition, it is preferable to configure the portion having a deep shape so that it can be visually recognized in a decorative shape imitating a mountain range when viewed from the front.

In this way, the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 has a shape having a recessed portion and a protruding portion in the front-rear direction, and when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 moves horizontally with respect to the panel plate 1110. The obstacle nail 1201 and the protruding portion are configured to move to a position where they overlap in a front view, and the distance between the obstacle nail 1201 and the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is reduced by the movement of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. It may be configured as. The moving direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not limited to the vertical direction, and may be configured to move horizontally in the horizontal direction or the diagonal direction in the front view.

In addition, the time during which the effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is being executed (time at the moving position) is the time during which the effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is not being executed (located at the moving position). Not) shorter than. In this case, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to an upward moving position so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are close to each other. .. With such a configuration, the whitening part HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the player notices the existence of the whitening part HKB when the movement production with high big hit expectation is performed, and the big hit expectation degree. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation such as pouring water on the player's interest that has increased due to the high movement effect.

On the other hand, the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 283 (b) may be set as the standby position, and the position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 shown in FIG. 283 (a) may be set as the moving position. For example, as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high, it is preferable to move the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to a lower moving position so that the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 are separated from each other. The time during which the movement effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high (time at the moving position) is the time during which the movement effect indicating that the jackpot expectation is high is not executed (at the moving position). Shorter than (not located). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous during the time when the effect indicating that the jackpot expectation that occupies most of the game time is high is not executed.

In addition, although the embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is movable in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction is shown with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283, the upper and lower parts are in a state where they are located in a moving position or a standby position. It may be configured to perform a vibration effect that vibrates finely in the direction or the front-back direction. In addition, it may be configured to show that the jackpot expectation is high by the vibration effect. At the time of vibration, it is preferable to configure the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 to vibrate within a range of about 3 mm to 5 mm. In the vibration range, it is preferable to maintain the state of overlapping with the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. With such a configuration, the light reflection state of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 continues to change, so that the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable. It should be noted that not only the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 282 and 283 but also other embodiments may be configured so that the same vibration effect can be executed.

FIG. 284 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is rotatably deformed with a rotation axis in the front-rear direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 284 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. It shows a state in which the decorative member 2410 behind the panel plate is in the standby position. FIG. 284 (b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. It shows a state in which the decorative member 2410 behind the panel plate is in a position rotated about 45 degrees clockwise from the standby position.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise around the panel plate rear decorative member rotation shaft 2410c provided in the front-rear direction. In addition, it is preferable to configure it so as to suggest that the jackpot expectation is high by the effect of rotating in this way. It is also possible to stop at a predetermined rotation angle, and it may be configured to suggest how much the jackpot expectation is depending on the stopped angle. In the present embodiment, even when the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is rotated, the obstacle nail 1201 that functions as the jump nail 1231 on the left side and the obstacle nail 1201 that functions as the life nail 1230 on the left side are decorated behind the panel plate. It always keeps overlapping with the member 2410 in the front view.

With such a configuration, even if the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the obstacle nail 1201 will continue to be in a positional relationship of overlapping in front view. With respect to the obstacle nail 1201, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. As an effect, it is desirable to maintain the state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is rotated, instead of rotating the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 by a predetermined angle from the standby position to stop the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. In such a configuration, in front view, the state where the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is located behind the obstacle nail 1201 and the state where the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstacle nail 1201 alternate. Therefore, although the state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not located behind the obstacle nail 1201 appears temporarily, the whitening portion HKB can be maintained in a state in which it is inconspicuous. In this case, it may be configured to suggest how much the jackpot expectation is depending on the rotation speed and the rotation direction of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410.

FIG. 285 shows an embodiment in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is rotatably deformed about the left-right direction in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 269. FIG. 285 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 are in the standby position. FIG. 282 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 269 (a), showing a state in which the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is in the moving position. The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotates about 30 degrees clockwise in the right side view by rotating from the standby position to the moving position, but even in this state, the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 It is located at a position where it overlaps when viewed from the front. FIG. 282 (c) is a modification of the cross-sectional view shown in FIG. 282 (b), and shows a state in which the game board side effect display device 1600 is located behind the panel plate rear decorative member 2410.

In this way, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is configured to be rotatable around the panel plate rear decorative member rotation shaft 2410c, and is in a standby state parallel to the panel plate 1110 and a moving state not parallel to the panel plate 1110. It may be configured so that Further, it is preferable to configure the operation of moving to the moving state to be feasible as an effect indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a plurality of rotation angles at the moving position of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 so that the rotation angle suggests how much the jackpot expectation is. When the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is not parallel to the panel plate 1110, the display of the game board side effect display device 1600 located behind the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 as shown in FIG. 285 (c). The light from the region may be configured to be directly incident on the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. In this case, the light emitted from the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is diffusely reflected by the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, so that the presence of the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Further, when the display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 blinks and displays a predetermined image at a predetermined cycle, the presence of the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

Not limited to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the front surface of the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 rotated by a predetermined angle is irradiated with light by another member capable of irradiating light. It may be configured to do so.

As described above, the expectation of a big hit is high in the game board side effect display device 1600 and other light emitting decorative members with respect to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 that is originally provided or in an inclined state. It may be configured so that the light emitted in white indicating the above is directly irradiated. In this case, since the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 is illuminated in white, the whitened portion HKB becomes less noticeable as compared with the state illuminated in other colors. When the brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, it may be illuminated with yellow instead of white.

FIG. 286 (a) provides a light guide plate 2460 between the panel plate 1110, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, and the game board side effect display device 1600 in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 285 (c). It is sectional drawing explaining the embodiment modified into. Further, FIG. 286 (b) is a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown in FIG. 286 (a), and illustrates an embodiment modified so that the game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind the obstacle nail 1201. It is a cross-sectional view.

In the present embodiment, the light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110. The light guide plate 2460 is a flat plate-shaped member made of a colorless and transparent resin, and a light guide plate uneven portion 2460a formed by fine unevenness is provided on a part of either the front surface or the rear surface. The thickness of the light guide plate 2460 is 2 mm. Further, the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a as a whole is in a mode in which it is visually recognized in a predetermined decorative shape such as a predetermined character, a pattern, or a pattern. Further, a predetermined light emitting portion for introducing light from the side of the light guide plate 2460 is provided. The light emitting unit is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

In a state where light is not introduced into the light guide plate 2460 from a predetermined light emitting portion, the light guide plate 2460 is visually recognized as colorless and transparent, and the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the game board side effect display device 1600 located behind the light guide plate 2460. It is possible to visually recognize. Further, since the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is fine, the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is not visible to the player or is difficult to see. On the other hand, in a state where the light is introduced from the side to the light guide plate 2460, the introduced light is diffusely reflected in the uneven portion, so that the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a is the introduced light. It becomes visible to the player in the form of emitting light in color.

In the present embodiment, the obstacle nail 1201 and the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a which is visually recognized in a predetermined shape in the front view are provided so as to be positioned so as to overlap each other in the front view. When white light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the whitening portion HKB can be visually recognized integrally, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Further, when the yellow light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the light guide plate 2460 and the brass obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized integrally, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. As an effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high, it is preferable to configure the effect so that the effect of introducing light into the light guide plate 2460 is executed.

The panel plate rear decorative member 2410 may be arranged behind the light guide plate 2460. In this case, even when the light is not introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous by the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 located at the rear. Further, when light is introduced into the light guide plate 2460, the position closer to the obstacle nail 1201 can be made to emit light in white or yellow, so that the whitening portion HKB can be made less noticeable.

It should be noted that the predetermined shape formed by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a may be visually recognized by the player in a state where the light is not introduced into the light guide plate 2460 from the predetermined light emitting portion. In this case, it is preferable to configure the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a so that the ambient light is diffusely reflected and visually recognized as white. With such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous by the light guide plate uneven portion 2460a provided on the light guide plate 2460 and visually recognized in a predetermined shape.

As shown in FIG. 286 (b), the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be located behind the panel plate 1110 at a position overlapping the obstacle nail 1201 in front view. It is preferable to display a white image at a position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 so as to overlap with the portion where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in a front view. With the white image, the white image and the whitened portion HKB can be visually recognized integrally, and the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. It may also be configured to display a yellow image. When it is configured to display a yellow image, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the brass obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized integrally, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. As an effect suggesting that the expectation of a big hit is high, it is preferable to configure the effect to display a white image or a yellow image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the light guide plate 2460 is provided behind the panel plate 1110, and the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is located behind the light guide plate 2460. The light guide plate uneven portion 2460a provided on the light plate 2460 and visually recognized in a predetermined shape may be arranged so as to be arranged at a position where the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 overlaps in front view.

When the light guide plate 2460 is in a non-light emitting state, it is preferable to display a yellow or white image at a position overlapping the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, white is adopted as the color of the light to be introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and it overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. A white image should be displayed at the position. Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, yellow is adopted as the color of the light to be introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and it overlaps with the brass obstacle nail 1201 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. It is good to display a yellow image at the position.

Alternatively, when the light guide plate 2460 is in the light emitting state, yellow or white is adopted as the color of the light to be introduced into the light guide plate 2460, and the brass obstacle nail 1201 and the front view in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. It is advisable to display a black image at the position where it overlaps with.

Even when these configurations are adopted, the light guide plate 2460, the game board side effect display device 1600, and the obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized integrally, and the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 286, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a may be transformed into the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b. Further, with respect to the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 269 to 277, the embodiments shown in the embodiments described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 286 are shown. May be applied. In addition, display on various members capable of displaying, moving, and emitting light, such as the game board side effect display device 1600, the panel plate lower light emitting substrate 2400, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, and the light guide plate 2460. The effects such as movement and light emission may be configured to be executed by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the special lottery result. Further, based on the special lottery result, the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree executed by the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to be started at least before all the decorative symbols are stopped. The effect suggesting the jackpot expectation may be finished before all the decorative symbols are stopped, or after all the decorative symbols are stopped and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed. It may be configured to do so.

As described above, when the brass obstacle nail 1201 is planted on the panel plate 1110, the whitening portion HKB is generated around the obstacle nail 1201 due to the long-term operation in the amusement store, and the whitening portion HKB is gradually generated. The event of expanding to can occur. The state in which the whitening portion HKB is generated deteriorates the aesthetic appearance and hinders the improvement of the player's interest.

On the other hand, there is a demand in amusement stores to know in advance the long-term operating status of the pachinko machine 1. This is because if the pachinko machine 1 is operated in a game store for a long period of time, there is a high possibility that failures or damages will occur in various parts constituting the pachinko machine 1. The gaming machine may be equipped with dedicated hardware for measuring the operating time (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200434), but in this case, there is a problem that the price of the gaming machine becomes high. In addition, although it is possible to grasp the cumulative operating time by installing a hall computer that aggregates the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 in the amusement store, it is necessary to introduce an expensive hall computer or operate the hall computer. It was necessary to acquire the operation history of the gaming machine. In addition, when a gaming store purchases a used gaming machine, it is difficult to know the cumulative operating time up to that point.

Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitening portion HKB is generated, and the clerk of the game store can easily grasp the operating status of the pachinko machine 1 by the inexpensive configuration. The pachinko machine 1 capable of the above will be described.

FIG. 287 shows an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 259. Specifically, a panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

FIG. 287 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 287 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 287 (a). FIG. 287 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 287 (d) is a cross-sectional view showing a modified example of the panel plate front decorative member 2450.

In the present embodiment, a colored (specifically blue) opaque synthetic resin front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to surround the obstacle nail 1201. Specifically, after the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a provided in the panel plate 1110. The obstacle nail 1201 may be made of stainless steel, pure copper, or brass. The panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided with a panel plate front decorative member through hole 2450a in advance for penetrating the obstacle nail 1201. Further, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 has a decorative outer shape.

As shown in FIG. 287 (a), in the front view, the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 is visually recognized in all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232. Is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 287 (c), when visually recognized from a predetermined angle (from diagonally above right in the figure; the same applies to other embodiments), a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example). Of the left guide nails 1232, for the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, it is possible to visually recognize the portion located inside the panel plate 1110. At this time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the occurrence state of the whitening portion HKB in the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

By adopting such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB generated on the panel plate 1110 is difficult to be visually recognized by the player, so that the whitening portion HKB is generated or the generated whitening portion HKB is expanded. Even if this happens, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitening portion HKB has occurred, and it is possible to prevent the player from hindering the improvement of the interest.

On the other hand, the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized from a predetermined direction via the panel plate 1110. As a result, on the game store side, the game board 5'is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed without opening the door frame 3 or removing the game board 5'. It becomes possible to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip end portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 via the glass plate 192. Then, the state of occurrence of the whitening portion HKB around the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201, specifically, whether or not the whitening portion HKB is generated, and if the whitening portion HKB is generated, the size thereof, etc. It becomes possible to check, and the pachinko machine 1 has a failure or damage due to measures such as performing maintenance actions on the pachinko machine 1, ordering replacement parts, and preparing a pachinko machine 1 to be installed instead. It will be possible to do it in advance before doing so. It is possible to observe the specific obstacle nail 1201 while the power is turned on in the pachinko machine 1, but it is preferable that the observation is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is in the power off state.

The value of the kinetic energy of the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 gradually decreases as the game ball rises while passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and instead. The value of potential energy gradually increases. When the game ball passes through the portion provided with the backflow prevention member 1007 and reaches the upper part of the game area 5a, the value of the kinetic energy of the game ball is smaller than that at the time of launch, while the value of the game ball is smaller than that at the time of launch. The value of potential energy is larger than that at the time of launch. From this state, the game ball will fall in the area where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the game area 5a. Therefore, as it goes to the lower part of the board, the value of the kinetic energy of the rolling game ball increases again, while the value of the potential energy decreases. Therefore, the whitening portion HKB is particularly likely to occur in the vicinity of the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the vicinity of the lower part of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, with respect to the obstacle nail 1201, there is a possibility that an illegal adjustment is made to change the winning rate of the game ball to the winning opening. In this case, the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the vicinity of the winning opening is particularly likely to be the target of an illegal adjustment act. Therefore, the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur around the tip portion of the obstacle nail 1201 planted in the vicinity of the winning opening.

In the present embodiment, when the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232 provided close to the first starting port 2002 located at the lower part of the board surface is visually recognized from a predetermined angle, the whitening portion HKB It is configured so that the occurrence status can be confirmed. The same configuration is adopted not only for the left guide nail 1232 but also for the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the right guide nail 1233, and when the whitening portion HKB is visually recognized from a predetermined angle. It may be configured so that the occurrence status can be confirmed.

In the left guide nail 1232, the game ball does not fall downward between the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232, and the game ball slides toward the lower right on the upper surface of the left guide nail 1232. I will roll. Then, the game ball rolled in this way may collide with the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side in a state of increasing momentum. Therefore, it is particularly desirable to configure the jump nail 1231 provided on the left side so that the occurrence status of the whitening portion HKB can be confirmed when visually recognized from a predetermined angle.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 225, on the upper left of the left side guide nail 1232, a guide nail composed of a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 is provided as in the case of the left side guide nail 1232. Even in this guide nail, the game ball rolls toward the lower right so that the game ball slides on the upper surface thereof (the game ball does not fall between the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the guide nail, while the guide ball does not fall. A game ball may fall between the nail and the left guide nail 1232.) Therefore, among the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232, a game ball in a state where the momentum is increased as much as the obstacle nail 1201 located on the left side may collide. Among them, the obstacle nail 1201 provided on the leftmost side may collide with a game ball in a state of increasing momentum. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232 is configured so that the generation state of the whitening portion HKB can be confirmed when visually recognized from a predetermined angle. As described above, the portion where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in close proximity, such as the left guide nail 1232, is a portion where the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur in the first place.

An example of visually recognizing a specific obstacle nail 1201 from diagonally above to the right is shown with reference to FIG. 287 (c), but the angle at which the specific obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized is the position where the specific obstacle nail 1201 is planted. It may change depending on the relationship between the above and the shape of the decorative member 2450 in front of the panel plate. For example, among the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232, it is easier to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 when the second obstacle nail 1201 from the right side is visually recognized from diagonally above the left side.

As an angle for visually recognizing the obstacle nail 1201, the periphery of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 can be visually recognized from an angle of about 30 to 60 degrees (incident angle when the glass plate 192 is viewed from the front). It is desirable to provide the panel plate front decorative member 2450. This is because when an attempt is made to visually recognize the glass plate 192 from an angle close to horizontal, the ambient light is totally reflected and reflected on the glass plate 192, and the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized. This can be difficult. Further, in the panel plate 1110, the specific obstacle nail 1201 to be observed may be reflected in addition to the ambient light, and it may be difficult to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

Although it is a little complicated, when the game board 5'attached to the main body frame 4 is visually recognized with the door frame 3 open and the main body frame 4 closed, the door frame 3 is closed. Visibility is not obstructed by the glass plate 192 at a position closer to the panel plate 1110 than in the above-mentioned state, and it is possible to visually recognize the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

When the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is invisible through the panel plate 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 passes through the panel plate 1110. A panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided so as to be visible. Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is closed, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is difficult to see through the panel plate 1110, and when the door frame 3 is open, the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is the panel plate 1110. A panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided so as to be easily visible through the panel plate.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to notice that the whitening portion HKB is generated. Further, it is possible to check the occurrence status of the whitening portion HKB only by opening the door frame 3.

As shown in FIG. 287 (d), the end portion of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be formed in a chamfered shape so as to be slanted. With such a configuration, the strength of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 can be increased, and the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball collides with the panel plate front decorative member 2450 and the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is damaged is suppressed. It becomes possible.

With reference to FIG. 287, an example in which the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is shown. An embodiment modified to be configured will be described with reference to FIG. 288.

FIG. 288 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 288 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 288 (a). FIG. 288 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the rear is made of a panel plate front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and a colored (specifically blue) opaque synthetic resin. Is composed of an invisible panel plate front decorative member opaque portion 2454. Further, the upper end of the colorless transparent portion 2452 of the panel plate front decorative member and the boundary between the panel plate front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel plate front decorative member opaque portion 2454 have a decorative shape.

As shown in FIG. 288 (a), in the front view, the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 is visually recognized in all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232. Is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 288 (c), when visually recognized from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left side guide nail 1232) is passed through the colorless transparent portion 2452 of the decorative member in front of the panel plate. Of these, for the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, it is possible to visually recognize the portion located inside the panel plate 1110. At this time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the occurrence state of the whitening portion HKB in the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

Although an example of providing a panel plate front decorative member 2450 made of a colored opaque synthetic resin on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 with reference to FIG. 287, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is made of a colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin. Such a modified embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 289.

FIG. 289 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 289 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 289 (a). FIG. 289 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the panel board front decorative member 2450 is made of a colored transparent synthetic resin.

As shown in FIG. 289 (a), in the front view, the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 is visually recognized in all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232. It is difficult.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 289 (c), when visually recognized from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the first to third obstacles from the left of the left guide nail 1232). For the nail 1201), it is possible to visually recognize the portion located inside the panel plate 1110. At this time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the occurrence state of the whitening portion HKB in the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

With reference to FIG. 287, an example in which the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is shown. An embodiment modified to be configured from the above will be described with reference to FIG. 290.

FIG. 290 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. FIG. 290 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 290 (a). FIG. 290 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is made of a colorless transparent synthetic resin and the rear is visible, and the panel plate front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and a colored (blue) transparent synthetic resin are used to visually recognize the rear. It is composed of a colored transparent portion 2456, which is a decorative member in front of the panel plate, which is difficult to handle. Further, the upper end of the colorless transparent portion 2452 of the panel plate front decorative member and the boundary between the panel plate front decorative member colorless transparent portion 2452 and the panel plate front decorative member colored transparent portion 2456 have a decorative shape.

As shown in FIG. 290 (a), in the front view, the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 is visually recognized in all the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232. Is impossible.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 290 (c), when visually recognized from a predetermined angle, a specific obstacle nail 1201 (in this example, the left side guide nail 1232) is passed through the colorless transparent portion 2452 of the decorative member in front of the panel plate. Of these, for the first to third obstacle nails 1201) from the left, it is possible to visually recognize the portion located inside the panel plate 1110. At this time, it becomes possible to visually recognize the occurrence state of the whitening portion HKB in the portion located inside the panel plate 1110 of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, the shape of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be a perfect circle, and the specific obstacle nail 1201 may be located at the center of the perfect circle.

FIG. 291 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. The panel plate 1110 in FIG. 291 (a) is provided with a perfect circular panel plate front decorative member 2450, and a life nail 1230 is located at the center of the panel plate front decorative member 2450.

The shape of the decorative member 2450 in front of the panel plate may be a right triangle or a star shape. The panel plate 1110 in FIG. 291 (a) is provided with a star-shaped panel plate front decorative member 2450 and a right triangle-shaped panel plate front decorative member 2450, and jumps to the left at the center of the star-shaped panel plate front decorative member 2450. The nail 1231 is located. Further, the jump nail 1231 on the right side is located at the center of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 having a right triangle shape. In this way, one panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided corresponding to one obstacle nail 1201.

Further, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 may be provided for a plurality of obstacle nails 1201. The left side guide nail 1232 shown in FIG. 291 (a) is provided in one panel plate front decorative member 2450.

Not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, the shape of the panel plate front decorative member opaque portion 2454 described with reference to FIG. 288, the shape of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 described with reference to FIG. 289, FIG. 290. These shapes may be adopted for the shape of the colored transparent portion 2456 of the panel plate front decorative member described with reference to or a modified embodiment thereof.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the visible angle around the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201, for example, with respect to the vicinity of the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201, the upper side, the lower side, the right side, and the left side. It is possible to visually recognize from various directions such as.

An example is shown in which the shape of the panel front decorative member 2450 is a perfect circle, a right triangle, a star shape, or the like, and a specific obstacle nail 1201 is placed at the center of the shape. The specific obstacle nail 1201 may be arranged at a position deviated from the position.

FIG. 291 (b) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment, and shows an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 291 (a). It is a figure.

In FIG. 291 (b), the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 on the left side is located below the center of the circular panel plate front decorative member 2450. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 on the right side is located below the center of the circular panel plate front decorative member 2450 and protrudes downward from the end of the panel plate front decorative member 2450. are doing. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the left side is located below the center of the star-shaped panel plate front decorative member 2450 and protrudes downward from the end of the panel plate front decorative member 2450. are doing. Further, the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the jump nail 1231 on the right side is located below the center of the right triangle-shaped panel plate front decorative member 2450 and is located so as to be in contact with the end of the panel plate front decorative member 2450. There is. Further, each of the obstacle nails 1201 planted as the left side guide nail 1232 is positioned so as to protrude diagonally to the lower left from the end portion of the panel plate front decorative member 2450.

As described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 are located at the lower part of the board surface. Therefore, the player during the game can visually recognize these nails and the decorative member 2450 in front of the panel plate from diagonally above. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided unevenly on the upper side with respect to the specific obstacle nail 1201. With such a configuration, it is possible to arrange the panel plate front decorative member 2450 at a more free position while making the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous. The left side guide nail 1232 is visually recognized by the player diagonally above and from the right side. Therefore, with respect to the left side guide nail 1232, the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is provided unevenly on the upper side and the right side. With such a configuration, it is possible to arrange the panel plate front decorative member 2450 at a more free position while making the whitening portion HKB inconspicuous.

When a member that can be visually recognized in a color other than light color is placed behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 and the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized from a predetermined angle, the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized by overlapping with a member that is visually recognized in a color other than light color. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the occurrence status of the whitening portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201. As the color other than white or light, it is desirable to use dark or black.

Although it has been shown that it is desirable to arrange a member visible in a color other than white or light color behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, it is desirable to keep this member in a flat state without unevenness. At least, when the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 is visually recognized from a predetermined angle, it is preferable to configure the configuration so that a flat portion without unevenness is located behind the entire vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

The display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visually recognized in dark color when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, may be located behind the specific obstacle nail 1201. Then, when the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the vicinity of the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized from a predetermined angle, the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201 and the display game board side effect display device 1600 are displayed. It may be configured so that it can be visually recognized so as to overlap with the display area of. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand the occurrence status of the whitening portion HKB around the tip portion of the specific obstacle nail 1201.

Deformed examples of movably configuring members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 279, have been shown. The embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 292 may be applied to the modified example. Specifically, behind the specific obstacle nail 1201, a member visually recognizable in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420 described with reference to FIGS. 268 to 279. It may be configured to be movable.

In this case, during the game, members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, are located behind the specific obstacle nail 1201 in a standby state, and a big hit is expected. It is preferable to configure the members such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, which are visually recognized by the bright color or metallic luster, to move to the moving position at the time of the effect suggesting the degree. With such a configuration, even if the whitening portion HKB is generated at the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201, the player can hardly notice the fact.

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, are opened and the main body frame 4 is closed. In this state, the opening provided in the center of the panel plate 1110 may be touched so that the clerk of the amusement shop can move it in direct contact. Further, in a state where a member visually recognizable in bright color or metallic luster, such as the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear substrate 2420, is moved, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 and the panel plate rear are rear of the specific obstacle nail 1201. It is preferable to configure the board so that members other than the members visible in bright color or metallic luster, such as the substrate 2420, can be visually recognized. In this case, as the visible member, a member that is not visible in bright color or a member that is visible in a color tone that does not have metallic luster may be adopted. Specifically, it is preferable to use a member that can be visually recognized in a dark color.

By adopting such a configuration, when a clerk of a game store tries to visually check the occurrence status of the whitening portion HKB near the tip of a specific obstacle nail 1201, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate By manually moving a member such as the rear substrate 2420 that is visually recognizable in bright color or metallic luster, the visible state near the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201 can be improved.

Depending on the amount of light emitted by the lighting equipment provided in the game store and the position of the lighting equipment, the amount of light reaching the specific obstacle nail 1201 may be insufficient. In particular, such a situation may occur when the panel plate front decorative member 2450 is made of an opaque material. Therefore, in response to the operation of the operation button 410 by the clerk of the game store, the specific obstacle nail 1201 may be configured to be irradiated with light from the rear. As a light source for irradiating light, the operation button 410 is used by using the panel plate rear substrate light emitting unit 2425 mounted on the panel plate rear substrate 2420, the game board side effect display device 1600, the above-mentioned light guide plate 2460, and the like. These light sources can be changed from the off state to the on state according to the operation of, and these light sources that have been turned on can be changed to the off state according to the operation of the operation button 410. It should be configured as follows. Further, the light intensity of these light sources may be changed according to the operation of the operation button 410. For example, the intensity of the amount of light emitted by these light sources is provided in a plurality of stages (for example, three stages) so that the intensity of the amount of light is sequentially switched according to the number of times the clerk of the game store operates the operation button 410. It may be configured. With such a configuration, it is possible to set an appropriate amount of light around the tip of the specific obstacle nail 1201, and it is possible to satisfactorily confirm the occurrence state of the whitening portion HKB.

In this way, the light source that has been turned on or adjusted may be configured to maintain the lighting state for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) instead of blinking. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the color (for example, white) of the light emitted by the light source that has been turned on or adjusted is not changed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). Further, these may be configured to be performed at the same time. Further, after the lighting state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the lighting state may be configured to be turned off. By maintaining the lighting state for a predetermined time or maintaining the light emitting state in a predetermined color for a predetermined time in this way, the light source blinks or the emission color changes, as compared with the case where the light source is changed. The visibility around the tip of 1201 can be improved.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, the tip of the obstacle nail 1201 is difficult for the player to see due to the panel plate front decorative member 2450 made of synthetic resin, but instead of the panel plate front decorative member 2450. , The embodiment modified so as to provide the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 will be described with reference to FIG. 292. In addition, the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 291 may be applied to this embodiment.

FIG. 292 (a) is a front view of the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left side guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment. 292 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 292 (a). FIG. 292 (c) is a cabinet diagram showing the structures in the vicinity of the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 in the present embodiment by an oblique projection projection. FIG. 292 (d) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 292 (a) in an embodiment obtained by modifying the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, a decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The decorative thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel board is blue and has a decorative shape imitating a mountain range. After attaching an opaque sheet having a predetermined pattern and outer shape to the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is cut together with this sheet to form an obstacle nail through hole 1110a, and the obstacle nail 1201 is planted in the obstacle nail through hole 1110a. It is good to set it.

Even in such a configuration, as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 287, it is difficult for the player to notice that the whitening portion HKB is generated, and the clerk of the game store is able to make the whitening portion HKB. It becomes possible to easily visually recognize the occurrence situation of.

The embodiment of the panel plate front decorative member 2450 described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 290 may be applied to the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m. For example, as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 291, the panel board front decoration opaque thin layer portion 1110 m may be a decorative shape, or as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 288, the panel board front decoration. A part of the opaque thin layer portion 1110 m may be transparent, or the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate may be colored (blue) translucent instead of opaque as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 289. good.

When the game ball comes into contact with the end of the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m many times, the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m may be damaged from the end. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 292 (d), the game ball in contact with the obstacle nail 1201 and the panel plate 1110 may be configured so as not to come into contact with the end portion of the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate. By having the end portion of the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate having such a configuration, it is possible to prevent damage to the end portion of the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate while hiding the whitening portion HKB.

By the way, a predetermined decorative member may be attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. In this case, the predetermined decorative member is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses protruding rearward. Further, the predetermined decorative member is also provided with a hole for inserting a screw for attaching the decorative member to the panel plate 1110. On the other hand, the panel plate 1110 is provided with an insertion hole for inserting a boss and a mounting hole for attaching a screw.

When mounting the decorative member, a positioning boss is inserted into the mounting hole provided in the panel plate 1110. Next, the decorative member is fixed to the panel plate 1110 by penetrating the screw through the insertion hole for inserting the screw of the decorative member and the mounting hole provided in the panel plate 1110 and rotating the screw. It is also possible to remove the decorative member by rotating the screw in the reverse direction.

By adopting such an attachment method, the time required for positioning the decorative member with respect to the panel plate 1110 can be shortened, and the decorative member can be attached to the panel plate 1110 at an accurate position. Such a positioning method is described in, for example, the CD-ROM of the actual application flat 05-059917 (actual Kaihei 07-022791).

By the way, when both the panel plate 1110 and the decorative member are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, the mounting holes provided in the panel plate and the boss provided in the decorative member can be visually recognized via the transparent decorative member. There was a problem that the appearance of the decorative member was spoiled. Specifically, there is a problem that the inner wall of the mounting hole provided in the panel plate 1110 and the boss located in the mounting hole are visually recognized as a cloudy columnar shape from the front surface of the decorative member, which spoils the aesthetic appearance. there were.

Further, when a decorative member formed of a transparent synthetic resin is attached to the wooden panel board 1110, the mounting holes provided in the wooden panel board are visually recognized as black openings through the decorative member. There was a problem of closing it. In particular, when the pattern of the cell plate provided on the front surface of the wooden panel plate is close to white, there is a problem that such a black opening becomes conspicuous.

Hereinafter, means for solving these problems will be described with reference to FIG. 293.

FIG. 293 (a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. 293 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 293 (a). FIG. 293 (c) is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 293 (a). FIG. 293 (d) is a front view showing a state in which the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110. FIG. 293 (e) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 293 (d) when a colorless and transparent synthetic resin panel plate 1110 is adopted. FIG. 293 (f) is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 293 (d) when a wooden panel plate 1110 is adopted.

As shown in FIG. 293 (a), the decorative member 2470 in this embodiment has a horizontally long rectangular shape. Further, the decorative member 2470 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The decorative member 2470 has a plate shape, and when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the horizontally elongated rectangular decorative member front surface portion 2470a located in the front and the horizontally elongated rectangular decorative member rear surface portion located in the rear portion. It has 2470b and. The thickness of the decorative member 2470 is 4 mm, and it is possible to visually recognize the member located rearward through the decorative member 2470. The decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is provided with two cylindrical decorative member bosses 2470c that vertically project rearward from the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. The diameter of the decorative member boss 2470c is slightly smaller than 2 mm. The length of the decorative member boss 2470c is 3 mm. The area of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b is larger than the area of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, and is formed diagonally from the end portion of the decorative member front surface portion 2470 toward the end portion of the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b. Four decorative member inclined portions 2470d are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 293 (b) and 293 (c), the angle formed by the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is 135 degrees, and the angle formed by the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Is 45 degrees. The game ball that has rolled in the game area 5a comes into contact with the front surface of the decorative member 2470. However, by providing the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in a chamfered shape, the rolling game ball collides with the decorative member 2470. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the end portion of the decorative member 2470 from being damaged. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where the decorative member boss 2470c can be visually recognized in a state where a part thereof overlaps with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in the front view. The decorative member 2470 is provided with two decorative member screw insertion holes 2470e for inserting the decorative member mounting screw 2471 that attaches the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate boss insertion holes 1110p. The diameter of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p is 2 mm, which is a diameter at which the decorative member boss 2470c can be inserted and removed. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with two panel plate screw insertion holes 1110q. The diameter of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q is 2 mm. The panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q each have a cylindrical shape and penetrate the panel plate 1110.

Next, a method of attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 (d) and 293 (e). The decorative member 2470 is brought closer to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front, and the decorative member boss 2470c is inserted into the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p provided in the panel plate 1110. By bringing the rear surface portion 2470b into contact with the rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member 2470 is positioned. Next, the decorative member mounting screw 2471 was inserted into the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q, and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 was rotated clockwise to attach the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110. It becomes a state. The decorative member mounting screw 2471 can be removed by rotating the decorative member mounting screw 2471 counterclockwise. Further, by removing the decorative member mounting screw 2471 in this way, the decorative member 2470 can be removed from the panel plate 1110.

By adopting such a configuration, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is located with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c is visually recognized in a state where the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and a part thereof are overlapped with each other in the front view. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the decorative member 2470, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. Further, with such a configuration, the damaged decorative member 2470 can be easily replaced with a new decorative member 2470.

Although the embodiment in which the panel board 1110 is formed of the colorless and transparent synthetic resin is shown with reference to FIGS. 293 (d) and 293 (e), the panel board 1110 is made of wood with reference to FIG. 293 (f). An embodiment modified to be composed of plywood will be described.

FIG. 293 (f) is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 293 (d) when a wooden panel plate 1110 is adopted. In the present embodiment, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q of the panel plate 1110 have a cylindrical shape, but do not penetrate the panel plate 1110. Further, on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, a decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate is provided so that the plywood constituting the panel plate 1110 is not visible. The method of attaching and detaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 configured in this manner is the same as that of the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 293 (d) and 293 (e).

In the present embodiment, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p is provided so as to penetrate the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate. Therefore, when the colorless and transparent decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the circular panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p provided so as to penetrate the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate is provided. It is a black circle with a diameter of 2 mm and is visible from the front, which spoils the appearance. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, which are visually recognized as black circles, are configured to be visually recognized in a partially overlapped state in the front view. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presence of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous.

The decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 may be provided with a predetermined character or pattern by printing or pasting. In this case, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p may be provided in a dark or black portion of the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m provided as a character or a pattern. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous.

When the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m is provided on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin, the white or light color in the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m provided as a character or a pattern. It is preferable to provide a panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p in the portion of. This is because the light from the predetermined light emitting means or the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 reaches the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c from the rear of the panel plate 1110, so that the panel plate boss is inserted. This is because the holes 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c are visually recognized in a state where light is diffusely reflected. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p inconspicuous. Although an example in which two decorative member bosses 2470c are provided is shown, two or more decorative member bosses 2470c may be provided. Further, although the embodiment in which the two decorative member bosses 2470c included in the decorative member 2470 are located at the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is shown, all the decorative member bosses included in the decorative member 2470 are shown. It is not necessary to arrange the 2470c at the boundary line between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and at least one decorative member boss 2470c is located at the boundary line between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d. Just do it.

FIGS. 294 (a) and 294 (b) show an example of attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110, respectively. FIG. 294 (a) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is attached sideways. On the other hand, FIG. 294 (b) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member 2470 is diagonally attached. In this embodiment, the inclination of the long side of the rectangular decorative member 2470 and the angle of the left guide nail 1232 are horizontal. Further, by providing the decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the left side guide nail 1232 in close proximity to each other, the rolling game ball does not come into contact with the panel plate 1110 in the region sandwiched between the left side guide nail 1232 and the decorative member 2470. It is configured in.

With such a configuration, in the area above the left guide nail 1232 where the game ball may collide vigorously, the game ball that collides with the left guide nail 1232 and bounces directly collides with the panel plate 1110. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the panel plate 1110 is scratched or the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate provided in front of the panel plate 1110 is scratched. Regarding the decorative member 2470, a game ball that collides with the left guide nail 1232 and bounces directly collides with the decorative member 2470, and a partially clouded portion may occur. In this case, the decorative member 2470 is used. You should replace it. In the present embodiment, the decorative member 2470 can be replaced with a new decorative member 2470 by simply removing the decorative member mounting screw 2471 with the door frame 3 open.

With reference to FIGS. 295 and 296, an embodiment in which the position where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided and the shape of the decorative member boss 2470c are modified will be described. 295 (a), 295 (b), 295 (c), 296 (a), 296 (b), and 296 (c) are front views of the decorative member 2470.

FIG. 295 (a) is an example in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where the front surface portion 2470a of the decorative member and the two inclined portions 2470d of the decorative member adjacent to each other are overlapped with each other in the front view. With such a configuration, with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and one decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. The boundary line, that is, the boundary line between the one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d, is located. Therefore, since these three boundary lines overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 295 (b) is an example in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where it does not overlap the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in the front view but overlaps the two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d in the front view. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous.

FIG. 295 (c) is an example in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where it does not overlap the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in the front view but overlaps the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in the front view. Even with such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous.

When the position where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is close to the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d as in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 295 (b) and 295 (c), the panel plate is used. When positioning the decorative member 2470 with respect to 1110, the decorative member boss 2470c comes into contact with other members provided on the panel plate 1110, and the decorative member tilt is formed thinner than the decorative member front surface portion 2470a. An inadvertent force is applied to the end portion of the portion 2470d, and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d may be bent or cracked.

In this regard, in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 293 and 295 (a), the decorative member 2470 is appropriately used while visually recognizing a part of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the decorative member boss 2470c in a front view. Since it is possible to position the decorative member at a position, it is possible to suppress the probability that the decorative member 2470 will inadvertently come into contact with another member. Further, since the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position slightly distant from the end of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, even if the decorative member boss 2470c comes into contact with another member, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d as a whole may be exposed to the decorative member boss 2470c. Since the force is received, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is less likely to bend, and as a result, the possibility that the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is bent or cracked can be reduced.

FIGS. 296 (a) to 296 (c) show an embodiment in which the shape of the decorative member 2470 is changed from a horizontally long rectangular shape to a cross-shaped shape. FIG. 296 (a) is an example in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where the front surface portion 2470a of the decorative member and the two inclined portions 2470d of the decorative member adjacent to each other are overlapped with each other in the front view. With such a configuration, with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c, the boundary line between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and one decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d. The boundary line, that is, the boundary line between the one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d, is located. Therefore, since these three boundary lines overlap with the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 296 (b) shows an example in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position adjacent to the end of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view and at a position where the two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d are overlapped in front view. Is. With such a configuration, the end portion of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a is adjacent to the decorative member boss 2470c, and one of the decorative member inclined portions is positioned so as to overlap the decorative member boss 2470c in front view. The boundary line between the 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d will be located. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

FIG. 296 (c) is an example in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where the two adjacent decorative member inclined portions 2470d are overlapped with each other in a front view. With such a configuration, the boundary line between the one decorative member inclined portion 2470d and the other decorative member inclined portion 2470d is located at a position overlapping the decorative member boss 2470c in the front view. Therefore, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 293 and 295, the decorative member front surface portion 2470a is configured to be located at a position between the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member boss 2470c. By providing the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member boss 2470c at positions separated from each other in this way, it is possible to quickly position the decorative member boss 2470c with respect to the panel plate 1110.

In the present embodiment, the portion of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d that overlaps the decorative member boss 2470c in front view has a linear shape, but a shape other than the linear shape may be adopted. For example, it may be arcuate or zigzag. When such a shape is adopted, the visual aspect in front of the decorative member boss 2470c becomes complicated, so that the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable. Become. Further, as the shape of the decorative member 2470, a perfect circular shape may be adopted in front view, and as for the shape of the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, a perfect circular shape may be adopted in front view. Further, in this case, the boundary between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is arcuate, and the shape is similar to that of the arcuate decorative member boss 2470c. The insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 293, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is provided from the decorative member front surface portion 2470a toward the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, but the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is replaced with the decorative member. An embodiment modified so as to provide the first inclined portion 2470f and the second inclined portion 2470 g of the decorative member will be described with reference to FIG. 297.

FIG. 297 (a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. 297 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 297 (a). FIG. 297 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 297 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 297 (a) and 297 (b), the decorative member 2470 in the present embodiment has a decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and a decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g. The angle formed by the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is 155 degrees. Further, the angle formed by the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470g is 160 degrees. Further, the angle formed by the second inclined portion of the decorative member 2470 g and the rear surface portion 2470b of the decorative member is 45 degrees. The decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where it overlaps with the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in front view.

In the present embodiment, since the boundary between the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g is visually recognized by the player in a straight line, the decorative member is compared with the case where only the decorative member inclined portion 2470d is provided. The presence of the boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be made less noticeable.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 297 (a) and 297 (b), the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is planar, but may be configured to be curved. FIG. 297 (c) shows an embodiment in which the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f is configured in a curved surface shape. In the present embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where it overlaps with the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f formed in a curved surface in a front view. In such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p are refracted and visually recognized, so that the presence of the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p is less noticeable. It becomes possible to do.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 297 (a), the embodiment in which the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a position where the decorative member boss 2470c overlaps with the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f in front view is shown, but the decorative member boss 2470c is provided at a different position. An embodiment modified to be provided will be described with reference to FIG. 298 (a).

FIG. 298 (a) is a front view of the decorative member 2470. FIG. 298 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 298 (a). FIG. 298 (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in a modified embodiment of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 298 (a). FIG. 298 (d) is a front view of the decorative member 2470 in the embodiment in which the position where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is modified.

As shown in FIG. 298 (b), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the lower left of the decorative member 2470 is viewed from the front with respect to the boundary line formed by the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g. It is provided at the position where it overlaps with. Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (c), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper right of the decorative member 2470 is viewed from the front with respect to the boundary line formed by the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f. It is provided at the position where it overlaps with.

Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided at the lower left of the decorative member 2470 is a boundary line formed by the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member first. 1 At a position where the boundary line formed by the inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g and the boundary line formed by the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g are overlapped with each other in the front view. It is provided.

Further, as shown in FIG. 298 (d), the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper right of the decorative member 2470 is a boundary line formed by the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f and the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member first. It is provided at a position where it overlaps with each of the boundary lines formed by the 1 inclined portion 2470f and the 2nd inclined portion 2470 g of the decorative member in the front view.

As described above, the first plate portion (for example, the panel plate 1110) having the positioning hole portion (for example, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p) and the positioning protrusion portion (for example, the decorative member boss 2470c) inserted into the positioning hole portion. A transparent second plate portion (for example, decorative member 2470) having a chamfered portion (for example, a decorative member inclined portion 2470d) provided from the front to the rear is provided, and a positioning protrusion is inserted into the positioning hole portion. In this state, at least a part of the positioning protrusion is overlapped with the chamfered portion in the front view, so that the presence of the positioning protrusion and the positioning hole can be made less noticeable.

An example is shown in which the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q have a shape that penetrates the panel plate 1110, but the panel plate boss insertion hole and the panel plate screw insertion hole penetrate the panel plate 1110. Instead, it may be configured so that it is provided only halfway through the panel plate 1110. For example, the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p may be the same as the length of the decorative member boss 2470c, or the length of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q may be the same as the length of the decorative member mounting screw 2471.

With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the lengths of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q that can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent panel plate 1110, and the panel plate boss insertion can be performed. The presence of the hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q can be made less noticeable.

A colored transparent synthetic resin may be used as the material constituting the decorative member 2470. In this case, the thickness of the portion provided with the decorative member boss 2470c is 7 mm to 8 mm, and the thickness of the portion without the decorative member boss 2470c is 4 mm. Therefore, the portion provided with the decorative member boss 2470c is visually recognized as having a darker color than the portion not provided with the decorative member boss 2470c. For example, even if a synthetic resin visually recognized in blue is used as the decorative member 2470, the portion without the decorative member boss 2470c is visually recognized in relatively light blue, and the portion provided with the decorative member boss 2470c is relatively dark. It will be visible in blue. By being visually recognized in this way, the decorative member boss 2470c becomes conspicuous, but the decorative member boss is located at the boundary line between the decorative member front portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d with respect to the decorative member boss 2470c. The 2470c can be made inconspicuous.

Even if a rough surface portion capable of diffusely reflecting light is formed on a part or the whole of the decorative member 2470 by satin finish processing, grain processing, etc., and the rough surface portion and the decorative member boss 2470c are configured to overlap each other in front view. good. For example, a rough surface portion is provided on the surface of at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g. It should be configured. A plurality of decorative member inclined portions 2470d, decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and decorative member second inclined portion 2470g are provided, but it is preferable to provide a rough surface portion on the surface of at least one of them. In each of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g, the entire surface thereof may be a rough surface portion. Instead, it may be configured so that only a part of the surface thereof is a rough surface portion.

With such a configuration, the decorative member boss 2470c and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p can be provided while maintaining the transparency of the decorative light and the visibility of the decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m in front of the panel plate located behind the decorative member 2470. It can be made inconspicuous.

Although an example in which a rough surface portion is provided on the decorative member 2470 is shown, a metallic luster portion may be provided on the surface of the decorative member 2470 by plating or the like instead of the rough surface portion. In this case, the entire decorative member 2470, or at least one of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b may be a metallic luster portion. Alternatively, in the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the entire surface thereof may not be a metallic luster portion, but only a part of the surface thereof may be a metallic luster portion. Further, the metallic luster portion may be configured to surround the periphery of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q. Further, the color of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the metallic luster portion may be the same color. For example, when the decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of stainless steel and visually recognizable in silver is adopted, the color of the metallic luster portion may be silver. Further, when the decorative member mounting screw 2471 made of brass and visually recognizable with a yellowish metallic luster is adopted, the color of the metallic luster portion may be gold. The portion where the metallic luster portion is provided is limited to the periphery of the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, and the portion where the decorative member boss 2470c is provided is the decorative member boss by adopting the above-mentioned method without providing the metallic luster portion. It is good to make 2470c inconspicuous.

With such a configuration, the decorative member mounting screw 2471 makes it possible to make the decorative member mounting screw 2471 inconspicuous when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110.

Although an embodiment in which a rough surface portion and a metallic luster portion are provided on the decorative member 2470 itself is shown, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b and the panel plate in the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 286 and the like behind the decorative member 2470 are shown. Back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110 g, panel plate back bright color visual recognition Part 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, and other members that diffusely reflect light and members that are visually recognized by metallic luster. It may be configured so that a member visually recognizable in white or bright color or a member emitting light is located.

Specifically, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, and the panel are located at positions overlapping with the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e in front view. Plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f, panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110 g, panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, and other members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright color, and members that emit light are located. It should be configured to do so.

It should be noted that the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member boss 2470c may be provided at positions where the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member boss 2470c overlap each other with respect to the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of one panel plate. Alternatively, the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e may be provided at positions where the obstacle nail 1201 and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e overlap each other with respect to the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of one panel plate. Alternatively, the obstacle nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e may be provided at positions where the obstacle nail 1201, the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, and the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e overlap each other with respect to the rough surface portion 1110b on the back surface of one panel plate.

Not limited to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f, and the panel plate back surface first. 2 Metallic luster portion 1110 g, panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. The same configuration may be adopted for a member that diffusely reflects, a member that is visually recognized by metallic luster, a member that is visually recognized in white or bright color, and a member that can emit light.

With such a configuration, the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, and the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110e. 1110f, panel plate back second metallic luster portion 1110 g, panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h, panel plate rear decorative member 2410, panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, panel plate rear Members that diffusely reflect light such as the substrate 2420, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright color, and members that emit light are used not only for decoration, but also for decorative member boss 2470c and decorative member screws. It can also be used to make the insertion hole 2470e and the decorative member mounting screw 2471 inconspicuous. In the present embodiment, the decorative member boss 2470c does not necessarily have to be provided at the boundary between the decorative member front surface portion 2470a and the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, and the decorative member boss is located at a position overlapping only the decorative member front surface portion 2470a in front view. It may be configured to provide 2470c.

Rabbit accessory 6000, stump accessory 6100, stump portion 6200, stump box portion 6300, grass accessory 6400, mountain accessory 6500, first giant tree accessory 6600, first Members that make up the cloud accessory 6700 and the board back grass accessory 6800, such as members that diffusely reflect light, members that are visible with metallic luster, members that are visible in white or bright color, and members that can emit light. , Panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f, panel plate back second metal Similar to the glossy portion 1110 g, the panel plate back bright color visual recognition portion 1110h, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410, the panel plate rear decorative member rough surface portion 2410a, the panel plate rear decorative member metallic luster portion 2410b, the panel plate rear substrate 2420, etc. It may be provided at a position where it overlaps with the nail 1201, the decorative member boss 2470c, or the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470 in front view.

The decorative member 2470 may be attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Also in this case, it is preferable to adopt a similar mounting structure using the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member screw insertion hole 2470e, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q. In this case, the head of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is difficult to see from the front, and the spiral-shaped portion of the body portion of the decorative member mounting screw 2471 and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q provided in the panel plate 1110. The engaged portion is visible from the front as the whitening portion HKB. When the decorative member 2470 is attached by inserting the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from the rear into the panel plate 1110 in this way, the portion where the decorative member mounting screw 2471 is inserted is visually recognized as the whitening portion HKB. Become. With respect to the whitening portion HKB visually recognized in this way, a configuration may be adopted in which the whitening portion HKB as described above is made inconspicuous. For example, the panel plate rear decorative member 2410 or the panel plate rear substrate 2420 may be arranged behind the decorative member 2470. Alternatively, the entire decorative member 2470 may be made of a transparent or translucent synthetic resin that is visually recognizable in bright or white. Further, at least one surface of the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member first inclined portion 2470f, and the decorative member second inclined portion 2470 g is subjected to satin finish or embossing. A rough surface portion capable of diffusely reflecting light may be formed.

With such a configuration, even when the decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the whitening portion HKB and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p generated in the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q can be made inconspicuous. ..

When the decorative member 2470 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, the length may be such that the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q do not penetrate the panel plate 1110.

With such a configuration, the length of the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q can be further shortened, and the whitening portion HKB and the panel plate boss insertion generated in the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q can be made shorter. The hole 1110p can be made inconspicuous. Further, cigarette ash and dust enter the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q from the front surface of the game area 5a where the game ball rolls, and the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the like. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the inner wall of the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q becomes dirty. The ash and dust of the cigarette adhere to the game ball mainly in the situation where the game ball is located in the upper plate 321 and move together with the game ball in the game area 5a.

The embodiment has been described by taking the decorative member 2470 attached to the panel plate 1110 as an example, but the same applies not only to the decorative member 2470 but also to other plate-shaped, colorless and transparent or colored transparent members attached to the panel plate 1110. The configuration of may be adopted. Further, not limited to the panel plate 1110, the same configuration may be adopted when a plate-shaped colorless transparent or colored transparent decorative member is attached to a predetermined colorless and transparent plate-shaped member. Further, when the plate-shaped and colorless and transparent member is attached to the plate-shaped and colorless and transparent member, the same configuration may be adopted.

Further, a similar configuration may be adopted as a structure for attaching the predetermined transparent member and the predetermined transparent member. For example, the same configuration may be adopted when the specific portion of the first member made of a transparent material and the specific portion of the second member made of a transparent material are attached. Specifically, it may be configured to provide a boss in one specific portion and an insertion hole for inserting the boss in the other specific portion.

A molding method using a protruding pin for separating a molded product from a mold when molding a member made of synthetic resin by a mold is known. However, there is a problem that the shape of the tip of the protruding pin is attached to the molded product in the place where the protruding pin is used. The shape of the tip of the protruding pin is generally circular. For this reason, for example, a decorative member having a diameter of 3 mm and a thickness of 0.1 mm is formed in the molded product with a circularly recessed or protruding mark. When the decorative member 2470 in the present embodiment is formed by using a colorless and transparent synthetic resin as a material and using a mold, the traces of the protruding pins will remain in the decorative member in a circular shape. Is not aesthetically pleasing.

Therefore, it is preferable to configure the decorative member 2470 so that the circular trace formed by the protrusion pin is located on the rear surface of the decorative member 2470. Further, it is preferable that a part or all of the circular traces formed by the protrusion pins overlap the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in the front view. Alternatively, the decorative member 2470 may be provided with a rough surface portion so that the rough surface portion and the circular mark overlap each other in the front view.

By providing the decorative member 2470 at a position that is difficult for the player to see, or by adopting a structure that makes it difficult for the player to see the mark generated by molding using the mold in this way, the mark of the protruding pin of the decorative member 2470 Can be made inconspicuous. The embodiment applied to the whitening portion HKB, the decorative member boss 2470c, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the like may be applied to the traces of the protruding pins of the decorative member 2470. Also in this case, the same effect as that of the embodiment for the whitening portion HKB and the decorative member boss 2470c is obtained.

By the way, among the pachinko machines, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine, in general, each player sits on a seat installed at a position facing the front of the pachinko machine to play a game. At this time, the position of the player's eyes and the distance in front of the game machine are close, and although there is a considerable difference in height depending on age and gender, the player's eyes are located almost in front of the center position of the pachinko machine. Become. Then, the line of sight is vertically, horizontally, or diagonally according to the movement of the game ball that rolls around the center position of the pachinko machine, the decorative state such as light emission / movement of the decorative member, or the game state. It will be shifted in a predetermined direction such as above. Therefore, when the center position of the gaming machine is centered, the member provided at the tip where the player shifts his / her line of sight in this way may be used as a member for hiding the whitening portion HKB.

For example, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the life nail 1230 or the jump nail 1231 is visually recognized from diagonally above by the player's line of sight, a member constituting the first starting port 2002 formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. It may be configured so that the whitening portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 overlaps and is visually recognized. Similarly, when the obstacle nail 1201 planted as the left guide nail 1232 is visually recognized from diagonally above by the player's line of sight, the member constituting the general winning opening 2001 formed of colorless and transparent synthetic resin and the obstacle nail 1201 It may be configured so that the whitening portion HKB generated by the planting overlaps and is visually recognized. As described above, the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and the left guide nail 1232 may be provided at positions where they overlap with the bright color visual recognition portion, the diffused reflection portion, and the metallic luster portion in front view. It should be noted that the members penetrating the panel plate 1110 for inserting the members constituting the general winning opening 2001 and the members constituting the first starting port 2002 and for passing the winning game balls from the front surface to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The cut hole provided is visually recognized in a state where the inner wall is whitened as in the case of the obstacle nail through hole 1110a, but the cut hole and the whitened portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 are visually recognized so as to overlap with each other. It may be configured in.

In this way, when visually recognized from a predetermined angle (for example, diagonally above) different from the front view, the winning opening member (for example, the member constituting the general winning opening 2001, the member constituting the first starting opening 2002) and the obstacle. The whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous even when the structure is such that the nail 1201 is visually recognized by overlapping with the planted portion. When visually recognized from a predetermined angle, the bright color visual recognition portion, the diffused reflection portion, the metallic luster portion, and the planted portion of the obstacle nail 1201 may be configured to be visually recognized so as to overlap each other. Further, the presence of the whitened portion HKB can be made inconspicuous in either case of viewing from a predetermined angle different from the front view and the front view.

As shown in FIG. 294, the decorative member 2470 is provided above the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232 and the left side jump nail 1231. By adopting such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB and the decorative member generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232 and the left side jump nail 1231 in a state of being visually recognized from diagonally above by the player's line of sight. Since it is visually recognized by overlapping with 2470, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. Specifically, the decorative member front surface portion 2470a, the decorative member rear surface portion 2470b, the decorative member boss 2470c, the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, the decorative member mounting screw 2471, etc. are more than the whitening portion HKB generated by the planting of the obstacle nail 1201. Since it is visually recognized on the front side, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous as a result. Further, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q for attaching the decorative member 2470 to the panel plate 1110 are also visually recognized overlapping with the whitening portion HKB, so that the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous. ..

The decorative member 2470 may be configured to be provided below the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left side guide nail 1232 and the left side jump nail 1231. In this case, the whitening portion HKB generated by the planting of the left side guide nail 1232 and the obstacle nail 1201 constituting the left side jump nail 1231 in a state of being visually recognized from diagonally above by the player's line of sight is the decorative member boss 2470c and the decorative member attachment. It is preferable to provide the decorative member 2470 at a position where the screw 2471, the panel plate boss insertion hole 1110p, and the panel plate screw insertion hole 1110q are visually recognized. With such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous.

By the way, gaming machines may be installed in gaming stores for several years. On the other hand, the history of the game board formed by planting obstacle nails on a transparent panel board is shorter than the history of the game board formed by planting obstacle nails on a wooden panel board, and the obstacle nails are transparent. It has been about 10 years since the game machines planted on the various panel boards have been installed in the game stores in earnest. Furthermore, the playability of the gaming machine itself is constantly evolving. For this reason, the gauge configuration formed by driving the obstacle nails and the device installed in the game board change each time, and the number of obstacle nails to be planted on the transparent panel board and the obstacle nails are planted accordingly. The position and the distance between the obstacle nails also change. For this reason, it is a predetermined year to verify whether the gauge configuration pattern that can occur in various ways is such that the whitening portion HKB is likely to occur or the whitening portion HKB is less likely to occur. The current situation is that it takes a month.

Until now, as obstacle nails that receive an impact due to a collision from a game ball immediately after launch, for example, a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted in the upper left of the game area 5a and a plurality of obstacle nails 1201 planted on the right side of the game area 5a. There is a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 out of a plurality of obstacle nails 1201. Further, as an obstacle nail 1201 in which the game balls that flow down and roll in the game area are concentrated according to the game state, for example, a game ball that has rolled from the upper left of the game area 5a, which is concentrated during a normal game, is predetermined. Multiple obstacle nails 1201 planted on the left side of the game area 5a that collide with probability, and obstacle nails 1201 (jump nails) provided corresponding to the rolling path from the upper left of the game area 5a to the first starting port 2002. 1231, life nail 1230, left side guide nail 1232), and obstacle nail 1201 provided near the big prize opening 2005, which is concentrated during the big hit game, are presumed to have deteriorated the whitening part HKB.

In the embodiments shown below, such a game machine is used before a quality problem that may interfere with the progress of the game or the aesthetics perceived by the player occurs in the operation of the game machine in the game store. An embodiment in which a pachinko parlor clerk can determine whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur will be described.

In order to make the whitening part HKB inconspicuous, when the part where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted is viewed from the front, a bright color visual recognition part, a diffused reflection part, and a metallic luster part are provided behind the part where the obstacle nail 1201 is planted. Although an example has been shown, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a configuration may be adopted in which the whitening portion HKB is intentionally planted at a conspicuous position for the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 among the obstacle nails 1201.

Specifically, among the obstacle nails 1201 constituting the left guide nail 1232, the first obstacle nail 1201 and the second obstacle nail 1201 from the left are decorative members that are not bright in front view (preferably dark decoration). It may be arranged so as to overlap with the member).

With such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB is made inconspicuous for many obstacle nails 1201, and the occurrence status of the whitening portion HKB is clearly visible for some predetermined obstacle nails 1201. Therefore, it is possible to easily estimate the cumulative operating time of the gaming machine, and it is possible to use it as an index as to whether or not a quality problem is likely to occur in the gaming machine.

As the dark-colored decorative member, it is desirable to use, for example, a decorative member decorated with black as the base color in order to make the whitened portion HKB more conspicuous. Alternatively, a liquid crystal display device, which is often used as an effect display device, may be used as a basic device constituting the gaming machine. For example, the front surface of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 125 is visually recognized as a black flat surface when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.

FIG. 299 shows an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 299 is a front view of the game board 5. In the present embodiment, the game board side effect display device 1600 is provided behind the colorless and transparent panel plate 1110, and the life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, the left side guide nail 1232, and other obstacles planted in the panel plate 1110 are provided. A part of the nail 1201 is provided at a position where it overlaps with the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 in front view. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the front surface of the display area 1600a is visually recognized as a black flat surface.

In this way, the position overlaps with the display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600, which is visually recognized as a dark decorative member or a black surface, or as described above, in a predetermined direction about the center position of the pachinko machine. If a predetermined obstacle nail 1201 is planted at a position overlapping with a dark-colored decorative member or a display area 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle, the whitening portion HKB in the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 is provided. It becomes easy to confirm the occurrence state of.

With such a configuration, the occurrence status of the whitening portion HKB is checked for the display area 1600a of the dark-colored decorative member and the game board side effect display device 1600, and the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 to be planted at a position overlapping with the front view. It will be easier to check. As described above, the dark-colored decorative member and the game board side are located at the position where the obstacle nail 1201 overlaps with the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 when the line of sight is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction with the center position of the pachinko machine as the center, instead of the front view. The display area 1600a of the effect display device 1600 may be configured to be located. Further, this configuration may be adopted for the obstacle nail 1201 in another embodiment so as to enhance the visibility of the whitening portion HKB.

The predetermined obstacle nail 1201 in which the whitening portion HKB can be visually recognized may be planted so as to penetrate the panel plate front decorative member 2450 or the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m. Alternatively, it may be planted in such a manner that neither the panel plate front decorative member 2450 nor the panel plate front decorative opaque thin layer portion 1110 m penetrates.

FIG. 300 shows an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 299. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 5. In the present embodiment, the panel plate back surface rough surface portion 1110b is provided on the back surface of the panel plate 1110. The life nail 1230, the jump nail 1231, and a part of the left side guide nail 1232 planted in the panel plate 1110 are provided at positions overlapping with the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b visually recognized in bright color. On the other hand, some left side guide nails 1232 (two obstacle nails 1201 on the upper left) and other obstacle nails 1201 do not overlap with the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate in front view, and the game board side effect display device 1600. It is provided so as to overlap the display area 1600a.

With such a configuration, the whitening portion HKB can always be made inconspicuous for some of the obstacle nails 1201, and for the other obstacle nails 1201, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. By displaying a bright color or yellow effect image in the display area 1600a in the above-mentioned manner according to the game state, the whitening portion HKB can be made inconspicuous, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. It is possible to make the whitening portion HKB conspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 300, by applying the above-described embodiment instead of the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the whitening portion HKB is configured to be inconspicuous for some obstacle nails 1201. You may. For example, in place of or in addition to the panel plate back rough surface portion 1110b, the panel plate back first rough surface portion 1110c, the panel plate back second rough surface portion 1110d, the panel plate back metallic luster portion 1110e, and the panel plate back first metallic luster portion 1110f. , At least one of a second metallic luster portion 1110 g on the back of the panel plate, a bright color visual recognition portion on the back of the panel plate 1110 h, an opaque thin layer portion for decoration in front of the panel plate 1110 m, a decorative member behind the panel plate 2410, and a substrate behind the panel plate 2420 is provided. It may be configured as. The shape of these members in the front view may be the same as the shape of the rough surface portion 1110b on the back of the panel plate in the front view.

An embodiment in which the panel plate back bright color viewing unit 1110h is provided on the back side of the panel plate 1110 is shown with reference to FIGS. 267 and 268. In these embodiments, the panel plate back bright color viewing unit 1110h is shown. While adopting the same configuration, the dark color viewing part on the back of the panel board, which is dark only in that color, is tilted at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction with the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 as described above and the front view or the center position of the pachinko machine as the center. It may be configured to be provided at a position where they overlap each other. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to confirm the generation state of the whitening portion HKB for the predetermined obstacle nail 1201 as described above.

An example of mounting a plurality of light emitting diodes as the panel plate rear board light emitting portion 2425 on the white panel board rear board 2420 has been shown, but a method such as printing on the panel board rear board 2420 adjacent to each light emitting diode has been shown. The color of the character string for confirming the mounted component (for example, "LED01", "LED02", etc.) provided in 1 may be set to a bright color (specifically, cream or yellow). With such a configuration, when a brass obstacle nail 1201 is adopted, or a golden metallic luster portion is provided as a metallic luster portion 2410b of the panel plate rear decorative member provided on the panel plate rear decorative member 2410. When yellow is adopted as the emission color of the light emitting portion 2425 on the rear substrate of the panel plate, these character strings can be made inconspicuous.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 294 to 298, the point that the decorative member 2470 includes two decorative member bosses 2470c has been described, but the decorative member inclined portion 2470d provided with the two decorative member bosses 2470c. As a result, it is preferable to adopt the decorative member inclined portion 2470d in which the surface forming the decorative member inclined portion 2470d faces diagonally upward.

With such a configuration, cigarette ash, dust, dust, dust, dirt such as a player's hand stain and cigarette tar adhering to the game ball adhere to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally upward. If this is the case, these stains make it difficult for the decorative member boss 2470c to be visually recognized. It should be noted that the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally downward also has stains (especially highly sticky stains such as cigarette tar and sticking plasters), but the decorative member facing diagonally upward relatively. Dirt is more likely to adhere to the inclined portion 2470d.

For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 294 (b), of the two decorative member bosses 2470c, the decorative member boss 2470c provided in the upper left is more visible than the decorative member boss 2470c provided in the lower right due to dirt. It is possible to make it into a desired state.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 296 (a) to 296 (c), dirt is likely to adhere to a portion where a boundary such as a valley is formed by the two decorative member inclined portions 2470d. Therefore, it is possible to make the decorative member boss 2470c provided on the upper left shown in FIGS. 296 (a) to 296 (c) difficult to see due to dirt. In the game store, the game area 5a and the decorative member 2470 are periodically cleaned to remove the adhering stains. However, when such cleaning is performed, dirt may rather collect on the portion where the boundary such as a valley is formed in such an embodiment. If such an event occurs, not only the decorative member boss 2470c provided in the upper left but also the decorative member boss 2470c provided in the lower right is in a state where it is difficult to see the decorative member boss 2470c due to dirt. It becomes possible.

In a state where the decorative member 2470 is attached to the panel plate 1110, among the plurality of decorative member inclined portions 2470d possessed by the decorative member 2470, at least the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally upward is rolled in the game area 5a. It is preferable to configure the game balls to be in contact with each other. With such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently attach dirt to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d by the rolling game ball. It should be noted that the game ball may be configured to be in contact with all the decorative member inclined portions 2470d of the decorative member 2470. With such a configuration, the game ball comes into direct contact with the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, so that when dirt adheres to the decorative member inclined portion 2470d, it is difficult to visually recognize the decorative member boss 2470c. It becomes possible to do.

In these embodiments, not only one decorative member boss 2470c but also a plurality (for example, two) or all decorative member bosses 2470c are positioned so as to overlap the decorative member inclined portion 2470d facing diagonally upward in a front view. It may be configured to be arranged in. With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the number of decorative member bosses 2470c that are difficult to see.

Conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with an operating means has been studied, but a gaming machine provided with a plurality of operating means and effectively utilizing a plurality of operating means in a staging will be described below. As shown in FIG. 301, the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a mission button 3700, an attack button 3710, a left lever 3720, a right lever 3730, and a defense button 3740 that can be operated by a player at the lower part of the door frame 3. ..

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it is possible to perform an effect of displaying the own tank during the variable display of the decorative symbol by displaying an image. In this production, the own tank travels various paths, and after fighting with an enemy tank while moving to the destination, the battle result etc. suggests the change result of the decorative pattern. ing. Further, during the movement of the own tank or the battle between the own tank and the enemy tank, the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, the defense button 3740, etc. provided at the lower part of the door frame 3 are used. By accepting the player's operation on the operating means, it is possible to change the effect content such as the suggestion mode of the variation result of the decorative pattern.
In the present specification, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 may be simply referred to as a display area.

The mission button 3700 is a button that functions in various ways in the production of displaying the own tank. The attack button 3710 is a button capable of mainly attacking an enemy unit in the effect of displaying the own tank. The defense button 3740 is a button capable of mainly defending an attack from an enemy tank in the effect of displaying the own tank. Each button can be pressed downward by a predetermined distance. The pachinko machine 1 can detect the pressing operation of each button by the player by a sensor (not shown), input the input to the peripheral control board 1510, and use it for the effect. When the player does not press the button, each button is moved upward by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like.

The left lever 3720 is a rod-shaped operating means capable of inputting a direction. The base of the left lever 3720 is axially supported and can be tilted 360 degrees in any direction. The maximum angle that can be tilted is 45 degrees. The left lever 3720 has a structure that returns to a vertical state (a state in which the player is not tilted in any direction) when the player releases the left lever 3720 by a return mechanism (not shown) using a spring or the like. The pachinko machine 1 can detect the tilted direction and the tilted angle of the left lever 3720 by a sensor (not shown), input it to the peripheral control board 1510, and use it for staging. The player can perform operation input by grasping the left lever 3720 and tilting it at a predetermined angle in a predetermined direction.

A left lever vibration source 3722 capable of generating vibration is built in the lower part of the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever vibration source 3722 may be configured by a stepping motor or a solenoid that reciprocates with an eccentric weight attached to the rotating shaft. The left lever vibration source 3722 can generate vibration by being driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. The vibration generated from the left lever vibration source 3722 is transmitted to the palm of the player holding the left lever 3720, so that the vibration can be used as an effect. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be vibrated in a predetermined vibration mode in response to the operation performed in response to the operation instruction of the left lever 3720. Further, the vibration mode may be configured to show the degree of expectation for an event advantageous to the player such as a big hit.

A plurality of left lever vibration sources 3722 may be provided in the left lever 3720. For example, the left lever vibration source 3722 may be provided in the upper half of the left lever 3720 and the lower half of the left lever 3720, respectively. Then, only one of them may be vibrated, or both vibration sources may be vibrated at the same time.

A left lever light emitting source 3724 capable of emitting light in a predetermined color is built in the upper part of the left lever 3720 in the vertical direction. The left lever 3720 is made of a milky white synthetic resin, and the entire left lever 3720 can be decorated with light by the color of the light output from the left lever light emitting source 3724. Specifically, the left lever light emitting source 3724 is composed of a plurality of full-color LEDs and a drive circuit, and can emit light in a predetermined color by driving and controlling the drive circuit by the peripheral control board 1510. The left lever light emitting source 3724 allows the upper half of the left lever 3720 to be decorated with light emission, and it is possible to use light emission modes such as light emission color and blinking / lighting as an effect. For example, light may be emitted in a predetermined light emitting mode according to the operation performed in response to the operation instruction of the left lever 3720. In addition, it may be configured to show the degree of expectation for an event advantageous to the player such as a big hit depending on the light emitting mode. The left lever 3720 may be formed of another material as long as it can transmit light, or may be formed of, for example, a colorless and transparent synthetic resin having a lens cut.

The right lever 3730 has the same structure and function as the left lever 3720. For example, the right lever 3730 can accept an operation input. Further, like the left lever 3720, the right lever vibration source 3732 and the right lever light emitting source 3734 are provided in the right lever 3730, and can be used for the same effect as the left lever 3720.

The arrangement of each button is not limited to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 301. FIG. 302 shows an embodiment in which the attack button 3710 is installed at the upper end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 is installed at the upper end of the right lever 3730. In this case, it is possible to press the attack button 3710 at the upper end of the left lever 3720 with the thumb while grasping the left lever 3720 and tilting the left lever 3720. Similarly, it is possible to press the defense button 3740 at the upper end of the right lever 3730 with the thumb while grasping the right lever 3730 and tilting the right lever 3730.

The attack button 3710 is formed of a milky white or colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and the left lever light emitting source 3724 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode according to the operation of the attack button 3710, so that the attack button 3710 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode. May be good. Similarly, the defense button 3740 is formed of a milky white or colorless transparent synthetic resin, and the right lever light emitting source 3734 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode according to the operation of the defense button 3740, whereby the defense button 3740 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode. May be.

Instead of installing the attack button 3710 at the upper end of the left lever 3720 and the defense button 3740 at the upper end of the right lever 3730, the mission button 3700 is installed at the upper end of the left lever 3720 instead of the attack button 3710. It is also good. Alternatively, it may be installed at the upper end of the right lever 3730 instead of the defense button 3740. Alternatively, two or three of these buttons may be configured to be installed at the upper end of one lever.
With such a configuration, the tilting operation of the lever and the pressing operation of one or a plurality of buttons can be performed with one hand.

FIG. 303 shows an embodiment in which the effect of displaying the own tank is executed as a reach effect during the change of the decorative symbol. FIG. 303A shows a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When a start winning prize is generated for the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right start to change.

FIG. 303B shows a state in which the left, middle, and right decorative symbols appear from the upper part of the display area and disappear downward in a variable manner. Decorative symbols are displayed as a stop with a symbol that represents a loss without forming a reach state, or as a stop display with a symbol that forms a reach state and represents a loss, and a reach state is formed and a hit. It may be stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating.

FIG. 303 (c) shows a state in which the left and right “3” symbols are temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, as the reach effect, the tank is displayed in the display area, and it is possible to execute the tank reach effect that moves forward.

FIG. 303 (d) shows a state in which the display of the effect of displaying the own tank is started as the tank reach effect. Specifically, the tank is moving forward on the road. The decorative pattern is displayed in the upper left of the display area.

FIG. 303 (e) shows a state in which the own tank and the enemy tank are fighting. Further, FIG. 303 (f) shows a state in which the tank has arrived at the destination. These function as an effect that suggests the result of the special lottery. For example, an effect display indicating whether or not the own tank can defeat the enemy tank shown in FIG. 303 (e) or whether or not the own tank is defeated by the enemy tank is executed, and the result of the special lottery is determined by the effect display result. Is suggested. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 303 (f), an effect display indicating whether or not the own tank can reach the destination without being hit by the enemy tank is executed, and the effect display result suggests the result of the special lottery. ..

FIG. 303 (g) shows the mode of stopping the variable display of the decorative symbol when the result of the special lottery is a loss. Further, FIG. 303 (h) shows a mode in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped when the result of the special lottery is a big hit. Images of own tanks, enemy tanks, roads, etc. end display at the timing immediately before the change of the decorative pattern stops.

With reference to FIG. 303, an example of displaying the own tank as a reach effect is shown in the display area, but the effect of displaying the own tank is executed over a plurality of changes in the decorative symbol. It may be configured as. For example, by pre-reading the special lottery result related to the hold generated by winning a game ball in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the execution of the effect of displaying the own tank is started, and the execution of the effect of displaying the own tank is started multiple times. It may be configured to be executed across the symbol variation and suggest the variation result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the pre-read hold. Alternatively, the effect of displaying the own tank is executed from the start to the end of the big hit, or the effect of displaying the tank is displayed from the end of the big hit until the decorative symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). By executing, it is suggested what kind of game state the game state changed at the end of the big hit (for example, whether the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special lottery is a high probability state or a low probability state). It may be configured to do so. In this way, the target suggested by the effect of displaying the own tank is not limited to the special lottery result (for example, the degree of expectation that a big hit will occur), and for example, even if the game state is suggested. good.

FIG. 304 shows an effect situation in which a mode in which either the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 is operated with the left hand and the handle 302 is rotated with the right hand is required. During the production of displaying the own tank, basically, the own tank automatically moves forward. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the own tank or move it in the left-right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 304, the speed of the own tank can be increased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward when viewed from the player. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the rear (player side) when viewed from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the own tank. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right when viewed from the player, it is possible to move the tank to the right. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left side when viewed from the player, it is possible to move the own tank to the left side.

Although the embodiment in which one lever is operated with one hand (left hand) to move the tank is shown, the left hand may be used to operate the left lever 3720 and the right hand may be used to operate the right lever 3730. .. It should be noted that the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and the player does not necessarily need to operate the handle 302, and the left lever 3720 or the right can be used with both hands, because the effect of reaching is higher than the normal variation of the decorative pattern. Since it is possible to operate various buttons such as the lever 3730 and the mission button 3700, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the production.

During the production of displaying the own tank, basically, the own tank automatically moves forward. At this time, by operating the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is possible to change the speed of the tank or move it in the left-right direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 305, the speed of the tank can be increased by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 forward when viewed from the player. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the rear (player side) when viewed from the player, it is possible to reduce the speed of the tank. Further, the tank can be moved to the right by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the right when viewed from the player. Further, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 to the left side when viewed from the player, the tank can be moved to the left side.

Further, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted forward when viewed from the player at the same time, the speed can be greatly increased as compared with the case where only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted backward when viewed from the player at the same time, the speed can be significantly reduced as compared with the case where only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. .. Further, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted to the right when viewed from the player at the same time, the tank can be moved to the right side more than when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. Is. Similarly, when the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are tilted to the left when viewed from the player at the same time, the tank can be moved to the left more than when only one of the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 is operated. It is possible.

In this way, when the tank moves forward, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 can change the direction of movement of the tank to avoid attacks from enemy units or to be installed on the field. It is possible to avoid obstacles such as land mines and rocks and perform effects such as moving forward.

The basic usage of the mission button 3700, the attack button 3710, and the defense button 3740 in tank reach will be described. By operating the mission button 3700, it is possible to fire a bullet forward from the machine gun mounted on the tank. In addition, by operating the attack button 3710, it is possible to fire a shell forward from the battery mounted on the tank. In addition, by operating the defense button 3740, it is possible to provide a defense shield in front of the own tank to prevent attacks from enemy tanks. The functions applied to each button may differ depending on the situation of the production.

By the way, in this embodiment, a new condition is adopted as a condition for changing the gaming state. Hereinafter, new conditions will be described as conditions for changing the gaming state with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 2002, the first special symbol display 1403 displays the variation of the special symbol, and the first special lottery result is displayed. Further, in the display area of the effect display device on the game board side, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in a manner corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol.
Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the special symbol variable display is performed on the second special symbol display 1405, and the second special lottery result is displayed. Further, in the display area of the effect display device on the game board side, the variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in a manner corresponding to the variation display result of the special symbol.
Further, when the normal lottery result of the game ball being drawn by passing through the gate portion 2003 is "hit", the second starting port 2004 accepts the game ball from a state where it is impossible or difficult to accept the game ball. It is possible to change to a possible state.

Regarding the lottery mode of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the lottery in which the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol becomes the lottery result of "big hit" is low (probability: 1/300) and the lottery result of the special symbol becomes "big hit". It is possible to take a state in which the probability of the result is high (probability: 1/30).
In addition, regarding the lottery mode of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long (30 seconds on average), and the probability that the normal lottery result will be a "win" lottery result is low (probability: 1/100). It is possible to take a state in which the fluctuation time is short (2.0 seconds on average) and the probability that the lottery result of a normal symbol becomes a "hit" lottery result is high (probability: 1 / 1.2).
Then, it is possible to take the following four gaming states in which these are combined.
1: A normal state in which the probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be the lottery result of "big hit" is low, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, and the probability that the normal lottery result will be the lottery result of "win" is low.
2: The probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be the lottery result of "big hit" is low, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is short, and the probability that the ordinary lottery result will be the lottery result of "win" is high.
3: There is a high probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be the lottery result of "big hit", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long, and the probability that the normal lottery result will be the lottery result of "win" is low. ..
4: The probability that the lottery result of the special symbol will be the lottery result of "big hit" is high, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is short, and the probability that the normal lottery result will be the lottery result of "win" is high.
In addition to these gaming states, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "big hit", the following states are taken.
5: A jackpot state in which the jackpot 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. In addition, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is not performed during the big hit state.
FIG. 306 is a table showing these five gaming states.
As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to take five gaming states. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game, the game state changes from one of these game states to another game state. FIG. 307 is a diagram showing transition conditions for the gaming state.

The time saving state shifts to the normal state on condition that the number of occurrences of the special lottery result of the loss after the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times. For example, when the big hit state ends and the state shifts to the time saving state, and the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 100 times in the time saving state, the gaming state shifts to the normal state.
The non-time saving probability change state and the probability change state are continued until the big hit game state occurs.

In the present embodiment, as the special lottery result, three lottery results of "loss", "loss with time reduction", and "big hit" are provided.

When the special lottery result is "missing", after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the big winning opening 2005 is not opened or closed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the normal lottery result is "winning". In addition to increasing the probability of becoming "," the "time saving state" in which the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short does not occur.

When the special lottery result is "missing with time reduction", after the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, the large winning opening 2005 is not opened and closed in the predetermined opening / closing pattern, and the normal lottery result is "winning". The game state shifts to the "time saving state" in which the time until the normal lottery result is displayed is short while increasing the probability of becoming. Even if the result of the special lottery is "loss with time reduction", if the game state is in the time reduction state, the non-time reduction probability change state, or the probability change state, the transition to the time reduction state is not performed. In addition, it is advisable to generate "loss with time reduction" with a predetermined probability. For example, among the special lottery results, the probability of occurrence of "big hit" may be 1/300, the probability of occurrence of "loss" may be 298/300, and the probability of occurrence of "loss with time reduction" may be 1/300.

When the special lottery result is "big hit", the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. In addition, after the jackpot state is completed, the game state shifts to one of the normal state, the time saving state, the non-time saving probability change state, and the probability change state based on the predetermined jackpot breakdown. The rate of transition after the jackpot state may be appropriately set, and the number of gaming states that can be transitioned after the jackpot may be less than four. For example, after the big hit state, the rate of shifting to the probable change state may be 50%, the rate of shifting to the time saving state may be 50%, and the rate of going to the normal state or the non-time saving probable state may be 0%.

On the other hand, without adopting "loss with time reduction", the number of times the special lottery result is continuously lost is counted in the normal state, and the number of times the special lottery result is continuously lost is specified in advance. When the number of times (for example, 500 times) is reached, the special lottery result is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the gaming state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state without opening and closing the big winning opening 2005.
Even if the number of times the special lottery result is lost during the time saving state, the non-time saving probability change state, or the probability change state reaches a predetermined specific number of times (for example, 500 times), the transition to the time reduction state is performed. not.

For the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on the time-saving loss, and the transition from the normal state to the time-saving state based on the execution of a specific number of special lottery, only one of them may be adopted, or both may be adopted. May be good.

As a result of the special lottery, by adopting "loss with time reduction", it is possible to shift the game state from the normal state to the time reduction state without accompanied by ball ejection. In addition, it is possible to receive the special lottery result in a time-saving state in which the number of game balls is less likely to decrease than in the normal state.

In addition, since the game state shifts from the normal state to the time saving state by executing the special lottery a specific number of times, if the normal state is continued for a certain period of time, the game ball is less likely to be reduced than in the normal state. It is possible to receive the special lottery result at.

The breakdown of the big hit when the result of the first special lottery becomes a big hit and the breakdown of the big hit when the result of the second special lottery becomes a big hit may be the same.
Alternatively, the breakdown of the big hit when the first special lottery result becomes a big hit and the breakdown when the second special lottery result becomes a big hit may be different. For example, the breakdown when the first special lottery result is a big hit is 50% for the big hit in the normal state, 50% for the big hit in the time saving state, and the breakdown when the second special lottery result is a big hit. The jackpot in the time-saving state may be 20%, and the jackpot in the probable change state may be 80%.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the reach effect and the conditions for changing the game state executed by using such an operation unit will be described together with the display contents displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

Conventionally, an effect of suggesting a variable display result of a decorative pattern has been performed by displaying an image of a character or the like on a display means (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-179063, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-022544). For example, by displaying an image of a predetermined character before the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped, the probability that the variation display result of the decorative symbol will be a big hit is a predetermined probability (for example, 10%) for the player. The suggested production was being performed.
However, some players may not always like to see such a suggestive effect. For example, if a certain suggestion effect is displayed multiple times, but the result of the most recent multiple variation display in which the suggestion effect is displayed is a variable display result indicating a loss, the suggestion effect is Then, there are times when you feel distrust such as "I'm going to lose it again ...", or you feel that the test is bad for the suggestive staging, and you don't want to see the suggestive staging. Such a tendency is remarkable in the suggestion effect in which the player is requested to operate the predetermined operation unit, and the display indicating the predetermined degree of expectation is performed based on the operation reception. In such a case, the player may be made to visually recognize a suggestion effect that he / she does not want to see even though he / she has purposely operated the operation means, which may reduce the interest of the player.

In addition, there are some players who prefer that the result of the variable display is clearly notified rather than the result of the variable display being suggested with a half-hearted expectation. For such a player, being able to show a suggestive effect with a low expectation (for example, 10%) may rather lead to a decrease in interest.

However, conventionally, the existence of such a player has not been taken into consideration, and there is room for improvement in the execution mode of the suggestion staging. In the embodiment shown below, in consideration of the existence of such a player, an embodiment configured to suppress a decrease in interest will be described.

Below, referring to Fig. 308 etc., in the battle scene between the own tank and the enemy tank, the defensive shield is displayed by firing the shield bullet from the self-tank that can fire the newly developed shield bullet "Shield bullet" Reach ”is explained.

FIG. 308 is a time chart showing the progress mode of the “shield bullet reach” of the present embodiment. In this time chart, when the execution of the effect pattern for executing the variation display of the special symbol over 34 seconds corresponding to one start winning is determined on the main control board 1310, the game is controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. In the display area of the board-side effect display device 1600, the progress of the effect mode in which the variation display of the decorative symbol is executed over 34 seconds is shown. After the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is completed, the stop display of the special symbol and the stop display of the decorative symbol are executed over 1 second. Further, in the display area, in addition to the variable display of the decorative pattern, an image of the own tank, an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, a simulated image imitating the defense button 3740, and the like are displayed. Details will be described later.
Further, FIGS. 309 and 310 show a display mode of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 at a predetermined timing of the time chart described with reference to FIG. 308.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 308, t0, t1 to t34, t35, etc. are described according to the passage of time in order to explain the timing of the effect. The time between each timing is 1 second. It should be noted that these points are the same in other embodiments and production examples described later unless otherwise specified.

Further, each embodiment shown in FIGS. 313 to 360 is basically a modification of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 308 to 312. Therefore, for configurations that are not particularly mentioned in the description of each embodiment shown in FIGS. 313 to 360 (for example, a display mode at the start of fluctuation of the decorative symbol, a display mode at the time of stop, etc.), FIGS. 308 to 312. The embodiment in the embodiment shown in the above is applicable.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 308, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing t0. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303 (b), the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303 (c), a symbol having the same decorative symbol on the left and the decorative symbol on the right (in the present embodiment, a symbol consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the own tank traveling on the road is displayed in the display area. Further, in the period from the timing t5 to the timing t27, the operation reception of the defense button 3740 becomes effective.

FIG. 309 (a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at the timing t5. Each decorative symbol ("3", "↓", "3") in the reach state is moved to the upper left of the display area, the image of the own tank is moved to the center of the lower part of the display area, and the own tank is moved to the center of the left and right direction of the display area. The image of the road, the horizontal line and the sky image at the top of the display area, the dialogue image of the character "Captain Dyna" and the window image surrounding the dialogue image at the bottom right of the display area are at the bottom left of the display area. It shows the state in which the dialogue image of the character "Might Gunso" and the window image surrounding the dialogue image are displayed. In addition, the player himself is set as a second lieutenant who controls his own tank, and moves on the battlefield with his own tank with "Colonel Dyna" whose rank is higher than the second lieutenant and "Sergeant Might" whose rank is lower than the second lieutenant. The production to be done is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the immersive feeling for the virtual reality reach production.

As shown in the line of "Colonel Dyna" in FIG. 309 (a), by pressing and holding the defense button 3740, an effect of displaying a shield image in front of the own tank is performed, which will be described in detail later.

At timing t9, the display of the white image of the enemy tank is started in the upper right of the display area, and the display of moving to the left is performed. FIG. 309 (b) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, the image of the white enemy tank moving from right to left in the display area is located on the road. At this timing, the image of the white enemy tank may be replaced with the image of the red enemy tank and displayed. At the same time, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the right side of the line of "Sergeant Might". The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 is continued for 3 seconds from the timing t11 to the timing t14.
There are two types of images of enemy tanks displayed on the road, an image of a white enemy tank and an image of a red enemy tank, compared to the case where the image of a white enemy tank is displayed. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit when the image of the red enemy tank is displayed.
Further, as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, two types, a white simulated image and a red simulated image, are prepared, and a red simulated image is displayed more than when a white simulated image is displayed. The display ratio of the enemy tank image is set so that the special lottery result is more likely to be a big hit.

The expected degree of jackpot may be suggested by the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710.
For example, if the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are both white, the expectation is 10%, and one of the colors of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is white and the other. The appearance ratio may be set so that the expectation is 20% when is red, and the expectation is 30% when both the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are red.
It should be noted that, of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, only one of the colors may be configured to change from white to red to indicate the degree of expectation. Also, depending on the combination of the color of the image of the enemy tank and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the expectation of the big hit is 100%, that is, the pattern that the occurrence of the big hit is confirmed when the combination is displayed. You may prepare it.

FIG. 309 (c) shows a state in which a white simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at the timing t12.

On the other hand, FIG. 309 (e) shows a state in which a red simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and an image of a red enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t11 to timing t12. ..

If the attack button 3710 is operated during the valid period of operation of the attack button 3710 (timing t11 to timing t14), an image of a shell popping out from the turret of the own tank is displayed and an image of an enemy tank is displayed. However, it changes to a destroyed image. Also, an image of the shell exploding is displayed. In addition, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 ends.

FIG. 308 (b) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710. Further, FIG. 308 (c) is a time chart showing a display mode when the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710.

The display of the destruction image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the shell continue for 3 seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is pressed. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated at the timing t13, the display of the destruction image of the enemy tank and the display of the explosion image of the shell are continued until the timing t16.

There are two types of images in which the shell exploded, an image in which the shell exploded in the middle and an image in which the shell exploded in a large size.The greater the degree of explosion, the higher the expectation of a big hit. The display ratio is set. For example, the expectation is +10 when the image of a medium-exploded shell is displayed, compared to the expectation shown by the image of the enemy tank and the image imitating the attack button 3710 that had been displayed so far. You may set the rate of occurrence of the effect so that the expectation level increases by + 20% when an image is displayed in which the rate increases by% and the cannonball explodes greatly.

FIG. 309 (d) shows a state in which an image in which a white enemy tank is destroyed and an image in which a shell is moderately exploded are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. On the other hand, FIG. 309 (f) shows a state in which an image in which a white enemy tank is destroyed and an image in which a shell explodes greatly are displayed on the road in the display area from timing t13 to timing t16. Even when a red enemy tank is displayed as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 309 (e), in addition to the image in which the red enemy tank is destroyed, the shell explodes moderately. Either the image that was created or the image that the shell exploded greatly will be displayed on the road. In this way, the color of the moving tank image and the color of the destroyed tank image are the same.

FIG. 308 (c) is a time chart showing the display contents in the display area when the operation for the attack button 3710 is not performed within the operation valid period. If the attack button 3710 is not operated within the operation valid period, an image effect of a shell popping out from the own tank is displayed at the timing t14, which is the end timing of the operation valid period, and an image of the enemy tank is displayed. Changes to a destroyed image. Also, either an image of a medium shell explosion or an image of a large shell explosion is displayed. Further, the display of the destruction image is continued for 3 seconds from the timing t14 to the timing t17. These display modes are the same as when the attack button 3710 is operated.
In this way, the player visually recognizes the same display effect except for the display timing and the position of the enemy tank in the left-right direction regardless of whether or not the attack button 3710 is operated. Then, the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit will be recognized depending on the effect mode of the visually recognized display effect.

After such a display effect is performed from the timing t9 to the maximum timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated), the maximum timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) is applied from the timing t17 to the maximum timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). The same production is performed again. In addition, it is suggested that the special lottery result will be a big hit in the re-produced production.

The effect that the enemy tank moves and is destroyed from the timing t9 to the longest timing t17 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated) and from the timing t17 to the longest timing t25 (when the attack button 3710 is not operated). Although an example of executing is shown, the effect pattern in which the effect of moving and destroying the enemy tank is executed can be executed only at the former timing, or the enemy tank is moved and destroyed only at the latter timing. The effect pattern may be executed. Further, the effect pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed may be executed at the two timings. In this case, the player ends the "shield bullet reach" effect without operating the attack button 3710.

It is advisable to set the appearance ratio of the effect pattern so that the effect pattern in which the enemy tank is displayed has a higher expectation of big hit than the effect pattern in which the enemy tank is not displayed. In addition, it is better to set the appearance ratio of the effect pattern so that the effect pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed twice has a higher expectation of big hit than the effect pattern in which the enemy tank moves and is destroyed only once. .. With such a configuration, when this suggestion effect is executed, the movement and destruction of the enemy tank can be performed 0 to 2 times, so that the appearance mode (color / number of times) of the enemy tank and the enemy tank The player's expectation for the destruction mode will increase. It should be noted that the effect pattern in which the movement and destruction of the enemy tank is performed three times or more may be made feasible.

FIG. 308 (d) is a time chart showing the display contents when the operation for the defense button 3740 is not performed. When the operation for the defense button 3740 is not performed as shown in FIG. 308 (d), the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed. FIGS. 309 (c) to 309 (f) show display modes in the display area when the effect display based on the operation of the defense button 3740 is not performed.

Next, a display mode in the display area when the operation for the defense button 3740 is performed will be described.

By pressing and holding the defense button 3740 during the valid period of operation of the defense button 3740 (timing t5 to timing t27), it is set to prevent attacks from enemy tanks between the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank. The shield image of is displayed. It should be noted that the fact that the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed for 0.5 seconds may be a condition for determining that the long press has been started. Further, as long as the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the display of the shield image is continued.
Although the shape of the shield image is a horizontally long ellipse in the drawing, the shape of the shield image may be configured to dynamically change during display. Further, the shield image may be displayed intermittently. For example, if the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the shield image gradually becomes smaller after the shield image is started to be displayed, and the shield bullet is automatically displayed when the shield image is not completely displayed. The display effect may be repeated so that the shield bullet explodes and a new shield image is displayed. The continuation of the display of the shield image shall include such a display mode.

FIG. 308 (e) is a time chart showing a display mode when the defense button 3740 is pressed and held during the operation valid period of the defense button 3740. As shown in this time chart, the shield image is displayed from the timing t7 when it is determined that the long press is performed by the player to the timing t24 when the player releases the defense button 3740 and the long press ends. Is displayed. By displaying the shield image based on the operation of the player's defense button 3740 in this way, it is possible to hide the color of the image of the enemy tank, the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the destruction mode of the enemy tank. Is.

For example, FIG. 310 (a) shows the timing after the display shown in FIG. 309 (a) is performed, and the player is in the period when the enemy tank image is not displayed (for example, timing t6 to timing t9). Shows the display state displayed when the long press of the defense button 3740 is operated. As shown in the figure, a shield image is displayed based on the detection of long press of the defense button 3740. In addition, the dialogue image of "Colonel Dyna" also corresponds to the display of the shield image.

FIG. 310B shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed and a shield image is displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t9 to timing t11) while moving toward the road. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 309 (b), when the shield image is displayed, the display state is the display state shown in FIG. 310 (b).

FIGS. 310 (c) and 310 (e) show shields in a state where an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed (for example, timing t11 to timing t14). The display mode in which the image is displayed is shown. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 309 (c), when the shield image is displayed, the display state is the display state shown in FIG. 310 (c). Similarly, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 309 (e), when the shield image is displayed, the display state is the display state shown in FIG. 310 (e).

At this time, the color of the enemy tank image and the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 suggest the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, but these images are hidden by the shield image. , It is becoming difficult to recognize the degree of expectation that will be a big hit.

In FIGS. 310 (d) and 310 (f), the shield image is displayed in a state where the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed (for example, timing t12 to timing t15 when operated, timing t14 to timing t17 when not operated). An example of the displayed state is shown. That is, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 309 (d), when the shield image is displayed, the display state is the display state shown in FIG. 310 (d). Similarly, in the display state shown with reference to FIG. 309 (f), when the shield image is displayed, the display state is the display state shown in FIG. 310 (f).

At this time, although the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is suggested by the explosion mode of the shell and the color of the destruction image of the enemy tank, it is expected that these images will be a big hit because they are hidden by the shield image. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree.

To hide the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the explosion mode of the shell with the shield image, set the display priority of the shield image to the simulated image or shell imitating the image of the enemy tank or the attack button 3710. It should be higher than the display priority of the image. Also, the display priority of the window in which the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are displayed should be higher than the display priority of the shield image.

The operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is from the timing t5, which is the timing when the reach effect is started, to the timing t27 after the second destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed. Further, even if the defense button 3740 is pressed and held for a long time, the display of the shield image ends at the same time as the operation valid period of the defense button 3740 ends.

According to such a configuration, the staging display suggesting the degree of expectation can be made difficult to see according to the preference of the player, so that there is no stress for the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation. It becomes possible to provide a gaming environment.
For example, by operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the right side of the display area, as shown in FIG. 309 (b), the player can display the image showing the degree of expectation shown thereafter. It can be difficult to see depending on your taste and mood of the day.

With reference to FIGS. 309 (a) to 309 (f) and FIGS. 310 (a) to 310 (f), the color of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is white or red. The form is shown, but in addition to these, the golden color with 100% expectation is configured to execute an effect pattern that displays an image of an enemy tank or a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. May be good. In particular, it may be configured to display the image of the enemy tank or the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 at the first time of the pattern displayed twice. In this case, regarding the display of the image of the enemy tank for the second time, the player stops pressing and holding the defense button 3740, so that the shield image is not displayed and the jackpot is confirmed to occur. You can enjoy the "reach" production.

The player may mistake the attack button 3710 for the defense button 3740. In this case, it becomes difficult to visually recognize a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of a moving enemy tank, an image of destruction of an enemy tank, and an image of an explosion of a cannonball. be. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the shield image is displayed on condition that the defense button 3740 is not only pressed but also the defense button 3740 is pressed for a long time. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, the shield image is not displayed immediately, so that the player who wants to see the suggestion effect feels stress. Can be prevented.

Although the embodiment in which the display of the shield image is terminated at the end of the long press on the defense button 3740 is shown, the display of the shield image may be continued for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds) after the end of the long press.

When the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually increases concentrically, and when the player releases the defense button 3740, the shield image gradually decreases concentrically. It may be configured as. For example, the shield image may be configured to gradually increase concentrically over 2 seconds, and the shield image may gradually decrease concentrically over 2 seconds. With such a configuration, even if the defense button 3740 is operated by mistake, by quickly releasing the defense button 3740, a simulated image or an enemy tank image imitating the attack button 3710 can be obtained. Since the visibility of the image is restored, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player who wants to see the suggestive effect feels stress. Further, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image showing the degree of expectation can be changed from the display mode in which the shield image does not hide at all, a mode in which a part is hidden, or a mode in which the shield image is completely hidden. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed.

In addition, although an example in which the display mode of the shield image changes based on the operation by the player is shown, the display mode of the shield image being displayed can be displayed so as to be changeable regardless of the operation by the player. It may be configured. For example, the size of the shield image is automatically increased or decreased, the shape of the shield image is periodically changed, or the transparency of the shield image is changed. You may. Moreover, you may combine these display modes. In addition, by changing the display mode of the shield image in this way, the image showing the degree of expectation (simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or enemy tank image) is not hidden at all by the shield image, and part of it is hidden. It may be configured so that the display mode can be changed from one of the display modes, that is, a mode that hides all, to another display mode.

Instead of or in addition to pressing and holding the defense button 3740, the shield image may be displayed for a predetermined number of seconds when it is detected that the defense button 3740 is repeatedly hit by the player. FIG. 308 (f) is a time chart showing the effect mode modified in this way. In this time chart, the shield image was displayed in the period from timing t10 to timing t16 and the period from timing t18 to timing t24 based on the detection of repeated hits of the defense button 3740 by the player. Is shown. It should be noted that pressing four or more times per second may be a condition for determining that the repeated hits have been performed. After the shield image is displayed, it is not necessary to continue the continuous striking, and the shield image is displayed for a predetermined number of seconds (6 seconds).
In addition, instead of pressing and holding the defense button 3740 or repeatedly hitting it, when the defense button 3740 is pressed, a predetermined lottery may be performed and the shield image may be displayed with a probability of 1/3.

Further, the shield image may be displayed when the mission button 3700 and the defense button 3740 are pressed at the same time. Alternatively, when the operation unit described with reference to FIG. 302 is adopted, the shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is pressed while tilting the right lever 3730 forward.

As described above, by configuring the shield image to be displayed when a specific condition regarding the defense button 3740 is satisfied based on the operation of the defense button 3740, the player mistakenly operates the defense button 3740. Even if this happens, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation such as the shield image being displayed immediately, and the visibility of the suggestion effect is not hindered.

Operation for the defense button 3740 when the result of the variable display in which the tank reach effect for which the operation is valid only for the attack button 3710 is continuously shown to be lost a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or 5 times). It may be configured to enable reception and enable "shield bullet reach" in which a shield image is displayed. In addition, on condition that the result of the fluctuation display when "Shield Bullet Reach" is executed shows a big hit, the operation reception for the defense button 3740 is invalidated, and the operation of only the attack button 3710 is valid for the tank reach effect. Is configured so that the shield image display is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated until the result of the variable display executed is the result showing the loss for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times or 5 times) in succession. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction felt by the player when the special lottery result of the loss is continuous, while invalidating the erroneous operation of the defense button 3740.

The display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 may be set longer than the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. For example, in the present embodiment, the movement time of the enemy tank before the operation valid period is 2 seconds, and the display time of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is 3 seconds, but it is displayed based on the pressing of the defense button 3740. The display time of the shield image should be 6 seconds. With such a configuration, once the display of the shield image is started, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is kept hidden until the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is completed. It is possible to reduce the operational burden on the player.

After operating the attack button 3710, or at the end of the validity period of the attack button 3710, an image of the enemy tank being destroyed and an image of the shell exploding are displayed, but these images are also hidden by the shield image. The display time of the shield image may be determined. For example, in the present embodiment, the display time of the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed and the image in which the shell explodes is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image displayed by pressing the defense button 3740 is set to 6 seconds. It is good to do it. With such a configuration, the image of the enemy tank being destroyed and the image of the shell exploding can be hidden by the shield image.

In the present embodiment, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is set to a maximum of 3 seconds, and the display time of the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed and the image in which the bullet explodes is set to 3 seconds, but the display time of the shield image is these. It may be longer than the total time (for example, 10 seconds). With such a configuration, by displaying a shield image while the enemy tank is moving, both a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image in which the enemy tank is destroyed, and an image in which the shell explodes are shielded. It can be hidden by an image.

The display of the shield image displayed for a predetermined time may be configured so that the player can stop the display. For example, the display of the shield image may be terminated by pressing the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740 while the shield image is being displayed. With such a configuration, by visually recognizing a part of the effect that suggests the degree of expectation, the effect is given to the player who notices that the effect that actually shows that the degree of expectation is high is being executed. Can promptly provide a visible situation. Alternatively, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped when the suggestion effect showing the expected degree of a predetermined value or higher is started. For example, when an image of a golden enemy tank having an expectation of 100% or a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the display of the shield image may be automatically stopped.

On the other hand, when the display of the shield image is stopped by satisfying a simple condition such as pressing a button, the player erroneously operates the button so that the effect mode can be easily visually recognized. It will be in a state. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied based on the pressing of the mission button 3700 or the defense button 3740, it is advisable to stop displaying the shield image. Specifically, the same conditions as those for starting the display of the shield image as described above may be adopted as the conditions for stopping the display of the shield image.

In the state where the shield image is being displayed, the operation method for stopping the display of the shield image may be displayed. For example, in the line window of "Colonel Dyna", the line "This sissy! Press the mission button to release the shield!" Is displayed, or "This sissy! Press the defense button 3740 to release the shield." It is good to display a line such as "!". With such a configuration, even if the player mistakenly displays the shield image, the display of the shield image can be quickly terminated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 308 (e), the shield image can be displayed multiple times by allowing the operation of the defense button 3740 to be received multiple times during the valid period. .. Further, as long as the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed, the display time of the shield image is extended and the shield image is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed, and the image in which the shell explodes.

It may be configured to be able to execute a display effect in which the shield image cannot be displayed or the display of the shield image being displayed ends. For example, when an image suggesting a high degree of expectation (for example, a red or gold image) is displayed, the display of the shield image is terminated, and the image suggesting a high degree of expectation is displayed for a predetermined period or high. The shield image may not be displayed by the player until the variable display of the decorative pattern suggesting the degree of expectation is completed. Alternatively, while the shield image is being displayed, a starting prize is generated for the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and the result of the first special lottery or the pre-reading result of the second special lottery result is drawn by accepting the game ball. , At the timing when it is decided to produce a high expectation, the display of the shield image is finished, and the "shield bullet reach" production is continued until the variable display of the decorative pattern targeted for pre-reading is finished. At the same time, the shield image may not be displayed by the player. Further, as a display effect in this case, an image of an enemy tank larger than the shield image may be displayed.
In this way, the teacher can be improved by making the shield image invisible to the player based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. Further, by displaying a predetermined image larger than the shield image, it is possible to increase the expectation that a state advantageous to the player will occur.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is started. You may want to start. In this case, it is preferable to display the aspect shown in FIG. 309 (a) at the timing t0.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the defense button 3740 is set to end before the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, but the defense button is up to the end timing (timing t35) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The operation reception of 3740 may be continued. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the stop mode of the decorative symbol showing the special lottery result according to the player's intention by the shield image.

By combining these embodiments, the shield image may be configured to be displayable from the start of variation of the decorative symbol (timing t0) to the end of variation display (timing t35).

An embodiment in which a shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds, etc.) is shown on condition that the defense button 3740 is repeatedly hit and a 1/3 lottery is performed when the defense button 3740 is operated. It may be configured so that it can be set by a person. For example, by tilting the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 during the demo period, the display time of the shield image is set to, for example, 5 to 60 seconds. It may be configured to be configurable between. With such a configuration, the shield image can be displayed in a manner suitable for the mood of the player.

The period during which the shield image can be displayed may be set by the player by the number of variations of the decorative symbol. For example, when the number of fluctuations of the decorative symbol is set to 20 times, the defense button 3740 is pressed in the tank reach effect generated during the period from the time when the player sets the number of fluctuations of the decorative symbol until the number of rotations of the decorative symbol rotates 20 times. By operating it, the shield image can be displayed. On the other hand, if the player does not make the setting, the shield image is not displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated during the tank reach effect.

Even if the condition for displaying the shield image again is satisfied during the display of the shield image, the new shield image is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive production from being executed. On the other hand, if the condition for displaying the shield image is satisfied again while the shield image is being displayed, the display time of the shield image being displayed is postponed starting from the timing when the condition for displaying the shield image is satisfied. It may be configured to be. With such a configuration, it is possible to continue to hide the suggestive effect by the shield image while suppressing the excessive effect.

On the other hand, if the condition for displaying the shield image again is satisfied during the display of the shield image, a new shield image may be displayed immediately. In this case, the display of the shield image being displayed may be interrupted and a new shield image may be displayed, or a new shield image may be displayed in addition to the shield image being displayed. With such a configuration, the time during which the shield image is not displayed can be shortened, and the time during which the shield image is displayed can be easily extended.

Further, the effect sound corresponding to the type of the image of the enemy tank, the type of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the type of the explosion image of the cannonball may be output. In this case, the output sound also indicates the degree of expectation to the player.
On the other hand, for a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation, such an output of a staging sound is not preferable. Therefore, when displaying the shield image, the output of the special sound may be started at the timing when the shield image is displayed. Then, the output of the special sound should be continued until the display of the shield image is completed.
Further, when outputting the special sound, the volume of the effect sound may be suppressed. Suppression of the volume of the staging sound should be continued until the display of the shield image is completed. Further, the volume of the special sound may be louder than the volume of the staging sound. Alternatively, both of these may be adopted.
With such a configuration, the staging sound becomes difficult to hear due to the volume decrease, and the staging sound becomes difficult to hear due to the special sound. Therefore, even if the staging sound suggests the expectation level, the expected degree is shown. Can be obscured.
When an enemy tank appears, it may be configured to output a predetermined effect sound that does not indicate the degree of expectation. In this case, the player who does not want to know the degree of expectation can display the shield image and start the output of the special sound by promptly operating the defense button 3740 at the timing when he / she hears the predetermined production sound. can.

The suggestion effect may be executed even in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, for example, a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time of the decorative symbol is short, or a probability fluctuation state in which the probability that the result of the special lottery is a big hit is increased. In this case, the shield image may not be displayed even if the defense button 3740 is operated. With such a configuration, in a game state where a big hit is more likely to occur than usual, the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated, and an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710, or an enemy tank is displayed. It is possible to prevent the destroyed image from becoming difficult to see, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks a highly expected effect.

On the other hand, when the suggestion effect can be executed in a game state advantageous to the player such as a time saving state or a probability fluctuation state, the shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. .. With such a configuration, the suggestive effect can be hidden even in a gaming state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than usual.
Alternatively, in a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the size of the shield image is made smaller or the display time of the shield image is shortened as compared with the normal state, so that the suggestion effect hidden by the shield image is produced. The visibility may be slightly enhanced.

Further, the suggestion effect may be executed during the big hit game state. In the suggestion effect in this case, the expectation that a big hit will occur again after the big hit game state is notified by performing a hold look-ahead, or a time saving state or a probability fluctuation state which is a state more advantageous than the normal state after the big hit is finished. It is good to inform the degree of expectation of whether or not to shift to. For example, when the 10-round jackpot is being executed, it is advisable to perform such a suggestion effect from the 3rd round to the 5th round. With such a configuration, the defense button 3740 is mistakenly operated at the timing when the game state that occurs after the big hit can be known, and the image of the enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the enemy tank are destroyed. It is possible to prevent the resulting image from becoming difficult to see.

On the other hand, when the suggestion effect can be executed during the big hit, the shield image may be displayed in response to the operation of the defense button 3740. With such a configuration, the suggestive effect can be hidden even during a big hit. A player who does not want to know the game state after the big hit can make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation about the game state after the big hit.

An effect similar to the "shield bullet reach" effect in which the tank moves on the road may be performed over a plurality of changes in the decorative symbol as a look-ahead effect based on the hold look-ahead in the normal state.
In this case, it is preferable to configure the display effect in which the tank moves on the road continuously from the start of the change of the decorative symbol to the stop of the change. In addition, during the change of the decorative pattern, the expectation of the jackpot for the hold that was the target of the look-ahead is suggested by the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the explosion image of the cannonball, etc. as described above. Or, it is preferable to display shield images in response to the operation of the defense button 3740 so that these images are difficult to see. Then, the display of the shield image may be configured to be displayed over a plurality of variable displays of the decorative pattern.
The reserved image that is the target of pre-reading may be configured to be hidden by the shield image.
In this way, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the production by performing a suggestion effect in which the tank moves on the road, straddling the fluctuation of a plurality of decorative patterns.

If the tank moves to the big hit state by the "shield bullet reach" effect that moves on the road, if a big hit occurs, the display effect that the tank moves will continue until during the big hit state or after the big hit. You may. In addition, after the big hit game state occurs, the expectation that the big hit will occur again after the big hit game state ends can be notified by performing a hold look-ahead, or the time saving state or probability that the state is more advantageous than the normal state after the big hit game state ends. It is advisable to notify the degree of expectation of whether or not to shift to a fluctuating state by suggesting that the tank moves on the road. Further, if the time saving state or the probability fluctuation state is reached after the big hit, the suggestion effect that the tank moves on the road may be continued until the time saving state or the probability change state is completed. Also in this case, it is preferable to configure the shield image displayed corresponding to the operation of the defense button 3740 so that the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the explosion image of the cannonball, etc. are difficult to see. ..
Further, it is preferable that the display of the shield image is configured to be displayed across the variable display state of the decorative symbol, the stop display state of the decorative symbol, the jackpot game state, and the variable state of the decorative symbol after the jackpot game state.
Even with such a configuration, it is possible to create a sense of unity in the production.

Although the shield image has shown an example in which a part of the image of the enemy tank is invisible, the shield image may be configured so that all the images of the enemy tank are invisible.
FIG. 311 (a) shows a modified example of the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 310 (e). In the production example shown in FIG. 311 (a), all the images of the enemy tank and a part of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are hidden by the shield image.

An example is shown in which a part of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is invisible due to the shield image, but the shield image is configured so that all the simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 are invisible. May be good.
FIG. 311 (b) shows a modified example of the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 310 (e). In the production example shown in FIG. 311 (b), a part of the image of the enemy tank and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are all hidden by the shield image.

The shield image shows an example in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and a part of the explosion mode of the shell are invisible, but the shield image shows the image of the destroyed enemy tank and all the explosion modes of the shell. It may be configured to be impossible.
FIG. 311 (c) shows a modified example of the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 310 (d). In the production example shown in FIG. 311 (c), the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the explosion mode of the shell are all hidden by the shield image.

The shield image is opaque, the image of the enemy tank with a lower display priority than the shield image, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, the explosion mode of the bullet is invisible by the shield image However, the shielded image may be translucent, and these images having a low display priority may be configured to be visible through the shielded image.

In this way, the simulated image imitating the first operation unit and the entire corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit are displayed in a hidden manner by the image displayed based on the operation for the second operation unit. These images can hide the suggested expectations.
Further, a simulated image imitating the first operation unit and a part of the corresponding display corresponding to the operation of the operation unit may be displayed in a hidden manner by an image displayed based on the operation for the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the image while recognizing that the image indicating the degree of expectation is displayed by these images.
In addition, only a part of these images is configured to suggest the degree of expectation, and the part suggesting the degree of expectation can be partially hidden or all of them can be hidden by the shield image. May be good.

An example showing the degree of expectation is shown by the color of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, but the shape and size of the simulated image itself may be different in place of or in addition to the color of the simulated image. Then, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the shape of the simulated image itself or the size of the image. Here, it is preferable to configure the area so that the area protruding from the shield image becomes larger when the degree of expectation is high. Further, the same configuration may be adopted for the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion mode of the shell. With such a configuration, when the degree of expectation is high, the image showing the degree of expectation can be less likely to be hidden by the shield image.

In the displayed state where the shield image is displayed, a larger shield image is displayed by performing a more difficult operation (for example, further pressing and holding the defense button 3740 or repeatedly hitting it). May be good. In addition, this large shield image is configured so that the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank, the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the explosion mode of the shell are more hidden than the normal shield image. You may.
With such a configuration, the player can be involved in the ratio of hiding the image suggesting the degree of expectation, so that the interest can be further improved.

FIGS. 312 (a) to 312 (d) show a modified example of the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 309 (c). FIG. 312A shows an example of an effect in which a small-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. FIG. 312B shows an example of an effect in which a small-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710. FIG. 312 (c) shows an example of an effect in which a large-sized simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. FIG. 312 (d) shows an example of an effect in which a large-sized simulated image and a shield image are displayed as simulated images imitating the attack button 3710.
The expectation of a big hit is higher when a large size simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 than when a small size simulated image is displayed as a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. It is configured to be high.
With such a configuration, when a simulated image with a high degree of expectation is displayed, the area of the simulated image that is not hidden by the shield image becomes large, so that the player has a high degree of expectation. Can be recognized by.
In addition to the simulated image, the image of the enemy tank and the image of the destroyed enemy tank may be different in shape and size to suggest the degree of expectation.

An example of suggesting expectations with a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an explosive shell exploding is shown. It may be applied to an embodiment in an image. Alternatively, an embodiment applied to a plurality of images may be applied to an embodiment in another plurality of images.

An example of suggesting the degree of expectation by a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, an image of an enemy tank, an image of a destroyed enemy tank, and an image of an explosion of a cannonball is shown, but the degree of expectation depends on the display mode of a part of these images. It may be configured as suggested. In this case, it is preferable to configure the shield image so that at least a part thereof is hidden. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the progress of the production, and at the same time, it is possible to make the degree of expectation unrecognizable or difficult to recognize.

As described above, according to the "shield bullet reach" in the present embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize a predetermined image showing the degree of expectation related to the first operation unit by the image displayed by the operation of the second operation unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a player who does not want to know the degree of expectation with the option of hiding the degree of expectation, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-0876338). In addition, the valid period during which operations to the operation unit can be accepted is limited to a part of the period during which the decorative design is changing. Therefore, depending on the player, even if the desire to operate the operation unit is increased, the player may feel frustrated that the operation unit cannot be operated. In addition, when the operation is performed during the valid period, the display effect corresponding to the operation is always performed, so that the operation to the operation unit may feel a rut. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, in consideration of the existence of a player who thinks in this way, an operating means that can be operated for a long period of time while the decorative design is fluctuating is provided, and the operation to the operation unit is supported. Therefore, the display change is not always given, and the special display change is given on condition that a specific condition is satisfied.

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 308 and the like will be described with reference to the time charts shown in FIGS. 313 to 316, display examples shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, and the like. In the "special machine gun reach" effect in the present embodiment, the functions and displays related to the attack button 3710 are displayed in the same manner as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 308.
On the other hand, in the "special machine gun reach" effect, an effect pattern is executed in which the operation reception for the mission button 3700 is effective instead of the defense button 3740. The decorative symbol of the mission button 3700 is in the reach state, and the operation reception becomes effective at the timing (timing t5) when the reach effect of the movement of the own tank is started. The operation reception ends at timing t27, which is the timing after the enemy tank is displayed twice.

The period during which the operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid (timing t5 to timing t27) is longer than the period during which the operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid (timing t11 to timing t14), and the operation reception for the mission button 3700 is valid. The period during which the operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid is included. Further, as described above, the attack button 3710 is always given a display change according to the operation reception during the operation valid period. On the other hand, even if the mission button 3700 is operated, the display corresponding to the operation is not always performed, and the display change displayed in the display area with a predetermined predetermined probability (for example, 1/3 probability). Is granted. For example, every time the mission button 3700 is operated, a winning lottery is performed with a probability of 1/3, and if a winning result is obtained, a bullet fired from a special machine gun is an enemy tank in the display area. The image in which the explosion occurred is displayed for a predetermined time.

Further, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is continuously displayed during the period (timing t5 to timing t27) when the operation reception of the mission button 3700 is valid, indicating that the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. Is done.

The time chart of FIG. 313 shows an example of the effect when neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated.
In the time chart shown in FIG. 313, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing t0. From the timing t0 to the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303 (b), the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. At timing t5, as shown in FIG. 303 (c), a symbol having the same decorative symbol on the left and the decorative symbol on the right (in the present embodiment, a symbol consisting of the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and a reach state occurs. Then, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area. At the same time, an image of the own tank traveling on the road is displayed in the display area. Further, in the period from timing t5 to timing t27, the operation reception of the mission button 3700 becomes effective.

FIG. 317 (a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at the timing t5. Each decorative symbol ("3", "↓", "3") in the reach state is moved to the upper left of the display area, the image of the own tank is moved to the center of the lower part of the display area, and the own tank is moved to the center of the left and right direction of the display area. The image of the road, the horizontal line and the sky image at the top of the display area, the dialogue image of the character "Captain Dyna" and the window image surrounding the dialogue image at the bottom right of the display area are at the bottom left of the display area. A state in which the dialogue image of the character "Might Gunso" and the window image surrounding the dialogue image display a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 in the upper left of the window image displaying the dialogue image of "Captain Dyna". Is shown.

As shown in the line of "Colonel Dyna" in Fig. 317 (a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun of the own tank and the movement is displayed, but the details will be described later. do.

At timing t9, the display of the white image of the enemy tank is started in the upper right of the display area, and the display of moving to the left is performed. FIG. 309 (b) shows a state in which the image of the enemy tank is moving to the left toward the road at timing t10.

At timing t11, the image of the white enemy tank moving from right to left in the display area is located on the road. At the same time, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the right side of the line of "Sergeant Might". The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 is continued for 3 seconds from the timing t11 to the timing t14.

FIG. 317 (b) shows a state in which a white simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at the timing t11. Further, FIG. 317 (c) shows a state in which a white simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and an image of a white enemy tank are displayed on the road in the display area at the timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank is displayed when it reaches the left end of the road. In addition, the operation validity period for the attack button 3710 ends. FIG. 317 (d) shows the display state at the timing t14.

From timing t14 to timing t16, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left in the display area, and at timing t16, the image of the enemy tank moves out of the screen and is not displayed.

Until the timing t27, the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are continued. At the timing t27, the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 and the display of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 end.

After that, from timing t32 to timing t34, the display mode is as shown in FIG. 303 (f), and at timing t34, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If the special lottery result is lost, the display state shown in FIG. 303 (g) is displayed from timing t34 to timing t35, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, from timing t34 to timing t35, FIG. 303 (h). It becomes the display state shown in.

With reference to the time chart of FIG. 313, an example of the effect when the player does not operate the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is shown.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 314, an example of the effect when the player operates the attack button 3710 will be shown.

The time chart of FIG. 314 shows an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at the timing t12. In this case, the display that the shell moves is displayed from the timing t12 to the timing t13. FIG. 317 (e) shows a display example in which the shell is moving. Further, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends at the timing t12, which is the timing when the operation for the attack button 3710 is performed.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, the image of the exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the shell exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 317 (f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of a shell exploding are displayed.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 315, an example of the effect when the player operates the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart of FIG. 315 shows an example of an effect when the mission button 3700 is operated at the timing t12. FIG. 315 (a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated, a bullet is fired from a special machine gun, and an image of the bullet exploding is displayed. Further, FIG. 315 (b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the mission button 3700 is operated and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun, but the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 315 (a), it is displayed that the bullet fired from the special machine gun moves from the timing t12 to the timing t13. FIG. 318 (a) shows a display example in which the bullet is moving. At the timing t14, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 315 (a) is a production example in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed as a winning result (selected with a probability of 1/3) in a lottery performed based on an operation for the mission button 3700. Is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, the image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 318 (b) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of a bullet exploding are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 315 (b), the lottery performed based on the operation for the mission button 3700 results in a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3), and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed. This is an example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank does not change to the image of the destroyed enemy tank, and the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. FIG. 318 (c) is a display example in a state where the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 316, an example of the effect when the player operates both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 will be shown.

The time chart of FIG. 316 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated at the same time at the timing t12. FIG. 316A is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an image in which a bullet explodes is displayed by operating the mission button 3700. Further, FIG. 316 (b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the image of the bullet exploding was not displayed even though the mission button 3700 was operated.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 316 (a), the display that the bullet fired from the turret moves and the display that the bullet fired from the special machine gun moves are displayed from the timing t12 to the timing t13. FIG. 318 (d) shows an example of a display in which a shell and a bullet are moving. Further, at the timing t12, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 316 (a) is a production example in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed as a winning result (selected with a probability of 1/3) in a lottery performed based on an operation for the mission button 3700. Is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of a shell exploding and an image of a bullet exploding are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the shell exploding, and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 318 (e) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of a bullet exploding, and an image of a shell exploding are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 316 (b), an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed due to a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3) in a lottery performed based on an operation on the mission button 3700. This is an example of production. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, the image of the exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the shell exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). FIG. 318 (f) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of a shell exploding are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 318 (e), the size of the image of the bullet exploding displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the size of the image of the bullet exploding displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Is also big. Further, the image of the exploding shell displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Further, the image of the bullet exploding displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to have a higher display priority than the image of the bullet exploding displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the display change, which is not always given, conspicuous based on the operation of the mission button 3700. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to overlook the display change given in this way.

As for the operation reception of the attack button 3710, the image of the enemy tank destroyed corresponding to the operation reception by the player's operation is displayed. Therefore, as a player, during the production of moving the tank, the attack button 3710 is operated to display the explosion image, and the image of the enemy tank is displayed in a destroyed display mode, and then the mission button 3700 is operated. , Further explosion images can be added to images of destroyed enemy tanks. On the other hand, as a player, it is possible to change the image of the enemy tank to the image of the destroyed enemy tank by operating only the mission button 3700 without operating the attack button 3710.

Display mode (color, size, shape, etc.) of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the shell exploding, and the image of the bullet exploding. At least one of them may be configured to suggest a jackpot expectation. Specifically, it is preferable to adopt the same method (color, size, shape, etc. of each image) as in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 308 and the like. It should be noted that these images do not have to indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit.

According to such a configuration, the image of the enemy tank is converted into the image of the destroyed enemy tank by operating the mission button 3700 and satisfying a specific condition (a win in the 1/3 lottery). Can be changed. It is also possible to add an image of a bullet exploding to an image of a destroyed enemy tank. Then, by giving such a display change, the player feels that the operation on the mission button 3700 has been rewarded, and feels great joy in making the display change appear with difficulty. You can improve your interest.

The display priority of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is higher than that of the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. With such a configuration, in addition to the operation of the mission button 3700, the visibility of the image displayed only when a specific condition (winning in the 1/3 lottery) is ensured, and the mission button The visibility of the image displayed by the operation of the 3700 is hindered, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels dissatisfied.

As the mode of the display change performed in the display area in response to the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700, a plurality of modes having different appearance ratios may be displayed. For example, as the destruction image of an enemy tank, there are three destruction images with different degrees of destruction, the probability that a destruction image with a high degree of destruction is displayed is 10%, and the probability that a destruction image with a medium degree of destruction is displayed is displayed. A destruction image to be displayed may be selected so that the probability that a destruction image having a small degree of destruction is displayed at 30% is 60%, and the destruction image may be displayed. Further, a destruction image of an enemy tank having an extremely large degree of destruction, which is displayed with an extremely low probability (1%) only when the mission button 3700 is operated, may be provided. According to this, when the display change grant is made to appear with difficulty, a more rare display change grant is shown to the player. A similar display may be made on the explosion image in place of or in addition to the destruction image.

If the player does not operate the attack button 3710, a shell is automatically fired from the turret at the end of the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 (timing t14), and the player does not have to operate it automatically. It may be configured to display a destroyed image of an enemy tank. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate on the operation of the mission button 3700.

In the present embodiment, when the enemy tank is not displayed, the mission button 3700 is operated to shoot a bullet from the special machine gun of the own tank, and the shot bullet hits the road and explodes. It is possible. For example, at timing t5, by operating the mission button 3700, it is displayed that the bullets fired from timing t5 to timing t6 move. Further, in the case of winning the 1/3 lottery, an image is displayed in such a manner that the fired bullet hits the ground and explodes from the timing t6 to the timing t9 for 3 seconds.
The operation timing that can be an image in which a moving enemy tank is destroyed by a bullet fired based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be from timing t9 to timing t16, which is the movement period of the enemy tank. The operation valid period of the attack button 3710 may be from timing t11 to timing t14.

On the other hand, before the attack button 3710 is operated, the player operates the mission button 3700 to win a 1/3 lottery, and the bullet fired from the special machine gun of the own tank hits the enemy tank and explodes. In that case, even if the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period of the attack button 3710, the image of the shell moving or the image of the shell exploding corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed. It may be configured not to do so. According to such a configuration, the player can make it feel as if he / she has defeated an enemy tank by his / her own power, and the player can display an image in which a bullet explodes, which is a hard-to-appearing effect. Can increase the satisfaction of. Further, since the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed, the mission button 3700 can be operated to ensure the visibility of the display of the image of the bullet exploding, which is an effect that has been painstakingly appeared.
In addition, when the mission button 3700 is operated in the situation where the image of the bullet exploding corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 and the image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed, the operation of the mission button 3700 is supported. Then, add an image of the bullet exploding and display it. In this case, it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction as if the enemy tank could be destroyed more.

Similar to the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 308 and the like, the degree of expectation may be suggested by the color of the enemy tank and the mode of destruction of the enemy tank. In this case, it is preferable that at least a part of the color of the enemy tank and the destruction mode of the enemy tank can be visually recognized by the image of the bullet exploding displayed by the operation of the mission button 3700. With such a configuration, the visibility of the indicated degree of expectation can be ensured.
If the suggestion effect has a low expectation, the bullet explodes by operating the mission button 3700 in a predetermined period after the suggestion effect ends (for example, the period from timing t16 to timing t27). Since the created image can be displayed once or a plurality of times, it is possible to recover the interest in the game that has been lowered due to the execution of the effect with low expectation.

Although the embodiment in which the mission button 3700 is operated is shown, the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 can be operated in addition to the mission button 3700, and the direction of the special machine gun is changed to the left and right by the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720. You may be able to do it. If the special machine gun is facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when operating the mission button 3700 is set to 1/2, which is a probability that it is easier to win than 1/3, or the special machine gun When not facing the enemy tank, the probability of winning the lottery when operating the mission button 3700 may be 1/10, which is less than 1/3. Further, when the operation mode of the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720 is very appropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be 100%. On the contrary, when the operation mode of the right lever 3730 or the left lever 3720 is very inappropriate, the probability of winning the lottery may be set to 0%.
In this case, the player operates the mission button 3700 while operating the right lever 3730 and the left lever 3720, aiming to display the enemy tank in the destruction mode, so that the player feels more immersive in the game. It will be possible to obtain. Also, when an image that destroys an enemy tank is displayed, you will feel a great sense of accomplishment.

In the amusement store, the probability of winning the lottery may be changed when the mission button 3700 is operated. Alternatively, the probability of winning the lottery when the mission button 3700 is operated by using the real-time clock function may be configured to be changed weekly. With such a configuration, it is possible to set the appearance ratio of the effect according to the tendency of the player who visits the store. For example, the probability of winning the lottery may be cyclically switched to 0%, 30%, 100%, 50%, 0%, and so on every day.

The mission button 3700 may be configured to have a situation in which an operation instruction is displayed and a situation in which the operation instruction is not displayed during the period in which the operation reception is valid. For example, an effect pattern that displays a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 and an effect pattern that does not display a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be configured to be executable.

Such selection of the effect pattern may be configured so that the clerk of the game store can select which effect pattern to execute, or which effect pattern is to be executed by using the real-time clock function. However, it may be configured to be changed monthly. For example, for one month after the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, only the effect pattern in which the operation instruction is not displayed can be executed, and after one month from the introduction of the pachinko machine 1, the operation instruction is not displayed. It is preferable to configure both of the effect patterns for displaying operation instructions to be executable. Alternatively, it is preferable to select either an effect pattern in which the operation instruction is not displayed or an effect pattern in which the operation instruction is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a half probability) when the "special machine gun reach" is executed.

With such a configuration, in the case of an effect pattern in which the operation instruction is not displayed, the display content in the display area can be simplified. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a player who is not accustomed to the game is confused by being shown a plurality of operation instructions. On the other hand, a player who is accustomed to the game operates the mission button 3700 even in a situation where the operation instruction display is not displayed, fires a bullet from the special machine gun of the tank, and the shot bullet hits and explodes. It is possible to display the mode to be used.

An example is shown in which a 1/3 lottery is performed according to the operation of the mission button 3700. In this case, the player who expects to give a display change will repeatedly hit the mission button 3700. On the other hand, there is also a problem that the player gets bored if the operation of the mission button 3700 is merely repeated hits. Therefore, another operation mode, for example, a long press of the mission button 3700 may be configured to perform a 1/3 lottery. In this case, for example, the lottery may be performed once every time the mission button 3700 is continuously pressed for 1 second.

Further, it is advisable to instruct the player which operation is required at the timing when the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes possible. For example, in the case of an effect pattern in which the mission button 3700 is required to be repeatedly hit, "Colonel Dyna" is displayed as "Continuously hit the mission button 3700!" In that case, it is advisable to display "Press and hold the mission button 3700!" As the line of "Colonel Dyna".

With such a configuration, the player feels nervous about which effect pattern is executed and which operation instruction is presented, instead of operating the mission button 3700 indiscriminately. In addition, since the number of times the lottery can be received is smaller when the long press is performed than when the continuous hit is performed (generally, the continuous hit can be performed several times per second), in the production pattern where the long press is required. , If the mode display in which the enemy tank explodes is realized, the player will have a greater sense of accomplishment. By providing a plurality of staging patterns having different difficulty levels of image display in this way, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.
The appearance ratio of the effect pattern requiring repeated hits and the effect pattern requiring long press may be configured to be selectable by the clerk of the amusement store, or may be set by using the real-time clock function. It may be configured.

Further, when the player executes an operation mode different from the mode of the operation instruction for the mission button 3700, an effect pattern in which a bullet is fired from the special machine gun may be executed.

For example, in the production pattern that displays "Press the mission button 3700 repeatedly!", If the mission button 3700 is repeatedly hit according to the operation instruction, the display to fire the special machine gun is not displayed, and the operation instruction is. If you press and hold a different operation, a lottery will be held with a probability of 1/2 every time the mission button 3700 is pressed for 1 second, and if you win the lottery, a display to fire a special machine gun will be displayed. It should be configured to be done.

On the contrary, in the production pattern that displays "Press and hold the mission button 3700", if the mission button 3700 is pressed and held according to the operation instruction, the display to fire the special machine gun is not displayed and the operation instruction is displayed. Is a different operation. If you hit repeatedly, a lottery will be held with a probability of 1/2 each time the mission button 3700 is pressed, and if you win the lottery, a special machine gun will be fired. Should be configured so that

It may be configured to display an image in which a bullet in a different mode (preferably in a different color or shape) explodes between a long press and a continuous hit.

Furthermore, as a line of "Colonel Dyna", a production pattern that does not instruct the operation mode of the mission button 3700 that displays the line "What should I do with the mission button to shoot a special machine gun ..." is executed. It may be configured as possible. Internally, as the effect pattern, it is preferable to execute either an effect pattern in which the mission button 3700 is required to be pressed and held, or an effect pattern in which the mission button 3700 is required to be repeatedly pressed. Furthermore, if the operation mode by the player is different from the required operation mode, the line "Remember! To shoot the special machine gun, hit the mission button repeatedly!" As the line of "Colonel Dyna". Or, "I remember! To shoot a special machine gun, press and hold the mission button!" May be displayed to encourage the player to operate properly. As described above, when the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is an appropriate operation mode, or the operation performed by the player by estimating the operation mode is not appropriate, the operation mode is appropriate. When the player performs an appropriate operation mode after the instruction is displayed, the image of the bullet exploding in a special mode different from the case where the instruction display of the operation mode is performed in advance is configured to be displayed. You may. In addition, different special sound effects may be output corresponding to the exploding image.

With such a configuration, it is possible for a player who feels as if he / she is always instructed by the gaming machine to satisfy his / her rebellion against the gaming machine. Alternatively, it is possible to give surprise and satisfaction to the player who accidentally or intentionally performs an operation different from the instruction. In addition, since the game is played while guessing the operation mode for the operation unit, it is possible to increase the positiveness of participating in the game. Further, the display mode may be such that the operation instruction is not always clearly displayed for the second operation unit, and in this case, the satisfaction with the operation performed by oneself is further improved.

Although a specific condition is satisfied by a lottery by pressing and holding the mission button 3700 or repeatedly hitting it, a display to fire a special machine gun is shown, but the specific condition is achieved by other methods. It may be configured as follows. For example, in an effect pattern in which the mission button 3700 is required to be pressed and held for a long time, the display that a bullet is fired from the special machine gun may be displayed when the mission button 3700 is continuously pressed for 10 seconds. Alternatively, in an effect pattern in which the mission button 3700 is required to be repeatedly hit, a bullet is fired from the special machine gun when the mission button 3700 can be repeatedly hit 16 times or more per second. May be good.

The attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 have the same operation mode in the sense that they are pressed. Therefore, instead of the mission button 3700, the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 is rotated once clockwise or counterclockwise, so that the lottery is performed and a bullet is fired from the special machine gun with a probability of 1/3. It may be configured so that the display is performed. Alternatively, by performing an operation of rotating the left lever 3720 or the right lever 3730 multiple times (for example, three rotations) clockwise or counterclockwise, it may be configured to display that a bullet is fired from the special machine gun. ..

The operation for the mission button 3700 may be configured to be able to be accepted at all times while the decorative pattern is changing. With such a configuration, the mission button 3700 can be operated by the player who feels irresistible resentment because the variable display result is lost even though the variable display result has a high expectation reach. By doing so, such resentment can be alleviated. For example, while displaying a decorative symbol that has been lost and stopped, it is possible to relieve the anxiety by attacking the decorative symbol.
Further, it is preferable to configure so that the given display change is not terminated even if the next variable display of the lost variable display is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player feels further dissatisfaction by forcibly interrupting the display of the image in which the displayed bullet explodes for relief. When it is determined that the display of the image in which the bullet explodes straddles the fluctuation of the decorative symbol in this way, the "special machine gun reach" is executed again at the timing t0 when the fluctuation of the next decorative symbol starts. It may be configured as follows. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an unnatural state in the production.

It should be noted that the operation of the mission button 3700 may also determine whether or not the bullet is fired by lottery. For example, the bullet may be fired with a probability of 1/2, and the bullet may not be fired with a probability of 1/2.

According to the present embodiment, when the mission button 3700 is operated and a specific condition is satisfied, the display content of the display area is changed, so that the player has a hard time. You will be satisfied with the fact that the display has been made. Further, the display result by the operation to the attack button 3710 is unwilling for the player, and even if the player feels dissatisfied with the display result, the display based on the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed. This alleviates the dissatisfaction felt by the player. In particular, since the operation to the mission button 3700 is allowed a plurality of times, the display corresponding to the operation will be performed eventually, which is effective in alleviating the dissatisfaction felt by the player.

Conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a plurality of operation units has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-0876338). In addition, when the operation on the operation unit becomes effective, an operation reception is possible, a sound effect indicating that the operation reception is possible is output, and the operation is accepted at the timing when the operation is performed. A gaming machine that outputs a sound effect indicating that has been known. However, there was room for further improvement as a production. Below, even if the operation reception for the operation unit is enabled or the operation for the operation unit is performed, no sound effect is output, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the operation support reception display is displayed. , An embodiment in which a special sound is output is shown.

Hereinafter, an embodiment relating to the "silent machine gun reach", which is a modification of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 and the like, will be described with reference to FIG. 319 and the like. Except for the output of sound effects such as voice, almost the same display as that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 and the like is performed in the display area. It should be noted that various modifications of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 and the like can be applied to the present embodiment. The "silent machine gun" in the present embodiment is an improvement on the "special machine gun" in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 313 and the like, and is set so that the firing sound at the time of firing a bullet is extremely small.

The time chart of FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a situation in which neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is operated. As shown in FIG. 319, in the present embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 over a predetermined period (timing t9 to timing t11) immediately before the timing when the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 is enabled. The sound effect "Preparing to fire the cannon", which is the precursor sound to be shown, is output. Further, at the timing t11 when the operation reception of the attack button 3710 is enabled, the output of the voice "OK" which is an effective sound indicating that the operation reception is valid is started. The voice output of "OK" is performed from timing t11 to timing t12. The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 ends at the timing t14. At the timing t14, when the operation acceptance period of the attack button 3710 ends, a voice output of "Cannon preparation stop", which is an end sound indicating that the operation acceptance period of the attack button 3710 has ended from the timing t14 to the timing t16, is output. Will be.
On the other hand, for the mission button 3700, the operation valid period starts at the timing t5 and the operation valid period ends at the timing t27, but the output of the sound effect according to the start of the operation valid period or the end of the operation valid period is Not done.

FIG. 323 (a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at the timing t5.
As shown in the line of "Colonel Dyna" in Fig. 323 (a), by operating the mission button 3700, a bullet is fired from the silent machine gun of the tank and the movement is displayed. It will be described later.

FIGS. 323 and 324 show an example of display in the display area, and the type of sound to be output (or output) when the display state is reached is described in the upper right part of the figure. ing. For example, the character string "\ OK /" is described in the upper right of the display example shown in FIG. 323 (c), but this is "OK" when the display example shown in FIG. 323 (c) is displayed. Indicates that the sound is output (or is being output).

At timing t9, the image of the white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right of the display area. Further, from the timing t9 to the timing t11, the voice "preparation for firing the cannon" is output. FIG. 323 (b) shows a state in which an image of a white enemy tank is displayed in the upper right of the display area at timing t9.

At timing t11, the image of the enemy tank is displayed on the road. At the same time, the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 is started. Further, the voice "OK" is output from the timing t11 to the timing t12. FIG. 323 (c) shows a state in which an image of an enemy tank is displayed on the road at timing t11.

FIG. 323 (c) shows the display state at the timing t12.

At timing t14, the image of the enemy tank is displayed when it reaches the left end of the road. In addition, the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 ends. Further, from the timing t14 to the timing t16, the voice "Stop preparing the cannon" is output. FIG. 323 (d) shows the display state at the timing t14.

The time chart of FIG. 320 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in which the attack button 3710 is operated and the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period. As shown in FIG. 320, when the attack button 3710 is operated at a predetermined timing (timing t12 in this production example) during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710, the sound of firing a cannonball from the cannon is used. After a certain "Zudorn" sound effect is output for a predetermined time (timing t12 to timing t13), the output of a "Dokhan" sound effect, which is the sound of a shell hitting a tank and exploding, is output for a predetermined time (timing). From t13 to timing t15).

From the timing t12 to the timing t13, the display that the shell moves is displayed. FIG. 323 (f) shows a display example in which the shell is moving. Further, at the timing t12, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends.

At timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, the image of the exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the shell exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from the timing t13 to the timing t15, the sound effect "Dokhan", which is the explosion sound of the cannonball, is output. FIG. 323 (g) is a display example showing a state in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of a shell exploding are displayed.

The time chart of FIG. 321 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 is not operated and the mission button 3700 is operated. When the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, there are cases where the enemy tank can be destroyed and cases where the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. FIG. 321 (a) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank can be destroyed, and FIG. 321 (b) shows an example of the effect when the enemy tank cannot be destroyed. As described above, the probability of destroying an enemy tank is 1/3, and the probability of not being able to destroy an enemy tank is 2/3. If the enemy tank can be destroyed, the destruction image of the enemy tank is displayed, and at the same time, the sound effect "Dokhan", which is the sound of the bullet hitting the enemy tank and exploding, is output. On the other hand, if the enemy tank cannot be destroyed, no sound effect will be output.
In the production example shown in FIG. 321, since the attack button 3710 is not operated, the same sound effect as that of the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 319 is output.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 321 (a), it is displayed that the bullet fired from the silent machine gun moves from the timing t12 to the timing t13. FIG. 324 (a) shows a display example in which the bullet is moving. At the timing t14, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 321 (a) is a production example in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed as a winning result (selected with a probability of 1/3) in a lottery performed based on an operation for the mission button 3700. Is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, the image of the bullet exploding is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "Dokhan", which is the sound of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and the bullet exploding, is output. FIG. 324 (b) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of a bullet exploding are displayed.

On the other hand, the production example shown in FIG. 321 (b) is a production in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not displayed due to a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3) in the lottery performed based on the operation for the mission button 3700. This is an example. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. Also, the image of the bullet exploding is not displayed. Also, no audio is output corresponding to the firing of the bullet. FIG. 324 (c) is a display example in a state where the image of the enemy tank continues to move to the left without changing to the image of the destroyed enemy tank (for example, timing t14).

The time chart of FIG. 322 is a diagram showing a situation in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated. In this case, in response to the operation of the attack button 3710, the same sound effect as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 320 is output. Further, in response to the operation of the mission button 3700, the same sound effect as in the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 321 is output.

The time chart of FIG. 322 shows an example of an effect when the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are operated at the same time at the timing t12. FIG. 322 (a) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which an image in which a bullet explodes is displayed by operating the mission button 3700. Further, FIG. 322 (b) is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the image of the bullet exploding was not displayed even though the mission button 3700 was operated.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 322 (a), the display that the bullet fired from the turret moves and the display that the bullet fired from the silent machine gun moves are displayed from the timing t12 to the timing t13. In addition, a sound effect called "Zudorn", which is the sound of firing a cannonball from a cannon, is output. FIG. 324 (d) shows an example of a display in which a shell and a bullet are moving. Further, at the timing t12, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends.

The production example shown in FIG. 322 (a) is a production example in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed as a winning result (selected with a probability of 1/3) in a lottery performed based on an operation for the mission button 3700. Is. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, an image of a shell exploding and an image of a bullet exploding are displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank, the image of the shell exploding, and the image of the bullet exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a sound effect called "Dokhan", which is the sound of a bullet hitting an enemy tank and the bullet exploding, is output. At the same time, a sound effect called "Dokhan", which is the sound of a shell hitting an enemy tank and exploding, is output. FIG. 324 (e) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank, an image of a bullet exploding, and an image of a shell exploding are displayed.

On the other hand, in the production example shown in FIG. 322 (b), an image of a destroyed enemy tank is displayed due to a loss (selected with a probability of 2/3) in a lottery performed based on an operation on the mission button 3700. This is an example of production. In this case, at timing t13, the image of the enemy tank changes to the image of the destroyed enemy tank. In addition, the image of the exploding shell is displayed. The image of the destroyed enemy tank and the image of the shell exploding are displayed for 3 seconds (in this production example, 3 seconds from timing t13 to timing t16). Further, from timing t13 to timing t15, a voice "Dokhan", which is the sound of a shell hitting an enemy tank and the shell exploding, is output. FIG. 324 (f) is a display example showing a state (for example, timing t14) in which an image of a destroyed enemy tank and an image of a shell exploding are displayed.

The volume of the "Dokhan" sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be louder than the volume of the "Dokhan" sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. In addition, in FIG. 324 (b) and FIG. 324 (e), it is shown that the volume of the sound effect "Dokhan" is loud by increasing the font of the character "\ Dokhan /".
Further, during the period (timing t13 to timing t15) in which the sound effect "Dokhan" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is output, the volume of the variable production sound such as BGM may be suppressed. ..
Also, when the sound effect "Dokhan" is output based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the sound effect "Dokhan" that is originally output when the attack button 3710 is operated should not be output. Or, if the output is already in progress, the output may be interrupted and the output of the "Dokhan" sound effect based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.
Further, the period for outputting the "Dokhan" sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be longer than the "Dokhan" sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. For example, the period for outputting the sound effect "Dokhan" output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is three times the period for outputting the sound effect "Dokhan" output based on the operation of the attack button 3710. It may be a certain 6 seconds. Further, the sound effect (sound effect "Dokhan") output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 may be output a plurality of times. For example, the sound effect "Dokhan" may be output three times in 6 seconds. Further, the image in which the bullet explodes may be displayed a plurality of times. For example, it may be configured to display an image of a bullet exploding three times in 6 seconds.
Further, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 may be different. For example, the sound effect "Bokhan" may be output based on the operation of the mission button 3700.
In addition, the display and output sound effects displayed and output based on the operation of the attack button 3710 are displayed and output once for each player operation satisfying the conditions, and the player can see and hear the output sound. However, the display and output sound effects that are displayed and output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 can be seen and heard by the player more than once for each player operation that meets the conditions. You may.

As described above, for the attack button 3710, a sound effect indicating that the operation reception is possible, a sound effect indicating that the operation reception is possible, and a sound effect indicating that the operation reception has been performed are output. ..
On the other hand, the mission button 3700 does not output a sound effect indicating that operation reception is possible and a sound effect indicating that operation reception is possible. Further, even when the operation is performed, the sound effect is output with a predetermined probability (1/3) after a predetermined time (1 second) after the operation is performed.
As described above, since the sound effect is not always output for the operation of the mission button 3700, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.
Further, the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the displayed explosion image can be output a plurality of times or displayed a plurality of times to further improve the interest.
Further, the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the mission button 3700 is larger than the explosion image displayed based on the operation of the attack button 3710. Further, as described above, it is desirable that the sound effect output based on the operation of the mission button 3700 be easier to hear than the sound effect output based on the operation of the attack button 3710.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the sound effect and the special display related to the operation of the mission button 3700, which is relatively difficult to appear.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is started. You may want to start. In this case, it is preferable to display the aspect shown in FIG. 323 (a) at the timing t0.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the mission button 3700 is set to end before the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped, but the mission button is until the end timing (timing t35) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The operation reception of 3700 may be continued.

By combining these embodiments, the operation reception of the mission button 3700 may be continued from the start of the change of the decorative symbol (timing t0) to the end of the change display (timing t35). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the chances for the player to make a sound effect or a special display related to the operation of the mission button 3700, which is relatively difficult to make appear.

If the image of the bullet exploding or the sound effect "Dokhan", which is the sound of the bullet exploding, is output once based on the operation of the mission button 3700, after these displays and sound output are completed, It should be configured so that image display and sound effect output can be executed.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 321 (a), the output of the sound effect "Dokhan" ends at the timing t15, and the display of the image in which the bullet explodes at the timing t16 ends. In this case, from timing t16 to timing t17, the image of the bullet exploding and the sound effect of "Dokhan", which is the sound of the bullet exploding, are not output, and these images are displayed after timing t17. And sound effects should be configured to be executed.
Further, even if the operation of the mission button 3700 satisfies the output condition of the sound effect "Dokhan" and the display condition of the image in which the bullet explodes between the timings t15 and t16, these sounds and displays are executed. During the period, no sound is output or displayed, and if an operation that satisfies the conditions is performed after the timing t16 when these sounds or display ends, the sound effect is output or the image is displayed again. You may want to start.
With such a configuration, the display of the image and the output of the sound effect can be clearly recognized each time, so that the player can start the display of the image and the output of the sound effect that have been painstakingly executed. Can suppress the occurrence of unrecognizable situations.

In the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 319 and the like, the valid period during which the attack button 3710 can be operated is generated only once from timing t11 to timing t14, but it can be generated multiple times. You may. For example, the same display may be performed at timing t19 to timing t22. Further, the number of occurrences may be determined based on the result of the special lottery, and the degree of expectation may be suggested by the number of occurrences and the content of each production. It is preferable to generate the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 a plurality of times during the operation valid period of the mission button 3700.
The number of occurrences of the operation valid period related to the attack button 3710, that is, the number of times the image of the shell exploding based on the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed can be determined based on the special lottery result in this way. On the other hand, based on the operation of the mission button 3700, the display of the image of the bullet exploding and the output of the sound effect "Dokhan", which is the sound of the bullet exploding, are not based on the special lottery result, but multiple during the operation valid period. It can be executed once.
With such a configuration, by executing the operation for the mission button 3700 a plurality of times, it is possible to successfully display the image in which the bullet explodes, and the player's sense of accomplishment can be enhanced.

The tank may be configured to be equipped with a further machine gun. In this case, an intermediate effect mode between the bullet fired from the turret and the bullet fired from the silent machine gun in the present embodiment may be adopted. For example, the further machine gun basically has the same operation reception mode and effect mode as the silent machine gun in the present embodiment, but when the operation is performed, a reception sound indicating that the operation has been accepted (for example, a bullet flies). It may be configured to always output (sound). The defense button 3740 may be used as the operation unit in this case. The size of the bullet explosion image should be between the bullet explosion image and the silent machine gun explosion image.

As shown in FIG. 323 (a) and the like, the fact that the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective is shown by a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 and the lines of "Colonel Dyna", but the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective. It may be configured so as not to notify that it is.
For example, in the first half of the operation valid period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 may not be given, and in the latter half of the operation valid period of the mission button 3700, the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 may be given. good. In each of the first half and the second half of the operation validity period of the mission button 3700, the enemy tank may move from the right side of the display area so that the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective. In this case, when the enemy tank is displayed for the first time, the operation of the attack button 3710 can be concentrated, and when the enemy tank is displayed for the second time, in addition to the operation of the attack button 3710, the mission button 3700 It becomes possible to perform operations.
As described above, even when it is effective to display based on the operation reception of the mission button 3700, it may be configured to provide a case where the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed and a case where the display is not performed.
The special sound and display contents based on the operation reception of the mission button 3700 may be different depending on whether the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700 is performed or not. For example, when the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is not displayed, a louder special sound is output or a larger explosion image is displayed as compared with the case where the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is displayed. May be done. With such a configuration, the interest felt by the player can be further enhanced.

The operation instruction display may be switched between the case where the operation instruction is displayed and the case where the operation instruction display is not performed by the above-mentioned real-time clock function or the operation by the player or the clerk.

As described above, according to the "silent machine gun reach" according to the present embodiment, the operation for the second operation unit is performed, and the special sound is output when a specific condition is satisfied. With such a configuration, even if the second operation unit is operated, the special sound may or may not be output, so that the special sound can be output luckily. The player will feel great joy.

Conventionally, a gaming machine in which an operation instruction for an operation unit is displayed has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-046210). In such a gaming machine, the player simply follows the instructed content, and there is room for improvement in terms of improving the interest. For example, if the operation instruction is not obeyed, the same display as when the operation instruction is obeyed after the lapse of a predetermined time is displayed, or if the operation instruction is not performed, no display is performed. It was common, and the player's intention not to follow the operation instructions was not valued. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, an embodiment in which a special display is performed when the operation unit is operated in an operation mode contrary to the instructed content is shown.

Hereinafter, the "bomb character reach" in which the tank and the bomb character fight while accelerating or decelerating the tank will be described with reference to FIG. 325 and the like.

FIG. 325 is a table showing the effect pattern selected in the “bomb character reach”. Further, FIGS. 326 to 328 are time charts showing an example of the effect when any of the effect patterns is executed. Further, FIGS. 329 to 334 show display examples at predetermined timings in these time charts.

In the "bomb character reach", the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed for 34 seconds, and the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed for 1 second. During the variable display of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol reaches the reach state at timing t5. Further, the period from timing t6 to timing t15 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first period"), the period from timing t16 to timing t25 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "second period"), and being displayed. In addition to the own tank of, the effect that the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed is performed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", a bomb character appears on the road where the tank is moving, and a production is performed in which it is asked whether or not to operate the left lever 3720 so that the tank moves toward the bomb character. ..

As the bomb character, a bomb character A, which is a character of a bomb wearing sunglasses, and a bomb character B, whose sunglasses are upside down from the bomb character A, are displayed. When the bomb character A is displayed, a part of the tank is destroyed when the tank is thrust, and when the bomb character B is displayed, the tank is not destroyed even if the tank is thrust. You can proceed.

A bomb character is displayed in front of the tank, and two characters ("Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might") indicate whether or not the tank should be thrust into the bomb character. For example, as a line of "Colonel Dyna", a line instructing to push the left lever 3720 forward (on the gaming machine side, the same applies hereinafter) such as "Determine a fake! Advance!" Is displayed. In addition, as a line of "Sergeant Might", a line instructing to push the left lever 3720 to the back (player side, the same applies below) such as "Find an enemy bomb ahead! Please slow down!" Is displayed. In addition, instead of indirect expressions such as "forward" and "backward", more direct expressions such as "push the left lever forward" and "push the left lever backward" may be adopted. ..

In addition, on the left side of the window where the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are displayed, there is a simulated image that imitates the left lever 3720 in a vertically long rectangular shape, and an image that indicates the operation mode of the left lever 3720 ("forward tilt", "forward tilt", " The word "backward tilt") is displayed. Similarly, on the right side of the window in which the lines of "Sergeant Might" are displayed, a simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 in a vertically long rectangular shape and an image instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720 are displayed.

In "Bomb Character Reach", if the line of "Colonel Dyna" gives an operation instruction, the instruction is basically a line indicating a 100% wrong operation instruction. Further, the image instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is also an image instructing an incorrect operation mode. On the other hand, if the line of "Might Sergeant" gives an operation instruction, the probability that the line that gives the wrong operation instruction is displayed is 20%, and the probability that the line that gives the correct operation instruction is displayed is 80%. be. Further, as the image instructing the operation mode of the left lever 3720, an image corresponding to the instruction content indicated by the dialogue is displayed.
For this reason, the player may operate the lever in the opposite direction to the instruction content for the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" and the operation instruction of the left lever 3720, and for the dialogue of "Sergeant Might" and the operation instruction of the left lever 3720. You should operate the lever with some caution.
Once the player gets used to it, it is possible to determine the type of the bomb character by the shape of the sunglasses, determine whether or not to thrust the tank into the bomb character, and properly press the left lever 3720. Can be operated.

When the bomb character A is displayed, if the tank collides with it, the tank is partially destroyed. If the tank does not plunge into the bomb character A, it is possible to prevent the bomb character A from exploding and destroying the tank before the tank collides. When the bomb character A collides with the own tank, the turret of the own tank is destroyed in the first collision (the state of the own tank shown in FIG. 330 (c)). Further, in the second collision, the machine gun of the own tank is also destroyed (the state of the own tank shown in FIG. 330 (f)).
On the other hand, when the bomb character B is displayed, even if the bomb character B collides with the own tank, the own tank is not destroyed and can proceed. Bomb character B is actually a huge balloon that looks like a bomb, and even if it rushes in, it will not be destroyed.
In addition, when the own tank advances, a huge bomb character appears and it is possible to perform an effect using the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700, but the details will be described later.

In the effect pattern shown in the table of FIG. 325, whether or not the bomb character is displayed and the bomb character are displayed at timing t6 to timing t11 and timing t16 to timing t21 in the time chart shown in FIGS. 326 and 327. In the case, it indicates whether the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A or the bomb character B. Further, at the timing t26, the state in which the image of the own tank can be taken is shown.

The effect pattern 01, the effect pattern 03, the effect pattern 07, and the effect pattern 09 are effect patterns in which the bomb character A does not appear. Therefore, at the timing t26, the tank is not destroyed.
The effect pattern 02, effect pattern 04, effect pattern 06, and effect pattern 08 are effect patterns in which the bomb character A appears once. Therefore, at the timing t26, either the self-tank is not destroyed or the turret of the self-tank is destroyed.
The effect pattern 05 is an effect pattern in which the bomb character A appears twice. Therefore, at the timing t26, the tank is not destroyed, the battery of the tank is destroyed, or the battery of the tank and the machine gun are destroyed.

Which of the effect patterns 01 to 09 is executed is determined by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, it may be decided based on the result of a special lottery.

Next, an aspect of the effect using the explosion character A will be described with reference to FIGS. 326, 329, and 330.
FIG. 326 (a) is a time chart showing a state of variable display of the decorative symbol executed together with the effect shown in the time charts of FIGS. 326 (b) and 326 (c).
FIG. 326 (b) is a time chart showing an execution mode of the effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed in the first period. Hereinafter, the effect state when the effect pattern 04, which is an effect pattern for displaying the bomb character A, is executed in the first period (timing t6 to timing t15) will be described.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 329 (a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character A is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the line of "Colonel Dyna", either "Fake it! Advance!" Or "Hmm, Munyamunya." Is displayed. On the other hand, as the line of "Might Sergeant", one of "Find an enemy bomb ahead! Please slow down!", "He is a fake. Advance!", "Hmm, Munyamunya." Is displayed. To. When the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is tilted forward, a simulated image of the lever with the characters "forward tilt" is displayed together with the dialogue. When the dialogue indicates that the left lever 3720 is tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the characters "backward tilt" is displayed together with the dialogue. Further, if the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 329 (b) to 329 (g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and there are a total of six combinations that can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 329 (b) to 329 (g).

For example, FIG. 329 (b) shows the incorrect operation instruction "Colonel Dyna" displaying the line "Fake it! Advance!" And the correct operation instruction "Sergeant Might""enemyahead". This is a display example showing the state in which the line "Bomb found! Please slow down!" Was displayed.
In this case, the player can avoid a collision with the bomb character A by performing an operation opposite to the operation mode instructed by the line of "Colonel Dyna" (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 backward). In addition, a collision with the bomb character A can be avoided by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 backward) according to the operation mode instructed by the dialogue of "Might Sergeant". Further, regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue, it is possible to avoid the collision with the bomb character A even if the displayed bomb character is confirmed to be the bomb character A and the lever is tilted backward.

In addition, Fig. 329 (e) shows the line "Hmm, Munyamunya" from "Colonel Dyna" and the line "He is a fake. Advance!" From "Sergeant Might", which is the correct operation instruction. This is a display example showing the state in which is displayed.
In this case, the operation mode is not instructed by the line of "Colonel Dyna". In addition, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the dialogue of "Might Sergeant", the bomb character A is collided. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character A and tilts the left lever 3720 backward, regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue, the bomb character A Collision with can be avoided.

During the operation period for tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction, it is determined that the operation input has been performed by tilting the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction for a predetermined time within the period from the timing t6 to the timing t11. For example, it is determined that the operation has been performed when the left lever 3720 is tilted forward for 2 seconds from the timing t7 to the timing t9.

When the left lever 3720 is tilted forward when the bomb character A is displayed, the effect display in which the bomb character A collides with the own tank is displayed from the timing t11 to the timing t15.
Specifically, from timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the collision between the own tank and the bomb character A is displayed. FIG. 330A is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12.
Next, from timing t12 to timing t15, an image in which the battery of the own tank is destroyed is displayed. FIG. 330 (c) is a display example from timing t12 to timing t15.

On the other hand, when the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character A is displayed, an effect display is performed in which the bomb character A explodes in front of the own tank from timing t11 to timing t12. FIG. 330B is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, it is preferable to display as shown in FIG. 329 (a).

FIG. 326 (c) is a time chart showing an execution mode of the effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed in the second period. FIG. 326 (c) shows an example of an effect when the effect pattern 02, which is an effect pattern in which the bomb character A is displayed, is executed, for example, in the second period.
In this effect example, the same effect display as the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 326 (b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

When either the bomb character A or the bomb character B is displayed in both the first period and the second period, such as the effect pattern 05, the effect pattern 06, the effect pattern 08, and the effect pattern 09, FIG. 326. An effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in (b) or an effect mode related to timing t11 to timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 327 (b) described later, and a time chart shown in FIG. 326 (c). In the staging mode related to the timing t16 to the timing t25 or a combination of the staging mode related to the timing t16 to the timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 327 (c), the staging mode is executed.

For example, when the effect pattern 05 is selected, the effect modes related to the timing t11 to the timing t15 in the time chart shown in FIG. 326 (b) and the timing t16 to the timing t25 in the time chart shown in FIG. 326 (c) are set. An effect mode that combines the effect modes is executed.
In this case, there is a possibility that the tank will plunge into the bomb character A in both the first period and the second period.
For example, in the first period, when the tank is thrust into the bomb character A, the tank is in a state where the battery is destroyed, but in the second period, the tank is destroyed by the bomb character A. The machine gun of the tank is destroyed.
FIG. 330 (d) shows a display example at timing t21 to timing t22 when the own tank whose turret is destroyed rushes into the bomb character A in the second period. Further, at timing t22 to timing t25, the display example is in the state shown in FIG. 330 (f).
On the other hand, in the second period, when the self-tank whose turret is destroyed does not plunge into the bomb character A, the display example shown in FIG. 330 (e) is obtained from timing t21 to timing t22.

Next, an aspect of the effect using the explosion character B will be described with reference to FIGS. 327, 331, and 332.
FIG. 327 (a) is a time chart showing a state of variable display of the decorative symbol executed together with the effect shown in the time charts of FIGS. 327 (b) and 327 (c).
FIG. 327 (b) is a time chart showing an execution mode of the effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the first period. Hereinafter, the effect state when the effect pattern 07, which is an effect pattern for displaying the bomb character B, is executed in the first period (timing t6 to timing t11) will be described.
At timing t5, "bomb character reach" is started. FIG. 331 (a) shows a display example from timing t5 to timing t6.
At timing t6, the bomb character B is displayed in the upper center of the display area. At this time, as the line of "Colonel Dyna", either "Enemy bomb-Decelerate!" Or "Hmm, Munyamunya." Is displayed. On the other hand, as the line of "Might Sergeant", one of "He is a fake. Advance!", "Discover an enemy bomb ahead! Please slow down!", "Hmm, Munyamunya." Is displayed. To. When each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is tilted forward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the characters "forward tilt" is displayed together with the line. When each line indicates that the left lever 3720 is tilted backward, a simulated image of the left lever 3720 with the characters "backward tilt" is displayed together with the line. Further, if the dialogue does not indicate the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the simulated image of the left lever 3720 is not displayed.

FIGS. 331 (b) to 331 (g) show display examples displayed in the display area from timing t6 to timing t11. As mentioned above, there are two types of lines for "Colonel Dyna" and three types for "Sergeant Might", and there are a total of six combinations that can be displayed by combining these lines. These six combinations are shown in FIGS. 331 (b) to 331 (g).

For example, FIG. 331 (b) shows the display of the line "Enemy bomb-decelerate!" By "Colonel Dyna", which is an incorrect operation instruction, and "He is Sergeant Might", which is a correct operation instruction. This is a display example showing the state in which the line "It's a fake. Move forward!" Is displayed.
In this case, the player can plunge into the bomb character B by performing an operation opposite to the operation mode instructed by the line of "Colonel Dyna" (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward). In addition, the bomb character B can be thrust into the bomb character B by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the dialogue of "Might Sergeant". Further, regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue, it is possible to plunge into the bomb character B by confirming that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B and performing an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward.

Also, in Fig. 331 (e), the line "Hmm, Munyamunya." From "Colonel Dyna" and the correct operation instruction "Sergeant Might""Discover an enemy bomb in front! Please slow down!" This is a display example showing the state in which the line "" is displayed.
In this case, the operation mode is not instructed by the line of "Colonel Dyna". In addition, by performing an operation (operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward) according to the operation mode instructed by the dialogue of "Might Sergeant", it becomes impossible to plunge into the bomb character B. On the other hand, if the player confirms that the displayed bomb character is the bomb character B and tilts the left lever 3720 forward regardless of the instruction content of the dialogue, the bomb character B You can plunge into.

When the lever is tilted forward when the bomb character B is displayed, the effect display in which the own tank thrusts into the bomb character B is performed from the timing t11 to the timing t15.
From timing t11 to timing t12, an image of the own tank plunging into the bomb character B is displayed. FIG. 332 (a) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, it is preferable to display as shown in FIG. 329 (a).

On the other hand, when the left lever 3720 is tilted backward when the bomb character B is displayed, the bomb character B located in front of the own tank is displayed as it is from the timing t11 to the timing t12. FIG. 332 (b) is a display example from timing t11 to timing t12. From timing t12 to timing t15, it is preferable to display as shown in FIG. 329 (a).

FIG. 327 (c) is a time chart showing an execution mode of the effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed in the second period. FIG. 327 (c) shows an example of an effect when the effect pattern 03, which is an effect pattern in which the bomb character B is displayed, is executed, for example, in the second period.
In this effect example, the same effect display as the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 327 (b) is performed from timing t16 to timing t25.

Next, with reference to the time chart of FIG. 328, the effect mode in the timing t26 to the timing t35 when the effect pattern 01 to the effect pattern 09 are executed will be described.
As described above, based on the selected staging pattern and the player's mode of operation with respect to the left lever 3720, the tank is in an intact state, the turret destroyed, and the turret and machine gun destroyed at timing t26. It is displayed in one of the above states.

As shown in FIG. 328 (a), the display of the bomb character A or the bomb character B is started at the timing t26. Further, from the timing t26 to the timing t28, the operation of either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 becomes effective.
The attack button 3710 is effective when the tank is intact. On the other hand, the mission button 3700 is effective when the turret of the tank is destroyed. In the case where the turret and the machine gun are destroyed, neither the operation of the attack button 3710 nor the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective. The mode of effect when the operation of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not effective will be described later.

At the timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time when the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective. In addition, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right of the window displaying the lines of "Sergeant Might".
FIG. 333 (a) shows from the timing t26 until the attack button 3710 is operated (until t28 in FIG. 328 (a)) or until the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends (t29 in FIG. 328 (a)). It is a display example in the period of up to).

If the special lottery result is a big hit, the display that the bomb character A explodes from the timing when the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed during the operation valid period to the attack button 3710 or the timing when the operation valid period ends is 3 It takes place for a second. FIG. 333 (b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation of the attack button 3710 or after the operation valid period ends when the special lottery result is a big hit. After that, at the timing t34, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed during the operation valid period to the attack button 3710 or the timing when the operation valid period ends. The display moving toward is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 333 (c) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the tank after the operation of the attack button 3710 or after the operation valid period ends when the special lottery result is lost. After that, at the timing t34, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
In addition, based on the operation of the attack button 3710 and the end of the operation valid period, a display effect in which a shell is fired from the battery of the own tank is executed as in the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 317.

At the timing t26, the bomb character A is displayed in the center of the display area at the same time when the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes effective. In addition, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed in the upper left of the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna".
FIG. 333 (d) shows from the timing t26 until the operation of the mission button 3700 is performed (until t28 in FIG. 328 (a)) or until the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 ends (t29 in FIG. 328 (a)). It is a display example in the period of up to).

If the special lottery result is a big hit, the display that the bomb character A explodes from the timing when the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed during the operation valid period to the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation valid period ends is 3 It takes place for a second. FIG. 333 (e) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A explodes after the operation or after the operation valid period ends when the special lottery result is a big hit. After that, at the timing t34, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the bomb character A becomes the own tank from the timing when the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed during the operation valid period to the mission button 3700 or the timing when the operation valid period ends. The display moving toward is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 333 (f) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A moves toward the tank after the operation of the mission button 3700 or after the operation valid period ends when the special lottery result is lost. After that, at the timing t34, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
In addition, based on the operation of the mission button 3700 and the end of the operation valid period, a display effect in which a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank is executed as in the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 318.

When the production pattern 05 is executed and the tank is thrust into the bomb character A in both the first period and the second period, the tank whose turret and machine gun are destroyed is displayed at timing t26. The Rukoto.
FIG. 328 (b) is a time chart showing an effect state executed in this case.

In this case, if the special lottery result is lost, the display of the bomb character A is started at the timing t26, and the bomb character A is displayed at that position until the timing t29. FIG. 334 (a) shows a display example at timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, the display that the bomb character A moves toward the tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 334 (b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character A is moving toward the tank. After that, at the timing t34, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
On the other hand, when the special lottery result is a big hit, the display of the bomb character B is started at the timing t26, and the bomb character B is displayed at that position until the timing t29. FIG. 334 (a) shows a display example at timing t26 to timing t29.
From timing t29 to timing t32, the display that the bomb character B moves toward the tank is displayed for 3 seconds. FIG. 334 (b) shows a display mode in which the bomb character B is moving toward the tank. After that, at the timing t34, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.
In either case, neither the attack button 3710 nor the mission button 3700 is valid for operation reception.

In this way, by giving an appropriate operation instruction without being confused by an erroneous operation instruction to the left lever 3720, the player can perform as shown in FIGS. 333 (a), (b), (d), and (e). It is possible to operate special operation units (attack button 3710 and mission button 3700), special images (images of bomb character A exploding, images of the sunglasses worn by bomb character A tilting, and "Dyna". It is possible to visually recognize the lines of "Colonel" and "Might Sergeant". On the other hand, when the player obediently follows the operation instruction, the special operation unit cannot be operated as shown in FIGS. 334 (a) and 334 (d), and the special image is visually recognized. Can't.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 333 (a) and 333 (d), or FIGS. 333 (b) and (e), the player can visually recognize a special effect display depending on the mode of destruction of the own tank. ..

If the player does not operate the left lever 3720, the operation instruction indicated by "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" may be automatically executed. Further, at this time, the image displayed when the player gives the operation instruction may be automatically displayed. If "Colonel Dyna" or "Sergeant Might" does not give an operation instruction and the player does not operate the left lever 3720, either the forward tilt operation or the backward tilt operation is automatically performed by lottery. It may be displayed in. For example, the forward tilting operation may be selected with a probability of 1/2, and the backward tilting operation may be selected with a probability of 1/2, and the display corresponding to the operation may be performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the player is required to perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction in at least one of the first period and the second period. Further, by performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, it is possible to generate an effect state in which the operation to a specific operation unit becomes effective immediately before the decorative symbol is stopped and a special image is displayed.
In this way, since the player is shown an operation instruction in a mode different from the original operation instruction or an operation instruction in a contradictory mode, the player can perform an appropriate operation on the operation unit. It is estimated that this is the case, and the tilting operation of the left lever 3720 is performed. Then, when the player can perform an appropriate operation contrary to the operation instruction, the player can operate a special operation unit or visually recognize a special image or effect display. Is possible.
Further, in addition to performing an operation contrary to the operation instruction, a special image may be displayed only when a specific condition (for example, the operation contrary to the operation instruction is succeeded a plurality of times) is satisfied. .. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the special display visible only to the player who can properly perform the operation, instead of accidentally displaying the operation unit by appropriately operating the operation unit. ..

The player may operate the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction to enable the tank moving forward to avoid the minefield provided on the road.
For example, an image of a real minefield and an image of a fake minefield are displayed on the right or left side of the road, and the player is made to operate the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction to perform an effect of avoiding the minefield. It is good to do it. And if your tank rushes into a real minefield, you should configure it so that its turret and machine gun are destroyed. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also configured to give incorrect operation instructions regarding the operation mode of the left lever 3720. It is preferable to configure such an effect to be feasible in the first period and the second period.

In this way, even when the left lever 3720 is properly operated to move the tank while avoiding the minefield to the left and right and the operation contrary to the operation instruction is successfully performed, it will be described with reference to FIGS. 325 to 334 and the like. Similar to the above-described embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to operate a special operation unit, and to visually recognize a special image or effect display.

The staging table shown in FIG. 325 had a first period and a second period, but was configured to have only the first period, and the bomb character did not appear in the first period. A table may be adopted in which one of the effect pattern, the effect pattern in which the bomb character A appears, and the effect pattern in which the bomb character B appears is selected.
In this case, if the tank is thrust into the bomb character A, both the battery and the machine gun of the tank may be destroyed.

The effect table shown in FIG. 325 has a first period and a second period, but the effect table is configured to provide three or more periods during which the bomb character can be displayed. You may do it.
In addition, the hold look-ahead is performed, and based on the look-ahead result, a plurality of periods during which the bomb character can be displayed can be provided over a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays (the bomb character can be displayed in one decorative symbol variation). One period may be provided, or an arbitrary number of bomb characters may be displayed in one change of the decorative symbol), and the change display corresponding to the hold targeted for look-ahead is stopped. It may be configured to execute the effect display shown with reference to FIGS. 328, 333, and 334 just before.

Further, although the display mode of the own tank is provided in three stages, it may be provided in two stages or four or more stages. In addition, as an example of changing the display mode, an example of a production in which the destruction of the own tank progresses in stages is shown, but the production in which the own tank is repaired and the destruction stage of the own tank returns to the stage where it is relatively not destroyed. May be configured to be executable.

In the first period or the second period, if the bomb character does not appear, the bomb character A appears, or the bomb character B may appear, the first period and the second period have been shown. In, either the bomb character A or the bomb character B may be configured to be displayed without fail. For example, the table shown in FIG. 325 may be modified to adopt a table consisting of only the effect pattern 05, the effect pattern 06, the effect pattern 08, and the effect pattern 09. With such a configuration, since one of the bomb characters is displayed in each period of the effect pattern, it is possible to increase the tension of the operation with respect to the left lever 3720.

In the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 329 to 334, a display example when the bomb character is displayed is mainly exemplified, but in the period when the bomb character is not displayed, FIG. 329 ( As shown in a), it is preferable to display that the own tank character moves forward.

A special image may be displayed only when certain conditions are met. For example, a special display may be performed only when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction is successful a plurality of times. Further, even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, it is preferable to perform a predetermined lottery so that a special display is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5). With such a configuration, a special image is not displayed by chance just by operating the operation unit, and the difficulty level for displaying the special image can be increased. Therefore, a special image can be displayed. The surprise and joy that the player feels when is displayed can be magnified.

When the special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, the volume of the variable effect sound may be reduced in the suppressed state at least during the period when the special image is displayed.
Further, when a special image is displayed based on the operation of the left lever 3720, a special sound (for example, a special explosion sound) is output at least during the period when the special image is displayed. You may.
Further, the fluctuation effect sound may be suppressed and the special sound may be output at the same time.
By suppressing the variable effect sound and outputting the special sound in response to the display of the special image in this way, the display of the special image is disturbed by the variable effect sound. Also, the display of special images can be made more prominent by the output of special sounds.

The variable staging sound is a sound in which a predetermined music is played according to the fluctuation of the decorative pattern and is recognized by the player as background music. For example, a musical piece consisting of a voice sung by a predetermined singer and a performance sound of a plurality of musical instruments is played for several minutes, and during that time, the variation of the decorative pattern (for example, the variation result of the decorative pattern is all non-reach loss and the variation time is 10 on average. (In the case of about seconds) is performed multiple times. By outputting such a fluctuating effect sound to the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the game. It should be noted that a plurality of such songs may be prepared in advance, and the playback of different songs may be started at the timing when the playback of a certain song is completed to the end. Alternatively, the music that has been played up to that point may be faded out in the middle of playback in accordance with the change in the gaming state, and another music piece different from the music that has been played up to that point may be played back.

It is configured so that a game state in which a special image is displayed occurs when the left lever 3720 can be properly operated without being deceived by the operation instruction, but the special image display period and the attack The display period of the simulated image imitating the button 3710 is configured to overlap, and the special image (image of the bomb exploding, etc.) and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed at the same time. An example is shown below.

FIGS. 335 (a) to 335 (c) show other display examples that can be displayed at the timing when the figure shown in FIG. 333 (a) is displayed.
In each of FIGS. 335 (a) to 335 (c), the display priority of the image of the translucent sunglasses tilted at an angle is the window displaying the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the lines of "Colonel Dyna". The display priority is higher than the display priority of the image, the image of the own tank, the image of the bomb character A, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. Further, one image of the translucent sunglasses is displayed as shown in FIG. 335 (a), two images are displayed as shown in FIG. 335 (b), and FIG. 335 (c) shows. As shown, three may be displayed. Then, the translucent sunglasses have a higher expectation of a big hit when the translucent sunglasses image is displayed than when the translucent sunglasses image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 333 (a). Whether or not to display the image is determined. Further, the display mode of the translucent sunglasses image is determined so that the larger the number of translucent sunglasses images, the higher the expectation of the jackpot.

For example, the expected degree when the display state shown in FIG. 333 (a) is 10%, the expected degree when the display state shown in FIG. 335 (a) is 30%, and the display shown in FIG. 335 (b). It is advisable to display the translucent sunglasses image so that the expected degree in the state is 50% and the expected degree in the display state shown in FIG. 335 (c) is 80%.

The display of the translucent sunglasses image is started from the timing t26 and continues until the operation of the attack button 3710 is performed or the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends. If the bomb character A can be detonated (that is, if the special lottery result is a big hit), the display of the translucent sunglasses image may be continued until the display of the explosion image is completed.

With such a configuration, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained. In addition, since the translucent sunglasses image (special image) is displayed on the front side of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the special image that could be visually recognized is the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. It can be prevented from being hidden by.

FIG. 335 (d) is a modification of the display example shown with reference to FIG. 335 (c). As in this display example, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may be configured to be displayed in front of the translucent sunglasses image (special image).
Alternatively, the display mode shown in FIG. 335 (c) and the display mode shown in FIG. 335 (d) may be configured to be displayed alternately. For example, the display mode may be switched every 0.5 seconds from the timing t26 to the timing t29.
By adopting such a configuration, both the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the translucent sunglasses image can be conspicuous.
The bomb character A before or after the explosion may also be displayed in the same display mode as the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710.

It is not necessary to show the degree of expectation by the image of the translucent sunglasses. In this case, there may be a difference in the appearance rate of the displayed images.

In the effect example shown with reference to FIGS. 328 and 333, the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 can be operated once from the timing t26 to the timing t29. And the embodiment in which the operation for the mission button 3700 can be accepted a plurality of times will be described with reference to FIG. 336.

FIGS. 336 (a) to 336 (c) are display examples in the case where the attack button 3710 can be operated a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) from the timing t26 to the timing t29. Further, a plurality of simulated images (for example, 5) imitating the attack button 3710 are displayed according to the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated. Further, each time the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed, the display of the simulated image displayed on the foremost side of the simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 ends. When the attack button 3710 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the image of the bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). You should do it. Further, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, when the fifth operation is performed, it is preferable to display the exploded image with a probability of 100%. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the bomb character A will not be hit by a cannonball and the exploded image will not be displayed.
FIG. 336 (a) shows a display example at the timing t26.
Further, FIG. 336 (b) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in a lottery with a predetermined probability when the attack button 3710 is operated for the third time.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the display shown in FIG. 336 (c) is displayed for 3 seconds from the timing when the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed 5 times or the timing when the operation valid period ends. It becomes a state.
If the number of times the attack button 3710 can be operated remains when the exploded image is displayed, the operation for the remaining number of times is accepted, and the exploded image is displayed in response to this operation. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in a further exploding aspect.
When the explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the attack button 3710. Therefore, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image. In FIG. 336 (b), a display example in which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image is shown.

FIGS. 336 (d) to 336 (f) are display examples in the case where the mission button 3700 is configured to be operable a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) from the timing t26 to the timing t29. Further, a plurality of simulated images (for example, 5) imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed according to the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated. Further, each time the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed, the display of the simulated image displayed on the foremost side of the simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 ends. When the mission button 3700 is operated, if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the image of the bomb character A being hit by a shell and exploding is displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/3). You should do it. If the result of the special lottery is lost, the exploded image will not be displayed.
FIG. 336 (d) shows a display example at the timing t26.
Further, FIG. 336 (d) shows a state in which an exploded image is displayed in a lottery with a predetermined probability when the mission button 3700 is operated for the third time.
On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the display shown in FIG. 336 (f) is displayed for 3 seconds from the timing when the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed 5 times or the timing when the operation valid period ends. It becomes a state.
If the number of times the mission button 3700 can be operated remains when the exploded image is displayed, the operation for the remaining number of times is accepted, and the exploded image is displayed in response to this operation. The aspect may be configured to be displayed in a further exploding aspect.
When the explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the mission button 3700. Therefore, the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image. In FIG. 336 (e), a display example in which the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image is shown.

In the production example shown with reference to FIGS. 336 (d) to 336 (f), the line of "Colonel Dyna" is an incorrect operation such as "Shoot a special machine gun! Press the defense button!". It is an instruction. Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the production situation and operate the mission button 3700. And if the mission button 3700 can be operated, a special image of the bomb exploding can be visually recognized.

Next, FIG. 6 shows an effect example in which an effect example shown with reference to FIGS. 336 (a) to 336 (c) and an effect example shown with reference to FIGS. 336 (d) to 336 (f) are combined. It will be described with reference to 337. In the present embodiment, when the turret of the own tank is not destroyed and the timing is t26, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 becomes effective at the same time. At this time, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can each accept a predetermined number of operations (for example, 5 times each). Further, a predetermined number of simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed.

FIG. 337 (a) shows a display example in which five simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 and five simulated images imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. As described above, the operation valid period may be started from the timing t26.
In this state, when the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated, as described above, whether or not the special lottery result is a big hit and a lottery with a predetermined probability (1/2 for the attack button 3710, For the mission button 3700, the exploded image is displayed depending on whether or not it hits 1/3).

FIG. 337 (b) shows a state in which the exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the attack button 3710. Further, FIG. 337 (d) shows a state in which the exploded image is displayed in response to the third operation of the mission button 3700. The display examples shown in FIGS. 337 (b) and 337 (d) can be displayed when the special lottery result is a big hit, respectively. If the number of times the attack button 3710 or mission button 3700 can be operated remains when the exploded image is displayed, the remaining number of operations is accepted and the exploded image is received according to the operation. The display mode of is further configured to be displayed in an explosive mode.
For example, when a predetermined lottery (1/3) is won based on the operation for the mission button 3700 in the display state shown in FIG. 337 (b), the explosion mode is as shown in the display state shown in FIG. 337 (d). The display mode may be changed to. Alternatively, when a predetermined lottery (1/2) is won based on the operation for the attack button 3710 in the display state shown in FIG. 337 (d), the display mode is as shown in the explosion mode shown in FIG. 337 (b). May be changed.
In addition, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, even if the mission button 3700 and the attack button 3710 are operated and the lottery continues to be out of the predetermined lottery, 100% when the 10th operation is performed in total. It is preferable to display the exploded image in the mode corresponding to the last operated button with the probability of.
When the explosion image is displayed, it is not always necessary to operate the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700. Therefore, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 have display priority over the exploded image. It is better to display the degree low. In FIGS. 337 (b) and 337 (d), a display example in which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed with a lower display priority than the exploded image is shown. ing.
If the result of the special lottery is lost, FIG. 337 is for 3 seconds from the timing when the attack button 3710 is operated 5 times and the mission button 3700 is operated 5 times during the operation valid period, or the timing when the operation valid period ends. The display state shown in (c) is obtained.
In the production example shown with reference to FIG. 337 (a), the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" is an erroneous operation instruction such as "Shoot a special machine gun! Press the defense button!". Therefore, the player needs to carefully observe the production situation and operate the mission button 3700.

In the production example explained with reference to FIG. 333 (d), the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" indicates the operation of the mission button 3700, but "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the mission button! Instead of the line "Shoot the special machine gun! Press the defense button!", You may configure it to display the wrong line.
Further, an example of the effect described with reference to FIG. 333 (a), an example of the effect described with reference to FIG. 335 (a), an example of the effect described with reference to FIG. 336 (a), and FIG. 337 (a) are shown. In the production example explained with reference to, the line of "Might Sergeant" is to instruct the operation of the attack button 3710, but the line "It's a large bomb !! Please attack with the attack button!" Alternatively, it may be configured to display the wrong line, "It's a big bomb! Please attack with the defense button!".
With such a configuration, the player needs to closely observe the production situation, so that it is possible to further improve the game entertainment. The player can recognize the operation unit to be operated by the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710.

In addition, the simulated images of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 showed the operation part to be operated, but also for these, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and the lines of "Sergeant Might" (by giving wrong instructions). If there is), it may be configured to display a simulated image instructing an operation unit different from the operation unit to be originally operated. In this case, when an appropriate operation is performed, a display for firing a cannonball or a bullet may be displayed to indicate to the player that the appropriate display has been performed.

Although a display example for displaying simulated images of the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, and the mission button 3700 is shown, these displays may not be performed. In this case, the player needs to operate the operation unit in a manner contrary to the operation instruction or in a mode different from the operation instruction based on the type of the bomb character, the destruction situation of the own tank, etc. Since the degree of difficulty to perform is increased, it is possible to improve the interest felt when an appropriate operation is performed.

With reference to FIGS. 336 and 337, even during the period after the timing t26, the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation instruction, so that a special image (explosion image, an image in which the sunglasses are tilted, etc.) is displayed. An example of an effect that generates an effect state is shown. Even in such an embodiment, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained with reference to FIGS. 325 to 335.

It is preferable that the time for displaying the special image is longer than the time for displaying the special image contrary to the operation instruction and the time for displaying the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. With such a configuration, the player can enjoy a special image.

The special image displayed when an operation contrary to the operation instruction or an operation different from the operation instruction is performed may be a larger image than the operation instruction. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 335, the image larger than the image for instructing the operation (the image of the dialogue instructing the wrong lever operation) (the large translucent sunglasses shown in FIG. 335 (c)). Image) can be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the player regarding the display of a more special image.

When the operation instruction display such as "forward tilt" or "backward tilt" is performed as the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 in the present embodiment, but the operation instruction is not performed (FIG. 329 (g), FIG. 331 (g)). In the case of the display example shown in (1), the operation content can be estimated according to the display mode of the displayed bomb character. A special image may be displayed only when the player can properly operate the left lever 3720 in such a more difficult operation situation. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 333 (b), there are cases where the image in which the sunglasses are tilted is displayed and cases where the image is not displayed, and when the operation instruction for the attack button 3710 is not given, the operation for the attack button 3710 is performed. When this is done, it is preferable to display an image (special image) in which the sunglasses are tilted with a predetermined probability (1/10).

When operating the left lever 3720 and the above-mentioned various buttons, the operation reception sound directly corresponding to the operation of the left lever 3720 and the above-mentioned various buttons is not intentionally output, and the above-mentioned is based on the operation of the left lever 3720 and the above-mentioned various buttons. It may be configured to output a special sound corresponding to the operation only when a special image is displayed when the special conditions such as the above are satisfied. With such a configuration, the player can feel that the special image is displayed more specially. It should be noted that the same configuration may be adopted in the display of the special image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 335 to 337.

As the operation contrary to the operation instruction, an effect example in which the direction in which the left lever 3720 is tilted is different and an effect example in which a button different from the instructed button is operated are given, but other embodiments may be used. For example, when the player is instructed to press and hold the attack button 3710 repeatedly, it may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction to dare to repeatedly hit the attack button 3710. Alternatively, when the operation of the attack button 3710 is instructed, the operation of the defense button 3740 may be adopted as an operation contrary to the operation instruction.

In addition, although an example of an effect in which a special display change is given when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is performed, the expectation of a big hit is shown by giving such a special display change. It may be configured as follows. Alternatively, it may be configured so as not to show the degree of expectation of a big hit. Alternatively, among the above-mentioned special display changes, some display changes are configured to show the expectation of a big hit, and other display changes are configured not to show the expectation of a big hit. May be good.

In the present embodiment, the operation acceptance period of the left lever 3720 is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the operation acceptance period of the left lever 3720 is started. You may want to start. In this case, at timing t0, the mode shown in FIG. 329 (b) may be displayed and the "bomb character reach" may be started.

Further, based on the look-ahead of the hold, the same effect as the "bomb character reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 329 to 337 may be executed over the variable display of the decorative symbol a plurality of times. In this case, the bomb character A and the bomb character B may be displayed once in the variable display of the decorative symbol executed before the variable display of the decorative symbol targeted for pre-reading. Then, an effect of accepting the operation of the left lever 3720 corresponding to the displayed bomb character is performed for the entire period during the change display of the decorative symbol, and the operation of the left lever 3720 is performed for the entire period during the change stop of the decorative symbol. It is advisable to perform the corresponding display effect. For example, an effect example performed from timing t6 to timing t11 in FIGS. 326 and 327 is executed during the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the effect example executed from timing t11 to timing t15 is stopped while the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped. Good to do. Then, in the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to be read ahead to the end of the stop display, it is preferable to execute the effect performed from the timing t26 to the timing t35 in FIG. 328.

It should be noted that the destroyed turret may be restored by the player performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display while the turret of the own tank is destroyed.
Further, when the machine gun of the own tank is destroyed, the player may perform an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display so that the destroyed machine gun is restored.
Further, the tank may be configured to be upgraded by the player performing an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display while the battery of the tank is not destroyed. For example, the turret may be incremented by one, the color of the turret may change, or a display change may be added in which the turret changes to an oversized turret.
In this case, the timing at which the bomb character can appear is not set to only 2 times as shown in FIG. 325, but to a larger number of times such as 5 times to further improve the interest as a production. Can be done. In addition, the player can visually recognize a special effect display such as the destroyed machine gun being revived or the tank being upgraded.

By giving a display change, it may be configured so that the expectation degree of a big hit is shown, or it may be configured so that the display change is given merely as an effect and does not indicate the expectation degree.
For example, the degree of expectation may be indicated by the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets. Alternatively, the number of turrets, the color of the turrets, and the size of the turrets may be configured to suggest or notify the current gaming state or the gaming state that occurs.

The bomb character A or the bomb character B may be configured to be always displayed in the variable display in the first period, the second period, and the look-ahead effect. With such a configuration, the operation instruction is always shown to the player, the player can have a sense of tension, and the interest can be improved.

An example is shown in which a special display change is given by operating the left lever 3720 without following the instructed operation content, but an operation contrary to the instructed operation content or an operation different from the instructed operation content is shown. May be configured to give a special display change.

An example was shown in which both "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" may give operation instructions, but in a series of "Bomb Character Reach", only one character may be configured to give operation instructions. .. In this case, in the other character, it is advisable to display a line such as "Hmm, Munyamunya".

In this way, in "Bomb Character Reach", it is possible to give the player a special feeling of satisfaction by giving a special display change when an operation that does not follow the operation instruction display is intentionally performed. Become.

Conventionally, in order to suggest the result of the special lottery, a predetermined image may be displayed to suggest the result of the special lottery based on the operation by the player (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-046210). By the way, the number of times such an operation is accepted and the number of times of display corresponding to the reception of the operation are predetermined. Further, the period during which the player can operate is only a predetermined period, and the display mode cannot be freely changed by the player's free operation. In addition, the display time of the effect displayed in this way is constant, and there is room for improvement in this respect as well. In the embodiment shown below, it is possible to accept multiple operations during the operation valid period, and the display time of the image displayed based on the operation is set to be long or short, and it is special depending on the length of the displayed time. An embodiment that makes it possible to suggest the result of the lottery will be described.

Hereinafter, the “sudden tank effect” that can be executed as a look-ahead effect pattern will be described with reference to FIG. 338 and the like. It should be noted that whether or not to perform the "sudden tank effect" is determined based on pre-reading the reserved contents on the peripheral control board 1510.
FIG. 338 shows the types of effect patterns that can be selected in the “sudden tank effect”, the conditions under which the effect pattern is selected, and the period during which the look-ahead effect is executed (specifically, it straddles how many times the decorative symbol is varied and displayed. Is it executed?).

The look-ahead effect pattern 01 is an effect pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 4 when the variation display of the previous decorative symbol is completed and the variation display of the decorative symbol is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 01 is an effect pattern in which the “sudden tank effect” is executed in the variation display related to the hold at the start of the variation display. Since the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is executed only in one variable display period, it is not strictly a look-ahead effect, but for convenience, it is referred to as a look-ahead effect.

The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is an effect pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the variation display of the previous decorative symbol is completed and the variation display of the decorative symbol is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is an effect pattern in which the “sudden tank effect” is executed in the variation display related to the hold and the variation display related to the first hold at the start of the variation display.

The look-ahead effect pattern 03 is an effect pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 or 2 when the variation display of the previous decorative symbol is completed and the variation display of the decorative symbol is newly started. The look-ahead effect pattern 03 is an effect pattern in which the “sudden tank effect” is executed in the variation display related to the hold, the variation display related to the first hold, and the variation display related to the second hold at the start of the variation display.

The look-ahead effect pattern 04 is an effect pattern that can be selected when the number of reservations is 1 to 3 when the variation display of the previous decorative symbol is completed and the variation display of the decorative symbol is newly started. In the look-ahead effect pattern 04, the "sudden tank effect" is executed in the variation display related to the hold, the variation display related to the first hold, the variation display related to the second hold, and the variation display related to the third hold at the start of the variation display. It is a production pattern.

In addition, in the effect pattern in which the change display is performed multiple times, such as the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, the result of the special lottery is a big hit and a loss for the last change display in which the "sudden tank effect" is executed. Either way is fine, but if all the special lottery results for the variable display in the middle other than the last variable display where the "sudden tank effect" is executed are lost, the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04 are used. Should be executed.

FIG. 339 is a table showing three display effect patterns displayed in the “sudden tank effect”. Further, FIG. 340 is a time chart showing an effect mode when the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 340 (a), in the “sudden tank effect”, the time during which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed is 14 seconds from timing t0 to timing t14. The time for the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed is 1 second. Further, the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes valid at the timing t0, and the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes invalid at the timing t14 when the variation display of the decorative symbol ends. During the period (timing t0 to timing t14) in which the operation reception of the attack button 3710 is valid, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 341, an effect mode displayed in the display area based on the operation of the player with respect to the attack button 3710 will be described.

FIG. 341 is a diagram showing a display mode in a display area at a predetermined timing in the time chart described with reference to FIG. 340.

FIG. 341 (a) shows a state in which an image of the own tank is displayed in the display area at the timing t0. The image of the own tank with each decorative symbol ("3", "↓", "3") in the reach state in the upper left of the display area facing forward in the lower center of the display area is on the left in the upper center of the display area. The image of the enemy tank facing in the direction, the image of the road where the own tank moves in the center of the left and right direction of the display area, the image of the horizon and the sky at the top of the display area, and the character on the production in the lower right of the display area. The line image of a certain "Captain Dyna" and the window image surrounding the line image are in the lower left of the display area. A simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the right side of the enclosed window image.
As described above, in the "sudden tank production", the image of the own tank and the image of the enemy tank are suddenly displayed at the timing t0, and the operation reception for the attack button 3710 becomes effective.

As shown in FIG. 340 (a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated during the operation valid period, the display of the image of the enemy tank is continued until the timing t14. Further, at the timing t14, the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed.

On the other hand, after the operation of the attack button 3710 by the player is detected, the effect display corresponding to the operation is immediately executed. FIG. 339 is a table showing an effect pattern executed based on the operation for the attack button 3710.
Further, FIGS. 340 (b) to 340 (d) are time charts showing a state in which the effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation reception for the attack button 3710 at the timing t3.
Further, FIGS. 340 (e) to 340 (g) show a state in which the effect pattern corresponding to the operation is executed based on the operation reception for the attack button 3710 at the two timings of the timing t3 and the timing t8. It is a chart.

FIG. 339 shows the effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed for 1 second. At the same time, a smoke image indicating that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for 1 second in the upper right of the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 1 second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed for 2 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for 2 seconds in the upper right of the image where the enemy tank was destroyed. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 1 second.
When the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed for 3 seconds. At the same time, a smoke image showing that smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed for 3 seconds in the upper right of the image where the enemy tank was destroyed. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 1 second.

The appearance ratio is determined in advance by the smoke display effect pattern 01 to the smoke display effect pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the variation display result will be a big hit. The expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed is 30%, the expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed is 50%, and the expectation when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed is 100%. Is.

FIG. 340 (b) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed from the timing t3 to the timing t5 based on the operation for the attack button 3710.
FIG. 340 (c) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 02 is executed from the timing t3 to the timing t6 based on the operation for the attack button 3710.
FIG. 340 (d) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the smoke display effect pattern 03 is executed from the timing t3 to the timing t7 based on the operation for the attack button 3710.

FIG. 341 (b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at the timing t3 in the effect example shown in FIGS. 340 (b) to 340 (d). In FIG. 341 (b), an image in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank and the shell explodes and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 341 (b) is completed in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and the display state shown in FIG. 341 (c) is reached. In this display state, the turret of the enemy tank is destroyed, and a smoke image showing the mode in which smoke is rising from the enemy tank is displayed in the upper right of the image of the destroyed enemy tank.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (b), since the smoke display effect pattern 01 is selected, the smoke image shown in FIG. 341 (d) is one second after the display state shown in FIG. 341 (c) is displayed. Is not displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are displayed in a different way, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (c), since the smoke display effect pattern 02 is selected, the display state in which the smoke image is not displayed 2 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 341 (c) is displayed. (Not shown). As the line of "Colonel Dyna" displayed two seconds later, "The power of the new gun is OK ..." is displayed. Here, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" indicate that the expectations are moderate.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (d), since the smoke display effect pattern 03 is selected, the smoke image shown in FIG. 341 (e) is set to the display state shown in FIG. 341 (c). Is not displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are displayed in a different way, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

Thus, the longer the smoke image is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big hit.
Therefore, the player visually recognizes the display area in the expectation that the smoke image will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the line of "Colonel Dyna" displayed at the end of the display of the smoke image is displayed corresponding to each smoke display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dyna" also suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. Since the lines of "Colonel Dyna" correspond to the display time of the smoke image, even if you do not know the display time of the smoke image accurately, you can know the degree of expectation and check the display time of the smoke image. It is possible to make a player who has a low degree of concentration on a game that he / she does not play feel the interest of the game.

One second after the smoke image is not displayed, a new image of the enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (b), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (c), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 340 (d), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. FIG. 341 (f) is an example of an effect showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 340 (b) to 340 (d), the operation for the attack button 3710 is not performed thereafter, and the variation display of the decorative symbol ends at the timing t14.

FIG. 342 (a) shows a display example displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a big hit in the production example shown in FIGS. 340 (b) to 340 (d). There is. In the figure, a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big hit is shown. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed to inform that they are big hits.
FIG. 342 (b) shows a display example displayed for 1 second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is lost in the production example shown in FIGS. 340 (b) to 340 (d). There is. In the figure, the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is lost is shown. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed to inform that they are lost.

With reference to FIGS. 340 (b) to 340 (d), an example of the effect when the operation is accepted by the attack button 3710 at the timing t3 is shown, but the player at any timing from the timing t0 to the timing t14. It is possible to accept the operation from and execute one of the smoke display effect patterns.

As described above, the smoke display effect pattern can be executed a plurality of times by receiving the operation from the player not only once but a plurality of times from the timing t0 to the timing t14.

FIGS. 340 (e) to 340 (g) show an example of the effect when it is detected that the attack button 3710 is operated at the two timings of timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 340 (e) shows an effect example in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t3 and the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t8.
FIG. 340 (f) shows an effect example in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t3 and the smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at the timing t8.
FIG. 340 (g) shows an effect example in which the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t3 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at the timing t8.
Even when the smoke display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, the same display as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 340 (b) to 340 (d) is displayed in each execution of the effect pattern. Will be done.

If it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 during the execution of a certain smoke display effect pattern, the running smoke display effect pattern ends, and then FIG. 341 (f) shows. After continuing the display state shown in the above for 1 second, one of the smoke display effect patterns may be automatically executed, and the display state may be set to the display state shown in FIG. 341 (b) or later. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed is displayed, the smoke display effect pattern three times is automatically executed. Will be done.

An example in which the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected and the “sudden tank effect” is executed in one variable display is shown. The execution mode of "tank production" will be described.
In the "sudden tank effect", the effect is executed over a maximum of four variation displays, but the variation time required for each variation display is 14 seconds, and the variation stop time is 1 second.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the look-ahead effect pattern 02 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 343 and 344. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is an effect pattern in which the “sudden tank effect” is executed over the two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variation display. In addition, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same in the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04.
In the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the smoke image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decorative pattern, refer to FIGS. 340 and 341. The same display as the effect example described above is performed.

The display mode of the smoke image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 343 (a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 344 (a) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343 (b), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect by the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the timing t14, and the effect by the smoke display effect pattern 01 ends at the timing t14. From the timing t15, the display state shown in FIG. 344 (b) is obtained.
As shown in FIG. 343 (c), when the smoke display effect pattern 02 is started at the timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at the timing t14 to the timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 344 (c) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343 (d), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at the timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the smoke image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at the timing t14 to the timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 344 (c) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343 (e), when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed at the timing t14 to the timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 344 (d) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 343 (f), when the smoke display effect pattern 03 is started at the timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed at the timing t14 to the timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 344 (e) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.

At timing t15, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The display of the decorative pattern at this time is also started in a display mode such as "3 ↓ 3" that forms a reach state.

With reference to FIG. 343, the display mode of the smoke image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped has been described. , FIG. 345 will be described with reference to a display mode of a smoke image and a destruction image of an enemy tank when the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold targeted for the look-ahead effect is stopped.

FIGS. 345 (b) to 345 (f) show an effect example in which the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbol. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 345 (b) to 345 (f), even during the execution period of the selected smoke display effect pattern, the smoke display effect pattern being executed at timing t29 is stopped and decorated. An example of the effect of displaying the stop of the symbol is shown. At timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 342 (a) or FIG. 342 (b) is obtained based on the special lottery result.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big hit game state is started from the timing t30, the big hit game may be opened for the timing t30 to the timing t35, and the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 may be started from the timing t35. FIGS. 346 (b) to 346 (f) show an example of an effect in which a smoke image or a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped changing or during a jackpot game.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is lost, the smoke display effect pattern being executed may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the next fluctuation display is started from the timing t30, the tank production is suddenly continued in the next fluctuation display, and the “sudden tank production” is terminated in the middle of the fluctuation display. good.
FIGS. 346 (b) to 346 (f) show an example of an effect in which a smoke image or a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed while the change of the decorative symbol is stopped or when the next change display is started. ..

As described above, in the "sudden tank effect" according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept the operation of the attack button 3710 (operation unit) at the same time as the change of the decorative symbol starts, and the display effect based on the operation of the operation unit is performed. Since the number of times to perform is not predetermined and the display effect can be executed any number of times based on the player's intention, the player should be strongly interested in the operation to the operation unit. Can be done. In addition to simply operating the operation unit, pay attention to the display time of the smoke image (specific display) displayed in response to the operation (it is suggested that the longer the display time, the higher the expectation of a big hit. Because it is necessary, it can be more interesting. Further, since the fluctuation time of the decorative pattern is set to be short, it is possible to make the operation of the operation unit and the display time of the smoke image displayed in response to the operation more tense. In addition, as a look-ahead effect, by configuring this display effect so that it can be executed over the variation of a plurality of decorative symbols, the degree of expectation indicated by the display time of the smoke image is the degree of expectation for the variation of which decorative symbol. It is possible to raise the player's interest in whether or not there is.

Although three smoke display effect patterns are shown in FIG. 339, the “sudden tank effect” may be executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 02 are executed. Alternatively, the "sudden tank effect" is executed using a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 01 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed, or a table in which only the smoke display effect pattern 02 and the smoke display effect pattern 03 are executed. May be good.

Further, as the smoke display effect pattern 04, the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 4 seconds, and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second. In an effect mode in which the destruction image and the smoke image are displayed for 5 seconds and then only the destruction image is displayed for 1 second, one or both of the effect patterns with a jackpot expectation of 100% may be adopted. As described above, by adopting the effect pattern having a long effect execution period, the player can almost certainly notice that the expectation level is 100%, and it is possible to improve the interest.

With reference to FIGS. 338 to 346, the longer the display time of the smoke image (specific display) is, the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit is shown. An embodiment modified so that the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank in the embodiment), the higher the expectation that the result of the special lottery will be a big hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 347 to 354. .. The same processing and display as before the transformation may be omitted.

FIG. 347 shows an effect pattern selected in response to the operation of the attack button 3710.
When the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed for 3 seconds. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 1 second. At the same time, a white flag image showing that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for 1 second on the image that the enemy tank was destroyed.
When the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed for 2 seconds. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 1 second. At the same time, a white flag image showing that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for 1 second on the image that the enemy tank was destroyed.
When the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed for 1 second. After that, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed for 1 second. At the same time, a white flag image showing that the enemy tank has surrendered is displayed for 1 second on the image that the enemy tank was destroyed.

The appearance ratio is determined in advance by the white flag display effect pattern 01 to the white flag display effect pattern 03 so as to indicate the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be a big hit. The expectation when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed is 30%, the expectation when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed is 50%, and the expectation when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed is 100%. Is.

FIG. 348 (b) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed from the timing t3 to the timing t7 based on the operation for the attack button 3710.
FIG. 348 (c) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 02 is executed from the timing t3 to the timing t6 based on the operation for the attack button 3710.
FIG. 348 (d) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in which the white flag display effect pattern 03 is executed from the timing t3 to the timing t5 based on the operation for the attack button 3710.

FIG. 349 (b) shows a display example in the display area when the attack button 3710 is operated at the timing t3 in the effect example shown in FIGS. 348 (b) to 348 (d). In FIG. 349 (b), an image in which a shell is fired at an enemy tank and the shell explodes and an image of the destroyed enemy tank are displayed in the display area.

The display shown in FIG. 349 (b) is completed in less than 1 second (for example, 0.1 second), and the display state shown in FIG. 349 (c) is reached. In this display state, the turret of the enemy tank is destroyed and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. At this stage, the white flag image is not displayed yet.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348 (b), since the white flag display effect pattern 01 is selected, the white flag image shown in FIG. 349 (d) is set to the display state shown in FIG. 349 (c). Is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are displayed in a different way, indicating that the degree of expectation is low.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348 (c), since the white flag display effect pattern 02 is selected, the display state in which the white flag image is displayed 2 seconds after the display state shown in FIG. 349 (c) is displayed. (Not shown). As the line of "Colonel Dyna" displayed two seconds later, "The morale of the enemy army is OK ..." is displayed. Here, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" indicate that the expectations are moderate.

In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348 (d), since the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected, the white flag image shown in FIG. 349 (e) is one second after the display state shown in FIG. 349 (c) is displayed. Is displayed. Also, here, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" are displayed in a different way, indicating that the degree of expectation is high.

In this way, the longer the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed (either 1 second, 2 seconds, or 3 seconds), the higher the expectation of a big hit. Will be done.
Therefore, the player will visually recognize the display area in the expectation that the white flag image will not be displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank will be displayed for a long time.
In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" displayed when the display of the white flag image starts are displayed corresponding to each white flag display effect pattern. Therefore, the line of "Colonel Dyna" also suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit. The line of "Captain Dyna" corresponds to the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed, so the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. Even if you do not know the exact time when is displayed, you can know the degree of expectation, do not bother to check the time when the white flag image is not displayed and only the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. It is possible to make a player who has a low degree of concentration on a game feel the interest of the game.

One second after the white flag image is displayed, the image of a new enemy tank is displayed. For example, in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348 (b), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t7. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348 (c), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t6. In the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 348 (d), an image of a new enemy tank is displayed at timing t5. FIG. 349 (f) is an example of an effect showing a state in which an image of a new enemy tank is displayed.

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 348 (b) to 348 (d), the operation for the attack button 3710 is not performed thereafter, and the variation display of the decorative symbol ends at the timing t14.

FIG. 350 (a) shows a display state displayed for one second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is a big hit in the production example shown in FIGS. 348 (b) to 348 (d). There is. In the figure, a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "333" indicating that the result of the special lottery is a big hit is shown. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed to inform that they are big hits.
FIG. 350 (b) shows a display state displayed for 1 second from timing t14 to timing t15 when the result of the special lottery is lost in the production example shown in FIGS. 348 (b) to 348 (d). There is. In the figure, the state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed by "343" indicating that the result of the special lottery is lost is shown. In addition, the dialogue images of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" are also displayed to inform that they are lost.

With reference to FIGS. 348 (b) to 348 (d), an example of the effect when the attack button 3710 is operated at the timing t3 is shown, but the player at any timing from the timing t0 to the timing t14. It is possible to accept the operation from and execute one of the white flag display effect patterns.

Further, by accepting the operation from the player not only once but a plurality of times from the timing t0 to the timing t14, the white flag display effect pattern can be executed a plurality of times.

FIGS. 348 (e) to 348 (g) show an example of the effect when it is detected that the attack button 3710 is operated at the two timings of timing t3 and timing t8.
FIG. 348 (e) shows an effect example in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t3 and the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t8.
FIG. 348 (f) shows an effect example in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t3 and the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at the timing t8.
FIG. 348 (g) shows an effect example in which the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t3 and the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at the timing t8.
Even when the white flag display effect pattern is executed a plurality of times, in the execution of each effect pattern, the same display as the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 348 (b) to 348 (d) is displayed. Will be done.

If it is detected that the player has operated the attack button 3710 during the execution of a certain white flag display effect pattern, the white flag display effect pattern being executed is terminated, and then FIG. 349 (f) is shown. After continuing the display state shown in 1 for 1 second, any of the white flag display effect patterns may be automatically executed, and the display state may be set to the display state shown in FIG. 349 (b) or later. For example, if the player operates the attack button 3710 three times in a short period of time (for example, one second) while the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed is displayed, the white flag display effect pattern three times is automatically executed. Will be done.

An example in which the look-ahead effect pattern 01 is selected and the “sudden tank effect” is executed in one variable display is shown. The execution mode of "tank production" will be described.
In the "sudden tank effect", the effect is executed over a maximum of four variation displays, but the variation time required for one variation display is 14 seconds, and the variation stop time is 1 second.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the look-ahead effect pattern 02 is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352. The look-ahead effect pattern 02 is an effect pattern in which the “sudden tank effect” is executed over the two variable displays.
In this case, the target whose expectation level is suggested by the look-ahead effect is the special lottery result corresponding to the second variation display. In addition, the special lottery result corresponding to the variable display other than the second time is a loss. This point is the same in the look-ahead effect pattern 03 and the look-ahead effect pattern 04.
In the look-ahead effect pattern 02 to the look-ahead effect pattern 04, when the display of the white flag image or the image of the destroyed enemy tank starts and ends during the variable display of the decorative pattern, refer to FIGS. 348 and 349. The same display as the effect example described above is performed.

The display mode of the white flag image and the image of the destroyed enemy tank while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed will be described below.
As shown in FIG. 351 (a), when the attack button 3710 is not operated at all, the display state shown in FIG. 352 (a) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351 (b), when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at the timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the effect by the white flag display effect pattern 03 ends at the timing t14, and the effect by the white flag display effect pattern 03 ends at the timing t14. From the timing t15, the display state shown in FIG. 352 (b) is obtained.
As shown in FIG. 351 (c), when the white flag display effect pattern 02 is started at the timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed at the timing t14 to the timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 352 (c) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351 (d), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at the timing t12 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed at the timing t14 to the timing t15. Therefore, the display state shown in FIG. 352 (c) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351 (e), when the white flag display effect pattern 03 is started at the timing t13 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at the timing t14 to the timing t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 352 (d) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.
As shown in FIG. 351 (f), when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is started at timing t11 based on the operation of the attack button 3710, the white flag image and the destroyed enemy tank are displayed at timing t14 to t15. Since the image is displayed, the display state shown in FIG. 352 (e) is obtained from the timing t14 to the timing t15.

At timing t15, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. The display of the decorative pattern at this time is also started in a display mode such as "3 ↓ 3" that forms a reach state.

With reference to FIG. 351, the display mode of the white flag image and the destruction image of the enemy tank when the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold that occurred before the hold that was the target of the look-ahead effect is stopped has been described. , FIG. 353 will be described with reference to a display mode of a white flag image and a destruction image of an enemy tank when the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold targeted for the look-ahead effect is stopped.

FIGS. 353 (b) to 353 (f) show an example of the effect in which the execution period of the selected white flag display effect pattern overlaps with the stop display period (timing t29 to timing t30) of the decorative symbol. In the effect example shown in FIGS. 353 (b) to 353 (f), even during the execution period of the selected white flag display effect pattern, the white flag display effect pattern being executed at timing t29 is stopped and decorated. An example of the effect of displaying the stop of the symbol is shown. At timing t29 to timing t30, the display state shown in FIG. 350 (a) or FIG. 350 (b) is obtained based on the special lottery result.

On the other hand, only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display effect pattern being executed may be configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period. In this case, although the big hit game state is started from the timing t30, the big hit game may be opened for the timing t30 to the timing t35, and the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 2005 may be started from the timing t35. FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (f) show an example of an effect in which a white flag image or a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed while the change of the decorative symbol is stopped or during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the white flag display effect pattern being executed is configured to be executed for a predetermined execution period, and if the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the white flag display being executed is displayed. The effect pattern may be configured to be interrupted without being executed for a predetermined execution period. This prevents the occurrence of dissatisfaction that the result of the special lottery is lost even though the player has performed a production with high expectations when the display of the destroyed image of the enemy tank is interrupted. To do.
If the result of the special lottery is lost and there is one or more holds, the next fluctuation display will start from the timing t30, but even in the next fluctuation display, the "sudden tank production" will continue. It is advisable to configure the "tank production" to end suddenly in the middle of the fluctuation display. With such a configuration, it is possible to finish the "sudden tank production" in a natural way that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.
FIGS. 354 (b) to 354 (f) show an example of an effect in which a smoke image or a destroyed image of an enemy tank is displayed while the change of the decorative symbol is stopped or when the next change display is started. ..

Also in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 347 to 354, the same effect as that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 339 to 346 can be obtained. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 347 to 354, it is suggested that the shorter the display time of the destroyed enemy tank, the higher the expectation of the jackpot. Therefore, the player is the destroyed enemy. Expecting that the display time of the tank will be short, we will watch over the display effect.

Although the embodiment of the “sudden tank effect” is shown with reference to FIGS. 338 to 354, the embodiment may be modified as follows. In addition, although the embodiment in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the smoke image are displayed will be described as an example, the same modification is applied in the embodiment in which the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the white flag image are displayed. May be good.

As shown in FIGS. 339 and 347, the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is either 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. A predetermined sound effect may be output while the image of the destroyed enemy tank is displayed. For example, it is advisable to prepare sound effects for 2 seconds, 3 seconds, and 4 seconds in advance, and to start outputting the sound effects for the same number of seconds at the same time as the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is started. In this way, the display of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output of the sound effect may be configured to start at the same timing and end at the same timing.

On the other hand, it may be modified so that the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank and the output time of the sound effect are different. For example, only a sound effect with an output time of 4 seconds is prepared, and this sound effect is output regardless of whether the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is 2 seconds, 3 seconds, or 4 seconds. It should be configured as follows. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation cannot be known unless the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is watched, and the game can be made tense. It should be noted that only the sound effect having an output time of 3 seconds may be adopted, or only the sound effect having an output time of 2 seconds may be adopted.

The sound may be output by looping a predetermined sound effect. For example, the sound effect having a length of 1 second may be reproduced a plurality of times (2 times, 3 times, 4 times) according to the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank. For example, the sound effect having a length of 1 second may be reproduced four times in succession, and the sound effect may be output for 4 seconds. In this case as well, although the display time is different, the sound effect is output a certain number of times (for a certain period of time) so that the degree of expectation cannot be understood unless the display mode of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is watched. It becomes possible to give a feeling of tension to the game.

Although the expected degree when the smoke display effect pattern 01 is executed in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 339 is set to 30%, it may be set to 0% instead of 30%. Similarly, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 347, the expected degree when the white flag display effect pattern 01 is executed is set to 30%, but it may be set to 0% instead of 30%.

In this embodiment, based on the operation by the player, the effect pattern for displaying the image in which the enemy tank is destroyed can be executed a plurality of times with reference to each effect pattern shown in FIGS. 339 and 347. However, for a high-expected effect pattern, a limit may be set on the number of times the effect pattern is executed. For example, the number of times the smoke display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03, which has a 100% jackpot expectation, may be executed during one "sudden tank effect" may be limited to one. Further, the number of times the effect pattern having an expectation of 0% as described above is executed may be similarly limited to one time. With such a configuration, the player carefully observes whether or not the high-expectation (or low-expectation) staging pattern is executed, so that the game can be given a sense of tension.

As shown in FIGS. 341 and 349, in this embodiment, a decorative symbol (during variable display and stop display), a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710, an image of an undestroyed enemy tank, and a destroyed enemy. The image of the tank is displayed relatively small in the display area, but at least one of these may be displayed larger. For example, the decorative design may be varied and displayed in the sizes shown in FIGS. 303 (b) and 303 (c). In this case, the display mode in which these images overlap may be taken. In this case, the display priority is the highest for the image of the enemy tank that has not been destroyed and the image of the enemy tank that has been destroyed. ), In that order. In addition, it is advisable to further lower the display priority for images of own tanks, dialogue images, background images such as roads, and the like.

With such a configuration, the decorative pattern (during variable display and stop display), the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the image of the undestroyed enemy tank, or the image of the destroyed enemy tank overlap each other. Even if it is displayed, the visibility of the undestroyed enemy tank and the image of the destroyed enemy tank is not obstructed by the decorative pattern or the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. Therefore, the timing of the display start and end of the image of the destroyed enemy tank is clarified, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the display time of the image of the destroyed enemy tank, that is, the degree of expectation. can.

Although the embodiment in which the image of the enemy tank is always destroyed and displayed by operating the attack button 3710 is shown, the difficulty level for displaying the image of the enemy tank in the destroyed manner is increased. You may. In this case, the display conditions for the operation of the operation unit in the above-described embodiment may be adopted. For example, when the attack button 3710 is operated, a lottery is performed, and when a hit is made with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2), the image of the enemy tank is destroyed and displayed. May be good. In this way, by configuring the image of the destroyed enemy tank to be displayed when a specific condition is satisfied, the difficulty of displaying the image of the destroyed enemy tank can be increased, and the attack button 3710 can be displayed. Even if you are operating, you can make the player feel nervous that you do not know when the image of the destroyed tank will be displayed.

In the above embodiment, when the expectation of the jackpot is 100%, that is, when the result of the special lottery is the jackpot, the image of the tank destroyed in the "sudden tank effect" is displayed at a different time (smoke). An example of the effect when the display effect pattern 03 or the white flag display effect pattern 03 is selected) is shown, but it not only suggests that it is a big hit, but also suggests other game values that are beneficial to the player. May be done. For example, as described above, the time reduction is given from the normal gaming state by winning a symbol to which the time reduction is given, or by executing a predetermined number of loss fluctuations from the time of turning on the power or from the previous hit. It may be possible to execute "sudden tank production" in the loss fluctuation that triggers the switch to the game state. In this case as well, since it is common in that a time-saving gaming state is given instead of a hit as a profit advantageous to the player, various effects described in the above-described embodiment can be similarly achieved.

In the above-described embodiment, the expectation of a big hit is shown by "sudden tank production", but it may be configured to show the type of profit given to the player by "sudden tank production". For example, as a profit given to the player, which of the time-saving state and the probabilistic state is given after the changing decorative symbol becomes a big hit, or whether it is easy to be given (for example, the expectation of becoming the probabilistic state). What percentage is the degree) may be indicated. Alternatively, in a gaming machine capable of shifting to a time-saving state or a probabilistic state after a change in a decorative symbol without going through a jackpot state, whether a time-saving state or a probable change state is given after the change in the decorative symbol, or is given. It may indicate whether it is easy (for example, what percentage of expectation is expected to be in a probabilistic state).

In this way, according to the "sudden tank production", it is possible to improve the interest of the gaming machine.

Conventionally, there has been an effect in which a player is required to operate the operation unit (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-046210). In such an effect, the predetermined effect display is displayed regardless of whether the player performs an operation on the operation unit or not, so that the operation on the operation unit becomes tense. It was dim. In particular, even if a complicated operation mode is required, it is only a masquerade after all, and a predetermined effect is only performed regardless of the operation mode performed by the player on the operation unit. By executing such an effect, there is a risk that the player's interest in the effect display may be reduced. As described above, there is room for improvement in the conventional gaming machine in that the operation on the operation unit is effectively used for improving the entertainment of the game. Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension regarding the operation mode of the operation unit by the player, and thus it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest. Will be explained.

In the embodiments shown below, the operation of the left lever 3720 is required of the player, depending on whether or not the player can tilt the left lever 3720 in a predetermined direction and angle to maintain the state. It is configured so that there may be cases where the special effect display is not obstructed and cases where it is obstructed (when it cannot be visually recognized or when it is difficult to visually recognize it). There is.

Hereinafter, referring to the time chart shown in FIG. 355, the display example shown in FIG. 356, FIG. 357, and the like, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 within a predetermined range. Will be described. Note that FIG. 356 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is performed as shown in FIG. 355 (a). Further, FIG. 357 shows a display example when an appropriate operation is not performed as shown in FIG. 355 (b).

At the timing t5, the reach effect state occurs. In "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", a speed display window showing the speed of the own tank is displayed above the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". The display in the speed display window changes depending on the operation mode of the player with respect to the left lever 3720. Images of decorative patterns, roads, and tanks are displayed in the same manner as in other embodiments. FIGS. 356 (a) and 357 (a) show display examples at the timing t5 when the reach effect state occurs.

At the timing t5, the operation valid period of the left lever 3720 occurs. As shown with reference to FIG. 304, the position and speed of the own tank in the left-right direction can be changed by operating the left lever 3720. The operation valid period of the left lever 3720 is continued until the timing t34, which is the timing for stopping the fluctuation of the decorative symbol.

At timing t7, a shell is shot from behind the tank. This effect state is continued for 4 seconds until the timing t11. Also, during this period, a simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 is displayed on the left side of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". Further, the simulated image is provided with the character "forward tilt" indicating the operation mode of the left lever 3720.
356 (b) and 357 (b) show a display example at the timing t7.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is properly operated will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 355 (a), the display example shown in FIG. 356, and the like. Further, an example of the effect when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated will be described below with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 355 (b), the display example shown in FIG. 357, and the like.

From timing t7 to timing t11, the player needs to perform an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, it is necessary to maintain the left lever 3720 for 2 seconds between 10 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720. By performing such an operation, in the display area, the display that the own tank accelerates and moves is performed. FIG. 356 (c) shows a display example when the acceleration of the own tank is sufficient at the timing t9.

The time chart shown in FIG. 355 (a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t8 to timing t10. At the timing t11, the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 356 (d) shows a display example from timing t11 to timing t15 when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if the time to operate the left lever 3720 is insufficient or the operating angle is insufficient, the shell fired from the enemy tank hits the own tank. , The display that the shell explodes is made.

The time chart of FIG. 355 (b) shows an example of an effect in which the operation of the left lever 3720 is performed only for one second from timing t8 to timing t9 during the operation valid period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the speed of the tank is not enough. Therefore, from the timing t11, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the explosion of the cannonball around the image of the own tank is started.

The display state shown in FIG. 357 (c) shows a display example when the speed of the own tank is not sufficient at the timing t9. Further, FIG. 357 (d) shows a display example in which the smoke image is displayed from the timing t11 to the timing t15 because the speed of the own tank is not sufficient.

In addition, in FIG. 356 (c) and FIG. 356 (d), the state in which the character "30 km / h" is displayed as the speed of the own tank is shown. Further, in FIGS. 357 (c) and 357 (d), the state in which the characters "20 km / h" are displayed as the speed of the own tank is shown. In this way, when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720 during the operation instruction display, the display in the speed display window is set to 30 km / h or more, and the appropriate operation is performed during the operation instruction display. If there is no such operation, or if an appropriate operation is not performed during the operation instruction display, the display in the speed display window is set to less than 30 km / h. Specifically, the time after the left lever 3720 becomes an appropriate angle is measured, and the speed display of the own tank is increased by 1 km / h every 0.1 seconds. According to such a configuration, by looking at the display of the speed display window, the player can determine whether the operation mode of the left lever 3720 is properly performed and whether the operation of the left lever 3720 is properly performed. It is recognizable.

From timing t15 to timing timing t24, a display effect is performed in which the tank moves forward. Due to the explosion of the shell from the enemy unit, the display of the smoke image ends at the timing t15 even if the smoke image is displayed. FIGS. 356 (e) and 357 (e) show display examples in the display effect in which the tank moves forward from the timing t15 to the timing t24. The speed in the speed display window, which has been changed according to the operation on the left lever 3720, is the timing when the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 is performed again from the timing when the display of the smoke image ends (timing t15) (timing). It is preferable to set "10 km / h" at a predetermined timing until the timing t24).

In the present embodiment, the speed of the own tank can be changed according to the operation of the left lever 3720 during the period from the timing t5 to the timing t34. Therefore, by operating the left lever 3720 during the period when the operation instruction is not displayed, it is possible to practice changing the speed of the own tank. In this case, the display of the speed display window may be set to "10 km / h" at the timing when the speed instruction display is started.

At timing t24, images of a plurality of enemy tanks are displayed at the top of the display area. Images of a plurality of enemy tanks move to the left at the top of the display area and are displayed up to timing t32. At the same time, a simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 is displayed, and the operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is started. The operation instruction display for the left lever 3720 is performed until the timing t32.

From timing t24 to timing t32, the player needs to perform an operation of tilting the left lever 3720 forward by a predetermined angle for a predetermined period. Specifically, it is necessary to maintain the left lever 3720 for 4 seconds between 30 degrees and 45 degrees forward from the upright position of the left lever 3720. By performing such an operation, in the display area, the display is performed in which the tank accelerates to the maximum speed of 50 km / h and moves.

The time chart shown in FIG. 355 (a) shows a state in which the player can tilt the left lever 3720 at an appropriate angle from timing t25 to timing t29. At the timing t32, the operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 ends. FIG. 356 (g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when an appropriate operation is performed on the left lever 3720.

Next, from the timing t34 to the timing t35, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. FIG. 356 (h) is a display example showing a display state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, if the left lever 3720 is not operated properly, for example, if there is not enough time to operate the left lever 3720, the tilt angle is not enough, or the tilt direction is wrong, the own tank and the enemy tank The display shows that the tank collided with and exploded.

The time chart of FIG. 355 (b) shows a state in which the operation of appropriately tilting the left lever 3720 is performed only for 2 seconds from the timing t25 to the timing t27 during the operation valid period of the left lever 3720. In this case, the speed of the tank is not enough. Therefore, from the timing t32, which is the end timing of the operation instruction display, the display of the smoke image generated by the collision with the enemy tank is started around the image of the own tank.

FIG. 357 (g) shows a display example from timing t32 to timing t34 when the acceleration of the own tank is not sufficient. Further, FIG. 357 (h) shows a display example in which the smoke image is displayed from the timing t34 to the timing t35 when the stop display of the decorative symbol is performed.

In the display examples shown in FIGS. 356 and 357, a display example is shown when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, but the same display is performed when the result of the special lottery is lost. In this case, it is preferable to stop and display the decorative symbol with the number "343" to indicate that the result of the special lottery is a loss.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, when the player cannot operate the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the visibility of the stop display mode of the large decorative symbol is increased. Obstructed by smoke images. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to confirm the stop display mode of the decorative symbol displayed in a large size, and the player becomes conscious of performing an appropriate operation from the next time onward. On the other hand, when the player operates the left lever 3720 in an appropriate operation mode, the player can visually recognize the stop display mode of the large decorative symbol without impairing the visibility. You will feel satisfied that you have completed the operation with a sense of tension.

In the present embodiment, the operation instruction is displayed to the left lever 3720 twice, the period from the timing t7 to the timing t11 and the period from the timing t24 to the timing t32, and the effect display according to the operation mode in both periods is displayed. Will be done.
At this time, in the operation mode of the left lever 3720, the time required for the operation is longer and the operation angle is narrower in the later timing than in the first timing. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a more tense operation mode.

FIG. 355 (c) is a modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 355 (a) and 355 (b). In this embodiment, the display time of the smoke image when the smoke image is displayed by the shell of the enemy tank is lengthened, and the smoke image is displayed until the timing when the enemy tank group is displayed. There is.
Specifically, the smoke image is displayed up to the timing t27. In such a configuration, the display period of the smoke image (timing t11 to timing t27) and a part of the display period (timing t24 to timing t31) in which the second operation instruction display is performed overlap. Become.
At this time, it is preferable to configure the smoke image so that a part or all of the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 is hidden. Similarly, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the left lever 3720 and a part or all of the speed display window may be configured to be hidden.
With such a configuration, if an appropriate operation is not performed during the display period (timing t7 to timing t11) in which the first operation instruction display is performed, the display period in which the second operation instruction display is performed. Since it becomes difficult to recognize the operation mode in (timing t24 to timing t31), it is possible to further increase the tension in the operation of the left lever 3720.

Further, the length for displaying the smoke image when the left lever 3720 is not properly operated may be determined by lottery. For example, the display time may be determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 24 seconds. In this case, the smoke image is displayed for 4 seconds from timing t11 to timing t15 at the shortest, and for 24 seconds from timing t11 to timing t35 at the longest. In particular, when the longest display period is selected, the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the center of the display area becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the smoke image regardless of the operation mode of the left lever 3720 for the second time. ..

In addition, the technical idea relating to the "sudden tank effect" shown with reference to FIGS. 338 to 354 may be applied to the display mode of the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach". For example, the display time of the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach" may be configured to differ depending on whether or not a big hit state or a time saving state occurs.

An example of displaying smoke images when the player cannot perform an appropriate operation while displaying the operation instruction is shown, but it is possible to perform an appropriate operation instead of always displaying these images. If this is not possible, these images may be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2).
Further, if the special lottery result is lost, the smoke image is configured to be displayed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 3/4), and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the smoke image is not displayed. It may be configured as follows.
Further, a plurality of modes may be provided for the color and shape of the smoke image, and the display mode of the displayed smoke image may indicate the degree of expectation of the special lottery result.

Other embodiments obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 355 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359. FIG. 358 is a time chart according to this embodiment. Further, FIG. 359 shows a display example in the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, instead of the effect of displaying the tank group, the effect of displaying the minefield on the road on which the own tank advances from the timing t24 to the timing t29 is executed. FIG. 359 (a) shows a display example at the timing t29, which is the timing when the display of the minefield is started. From timing t24 to timing t29, it is displayed that the tank is approaching the minefield.

At the timing t26, the operation reception of the mission button 3700 becomes effective. The operation validity period of the mission button 3700 continues until the mission button 3700 is operated. If the mission button 3700 is not operated, it continues until the timing t29. Further, during the operation valid period of the mission button 3700, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed on the upper left of the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna". FIG. 359 (b) shows a display example at the timing t26 when the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 occurs.

As shown in FIG. 358 (c), when the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period (timing t28), the tank jumps and jumps over the advancing minefield. Is performed for 3 seconds. FIG. 359 (c) shows a display example at the timing (for example, timing t31) when the player operates the mission button 3700 during the operation valid period and the effect of the own tank jumping is completed. This display continues until the timing t34.

Next, from the timing t34 to the timing t35, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. FIG. 359 (d) is a display example showing a display state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

FIG. 358 (d) shows an example of the effect when the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation valid period. In this case, from timing t29 to timing t35, which is the timing when the operation valid period ends, a smoke image having a higher display priority than the own tank is displayed, the own tank enters the minefield, and the own tank is wrapped in smoke. The production display is performed. FIG. 359 (e) shows a display example from timing t29 to timing t34.

Next, from the timing t34 to the timing t35, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. FIG. 359 (f) is a display example showing a display state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At this time, the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the center of the display area is hidden by the smoke image.

As described above, when the mission button 3700 is properly operated, the visibility of the decorative symbol displayed as stopped is not impaired, but when the mission button 3700 is not properly operated, smoke is emitted. The visibility of the decorative pattern stopped and displayed by the image is impaired. Therefore, the player feels more nervous about the operation of the mission button 3700.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 359, the modified example shown with reference to FIG. 355 (c) may be applied. In this case, it is difficult to see the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700, and the display mode in which the own tank is jumping due to the smoke image generated by the shell of the enemy tank group. Or it becomes invisible. As a result, the tension on the operation of the left lever 3720 becomes higher.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, the stop display mode (or the decorative symbol) indicating the result of the special lottery depends on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within a predetermined operation range. The visibility of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the operation instruction display of the mission button 3700, and the effect display corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700) may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. The person will be nervous about the operation of the left lever 3720, and will be motivated to positively operate the left lever 3720, and the entertainment of the game will be improved.

An example of displaying a smoke image with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability) when the operation of the left lever 3720 is not appropriate is shown, but when the operation of the left lever 3720 is not appropriate, it depends on the operation content. , The probability of displaying the smoke image may be different. For example, when the tilting direction of the left lever 3720 is appropriate but the operation time is shorter than the predetermined time, the smoke image may be more easily displayed as the operation time is shorter. Further, when the operation is not performed or when the operation is performed in the direction opposite to the direction instructed to operate, the smoke image may be displayed with a probability of 90% or 100%.

The visual mode of the operation instruction image, the decorative pattern, or the like may be completely invisible by the smoke image, or may be partially invisible but partially visible. Alternatively, a semi-transparent image may be adopted as the smoke image, and the operation instruction image, the decorative pattern, or the like may be configured so as to be vaguely visible through the semi-transparent smoke image. With such a configuration, the visibility of the operation instruction image and the decorative design is guaranteed to a certain extent.

A display effect with 100% expectation and a very low appearance probability (displaying a predetermined character image, etc.) is configured to be executable, and the timing at which this display effect is executed is set to the timing at which the smoke image can be displayed. May be good. Further, the smoke image may be configured so that a part or all of this display effect is invisible or difficult to see. In this case, this display effect may be hidden by the smoke image, which is a very disappointing gaming situation for the player. With such a configuration, it is possible to keep the player more nervous about the operation of the operating means.

Although the smoke image hinders the visibility of the reach mode of the decorative symbol, even if the display time of the smoke image is set so that the display of the smoke image is completed by the time the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. good. For example, the display of the smoke image may be terminated at the timing t34, and the smoke image may not be displayed during the period from the timing t34 to the timing t35. With such a configuration, the smoke image does not obstruct the visibility of the stopped-displayed decorative design, so the result of the special lottery is lost even though the stopped-displayed decorative design shows a big hit. In that case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands, or the player misunderstands that it is a big hit even though the decorative pattern displayed as a stop indicates a loss.

Alternatively, even when the smoke image is displayed, the visibility of the decorative symbol displayed as a stop may be impaired or not impaired. For example, a lottery with a probability of 1/2 may be executed so that the decorative symbol displayed as stopped may be hidden or not hidden by the smoke image. Alternatively, if the tilted time of the left lever 3720 is less than half the required operating time, the stop-displayed decorative symbol remains hidden by the smoke image and the tilted time of the left lever 3720. If is more than half of the required operation time, the decorative symbol displayed as stopped may not be hidden by the smoke image (for example, the display of the smoke image ends at the timing t34). With such a configuration, the player can operate the left lever 3720 with a more tense feeling.

The variable display of the decorative pattern may be configured to be invisible or difficult to see over a plurality of variable displays by the smoke image.
For example, the display time of the smoke image may be 120 seconds instead of 4 seconds, and the smoke image may be displayed over the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols. Alternatively, the above-mentioned lottery mode may be modified as the smoke image display time so that the smoke image display time is determined by lottery from a minimum of 4 seconds to a maximum of 120 seconds. Further, an operation instruction display of the left lever 3720 is displayed. When the left lever 3720 is not tilted by ignoring both times (timing t7 to timing t11, timing t24 to timing t32), such a smoke image is displayed with a high probability (99/100 probability). It should be configured as follows.
In this case, during the period when the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (timing t32 to timing t34) and the period when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (timing t34 to timing t35), the decorative symbol or the like is hidden by the smoke image for visibility. Further, the visibility of the decorative symbol variation display and the decorative symbol stop display starting after the timing t35 may be impaired by the smoke image a plurality of times.
In this case, for the purpose of ensuring consistency as an effect, it is preferable to configure the “full power breakthrough reach” to continue even after the timing t35. In this case, the player is required to operate the left lever 3720 again.
Further, when the display of the smoke image straddles the variation display of the decorative symbol in this way, the operation of the left lever 3720 is invalidated even while the variation of the decorative symbol is stopped or immediately after the variation display starts (between timing t0 and timing t5). Instead, the operation validity period is configured for 7 that continues over multiple variable displays, so that the effect display (change of speed display in the speed display window, etc.) based on the operation reception of the left lever 3720 is performed at any time. It may be configured.

Although the speed of the own tank is displayed in the display area in the figure, it may be configured to display the tilted direction and the tilted angle of the left lever 3720. Alternatively, it may be configured to display the elapsed time since the left lever 3720 is tilted at a required angle under the situation where the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is given. With such a configuration, the player can recognize whether the left lever 3720 is operated in an appropriate range or how many seconds the left lever 3720 is operated in an appropriate range.

An example of displaying a simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 or displaying an operation instruction by the line of "Colonel Dyna" was shown, but in place of or in addition to this effect pattern, such a left lever 3720 is described. An effect pattern that requires a tilting operation of the left lever 3720 may be configured to be feasible without displaying a clear operation instruction by displaying an image. For example, the player can voluntarily tilt the left lever 3720 by displaying the mode in which the shell is fired from the rear to indicate that the enemy tank is approaching from the rear, and without displaying the operation instruction. It may be configured so that By configuring so that a more difficult gaming situation can occur in this way, it is possible to further increase the tension regarding the operation of the left lever 3720.

The player may not be able to properly recognize whether or not the left lever 3720 is properly maintained within a predetermined operating range. Therefore, the operation mode of the left lever 3720 may be notified by the vibration mode of the left lever vibration source 3722 built in the left lever 3720. For example, the vibration source may be vibrated for 0.5 seconds when the operating range of the left lever 3720 is moved within an appropriate operating range by the operation by the player. Alternatively, when the operating range of the left lever 3720 moves within the appropriate operating range, the vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 is started, and during the period when the operating range of the left lever 3720 is located within the appropriate operating range. The vibration of the left lever vibration source 3722 may be continued, and the vibration of the vibration source may be terminated when the operating range of the left lever 3720 is out of an appropriate range.

Further, although the operation mode of the left lever 3720 (whether the operation is properly performed) is indicated by the display content in the speed display window, the operation mode is displayed and the operation mode is displayed. It may be configured to have. For example, the smoke image may be configured to hide the speed of the tank in the speed display window. In this case, since the operation mode is not displayed, the player operates the left lever 3720 with a greater sense of tension.

An example of tilting the left lever 3720 to the front side is shown, but in order to make the operation more difficult, the range in which the lever should be operated is limited to the vicinity of 30 degrees on the front side (for example, the range of 25 to 35 degrees). If the tank is completely tilted 45 degrees to the front, smoke will be emitted from the engine of the tank with a predetermined probability (1/2 probability), and the smoke image shown in FIG. 357 (d) or FIG. 357 (g) will be displayed. It may be configured so that the smoke image is displayed and the image of the own tank and the operation instruction display are hidden. In this case, the player is required to perform an operation with a higher degree of difficulty, and it is possible to increase the tension. When such an embodiment is adopted, it is possible to practice tilting the left lever 3720 to an appropriate range at any time during the period when the left lever 3720 can be operated.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 358 and 359, if the left lever 3720 cannot be properly operated, a smoke image is displayed and the visibility of the operation instruction of the mission button 3700 is impaired. It is configured to be. Further, even if the mission button 3700 can be operated, the visibility of the effect display (display mode in which the own tank jumps) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 is obstructed by the smoke image. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the tension with respect to the operation of the left lever 3720.

Furthermore, the type of display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, the display mode of the dialogue of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation mode of the mission button 3700, the type of the dialogue itself, and the self when the mission button 3700 is operated. Depending on the type of display mode in which the tank jumps, an operation-compatible image indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be displayed. According to such a configuration, depending on whether or not the left lever 3720 can be operated within an appropriate operating range, the visibility of the display indicating the degree of expectation may or may not be obstructed by the smoke image. It will be. Therefore, as a player who wants to know the degree of expectation, he / she naturally operates the left lever 3720 with a sense of tension, and the improvement of the interest is realized.
In addition, the technical idea suggesting the degree of expectation in the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 308 to 312 imitates the image of the shell fired from the enemy unit in the "full power breakthrough reach", the left lever 3720. It may be applied to a simulated image, a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700, an image of an enemy tank group, an image of a minefield, or the like. For example, the degree of expectation that a big hit state or a time saving state may occur may be configured to be shown by the display mode of these images in the "full power breakthrough reach". Further, the technical idea relating to the shield image in the "shield bullet reach" may be applied to the smoke image in the "full power breakthrough reach".

Although the operation of the mission button 3700 is requested after the operation instruction of the left lever 3720 is completed, the operation of the mission button 3700 may be requested during the request of the operation instruction of the left lever 3720. With such a configuration, the difficulty of operating the left lever 3720 and the operation of the mission button 3700 increases, and the tension of the player can be further increased. When both operation instruction displays are performed at the same time, it is preferable to display them in such a manner that the operation instruction displays do not overlap each other. For example, the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 in the display mode shown in FIG. 356 (b) and the display mode shown in FIG. 356 (b) and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 may be displayed in a non-overlapping manner. If the area available for display in the display area is insufficient, either the simulated image imitating the left lever 3720 or the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is placed on the front side, and one of them is placed on the back side. It is advisable to display a part of the simulated image displayed at the rear so that it can be visually recognized while displaying the images in an overlapping manner.

By the way, if the difficulty level is increased too much, a player who is not good at complicated operations may avoid the game. Therefore, even if there is no operation by the player, we adopted an auto reception mode that executes the same effect display as when there was an appropriate operation by the player, and did not operate the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700. Even in such a case, the same effect display as when the player performs an appropriate operation may be executed. In this case, the player need only concentrate on operating the operation unit that is not in the auto reception mode.
It may be configured so that only the operation of the left lever 3720 can be set to the auto acceptance mode, only the operation of the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto acceptance mode, and both the operations of the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700 can be set to the auto acceptance mode.
In particular, when only the operation of the mission button 3700 is set to the auto acceptance mode, the player only has to concentrate on operating the left lever 3720 well, so that the player who is not accustomed to "full power breakthrough reach" is confused. Can be prevented. Further, when the auto acceptance mode is set for both the left lever 3720 and the mission button 3700, the player only has to concentrate on visually recognizing the effect without operating the left lever 3720 or the mission button 3700. ..

In addition to the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730 may be further configured to be operable. For example, in the operation of the right lever 3730, it is preferable that the effect mode is executed so that the right lever 3730 is tilted within a predetermined tilt range for a predetermined time as in the case of the left lever 3720. For example, it is advisable to display an effect that dust is generated from the caterpillar that expresses the mode in which the tank is accelerating. In this case, it is preferable to configure so that the image (simulated image or the like) instructing the operation of the right lever 3730 is not displayed.
As described above, the right lever 3730 may have an effect mode that makes the effect display based on the operation by the left lever 3720 look gorgeous. Therefore, the operation instruction is not displayed, and the expected degree is not suggested by the image displayed based on the operation of the right lever 3730.
The operation valid period of the right lever 3730 may match the operation valid period of the left lever 3720.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a higher sense of tension for the player who is tired of operating the left lever.

Further, the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 should be easily touched at a position where it is difficult to operate at the same time, a position where they cannot be operated (a position where they cannot be operated), and a position where they cannot be operated. It is recommended to install it in a position where it cannot be used. That is, since one operation unit is operated by one hand, the tension of the game can be further increased.
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the three operation units of the left lever 3720, the right lever 3730, and the mission button 3700 may be able to be operated at the same time. You can give a feeling of tension.
In the operation unit shown in FIG. 301, since the attack button 3710 is provided between the mission button 3700 and the left lever 3720 and the distance between them is large, it is extremely difficult to operate both operation units with one hand. It's impossible. On the other hand, the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 are close to each other. Therefore, the positions where the right lever 3730 and the defense button 3740 are provided may be exchanged. In this case, since the defense button 3740 is located between the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730, it is extremely difficult or impossible to operate both operation units with one hand.

Although the embodiment in which the left lever 3720 is used for a predetermined effect is shown, the right lever 3730 may be used instead of the left lever 3720. Both the left lever 3720 and the right lever 3730 may be capable of accepting operations, and when the operation for either of the levers satisfies the above-mentioned conditions, the above-mentioned display effect or the like may be enabled to be executed.

As described above, according to the "full power breakthrough reach" in the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the tension of the operation with respect to the operation unit.

Conventionally, it has been known to press one operation unit in a gaming machine. In this case, by providing a plurality of operation units and using the operation units for the staging, it is possible to improve the game entertainment (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-087633). Further, when the operations to the plurality of operation units are enabled at the same time, the game entertainment can be further improved. On the other hand, for a player who demands a simple game, the demand for such a complicated operation mode may cause troublesomeness and stress, and may lead to a decrease in interest. Hereinafter, a gaming machine that satisfies each of the players having different tastes and does not deteriorate the interest in any case will be described.

In the "AI tank reach" in the present embodiment, the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 may be activated at the same time at a predetermined timing during the display effect, but the attack button 3710 indicating the operation instruction of the attack button 3710 is used. It is possible for the player to set whether or not to display each of the simulated image imitating the simulated image and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 indicating the operation instruction of the mission button 3700.
In advance, the player displays only the first setting (first staging situation) that displays both the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710 and the simulated image that imitates the mission button 3700, and the simulated image that imitates the attack button 3710. Second setting (second production status), third setting to display only a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 (third production status), simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and imitating the mission button 3700 It is possible for the player to select and set one of the four settings (effect status) of the fourth setting (four effect status) that does not display both of the simulated images. ..
The selection by the player is configured to be made by using the left lever 3720, the attack button 3710, etc. during the demonstration in which the decorative pattern is not changing. Further, when the power is turned on without being selected by the player, the first setting is selected by default.

When the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 occurs during the variable display of the decorative pattern, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are simulated in a manner corresponding to the setting selected by the player. The image is displayed. For example, when the player selects the third setting, the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and only the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.

Below, regarding "AI tank reach", with reference to FIGS. 360 to 365, etc., depending on whether or not the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated when the first setting to the fourth setting are made. A display example will be described.

FIG. 360 (a) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the first setting (first staging situation) is made and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed.
FIG. 362 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 360 (a), and shows a display state in which the first setting is made and a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. It is a figure.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 360 (a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 362 (a) is a display example at timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of the enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In addition, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 are displayed. Further, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed. FIG. 362 (b) shows a display example at the timing t8.
The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 are continued for 3 seconds until the timing t11, respectively. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Further, at the timing when the operation valid period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period, a shell is fired from the turret of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 362 (c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 362 (d) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a shell hits an enemy tank and the shell explodes is displayed. The movement display of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation validity period, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 362 (e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 362 (f) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a bullet hits an enemy tank and the bullet explodes is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed.
If the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation validity period, the display that the shell or bullet moves or explodes is not displayed, and the enemy tank moves backward. As a result, the display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
It should be noted that even after the timing t23, the same display effect as that of such a display effect executed after the timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 360 (b) shows an embodiment in which the second setting (second effect situation) is made and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a chart.
FIG. 363 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 360 (b), and the second setting is made, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, but the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not displayed. It is a figure which shows the state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 360 (b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 363 (a) is a display example at the timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of the enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In addition, the line of "Sergeant Might" instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed. Further, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the operation valid period (timing t8 to timing t11) of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. I can't. FIG. 363 (b) shows a display example at the timing t8.
The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 are continued for 3 seconds until the timing t11, respectively. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Further, at the timing when the operation valid period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period, a shell is fired from the turret of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 363 (c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 363 (d) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a shell hits an enemy tank and the shell explodes is displayed. The movement display of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation validity period, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 363 (e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 363 (f) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a bullet hits an enemy tank and the bullet explodes is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed.
If the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation validity period, the display that the shell or bullet moves or explodes is not displayed, and the enemy tank moves backward. As a result, the display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
It should be noted that even after the timing t23, the same display effect as that of such a display effect executed after the timing t8 is performed.

In FIG. 361 (a), the third setting (third staging situation) is made, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a chart.
FIG. 364 corresponds to the time chart shown in FIG. 361 (a), and the third setting is made, and the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, but the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It is a figure which shows the state.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 361 (a), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 364 (a) is a display example at the timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of the enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In addition, the line of "Colonel Dyna" instructing the operation of the mission button 3700 is displayed. Further, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is not displayed, and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. It will be. FIG. 364 (b) shows a display example at the timing t8.
The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 are continued for 3 seconds until the timing t11, respectively. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Further, at the timing when the operation valid period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period, a shell is fired from the turret of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 364 (c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 364 (d) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a shell hits an enemy tank and the shell explodes is displayed. The movement display of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation validity period, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 364 (e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 364 (f) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a bullet hits an enemy tank and the bullet explodes is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed.
If the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation validity period, the display that the shell or bullet moves or explodes is not displayed, and the enemy tank moves backward. As a result, the display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
It should be noted that even after the timing t23, the same display effect as that of such a display effect executed after the timing t8 is performed.

FIG. 361 (b) is a time chart showing an embodiment in which the fourth setting (fourth staging situation) is made and neither the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed.
FIG. 365 is a diagram showing a display state in which the fourth setting is made corresponding to the time chart shown in FIG. 361 (b), and neither the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 nor the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed. Is.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 361 (b), "AI tank reach" occurs at timing t5. In "AI Tank Reach", a display effect is performed in which the tank moves on a mountain road. FIG. 365 (a) is a display example at the timing t5.
At timing t8, an image of the enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. Further, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 are started. Further, during the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 (timing t8 to timing t11), the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are not displayed. FIG. 365 (b) shows a display example at the timing t8.
The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 are continued for 3 seconds until the timing t11, respectively. On the other hand, if the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation valid period, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 ends. Further, at the timing when the operation valid period ends, the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 also ends.
If the attack button 3710 is operated during the operation validity period, a shell is fired from the turret of the own tank, the fired shell moves toward the enemy tank, the shell hits the enemy tank, and the shell is fired. The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 365 (c) shows an example of a display in which a shell is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 365 (d) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a shell hits an enemy tank and the shell explodes is displayed. The movement display of the shell and the subsequent display of the image of the shell exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the attack button 3710 is performed.
If the mission button 3700 is operated during the operation validity period, a bullet is fired from the machine gun of the own tank, the fired bullet moves toward the enemy tank, the bullet hits the enemy tank, and the bullet The effect display that explodes is performed. FIG. 365 (e) shows an example of a display in which a bullet is moving toward an enemy tank. Further, FIG. 365 (f) shows an example of an effect in which an image in which a bullet hits an enemy tank and the bullet explodes is displayed. The movement display of the bullet and the subsequent display of the image of the bullet exploding are performed for 3 seconds after the operation to the mission button 3700 is performed.
If the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is not operated during the operation validity period, the display that the shell or bullet moves or explodes is not displayed, and the enemy tank moves backward. As a result, the display that is not displayed in the display area is performed.
It should be noted that even after the timing t23, the same display effect as that of such a display effect executed after the timing t8 is performed.

The operation validity period of the attack button 3710 and the operation validity period of the mission button 3700 are the same. At this time, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and a simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 are displayed corresponding to the settings selected by the player. In addition, in response to the display of these simulated images, the lines of "Colonel Dyna" and "Sergeant Might" also change to indicate the operation instruction mode. When the operation to either the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is accepted, the operation valid period ends. Therefore, when the operation of one of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is accepted, the effect display corresponding to the operation to the other operation unit is not performed.

It is preferable to configure the display mode such as an image of an enemy tank, a simulated image imitating an attack button 3710, an image of a shell exploding, and the like to suggest the degree of expectation of a big hit. In this case, it is preferable to apply the suggestion modes of various expectations in the “shield bullet reach” shown with reference to FIGS. 308 to 312 to the display effect in the present embodiment.
As for the display mode of the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 and the image in which the bullet explodes, it is preferable to adopt the same mode as the display mode of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the image in which the bullet explodes.

As described above, according to the "AI tank reach" in the present embodiment, the production situation in which the simulated image imitating the operation unit is displayed based on the intention of the player, and the display of the simulated image imitating the operation unit. Since it is possible to realize a production situation in which the game is not performed, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

An example is shown in which the player can select the first to fourth settings, but an operation unit (dIP switch, button, etc.) capable of selecting the setting is provided on the rear surface of the door frame 3, and the clerk of the game store can select the setting. The setting may be changed with the door of the door frame 3 open. With such a configuration, it is possible to provide the player with an optimum gaming environment by appropriately changing the settings according to the customer base of the gaming store, the location situation, the number of days elapsed since the introduction, and the like. The settings made by the gaming store may be valid only when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and may be configured so that the player can change the settings thereafter.

The first setting in which the display of the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is not restricted by the operation of a predetermined operation unit (for example, the defense button 3740) that can be operated by the player, and the attack. The display of the simulated image imitating the button 3710 and the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is restricted. One of the second setting to the fourth setting is configured to be switched alternately. May be good. For example, if the player has selected the second setting, the defense button 3740 can be switched to the first setting by operating the defense button 3740 once, and the player can operate the defense button 3740 once more. , It is advisable to configure it so that it becomes the second setting again. If the player has selected the first setting, the state in which the first setting is selected continues even if the defense button 3740 is operated. For example, it may be configured so that the setting can be switched when the defense button 3740 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, timing t14) while the decorative symbol is variablely displayed. On the other hand, during the operation valid period (the period during which the simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 or the simulated image imitating the mission button 3700 is displayed), the setting may not be switched.
With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly switch to a setting in which both the simulated image of the attack button 3710 and the simulated image of the mission button 3700 are displayed.

If the setting can be switched by the player with a simple operation, there may be a situation in which the player feels dissatisfied, such as the setting being switched when the player mistakenly presses a button. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the setting switching is not easily executed. For example, the setting may be switched when a specific condition related to an operation such as pressing and holding the defense button 3740 for 3 seconds is satisfied.

If the non-game state continues for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and if the settings are the second setting to the fourth setting, the setting is automatically changed to the first setting, which is the default setting. You may try to do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player who has started the game from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the setting.

An example is shown in which both the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 can be operated at the same time, and when one of the buttons is operated, the operation validity period of the other button ends. Even when is operated, it may be configured so that the operation validity period of the other button does not end. For example, if the attack button 3710 is operated and then the mission button 3700 is operated, the effect display (bullet firing / movement / explosion display) corresponding to the operation of the attack button 3710 is started. , The effect display (bullet firing / movement / explosion display) corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 may be started.

It may be configured so that only the operation of the attack button 3710 is valid and the case where only the operation of the mission button 3700 is valid. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display the simulated image of the button for which the operation is enabled based on the setting. Alternatively, the setting is not limited, and a simulated image of the operating means for which the operation is enabled may be displayed. When there is only one operation unit for which the operation is effective, it is assumed that the player does not feel difficulty in operating the button, and therefore it is useful to adopt such a method.

Instead of enabling the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 at the same time, for example, in a situation where one operation unit is effective, the other operation unit may be enabled. In this case as well, it is advisable to determine whether or not to display a simulated image imitating the operation unit based on the setting.

After the mission button 3700 becomes operational, the attack button 3710 may be activated. Here, when the image corresponding to the operation of the mission button 3700 (the image in which the bullet is moving) is displayed and the attack button 3710 is enabled for operation, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. It may be configured not to be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the information from becoming excessive, and the stress that the player can feel is reduced.

A sound effect indicating that the operation valid period has started or is in the operation valid period may be output before or at the same time as the operation valid period occurs. For example, a predetermined sound effect may be output at a timing (timing t7 to timing t8, timing t22 to timing t23) before the operation valid period starts. Alternatively, a predetermined sound effect may be output when the operation valid period occurs (timing t8 to timing t9, timing t23 to timing t24).
On the other hand, if it is set not to display the simulated image of the operation unit even if the operation valid period has occurred, it is preferable to configure the operation unit so as not to output a sound effect indicating that the operation valid period has occurred. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling confused. On the other hand, when an operation is performed, a predetermined sound corresponding to the operation reception may be output. In this case, it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect from being reduced.

Depending on the selected setting, there may be an effect situation in which one simulated image imitating a button is displayed and an effect situation in which two simulated images imitating a button are displayed. At this time, when only one simulated image is displayed, the size of the simulated image may be displayed larger than that when two simulated images are displayed.
With such a configuration, the display area can be effectively used. In addition, a player who does not select the display of a plurality of simulated images may not notice that the simulated image is displayed at an old age, but the operation is effective by displaying the simulated image in a large size in this way. It is possible to notice that it has become, and it is possible to more preferably suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the third operation unit (defense button 3740) is used, and both the first operation unit (attack button 3710) and the second operation unit (mission button 3700) can accept operations, and the first operation unit is simulated. In the first staging situation where both the image (display related to the operation of the first operation unit) and the simulated image of the second operation unit (display related to the operation of the second operation unit) are displayed, the third operation unit is displayed by the player. Based on the operation of, a special display may appear that makes it difficult to visually recognize both the simulated image of the first operation unit and the simulated image of the second operation unit.
For a player who originally operates the third operation unit in a situation where the first operation unit or the second operation unit is operated, the player is informed that the operation is incorrect by this special display. It is possible to suggest. It is considered that the player who operates the third operation unit intentionally performs such an action in the situation where the simulated image of the first operation unit and the simulated image of the second operation unit are clearly displayed. Therefore, in order to display a special display for such an intentional player, the appearance condition of the display is not limited to simply operating the third operation unit, but the third operation unit may be used. It is desirable that the above-mentioned special display is performed when the operation is performed and the operation time of the third operation unit satisfies the special condition of a predetermined number of seconds or more.

As described above, according to the "AI tank reach" in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the effect related to the display mode of the simulated image.

Conventionally, after performing a special precursor effect suggesting that the operation is effective at the timing before the operation to the operation unit becomes effective, the operation unit is effective during the period when the operation to the operation unit is effective. It is expected that the special lottery result will be a big hit based on the operation of the operation unit by displaying the operation unit simulated image that imitates the operation unit and urging the player to operate the operation unit. A gaming machine that suggests a degree has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-125549).

By performing such a special precursor effect, it is shown to the player that the operation to the operation unit can be effective.
However, some players are distracted by the precursory effect by performing such a precursory effect, and display a simulated image of the operation unit indicating that the operation of the operation unit is effective, or the operation unit. There is a risk that attention to the operation itself will be distracted, and it will not be possible to face the operation unit with sufficient time for displaying the simulated image of the operation unit and operating the operation unit.
For example, some skilled players want to focus their attention on the operation of the operation unit rather than visually recognizing the precursory effect and enjoying it as an effect. This is because the player only visually recognizes the precursory effect, but the operation to the operation unit is concentrated with the expectation that the operation will be a big hit by the player's own will. .. However, there is a risk that such concentration of consciousness will be disturbed by the precursory staging performed before the expiration date.
On the other hand, the player who has little experience in playing cannot understand the meaning of various effects including the precursor effect, and does not notice that the operation unit simulated image showing that the operation to the operation unit is effective is displayed. There is a possibility that the operation unit cannot be operated and the opportunity to intervene in the production is impaired.

In this way, the precursory staging that is not relatively important to the player hinders the concentration of the operation action on the operation unit, which is relatively important to the player, and the operation of the operation unit is effective. The display of the simulated image of the operation unit shown may not be noticeable.
In the embodiment shown below, it is configured so that the visibility of the precursory effect can be reduced by the player's own will, and a simulated image of the operation unit indicating that the operation of the operation unit is effective is displayed. , An example is shown in which the user can concentrate on the operation of the operation unit.

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the “shield bullet reach” shown with reference to FIG. 308 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 366, 367, 368 and the like.
FIG. 367 is a diagram showing a time chart in this embodiment. 366 and 368 are views showing a display example in the display area.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to set the display mode of the precursory effect during the demonstration. When the state in which the decorative symbol shown with reference to FIG. 303 (a) is not variablely displayed has elapsed for a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes), it is determined that the game has not been performed, and FIG. 366 (a) shows. Control is performed to shift to the indicated display state. FIG. 366 (a) shows a display example during the demonstration. Further, when the attack button 3710 is pressed from the display state shown in FIG. 303 or the display state shown in FIG. 366 (a), the display state changes to the display state shown in FIG. 366 (b). As shown in FIGS. 366 (a) to 366 (c), the decorative symbol in this case is displayed in the upper left of the display area in the stopped display state in a smaller size than in the variable display.

FIG. 366 (b) shows a display state in which the display mode of the precursor staging can be set. In this state, by operating the left lever 3720 in the left-right direction, one of "normal display", "small display", and "not display" can be selected. The frame corresponding to the selected setting is displayed thick. In addition, the dialogue displayed in the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant" indicates to the player how to select the setting. When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, "normal display" is automatically selected.

FIG. 366 (c) shows a display state in which "normal display" is selected and "small display" is selected by tilting the left lever 3720 to the right. By operating the attack button 3710 again in this state, the display state shown in FIG. 366 (a) is restored. At the same time, the setting content selected by the player (in this case, the setting content of displaying the precursory effect in a small size) is stored in the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, the player can select any of the display settings having different visibility of the precursor staging.
Even when "not display" is selected by the player, the same display and storage processing of the selected setting contents are performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 367 and 368, a display mode at the time of executing the precursory effect will be described. FIG. 367 (a) shows a variable state of the decorative symbol and an operation acceptance state of the attack button 3710 (whether the operation acceptance is a valid state or an invalid state). FIGS. 367 (b) and 367 (c) show display states of support dialogue images, attack button simulated images, enemy tank images, and the like when "normal display" is selected. In this embodiment, the display of the cheering dialogue image functions as a precursory effect. 368 (a) to 368 (d) are display examples of the display area when "normal display" is selected.

As shown in FIG. 367, the cheering dialogue image is displayed for 6 seconds from the timing t13 to the timing t19. As the cheering dialogue image, four cheering dialogue images of "<Ganbare-", "<Ganbare-", "Harure->", and "Ganbare->" are displayed. The two cheering dialogue images "<Out of place ~" and "<Ganbare ~" appear from the left end of the display area, move horizontally to the right in the display area, and go out of the display area at the right end of the display area. And move. On the other hand, the two cheering dialogue images "Haruro ~>" and "Ganbare ~>" appear from the right end of the display area, move horizontally to the left in the display area, and move horizontally to the left in the display area, and the display area is at the left end of the display area. Move out. Further, from the timing t13, the image of the enemy tank is displayed to move from the right end to the left end of the display area.

FIG. 368 (a) shows a display example at the timing t14, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering serif image has just started. FIG. 368 (b) shows a display example at the timing t16, which is the timing when the support dialogue image is displayed in the middle stage. FIG. 368 (c) shows a display example at the timing t18, which is the timing when the display of the cheering serif image is in the final stage. As shown in the display example, the cheering dialogue image moves horizontally to the right or left.

At the same time that the display of the support dialogue image ends at the timing t19, the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 368 (d) shows a state in which an operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area (for example, a display state at timing t20). After the display of the support dialogue image is completed, the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, the operation valid period is started, and the operation and operation to the attack button 3710 are valid as in the embodiment shown for the "shield bullet reach". The destruction image is displayed based on the end of the period, suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit. FIG. 367 (b) shows a display state when the attack button 3710 is operated at the timing t21. Further, FIG. 367 (c) shows a display state when the operation valid period ends at the timing t22.

Next, a display example when "small display" is selected will be described. FIG. 367 (d) is a time chart when "small display" is selected. FIGS. 368 (e) to 368 (g) are display examples when "small display" is selected.
Note that FIG. 368 (e) shows the display state at the timing t14. Further, FIG. 368 (f) shows the display state at the timing t16. Further, FIG. 368 (g) shows the display state at the timing t18.
As shown in FIGS. 368 (e) to 368 (g), when "small display" is selected, the cheering dialogue image is displayed smaller than when "normal display" is selected, and the image is visually recognized. It is considered to be a difficult situation.

Next, a display example when "Hide" is selected will be described. FIG. 367 (e) is a time chart when "not display" is selected. When "Do not display" is selected, only the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the display area, and the support dialogue image is not displayed during the period from timing t13 to timing t19.
When "Do not display" is selected in this way, the cheering dialogue image is not displayed as in the case where "Normal display" or "Small display" is selected.

In this way, by setting by the player during the demonstration, it is possible to take three states: a state where the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) is displayed, a state where it is displayed small, and a state where it is not displayed. , It is possible to execute an effect mode that suits the taste of the player. For example, a player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display can display or operate a simulated image of the operation unit imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) by making the special precursor display difficult to see or invisible. You can concentrate your consciousness on the operation of the club.

By the way, in the above embodiment, it is possible to change the visual mode of the precursor staging only during the demonstration. Therefore, when trying to change the visual mode of the precursory effect, it is necessary to temporarily set the number of hold to 0 so that the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, and the player decides to set the number of hold to 0. There was a risk that the tempo of the game would be impaired by feeling annoyed or setting the number of holds to 0.

Therefore, an embodiment modified so that the visual mode of the precursor staging can be changed during the variable display of the decorative pattern will be described with reference to the time chart and the like shown in FIG. 369.

FIGS. 369 (a) to 369 (c) are time charts showing the same staging mode as the embodiment shown in FIGS. 367 (a) to 367 (c). That is, the variable display of the decorative pattern, the simulated image of the operation unit of the attack button 3710, the destruction image of the enemy tank, and the operation validity period have the same effect mode.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 369 (d), the defense button 3740 is from t5, which is the timing when the reach effect is started, to t27, which is the timing after the display of the destruction image of the enemy tank is finished. The operation of is valid. Then, when a specific condition is satisfied for the operation of the defense button 3740 (details will be described later, but when a long press or a continuous hit operation is detected), the support dialogue image is displayed smaller than the normal display. Alternatively, it can be changed to a state in which it is not displayed.

FIG. 369 (e) is a time chart when "small display" is selected in the setting during the demonstration. After the cheering dialogue image is displayed at the timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering dialogue image is displayed small on condition that the long press is detected at the timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering serif image is changed from the display state shown in FIG. 368 (a) to the display state shown in FIG. 368 (e) while the cheering serif image is being displayed.

FIG. 369 (f) is a time chart when "Hide" is selected in the setting during the demo. After the cheering dialogue image is displayed at the timing t13, the player presses and holds the defense button 3740, and the cheering dialogue image is not displayed on condition that the long press is detected at the timing t14. In this case, for example, the display state of the cheering serif image is changed during the display of the serif image from the normal display state shown in FIG. 368 (a) to the state in which the cheering serif image is not displayed.

The display state in which the cheering line image is displayed in a small size and the display state in which the cheering line image is hidden are configured to continue as long as the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected.
Alternatively, once the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, even if the player releases the defense button 3740, the support dialogue image is displayed small until the timing t19, which is the timing when the display of the support dialogue image ends. You may continue to be in the state of being displayed or the state in which the support line image is not displayed.

Further, by pressing and holding the defense button 3740 in advance during the period from the timing t5, which is the timing when the operation valid period of the defense button 3740 is started, to the timing t13, when the display of the support dialogue image is started, the support dialogue is given. From the timing t13, which is the timing at which the image display is started, it is possible to display the cheering dialogue image in a small size or to not display the cheering dialogue image in the first place.

In this embodiment, the display mode of the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) is set in advance during the demonstration, and the reach effect is generated during the variable display of the decorative pattern, so that the first operation unit (1st operation unit ( When there is a possibility that the display of the special precursor display (support line image) suggesting that the attack button 3710) can be operated is executed, the second operation unit (defense button 3740) is operated at an arbitrary timing. Then, the player can select the display mode of the special precursor display during the variable display of the decorative pattern. For example, when the player does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display, the visibility of the special precursor display is lowered to make it difficult or invisible, so that the player can imitate the first operation unit. You can concentrate your consciousness on the display of and the operation of the operation unit.

Instead of detecting the long press of the defense button 3740, the display mode of the support dialogue image may be changed when the continuous hitting of the defense button 3740 is detected.

The cheering dialogue image display mode setting function during the demonstration as shown in FIG. 366 is not provided, and the cheering dialogue image is displayed in a small size only based on the detection of the long press of the defense button 3740. May be good. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the cheering dialogue image is not displayed.

In the "shield bullet reach" shown with reference to FIG. 308 and the like, an embodiment in which a shield image is displayed by operating the defense button 3740 is shown, but the support dialogue image is displayed by displaying such a shield image. An embodiment modified to be hidden is shown below.

With reference to FIGS. 369 (a) to 369 (d), FIGS. 369 (g) to 369 (h), and FIG. 370, an image (first shield image) for hiding the special precursor display (support line image) is displayed. An embodiment modified to be displayed will be described. In the present embodiment, based on the operation of the second operation unit (defense button 3740), the cheering dialogue image is not displayed or hidden in a small size, but an image that hides the cheering dialogue image (first shield image). ) Is displayed to hide the cheering dialogue image, thereby reducing the visibility of the cheering dialogue image and making it difficult or invisible.

FIG. 369 (g) is a time chart showing a display state of the first shield image when a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in this staging example). The display period of the first shield image is predetermined to be 6 seconds. In this production example, it is displayed for 6 seconds from the timing t14 to the timing t20. Further, it is not necessary to continuously press and hold the defense button 3740, and after the long press is detected and the first shield image is displayed, the first shield image is displayed even if the defense button 3740 is released. Will be continued.

FIG. 370 (a) shows a display example at the timing t14, which is the timing at which the display of the cheering serif image has just started. FIG. 370 (b) shows a display example at the timing t16, which is the timing when the support dialogue image is displayed in the middle stage. FIG. 370 (c) shows a display example at the timing t18, which is the timing when the display of the cheering serif image is in the final stage. FIG. 370 (d) shows a display example from the timing t19 to the timing t20 when the operation to the attack button 3710 is enabled.

Further, FIG. 370 (e) shows a display example when the first shield image is displayed at the timing t14. FIG. 370 (f) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at the timing t16. FIG. 370 (g) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed at the timing t18. FIG. 370 (h) shows a display example in which the first shield image is displayed from the timing t19 to the timing t20.

As shown in FIGS. 370 (e) to 370 (h), the size and display position of the first shield image do not change. Therefore, the precursory effect can be hidden without making the first shield image itself stand out, and the player can wait carefully for the timing at which the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. The color of the first shield image may be an inconspicuous color such as gray. Further, it is preferable to configure the display mode of the first shield image so that the degree of expectation for the special lottery result is not suggested. As in the embodiment of the "shield bullet reach", it is preferable to configure the operation unit simulated image and the destruction image of the enemy tank to show the degree of expectation. At this time, a plurality of different expectations may be shown depending on the color of the simulated image of the operation unit or the destruction image of the enemy tank. Further, the display priority of the destroyed image may be higher or lower than the display priority of the first shield image. When the display priority of the destroyed image is set higher than the display priority of the first shield image, even if a part or all of the destroyed image overlaps with the first shield image, it is displayed on the front side thereof. .. When the display priority of the destroyed image is lower than the display priority of the first shield image, it is preferable that a part or all of the destroyed image is displayed without being hidden by the first shield image.
These points regarding the first shield image may be adopted in the second shield image described later.

As shown in FIG. 370 (h), in the first shield image and the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the operation unit simulated image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even when the first shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation unit simulated image is not impaired, and the visibility of the operation unit simulated image is improved.

In this way, by displaying an image (first shield image) that hides the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) at the player's will, and configuring it so that part or all of the special precursor display is hidden. A player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display may reduce the visibility of the special precursor display to make it difficult or invisible to see, so that the operation unit simulated image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710). It is possible to concentrate on the display of the display and the operation of the first operation unit.
Further, since the operation unit simulated image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is not difficult to see or invisible, it does not hinder the progress of the game using the first operation unit.

Although the embodiment in which the player presses and holds the defense button 3740 with reference to FIG. 369 (g) is shown, the first shield image is displayed based on the repeated hits of the defense button 3740 instead of the long press of the defense button 3740. It may be configured as follows. FIG. 369 (h) shows an example of an effect in which the continuous hitting of the defense button 3740 is detected at the timing t14 and the first shield image is displayed until the timing t20. In this case as well, the display examples shown in FIGS. 370 (e) to 370 (h) are used in the same manner as in the above-described embodiment.

The size of the first shield image may be different. 371 (a) to 371 (d) are shown in FIGS. 369 (a) to 369 (d), 369 (g), 369 (h), and 370 (e) to 370 (h). It is a display example in the embodiment in which the size of the first shield image is modified in the embodiment shown in the above. In this embodiment, the size of the first shield image is small. In addition, the display position is slightly above. 371 (a) to 371 (d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. In the present embodiment, the cheering dialogue images "<out of place" and "out of place" are made difficult to see or invisible by the first shield image. On the other hand, the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare-" and "Ganbare->" are not made difficult or invisible by the first shield image.

In this way, part of the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) is made difficult or invisible due to the reduced visibility due to the first shield image, and the visibility of other parts of the special precursor display is reduced. It may be configured so as not to be difficult to see or invisible.

It may be configured so that a plurality of shield images can be displayed. 369 (i), FIGS. 371 (e) to 371 (h) are shown in FIGS. 369 (a) to 369 (d), 369 (g), 369 (h), and 371 (a) to FIGS. 371 (a). It is a time chart and a display example which shows the embodiment modified so that a plurality of shield images can be displayed in the embodiment shown with reference to 371 (d). In the present embodiment, the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected, so that the first shield image is displayed, and then the second shield image is displayed when the long press of the defense button is detected again. It is configured as follows. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.
In the figure, the first shield image is provided with a downward-sloping diagonal line, and the second shield image is provided with an upward-sloping diagonal line.

FIG. 369 (i) is a time chart showing a display state in which a long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at the timing t15, and shows a state in which the second shield image is displayed for 6 seconds until the timing t21. 371 (e) to 371 (h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 371 (e), although the cheering dialogue images "<out of place" and "out of place" are difficult to see due to the first shield image, "<do your best ~" and "do your best ~>". The cheering line image is shown in a state where it can be easily visually recognized without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 371 (f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare-" and "Ganbare->" cannot be visually recognized by the second shield image. The state that was said is shown.
In FIG. 371 (g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare-" and "Ganbare->" are difficult to see by the second shield image. It is shown.
FIG. 371 (h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the front side of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 371 (h), in the second shield image and the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the operation unit simulated image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even if the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation unit simulated image is not impaired.

The width of the second shield image is slightly longer than that of the first shield image. Further, the second shield image does not move like the first shield image. Further, the color of the second shield image may be gray as in the first shield image. Further, the colors of the first shield image and the second shield image may be grays having the same brightness or grays having different brightnesses.

After pressing and holding the defense button 3740 to display the first shield image, if the defense button 3740 is continuously pressed for a predetermined period, the second shield image may be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to display both the first shield image and the second shield image simply by pressing and holding the defense button 3740.
On the other hand, after the defense button 3740 is pressed and held to display the first shield image, the player releases the defense button 3740 and the player is not pressed, and then the defense button 3740 is pressed again for a predetermined period. The second shield image may be displayed if it continues to be displayed. With such a configuration, the difficulty level for displaying the second shield image increases, so that only the first shield image is displayed and the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. It becomes easy for the player to intentionally create any of the above.

In this way, multiple images (first shield image, second shield image) that hide the special precursor display (support dialogue image) are prepared, and these are stepwise triggered by the operation on the second operation unit (defense button 3740). By displaying the special precursor display, the special precursor display will not be hidden suddenly. Therefore, even if the player mistakenly operates the second operation unit, a part of the special precursor display can be easily visually recognized. .. In addition, it is possible to realize a display mode that suits the taste of the player.

Although the embodiment in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed by one operation unit (defense button 3740) is shown, a plurality of shields corresponding to a plurality of operation units (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700) are shown. An embodiment modified so that the images (first shield image and second shield image) are displayed will be described below. 369 (j), 369 (k), 371 (e) to 371 (h) are FIGS. 369 (a) to 369 (d), 369 (g), 369 (h), and FIGS. It is a time chart and a display example which shows the embodiment which modified the embodiment shown with reference to 371 (a)-FIG. 371 (d).
In the present embodiment, in the period from timing t5 to timing t27, the operation reception of the mission button 3700 is effective in addition to the defense button 3740. Further, when the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected, the second shield image is displayed. The display time of the second shield image is 6 seconds, which is the same as the display time of the first shield image.

FIG. 369 (j) is a time chart showing an operation validity period of the mission button 3700 and a display state when the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is not detected.
FIG. 369 (k) shows a state in which the pressing operation of the mission button 3700 is detected at the timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed for 6 seconds until the timing t21. FIGS. 371 (e) to 371 (h) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In FIG. 371 (e), although the cheering dialogue images "<out of place" and "out of place" are difficult to see due to the first shield image, "<do your best ~" and "do your best ~>". The support line image is shown in a state where it can be easily visually recognized without being hidden by the first shield image.
In FIG. 371 (f), in addition to the first shield image, the display of the second shield image is started, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare-" and "Ganbare->" cannot be visually recognized by the second shield image. The state that was said is shown.
In FIG. 371 (g), the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the cheering dialogue images "<Ganbare-" and "Ganbare->" are difficult to see by the second shield image. It is shown.
FIG. 371 (h) shows a state in which the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed, and the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed on the front side of the second shield image. ing. As shown in FIG. 371 (h), in the second shield image and the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, the operation unit simulated image has a higher display priority. Therefore, even if the second shield image is being displayed, the visibility of the operation unit simulated image is not impaired.

In this way, a plurality of images that conceal different positions in the special precursor display (support dialogue image) triggered by the operation of the plurality of operation units, that is, the second operation button and the third operation button (defense button 3740 and mission button 3700). By configuring (1st shield image and 2nd shield image) to be displayable, it is possible to select how much the special precursor display should be hidden and which position of the special precursor display should be hidden according to the player's preference. can.
Further, by displaying the operation unit simulated image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) on the front side of the second shield image, the operation unit simulated image is not difficult or invisible, so that the first operation unit is not invisible. Does not hinder the progress of the game using.

With reference to FIGS. 369 to 371 and the like, an embodiment in which the special precursor display (supporting dialogue image) can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image has been described. Hereinafter, embodiments in which these images and the like are modified will be described with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373. The behavior of the gaming machine other than these image displays is the same as that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 369 to 371 and the like.

372 (a) to 372 (d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In the present embodiment, the first shield image has a horizontally long rectangular shape and has a hole in the center where the image displayed rearward can be visually recognized. The second shield image has a horizontally long donut shape.
FIG. 372 (a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering dialogue image becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the first shield image. The display priority of the decorative symbol is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the first shield image.
FIGS. 372 (b) and 372 (c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the first shield image.
FIG. 372 (d) is a display example showing a state in which the operation valid period has occurred in the state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the center of the display area.

The second shield image may be formed in an elliptical shape instead of a donut shape, and may be deformed so that the rear of the hole in the center of the first shield image is invisible. FIGS. 372 (e) and 372 (f) show display examples at timing t18 and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 372 (f), an operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the second shield image.

FIGS. 373 (a) to 373 (d) are display examples at timing t14, timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.
In the present embodiment, the first shield image and the second shield image are each vertically long rectangular shapes. Further, two first shield images and two second shield images are displayed.
FIG. 373 (a) is a display example showing a state in which the first shield image is displayed. As shown in the figure, the cheering dialogue image becomes difficult to see or invisible due to the first shield image. The display priority of the decorative symbol is higher than the display priority of the first shield image, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the front side of the shield image.
FIGS. 373 (b) and 373 (c) are display examples showing a state in which a second shield image is displayed in addition to the shield image.
FIG. 373 (d) is a display example showing a state in which the operation valid period has occurred in the state where the shield image and the second shield image are displayed. As shown in the figure, an operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the area sandwiched between the two second shield images.

Although a gap is provided between the two second shield images, it may be deformed so as not to provide a gap. FIGS. 373 (e) and 373 (f) show display examples at timing t18 and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively. As shown in FIG. 373 (f), an operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed at a position overlapping the two second shield images.

As described above, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively far from the simulated image of the operation unit imitating the attack button 3710, and is relatively relative. It is configured so that the second shield image can be displayed at a close position.
The player can display only the first shield image, display only the second shield image, or display both the first shield image and the second shield image according to his / her preference.

An embodiment of displaying a cheering dialogue image as an image to be displayed as a special precursor display is shown, but instead of the cheering dialogue image, an operation unit simulated image having a shape imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed. The embodiment modified to is shown below.

FIG. 374 is a time chart according to the present embodiment, and specifically, is a time chart obtained by modifying FIG. 369. As a precursory effect, instead of displaying the cheering dialogue image, a simulated image having a shape imitating the attack button 3710 (hereinafter, may be referred to as a “precursor simulated image”) is transformed to be displayed in a predetermined manner. However, the operation timing and the like are the same as those of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 369 and the like.

FIGS. 375 to 377 are display examples of the precursory effect in the present embodiment, and specifically, are display examples obtained by modifying FIGS. 370 and 371.
375 (a) to 375 (d), FIGS. 376 (a) to 376 (d), and FIGS. 377 (a) to 377 (d) are shown in FIGS. 370 (a) to 370 (d), respectively. It is a display example corresponding to the display example at each timing (timing t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown.
Similarly, FIGS. 375 (e) to 375 (h), FIGS. 376 (e) to 376 (h), and FIGS. 377 (e) to 377 (h) are FIGS. 370 (e) to 370 (h), respectively. It is a display example corresponding to the display example at each timing (timing t14, t16, t18, t19 to t20) shown in h).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 375, a precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is first displayed in 5 rows and 5 columns (FIG. 375 (a)). The precursor simulated image is opaque, and the image located behind (image such as a road) is invisible. Some of the precursory simulated images are hidden in the dialogue window and the image of the tank. Next, as shown in FIG. 375 (b), the precursor simulated image is displayed in 3 rows and 3 columns. Then, as shown in FIG. 375 (c), only one precursor simulated image is displayed. At the same time as the start of the operation validity period of the attack button 3710, the character "attack" is added to the precursor simulated image displayed as shown in FIG. 375 (d), and the attack button 3710 is pressed. A simulated image of the operation unit is displayed.

374 (e), 375 (e) to 375 (h) show, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 375 (a) to 375 (d), the long press of the defense button 3740 at the timing t14. A time chart and a display example when it is detected are shown. In this case, the precursor simulated image is displayed semi-transparently from the timing t14 to the timing t19. At the timing t19, the precursor simulated image becomes opaque at the timing when the operation valid period starts, and the character "attack" is added, and the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed. Will be done.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 374 (f), the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 may not be displayed.

In FIGS. 374 (g) and 376, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 375, the precursor simulated image is displayed as the first shield image instead of displaying the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 in a semi-transparent manner. It is a time chart and a display example showing an embodiment modified so as to be hidden by.

In FIGS. 376 (a), 376 (b), 376 (c), and 376 (d), the timing t14 when the defense button 3740 is not operated and the first shield image is not displayed, respectively. , Timing t16, Timing t18, and Timing t19 to Timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 374 (g), when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in the case of this production example), the first is on the front side of the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. 1 The shield image is displayed, and a part of the precursor simulated image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen. FIG. 376 (e) shows a display example when the display of the first shield image is started at the timing t14. 376 (f), 376 (g), and 376 (h) show display examples at timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

Instead of pressing and holding the defense button 3740, the first shield image may be displayed when the defense button 3740 is repeatedly hit.
FIG. 374 (h) shows an example of an effect when the defense button 3740 is repeatedly hit instead of the long press of the defense button 3740.

FIG. 377 is a display example showing an embodiment in which the precursor simulated image shown in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374 (g), 374 (h), and 376 is transformed into another precursor simulated image.

As shown in FIGS. 377 (a) to 377 (c), nine precursor simulated images imitating the attack button 3710 gradually gather slightly to the left of the center of the display area, and finally as shown in FIG. 377 (d). The display state is set to the above, and the operation reception of the attack button 3710 becomes effective. FIG. 377 (a) is a display example at the timing t14. At this time, each precursor simulated image is displayed at a distant position. FIG. 377 (b) is a display example at the timing t16, and each precursor simulated image is gradually approaching. FIG. 377 (c) is a display example at the timing t18. At this time, each precursor simulated image is displayed on the right side of the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant". It should be noted that each precursor simulated image is displayed with three protrusions such as an afterimage indicating the moving direction. At the timing t19, the operation of the attack button 3710 becomes effective, the display of each protrusion ends, and the character "attack" is attached to the precursor simulated image and displayed as the operation unit simulated image. FIG. 377 (d) shows a display example from timing t19 to timing t20.

As shown in FIG. 374 (g), when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at a predetermined timing (timing t14 in the case of this production example), the first is on the front side of the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710. 1 The shield image is displayed, and a part of the precursor simulated image becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen. FIG. 377 (e) shows a display example when the display of the first shield image is started at the timing t14. 377 (f), 377 (g), and 377 (h) show display examples at timing t16, timing t18, and timing t19 to timing t20, respectively.

In this way, even when a precursor simulated image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is displayed instead of the support dialogue image as the special precursor display, the visibility of the special precursor display is reduced. Therefore, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained by making the state difficult to see or invisible.

See FIGS. 369 (i) and 371 with respect to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374 (a) to 374 (h) and 375 to 377 (an embodiment in which a precursory simulated image is displayed). An embodiment to which the embodiment shown above (the embodiment capable of displaying the second shield image) is applied will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 374 (i) and the display example shown in FIG. 378.
In the present embodiment, the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.

378 (a) to 378 (d) are display examples in the embodiment in which the second shield image is modified so as to be displayable in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 376 (a) to 376 (h). Shows.
FIG. 374 (i) is a time chart when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at the timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. The second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
378 (a), 378 (b), 378 (c), and 378 (d) are display examples in which the first shield image at the timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at the timing t16, respectively. 2 Display example of the state where the shield image is displayed, display example of the state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at the timing t18, the first shield image and the second shield image from the timing t19 to the timing t20 are displayed. A display example of the displayed state is shown.

FIGS. 378 (e) to 378 (h) are display examples in the embodiment in which the second shield image is modified so as to be displayable in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 377 (a) to 377 (h). Shows.
FIG. 374 (i) is a time chart when the long press of the defense button 3740 is detected at the timing t15 and the second shield image is displayed. The second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds).
378 (e), 378 (f), 378 (g), and 378 (h) are display examples in which the first shield image at the timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at the timing t16, respectively. 2 Display example of the state where the shield image is displayed, display example of the state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at the timing t18, the first shield image and the second shield image from the timing t19 to the timing t20 are displayed. A display example of the displayed state is shown.

FIGS. 369 (j) and 369 (k) with respect to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374 (a) to 374 (h) and FIGS. 375 to 377 (the embodiment in which the precursor simulated image is displayed). ), The embodiment to which the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 371 (the embodiment in which the second shield image can be displayed according to the operation of the mission button 3700) is applied. The time chart shown in FIG. 378 will be described with reference to a display example shown in FIG. 378.
In the present embodiment, the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 displayed as the precursor effect can be hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image.
Further, the second shield image is configured to be displayed when the pressing of the mission button 3700 is detected.

378 (a) to 378 (d) are display examples in the embodiment in which the second shield image is modified so as to be displayable in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 376 (a) to 376 (h). Shows.
As shown in FIGS. 374 (j) and 374 (k), it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700 also in the present embodiment.
378 (a), 378 (b), 378 (c), and 378 (d) are display examples in which the first shield image at the timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at the timing t16, respectively. 2 Display example of the state where the shield image is displayed, display example of the state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at the timing t18, the first shield image and the second shield image from the timing t19 to the timing t20 are displayed. A display example of the displayed state is shown.

FIGS. 378 (e) to 378 (h) are display examples in the embodiment in which the second shield image is modified so as to be displayable in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 377 (a) to 377 (h). Shows.
As shown in FIGS. 374 (j) and 374 (k), it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700 also in the present embodiment.
378 (e), 378 (f), 378 (g), and 378 (h) are display examples in which the first shield image at the timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at the timing t16, respectively. 2 Display example of the state where the shield image is displayed, display example of the state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at the timing t18, the first shield image and the second shield image from the timing t19 to the timing t20 are displayed. A display example of the displayed state is shown.

In addition, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 375, 377, etc. that display the precursor simulated image as the precursor effect, the first shield image and the second shield image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373. May be adopted.

Also in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 374 (i) to 374 (k) and 378, the same effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be obtained.

Although the embodiment in which the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed by operating the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700 is shown with reference to FIGS. 369 and 374, the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700 are shown. The operation valid period of is from the timing t5 when the reach effect state occurs to the timing t27 which is the final stage of the reach effect state.
The first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed at any timing during this period, triggered by the player's operation on the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700. Further, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds), but after the display of the first shield image and the second shield image is completed, the operation by the player is triggered again. It is possible to display a first shield image and a second shield image.

For example, a player who does not want to visually recognize the precursory effect even though the reach effect state has occurred at the timing t5 can use the defense button 3740 or the like at a predetermined timing before the timing t13, which is the timing at which the precursory effect is started. By operating the mission button 3700, the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed, and the precursory effect can be set to a display state that is difficult to see or cannot be seen in advance.

Further, for example, from timing t16 to timing t22, the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at the same time as the operation unit simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 indicating that the operation reception of the attack button 3710 is valid. It can be in the displayed state.
Further, it is possible to continue displaying the first shield image and the second shield image even after the operation acceptance of the attack button 3710 ends or the operation valid period ends. At the time of receiving the operation of the attack button 3710 or at the end of the operation validity period, the degree of expectation of the special lottery result is shown depending on the mode of the destruction image of the enemy tank, but the display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image is higher than the destruction image. May be increased so that part or all of the destroyed image is hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image.
In this case, the player needs to pay attention to the display time of the first shield image or the second shield image and the timing to start the display. For example, if the player operates the defense button 3740 or the mission button 3700 in a cluttered manner regardless of the progress of the production, a display state in which the visibility of the destroyed image is impaired may occur due to a penalty. The player will operate the defense button 3740 and the mission button 3700 seriously, and the deterioration of the interest will be suppressed.

Prepare multiple types of simulated images of the operation unit according to the degree of expectation, and do not hide them when the operation is accepted or when the operation valid period ends, but continue to display for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). May be good.
Since the display status of the operation unit simulated image is so important for the player who makes at least a part of the precursor display difficult or invisible by the first shield image or the second shield image in order to concentrate on the operation of the operation unit. By leaving this staging situation even after the operation, it becomes possible to give the player the afterglow of the interest in the staging.

The time for displaying the first shield image and the second shield image and the time for displaying the cheering dialogue image and the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, which function as a special precursor display, were set to 6 seconds, respectively. The time for displaying the 1-shield image or the 2nd shield image may be longer. For example, the first shield image and the second shield image may be configured to be displayed for 10 seconds. Alternatively, once the display of the first shield image or the second shield image is started, the operation valid period is started, or the display of the destruction image is started (that is, the attack button 3710 by the player). The display of the first shield image or the second shield image may be continued until the timing at which the operation is performed or the timing at which the operation valid period ends). With such a configuration, the visibility of the special precursor display can be reduced with a small number of operations, and the state of being difficult to see or invisible can be continued.

On the other hand, the time for displaying the first shield image or the second shield image may be shorter than the time for displaying the special precursor display (for example, 3 seconds). In this case, the player who does not want to visually recognize the special precursor display is required to perform the operation multiple times, but the special precursor display is displayed for the player who mistakenly displays the first shield image or the second shield image. In at least a part of the period, the first shield image and the second shield image can visually recognize the special precursor display without obstructing the visibility, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

If the condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied by the operation of the defense button 3740 while the first shield image is being displayed, the display of the first shield image is continued again from the timing when the condition is satisfied. You may let me. For example, when the condition for displaying the first shield image is satisfied at the timing when the first shield image is displayed for 4 seconds, the first shield image is displayed for another 6 seconds from there, and the first shield is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. The image may be configured to be displayed.
Similarly, for the second shield image, if the condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied by the operation of the mission button 3700, the display of the second shield image is continued again from the timing when the condition is satisfied. You may let me. For example, when the condition for displaying the second shield image is satisfied at the timing when the second shield image is displayed for 4 seconds, the second shield image is displayed for another 6 seconds from there, and the second shield is displayed for a total of 10 seconds. The image may be configured to be displayed.

During the valid period of the defense button 3740, the condition for displaying the first shield image again is satisfied after the first shield image is displayed for a predetermined time (6 seconds) and the display of the first shield image is completed. If so, the first shield image can be displayed again. The same applies to the second shield image.

According to such a configuration, as a result of wondering whether or not to see the special precursor display, the player who does not want to see it can extend the display time of the first shield image and the second shield image. .. On the other hand, a player who wants to see the special precursor display mistakenly operates the second operation unit (defense button 3740) or the third operation unit (mission button 3700), and the visibility of the special precursor display becomes poor. It may be lowered and difficult to see or invisible, but when the player does not operate the second operation unit any more, the visibility of the special precursor display is lowered and it becomes difficult or invisible. Will end promptly. Further, since the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed at any timing (for example, before the start of the special precursor display or after the end of the operation valid period), the first shield image and the second shield image can be displayed. It becomes possible to practice displaying.

379 (a) to 379 (d) are embodiments in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified in the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 378 (a) to 378 (d). A display example in the form is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 374 (j) and 374 (k), it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700 also in the present embodiment.
379 (a), 379 (b), 379 (c), and 379 (d) are display examples in which the first shield image at the timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at the timing t16, respectively. 2 Display example of the state where the shield image is displayed, display example of the state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at the timing t18, the first shield image and the second shield image from the timing t19 to the timing t20 are displayed. A display example of the displayed state is shown.

379 (e) to 379 (h) show the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 378 (e) to 378 (h) in which the display positions of the first shield image and the second shield image are modified. A display example in the form is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 374 (j) and 374 (k), it is possible to display the second shield image in response to the operation of the mission button 3700 also in the present embodiment.
379 (e), 379 (f), 379 (g), and 379 (h) are display examples in which the first shield image at the timing t14 is displayed, and the first shield image and the first shield image at the timing t16, respectively. 2 Display example of the state where the shield image is displayed, display example of the state where the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed at the timing t18, the first shield image and the second shield image from the timing t19 to the timing t20 are displayed. A display example of the displayed state is shown.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 379 (a) to 379 (d) and the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 379 (e) to 379 (h), the display priority of the first shield image is displayed. Is set higher than the display priority of the second shield image, and the first shield image is displayed on the front side of the second shield image. Further, the first shield image is displayed at a position relatively close to the position where the operation unit simulated image is displayed, and the second shield image is displayed at a position relatively far away. Further, the size of the first shield image (specifically, the area occupied in the display area) is larger than the size of the second shield image.
Further, as described above, although a special operation (long press operation or repeated hit operation) for the defense button 3740 is required to display the first shield image, the mission button 3700 is required to display the second shield image. All you have to do is press. That is, the second shield image is displayed at the operation start timing (operation start reception timing) of the mission button 3700, while the first shield image is not displayed at the operation start timing (operation start reception timing) of the defense button 3740.

According to such a configuration, the first shield image is displayed by the player having a clear intention to operate the second operation unit (defense button 3740) in a complicated operation mode.
On the other hand, the second shield image is displayed by the player operating the third operation unit (mission button 3700) in a simple operation mode. Therefore, in addition to the case where the player intentionally operates the third operation unit, the second shield image is displayed even when the third operation unit is operated unintentionally or by mistake.
As described above, in the present embodiment, instead of making the difficulty level of the operation mode required for displaying the first shield image relatively higher than the difficulty level required for displaying the second shield image, the second shield is used. The first shield image can more hinder the visibility of the special precursor display than the image.

In this way, by displaying the first shield image that is not displayed unless it is operated with a clear intention, the player can use the operation unit simulated image that imitates the first operation unit (attack button 3710). You can concentrate on the operation of the first operation unit.
Further, even when the second shield image that can be displayed by a simple operation is displayed, the player can concentrate on the operation unit simulated image and the operation of the operation unit. On the other hand, when the second shield image is displayed, the visibility of the special precursor display is relatively higher than when the first shield image is displayed, so that the player makes a mistake. Even when the second shield image is displayed, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest felt by the player who wants to see the special precursor display.

Further, the first shield image may be displayed after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed after a special operation (long press operation or continuous striking operation) for the defense button 3740 is detected. Further, the display time of the first shield image may be longer than the display time of the second shield image.
Even when such a configuration is adopted, the same effect can be obtained.

The size and display time of the image may be different between the first shield image displayed by the operation of the defense button 3740 and the second shield image displayed by the operation of the mission button 3700. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 371 and 378, the size of the second shield image is made larger than that of the first shield image, and a large area in the special precursor display is invisible.
Alternatively, the display times of the first shield image and the second shield image may be different. For example, the display time of the first shield image may be 6 seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be 9 seconds. Conversely, the display time of the first shield image may be 9 seconds, and the display time of the second shield image may be 6 seconds.
By adopting such a configuration, the special precursor display can be made into a visual mode that suits the player's preference.

The first shield image and the second shield image may appear in a dynamic display instead of simply appearing at a predetermined position. When showing it as a dynamic display, for example, it is displayed so that it appears dynamically in a so-called cut-in mode from either the top, bottom, left, or right of the display area, or a dynamic display such as wipe-in, wipe-out, fade-in, or fade-out is displayed. It may be adopted.
The movement of the first shield image or the second shield image that appears while moving in this way may be continued and stopped at the center of the display area. Alternatively, the movement of the first shield image or the second shield image that appeared while moving at one end of the display area in this way is continued, and the image is moved at the other end of the display area and displayed so as to disappear outside the display area. May be good.
As a result, not only the special precursor display is simply hidden by the first shield image and the second shield image, but also when the first shield image and the second shield image appear or are erased, it can be shown in a staging manner, which reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

The support line image and the precursor simulated image of the attack button 3710 are displayed semi-transparently when the defense button 3740 is operated, and the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed when the mission button 3700 is operated. The image or the precursor simulated image of the attack button 3710 may be configured to be difficult to see or invisible.
As described above, by making the special precursor display invisible or difficult to see in different modes depending on the type of the operation unit, it is possible to make the visual mode suitable for the player's preference.

Further, there are a plurality of display modes of the precursor simulated image imitating the attack button 3710, and the degree of expectation of the special lottery result may be indicated by the type of the displayed precursor simulated image. For example, it is advisable to indicate the degree of expectation by the color and shape of the precursor simulated image. Also in this case, the special precursor display may be configured to be difficult or invisible by the first shield image or the second shield image.
With such a configuration, the player is not confused by the expectation level indicated by the precursor simulated image, and the operation unit simulated image imitating the first operation unit (attack button 3710) can be displayed and the first operation unit can be displayed. The player can concentrate on the operation of.

Even if the special precursor display (display of cheering dialogue image or precursor simulated image) ends while the first shield image or the second shield image is being displayed, the first shield image or the second shield image is displayed for a predetermined time. You should tie it up. This means that if the display of the first shield image or the second shield image is finished at the same time as the start of the operation validity period, the background image (road, etc.) located in the background of the first shield image or the second shield image is displayed. This is because the player who wants to concentrate on displaying the simulated image of the operation unit imitating the attack button 3710 feels uncomfortable. Even if the operation valid period occurs in this way, it is preferable to continue displaying the concealed image (first shield image, second shield image).

Further, the display priority of the operation unit simulated image may be higher than the display priority of the first shield image. For example, as shown in FIG. 370 (h), it is preferable to display the operation unit simulated image on the front side of the first shield image. With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed simulated image. If the first shield image is erased, the background image hidden by the first shield image becomes visible, which hinders concentration on the simulated image of the operation unit.
The same configuration can be adopted not only for the first shield image but also for the second shield image.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 371 (h) and 378 (h), a part of the operation unit simulated image and a part of the second shield image may be displayed so as to overlap each other. At this time, it is preferable to raise the display priority of the operation unit simulated image higher than the display priority of the second shield image. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 376 (h) and 377 (h), the operation unit simulated image is near the first shield image and the second shield image and does not overlap with the first shield image and the second shield image. It may be displayed at the position.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed simulated image of the operation unit.

Although the embodiment in which the display priority of the operation unit simulated image is set higher than the display priority of the first shield image or the second shield image is shown, the display priority of the operation unit simulated image is set to the first shield image or the first shield image. 2 It may be lower than the display priority of the shield image. In this case, a part of the operation unit simulated image may be configured so that the player can visually recognize it without overlapping with the first shield image and the second shield image.

In addition to displaying the precursor simulated image and the operation unit simulated image, the name and operation mode of the first operation unit (attack button 3710) are displayed during the special precursor display (displaying the precursor simulated image) and during the operation validity period (operation). It may be configured to be displayed in the display area during the display of the simulated image. In this case, a player who is unfamiliar with the game will have a deeper understanding of the name and operation method of the first operation unit, and will be able to reliably operate the first operation unit.
On the other hand, a player who is skilled in the game may not need such a display. Therefore, the name and operation mode of the attack button 3710 may be configured to be difficult or invisible by displaying the first shield image or the second shield image. On the other hand, the operation unit simulated image may be configured so as not to be difficult to see or invisible by the first shield image and the second shield image.
The operation mode and name of the attack button 3710 may be displayed only before the operation valid period occurs, or may be displayed only during the operation valid period, or may be displayed from before the operation valid period occurs to during the operation valid period. You may.
The embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 372 and 373 are examples of such embodiments. In FIGS. 372 (d), 372 (f), 373 (d), and 373 (f), the words "Ensign! Aim at the enemy tank with the attack button!" Although the columns are displayed, the operation mode and the name of the attack button 3710 are invisible because the first shield image and the second shield image are displayed.
With such a configuration, the player can concentrate only on the displayed simulated image of the operation unit.

If the configuration is such that the first shield image can be easily displayed, the player mistakenly operates the defense button 3740, and the first shield image is unintentionally displayed during the execution of the precursory effect. The visibility of the precursory effect may be impaired, and the interest played by the precursory effect may be impaired.
Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied with the operation of the defense button 3740 as a trigger, the first shield image is displayed. As specific conditions, repeated hits of the defense button 3740 (the pressing operation is detected more than a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time) and long pressing (the pressing operation is continuously detected for a predetermined time or longer) are given as examples. However, other conditions that are satisfied by the operation of the defense button 3740 may be adopted.

An embodiment in which the second shield image is displayed on condition that the defense button 3740 is pressed and held or the mission button 3700 is pressed is shown, but the second shield image is displayed depending on other conditions. It may be configured in. For example, the second shield image may be displayed on condition that the mission button 3700 is pressed after the defense button 3740 is pressed. Alternatively, the second shield image may be displayed on condition that a long press or repeated hits of the mission button 3700 are detected.

Although the embodiment in which the second shield image is displayed regardless of whether or not the first shield image is displayed is shown, the second shield image is displayed provided that the first shield image is being displayed. It may be configured as follows.

The display priority of the first shield image and the second shield image is set lower than the display priority of the decorative symbol displayed on the upper left of the display area. As a result, the decorative symbol is not hidden by the first shield image or the second shield image, so that the visibility of the decorative symbol is ensured.

The operation valid period of the defense button 3740 is set to timing t5 to timing t27, but the entire period during which the decorative symbol is displayed or stopped may be the operation valid period and the period during which the first shield image is displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to practice displaying the first shield image by operating the defense button 3740 at an arbitrary timing.
Since it is not necessary to adopt such a configuration for the operation valid period of the mission button 3700 that triggers the display of the second shield image, the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner (for example, the period from timing t5 to timing t27). ) Only the operation valid period may be set, or the second shield image may be displayed. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the second shield image is not displayed at least while the fluctuation of the decorative pattern is stopped. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the decorative design that has been stopped and displayed from being reduced.

Although the embodiment in which a plurality of images are displayed and the special precursor display is executed is configured, the special precursor display may be performed using only one image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 368 and the like, four cheering dialogue images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed. Further, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 377 and the like, nine precursor simulated images are displayed, but only one of them may be displayed.

After displaying the special precursor display, there may be a case where the operation on the first operation unit (attack button 3710) is not effective. In this case, after the special precursor display is displayed, the operation unit simulated image imitating the first operation unit is not displayed, and the operation validity period does not occur.
For the player who had hidden the precursor simulated image by the first shield image or the second shield image for the special precursor display, the precursor simulated image was intentionally made difficult to see or invisible, but the operation unit simulated image was not displayed. The result is a disappointing feeling, but by daring to display such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel that he / she wants to operate the operation unit next time.

Conventionally, in a game effect for instructing a player to operate an operating means, a gaming machine is known in which the same effect display as when the operating means is operated is performed even when the player does not operate the operating means. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-136096).
However, even if the operation is not performed, the same effect display as when the operation is performed is performed, so that the operation burden on the player is reduced, but the player's motivation to operate the operation means may be lost. .. In particular, in a game effect that requires complicated operation instructions to the operation means, if the same effect display as when the operation is performed is performed even if the operation is not performed, the player's willingness to operate is performed. May be lost significantly.
The following shows an embodiment of a gaming machine that solves such a problem and makes it possible to suppress a decline in interest by increasing the player's willingness to operate the operating means.

Hereinafter, an embodiment in which the “shield bullet reach” is modified will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 382.
FIG. 380 shows a time chart in this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 381 to 382 show a display example in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 380 (a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Then, at timing t15, an image of the enemy tank is displayed. Next, from the timing t18 to the timing t22, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 occurs. If the attack button 3710 is repeatedly hit or held down during the operation valid period, the operation valid period ends. Next, after the display according to the operation status of the attack button 3710 is performed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the timing t34.
FIGS. 380 (b) to 380 (d) show an example of an effect that can occur depending on the operation status of the attack button 3710 during the operation valid period.

FIG. 380 (b) shows an example of the effect when the continuous hitting operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at the timing t21.
In this production example, at timing t15, an enemy tank appears from the right side of the display area and a display for moving to the left is started. Then, at timing t18, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 is started. The operation validity period ends when a continuous hit operation or a long press operation is detected. Further, when a long press operation or a continuous striking operation is detected, an effect display is performed according to the operation mode. If the long press operation or the continuous striking operation is not detected, the operation valid period ends at the timing t22 when 4 seconds have elapsed from the start of the operation valid period.
FIG. 381 (a) shows a display example at the timing t19. As shown in the figure, an image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In addition, the character string "Ensign! Attack the enemy tank by repeatedly hitting the attack button!" Is displayed in the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. In addition, a simulated image (circular image) of the operation unit imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed in the upper right of the dialogue window of "Sergeant Might". In addition, the characters "attack" are displayed in the simulated image of the operation unit.
In addition, in the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 380 (c) described later and the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 380 (d), the same display as such a display (FIGS. 382 (a) and 382 (d)). ) Is displayed.

When a continuous striking operation is detected at timing t21, a shell is displayed to the enemy tank from the own tank, and then the smoke image, which is an image showing the smoke generated by the explosion of the shell, is the enemy tank. It is displayed in place of the image of. FIG. 381 (b) shows a display example at the timing t22. In this display example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
At the timing t23 when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the display of the smoke image, the bomb character image appears from the back side of the smoke image and is moved to the left and displayed. The displayed bomb character image includes a bomb character image A and a bomb character image B, and the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is suggested depending on the type of the displayed bomb character image.
FIG. 381 (c) is a display example at the timing t25. In this display example, the bomb character image A is displayed on the left side of the smoke image. FIG. 381 (d) is a display example at the timing t25. In this display example, the bomb character image B is displayed on the left side of the smoke image. The display of the bomb character image and the smoke image is continued until the timing t27 (6 seconds after the continuous striking operation is detected).
In this way, when the player performs an appropriate operation on the operation unit, the expected degree of the special lottery result is shown to the player.

FIG. 380 (c) shows an example of an effect when a long press operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at the timing t21.
In this effect example, the display state is switched from the state of the display example shown in FIG. 382 (a) to the state of the display example shown in FIGS. 382 (b) and 382 (c).
In this production example, when a long press operation is detected at timing t21, a display is displayed in which a shell is fired from the own tank instead of the image of the enemy tank, and then the smoke generated by the explosion of the shell is displayed. The smoke image, which is an image, is displayed. FIG. 382 (b) is a display example at the timing t22. In this display example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area.
In this production example, the bomb character image is not displayed, but only the smoke image is displayed. FIG. 382 (c) is a display example at the timing t25. The display of the smoke image is continued until the timing t27 (6 seconds after the long press is detected).
In this way, if the operation performed by the player with respect to the operating means is not an appropriate operation, the display corresponding to the operation is performed, but the degree of expectation for the special result (the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.). The degree of expectation of that) is not shown to the player.

FIG. 380 (d) shows the effect when the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation on the attack button 3710 is not detected (for example, when the attack button is pressed only once or when the operation is not performed) during the operation valid period from the timing t18 to the timing t22. An example is shown.
In this effect example, the state of the display example shown in FIG. 382 (d) is switched to the state of the display example shown in FIGS. 382 (e) and 382 (f).
In this effect example, when the operation valid period ends at the timing t22, the image of the enemy tank turns right in the upper center of the display area, and the display of moving upward in the display area is started. FIG. 382 (e) shows a display example at the timing t22. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank is displayed in the center of the display area.
FIG. 382 (f) is a display example at the timing t25. In this display example, the image of the enemy tank moves upward and is displayed smaller than the case shown in FIG. 382 (e).
As described above, when the player does not perform an appropriate operation on the operating means, the display corresponding to the operation is not displayed. In addition, the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.) is not shown to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is configured to suggest the degree of expectation for the special lottery result depending on the type of the bomb character image. Specifically, when the bomb character image A is displayed, it is suggested that the expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit is higher than when the bomb character image B is displayed. It should be noted that the difference in color (red or green) of the bomb character image may be configured to suggest different degrees of expectation. Further, even if an appropriate operation (continuous hitting) is performed, the bomb character may not be displayed.

In the present embodiment, the player who has performed an appropriate operation on the operation means (attack button 3710) visually recognizes a specific effect (display of a bomb character image) together with a special game-related display (smoke image). Can be done. In addition, it is possible to know the degree of expectation of the special lottery result depending on the type of specific production. On the other hand, a player who does not perform an appropriate operation on the operation unit can see the special game-related display but cannot see a specific effect, or can see both the special game-related display and the specific effect. Can not do it. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the motivation and positivity of the player to operate the operation unit.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 380 and the like, it is possible to execute an effect pattern in which repeated hits are required as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710 and an effect pattern in which long press is required, and either effect pattern is executed. It may be transformed so as to be. In this case, in the line window of "Might Sergeant", the line "Ensign! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack the enemy tank!" Or "Ensign! Press and hold the attack button to attack the enemy tank!" It is good to configure so that the line is displayed. Further, when the player makes a long press even though the instruction for repeated hits is given, or when the player makes a continuous hit even though the instruction for long press is given, it is shown in FIG. 382 (c). As such, it is preferable to control the bomb character image so that it cannot be visually recognized.
With such a configuration, the player is required to carefully visually recognize the contents of the operation instruction display (character string displayed in the dialogue window), which increases the tension in the operation and increases the tension of the operation unit. It is possible to improve the motivation and positivity of the player to operate the window.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 380 to 382, the same smoke image is displayed at the same position when the attack button 3710 is repeatedly hit and when the attack button 3710 is pressed and held (for example, FIG. 381 (for example, FIG. 381). b) and FIG. 382 (b)). With this configuration, even when the display content of the display area is viewed by another player, it is difficult to determine whether or not the operation content is appropriate, and the player can be seen by another player. You can prevent being noticed and embarrassed.
It should be noted that a smoke image may be displayed in which a part of the smoke image is different and a part is common depending on whether the operation is appropriate or not. Alternatively, an image showing a similar or similar concept may be displayed as a smoke image.
In this way, instead of displaying the exact same image as a smoke image, a similar image is displayed, or a similar image that can be recognized as a similar motif (smoke in the present embodiment) is displayed. Even in this case, it is difficult for other players to determine whether or not the operation content is appropriate.
The same configuration may be adopted for the embodiment for displaying the smoke image and the explosion image, which will be described later. For example, an image that the player recognizes as a similar motif may be displayed. In addition, depending on whether the operation content is appropriate or not, a similar smoke image may be displayed, a similar message regarding the operation of the operating means may be displayed, or an explosion image similar to the smoke image and the smoke image may be displayed. It is good to display it. Further, it is preferable to display these similar images at a position overlapping the display position of the reserved image or near the center of the display area. The same effect can be obtained even when images that are slightly different on the display are displayed in this way.

During the execution of the suggestion effect display, it is possible to execute a predetermined suggestion effect display indicating the degree of expectation of the special lottery result over a predetermined period (for example, timing t10 to timing t30) straddling the operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22). If the attack button 3710 is not properly operated during the operation valid period, the suggestion effect display during execution may be terminated. For example, during the period from timing t10 to timing t30, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect display different from the effect of displaying the bomb character, and when the attack button 3710 is properly operated, this suggestion effect display is continued. If the attack button 3710 is not properly operated, the suggestion effect display may be terminated.

Further, in a predetermined period after the operation valid period (for example, from timing t22 to timing t34 at which the variation display of the decorative symbol ends), a predetermined suggestion effect display indicating the degree of expectation of the special lottery result can be executed, and the operation can be performed. If the attack button 3710 is not properly operated during the valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), the execution of the suggestion effect display may be restricted in a predetermined period after the operation valid period. For example, during the period from timing t22 to timing t34, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect display different from the effect of displaying the bomb character, and when the attack button 3710 is properly operated, this suggestion effect display is predetermined. It may be executed with a probability, and if the attack button 3710 is not properly operated, this suggestion effect display may not be executed.

In this way, when the operation is not performed properly, the suggestion effect display that is being executed is terminated, or the suggestion effect display is not executed until the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. The feeling is increased, and the motivation and positivity of the player to operate the operating means can be improved.

When the attack button 3710 is not properly operated in a certain variation display, the execution of the suggestion effect may be restricted in the variation display a predetermined number of times after the variation display. For example, it is advisable to limit the execution of the suggestion effect until the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed 10 times.
With such a configuration, depending on the operation mode to the operation means, a gaming situation may occur in which the execution of a specific effect (suggestion effect) is restricted over a plurality of times of variable display of the decorative symbol. The feeling of tension is increased, and the motivation and positivity of the player to operate the operating means can be further improved.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 380 and the like, an embodiment in which the degree of expectation is not suggested for the variable display result during execution when the attack button 3710 is not properly operated is shown. Hereinafter, an embodiment modified so as to limit the execution of the look-ahead effect when the attack button 3710 is not properly operated will be described with reference to FIG. 383 and the like.

FIG. 383 shows a time chart according to this embodiment. Further, FIGS. 384 to 386 show display examples in the display area.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 383 (a), a reach state occurs at timing t5. Then, at timing t16, an image of the minefield is displayed. Next, from the timing t18 to the timing t22, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 occurs. At the timing of the operation validity period, three holds have occurred. Next, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the timing t34 to the timing t35. Next, a new variation display of the decorative symbol is performed from the timing t35 to the timing t44, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from the timing t44 to the timing t45.
FIGS. 383 (b) to 383 (d) show a plurality of production examples corresponding to the operation mode for the attack button 3710 during the operation valid period.

FIG. 383 (b) shows an example of the effect when the continuous hitting operation to the attack button 3710 is detected at the timing t21.
In this effect example, at timing t16, a minefield composed of a bomb character appears from the upper side of the display area, and a display for moving downward is started. Then, at timing t18, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 is started.
FIG. 384 (a) shows a display example at the timing t19. An image of an enemy tank is displayed at the top of the display area. In the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", the character string "Ensign! Hit the attack button repeatedly to attack them!" Is displayed, and the operation mode of the attack button 3710 is shown to the player. At the upper right of the dialogue window of "Might Sergeant", a simulated image (circular image) of the operation unit imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed with the characters "attack". Further, a reserved image is displayed at the lower right of the display area. Specifically, the hold images corresponding to the hold, the first hold, the second hold, and the third hold are displayed from the left. Of these, the hold, the first hold, and the third hold are displayed as white hold images, which are normal hold images. On the other hand, the second hold is displayed as a red hold image indicating that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher than that of the normal hold. In addition, it is possible to display a total of five reserved images, one of which is reserved and four which is the upper limit of the number of reserved images. Further, in each of the hold to the fourth hold, it is possible to display in a display mode indicating that the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit is higher than that of the normal hold image. In addition, the reserved image basically continues to be displayed regardless of whether the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner or stopped.
It should be noted that the same display as that of the display is performed in the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 383 (c) and the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 383 (d).

When a continuous striking operation is detected at timing t21, a cannonball is fired from the own tank to the minefield, and then the smoke image, which is an image showing the smoke generated by the explosion of the cannonball, is the minefield. It is displayed in place of the image of. FIG. 384 (b) shows a display example at the timing t22. In this display example, the smoke image is displayed in the center of the display area. FIG. 384 (c) shows a display example after the timing t23. The display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of the continuous hit detection. For example, if the repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image is displayed relatively above the display area, and if the repeated hits are detected late, the smoke image is displayed relatively below the display area. Smoke. In addition, the position of the displayed smoke image does not change and continues to be displayed at the same position.

At the timing t34, the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed. FIG. 384 (d) shows a display example at timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold will be deleted. Then, from the timing t35, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the hold that was the first hold until then moves to the left and becomes larger and becomes the hold. In addition, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. Further, in this production example, when the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold, the normal hold (white hold image) is changed to a higher expectation hold (green hold image). Change. FIG. 384 (e) shows a display example at the timing t36. FIG. 384 (f) shows a display example in the period from the timing t44 to the timing t45 when the variation display ends.

In this way, when the player performs an appropriate operation on the operating means, the state in which the player is shown the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.) is maintained. To.

FIG. 383 (c) shows an example of the effect when a long press operation on the attack button 3710 is detected at the timing t21.
Also in this staging example, at timing t16, a minefield composed of a bomb character appears from the upper side of the display area, and a display for moving downward is started. Then, at timing t18, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 is started.
FIG. 385 (a) shows a display example at the timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to FIG. 384 (a).

Even if the long press operation is detected at the timing t21, the display that the shell is fired from the own tank to the minefield is not displayed. Then, the display that the minefield is approaching the tank is continued. FIG. 385 (b) shows a display example at the timing t22 to the timing t23 when the operation valid period ends. Then, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the tank and the minefield explodes, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area instead of the image of the minefield. At the same time, the second hold, which was previously shown in red, changes to a white hold image. FIG. 385 (c) shows a display example at the timing t24.

At the timing t34, the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed. FIG. 385 (d) shows a display example at timing t34 to timing t35. During this period, the hold will be deleted. Then, from the timing t35, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At the same time, the hold that was the first hold until then moves to the left and becomes larger and becomes the hold. In addition, the hold that was the second hold moves to the left and becomes the first hold. Similarly, the hold that was the third hold moves to the left and becomes the second hold. FIG. 385 (e) shows a display example at the timing t36. FIG. 385 (f) shows a display example at the timing t44 to the timing t45 at which the variation display ends. In the present embodiment, the smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal hold image can be displayed, and the hold image (red hold image) indicating that the expectation that has been displayed up to that point is high is the normal hold image (white hold). It will be replaced with the image). Further, while the smoke image is displayed, the effect display for changing the normal reserved image to another reserved image (for example, a green reserved image) indicating that the expectation is high is not performed.
The display of the smoke image is continued until the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold existing at the start of the display of the smoke image is completed. Also, while the smoke image is displayed, only the normal hold image is displayed.
Further, in this production example, regarding the second hold, an example in which the hold image (red hold image) indicating that the expectation is high is replaced with the normal hold image (white hold image) is shown, but the second hold is shown. If there is a hold indicating that the expectation is high in the hold other than the second hold, it is replaced with a normal hold image as in the second hold.

In this way, if the player does not perform an appropriate operation, a state occurs in which the player is not shown the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.). The state is maintained for a predetermined period.

FIG. 383 (d) shows an example of the effect when the continuous hitting operation or the long pressing operation on the attack button 3710 is not detected during the operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22).
Also in this staging example, at timing t16, a minefield composed of a bomb character appears from the upper side of the display area, and a display for moving downward is started. Then, at timing t18, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 is started.
FIG. 386 (a) shows a display example at the timing t19. The display content at this time is the same as the display content in the display example shown with reference to FIG. 384 (a).

In this production example as well, as in the other production examples, the minefield is displayed as approaching the tank. FIG. 386 (b) shows a display example at the timing t22 to the timing t23 when the operation valid period ends. Then, at timing t23, the minefield comes into contact with the tank and the minefield explodes, and an explosion image is displayed at the bottom of the display area in place of the image of the minefield. The explosion image is set to have a higher display priority than the image of the own tank and the image on hold, the image of the own tank becomes difficult to see, and the image on hold becomes invisible. FIG. 386 (c) shows a display example at the timing t24.

At the timing t34, the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed. FIG. 386 (d) shows a display example at timing t34 to timing t35. The display priority of the explosion image is set higher than that of the decorative symbol, and the explosion image makes it difficult to visually recognize the stop display mode of the decorative symbol. In addition, the reserved image is still invisible. Then, from the timing t35, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 386 (e) shows a display example at the timing t36. FIG. 386 (f) shows a display example in the period from the timing t44 to the timing t45 when the variation display ends. In the present embodiment, the explosion image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image or the decorative symbol. The explosion image has a higher display priority than the hold image and the decorative symbol, and the hold image and the decorative symbol are hidden and displayed by the explosion image. Therefore, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative design becomes difficult to see.
The display of the explosion image is continued until the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the hold that existed at the start of the display of the explosion image ends. Further, as described above, while the explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible and the decorative design becomes difficult to see.

In this way, if the player does not perform an appropriate operation, the number of reserved items is not shown to the player in addition to the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.). Occurs and the state is maintained for a predetermined period of time.

As described above, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 383 and the like, the display of the smoke image and the explosion image is displayed even after the variation display in which the smoke image and the explosion image are displayed ends and the next variation display is started. Is continuously configured to change the visual mode of the reserved image and the decorative symbol according to the operation mode of the player.

In this way, when a specific condition is satisfied (when the operation to the operation means (attack button 3710) is appropriate), the special game-related display (smoke image) spans a plurality of variable displays. And displayed a specific effect (changed hold image) that suggests the degree of expectation for the special result (the degree of expectation that the special lottery result is a big hit, etc.), and the predetermined conditions were satisfied. In the case (when the operation to the operation means is not appropriate), the special game-related display is displayed over multiple variable displays, and the display of a specific effect suggesting the degree of expectation for the special result. By not performing the above, the player's willingness to operate the operating means can be further increased. Further, by giving a penalty step by step according to the operation mode to the operation means, it is possible to increase the motivation to perform a more appropriate operation.

If repeated hits are detected after a long press on the attack button 3710 is detected during the operation valid period, the same as the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 383 (b) from the timing when the repeated hits are detected. The production is done. In order to perform such processing, the timing at which the display corresponding to the long press is executed is not the time when the long press is detected but the time when the operation valid period ends.
With such a configuration, even if the operation for the operation means is wrong, if the correct operation is performed quickly, it is possible to prevent the display indicating the degree of expectation from becoming invisible, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

An example of an effect that limits the change in the display mode of the hold image or makes the hold image invisible until the variable display corresponding to the hold that existed at the timing when the display of the smoke image or the explosion image is started is completed is shown. However, the change in the display mode of the reserved image is limited until the variable display of the number of times corresponding to the maximum number of holdable images (4 pieces, which is the maximum number of holdable images of the first start port 2002 in the present embodiment) is performed. Or the reserved image may be made invisible.
In this way, the number of fluctuation displays that limit the hold change and the number of fluctuation displays that make the hold image invisible are predetermined, which simplifies the display control of the smoke image and the explosion image on the peripheral control board 1510. can do.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 383 and the like, there are cases where an effect pattern requiring repeated hits is executed as an operation instruction for the attack button 3710, and cases where an effect pattern requiring long press is executed. It may be configured as follows. In this case, as the line of "Might Sergeant", in the production pattern that requires repeated hits, the line of "Ensign! Attack them by hitting the attack button repeatedly!" Is displayed as the line of "Might Sergeant". In the production pattern that requires a long press, it is advisable to configure it so that the line "Ensign! Press and hold the attack button to attack them!" Is displayed.
When an appropriate operation is performed, it is preferable to perform the same display as the display example shown in FIGS. 384 (b) to 384 (f).
On the other hand, when the player makes a long press even though the instruction for repeated hits is given, or when the player makes a continuous hit even though the instruction for long press is given, FIGS. 385 (b) to FIGS. It is preferable to perform the same display as the display example shown in 385 (f).
Further, when neither the repeated hits nor the long presses are performed, it is preferable to perform the same display as the display example shown in FIGS. 386 (b) to 386 (f).
With such a configuration, it is necessary to carefully check the content of the operation instruction, the tension for the operation is increased, and the motivation and positivity of the player to operate the operation means can be improved.

Although an example of the effect of displaying the reserved image on the front side of the smoke image is shown with reference to FIG. 385, the embodiment may be modified so as to display the smoke image on the front side of the reserved image. FIG. 383 (e) is a time chart showing an example of production in this embodiment. FIG. 387 shows a display example in this embodiment.

Also in this production example, at timing t23, the minefield and the tank come into contact with each other and the minefield explodes, and a smoke image is displayed at the bottom of the display area instead of the image of the minefield. The display priority is higher than the reserved image or decorative design. FIG. 387 (a) is a display example at the timing t24. As shown in the figure, the hold image is hidden by the smoke image, making the hold image invisible.

At the timing t34, the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed. FIG. 387 (b) shows a display example at timing t34 to timing t35. Then, from the timing t35, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 387 (c) shows a display example at the timing t36. FIG. 387 (d) shows a display example in the period from the timing t44 to the timing t45 when the variation display ends. In the present embodiment, the smoke image is displayed at a position overlapping the display area of the reserved image, so that the reserved image cannot be visually recognized. In addition, some of the changing decorative patterns become invisible. On the other hand, the visual aspect of the decorative pattern displayed as a stop is not obstructed.

In each of the staging examples shown in FIGS. 384, 385, 386, and 387, the variable display of the smoke image or the explosion image corresponding to all the hold existing at the start of the display of the smoke image or the explosion image ends. However, these displays may be terminated at a predetermined timing before the variable display corresponding to all holds is terminated. For example, at the timing when the fluctuation display in which the smoke image or the explosion image is displayed ends and the new fluctuation display starts (timing t35), the display of the smoke image or the explosion image ends and the reserved image can be visually recognized. May be. It is preferable that the reserved image displayed at this time is only a normal reserved image, and the reserved image with high expectation (for example, a red reserved image) is not displayed. The period for displaying only the normal reserved image is not limited to the remaining number of fluctuations, and may be a condition that a predetermined time elapses (for example, 120 seconds) from the timing when the display of the smoke image or the explosion image ends. ..
In this way, while the special game-related display (display of smoke image and explosion image) is terminated in a short period of time, the specific effect (look-ahead effect) is prohibited for a predetermined period, and only the normal reserved image is displayed for a predetermined period. By doing so, the player can only see the normal hold image for the hold, and cannot see the hold image with high expectation, but can know the number of hold. .. In addition, it is possible to prevent other players from being embarrassed that the smoke image or the explosion image is displayed for a long period of time and the operation means cannot be operated well.

In addition, by operating when a special game-related display such as a smoke image or an explosion image is displayed, it is possible to end the special game-related display earlier than the display end period. A new operating means may be provided in the gaming machine. Regarding this operation means, it may be possible to end the display at an early stage by a simple operation, but it is said that the display is ended if a special operation such as a plurality of operations is required. As a result of being operated with a clear intention, the display ends early, which is preferable in terms of measures against erroneous operation. Further, even if the operation of the operation means is performed and the special game-related display such as the smoke image or the explosion image is terminated, the pre-reading effect is executed for a predetermined period in the game that is advanced after the special operation of the operation means is performed. Should be configured to be prohibited. Further, it is preferable to configure so that only normal reserved images are displayed during this predetermined period.

When a long press is performed, the mode shown in FIGS. 383 (d) and 386 is displayed (an explosion image is displayed, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see), and repeated hits are performed. Even if the mode shown in FIGS. 383 (c) and 385 is displayed (the smoke image is displayed and the held image is normally held) when an operation that does not result in a long press is performed or is not performed. good.
In this case, the explosion image is displayed for the player who dares to perform an operation different from the operation instruction, the reserved image becomes invisible, and the decorative pattern becomes difficult to see, and the operation is performed. You will be given a tighter penalty than if you didn't.
On the other hand, when an operation that does not result in repeated hits or long presses is performed or is not performed, a smoke image is displayed and only a normal hold image is displayed, but the number of holds can be recognized. It becomes. This is because it is terrible that a large penalty is given to a player in a situation where the player cannot operate the beverage (for example, purchasing a beverage from a clerk of a game store).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 383, the display content is restricted based on the operation mode in one operation valid period (timing t18 to timing t22), but with reference to FIG. 383. The effect as shown is executed multiple times, and during the operation valid period, there are cases where the player performs an operation that does not result in repeated hits or long presses, or no operation is performed multiple times (predetermined because it is two or more times). When it occurs (predetermined number of times), the display content may be restricted.
In this case, in the production until the predetermined number of times, it is possible to display a specific reserved image indicating that the expectation is high by not displaying the smoke image or the explosion image regardless of the operation content, and the predetermined number of times is reached. In this effect, the smoke image may be displayed and only the normal hold image may be displayed as the hold image, or the explosion image may be displayed to make the hold image invisible.

Alternatively, if the player performs an operation that does not result in repeated hits or long presses, or if the operation is not performed multiple times (two or more times and a predetermined predetermined number of times), the decoration is performed from the next time onward. A special effect may be performed in the variation of the design so that only the normal hold image is displayed as the hold image or the hold image becomes invisible.
As special effects, for example, an example of an effect shown with reference to FIGS. 385 (a) to 385 (f), an example of an effect shown with reference to FIGS. 386 (a) to 386 (f), and FIG. 386 ( The player intervenes without generating an operation valid period (not displaying a simulated image of the operation unit) by modifying the effect examples shown with reference to a) to FIG. 387 (d). It may be configured to automatically display a smoke image or an explosion image by performing an effect that makes it impossible.
In addition, the special effect may be executed in the next variation display of the variation display in which the appropriate operation of the predetermined number of times is not performed, or is random from the variation display in which the appropriate operation of the predetermined number of times is not performed. It may be executed in the variable display after a predetermined number of times (for example, after 2-10 rotations) selected for. Alternatively, it may be started after a period randomly selected from the timing when an appropriate operation is not performed a predetermined number of times (for example, after 10 seconds to 120 seconds have elapsed).

With such a configuration, a penalty is given on condition that an inappropriate operation is performed a plurality of times, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which a penalty is suddenly given to the player.
In addition, since the same effect as the effect that could be operated is automatically executed in a state where the operation cannot be performed, it is possible to limit the display that suggests the degree of expectation in a natural form as the effect.
If the player continues to ignore the operation instruction, the hold display indicating that the degree of expectation is high will not be displayed, so that the player can concentrate only on the variable display of the decorative symbol that is currently changing. That is, it can be said that the player can change the staging mode to one that suits his or her taste.

In the present embodiment, with respect to the hold that existed at the timing when the operation was not properly performed, the execution of a specific effect (display of the hold image with high expectation based on the look-ahead of the hold) is restricted, and the operation is performed. For holds that occur after the timing that was not properly performed, the execution of a specific effect is not restricted. For example, the execution of a specific effect may be restricted by a predetermined number of fluctuations (number of pending numbers). In addition, it becomes possible for a player who plays a game with the game machine to perform a nuisance act of starting the game with the execution of the effect restricted. Therefore, by not restricting the execution of a specific effect (look-ahead effect) for the hold that occurred after the timing when the operation was not performed properly, it is not possible to execute a nuisance act to other players. Can be done.

Instead of displaying the smoke image continuously, the state in which the smoke image is displayed and the state in which the smoke image is not displayed may be repeated. For example, the smoke image may be displayed and not displayed every 0.5 seconds.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make a specific effect (a look-ahead effect such as a bomb character image, a hold image, etc.) that may be displayed together with a special game-related display (smoke image) stand out.

As for the explosion image and the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 387, the state in which the explosion image and the smoke image are displayed and the state in which the smoke image is not displayed may be repeated. For example, the state in which the explosion image is displayed and the state in which the explosion image is not displayed may be switched and displayed every 0.5 seconds. When the explosion image or the smoke image shown with reference to FIG. 387 is hidden, the hold image hidden in the explosion image or the smoke image becomes visible, but the hold image to be displayed at this time becomes visible. Should be only a normal hold image (white hold image).
With such a configuration, it becomes impossible to recognize the degree of expectation for the hold and it becomes difficult to recognize the number of holds, and it becomes possible to give an appropriate penalty to the player.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the display position of the smoke image differs depending on the timing of the continuous hit detection. For example, if the repeated hits are detected early, the smoke image is displayed relatively above the display area, and if the repeated hits are detected late, the smoke image is displayed relatively below the display area. Smoke. That is, the slower the continuous hit detection is, the closer the smoke image is displayed near the display position of the smoke image displayed when the long press is detected. Further, the smoke image displayed by the continuous striking operation and the smoke image displayed by the long press operation are the same images. For this reason, when the player repeatedly hits at the timing immediately before the end of the operation valid period, it becomes difficult to distinguish the case where the player mistakenly presses and holds the operation. As a result, even if another player visually recognizes the situation where the smoke image is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the player has performed the operation properly or the wrong operation. Even if a person makes a mistake in the operation mode, it is possible to prevent another player from being noticed and feeling embarrassed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 385, it is shown that all of the hold to the fourth hold are displayed as the normal hold, but the first hold to the fourth hold are displayed only as the normal hold image. However, with respect to the hold, the display by the hold image in the mode indicating that the expectation of the big hit is higher than the normal hold may be continued. For example, when the hold is a hold indicating that the degree of expectation is high, even if the display of the smoke image is started, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the hold. Further, while displaying the smoke image, it may be possible to change the hold from a normal hold image to a hold image (for example, a red hold image) indicating that the expectation is higher.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 386 and 387, the first hold to the fourth hold may be hidden by the smoke image or the explosion image, and the hold may not be hidden. Further, when the hold is a hold image indicating that the degree of expectation is high, even if the display of the smoke image or the explosion image is started, the display mode of the hold is changed to the normal hold image. It is good to prevent it from happening. Further, while displaying a smoke image or an explosion image, it may be possible to change the hold from a normal hold image to a hold image (for example, a red hold image) indicating that the expectation is higher.

With such a configuration, the degree of expectation for the first hold to the fourth hold is not shown to the player, but the degree of expectation for the change result of the decorative symbol currently being changed is determined by the player depending on the display mode of the hold. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the penalty given to the player from becoming excessive.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 384 to 387, instead of the smoke image or the explosion image, the dialogue window of "Colonel Dyna" may be displayed at the display position of the smoke image or the explosion image. At this time, as for the reserved image, it is preferable to display only the normal reserved image as described above, or to limit the visibility of the reserved image by the dialogue window displayed instead of the smoke image or the explosion image. .. In addition, the character string "Check the operation details and perform the operation firmly!" May be displayed in the dialogue window. Alternatively, if the repeated hits are made properly, "I was able to make repeated hits!" May be displayed, or if the repeated hits are not made properly, "I should have made repeated hits" may be displayed. Alternatively, the character string "Don't misunderstand repeated hits and long presses!" May be displayed to indicate that there are a plurality of operation modes.
In this way, by displaying the message regarding the operation of the operating means, the player who is not proficient in the operating method of the operating means can know the operating method of the operating means after the end of the operation valid period, and the next time. After that, the operation means can be operated well.

An example is shown in which a hold image indicating that the expectation is high is displayed instead of the normal hold image by pre-reading, but the expectation for a predetermined hold is shown depending on the display mode of other staging displays, not limited to the hold image. May suggest that is high.

The display mode of the reserved image indicates the degree of expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit, but the display mode of the reserved image may indicate the degree of expectation that another event will occur. For example, the degree of expectation that will be a probable change jackpot may be shown, or the degree of expectation that will be a loss with a short time may be shown.

With reference to FIGS. 301 to 387, an embodiment for further improving the interest of the production using the operation unit has been described. Hereinafter, embodiments applicable to these embodiments will be described.

Although an example in which the operation unit is provided at the lower part of the door frame is shown, another operation unit may be adopted. For example, a non-contact infrared sensor is provided on the game board, and the glass plate is divided into multiple areas, for example, four areas of upper right, lower right, lower left, and upper left, and the hands are divided into four areas. The operation may be accepted when the sensors are brought closer to each other. With such a configuration, the player moves his / her hand greatly upward, so that he / she can feel more participating in the game. In this regard, a sensor is provided on the movable part of the movable body provided on the frame (a part imitating a rabbit's ear, a movable body imitating a root vegetable, etc.) so that the movement by the player can be detected, and the operation input by the player is possible. These movable parts may have a function of accepting. In this case, the feeling of participating in the game is further enhanced.

In various operation instructions in each of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 301 to 387, a predetermined operation that does not follow the operation instruction (for example, an operation different from the instructed operation unit, which is operated in an operation mode different from the instructed mode). It may be configured so that a special display is performed by performing an operation of the unit, etc.). For example, each embodiment may be modified so that an image that is normally displayed when an operation according to an operation instruction is performed is displayed when a predetermined operation that does not follow the operation instruction is performed. ..

On the other hand, there are also players, such as tired players and elderly players, who may tend to dislike such operation inputs that move the body significantly. Therefore, one or a plurality of sensors are provided in a predetermined area in the game area, and the various operation units described above are operated based on the detection of the game ball launched into the game area by the player. It may be a substitute for that. In this case, since the player can substitute the operation of the operation unit only by the operation with the right hand, even a tired or elderly player or the like can operate while firing the game ball. It is possible to input. It should be noted that both the operation to the operation unit and the input of the sensor provided in the predetermined area can be accepted, and when the operation input is performed to either one, the effect display corresponding to the operation input is performed. good. Alternatively, it may be configured so that the player or the clerk of the game store can select whether to accept the operation input by the operation input to the operation unit or the sensor provided in the predetermined area. Alternatively, the operation input may be performed only by the game ball to be fired. As the predetermined area, a dedicated staging sensor capable of detecting the passage or approach of the game ball may be provided on the board surface, or an existing winning opening (for example, a general winning opening, a first starting opening, a gate) may be provided. , A large winning opening, etc.) may be accepted for operation input based on the winning of the game ball (detection by the sensor). It should be noted that the function as a sensor may be added to an existing predetermined member instead of the predetermined area. For example, when a sensor is provided at the backflow prevention member at the upper end of the rail or at the abutment at the upper right of the game board to detect that the game ball launched based on the operation by the player has passed or that the game ball has collided. May be configured to accept operation input. In order to correspond to the direction input of the lever, the direction input may be pseudo-performed by two or more sensors provided at different positions. Further, the operation time may be calculated in a pseudo manner according to the number of detections per unit time. In this way, the player may adjust the firing intensity of the game ball so that the predetermined sensor or the like detects the game ball, so that the reception of the operation input may be realized. As a result, the number of operation units can be reduced, and further effect display can be executed based on the operation reception for the operation unit, so that the effect can be further diversified.

Although an embodiment in which a predetermined image can be hidden by a shield image is shown with reference to FIGS. 308 to 312, a plurality of operations are shown in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 308 to 312. A simulated image imitating a part may be displayed, and these may be hidden by a shield image. Further, the operation instruction display may be displayed corresponding to the plurality of operation units, and these may be hidden by the shield image. Further, the operation correspondence display may be displayed in response to the operation for a plurality of operation units, and these may be hidden by the shield image. With such a configuration, it is possible for a player who is not interested in operating the operation unit to visually recognize the display related to the plurality of operation units.
Also in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 313 to 387, the display related to the plurality of operation units and the display of the shield image may be similarly configured.
The shield image may be displayed by operating a predetermined operation unit (defense button 3740 or the like).

With reference to FIGS. 301-387, "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Sudden Tank Production", "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", "AI Tank Reach" Although each effect such as "" has been shown, it is possible to adopt a predetermined technical idea in one effect as a technical idea in another effect. Further, it is possible to adopt a plurality of technical ideas in a plurality of productions as a plurality of technical ideas in one production.

For example, the display of the shield image related to "Shield Bullet Reach" is displayed as "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", "Sudden Tank Production", "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", "AI Tank Reach". It may be applied to each effect of. At this time, predetermined images displayed in each production (image of enemy tank, image of bomb character, simulated image imitating predetermined button, image of bomb explosion, image of bullet explosion, smoke image, white flag image, etc. It is advisable to suggest the degree of expectation by the method related to "shield bullet reach" in the image) used for each production of. Further, the degree of expectation shown in this way may be configured to be hidden by a shield image.
In addition, "Shield bullet reach", "Special machine gun reach", "Silent machine gun reach", "Bomb character reach", "Full power" Applies to "Breakthrough Reach" and "AI Tank Reach", and over multiple variable displays, "Shield Bullet Reach", "Special Machine Gun Reach", "Silent Machine Gun Reach", "Bomb Character Reach", and "Full Power Breakthrough" You may perform "reach" and "AI tank reach".
For example, in contrast to the production mode using the shield image related to "Shield Bullet Reach" and the smoke image related to "Full Power Breakthrough Reach", the production mode and technique using the image of the destroyed enemy tank in "Sudden Tank Production". The idea may be applied.
Further, the shield image or the smoke image may be configured so that the player can display it a plurality of times, or the shield image or the smoke image may be configured to be displayed across the variable display. In this case, the image suggesting the degree of expectation (the image of the destroyed enemy tank in "Sudden tank production") corresponding to the variable display targeted for pre-reading is hidden by the shield image or smoke image. It should be configured as follows.
Further, for example, in "special machine gun reach" and "silent machine gun reach", a cannonball fired from a turret, a bullet fired from a machine gun, and an image of a cannonball or an exploding bullet may be displayed across a variable display. ..
In addition, for example, in "Bomb Character Reach", a collision scene between the bomb character and the own tank can occur not only during the change of the decorative symbol but also immediately before the change of the decorative symbol stops, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. It may be configured so that the tank may explode (a part of the tank is destroyed) or the tank may not explode and straddle the stop display of the decorative symbol. Immediately before the fluctuation stop of the fluctuation display that is the target of the look-ahead, it is advisable to perform an effect of displaying a large bomb character shown with reference to FIGS. 328, 333, 334, and the like.
Further, in the "full power breakthrough reach", it may be configured so that it may be attacked by the shell of the enemy unit multiple times during the variable display of the decorative symbol once. Further, the smoke image may be displayed so as to be spread over the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing the effect display based on the look-ahead a plurality of times in this way, it is preferable to display the enemy tank group appearing at the final timing of the variable display, which is the target of the look-ahead.
Further, also in the "AI tank reach", the display may be performed over a plurality of variable displays based on the look-ahead. In this case, each variation display may be configured so that one or more encounters with enemy tanks occur. At least, immediately before the display of the change stop of the decorative symbol, the display of the image in which the encounter with the enemy tank occurs and the cannonball or the bullet is destroyed may be configured so as to straddle the change display of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the left lever 3720, which is not originally instructed to operate, is operated, the tank is configured to fall on the cliff on the left side of the road and display a smoke image on the screen. May be good. In this case, the display of the smoke image may be executed over a plurality of times of the variable display of the decorative symbol until the variable display of the decorative symbol targeted for the look-ahead effect display is stopped.
In addition, in each production of "Shield bullet reach", "Special machine gun reach", "Silent machine gun reach", "Bomb character reach", "Sudden tank production", "Full power breakthrough reach", "AI tank reach", the mission button Although it was shown that the 3700, the attack button 3710, the left lever 3720, the defense button 3740, etc. can be operated, the valid period of some operation parts or all the operation parts in each production example is displayed in a variable manner of the decorative symbol. In the middle or when the look-ahead effect is performed, it may be configured to be feasible across a variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols. Further, the number of effective operations may be configured to be able to be executed a plurality of times during the variable display of the decorative symbol of 1. Further, the display corresponding to the operation reception of the operation unit may be configured to be displayed a plurality of times. Further, it is preferable that the display corresponding to such an operation reception is configured to be displayed across the variable display of the decorative symbol.
With such a configuration, some kind of display reaction occurs to the player's operation on the operation unit, so that the player can be satisfied. Further, by straddling the variable display and executing the effect display based on the operation without interruption by the stop display of the variable display, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the executed effect.

Conventionally, a gaming machine capable of performing a display effect of switching an effect image according to a game situation has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-3400037).
However, if the display effect of switching the effect image makes the player feel uncomfortable, the interest may be reduced, and a more appropriate display method for the display effect of switching the effect image is required. It was in the actual situation. It is also possible to improve the interest by realizing a more appropriate display method.
Therefore, in the embodiment shown below, a gaming machine will be described in which the player does not easily feel a sense of discomfort in the display effect of switching the effect image, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest and improve the interest.

Hereinafter, embodiments obtained by modifying the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 254 to 256, 301 to 312 and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 388 to 400 and the like. FIGS. 388 to 392 show an example of an image displayed in the present embodiment (or a modification). FIG. 393 shows the display priority of these images. 394 and 397 show time charts in this embodiment. 395, 396, and 398 to 400 show display examples in this embodiment.
In the present embodiment, a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" which are special reach effects.

388 to 390 show an example of an image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the present embodiment. Specifically, a background image (normal background image A, normal background image B, special reach background image A, special reach background image B, normal background image C displayed during right-handed striking), images of various decorative patterns, and self. An image of a tank / enemy tank, a band-shaped look-ahead effect image, the hold image, a first hold image to a fourth hold image, a character image for a resurrection effect, a fourth symbol, a hold number display image, and an error notification image are shown.
The data of various images and moving images in the present embodiment and its modifications are stored in advance in the liquid crystal display and the sound control ROM 1512b.

FIG. 388 (a) shows a normal background image A. The normal background image A is an image showing a state in which a plurality of tanks are gathered near a destroyed building.
FIG. 388 (b) usually shows a background image B. The normal background image B is an image showing a state in which the tank is parked in the hangar.
The normal background image A and the normal background image B are images displayed when the gaming state is the normal state.

FIG. 388 (c) shows a special reach background image A displayed when the “giant tank reach” effect, which is a special reach effect, is executed. The special reach background image A is an image showing the sky, desert, and unpaved road.
FIG. 388 (d) shows a special reach background image B displayed when the “enemy tank destruction reach” effect, which is a special reach effect, is executed. The special reach background image B is an image showing the sky, grassland, and road.

FIG. 388 (e) shows a normal background image C displayed in a probabilistic state or a time saving state which is advantageous to a player who may shift after the end of the big hit game state. The normal background image C is an image indicating that the player is to hit right.

The size (number of pixels) of the background image is the same as the size of the display area. Also, the background image is opaque. Therefore, some image is displayed behind the background image and is not visible to the player.

FIG. 389 shows an example of a decorative pattern that can be displayed on the pachinko machine 1. Each decorative pattern consists of a left decorative pattern, a middle decorative pattern, and a right decorative pattern. These are appropriately switched and displayed according to the progress of the production and the game situation.

FIG. 389 (a) usually shows a decorative pattern. This figure shows an example of a normal decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed, but each normal decorative symbol is scrolled in a predetermined direction (for example, downward) and displayed, or is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined position. It is also possible.
The display mode of the normal decorative symbol is determined according to the special lottery result, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, it is stopped and displayed in doublet mode (for example, "222"), and if the special lottery result is not a big hit, it is stopped and displayed. It is stopped and displayed in a mode that is not doublet (for example, "352"). FIG. 389 (a) shows, as an example, a state in which the normal decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "352".
Usually, a decorative pattern consists of a vertically long rectangular background area and numbers and characters arranged in front of the background area. There is a one-to-one correspondence between numbers and characters.

FIG. 389 (b) shows a special reach decorative symbol displayed when the “giant tank reach” effect or the “enemy tank destruction reach” effect, which is a special reach effect, is executed.
The special reach decorative symbol is displayed smaller than the normal decorative symbol in a place near the center of the display area. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the effect suggesting the result of the special lottery executed during the execution of the "giant tank reach" effect or the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect.
FIG. 389 (c) is a modified example of the special reach decorative pattern. In this way, a special reach decorative pattern in which the numbers are displayed with more emphasis may be adopted.
Note that FIGS. 389 (b) and 389 (c) show a state in which the special reach decorative symbol is temporarily stopped.
During the reach effect, only the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol may be displayed, and the middle decorative symbol may not be displayed.

FIG. 389 (d) shows a right-handed decorative pattern displayed during right-handed striking. The right-handed decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed in a gaming state in which the player is required to hit right, such as in a probabilistic state or a time-saving state. FIG. 389 (d) shows a state in which the right-handed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "352".

As shown with reference to FIG. 389, normal decorative symbols, special reach decorative symbols, and right-handed decorative symbols can be distinguished by the size and design of the background area, the presence or absence of characters, the size of numbers, and the like. Is. This makes it easier to understand the production status and the game status by visually recognizing the decorative design.

FIG. 390 (a) shows an image of the own tank, an image of an enemy tank, a line image of "Sergeant Might", a line image of "Colonel Dyna", and a mission button 3700 displayed when the "Giant Tank Reach" effect is executed. A simulated image imitating the above is shown. The display mode of these images suggests a special lottery result.
FIG. 390 (b) shows an image of the own tank, an image of the enemy tank, a line image of "Sergeant Might", a line image of "Colonel Dyna", and an attack button displayed when the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is executed. A simulated image imitating 3710 is shown. The display mode of these images suggests a special lottery result.
A specific aspect of suggesting the result of the special lottery will be described later with reference to FIG. 397 and the like.

FIG. 390 (d) shows a reserved image. At the bottom of the display area, the hold display area, the first hold display area, the second hold display area, the third hold display area, and the fourth hold display area are set from the left. The shape of the reserved image and the reserved image is a perfect circle, and the color is basically white. Further, the reserved image has a larger circle diameter than the reserved image.
In the figure, an example is shown in which the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area and the reserved image is displayed in the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area.
When the winning of the game ball for the first starting port 2002 occurs, the reserved image or the reserved image is displayed in the reserved display area, the first reserved display area to the fourth reserved display area. For example, in a state where the hold image is displayed in the hold display area and the hold image is displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area (that is, there are two holds), the first start port 2002 is used. When a game ball is won, the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 254 to 256, the specified reserved image having a different display mode (color and shape) from the normal reserved image or reserved image (white and circular) based on the look-ahead of the reserved image. Or a specific hold image may be displayed to indicate that there is a high expectation that the special lottery result corresponding to the hold will be a big hit, depending on the display mode.

For example, by displaying a red reserved image instead of the white reserved image which is a normal reserved image, it may be shown that the result of the special lottery is highly expected to be a big hit. For example, a big hit in the order of white, green, red, and gold (which is recognized as gold by the player, but is represented by a combination of white pixels and yellow pixels that express metallic luster as display processing). Expectations may be high. Further, it may be configured so that the probability of being displayed in this order is low. Although the reserved image is taken as an example, it is preferable to display the reserved image in the same manner.
For example, the reserved image or the reserved image displayed at the time of the start winning may be configured so that the probability that the reserved image or the reserved image is white is the highest and the probability that the reserved image or the reserved image is gold is the lowest. ..
Further, it is preferable that the reserved image displayed last at the timing of the end of the change of the decorative symbol has the highest probability of being the white reserved image and the lowest probability of being the golden reserved image.
Further, the green, red, or gold reserved image or the reserved image may be displayed at the time of the start winning, or the white reserved image or the reserved image at the time of the starting prize may be displayed until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The image may be changed to a green, red, or gold reserved image or the reserved image at a predetermined timing.

In the hold display area, the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area, the hold image and the hold image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first start port 2002 are displayed, for example, on the right. In response to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 during hitting, etc., the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 in the hold display area, the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area. The reserved image or the reserved image corresponding to the above may be displayed in the same manner.
Alternatively, the reserved image or the reserved image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is the same as the reserved image or the reserved image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, but is different. It may be displayed in a display mode. For example, the reserved image or the reserved image may be represented by forming a hexagonal shape instead of a circular shape, or by displaying the characters "Denchu" on each of the circular images.
Further, the holding image or the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is displayed in the same manner as the holding image or the holding image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2002. It may be displayed at a different position (for example, the lower left side of the display area).
Further, by combining these, the reserved image or the reserved image corresponding to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 may be displayed at different positions in different display modes.
By adopting such a configuration, the player can understand which start port corresponds to the hold.

FIG. 390 (e) shows a resurrection effect character and its dialogue, which may be displayed when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the state of reach loss. The details of the effect using the revival effect character will be described later.

FIG. 390 (f) shows the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the special symbol is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405. For example, FIGS. 389 (a) to upper right of the display area. It is displayed smaller than the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 389 (d). The fourth symbol is variablely displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol, and is stopped and displayed according to the stop display of the special symbol. Similar to the decorative symbol, the fourth symbol is displayed in the form of doublet when the special lottery result is a big hit, and is displayed in a mode other than doublet when the special lottery result is lost. In FIG. 390 (f), a state in which the number “352” is stopped and displayed as the fourth symbol is shown.

Although the fourth symbol shows an embodiment consisting of three numbers, there are only two types of symbols displayed as the fourth symbol, the symbol "○" indicating a big hit and the symbol "x" indicating a loss. The result of the special lottery may be shown at. During the variable display of the special symbol, "○" and "×" may be alternately displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 second).
According to such a configuration, "○" and "×" are alternately displayed as the fourth symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the decorative symbol is doublet. Stop display, the 4th symbol stops and displays "○", and if the special lottery result is lost, the decorative symbol stops and displays in a mode other than doublet, and the 4th symbol stops and displays "x".
In this case, the combination of the stop display of the decorative symbol may be displayed in a different manner for each variable display, but the stop display of the fourth symbol is only two types, "○" and "×".

In the present embodiment, since the variable display of the first special symbol display 1403 and the variable display of the second special symbol display 1405 are not performed at the same time, the fourth symbol is the first special symbol display 1403. The fluctuation status of the second special symbol display 1405 is also shown, but the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display 1403 and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display 1405 are shown. May be provided separately. For example, the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol display 1403 is displayed on the upper side of the reserved image number display image, and the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol display 1405 is displayed on the lower side of the reserved image number display image. It may be displayed.

FIG. 390 (g) shows a hold number display image. The hold number display image includes an image displaying the hold number corresponding to the upper first start port 2002 and an image displaying the hold number corresponding to the lower second start port 2004. In FIG. 388 (h), a display example is shown in which the number of holds corresponding to the first start port 2002 is three and the number of holds corresponding to the second start port 2004 is zero. As described above, the number of holds can be confirmed by the hold number display image shown in FIG. 390 (g), and can also be confirmed by the hold image and the hold image shown in FIG. 390 (d).

FIG. 390 (h) shows an error notification image displayed when some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is detected. The figure shows an example of the message "Call a clerk during an error". As the error notification image, the specific contents of the abnormality generated in the gaming machine or the fraudulent act performed by the player may be shown. In this case, the error notification image is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the fourth symbol or the hold number display image.

It should be noted that the striking instruction image for instructing the operation of the handle 302 may be displayed by the same display method as the error notification image. For example, the message "Please hit right" or "Please return to left hit" may be displayed as a hitting instruction image. The display priority of the striking instruction image may be higher than the display priority of the fourth symbol or the hold number display image, and lower than the display priority of the error notification image.

By arranging an object in the virtual space, creating a moving image in which the virtual camera is moved in a predetermined manner, and displaying the moving image as a normal background image, the normal background image is dynamically visually recognized. You may do so.
FIGS. 391 (a) to 391 (c) show an example of displaying a group of tanks entering an enemy position in a virtual space at a predetermined timing of a normal background moving image A generated by following a virtual camera. Is shown. By generating such a normal background moving image A and repeatedly playing it back, it is possible to loop and repeatedly display the dynamic background image.
Specifically, FIG. 391 (a) is a display example when the tank group departs, FIG. 391 (b) is a display example in which the tank group is entering the enemy position, and FIG. 391 (c) is a display example of the tank group. Furthermore, display examples when entering the enemy base are shown.

Although an example of displaying a moving image of a tank group entering an enemy position is shown with reference to FIGS. 391 (a) to 391 (c), a moving image of another aspect may be displayed.
The following is an example of a normal background moving image B created by moving the virtual camera from the initial position to the right and then moving it to the left in the virtual space. In this normal background moving image B, each tank is stopped in the hangar. In addition, the virtual camera returns to the position where the movement started at the end of the movement. The orientation of the virtual camera is adjusted so that it faces the tank. FIG. 391 (d) shows a display example when the virtual camera is in the initial position. FIG. 391 (e) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the right and moves to the front of the hangar. FIG. 391 (f) shows a display example when the virtual camera moves to the far right. The virtual camera then moves to the left and finally returns to its initial position. The player visually recognizes the moving images of the tank and the hangar displayed in the order of FIG. 391 (d), FIG. 391 (e), FIG. 391 (f), FIG. 391 (e), and FIG. 391 (d). Become.
When the normal background moving image B is displayed in a loop, FIGS. 391 (d), 391 (e), 391 (f), and 391 (e) are displayed, and then FIG. 391 (e) is displayed again. From d), the normal background moving image B is displayed.

The length (reproduction time) of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be set to about 30 seconds to 120 seconds. In this case, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can be displayed in a loop with a cycle of about 30 seconds to 120 seconds.
It should be noted that a plurality of normal background moving images such as the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are generated, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed in a predetermined order. May be.
The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B can also be displayed over a plurality of variable displays in the same manner as the normal background image A and the normal background image B.

In addition, as in the embodiment described later, when the execution of the "giant tank reach" effect or the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, which is a special reach effect, is started while the normal background moving image A is displayed, the execution is started. The background image is changed to a background image or a background moving image dedicated to a special reach effect.
After that, when the special reach effect ends, the normal background moving image A that was displayed before the special reach effect is displayed is displayed instead of the special reach-dedicated background image or background moving image. good. At this time, the normal background moving image A may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (display state shown in FIG. 391 (a)), or the normal background image A may be reproduced even during a special reach effect. May be advanced, and the ordinary background image A that has been advanced may be displayed at the end of the special reach effect.
Although the normal background moving image A is taken as an example, the same display may be performed in the normal background moving image B as well.

An example of displaying a dynamically displayed normal background moving image A or a normal background moving image B instead of the statically displayed normal background image A or the normal background image B is shown, but the special reach background image A is shown. , The special reach background image B, the reserved image, and the reserved image may also be displayed as a still image or dynamically displayed using a moving image. When displaying dynamically, the image may be looped and displayed at a predetermined cycle. For example, the special reach background image may be displayed in a loop with a cycle of about 10 to 60 seconds. Further, the reserved image and the reserved image may be displayed in a loop at a cycle of about 1 to 2 seconds.

FIGS. 392 (a) to 392 (c) show an example of a background concealed image.
The background concealed image is an image displayed when switching between the normal background image A or the normal background image B and the special reach background image displayed when the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" effect is executed. .. The background concealed images shown in FIGS. 392 (a) to 392 (c) consist of black images. The background concealed image can reduce the visibility of an image having a lower display priority than the background concealed image.
As the background concealed image, a plurality of (specifically, three) background concealed images having different degrees of deterioration in visibility are prepared. Each background concealed image in this embodiment is black, but the transparency is different. Specifically, the background concealed image A (FIG. 392 (a)) having high transparency and low degree of deterioration of visibility, and the background concealed image B (FIG. 392) having moderate transparency and moderate degree of deterioration of visibility. (B)), three background concealed images C (FIG. 392 (c)) having low transparency and high degree of deterioration in visibility are prepared, and these are switched in a predetermined order and displayed in sequence. Although the details will be described later, by sequentially displaying each background concealed image, the switching of the background image can be visually recognized by the player in a natural manner. Although three background concealed images having different transparency are shown, two or four or more background concealed images may be used, or a moving image consisting of more images may be used. In this case, the background switching is more naturally visible to the player.
Further, instead of preparing a plurality of background concealed images having different transparency, the visibility of the background image is changed by gradually changing the transparency of one black background concealed image by using the function of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. You may do so. With such a configuration, the visibility of the background image can be smoothly changed while reducing the capacity used for storing the background hidden image.
FIGS. 392 (d) to 392 (f) show other examples of the background concealed image. This is an example in which an image of a bomb character (specifically, the bomb character A shown in the above-described embodiment) is used as a background concealed image. Further, although the details will be described later, a white background concealed image may be used instead of the black one.

Each image shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 392 has a display priority. FIG. 393 is a table showing display priority, layer names on which images are arranged, and types of images that can be arranged on each layer. For example, a background image is arranged on the layer L90, an own tank image, an enemy tank image, an operation instruction image, etc. are arranged on the layers L75 to L80, and a decorative pattern is arranged on the layer L70, and the display priority set for each layer is set. It is displayed superimposed based on.
As shown in the table of FIG. 393, a background image (normal background image, special reach background image), various images displayed at the time of special reach (image of own tank, image of enemy tank, line image of "Might Gunso", " Dialogue image of "Captain Dyna", operation instruction image imitating attack button 3710 and mission button 3700), decorative design (normal decorative design, special reach decorative design, etc.), pseudo-repeated number display image, band-shaped look-ahead effect image, 1st Reserved image-4th reserved image, the reserved image, dialogue preview image described later with reference to FIG. 433, background concealed image, game result image described later with reference to FIG. 420, etc., revival effect image (with revival effect character). The display priority increases in the order of the dialogue), the fourth symbol, the hold number display image, and the error notification image.
Specifically, the display priority of various images, decorative symbols, reserved images, etc. displayed at the time of special reach is higher than the display priority of the background image, and various images, decorative symbols, etc. displayed at the time of special reach. The reserved image or the like is displayed on the front side of the background image.
On the other hand, the display priority of the background concealed image is higher than the display priority of the background image, various images displayed at the time of special reach, decorative patterns, the reserved image, etc., and the background concealed image is on the front side of these images. By being displayed, these images are concealed and visibility is reduced.

Although the example in which the reserved image is arranged on the layer L40 and the reserved image is arranged on the layer L45, the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L26 and the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L27. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background hidden image arranged on the layer L30.
Further, the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L21 and the reserved image may be arranged on the layer L22. In this case, the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden by the background concealed image arranged on the layer L30 and the game result image arranged on the layer L25.

Further, the decorative pattern may be arranged on the layer L26. In this case, the decorative pattern is not hidden by the background concealed image arranged on the layer L30.

Various production modes in the present embodiment and various modifications are determined by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the result of the special lottery determined by the main control board 1310, the gaming state, and the like, and are determined by the peripheral control board 1510. It is executed at the timing.
For example, when the result of the special lottery is lost, the peripheral control board 1510 stops and displays the decorative symbol in the non-reach lost state (for example, "352") in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. After the reach state (for example, "2 ↓ 2") is set, the stop display is finally displayed in the reach loss state (for example, "232"). On the other hand, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the decorative symbol is set to the reach state (“2 ↓ 2”), and then the decorative symbol is finally stopped and displayed in doublets (for example, “222”). conduct.
The peripheral control board 1510 also determines whether or not to execute a special reach effect (“giant tank reach”, “enemy tank destruction reach”) and other effects described later.

First, an example of the effect in which the decorative pattern is not in the reach state and the background image is not switched will be described with reference to FIGS. 394 (a) and 395. FIG. 394 (a) shows a time chart in this staging example, and FIG. 395 shows a display example at a predetermined timing of this staging example.

In the state immediately before the timing t0, the display state in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is a state in which the decorative symbol has stopped changing. FIG. 395 (a) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped. The number of reservations at this time is 3. As a decorative pattern, a decorative pattern is usually displayed. Further, as a background image, a normal background image A is usually displayed behind the decorative pattern.
When the timing t0 is reached from this state, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. FIG. 395 (b) shows the display state immediately after the variable display is started.
After that, each decorative pattern on the left, middle, and right is displayed in a manner of scrolling downward. FIG. 395 (c) shows the display state at that time.
After that, a prize for the game ball is generated for the first starting port 2002, the reserved image is displayed in the third reserved display area, and then the left decorative drawing is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing t5. FIG. 395 (d) shows the display state at that time.

Next, at the timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 395 (e) shows the display state at that time. Next, at the timing t15, the intermediate decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. Next, at the timing t16, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. At the same time, the display of the reserved image ends. FIG. 395 (f) shows a display state during the period from timing t16 to timing t17. In this state, it is shown that the special lottery result is lost. After the timing t17, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next hold is performed.

Next, an example of the effect when the decorative symbol is in the reach state but the background image is not switched will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 394 (b) and the display example shown in FIG. 396. In the period from timing t0 to timing t10, the same display as the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 394 (a) is performed.
In this effect example, at the timing t10, the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same number "2" as the left decorative symbol, and a reach state occurs. FIG. 396 (a) shows the display state at that time. After that, at the timing t20, the middle decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, and at the timing t21, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the player is shown whether the special lottery result is a loss or a big hit.
FIG. 396 (b) shows a display example in the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is lost. In the figure, a state in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "232" is shown.
FIG. 396 (c) shows a display example in the period from timing t21 to timing t22 when the special lottery result is a big hit. In the figure, the state in which each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet "222" is shown.
After the timing t22, if the special lottery result is lost, the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the next hold is executed, and if the special lottery result is a big hit, the background image is the normal background image. The big hit medium background image is switched from A to the big hit medium background image, and the big hit game state is executed.

Compared with the effect example in which the reach state is not shown with reference to FIG. 394 (a), the effect example in which the reach state is shown with reference to FIG. 394 (b) has a longer variation display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, the player can feel the expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit for a long time.

In the effect example shown with reference to FIGS. 394 (a) and 395 and the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 394 (b) and FIG. 396, only the normal background image A continues during the variable display of the decorative pattern. The special reach background image A and the special reach background image B are not displayed. Also, the background hidden image is not displayed.

In the time chart of FIG. 394 (a), the decorative symbol is changing (timing t0 to timing t16), the decorative symbol is stopped (timing t16 to timing t17), and the decorative symbol is changing from the next time onward (timing t17 to). Although an example of the effect in which the normal background image A is continuously displayed is shown, the normal background image A is displayed even when the number of reservations is 0 and the decorative pattern does not change. FIG. 396 (d) shows a display example after the number of reservations is 0 and "253" indicating that the result of the special lottery is lost in the latest variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. If the game ball does not win a prize for the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004), this display state is maintained.
As with the normal background image, the display state of the normal background moving image is maintained in a state where the decorative pattern does not change. Specifically, even after the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal background moving image displayed during the variable display of the decorative symbol is continued to be reproduced. Further, after the normal background moving image is played back to the end, it is preferable to play the moving image again from the beginning so that the moving image is played back in a loop.
As described above, the normal background image or the normal background moving image is an image or a moving image displayed as a background image when the decorative pattern is not displayed in a variable manner and is not in the big hit game state.

When the state in which the number of holdings is 0 continues for a predetermined time (when the variable display is not performed for a predetermined time), the decorative symbol may not be displayed.
Specifically, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is not performed and the number of reservations is 0, the stop display of the decorative symbol shown in FIG. 396 (d) is performed for 1 second, and then a predetermined time (for example, 3) is displayed. After the stop display of the decorative symbol is continued until the elapse of seconds), the decorative symbol may not be displayed. FIG. 396 (e) shows a display example in a state in which the stop display of the decorative symbol is not performed.
Such a display state may be continued until the game ball is won for the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004).
At the timing when the predetermined time has elapsed, the display area may be shifted to the demo image display state in which the demo image for introducing the pachinko machine 1 or the like is displayed. In the demo image display state, the demo image may be displayed on the front side of the stopped decorative symbol, or the demo image may be displayed without displaying the decorative symbol.
In this way, the normal background image A is continuously displayed even from the state in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed to the state in which the decorative symbol is not variablely displayed.
Further, from the state where the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the number of holdings corresponding to the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) is 0, the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004) is changed. ) Is generated, and the background image A is normally displayed continuously even when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

It should be noted that the handle touch sensor 310 makes contact with the handle 302 by the player in a state where the decorative symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the number of holdings is 0, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second. If the undetected state continues for a predetermined time, the decorative symbol may not be displayed.
Further, when the contact with the handle 302 by the player is newly detected by the handle touch sensor 310, or when the game ball wins the first starting port 2002 (or the second starting port 2004), the decorative symbol is displayed. You may want to resume the display of. At the same time, it is advisable to end the display of the demo image. In this case as well, it is preferable that the background image A is continuously displayed regardless of whether or not the decorative pattern is displayed.

Although the normal background image A is taken as an example, the normal background image B and the normal background image C are also used in the same manner as the normal background image A, and can be displayed as a background image in which the decorative pattern is changing or not changing.

It should be noted that the normal background image must satisfy a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined number of variable displays are performed, a predetermined lottery is won, and a special reach effect, which is a high expectation reach effect, is lost as a result of loss. When it becomes, etc.), one of the normal background image A and the normal background image B may be switched to the other.
In addition, in the most recent variation display of the decorative symbol that is started after the predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the variation display executed after the variation display in which the special reach effect resulting in the loss is performed). , It is usually good to perform an effect of switching the background image.
Although the normal background image A and the normal background image B have been described as normal background images that can be displayed in a game state (normal state) that is not a right-handed game state, the normal background image is not limited to two types and may be three or more types. .. Further, in that case, the normal background image may be switched based on a predetermined rule such as being displayed in a predetermined order. Alternatively, the normal background image may be switched irregularly, such as being displayed in a random order.
Further, when the game state (probability change state or time saving state) in which right-handed hitting is performed is triggered by the big hit game state, the normal background image C is displayed as the background image during right-handed hitting. In this way, the displayed normal background image may be changed as a result of the change in the gaming state. It should be noted that there may be a plurality of background images other than the normal background image C as the background image during right-handed striking. In this case as well, the background image may be switched by the same method as the display method of the normal background image in the normal state.

In the effect example shown with reference to FIGS. 394 (a), 394 (b), 395, and 396, the background image is not switched during the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the normal background image is continuously displayed. However, the following shows the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect in which the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image during the variable display of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIGS. 394 (c) and 397 (a). The time chart will be described with reference to the display examples shown in FIGS. 398 to 400. In the time chart shown in FIG. 394 (c), an example of the production at timing t0 to timing t10 in the "enemy tank destruction reach" production is shown, and in the time chart shown in FIG. 397 (a), the "enemy tank destruction reach" is shown. Examples of the production at timing t10 to timing t45 in the production are shown.
In the period from timing t0 to timing t13, the variable display is performed in the same manner as the effect example shown with reference to FIG. 394 (b). FIG. 398 (a) is a display example of a predetermined timing in a predetermined period (timing t10 to timing t13) before the background concealed image is displayed.

In this effect example, the background concealed image A, the background concealed image B, and the background concealed image C are displayed in a predetermined order from timing t13 to timing t19. Further, at the timing t16 when the background concealed image C is displayed, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 397 (a), the background concealed image A is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t13 to the timing t14. FIG. 398 (b) shows a display example during this period.
Further, the background concealed image B is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t14 to the timing t15. FIG. 398 (c) shows a display example during this period.
Further, the background concealed image C is displayed in the period (2 seconds) from the timing t15 to the timing t17. FIG. 398 (d) shows a display example during this period.
Further, the background concealed image B is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t17 to the timing t18. FIG. 398 (e) shows a display example during this period.
Further, the background concealed image A is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t18 to the timing t19. FIG. 398 (f) shows a display example during this period.

At the timing t16 when the background concealed image C is displayed, the background image is changed from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B, and the decorative design is shown with reference to FIG. 389 (b). It is changed to a special reach decorative pattern that is smaller than the decorative pattern of, but since the background concealed image C is displayed on the front side of the background image and the decorative pattern, it can be recognized that these images have been switched. Is after the timing t17 when the background concealed image B is displayed.
The special reach decorative symbol is displayed during the period (timing t16 to timing t39) in which the special reach background image is displayed. In addition, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol are not scrolled downward and are displayed in a temporarily stopped state.

From the timing t30 to the timing t33, an operation valid period in which the operation reception for the attack button 3710 is valid occurs. FIG. 398 (g) shows a display example during this period. At the same time as the start of the operation valid period, a simulated image imitating the attack button 3710 is displayed, and a line instructing the operation of the attack button 3710 is displayed.
If an appropriate operation mode for the attack button 3710 is executed during the operation validity period, or if the operation validity period ends, a mode suggesting a special lottery result (whether or not the display that the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed) Is displayed.

FIG. 399 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a big hit. Specifically, when the special lottery result is a big hit, an image in which the enemy tank is destroyed is displayed. Further, the special reach decorative symbol is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped in the doublet mode (“222”) at the timing t34 when the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends and a predetermined time has elapsed. FIG. 399 (a) shows this state.

On the other hand, FIG. 400 shows a display example when the special lottery result is a loss. If the result of the special lottery is lost, an image of the enemy tank passing through without being destroyed is displayed. Further, the special reach decorative symbol is displayed in a state of being temporarily stopped in the reach loss mode (“232”) at the timing t34 when the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 ends and a predetermined time has elapsed. FIG. 400 (a) shows this state.

Next, the background concealed image is displayed during the period from timing t36 to timing t42.
Specifically, the background concealed image A is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t36 to the timing t37. 399 (b) and 400 (b) show display examples during this period.
Further, the background concealed image B is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t37 to the timing t38. FIGS. 399 (c) and 400 (c) show an example of display during this period.
Further, the background concealed image C is displayed in the period (2 seconds) from the timing t38 to the timing t40. 399 (d) and 400 (d) show display examples during this period.
Further, the background concealed image B is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t40 to the timing t41. 399 (e) and 400 (e) show display examples during this period.
Further, the background concealed image A is displayed in the period (1 second) from the timing t41 to the timing t42. 399 (f) and 400 (f) show display examples during this period.

The background image is changed from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A at the timing t39 when the background concealed image C is displayed, and the decorative symbol is changed from the special reach decorative symbol B to the normal decorative symbol A. However, since the background concealed image C is displayed on the front side of the background image and the decorative pattern, it is possible to recognize that the switching of these images has been performed at the timing t40 when the background concealed image B is displayed. After that.

During the period from timing t34 to timing t44, the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are maintained in a temporarily stopped state. During the period from the timing t42 to the timing t44, the background concealed image A is not displayed, and the visibility of the normal decorative symbol A during the temporary stop is not impaired by the background concealed image. FIGS. 399 (g) and 400 (g) show the display state at this time.

At the timing t44, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result is shown to the player. FIGS. 399 (h) and 400 (h) show display states during the period from timing t44 to timing t45.

The reach in which the background image is not switched as shown in FIGS. 394 (b) and 396, and the special background image in which the background image is switched with reference to FIGS. 394 (c) and 397 to 400 are performed. In terms of reach (“enemy tank destruction reach”), the latter has a higher expectation that the special lottery result will be a big hit. For example, in the former case, the expectation degree may be 3%, whereas in the latter case, the expectation degree may be 10%.

In addition, a plurality of special reach having different expectations of big hits may be executed, and any special reach may be configured to be executed. In this case, the special reach background image, the image of the own tank, the image of the enemy tank, the operation unit required to be operated, and the like may be different depending on the type of special reach. As a result, by visually recognizing the displayed special reach background image, the image of the own tank or the enemy tank, and the operation instruction image of the operation unit, the player can know whether the expectation of being a big hit is high or low.
In addition, you may adopt the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 309 and the like suggesting the degree of expectation in the modified example thereof.

An example of the effect of switching the background image is shown at the timing t16, but since the change to the special reach background image B or the small special reach decorative pattern becomes recognizable after the timing t17, it is special at the timing t15 and the timing t17. Changes may be made to the reach background image B or a small special reach decorative pattern.
An example of the effect of switching the background image is shown at the timing t39, but since the change to the normal background image A or the small normal decorative pattern becomes recognizable after the timing t40, the normal background image is displayed at the timing t38 or the timing t40. A may be changed to A or a normal decorative pattern.

As described above, in the present production example, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the special reach background image B at the timing t16. Similarly, at the timing t39, the background image is switched from the special reach background image B to the normal background image A.
At the timing t16 and the timing t39, since the background concealed image C is displayed, the player does not recognize that the background image has been switched.

In the background image switching effect in the present embodiment, the background concealed image A and the background concealed image B are displayed in order, the visibility of the background image decreases, and the background image before switching gradually becomes difficult to see. Period (hereinafter, may be referred to as "first period") and the period during which the background concealed image C is displayed and the background image before and after switching is invisible (hereinafter, may be referred to as "second period"). The background concealed image B and the background concealed image A are displayed in order, the visibility of the background image increases, and the background image after switching gradually becomes easier to see (hereinafter referred to as "third period"). May) and have.
In the period from the end of the third period until the decorative symbol stops fluctuating (the period from timing t42 to timing t44), the normal background image is usually maintained in a easily visible state (hereinafter, this period). May be referred to as the "fourth period").

According to such a configuration, the switching of the background image is naturally perceived by the player, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.
Also, at the start of the special reach, while the background hidden image is displayed, the normal background image is switched to the special reach background image, so the start of the special reach is naturally perceived by the player, and the interest is reduced. Can be suppressed.
Similarly, at the end of the special reach, while the background concealed image is displayed, the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so the end of the special reach is naturally perceived by the player and is interesting. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

In such a background image switching effect, the background image is switched during the period when the background is most difficult to see (second period) (note that the background image is switched at the same time as the start of the third period). You may do it). As a result, the background can be switched smoothly, and the player is less likely to feel a sense of discomfort in the production.
In addition, since the black background concealed image is displayed in the entire display area, the luminous intensity of the display area is lowered and the visibility of the decorative pattern is lowered, so that the movement of the image in the display area is reduced. .. Therefore, it is possible to make the player who is less conscious of the display content of the display area, such as by operating a smartphone, recognize that the opportunity to pay attention to the display area has come.
Further, at the end of the special reach, the black background concealed image is displayed and the special reach background image is switched to the normal background image, so that the display content in the display area is simplified for a predetermined period. As a result, even if the display result of the special reach indicates to the player that the result of the special lottery is a loss, the feeling of the player who has been hit by the expectation for the big hit calms down, and the fluctuation display after that. Since the game is continued without losing interest in the game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine.

An example of display when the special lottery result is a big hit is shown with reference to FIG. 399, but the background concealed image is displayed only when the special lottery result is lost, and when the special lottery result is a big hit. May continue the display mode shown in FIG. 399 (a) until the timing t44 without displaying the background concealed image, and stop and display the symbol while keeping the special reach decorative symbol. Further, although the background concealed image is displayed, at the timing t39, the special reach background image B may be switched to the big hit medium background image instead of being switched to the normal background image A.
With such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the feeling of being overwhelmed by the occurrence of the big hit until the big hit game is started.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400, the result of the special lottery is shown by the display mode of the enemy tank and the temporary stop display mode of the special reach decorative symbol, but the special reach showing the result of the special lottery is shown. As the decorative symbol, a large special reach decorative symbol shown with reference to FIG. 389 (c) may be adopted.
For example, the end timing of the operation valid period (timing t33) or the timing when a predetermined time (1 second) has elapsed from the end of the operation valid period and the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol are temporarily stopped and displayed (timing t34). Then, the decorative symbol may be changed from the small special reach decorative symbol shown with reference to FIG. 389 (b) to the large special reach decorative symbol shown with reference to FIG. 389 (c).
The display of the large special reach decorative symbol may be continued until the timing t39 during the second period, and the normal decorative symbol may be displayed after the timing t39.
When the special lottery result is a big hit and the background concealed image is not displayed, the display of the large special reach decorative symbol may be continued until the timing t45.

The background concealed image may be configured so that the reserved image or the reserved image is not hidden. For example, when the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 398 to 400 is modified so that the reserved image or the reserved image is displayed on the front side of the background concealed image, FIGS. 400 (a) to 400 are shown. Each display example shown in (h) is displayed like each display example shown in FIGS. 401 (a) to 401 (h). Such a display can be realized by setting the display priority of the reserved image and the reserved image to be higher than the display priority of the background concealed image. It should be noted that the background concealed image may be configured so that the reserved image and the reserved image are not hidden not only at the end of the special reach but also at the start of the special reach.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is not deteriorated, so that the player can confirm the number of reserved images and operate the handle 302 to move the game ball to the first starting port 2002. You can make a decision as to whether or not to win a prize.
Specifically, the background concealed image is displayed at the start of special reach, which has a relatively long variable display time compared to the reach where only the background image is normally displayed, and the decorative symbol at the time of reach is temporarily stopped and displayed. Immediately after. Further, from the state where the decorative symbol at the time of reach is stopped and displayed, the hold is reduced by one and the next variable display is started, or a big hit game state occurs and the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 is started.
Therefore, if the number of holds can be confirmed at the start of the special reach, it is possible to determine whether or not to increase the number of holds during the special reach, where the expectation of a big hit is high and the need to increase the number of holds is not necessarily high. It will be possible.
In addition, if the number of holds can be confirmed at the end of the special reach, the player who has stopped firing the game ball during the special reach can accurately determine whether or not to fire the game ball. ..

With reference to FIGS. 255 and 256, an embodiment in which the look-ahead effect display is performed over a plurality of variable displays based on the look-ahead result is shown. However, the method in this embodiment is applied, and FIGS. 398 to 398. In the embodiment shown with reference to 400 and the like, the look-ahead effect display may be modified.
For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 398 to 400 and the like, when the look-ahead effect display is configured, the display examples shown in FIGS. 400 (a) to 400 (h) are shown in FIGS. 402 (h), respectively. It will be displayed as in the display example shown in a) to FIG. 402 (h).
In the embodiment shown in FIG. 402, as a look-ahead effect display in the special reach, a band-shaped look-ahead effect image with the character string "Enemy tank approaching!" Is displayed in the upper right and upper left of the display area. Further, since the background concealed image A and the background concealed image B are displayed, the band-shaped look-ahead effect image becomes difficult to see in the first period, and the background concealed image C is displayed, so that the band-shaped pre-reading effect image cannot be visually recognized. It will be the second period. After that, the background concealed image B and the background concealed image A are displayed, so that the third period is in which the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is gradually easier to see, and the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. .. Such a display mode can be realized by setting the display priority of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image to be lower than the display priority of the background concealed image.

The band-shaped look-ahead effect image ends the display at the timing t45 when the stop display of the decorative symbol ends. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image may be terminated during the period from the timing t36 to the timing t42 (see FIG. 397), which is the period during which the background concealed image is displayed. In this case, the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may be terminated in any of the first to third periods. Alternatively, the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image may be terminated in the fourth period, which is the period until the visibility of the background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. Alternatively, the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may be terminated at the timing t44 when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. As described above, the band-shaped look-ahead effect image can be displayed invisible or difficult to see by the background concealed image by using the same display method as other images such as the reserved image.

By displaying the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image even in the first period and the third period during which the background concealed image is being displayed, it is possible to see under what degree of expectation the decorative pattern was variablely displayed. It can be recognized by the player.
On the other hand, by ending the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image in the first to third periods (particularly the second period), the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image can be ended in a natural manner.
Further, by ending the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image before the stop display of the decorative symbol, the visibility of the stopped-displayed decorative symbol is not impaired.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 402, the reserved image, the reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image are made difficult to see or invisible due to the background concealed image.
On the other hand, the look-ahead effect image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 402 is also displayed on the front side of the background concealed image as in the reserved image and the reserved image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 401. You may do it. In this case, since the reserved image, the reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image are displayed on the front side of the background concealed image, these images are easy to see.
On the other hand, the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed on the front side of the background concealed image for easy visibility, and the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the back side of the background concealed image so as to be difficult to see or invisible. It may be displayed.
Alternatively, the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed on the back side of the background concealed image to make it difficult or invisible, and the look-ahead effect image is displayed on the front side of the background concealed image so as to be easy to see. You may.
Regarding the superimposition of these images, it is advisable to appropriately set the display priority for each image and use the layer function.

When both the reserved image, the reserved image, and the look-ahead effect image are invisible, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the scene has been switched.
If both the reserved image and the reserved image and the look-ahead effect image are visible, it is difficult for the player to recognize that the scene has been switched, but the player recognizes the expectation level shown by these images. can.
When only one of the reserved image or the reserved image and the look-ahead effect image is visible, the player can recognize a rough expectation level, although the feeling of switching scenes is slightly inferior.

In addition, when the reserved image is displayed in a special mode different from the usual one (for example, the green or red reserved image) indicating that the jackpot expectation is high, the jackpot expectation is high. Can be recognized.
For example, if the reserved image is visible at the start of the special reach, it is possible to recognize under what expectation the special reach is performed.
Also, if the reserved image is visible at the end of the special reach, under what expectation the decorative symbol at the time of reach stopped at a doublet indicating a big hit, or a doublet indicating a loss. It is possible to confirm whether or not it has stopped in the manner of doublet. For example, if the result is a loss under high expectations, or if the result is a big hit under low expectations, the result will be presented in a way that betrays the player's expectations, which is surprising. It can make you feel. Then, in the subsequent games, when the same reserved image is displayed, the expectation that the result of the special reach will be a big hit is lost even if the low expectation is shown. However, even if a high degree of expectation is shown, it will be possible to enjoy the production in the special reach with a sense of tension in consideration of the fact that the result of the special reach will be lost.
Further, by displaying the reserved image and the reserved image, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player misunderstands that the gaming machine is broken.

As the background concealed image, a white background concealed image may be adopted. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 398 to 400 and the like, when the white background concealed image is modified to be displayed, the display examples shown in FIGS. 400 (a) to 400 (h) are shown, respectively. It will be displayed as shown in the display examples shown in FIGS. 403 (a) to 403 (h).
Similar to the black background concealed image, white background concealed images A to white background concealed images C having different transparency are prepared, first, white background concealed images A and B are displayed, and the transparency is gradually lowered. , The visibility of the image located behind the white background concealed image is gradually reduced (FIGS. 403 (b) and 403 (c)). Next, the white background concealed image C is displayed to make the image located behind the white background concealed image invisible (FIG. 403 (d)). Next, the white background concealed images B and A are displayed, the transparency is gradually increased, and the visibility of the image located behind the white background concealed image is gradually improved (FIG. 403 (e), FIG. FIG. 403 (f)). After that, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 403 (g), FIG. 403 (h)).

A predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a background concealed image. For example, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 398 to 400 and the like, when a plurality of bomb characters are modified to be displayed, the display examples shown in FIGS. 400 (a) to 400 (h) are shown in FIGS. It will be displayed as shown in the display examples shown in FIGS. 404 (a) to 404 (h).
In the first period of the modified embodiment, the display of the bomb character and the triangular background area as the background concealed image A is started from the upper left and the lower right of the display area (FIG. 404 (b). )), Then the background concealed image B is displayed (FIG. 404 (c)).
Further, in the second period, an image of the bomb character and two trapezoidal background regions is displayed as the background concealed image C (FIG. 404 (d)).
Further, in the third period, the background concealed image B is displayed (FIG. 404 (e)), and then the background concealed image A is displayed (FIG. 404 (f)). After that, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed (FIG. 404 (g), FIG. 404 (h)).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the background concealment image is composed of the bomb character and the image of the background area (triangular shape or trapezoidal shape portion).
The background area may be a single color (white or black). Further, the bomb character itself may be a still image, or may be a dynamic display such as the movement of the hands or feet of the bomb character. In addition to or in addition to the bomb character, at least one of a character other than the bomb character, a predetermined pattern, the model name of the pachinko machine 1, the name of the special reach being executed or executed, and the like is used as the background. It may be displayed as a part of the background concealed image on the front side of the area.
With such a configuration, the player's consciousness can be switched to the next variable display of the decorative pattern.

With reference to FIGS. 398 to 400 and the like, an example is shown in which a black background concealed image is displayed and the background image is switched at both the start and end timings of the special reach.
Further, as the background concealed image, an embodiment of displaying a white background concealed image with reference to FIG. 403 instead of the black background concealed image, and displaying a background concealed image composed of a bomb character or the like with reference to FIG. 404. However, instead of displaying the same background concealed image at the start and end of the special reach, different background concealed images may be displayed at the start and end of the special reach.
For example, one of a black background concealed image, a white background concealed image, a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character, etc. is displayed as the background concealed image at the start of the special reach, and the background concealed image at the end of the special reach is black. Any of the background concealed image, the white background concealed image, the background concealed image including the bomb character, and the like may be displayed.
Specifically, a white background concealed image is displayed as a background concealed image at the start of special reach, and a black background concealed image, a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character, etc. is displayed as a background concealed image at the end of special reach. You may try to do it.

In the embodiment with reference to FIG. 397 (a), the background image is gradually hard to see in the first period, the background image is invisible in the second period, and the background image is gradually easy to see. An example is shown in which the length of the third period (specifically, 2 seconds) is the same. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to simplify the display processing of the background concealed image and reduce the man-hours required for the development of the image effect.

On the other hand, the lengths of each period may be different rather than the same. FIGS. 397 (b) and 397 (c) show modified examples (modified examples 01 to 12) in which the lengths of the first to third periods at the start of the special reach and the end of the special reach are different. Shows. For example, in the modification 08, the length of the first period is the longest in 3 seconds, the length of the second period is the shortest in 1 second, and the length of the third period is an intermediate length in 2 seconds. There is.
In each modification, the length of the fourth period may also be different from the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397 (a).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately switch and display the background image within a limited time without unnecessarily lengthening the time required for displaying the background hidden image.

The basic effects of the modified examples 01 to 12 at the start of the special reach are shown below.

According to the modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "third period> first period = second period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely completed. By lengthening the time until the image is recognized, you can enjoy which of the multiple reach effects is displayed.

According to the modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period = second period> third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely completed. By shortening the time until it is recognized), it is possible to recognize the special reach effect to be executed at an early stage.

According to the modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period> first period = third period" (that is, the background concealed image C is displayed). By lengthening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), it is possible to secure a long time to enjoy which of the multiple reach effects is executed. ..

According to the modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period = third period> second period" (that is, the background concealed image C is displayed). By shortening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), the special reach effect can be enjoyed for a long time.

According to the modification 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period> second period = third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely used. By lengthening the time until it becomes unrecognizable), it is possible to provide the joy of developing into a special reach production for a long time.

According to the modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period = third period> first period" (that is, the normal background image is completely used. By shortening the time until it becomes unrecognizable), the background concealed image C is displayed at an early stage, so that it is possible to prepare for the special reach effect at an early stage.

According to the modification 07, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period> second period> third period", so that the normal background image is completely changed. It takes a long time to make it unrecognizable, and it is possible to provide the joy of developing into a special reach effect for a long time, and it is possible to recognize the special reach effect to be executed at an early stage.

According to the modification 08, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "first period> third period> second period", so that the normal background image is completely changed. It takes a long time to make it unrecognizable, and it is possible to provide the joy of developing into a special reach effect for a long time, and the background concealed image C is displayed, and the special reach background image and the normal background image are displayed. By shortening the period when it is not done, you can enjoy the special reach production for a long time.

According to the modification 09, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "second period> first period> third period", so that among the plurality of reach effects. It is possible to secure a long time to enjoy which reach effect is executed, and it is possible to recognize the special reach effect to be executed at an early stage.

According to the modified example 10, the background concealed image C is early by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach as “second period> third period> first period”. Since it is displayed on the screen, it is possible to prepare for a special reach effect at an early stage, and it is possible to secure a long time to enjoy which reach effect is executed among a plurality of reach effects.

According to the modification 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach is set to "third period> first period> second period", so that the special reach effect can be produced for a long time. You can entertain and enjoy which of the multiple reach effects is displayed.

According to the modified example 12, the background concealed image C is early by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the start of the special reach as “third period> second period> first period”. Since it is displayed on the screen, it is possible to prepare for the special reach effect at an early stage, and it is possible to enjoy which of the multiple reach effects is displayed.

The basic effects of the modified examples 01 to 12 at the end of the special reach are shown below.

According to the modification 01, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period> first period = second period" (that is, the normal background image is completely used. By lengthening the time until recognition), it is possible to take time to change the feelings toward the next change.

According to the modification 02, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period = second period> third period" (that is, the normal background image is completely used. By shortening the time until recognition), it is possible to end the expectation for the change at an early stage and to have an expectation for the next change (the change of feeling can be made quickly).

According to the modification 03, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period> first period = third period" (that is, the background concealed image C is displayed). By lengthening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), the background hidden image C can be displayed for a long time, and the normal background image may not be displayed. You can have a feeling of expectation.

According to the modification 04, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period = third period> second period" (that is, the background concealed image C is displayed). By shortening the period during which the special reach background image and the normal background image are not displayed), the normal background image is recognized early, although the visibility is low, and the expectation for the fluctuation is early. You can finish it and have expectations for the next change (you can change your mind quickly).

According to the modification 05, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period> second period = third period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely completed. By lengthening the time until it becomes unrecognizable), it is possible to enjoy the afterglow that the fluctuation is out of order.

According to the modification 06, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "second period = third period> first period" (that is, the special reach background image is completely completed. By shortening the time until it becomes unrecognizable), it is possible to end the expectation for the fluctuation at an early stage and to have expectations for the next fluctuation (the change of feeling can be made quickly). ..

According to the modification 07, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period> second period> third period", so that the variation is deviated. It is possible to entertain the person, end the expectation for the change at an early stage, and have an expectation for the next change (the change of feeling can be made quickly).

According to the modification 08, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "first period> third period> second period", so that the fluctuation is deviated. Although the visibility is low, the normal background image is recognized at an early stage, the expectation for the fluctuation is terminated at an early stage, and the expectation for the next fluctuation is given (switching of feelings). Can be done quickly).

According to the modification 09, the background concealed image C is displayed by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach as "second period> first period> third period". You can make the time to be done for a long time, and you can expect that the normal background image will not be displayed, and when the normal background image is displayed, the normal background image will be recognized at an early stage next time. It is possible to have expectations for fluctuations in the image (to change feelings quickly).

According to the modification 10, the special reach background image is completely completed by setting the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach as "second period> third period> first period". The time until it becomes unrecognizable is shortened, and the background concealed image C is displayed for a long time while I thought that the expectation for the fluctuation ended early, which gives me a new sense of expectation. be able to.

According to the modified example 11, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period> first period> second period", so that the visibility is low, but it is normal. By recognizing the background image at an early stage, ending the expectation for the change at an early stage, and prolonging the time until the background image is completely recognized, it is possible to change the feeling toward the next change. You can take your time.

According to the modification 12, the relationship between the lengths of the first period to the third period at the end of the special reach is set to "third period> second period> first period" to cope with the change. By ending the expectation early and increasing the time it takes for the normal background image to be completely recognized, it is possible to take time to change the feelings toward the next fluctuation.

Further, the display mode of the background concealed image at the start of the special reach of the embodiment shown in FIG. 397 (a) and each modification shown in FIG. 397 (b) and FIG. 397 (c) is shown in FIG. 397 (a). The example shown, and the display mode of the background concealed image at the end of the special reach of each modification shown in FIG. 397 (b) and FIG. 397 (c) may be appropriately combined. For example, at the start of the special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of the modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, each background concealed image may be displayed in the mode of the modified example 02.
According to such a configuration, the background image can be switched in a more appropriate manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397 (a), the number of seconds in each period from the first period to the third period was 2 seconds, and the total number of seconds was 6 seconds. Further, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 (b) and 397 (c), the number of seconds in each period from the first period to the third period is 1 to 3 seconds, and the total number of seconds is 5. From seconds to 7 seconds, these are just examples.
For example, the first period to the third period may be appropriately set in the range of about 1 second to 3 seconds, respectively, and the total number of seconds may be appropriately set in the range of about 3 seconds to 9 seconds. The number of seconds in each period may be shorter or longer as long as the effect is recognized.

As shown in the modified example 04, the modified example 05, the modified example 08, and the modified example 11 in FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the first period.
Further, as shown in the modified example 01, the modified example 04, the modified example 08, the modified example 11, and the modified example 12 in FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the third period.
Further, as shown in the modified example 04, the modified example 08, and the modified example 11 in FIG. 397, the second period may be shorter than the first period and the third period.

In the first period and the third period, the transparency of the background concealed image changes and is dynamically visually recognized, and the decorative design and the background image are not invisible although the visibility is reduced. On the other hand, during the second period, the decorative design and background image appear to be invisible and the display is stopped, and some players expect that the gaming machine has broken down (or the result of the special lottery will be a big hit. It may be misunderstood that a freeze effect indicating that it is high), but by making the second period relatively shorter than the first period or the third period, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. Can be done.

Further, when displaying a black background concealed image, light from the player's own face or a light emitting means provided in the game machine located behind the game machine is reflected in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. , There is a risk that the player will be able to see it and the feeling of immersion in the game will be reduced. Such a tendency is remarkable when a glossy (glare) type display device is adopted as the liquid crystal display device constituting the game board side effect display device 1600. However, by making the second period shorter than the first period and the third period, it is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The third period may be executed after the first period is executed without providing the second period. In this case, the background image may be switched at the timing of switching from the first period to the third period. The same effect can be obtained even with such a configuration.
In the embodiment and the modified example shown in FIG. 397, when the second period is not provided, the third period is executed after the end of the first period without changing the start timing of the first period. You may do so. Alternatively, the end timing of the first period may be modified to match the start timing of the third period without changing the end timing of the third period.

As shown in the modified example 03, the modified example 06, the modified example 09, the modified example 10, and the modified example 12 in FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the first period.
Further, as shown in the modified example 02, the modified example 03, the modified example 07, the modified example 09, and the modified example 10 in FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the third period.
Further, as shown in the modified example 03, the modified example 09, and the modified example 10 in FIG. 397, the second period may be longer than the first period and the third period.

According to such a configuration, since the background image and the decorative pattern are hidden by the background concealed image and cannot be visually recognized for a long time, the display content in the display area becomes simple, and the player's feelings are expressed in the background. It is possible to switch to the production after switching the image and the game situation.
For example, at the start of the special reach, the player's feelings can be concentrated on the production content performed at the special reach. In this case, as a special reach effect, a plurality of special reach effects having different expectations may be executed, and one of the special reach effects may be executed (the "giant tank reach" effect described later is an example. Is). In this case, it is possible to confuse the player with which special reach it will develop, and it is possible to improve the interest.
On the other hand, at the end of the special reach, the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol change or big hit game.

Further, when a background concealed image composed of a bomb character or the like is displayed as the background concealed image, the player can take time to carefully observe the displayed background concealed image in the second period, and the player can take time to observe the displayed background concealed image. Feelings will be more switched. The background concealed image may be a dynamic display such as the character moving around in the screen. In this case, the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol change or big hit game.
On the other hand, in a black or white background concealed image, the transparency only changes, and the image itself does not move. Therefore, extra information is not given to the player, the delimiter as an effect can be made clearer, and the player's feelings can be switched.

As shown in the modified example 02, the modified example 05, the modified example 07, the modified example 08, and the modified example 09 in FIG. 397, the first period may be longer than the third period.

With such a configuration, since the player can sufficiently perceive that the switching of the background image has started, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it becomes impossible to understand how the production content has changed. If the first period is shorter than the third period, the player may not be able to understand how the production content has changed.

As shown in the modified example 01, the modified example 06, the modified example 10, the modified example 11, and the modified example 12 in FIG. 397, the third period may be longer than the first period.

According to such a configuration, the special reach background image is gradually displayed at the start of the special reach, so that the player feels as if he / she has been distracted and the expectation for the special reach is increased. .. In this case, as a special reach effect, a plurality of special reach effects having different expectations may be executed, and one of the special reach effects may be executed (the "giant tank reach" effect described later is an example. Is). In this case, the player feels an interest in which special reach effect is executed, but by lengthening the third period, a stronger interest can be felt.
In addition, the visibility of the special reach background image can be quickly lowered at the end of the special reach, and the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol change or the big hit game. Especially when the result of the special lottery is a loss, the effect is great.

In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 397 (a) to 397 (c), the first period may be modified so as not to be provided. In this case, in the period set as the first period, the background concealed image may be hidden and the second period may be started at the timing shown in the figure.
Even when the first period is not provided as described above, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 397 (a) to 397 (c), the third period may be modified so as not to be provided. In this case, in the period set as the third period, the background concealed image may be hidden, and the second period may end at the timing shown in the figure.
Even when the third period is not provided as described above, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, the jackpot expectation may be suggested depending on the type of the background concealed image displayed at the start of the special reach. For example, when the black background concealed image is displayed and when the white background concealed image is displayed, the expectation of the jackpot is higher when the white background concealed image is displayed. You may.

It may be configured so as not to show the degree of expectation of a jackpot depending on the effect mode of the displayed background concealed image. For example, it may be configured to display the same background concealed image even when special reach with different expectations for big hits is executed.
According to such a configuration, the player waits for the end of the display of the background concealed image with a sense of expectation as to what kind of special reach will occur. In addition, at the end of the special reach, you will be able to face the variable display of the decorative design and the big hit game from the next time onwards with a normal heart.

In the middle of the special reach production, the production content may be switched to the special reach production with a higher expectation. At this time as well, any of the above-described aspects may be adopted to display the background concealed image. Further, at this time, as a special reach effect after switching, one of a plurality of special reach background images having different jackpot expectations may be displayed.

Although the embodiment in which the background image is invisible due to the hidden background image is shown, the background image may be made invisible instead of being invisible.
For example, even in the second period in which the visibility of the background image is most deteriorated by the background concealed image, the background image can be visually recognized through the background concealed image instead of being invisible. It may be configured as follows. For example, when a black background concealed image is used, the background image is visually recognized in the second period in a display state between the display state shown in FIG. 398 (c) and the display state shown in FIG. 398 (d). It may be configured as follows.
Alternatively, the size of the background concealed image is not set to a size that can hide the entire background image, but a size that can hide most of the background image (at least 70% or more, preferably 90% or more). However, this background concealed image may be displayed in the second period.
Moreover, you may combine these aspects.
Even with such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the switching of the background image.

As the background concealed image, an embodiment of displaying a background concealed image including a black background concealed image, a white background concealed image, a bomb character, and the like is shown, but these background concealed images may be displayed at the same time.
For example, the display area may be divided and a different background concealed image may be displayed for each divided area. For example, a black background concealed image may be displayed in the right half of the display area, and a white background concealed image may be displayed in the left half of the display area.
Further, the background concealed image may be configured to have a display priority so that the background concealed images are displayed in an overlapping manner.
For example, a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like and a black background concealed image can be displayed, and the display priority of the background concealed image composed of a bomb character or the like is set higher than the display priority of the black background concealed image. May be good. In this case, the area where the background image is visually recognized becomes narrower from the left and right due to the background concealed image composed of the bomb character and the like, and the visibility of the background image is lowered even in the area where the background image is visually recognized. It will be visually recognized by the player in the form of doing so. A white background concealed image may be displayed instead of the black background concealed image.
As the display time (length of the first to third periods) in the plurality of background concealed images displayed in this way, any one of the embodiment shown in FIG. 397 and its modifications may be adopted. .. Alternatively, a different display time (a different one of the embodiments and variations thereof shown in FIG. 397) may be adopted for each background concealed image.
Even with such a configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the switching of the background image.

The background image itself is darkened at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a lost manner, and the background concealed image that is brighter than the background image (for example, a white background concealed image, a bomb character, etc.) is darkened. ) To switch the background image.
As a result, the player can clearly see that the background concealed image is displayed, the player can recognize that the effect content has been switched, and the player's feelings can be switched to the next symbol change.

On the other hand, the background image itself may be darkened at the timing (timing t34) when the special reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a lost manner, and the background image may be switched by using the black background concealed image. In this case, since the visual difference between the background image and the background hidden image becomes small, it is possible to make it less noticeable that the background image has been switched.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 404, the display effect is executed using the display area, but in addition to these display effects, a decorative member provided in the vicinity of the display area is used. These embodiments may be modified so that the effects may be performed simultaneously.
Hereinafter, the tank accessory 3770 that excites the special reach by emitting light or moving during the special reach will be described with reference to FIG. 405 and the like.

The tank accessory 3770 is a three-dimensional accessory that imitates the shape of the tank when viewed from the rear, and is provided on the game board 5. The tank accessory 3770 is provided on the front side and the lower part of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 in the front view. FIG. 405 shows the positional relationship between the display area and the tank accessory 3770 in the front view.

The tank accessory 3770 has a tank accessory light emitting unit (not shown). The tank accessory light emitting unit is provided with a full-color LED, and can be in a non-light emitting state and a state in which light is emitted in a predetermined color. As a specific light emitting mode, for example, the tank accessory light emitting unit can be turned on or blinked in white, green, red, or yellow.
Further, the tank accessory 3770 has a function of moving in the vertical direction between the lower standby position and the upper moving position by driving a tank accessory driving mechanism (not shown). It is also possible to stop at any position between the standby position and the moving position.

FIG. 405 (a) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is non-luminous and is located in the standby position.
FIG. 405 (b) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is located in the standby position.
FIG. 405 (c) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is non-luminous and is located at the moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank accessory 3770 overlap each other and are visually recognized by the player.
FIG. 405 (d) shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 emits light in a predetermined color (for example, red) and is located at the moving position. When viewed from the front, the display area and the tank accessory 3770 overlap each other and are visually recognized by the player.

In FIGS. 405 (b) and 405 (d), the reserved image in red, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the normal reserved image, is displayed in the reserved image display area instead of the normal white reserved image. The example is shown. Further, it shows a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is positioned in the standby position or the moving position, and the tank accessory 3770 is made to emit light in the same red color as the reserved image.
Although red is taken as an example as the color of the reserved image, it is not limited to red and may be green or gold.

The tank accessory 3770 may be configured to move from the standby position to the moving position at the start of the special reach.

The light emission and movement of the tank accessory 3770 are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the special lottery result.

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 397 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 406 (a). It should be noted that the mode other than the tank accessory 3770 and the reserved image is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397 (a) and the like, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 406 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the effect in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, the tank accessory 3770 does not move from the standby position, but emits light in red, which is the same color as the reserved image, indicating that the expectation of a big hit is high. The timing of turning the reserved image red may be the timing when the game ball is won in the first starting port 2002 and the reserved image is displayed, or the timing when the variable display is started (timing t0). , It may be a predetermined timing during the variation display (for example, a predetermined timing in the period from the timing t1 to the timing t33).

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 406 (a), the red reserved image is displayed as the reserved image until the timing t45 when the variable display ends and the decorative symbol stop display is performed for 1 second. The reserved image is difficult or invisible during the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and from timing t36 to timing t42 when the background concealed image is displayed.
On the other hand, the tank accessory 3770 does not move during the period from the timing t0 when the variable display is started to the timing t45, and is located in the standby position.
The tank accessory 3770 will emit red light at the timing when the reserved image is displayed in red (as described above, the start winning timing, the start timing of the fluctuation display, the predetermined timing during the fluctuation display, etc.). , The red light emission is continued until the timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (b).
FIG. 406 (b) is a time chart showing a modification 01. In the modification 01, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at the timing t36, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image A is started. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (c).
FIG. 406 (c) is a time chart showing a modification 02. In the modification 02, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at the timing t38, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C is started. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (d).
FIG. 406 (d) is a time chart showing a modification 03. In the modification 03, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at the timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C ends. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (e).
FIG. 406 (e) is a time chart showing a modification 04. In the modification 04, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at the timing t42, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image A ends. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from red to white.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (f).
FIG. 406 (f) is a time chart showing a modification 05. In the modification 05, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at the timing t36, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image A is started. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the light emitting state in red to the extinguished state.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (g).
FIG. 406 (g) is a time chart showing a modification 06. In the modification 06, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at the timing t38, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C is started. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the light emitting state in red to the extinguished state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (h).
FIG. 406 (h) is a time chart showing a modification 07. In the modification 07, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at the timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image C ends. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the light emitting state in red to the extinguished state.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 406 (i).
FIG. 406 (i) is a time chart showing a modification 08. In the modification 08, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at the timing t40, which is the timing at which the display of the background concealed image A ends. At the same time, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is also changed from the light emitting state in red to the extinguished state.

Next, another modification is shown with reference to FIG. 407. Note that FIG. 407 (a) is the same as FIG. 406 (a).

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407 (b).
FIG. 407 (b) is a time chart showing a modification 09. In the modification 09, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until the timing t45. On the other hand, in the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770, the brightness decreases from timing t36 to timing t38, turns off from timing t38 to timing t40, increases in brightness from timing t40 to timing t42, and is original from timing t42 to timing t45. It emits red light with the brightness of.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407 (c).
FIG. 407 (c) is a time chart showing a modification 10. In the modification 10, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, in the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770, the brightness decreases from the timing t36 to the timing t39, the brightness increases from the timing t39 to the timing t42, and the light is emitted in red from the timing t42 to the timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407 (d).
FIG. 407 (d) is a time chart showing a modification 11. In the modification 11, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, in the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770, the brightness decreases from the timing t36 to the timing t38, the light is turned off from the timing t38 to the timing t40, and the brightness increases with the white light emitting color from the timing t40 to the timing t42. It emits white light from t42 to timing t45.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407 (e).
FIG. 407 (e) is a time chart showing a modification 12. In the modification 12, the display mode of the reserved image is changed from red to white at timing t39. On the other hand, in the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770, the brightness decreases from the timing t36 to the timing t39, the light emitting color changes from red to white at the timing t39, and the light emitting color becomes white from the timing t39 to the timing t42. It rises and emits white light from timing t42 to timing t45.

A modified embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407 (f).
FIG. 407 (f) is a time chart showing a modification 13. In the modification 13, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at the timing t39. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t38 to timing t45.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407 (g).
FIG. 407 (g) is a time chart showing a modification 14. In the modification 14, the display mode of the reserved image is changed to non-display at the timing t39. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t39, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

An embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 407 (a) is shown with reference to FIG. 407 (h).
FIG. 407 (h) is a time chart showing a modification 15. In the modification 15, the display mode of the reserved image remains red until the timing t45. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 decreases in brightness from timing t36 to timing t38, and is turned off from timing t39 to timing t45.

In these embodiments, it is possible to show the degree of expectation to the player by causing the light emitting decorative member (tank accessory 3770) to emit light in the same color as the reserved image.
Further, it is possible to switch the display mode of the reserved image and end the display of the reserved image when switching the background image together with the display of the background hidden image.
At this time, the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting decorative member is gradually reduced as the visibility of the background image is lowered, or the light is emitted from the light emitting decorative member as the visibility of the background image is increased. By gradually increasing the brightness of the light emitting, it becomes possible to make the appearance of the light emitting decorative member natural.

Although the embodiment in which the reserved image is displayed up to the timing t45 is shown, the display of the reserved image may be terminated at the timing t44, which is the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. At the same time as the display of the reserved image is finished, the emission color of the tank accessory 3770 may be changed from the emission color of the reserved image to white, which is a normal emission color.

In the modification 15 of FIG. 407, the tank accessory 3770 was turned off at the timing t38 while displaying the red reserved image, but the tank accessory 3770 may be turned off in white instead of being turned off.
In the modified examples 11 to 13 of FIG. 407, at the timing t39, the red reserved image is changed to the white reserved image or the reserved image is hidden, but at this time, the tank accessory 3770 is red. The light emitting state may be continued until a predetermined timing (for example, timing t44 at which the stop display of the decorative symbol is started or timing t45 at which the stop display of the decorative symbol ends).

An embodiment in which the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is made white or turned off is shown, but at the timing when the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is made white or turned off, the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 is changed. It may be modified so as to end the matching with the light emitting mode of the hold display and start the state of simply emitting light as a decoration. In this case, the degree of expectation may not be shown depending on the light emitting mode, or the light emitting mode may be adopted according to the type of the displayed normal background image.

It may be possible to execute an effect of changing the reserved image or the reserved image to the reserved image or the reserved image indicating that the expectation is higher during the variable display of the decorative symbol.
For example, at the timing t25 in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a), the red reserved image may be changed to the golden reserved image. As a result, the player can know that the degree of expectation is higher.
In the first to third periods in which the background concealed image is displayed, it is preferable not to change the reserved image or the reserved image to another display mode showing different expectations.
According to such a configuration, the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is ensured at the timing when the expectation degree changes, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the change in the display mode of the reserved image and the reserved image. ..

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 406 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 408 (a). It should be noted that the mode other than the movement mode of the tank accessory 3770 is basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 406 (a) and the like, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.
In the present embodiment, the tank accessory 3770 moves from the standby position to the moving position when the special reach is executed, and then moves from the moving position to the waiting position.
As described above, FIGS. 405 (a) and 405 (b) show a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is in the standby position. Further, FIGS. 405 (c) and 405 (d) show a state in which the tank accessory 3770 is in the moving position.

The tank accessory 3770 in the present embodiment is located in the standby position from timing t0 to timing t21. After that, from the timing t21 to the timing t24, the movement is performed upward from the standby position to the moving position. It is located at the moving position from the timing t24 to the timing t36. From the timing t36 to the timing t42, the movement is performed downward from the moving position to the standby position. It is located in the standby position from the timing t42 to the timing t45. These movements of the tank accessory 3770 should be done at a constant speed.

In addition, the tank accessory 3770 will emit red light at the timing when the reserved image is displayed in red (such as the start winning timing and the start timing of the variation display as described above), and will be red until timing t45. The light emission of is continued.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the tank accessory 3770 starts to move downward at the same time as the display of the background concealed image is started, and the tank accessory 3770 is started at the same time as the timing when the display of the background concealed image is finished. End the downward movement.

It should be noted that it is preferable to configure the tank accessory 3770 so that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the tank accessory 3770 moves upward and when it does not move.

According to such a configuration, the operation of moving the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) from the moving position to the standby position can be made inconspicuous. Therefore, when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player who is pleased with the big hit from being delighted. In addition, it is possible to make it difficult for the player who has lost the result to remember the unfortunate feeling that the result of the loss was high even though the expectation was high.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 408 (a), the tank accessory 3770 was moved downward during the period from timing t36 to timing t42, but the timing for moving the tank accessory 3770 downward is described below. A modified embodiment of the above will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 408 (b).

Modification 01 is an example in which the tank accessory 3770 is moved from the moving position to the standby position from the timing t34 to the timing t36.
Similarly, in the modified examples 02 to 14, the tank accessory 3770 moves from the moving position to the standby position at each timing shown in FIG. 408 (b).

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 408 (a) and 408 (b), a period before the visibility of the background image deteriorates and a period during which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period). , The start of the period in which the background image is invisible (second period), the period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see (third period), and the period after the visibility of the background image is restored (fourth period). The movement of the tank accessory 3770 was started and ended at the same time as the end and the end, but these embodiments are modified to start the downward movement of the tank accessory in the middle of a certain period. The downward movement of the tank accessory 3770 may be terminated in the middle of the period.
For example, the downward movement may be started at the timing t37 in the middle of the first period, and the downward movement may be completed at the timing t39 in the middle of the second period. Further, for example, the start of the downward movement and the end of the downward movement may be performed within the second period.

In this way, by moving the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) from the moving position to the standby position near the timing when the background concealed image is displayed and the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced, the movable decorative member can be moved. The operation of returning to the standby position can be made inconspicuous.

Each embodiment of the movement mode of the tank accessory 3770 shown with reference to FIGS. 408 (a) and 408 (b), and FIGS. 406 (a) to 406 (i) and 407 (a) to FIGS. The display mode of the reserved image shown with reference to 407 (h) and each embodiment of the light emission mode of the tank accessory 3770 may be combined.
For example, at the timing as shown in the figure, each embodiment shown in FIG. 408 may be combined with each embodiment shown in FIG. 406 or 407 to move and emit light of the tank accessory 3770. The reserved image may be displayed.
Alternatively, at the timing when the period in which the tank accessory 3770 moves downward shown in FIG. 408 starts or the period in which the tank accessory 3770 moves downward ends, the light emission mode shown in FIGS. 406 and 407 and the change in the reserved image are changed. You may start.
Alternatively, the change of the light emitting mode and the reserved image shown in FIGS. 406 and 407 may be started at the timing just in the middle of the period in which the tank accessory 3770 shown in FIG. 408 moves downward.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 more conspicuous or less conspicuous.
Even if the background concealed image is displayed in the display area and the visibility of the display area is reduced, the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) emits light, so that the jackpot or loss is achieved at any expectation level. The player can know whether the result is.
Alternatively, the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770) is turned off in accordance with the fact that the background concealed image is displayed in the display area and the visibility of the display area is lowered, so that the movement of the movable decorative member is made inconspicuous. Can be done.

In the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 397 to 400, an embodiment in which the visibility of the background image and the decorative symbol is reduced at the same time is shown, but the embodiment modified so as to have different timings is shown in FIG. 409. , FIG. 410 will be described.

Note that FIG. 409 (a) basically shows the same staging mode as that of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397 (a) and the like, except that the visual mode of the decorative design is described. Therefore, the description of these will be omitted.
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 409 (a), the visibility of the background image and the decorative symbol gradually decreases in the period from timing t13 to timing t19 and the period from timing t36 to timing t42, respectively, and the background image and the background image The decorative pattern becomes invisible, and the visibility of the background image and the decorative pattern gradually increases.

FIG. 409 (b) shows an embodiment in which the embodiment shown in FIG. 409 (a) is modified so that the visibility of the background image and the visibility of the decorative pattern may not match.

In the modified example 01, the visibility of the decorative symbol decreases from the timing t14 to the timing t15, the decorative symbol becomes invisible from the timing t15 to the timing t17, and the visibility of the decorative symbol increases from the timing t17 to the timing t18.
Further, the visibility of the decorative symbol decreases from the timing t37 to the timing t38, the decorative symbol becomes invisible from the timing t38 to the timing t40, and the visibility of the decorative symbol increases from the timing t40 to the timing t41.

Similarly, in the modified examples 02 to 08, the visibility of the decorative symbol is lowered, the decorative symbol becomes invisible, and the visibility of the decorative symbol is increased at each timing shown in FIG. 409 (b).

FIG. 410 shows a display example corresponding to the modification 03 of FIG. 409 (b). Further, FIGS. 410 (a) to 410 (h) show display states corresponding to the respective display states shown with reference to FIGS. 400 (a) to 400 (h).
FIG. 410 (b) shows a display example from timing t37 to timing t38 in the modification 03 of FIG. 409 (b). This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is not reduced. In order not to reduce the visibility of the decorative symbol, it is preferable to temporarily set the display priority of the decorative symbol to be higher than the display priority of the background concealed image.
FIG. 410 (g) shows a display example from timing t42 to timing t43. This figure shows a display example in which the visibility of the background image is not reduced, but the visibility of the decorative pattern is reduced. In order to reduce the visibility of the decorative design when the background concealed image is not displayed, it is preferable to display a black and translucent image on the front side of the decorative design.
For FIGS. 410 (a), 410 (c) to 410 (f), and 410 (h), see FIGS. 400 (a), 400 (c) to 400 (f), and 400 (h). Since it is the same as the embodiment shown with reference to it, the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the embodiment shown in FIG. 409 (a), the visual appearance mode of the decorative design at the start of the special reach of each of the modified examples shown in FIG. 409 (b), and the embodiment shown in FIG. 409 (a), FIG. 409. It may be appropriately combined with the visual aspect of the decorative symbol at the end of the special reach of each modification shown in (b). For example, at the start of the special reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed in the mode of the modified example 01, and at the end of the special reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed in the mode of the modified example 02.
According to such a configuration, the background image can be appropriately switched according to the content of the effect.

An embodiment of displaying a black background concealed image is shown with reference to FIG. 410, but instead of the black background concealed image, a white background concealed image or a background concealed image composed of a bomb character or the like is displayed. You may.

According to the embodiment of the modified example 01, the modified example 02, the modified example 03, the modified example 04, and the modified example 06, the visible time of the decorative pattern can be lengthened when the background image is switched, and the player can change the game content. You can prevent it from becoming incomprehensible.
According to the embodiments according to the modified example 03, the modified example 05, the modified example 06, the modified example 07, and the modified example 08, it is possible to lengthen the time when the decorative pattern is difficult to see when switching the background image. As a result, at the start of the special reach, the player's consciousness can be directed to the display contents other than the decorative symbols, and the interest can be improved. Further, at the end of the special reach, a decorative pattern is displayed in a manner indicating a reach loss or a big hit, but in the case of a reach loss, the player's feelings of disappointment can be alleviated. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, it is possible to enhance the interest by teasing the player.

During the special reach, a special decorative design with a different design from the normal decorative design is displayed. Specifically, during normal times, a normal decorative symbol with a large size shown in FIG. 389 (a) is displayed, and during special reach, a small size shown in FIG. 389 (b) is attached with a character. A special reach decorative pattern that has not been displayed is displayed. Although the design of the decorative design is different, the numbers indicated by the decorative design are the same before and after the background concealed image is displayed.
At the end of the special reach, the special reach decorative symbol is displayed in a temporarily suspended state in the first period, the special reach decorative symbol is changed to the normal decorative symbol in the second period, and the normal decorative symbol is temporarily suspended in the third period. It is displayed in the state of.
At the time of temporary stop display, the displayed decorative symbol is displayed in such a manner that the decorative symbol sways periodically without changing to another decorative symbol with a different number, but it sways in the first period and the third period. The embodiments may be the same or different. For example, as a mode of temporary stop display of the decorative symbol in the first period and the third period, one of a mode of swinging in the vertical direction, a mode of swinging in the left-right direction, and a mode of swinging so as to rotate about the vertical direction, respectively. May be adopted.
Further, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be the same. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period may be longer than the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period may be 2 seconds, and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period may be shorter than the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period. For example, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period may be 1 second, and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be 2 seconds.

In this way, by making the display mode at the time of temporary stop different between the normal decorative symbol and the special reach decorative symbol, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative symbol and the special reach decorative symbol.

The swing period of the decorative symbol in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swing period of the decorative symbol in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are 2 seconds each, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be set to 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing period of the decorative symbol in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the swing period of the decorative symbol in the third period may be shorter than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are 2 seconds each, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period may be 3 seconds, and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be 1 second.
Alternatively, the swing period of the decorative symbol in the first period may be shorter than the length of the first period. On the other hand, the swing period of the decorative symbol in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are 2 seconds each, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period may be 1 second, and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be 3 seconds.
Alternatively, the swing period of the decorative symbol in the first period may be longer than the length of the first period. Similarly, the swing period of the decorative symbol in the third period may be longer than the length of the third period. For example, when the first period and the third period are 2 seconds each, the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the first period and the swing cycle of the decorative symbol in the third period may be set to 3 seconds.

In this way, by making the display mode at the time of temporary stop different between the normal decorative symbol and the special reach decorative symbol, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the difference between the normal decorative symbol and the special reach decorative symbol.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397 (a), the length of the third period, which is the period during which the background image gradually becomes easier to see, is set to 2 seconds after the visibility of the background image is restored. Although the length of the fourth period, which is the period, is set to 2 seconds, the variation of the decorative pattern may be stopped at the end timing of the third period without providing the fourth period. For example, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 397 (a), the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing t42 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modification 01 shown in FIG. 397 (b), the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing t43 when the third period ends. Similarly, in the modified example 02 to the modified example 12, the decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed at the timing when the third period ends.
The fourth period may be shorter than the third period. For example, if the third period is 2 seconds, the 4th period may be less than 2 seconds.

According to such a configuration, after the end of the third period, the decorative design can be promptly and definitively displayed.

In the embodiment with reference to FIG. 397 (a), the display of the reserved image is terminated at the timing t44 when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, but the dynamic display for erasing the reserved image is short-term from the timing t44. You may go for a while.
At this time, instead of simply ending the display of the reserved image, a hidden image that hides at least a part of the reserved image is displayed on the front side of the reserved image at the same time as the stop display of the decorative symbol, and then 0.3 to The display of the reserved image and the hidden image may be terminated after 0.5 seconds have elapsed.
Alternatively, the reserved image itself may be dynamically erased and displayed in the same manner. For example, the size of the reserved image may be gradually reduced, the size of the reserved image may be set to 0 after 0.3 to 0.5 seconds have elapsed, and the display of the reserved image may be terminated.

According to such a configuration, the player can receive the result of the special lottery without being bound by the expectation degree shown in the variable display.
In addition, the display of the reserved image can be terminated in a natural manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 to 400, the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing t34 indicates whether the result of the special lottery is a loss or a big hit. Refer to FIGS. 411 to 415 for an embodiment in which the decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a loss by transforming the form, and then the decorative design may change to a display mode indicating a big hit. This will be described below. After the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating a big hit, the decorative symbol does not change to the display mode indicating a loss.

In the present embodiment, at the timing t34 during the special reach, after the temporary stop display is performed in the display mode (for example, "232") in which the special reach decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right shows the loss, the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is executed. After the temporary stop loss and the revival effect are executed, the normal decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the loss, and the normal decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the big hit. There are cases.

FIGS. 411 to 413 are time charts showing an example of the effect in the present embodiment. 414 and 415 are diagrams showing display examples in this embodiment.
It should be noted that the production modes other than the temporary stop loss post-recovery effect are basically the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397 (a) and the like, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 411 (b), 412 (b), and 413 (b) show the variation display time of the decorative symbol when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss fails, and the decoration when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss succeeds. It shows the fluctuation display time of the symbol.
FIGS. 411 (c) to 411 (g), 412 (c) to 412 (f), and 413 (c) to 413 (h) are display areas when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss fails. An example of the effect in the above and an example of the effect in the display area when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is successful are shown.
FIG. 414 shows a display example in the display area when the temporary stop loss post-recovery effect fails, and FIG. 415 shows a display example in the display area when the temporary stop loss post-recovery effect succeeds.

Among these production examples, the time chart (modification example 06) shown in FIG. 412 (d) and the display examples shown in FIGS. 414 and 415 will be referred to to explain the revival effect after the temporary stop loss.

In the modification 06, at the timing t34, the decorative symbol at the time of reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner showing a loss. FIGS. 414 (a) and 415 (a) show a state in which the decorative symbol at the time of reach is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss.
Next, from timing t36 to timing t37, the bomb character and the dialogue image "There is still a chance!" Are displayed in the upper right of the display area. FIGS. 414 (b) and 415 (b) show display states during the period from timing t36 to timing t37. Further, FIGS. 414 (c) and 415 (c) show display states during the period from timing t37 to timing t38.
Next, from timing t38 to timing t39, the bomb character and the dialogue image move from the upper right of the display area to the lower center of the display area.
From timing t39 to timing t40, along with the bomb character, a line image saying "I can't help ..." indicating that the revival production after the temporary stop loss has failed, or an indication that the revival production after the temporary stop loss has succeeded. One of the dialogue images "Premonition of victory!" Is displayed. FIG. 414 (d) shows a display example when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss has failed, and FIG. 415 (d) shows a display example when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss has succeeded.

If the revival effect after the temporary stop loss fails, the bomb character and the dialogue image will not be displayed at timing t40, and the same display as when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is not performed from timing t40 to timing t45 will be displayed. Will be.
414 (e) is a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 414 (f) is a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 414 (g) is a display example from timing t42 to timing t44. , FIG. 414 (h) shows display examples from timing t44 to timing t45, respectively.

If the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is successful, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the doublet stop mode indicating a big hit at timing t40, and the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped at timing t49, and the timing is changed. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed from t49 to the timing t50. Further, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image is continued from the timing t40 to the timing t50. That is, the variable display time of the decorative symbol when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is successful is longer than the variable display time of the decorative symbol when the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is unsuccessful.

415 (e) is a display example from timing t40 to timing t41, FIG. 415 (f) is a display example from timing t41 to timing t42, and FIG. 415 (g) is a display example from timing t42 to timing t49. , FIG. 415 (h) shows a display example from timing t49 to timing t50, respectively. As is clear from the figure, if the revival effect is successful after the temporary stop loss (when the special lottery result is a big hit), the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image is continued until the decorative symbol is stopped.

The modified example 06 has been described as a representative, but in other modified examples, the timing at which the revival effect is started after the temporary stop loss, the number of seconds that the bomb character is displayed in the upper right of the display area, and the bomb character move. Although the timing at which failure or success is displayed and the time when the revival effect is successful and the bomb character is displayed in the lower center of the display area are different, in other aspects, the same display as in variant 06 is performed. ..
For example, in the embodiments shown in FIGS. 411 (c) to 411 (g) and the modified examples 01 to 04, the display of the bomb character is started at the timing t34, but the bomb character moves and the special lottery is performed. The timing at which the display of the dialogue image showing the result is started is timing t37 in the modified example 01, timing t39 in the modified example 02, timing t41 in the modified example 03, and timing t43 in the modified example 04.
Similarly, FIG. 412 shows a modified example in which the display of the bomb character is started at the timing t36, and FIG. 413 shows a modified example in which the display of the bomb character is started at the timing t38, the timing t40, and the timing t42. ..

If the revival effect is successful after the temporary stop loss, the display mode of the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped is displayed at the timing when the dialogue image "Premonition of victory!" Is displayed. It is advisable to change to the display mode shown. Alternatively, the display mode may be changed to show a big hit at a timing after a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed (for example, after 1 second) from the timing when the dialogue image "premonition of victory!" Is displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415, the background image is a period from the temporary stop in the mode showing the loss of the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol until the deterioration of the visibility of the background image starts. Is gradually difficult to see (1st period), the background image is invisible (2nd period), the background image is gradually easy to see (3rd period), and the visibility of the background image is The display of the bomb character and the dialogue image is started at the same time as the start of the period after returning to the original state (4th period), the display of the dialogue image is started within these periods, and the dialogue is started at the end of these periods. I was trying to notify whether it was a big hit with an image (when the resurrection production failed), but by modifying these embodiments, in the middle of a certain period, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started. The display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started at the same time as the end of the period, or the dialogue image may be used to notify whether or not the hit is a big hit in the middle of a certain period.
For example, the display of the bomb character and the dialogue image may be started at the timing t37 in the middle of the first period, and the notification of whether or not it is a big hit by the dialogue image may be performed at the timing t38 which is the start timing of the second period. .. Further, for example, within the second period, the display of the bomb character may be started, the movement of the bomb character, and the notification of whether or not it is a big hit by displaying the dialogue image may be performed.

The display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is higher than the display priority of the background concealed image. On the other hand, the display priority of the bomb character and the dialogue image is lower than the display priority of the fourth symbol or the hold number display image.

If the result of the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is unsuccessful, the revival effect after the temporary stop loss may be executed again. For example, if the execution mode shown in FIG. 411 (c) fails, any of the modes shown in FIGS. 412 (c) to 412 (f) and 413 (c) to 413 (h). You may try to execute the resurrection effect again. Similarly, even if a failure occurs in the mode shown in FIG. 412 (c), the revival effect after the temporary stop loss may be executed again in the mode shown in FIGS. 413 (c) to 413 (h).
In this way, after the result of the failure is displayed once in the revival effect after the temporary stop loss, the player is shown that the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is finally successful and the result of the special lottery is a win. As in some cases, the revival effect after the temporary stop loss may be configured to be executed multiple times.

In this way, even if the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss, the revival effect after the temporary stop loss may be executed when the background image is switched, resulting in a big hit. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation for a big hit until the final stage of.
In particular, since the background hidden image is displayed, the display content in the display area is simple, so the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is executed in this state, or the result of the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is successful. By notifying that a big hit will occur, the player can feel great surprise and joy.

In the period when the visibility of the special reach background image gradually decreases (first period), if the revival effect is performed after the temporary stop loss, it is disappointing that the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped in a manner showing the loss. It is possible to fuel the expectation for a big hit without sustaining the feelings.
If the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is performed during the period when the special reach background image is invisible (second period), the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is executed because the visibility of the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is high. It is easy for the player to notice that it has been done, and it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the revival effect is being executed after the temporary stop loss.
In the period when the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see (third period) or during the period when the normal background image is easy to see (fourth period), the normal background image is visible when the revival effect is performed after the temporary stop loss. Therefore, the result of the special lottery may be made to think that it is a loss and it may be a big hit, so that the player can be excited.
By increasing the length of the first to fourth periods as shown with reference to FIG. 397 (b), these effects can be made more effective.
By increasing the length of the first to fourth periods, the revival effect after a plurality of temporary stop losses may be executed in a certain period.

Although the embodiment related to the revival effect after the temporary stop loss is shown with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415, it may be combined with the other embodiments described above.

Although an embodiment and a modification thereof for the “enemy tank destruction reach” effect are shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 415, other embodiments described in the present specification (for example, “giant tank reach” described later). An embodiment or a modification thereof for the “enemy tank destruction reach” effect may be applied to the effect).

Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment described with reference to FIGS. 388 to 400 and the like will be described. In the "giant tank reach" which is a special reach effect in the present embodiment, the special reach background image A is displayed instead of the special reach background image B. Further, instead of the attack button 3710, the operation of the mission button 3700 becomes effective. In addition, the reserved image is not displayed during the period when the special reach background image is displayed.
FIG. 416 (a) is a time chart showing an example of the effect from the timing t10 to the timing t45 in the present embodiment. In addition, except for the display mode of the hold image and the hold image and the effect mode during the special reach (background image, the mode of the enemy tank, etc.), basically, the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397 (a) and the like is used. Since the same production mode is used, the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 417 shows a display example at the start of the “giant tank reach” production. The display examples shown in FIGS. 417 (a) to 417 (g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 398 (a) to 398 (g), and the display timing and the like thereof are also shown in FIG. 398 (g). It is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 398 (g).
FIG. 418 shows a display example of the final stage (at the time of a big hit) of the “giant tank reach”. The display examples shown in FIGS. 418 (a) to 418 (g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 399 (a) to 399 (g), and the display timing and the like thereof are also shown in FIG. 399 (). It is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 399 (g).
FIG. 419 shows a display example of the final stage (at the time of loss) of the “giant tank reach”. The display examples shown in FIGS. 419 (a) to 419 (g) correspond to the display examples shown in FIGS. 400 (a) to 400 (g), and the display timing and the like thereof are also shown in FIG. 400 (g). It is the same as the production example shown with reference to a) to FIG. 400 (g).

As shown in FIGS. 416 to 419, in the "giant tank reach" in the present embodiment, the displayed image of the enemy tank is different from the "enemy tank destruction reach". Further, a special reach background image A is displayed as the background image. Further, the operation of the mission button 3700 is effective instead of the attack button 3710. In addition, the reserved image and the reserved image are not displayed during the "giant tank reach".

The "giant tank reach" in the present embodiment has a higher expectation of a big hit when the reach effect is executed than the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 397 to 400 and the like. For example, the expectation of "enemy tank destruction reach" is 10%, and the expectation of "giant tank reach" is 50%.

As shown with reference to FIGS. 418 and 419, the hold image and the hold image are not displayed during the "giant tank reach", but the hold image is displayed and the hold image is not displayed. You may do it.
With such a configuration, the player can recognize the degree of expectation indicated by the reserved image even during the "giant tank reach". Also, during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach", which has a very high expectation, the player basically does not consider increasing the number of holdings or the expectation of the fluctuation display that will be performed after the current fluctuation display ( For example, even if a green hold image is displayed in the third hold display area, the player cares about the result of "giant tank reach"). Therefore, by not displaying the reserved image, the display content of the display area can be simplified, and the player can concentrate on the "giant tank reach".

With reference to FIGS. 397 and 416, an example is shown in which the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach" are reached at the same timing, but when the "giant tank reach" occurs, " The background image may be displayed for a longer period of time than when the "enemy tank destruction reach" occurs. For example, the time for displaying the normal background image is lengthened by 5 seconds, a reach state occurs at timing t15, and at timing t21, the normal background image A is switched to the special reach background image A, and "giant tank reach" occurs. It may be started.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 and 416, the “giant tank reach” and the “enemy tank destruction reach” have the same length of reach effect, but the reach effect is executed. The lengths may be different. For example, "Giant Tank Reach" may take longer than "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", and "Giant Tank Reach" may take less time than "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". May be terminated.

Even if the "giant tank reach" is always generated when the hold image (for example, the red hold image or the gold hold image) indicating that the expected degree is exceeded is displayed. good. On the other hand, if the reserved image (for example, the white reserved image or the green reserved image) indicating that the expected degree is less than the predetermined degree is displayed, the "giant tank reach" occurs, the "enemy". It is advisable to use either a production mode in which "tank destruction reach" occurs or none of the reach occurs.

In "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", it was shown that any of the black background concealment image, white background concealment image, background concealment image consisting of bomb characters, etc. may be adopted, but also in "Giant Tank Reach". , A black background concealed image, a white background concealed image, a background concealed image composed of a bomb character, or the like may be adopted.
For example, a background concealed image composed of a bomb character or the like may be adopted in the "giant tank reach", and a black background concealed image may be adopted in the "enemy tank destruction reach" so that the background concealed image is different. Alternatively, the same background concealment image (eg, both black background concealment images) may be used in the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach".

In FIGS. 416 (b) and 416 (c), the background image is gradually visually recognized in the first period, which is a period in which the background image is gradually difficult to see, the second period, in which the background image is invisible. The embodiment shown in FIG. 416 (a) has been modified so that the length of the third period (specifically, 2 seconds), which is the period for facilitation, is different rather than the same. A plurality of embodiments (modifications 01 to 12) are shown. It should be noted that these embodiments may also have the same effects as those of the embodiments shown with reference to FIGS. 397 (b) and 397 (c).

As described above, in the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”), the hold image is not displayed while the special reach background image is being displayed. On the other hand, in the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”), the reserved image is displayed while the special reach background image is being displayed. In this way, the display contents can be diversified by providing a case where the reserved image is not displayed and a case where the reserved image is displayed according to the type of reach.
For example, by not displaying the reserved image, the player's consciousness can be concentrated on the production using the tank. On the other hand, by displaying the reserved image, the player can make a decision as to whether or not to operate the handle 302. Further, when the reserved image is displayed, the player can know how much the expectation of the big hit is.

As a visual aspect of the background image in the "giant tank reach", the embodiment shown in FIG. 416 (a) and the modified example shown in FIGS. 416 (b) and 416 (c) may be adopted. .. The contents shown in the time chart are the same as those shown with reference to FIG. 397 except for a part.
Further, as the visual mode of the background image in the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiment shown in FIG. 397 (a) and the modified example shown in FIGS. 397 (b) and 397 (c) are adopted. May be good.
Further, the "giant tank reach" adopting any of the embodiments and modifications shown in FIG. 416 and the "enemy tank destruction reach" adopting any of the embodiments and modifications shown in FIG. 397 are executed. It may be configured to be flexible.
For example, in the "giant tank reach", the modification 01 shown in FIG. 416 (b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", the modification 02 shown in FIG. 397 (b) may be adopted.

Also in the embodiment or modification shown with reference to FIG. 416, the same effect as that of the embodiment or modification shown with reference to FIG. 397 can be obtained.

As in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 416 (b) and the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", for example, a display using a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed. The third period (3 seconds) is longer than the third period (1 second) in which the "enemy tank destruction reach" is displayed using a black background concealed image different from the "giant tank reach". You may.
According to such a configuration, the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is displayed until then at the end of the reach effect compared to the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). The pending image that was not displayed is displayed slowly.

As in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 416 (b) and the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", for example, a display using a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed. The third period (3 seconds) is the same length as the third period (3 seconds) in which a black background concealed image different from the "giant tank reach" is displayed in the "enemy tank destruction reach". You may do it.
With such a configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 416 (b) and the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", for example, a display using a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed. The third period (1 second) is shorter than the 3rd period (3 seconds) in which the "enemy tank destruction reach" is displayed using a black background concealment image different from the "giant tank reach". You may.
According to such a configuration, the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is displayed until then at the end of the reach effect compared to the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). The reserved image that was not available becomes rapidly visible in a short period of time.

The background image gradually changes when the background image is switched at the end of the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach") than when the background image is switched at the end of the second reach effect ("Enemy Tank Destruction Reach"). By lengthening the third period, which is a period that makes it easier to visually recognize, the player's eyes can be seen on the reserved image displayed for the first time in a long time, and the player's awareness of the number of reserved images can be raised. This makes it possible for the player to determine whether or not to launch the game ball.
In particular, in the first reach production, the time lapse from the start of the variable display is long, and the expectation of a big hit is high, so that the player tends to lose awareness of the number of reservations. By adopting a different display method, it is possible to regain awareness of the number of holdings, and it is possible to raise awareness of the launch of the game ball, which was suspended during the reach production.

As in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 416 (b) and the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", for example, a display using a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed. The third period (3 seconds) after the end of the third period is displayed by adopting a black background concealed image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach". It may be longer than the fourth period (1 second) after the period of.
According to such a configuration, the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”) is invisible or previously invisible at the end of the reach effect compared to the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). Since the reserved image, which was difficult to see, is displayed in a clear state for a relatively long period of time, the player can remember that the game ball is being fired. In addition, the result of the special lottery may be lost and some players may be shocked, but it is necessary to secure time for the player to switch his / her feelings to the variable display of the decorative pattern from the next time onward. Can be done.

As in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 416 (b) and the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", for example, a display using a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed. The third period (1 second) after the end of the third period is displayed by adopting a black background concealed image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach". It may be the same length as the fourth period (1 second) after the period of.
With such a configuration, the display process can be simplified.

As in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 416 (b) and the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 397 (b), in the "giant tank reach", for example, a display using a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character or the like is displayed. The third period (1 second) after the end of the third period is displayed by adopting a black background concealed image different from the "giant tank reach" in the "enemy tank destruction reach". It may be shorter than the fourth period (3 seconds) after the period of.
According to such a configuration, the decorative symbol temporarily stops at the end of the reach effect in the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”) as compared with the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”). The time to be done can be shortened.

As a method for making the length of the fourth period different or the same between the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiments shown in FIGS. 416 and 397 are shown. And in the modified example, the timing at which the decorative symbol stops fluctuating can also be realized by transforming the timing t44 to the timing t43 or the timing t45.

In the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 397, the display priority of the decorative symbol may be higher than the display priority of the background concealed image. For example, in the period from timing t10 to timing t44, the display priority of the decorative symbol may be higher than the display priority of the background concealed image.
With such a configuration, a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see (first period), a period in which the background image cannot be seen (second period), and a period in which the background image becomes gradually easier to see (second period). In the third period), the decorative design is always visible.
It should be noted that the decorative symbol at the time of reach and the normal decorative symbol may be switched at an appropriate timing such as at the start of the next variable display.
In this way, in the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”), the decorative symbol is invisible in the second period, and in the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”), the decorative symbol is visually visible in the second period. It may be possible.

In the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”), which has a relatively high degree of expectation, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of a loss, the decorative symbol becomes invisible in the second period. The result of the loss can alleviate the shock felt by the player.
On the other hand, in the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”), which has a relatively low expectation, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the form of a loss, and the decorative symbol is visible in the second period. However, the player does not feel such a shock, but rather, the decorative pattern is continuously visible, so that the feeling can be smoothly switched to the next change of the decorative pattern, and the decorative pattern can be changed. Does not interfere with the tempo of fluctuations.

A black background concealment image of "Giant Tank Reach" that is different from "Giant Tank Reach" of "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" during the third period when the background concealment image consisting of, for example, a bomb character is displayed. Although the embodiment in which the normal decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the same position and the same size in the third period in which the display using the above is performed is shown, the normal decorative symbol is provisionally displayed in the third period of "enemy tank destruction reach". Other modes may be adopted as the stop display mode.
For example, within the third period, the size of what normally displays the decorative pattern at the same position may be changed slightly. Alternatively, within the third period, the size of what is usually displayed by changing the position of the decorative pattern may be the same. Alternatively, within the third period, the position of the normal decorative symbol may be changed and the size of the normal decorative symbol may be changed slightly.
Strictly speaking, the same position may mean the average position of a normal decorative pattern that is displayed by shaking at a predetermined cycle.

After the reach production of both "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is completed (the end of the special reach background image of each reach), the same normal decorative symbol will be displayed as a decorative symbol from the third period. .. In addition, the position where the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is also the same. In addition, the third period in "Giant Tank Reach" is displayed using a background concealed image consisting of bomb characters, etc., and the third period in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is a black color different from "Giant Tank Reach". The display adopts the background concealed image of.
With such a configuration, after the end of the first reach and the second reach, where the contents and expectations of the effect display are different, the normal decorative design is visually recognized by the player in the same effect mode, so that the player's intention is Can be directed to fluctuations from the next time onwards.

With reference to FIG. 402, an example of displaying a band-shaped look-ahead effect image when the "enemy tank destruction reach" is executed has been shown, but the band-shaped look-ahead effect is also performed when the "giant tank reach" is executed. The image may be displayed.
Further, the display mode of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image when the background concealed image in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 402 is displayed can be adopted as the display mode of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image in the “giant tank reach”. .. For example, the display priority may be higher than that of the background concealed image so that the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is not affected even in the first to third periods, or the display priority is lower than that of the background concealed image. In the first period, the visibility of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image may be lowered, in the second period, it may be invisible, and in the third period, the visibility may be improved. Alternatively, the display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is stopped while the background concealed image is being displayed (the visibility of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is reduced in the first period, and it is not visible in the second period. It may be invisible even during the period).

As a display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image, a mode in which the display priority is higher than that of the background concealed image so that the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image is not affected even in the first to third periods, the background concealed image. A mode in which the display priority is lowered to be lower than that in the first period, the visibility of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is lowered, the visibility is made invisible in the second period, and the visibility is improved in the third period. , The display of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is stopped while the background concealed image is being displayed (the visibility of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is reduced in the first period, and it is not visible in the second period, and the third and fourth periods. However, the display mode of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image in the "giant tank reach" is adopted by adopting one of these display modes. As the display mode of the band-shaped look-ahead effect image in "enemy tank destruction reach", any one of these display modes may be adopted.

Even with such different types of reach, by adopting the same display mode as the display mode of the look-ahead effect image, the staging process can be standardized, and the display process and the development man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, the staging mode can be diversified by adopting a different display mode as the display mode of the look-ahead effect image depending on the type of reach.

With reference to FIGS. 405 to 408, in the "enemy tank destruction reach", an embodiment or a modification thereof in which the tank accessory 3770 is made to emit light with a predetermined emission color or is moved between the standby position and the moving position. As shown, in "Giant Tank Reach", by adopting the embodiment in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" and its modified example, the tank accessory 3770 can be made to emit light with a predetermined emission color, and the standby position and the moving position can be set. You may try to move between them.
That is, any of the light emitting modes shown in FIGS. 406 and 407 may be adopted as the light emitting mode of the tank accessory 3770 in the "giant tank reach". Similarly, as the operation mode of the tank accessory 3770, any operation mode shown in FIG. 408 may be adopted.

Even with different types of reach, by adopting the same mode of light emission and movement of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770), the staging process can be standardized, and the display process and development can be performed. Man-hours can be simplified.
On the other hand, depending on the type of reach, the effect mode can be diversified by adopting different modes of light emission and movement of the movable decorative member (tank accessory 3770).

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of the movable decorative member, one or more other movable decorative members having the same function may be provided on the game board 5. For example, a total of three movable decorative members may be provided, with the upper, right, and left sides of the display area as the standby positions and the vicinity of the center of the display area as the moving position. When a plurality of movable decorative members are provided, the light may be emitted or moved at the same timing as the tank accessory 3770, or may be emitted or moved at a timing different from that of the tank accessory 3770. That is, any of the light emitting modes and operating modes shown in FIGS. 406 to 408 can be adopted for other movable decorative members.
In addition, the light emission mode and movement mode of other movable decorative members may be different between the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach". In this case as well, the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach" may be different. , Any of the light emitting modes and operating modes shown in FIGS. 406 to 408 can be adopted.

Although the tank accessory 3770 is shown as an example of the decorative member capable of emitting light, the decorative member capable of emitting light may be provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5. The decorative means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc.) and the decorative member provided on the game board 5 may emit light at the same timing as the tank accessory 3770. However, the light may be emitted at a timing different from that of the tank accessory 3770. That is, any of the light emitting modes shown in FIGS. 406 to 408 can be adopted for the light emitting decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the light emitting decorative member provided on the game board 5.
Further, the light emitting mode of the decorative means provided on the door frame 3 and the decorative member provided on the game board 5 may be different between the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach". With "enemy tank destruction reach", any of the light emitting modes shown in FIGS. 406 to 408 can be adopted.

With reference to FIGS. 406 to 407, an embodiment of the display mode of the reserved image and a modified example thereof are shown in "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach", but also in "Giant Tank Reach", "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is shown. The reserved image may be displayed by adopting any one of the display mode of the reserved image in the embodiment and the modified example thereof.

For example, in the "giant tank reach", the modification 01 shown in FIG. 406 (b) may be adopted, and in the "enemy tank destruction reach", the embodiment shown in FIG. 406 (a) may be adopted.
In "Giant Tank Reach", which has a relatively high degree of expectation, by promptly returning the reserved image to the normal mode when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, the degree of expectation is high. However, it is possible to alleviate the shock of the player who has resulted in a loss.
On the other hand, in the "enemy tank destruction reach" where the expectation level is relatively low, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is lost, what kind of expectation level is displayed by displaying the reserved image in red. It is possible to impress the player whether the variable display is performed under the above, and it can be used as a reference when the same effect situation is obtained in the variable display from the next time onward.

Alternatively, the embodiment shown in FIG. 406 (a) may be adopted in the “giant tank reach”, and the modification 01 shown in FIG. 406 (b) may be adopted in the “enemy tank destruction reach”.
In the "enemy tank destruction reach" where the expectation is relatively high in this way, even if it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery is lost, the reserved image is displayed in red by displaying the reserved image. It is possible to clearly recognize the fact that the result of the special lottery has resulted in a loss despite the high expectations, and to inspire the player's feelings toward the variable display from the next time onward.
On the other hand, in the "enemy tank destruction reach" where the expectation is relatively low, by promptly returning the reserved image to the normal mode when it is confirmed that the result of the special lottery has been lost, it is originally relative. It is possible to smoothly switch the player's feelings from the reach production, which has low expectations and is difficult to obtain a big hit result, to the next variable display.

Regarding the display mode of the reserved image, which embodiment or modification to be adopted between the embodiment in the "giant tank reach" and the embodiment in the "enemy tank destruction reach" takes into consideration the priority of such an effect. Then, it is advisable to use them in combination as appropriate.

The jackpot expectation of the "giant tank reach" in the present embodiment may be lower than the jackpot expectation of the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIGS. 397 to 400 and the like.

Not limited to the above-mentioned example, a modified example applied to the embodiment relating to the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 397 and the like is shown in the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 416 and the like. It may be applied to such an embodiment as a new embodiment.

In this way, in the third period of the first reach effect (“giant tank reach”), the display in which the visibility of the normal background image is gradually increased (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special display A”) is performed.
Further, in the third period of the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”), a display in which the visibility of the normal background image is gradually increased (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special display B”) is performed.

As shown in FIGS. 306 and 307, when a big hit occurs in the normal state, the subsequent gaming state is a state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, such as a time saving state, a non-time saving probability variation state, and a time saving. It may be in a probable change state (probability change time shortening state). The advantageous states shown below refer to the time-saving state and the probabilistic time-saving state among the states.
As shown with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307, when the special lottery result of "loss with time reduction" occurs or when the special lottery result of loss occurs continuously a predetermined number of times, the time reduction state is set. It may be configured to generate.
In an advantageous state, the player rotates the handle 302 greatly to hit the game ball toward the area on the right side of the game area (hereinafter, may be referred to as "right-handed"), and moves to the right side of the game area. A game ball is awarded to the provided starting port (for example, the second starting port 2004).
Further, when a big hit occurs during the advantageous state and the advantageous state continues after that, the number of balls ejected due to the big hit or the small hit during that period is added and stored in the peripheral control board 1510.
Further, in an advantageous state, the normal background image C indicating that the player is in an advantageous state is displayed in place of the normal background images A and B.
Such an advantageous state ends when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, after the advantageous state is started, the result of losing a predetermined number of times is continuously displayed without the decorative symbol becoming a big hit (the result of the special lottery becomes the result of losing a predetermined number of times in a row). That) is the condition to end. For example, in the probabilistic time saving state, the probabilistic time saving state ends when the loss continues 100 times. It should be noted that the time saving state may be terminated when the loss continues a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, in the so-called fall type in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to end the probability change time saving state at the start of the fluctuation of each game, a predetermined condition may be satisfied when the lottery to be ended is won.
When the predetermined condition is satisfied in this way, the advantageous state ends, but when the advantageous state ends (specifically, when the loss continues a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times)), the advantageous state ends. During the 100th fluctuation, in the fall type, the fall lottery was won), the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A or the normal background image B, and the player is given a big hit or in an advantageous state. The total number of game balls paid out is displayed.

FIG. 420 shows an image displayed at the end of right-handed striking. FIG. 420 (a) shows the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed striking, FIG. 420 (b) shows the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed striking, and FIG. 420 (c) shows the background concealed image C at the end of right-handed striking. .. These images are inspired by the sunglasses worn by the bomb character.
FIG. 420 (d) shows a game result image showing that the right-handed “dynamite time” has ended, the number of consecutive chans (13 times), and the number of game balls paid out to the player (14125 balls). ing.

The effect mode at the end of right-handed striking will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 421 and the display example shown in FIG. 423.
In FIG. 421 (a), from timing t0 to timing t7, the 99th variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the probabilistic time-shortening state, which is an advantageous state. The decorative symbol displayed during the probable change time reduction state is a right-handed decorative symbol.
After that, from the timing t8 to the timing t24, the 100th variation display of the decorative symbol is performed in the probable variation time saving state. It should be noted that this time chart shows an example of an effect in which the result of the 100th variation display of the decorative symbol is lost.
FIG. 423 (a) shows a display example in the period from the timing t14 to the timing t16. A display state in which the right-handed decorative symbol is temporarily stopped is shown on the front side of the normal background image C.

From the timing t16 to the timing t17, the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed striking is displayed. FIG. 423 (b) shows a state in which the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed striking is displayed.
From the timing t17 to the timing t18, the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed striking is displayed. FIG. 423 (c) shows a state in which the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed striking is displayed.
From the timing t18 to the timing t20, the background concealed image C at the end of right-handed striking is displayed. FIG. 423 (d) shows a state in which the background concealed image C at the end of right-handed striking is displayed.

From timing t18 to timing t20, a game result image showing the game result during right-handed hitting such as "end of dynamite time", "defeat 13 bodies", and "acquire 14125" is displayed. The display of "end of dynamite time" indicates that the probabilistic time saving state ends. In addition, the display of "Defeat 13 bodies" indicates that the number of consecutive chans was 13 times. In addition, the display of "14125 acquisition" indicates to the player that the number of game balls paid out by winning a prize in the large winning opening 2005 while hitting to the right was 14125 balls.
Further, at the timing t19 during the second period during which the background concealed image C is displayed at the end of right-handed stroke and the background image is invisible, the background image is switched from the normal background image C to the normal background image A. It may be switched at timing t18 or timing t20.

From the timing t20 to the timing t21, the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed striking is displayed. FIG. 423 (e) shows a state in which the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed striking is displayed. At this time, the background image is usually changed to the background image A. In addition, the decorative design has been changed to a normal decorative design.
From the timing t21 to the timing t22, the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed striking is displayed. FIG. 423 (f) shows a state in which the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed striking is displayed.
From the timing t22 to the timing t24, the normal decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed. FIG. 423 (g) shows a state in which the background concealed image A is no longer displayed at the end of right-handed striking.
After that, from the timing t24 to the timing t25, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. FIG. 423 (h) shows a state in which the normal decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

From the timing t25, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started. At this time, the background image is changed to the normal background image A and the decorative symbol is changed to the normal decorative symbol. Further, since the game state is changed from the probability change time saving state to the normal state, the probability of being determined as a big hit is also changed from 1/30 to 1/300 (see FIGS. 306 and 307).

In this way, when the background concealed image is displayed at the end of right-handed striking, the background image is gradually difficult to see (first period), the background image is invisible (second period), and the background image is gradually visible. There is a period (third period) during which the background image becomes easier to perform, and a period (fourth period) after the visibility of the background image is restored.

If the result of the 100th variation display in the probabilistic state is a big hit, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the big hit without displaying the background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking.
At this time, the "giant tank reach" effect or the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect may be executed.

421 (b), 421 (c), and 421 (d) respectively change the timing of displaying the background concealed image at the end of right-handed stroke in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 421 (a). Each of the embodiments is shown.
For example, in the time chart shown in FIG. 421 (c), at the timing t24, the display of the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed stroke is terminated and the variable display of the decorative symbol is stopped at the same time.

FIGS. 422 (b) and 422 (c) show examples in which the display time and display timing of the background concealed image A at the end of right-handed striking, the background concealed image B at the end of right-handed striking, and the background concealed image C at the end of right-handed striking are modified ( Modifications 01 to 12) are shown.

By performing such a display, the player can know the number of consecutive chans (the number of consecutive big hits) and the number of acquired game balls at the end of the right-handed state.
In addition, when the normal background image A to the normal background image C are not displayed, the display area in which the number of consecutive chans and the number of acquired game balls is displayed can be photographed by a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or a digital camera. can.
Further, behind the display, the background image and the decorative pattern can be smoothly switched from the probabilistic time saving state or the time saving state to the normal state.

The period during which the background image is invisible at the end of right-handed strike (second period) is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" (second period). May be good.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 04 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the second period in the modified example 03 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

Even if the period in which the background image is invisible at the end of right-handed strike (second period) and the period in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" are invisible (second period) are the same length. good.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

Even if the period in which the background image is invisible at the end of right-handed strike (second period) is longer than the period in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is invisible (second period) good. It should be noted that the period during which the background image is invisible at the end of right-handed stroke (second period) is set to take more than half of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation (that is, the final fluctuation at which the advantageous state ends). May be good. The time of half or more of this fluctuation time may be longer than the shortest time of all fluctuation patterns.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 03 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the second period in the modified example 04 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period in which the background image at the end of right-handed striking gradually becomes easier to see (third period), and the period in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (third period). May be shorter than.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period in which the background image at the end of right-handed striking gradually becomes easier to see (third period), and the period in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (third period). May have the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period in which the background image at the end of right-handed striking gradually becomes easier to see (third period), and the period in which the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" gradually becomes easier to see (third period). May be longer than.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period after the visibility of the background image at the end of right-handed strike is restored (4th period), after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is restored. It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period after the visibility of the background image at the end of right-handed hitting is restored (4th period), and after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is restored. The period (fourth period) may be the same length.
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period after the visibility of the background image at the end of right-handed hitting is restored (4th period), after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is restored. It may be shorter than the period (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The background image displayed at the end of right-handed striking and the background image displayed after the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" are both lost are shown as an example of the normal background image A. , The background image displayed at the end of right-handed striking may be different from the background image displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends with a loss.
For example, the normal background image B may be displayed at the end of right-handed striking, and the normal background image A may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends with a loss. Alternatively, the normal background image A may be displayed at the end of right-handed striking, and the normal background image B may be displayed after the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" ends with a loss.

An example is shown in which the normal background image A is displayed instead of the normal background image C at the end of right-handed striking, but instead of the normal background image C, either the normal background image A or the normal background image B is displayed. It may be displayed randomly.
Further, as for the background image being right-handed, in addition to the normal background image C, a background image having a mode other than the normal background image C (for example, a background image having a different aspect of a bomb character or a dialogue) can be obtained. It may be displayed randomly as a background image during right-handed striking.

Further, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed instead of the normal background image C at the end of right-handed striking. At this time, the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning of the moving image (display state shown in FIGS. 391 (a) and 391 (d)).
It should be noted that during right-handed striking, a background moving image dedicated to right-handed striking may be displayed.

Although an example of the background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking is shown with reference to FIG. 420, a background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking may be adopted as a background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking. For example, one of a black background concealed image, a white background concealed image, a background concealed image consisting of a bomb character and the like may be used as a background concealed image dedicated to the end of right-handed striking.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 423, an example of displaying the game result image in the second period (timing t18 to timing t20) is shown, but the game result image is shown in the first period and the third period. May be displayed. In this case, by moving the game result image from the left and right of the display area according to the movement of the background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking, the game result image appears in the display area or the game result image is deleted from the display area. You should do it.

In the variable display of the decorative pattern at the end of right-handed striking, the background concealed image is displayed when the result of the special lottery is lost in both the case where the reach mode occurs and the case where the reach mode does not occur. .. On the other hand, in the "giant tank reach" and the "enemy tank destruction reach", the background concealed image is displayed as the reach mode occurs.

With reference to FIG. 406 and the like, before and after displaying the background concealed image at the time of executing "enemy tank destruction reach", the display mode of the reserved image is maintained (for example, the reserved image in red is displayed as red). (For example, the red reserved image may be changed to a normal reserved image (white reserved image) and displayed). The same display may be made in "Reach").
On the other hand, when the right-handed state ends and the normal state is reached by executing the variable display of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealed image at the end of the right-handed state is displayed. As for the reserved image displayed after the end of the background concealed image at the end of right-handed stroke, it is preferable to display the normal reserved image (white reserved image).
The reserved image that will be displayed after the end of right-handed stroke is displayed as a normal reserved image (white reserved image), and is reserved in a mode indicating that the degree of expectation is higher than that of the normal reserved image. It is good to hide the image (red reserved image or golden reserved image).

At the end of the right-handed state, the background concealed image at the end of right-handed is displayed, and the reserved image is transferred to another reserved image during the period (third period) in which the normal background image A and the normal background image B are gradually easily visible. It is better not to change it.
Similarly, during the period (third period) in which the background concealed image is displayed during the execution of "Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" and the normal background image gradually becomes easier to see, the reserved image is displayed in another mode. It is good not to change to the reserved image of.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player overlooks the change in the mode of the reserved image and the change in the expected degree shown.

With reference to FIG. 402 and the like, before and after displaying the background concealed image at the time of executing "enemy tank destruction reach", maintain the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image, or maintain the display mode of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image. It was shown that it may be terminated without (Note that the same display may be made in "Giant Tank Reach").
On the other hand, when the right-handed state ends and the normal state is reached by executing the variable display of the decorative symbol a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), the background concealed image at the end of the right-handed state is displayed. At the end of right-handed stroke It is preferable to prevent the band-shaped look-ahead effect image from being displayed after the end of the background concealed image. Alternatively, the band-shaped look-ahead effect image may not be displayed in the variable display in which the right-handed state ends.
Whether or not to execute the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is determined by the look-ahead process at the time of the start-up prize. It is better not to start the display of. For example, it is preferable not to start displaying the band-shaped look-ahead effect image for the hold that occurred when the 96th to 100th variable display is being performed.

If the result of the special lottery is a big hit at the time of the change of the decorative pattern which is the last (100th time) of the right-handed state, the period (1st to 1st) in which the background concealed image consisting of sunglasses etc. is displayed. In the period (3 period) or the period after the background concealed image is displayed (4th period), the jackpot notification image for notifying that the jackpot will occur may be displayed.

An embodiment of the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 421 modified to display a jackpot notification image for notifying that a jackpot will occur will be described with reference to FIG. 424.
FIG. 424 (a) shows an embodiment in which the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t14, which is the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, to the timing t16, which is the start timing of the first period. ing.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 424 (a), a modified example (modified example 01 to modified example 14) in which the period for displaying the jackpot notification image is modified will be described below with reference to FIG. 424 (b). do.

In the modification 01, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t14, which is the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, to the timing t18, which is the end timing of the first period.
In the modification 02, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t14 to the timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the modification 03, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t14 to the timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the modification 04, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t14 to the timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modified example 05, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t16 which is the start timing of the first period to the timing t18 which is the end timing of the first period.
In the modification 06, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t16 to the timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the modification 07, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t16 to the timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the modification 08, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t16 to the timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 09, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t18, which is the start timing of the second period, to the timing t20, which is the end timing of the second period.
In the modification 10, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t18 to the timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the modified example 11, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t18 to the timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 12, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t20, which is the start timing of the third period, to the timing t22, which is the end timing of the third period.
In the modification 13, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t20 to the timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

In the modification 14, the jackpot notification image is displayed in the period from the timing t22, which is the start timing of the fourth period, to the timing t24, which is the end timing of the fourth period.

As the timing to start displaying the jackpot notification image, the timing t14 which is the timing when the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the timing t16 which is the start timing of the first period, and the timing t18 which is the start timing of the second period. , The timing t20 which is the start timing of the third period and the timing t22 which is the start timing of the fourth period are shown, but a predetermined timing within these periods may be set as the timing to start the display of the jackpot notification image.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timing for starting the display of the jackpot notification image.

Further, as the timing to end the display of the jackpot notification image, the timing t16 which is the start timing of the first period, the timing t18 which is the end timing of the first period, the timing t20 which is the end timing of the second period, and the third period. Although the timing t22 which is the end timing and the timing t24 which is the end timing of the fourth period are shown, a predetermined timing within these periods may be set as the timing when the display of the jackpot notification image is finished.
For example, timing t15, timing t17, timing t19, timing t21, and timing t23 may be set as the timing for ending the display of the jackpot notification image.

In this way, the timing for starting the display of the jackpot notification image can be set to any timing from timing t14 to timing t23, and the timing for ending the display of the jackpot notification image can be set to any timing from timing t15 to timing t24. can.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 424, the normal background image C is switched to the normal background image A at the timing t19, but when the display of the jackpot notification image is started before the timing t19, the display of the jackpot notification image is started. The display of the normal background image C may be continued after the timing t19, and the normal background image C may be changed to the big hit medium background image at the timing t25.

The display priority of the jackpot notification image may be higher than the display priority of the background concealed image or the game result image. Further, the jackpot notification image may be displayed at a position overlapping with the game result image. The jackpot notification image may be used as a moving image, and the jackpot notification may be performed by displaying a moving image.

The period from the start of the variable display to the execution of the display of the background concealed image at the end of the right-handed hit is from the start of the variable display to the special reach in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach". It should be shorter than the period until the background concealed image is displayed.
For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 421 (a), the display of the background concealed image at the end of right-handed movement is started at the timing t16 8 seconds after the timing t8 when the variable display is started.
On the other hand, in the "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 416 (a) and the "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 397, the timing when 36 seconds have passed from the start of the variable display. At t36, the display of the special reach background concealed image is started.
Also, at the end of right-handed strike (when the result of the 100th fluctuation display is lost), "Giant tank reach" and "Enemy tank destruction reach" are not executed, and the special reach background concealed image is not displayed. It should be configured as follows.

With such a configuration, a suitable staging mode can be realized.

As described above, in the third period at the end of the advantageous state, the display in which the visibility of the normal background image is gradually increased (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special display C") is performed.

When the first reach effect ("Giant Tank Reach") is executed, the background concealed image of the bomb character etc. is displayed to create a special effect in which the character appears even if the first reach effect is a result of loss. It can be seen and the disappointing feelings of the player can be alleviated.
Further, when the special display A in the first reach effect and the special display C at the end of right-handed striking are compared, the background concealed image used for the special display A and the background concealed image used for the special display C are different. There is. This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing the gaming state.

By displaying a black background concealed image when executing the second reach effect (“enemy tank destruction reach”), even if the second reach effect results in a loss, the player's disappointing feelings are calmed down. be able to.
Further, when the special display B in the second reach effect and the special display C at the end of right-handed striking are compared, the background concealed image used for the special display B and the background concealed image used for the special display C are different. There is. This makes it possible to prevent the player from confusing the gaming state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 425 and the like, an embodiment of a pseudo-continuous effect in which the decorative design is visually recognized as if it has stopped and then is displayed in a variable manner again is shown.
Specifically, as shown in the time charts of FIGS. 425 and 426, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped by the decorative symbols having different numbers, and then the special decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol. By performing the stop effect, each of the temporarily stopped decorative symbols scrolls downward again and is displayed in a variable manner. Further, when the scrolling fluctuation in the downward direction is started again after each decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the image "x2" is displayed in the display area. Hereinafter, such a production is referred to as a pseudo-continuous production.

In the state where the image "x2" is displayed, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped with decorative symbols with different numbers, and a special symbol is displayed in the middle symbol, so that the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is again below. It may scroll in a direction and fluctuate. In this case, the image "x3" is displayed instead of the image "x2". Hereinafter, these "x2" and "x3" images are referred to as pseudo-ream number display images. FIGS. 425 (b) and 426 (b) are time charts showing an example of an effect in which the image "x 2" is displayed and then the image "x 3" is displayed.

Hereinafter, an example of the effect will be specifically shown with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 425 (b) and the display example shown in FIG. 427. At the timing t0, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.
At timing t4, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops. At timing t6, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops. FIG. 427 (a) shows the display state at this time. At the timing t8, the intermediate decorative symbol temporarily stops. A decorative pattern with the Chinese character "sequel", which is a special decorative pattern, is displayed on the middle decorative pattern. FIG. 427 (b) shows the display state at this time. At the timing t10, the left-right decorative symbol scrolls downward again and is displayed in a variable manner. Further, "x2" of the pseudo-ream number display image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. FIG. 427 (c) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t14, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops. At timing t16, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops. FIG. 427 (d) shows the display state at this time. As shown in this figure, the display priority of the pseudo-ream number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbol. At the timing t18, the intermediate decorative symbol temporarily stops. A decorative pattern with the Chinese character "sequel", which is a special decorative pattern, is displayed on the middle decorative pattern. FIG. 427 (e) shows the display state at this time. At the timing t20, the left to right decorative symbols are scrolled downward again and displayed in a variable manner. Further, "x3" of the pseudo-ream number display image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. FIG. 427 (f) shows the display state at this time.

At timing t25, the left decorative symbol temporarily stops. At the timing t30, the right decorative symbol temporarily stops at the same number (number "2") as the left decorative symbol, and a reach state occurs. FIG. 427 (g) shows the display state at this time. From the timing t37 to the timing t39, the “x3” of the pseudo-ream number display image gradually becomes translucent and difficult to see. FIG. 427 (h) shows the display state at this time. At the timing t40, the intermediate decorative symbol temporarily stops. It indicates whether the result of the special lottery is a big hit or a loss depending on the display mode of the decorative symbol at the time of temporary stop. At the timing t41, the left to right decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the state is maintained until the timing t42. After the timing t42, the fluctuation display from the next time onward is executed, or the big hit game state is executed.

Although the staging mode of the pseudo-continuous staging has been described with reference to FIG. 425 (b), the same display is performed on other time charts.

In the production example shown by the time chart of FIG. 425 (a), after "× 2" is finally displayed as a pseudo-ream number display image, it does not develop into "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach". In addition, at timing t31, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss or big hit. The pseudo-ream number display image is gradually erased in the period from timing t27 to timing t29.
Since the pseudo-ream number display image has a higher display priority than the normal background image, a part of the normal background image is difficult or invisible due to the pseudo-ream number display image. Therefore, FIG. 425 (a). The gradual erasure of the pseudo-ream number display image of the time chart is synonymous with the gradual visibility of the normal background image.

In the production example shown by the time chart in FIG. 426 (a), after "× 2" is finally displayed as a pseudo-ream number display image, it develops into a "giant tank reach" production and an "enemy tank destruction reach" production. do. After the reach occurs at the timing t20, the reach effect is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 416 (a) and 397 (a).

In the production example shown by the time chart in FIG. 426 (b), after "x3" is finally displayed as a pseudo-ream number display image, it develops into a "giant tank reach" production and an "enemy tank destruction reach" production. do. After the reach occurs at the timing t30, the reach effect is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 416 (a) and 397 (a).

In the effect example shown in FIGS. 426 (a) and 426 (b), the pseudo-ream number display image is visually recognized by the background concealment image displayed at the start of the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect. It becomes difficult or invisible, and the display ends in this state. For example, it is preferable to end the display at a predetermined timing in the period from the timing t13 to the timing t19 shown in FIGS. 416 (a) and 397 (a).

As described above, the display priority of the pseudo-ream number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbol, and is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 427, it is shown that the pseudo-ream number display image is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol.
Further, the display priority of the pseudo-ream number display image is lower than the display priority of the background concealed image, and the pseudo-ream number display image is displayed behind the background concealed image.

As shown in FIG. 425 (a), the pseudo-ream number display image (“× 2”) is gradually erased from the timing t27 to the timing t29.
Similarly, as shown in FIG. 425 (b), the pseudo-continuous number display image (“× 3”) is gradually erased from the timing t37 to the timing t39.
During these periods, the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually made translucent from an opaque state over 2 seconds, and the display is terminated at the timing when it finally becomes transparent, and the background image and the decorative pattern are visually recognized. It is good to improve the sex. FIG. 427 (h) shows a state in which the pseudo-ream number display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state in this way.
Instead of gradually making the entire pseudo-ream number display image transparent, the pseudo-ream number display image is made transparent from the surroundings, and finally the central part is made transparent to display the pseudo-ream number display image. May be terminated.
If the image is displayed in such a manner that the visibility of the pseudo-ream number display image gradually decreases, another display mode may be adopted.

The display priority of the pseudo-ream number display image is higher than the display priority of the decorative symbol and is displayed on the front side of the decorative symbol. However, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped, the display priority of the pseudo-ream number display image is given. The degree may be temporarily lower than the priority of the decorative symbol so that at least a part of the pseudo-ream number display image is hidden by the decorative symbol that is temporarily stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 426 (a) and 426 (b), when the background concealed image is displayed because the background image can be switched to the special reach background image, the predetermined period during which the background concealed image is displayed is specified. At the timing of, it is preferable to end the display of the pseudo-ream number display image. For example, the display may be terminated when the background concealed image A or the background concealed image B is displayed, or the display may be terminated when the background concealed image C is displayed.

When the pseudo-ream effect is executed and the pseudo-ream number display image (“× 2”, “× 3”) is displayed, it is preferable to prevent the stop display mode of the decorative symbol from becoming non-reach loss.
That is, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, the left decorative symbol and the right decorative symbol stop at the decorative symbols having the same number to reach the reach mode, and then, in FIGS. 425 (a) and 425 (b). As shown, the middle decoration symbol stops without developing into a special reach to show the result of the special lottery, or as shown in FIGS. 426 (a) and 426 (b), after developing into a special reach, the middle decoration It is advisable to stop the symbol and show the result of the special lottery.
Alternatively, when "x3" is displayed as the pseudo-ream number display image, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol may not be non-reach loss. Further, when "x2" is displayed as the pseudo-ream number display image but "x3" is not displayed, the stop display mode of the decorative symbol may be non-reach loss. ..

In the case where the pseudo-ream effect is not performed and the case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed and the pseudo-ream number display image of "x2" is displayed, the latter has a higher expectation of big hit.
In addition, after the pseudo-ream effect is performed and the pseudo-ream number display image of "x2" is displayed, the pseudo-ream number display image of "x3" is not displayed, and the pseudo-ream effect is performed. When the pseudo-ream number display image of "x2" is displayed and then the pseudo-ream number display image of "x3" is displayed, the latter has a higher expectation of big hit.

The temporary stop mode of the decorative symbol in the pseudo-continuous effect is not limited to the display example with reference to FIG. 427, and other temporary stop modes may be used.
For example, only one of the left and right decorative symbols may be temporarily stopped, and special symbols such as "NEXT", "ream", "pseudo-ream", and "next" may be stopped in the middle decorative symbol.
Alternatively, such a special symbol may be stopped on one of the left and right decorative symbols, not limited to the middle decorative symbol.
Further, each decorative symbol on the left, middle and right may be temporarily stopped by a special combination (number "1 ・ 3 ・ 5", number “6 ・ 7 ・ 7”, etc.).
In this way, in the pseudo-ream effect, some or all of the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are visually recognized as if they were stopped and displayed, and then these symbols are moved and displayed again for the game. It is good to make it visible to people.
Although the decorative design itself does not temporarily stop, the decorative design changes by displaying a staging image in which the recollection story of a predetermined character progresses step by step on the front side of the decorative design to hide part or all of the decorative design. It may be made visible to the player like a display break. In this case, an effect image showing a different story is displayed between the first effect image and the second effect image.

In the production example shown in FIGS. 425 (a) and 425 (b), by displaying the pseudo-ream number display image on the front side of the decorative symbol, it becomes easier for the player to understand the degree of expectation. In addition, the display of the pseudo-ream number display image ends at a timing (timing t29 or timing t39) before the timing (timing t30 or timing t40) when a part of the decorative symbol (middle decorative symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed. By doing so, the visibility of the decorative pattern is guaranteed, and the player can easily recognize the special lottery result.
In the effect example shown in FIGS. 426 (a) and 426 (b), the display of the pseudo-ream number display image is terminated during the period in which the background concealed image is displayed, so that the pseudo-ream is performed during the special reach. Since the number display image is not displayed, the player's consciousness can be focused on the battle result between tanks during the special reach execution.

In the effect example shown in FIG. 425 (a), the pseudo-ream number display image is gradually erased from the timing t27 to the timing t29, but it may be erased at another timing. FIG. 428 (b) shows an embodiment in which the erasing mode of the pseudo-ream number display image is modified in the effect example shown in FIG. 425 (a).
As in the modified examples 01 to 11 shown in FIG. 428 (b), the timing for starting the erasure of the pseudo-ream number display image, the period required for erasing the pseudo-ream number display image, and the erasure of the pseudo-ream number display image are completed. The timing may be set, and the period from the completion of erasing the pseudo-ream number display image to the stop display of the decorative symbol may be set. Note that FIG. 428 (a) is the same as FIG. 425 (a). In the modified example 01 and the like, for the convenience of drawing, the part that should be described as "gradually erased" is described as "gradually".

In addition, in order to simplify the comparison with other inventions, the period from the start of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image to the start of erasure (timing t10 to timing t27 in FIG. 428 (a)) is set for convenience. Sometimes referred to as the "second period". Similarly, the period required for erasing the pseudo-continuous number display image (timing t27 to timing t29 in FIG. 428 (a)) may be referred to as a “third period” for convenience. Similarly, the period from the completion of erasing the pseudo-ream number display image to the stop display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a "fourth period" (timing t29 to timing t30 in FIG. 428 (a)) for convenience. It should be noted that a first period (timing t10 to timing t12 in FIG. 428 (a)) in which the pseudo-continuous number display image is displayed in a semi-transparent state and gradually becomes opaque may be provided.

Modification 01 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t26 to the timing t27.
Modification 02 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t26 to the timing t28.
Modification 03 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t26 to the timing t29.
The modification 04 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t27 to the timing t28.
An example of the effect in which the pseudo-ream number display image is gradually erased during the period from the timing t27 to the timing t29 is already shown in FIG. 425 (a).
Modification 05 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t27 to the timing t30.
Modification 06 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t28 to the timing t29.
Modification 07 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t28 to the timing t30.
Modification 08 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t28 to the timing t31.
Modification 09 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t29 to the timing t30.
Modification 10 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t29 to the timing t31.
The modification 11 shows that the pseudo-continuous number display image is gradually erased in the period from the timing t30 to the timing t31.
In these examples, any one of 1 second to 3 seconds is set as the time for erasing the pseudo-continuous number display image. Further, after the erasure of the pseudo-continuous number display image is completed, the time from 0 second to 4 seconds is set as the time until the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed.

Although an embodiment and a modification for erasing the pseudo-ream number display image “x2” are shown with reference to FIG. 428 (b), the pseudo-ream number display in the effect example shown with reference to K30 (b) is shown. The method described in FIG. 428 (b) can also be applied when erasing the image “x3”.

The decorative design displayed during the execution of the "Giant Tank Reach" effect and the "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" effect, and the decorative design displayed during the reach effect shown in FIGS. 425 (a) and 425 (b). Are different in design and size. Specifically, the decorative design displayed during the "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" productions consists only of numbers and square frames, and although the size is small, Fig. 425 (a), The decorative pattern displayed during the execution of the reach effect shown in FIG. 425 (b) is composed of a number, a rectangular frame, and a bomb character, and has a large size.

The period required for erasing the pseudo-ream number display image may be shorter than the period (third period) in which the background image in the "giant tank reach" or the "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required for erasing the pseudo-ream number display image in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 428 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period required for erasing the pseudo-ream number display image and the period (third period) in which the background image in the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see may be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 428 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 03 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period required for erasing the pseudo-ream number display image may be longer than the period (third period) in which the background image in the "giant tank reach" or the "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see.
For example, the length of the period required for erasing the pseudo-ream number display image in the modified example 03 shown in FIG. 428 is longer than the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is restored (4th). It may be shorter than the period).
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image in the modified example 05 shown in FIG. 428 to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol is the length of the fourth period in the modified example 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397. It's shorter than that.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is restored (4th). Period) may be the same length.
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image in the modified example 05 shown in FIG. 428 to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397. Is the same.

The period from the end of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image to the stop of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the period after the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach" is restored (4th). It may be longer than the period).
For example, the length of the period from the end of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 428 to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol is the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397. It's longer than that.
In the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach", the size of the decorative symbol is small, but in the reach effect shown with reference to FIGS. 425 (a) and 425 (b), the size of the decorative symbol is large. It is large and is displayed overlapping with the pseudo-ream number display image. Therefore, by lengthening the period from the deletion of the pseudo-ream number display image to the stop display of the decorative symbol, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize the stop mode of the decorative symbol.

The reach effect shown with reference to FIGS. 425 (a) and 425 (b), and the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the fluctuation. However, after the display of the background concealed image or the pseudo-continuous number display image is completed, the normal background image A may be displayed again. Alternatively, the normal background image B may be switched to the normal background image B instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background concealed image C is displayed or the display end timing of the pseudo-continuous number display image. The background image may be switched without fail, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
Further, only at the end of the display of the pseudo-ream number display image shown with reference to FIGS. 425 (a) and 425 (b), or only at the end of the "giant tank reach" effect or the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect. It may be possible to switch to another normal background image.

In this way, the normal background image that was displayed during the display of the pseudo-ream number display image or before the special reach effect can be switched to another normal background image after the display of the pseudo-ream number display image is completed or after the special reach effect. By making it possible, the special lottery will result in a loss, and it is possible to switch the feelings of the player who has a disappointing feeling.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the pseudo-continuous number display image is completed. Alternatively, in a situation where the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is displayed, the pseudo-ream number display image is displayed, and the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is lowered, so that the pseudo-ream number is displayed. When increasing the visibility of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B during the period for erasing the displayed image, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image even when the period for erasing the pseudo-continuous number display image comes. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without displaying the image B from the beginning, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image A even after the period for erasing the pseudo-continuous number display image ends. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without displaying the normal background moving image B from the beginning.

From the production examples shown in FIGS. 426 (a) and 426 (b), the process shifts to "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach", but at this time, "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank reach" As for the display mode of the reserved image and the reserved image in "Destruction Reach", the display mode in the above-described embodiment may be adopted with reference to FIGS. 397 to 408.

On the other hand, while erasing the pseudo-continuous number display image, it is preferable not to change the display mode of the hold image or the hold image to another display mode showing the degree of expectation.
For example, at the timing t27 of FIG. 425 (a), when the reserved image is the green reserved image, the green reserved image is held from the timing t27 to the timing t29 when the pseudo-ream number display image is gradually erased. Display an image.

When the pseudo-continuous effect is executed while the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is displayed based on the hold look-ahead, the timing t20 or later of the effect example shown in FIG. 426 (a) or FIG. 426 (b). ) After the timing t30 of the production example, special reach such as "giant tank reach" shown with reference to FIG. 416 and "enemy tank destruction reach" shown with reference to FIG. 397 will always occur. You may do so.

As described above, during the erasing of the pseudo-ream number display image, the display is usually performed in which the visibility of the background image is gradually increased (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special display D").

The normal background image may be switched to another normal background image at the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Hereinafter, an embodiment of a normal background image switching effect of displaying a special background concealed image and switching the normal background image to another normal background image will be described.

First, the background concealed image displayed in the normal background image switching effect in the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 429 (a) shows a state in which a huge bomb character is viewed diagonally from the front left. In addition, the parts other than the bomb character are translucent in blue. Hereinafter, the image composed of these is referred to as a background concealed image A.
FIG. 429 (b) shows a state in which the bomb character is viewed from diagonally forward to the left and slightly from the front. In addition, the parts other than the bomb character are translucent in blue. Hereinafter, the image composed of these is referred to as a background concealed image B.
FIG. 429 (c) shows a state in which the bomb character is viewed from the front. Also, the parts other than the bomb character are blue opaque. Hereinafter, the image composed of these is referred to as a background concealed image C.
FIG. 429 (d) shows a state in which the bomb character is viewed diagonally to the right from the front. In addition, the parts other than the bomb character are translucent in blue. Hereinafter, the image composed of these is referred to as a background concealed image D.
FIG. 429 (e) shows a state in which the bomb character is viewed from diagonally right front. In addition, the parts other than the bomb character are translucent in blue. Hereinafter, the image composed of these is referred to as a background concealed image E.
In the image of the huge bomb character, the outline is black opaque, and the other parts (in the area closed by the outline) are white opaque.
In the present embodiment, the normal background image is switched while the background concealed image composed of such a huge bomb character or the like is displayed.

In the background concealed image consisting of a huge bomb character or the like, the blue translucent portion of the background concealed images A and E has higher transparency than the blue translucent portion of the background concealed images B and D, and the image located behind. High visibility. Since the blue portion of the background concealed image C is opaque, the image located behind is invisible. The background concealed image C may be displayed in a large size so that only the bomb character can see it.

Hereinafter, an example of the normal background image switching effect of switching the displayed normal background image to another normal background image will be described with reference to the time chart shown in FIG. 430 (a) and the display example shown in FIG. 431.
First, a new variable display of the decorative symbol is started from the timing t0. FIG. 431 (a) shows a display example of the period from timing t0 to timing t1. At the time of timing t0, the normal background image A is already displayed. The normal background image A is displayed, for example, over a plurality of variable displays.
Next, the background concealed image A is displayed during the period from timing t1 to timing t2. FIG. 431 (b) shows a display example of the period from timing t1 to timing t2.
Next, the background concealed image B is displayed during the period from timing t2 to timing t3. FIG. 431 (c) shows a display example of the period from timing t2 to timing t3.
Next, the background concealed image C is displayed during the period from timing t3 to timing t5. Further, at the timing t4, the background image is switched from the normal background image A to the normal background image B. FIG. 431 (d) shows a display example of the period from timing t3 to timing t5.
Next, the background concealed image D is displayed during the period from timing t5 to timing t6. FIG. 431 (e) shows a display example of the period from timing t5 to timing t6.
Next, the background concealed image E is displayed during the period from timing t6 to timing t7. FIG. 431 (f) shows a display example of the period from timing t6 to timing t7. In this way, the normal background image switching effect is executed from the timing t1 to the timing t7.
After the timing t7, the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed in a state where the background concealed image is not displayed. FIG. 431 (g) shows a display example after the timing t7.
As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal background image A is displayed from the timing t0 to the timing t4, and the normal background image B is displayed from the timing t4 to the timing t32. The background image B is usually displayed in the variable display from the next time onward.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal background image is gradually hard to be visually recognized (first period), the normal background image is invisible (second period), and the normal background image is gradually visually recognized. It has a period (third period) for facilitating, and a period (fourth period) until the visibility of the normal background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. The normal background image in the first period is different from the normal background image in the third and fourth periods. This makes it possible to switch the normal background image without discomfort.
Further, the player's mood can be switched by displaying the background concealed image immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern and switching the normal background image.

The background concealment image in the present embodiment is a background concealment image used when starting "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach", and a background used when ending "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach". It is different from the concealed image and the background concealed image used when terminating the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player thinks that a reach effect that is advantageous to the player has occurred.
In this way, after switching the normal background image, it is possible to execute the above-mentioned pseudo-ream effect, "giant tank reach", "enemy tank destruction reach", etc., depending on the result of the special lottery. You should be able to do it.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 430, the display of the background concealed image is started immediately after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the normal background image is changed. You may change the normal background image at the end of the game.
It should be noted that the change of the normal background image may be configured so that it can be executed only once during one change of the decorative pattern.
Further, it is preferable to change the normal background image in a state where neither the left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol is temporarily stopped. For example, in the effect example shown in FIG. 430 (a), the left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing t20, which is the timing after the timing t7 when the display of the background concealed image is finished.

The left decorative symbol to the right decorative symbol may be changed at high speed before the display of the background concealed image is completed (before the timing t7 in FIG. 430 (a)). Specifically, it is advisable to change the downward scroll speed of the decorative symbol in the fastest state before the display of the background concealed image ends (note that the scroll speed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol and the scroll speed immediately after the start of the change of the decorative symbol). The scroll speed immediately before the temporary stop is slower than this scroll speed).
Alternatively, even after the display of the background concealed image is finished, at least one of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed in the previous variable display may be visible. For example, it is preferable that the predetermined decorative symbol whose variable display is started at the timing t0 of FIG. 430 (a) does not move or moves slowly so that it can be visually recognized even after the timing t7.

The background may be concealed as shown in the modified examples 01 to 12 of FIG. 430. In these modifications, the lengths of the first to fourth periods are 1 to 3 seconds, and the first period, the second period, and the third period are compared with each other. It is an example.
For example, as in the modified example 01, the lengths of the first period and the second period are the same, but the third period is longer than the first period and the second period. This has the effect of creating fun as to which normal background image is displayed as the new normal background image. In the modified example 02, the lengths of the first period and the second period are the same, but the third period is shorter than the first period and the second period. By doing so, there is an effect that a new normal background image can be displayed at an early stage, and a so-called notice effect such as a comment notice (for example, a notice effect using a dialogue notice image described later) can be taken time. In the modified example 03, the lengths of the first period and the third period are the same, but the second period is longer than the first period and the third period. By doing so, the display of the background concealed image itself can be entertained by the player. Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.
Further, in the first normal background image switching effect, the normal background image is switched in the mode of the modification 01, and in the second normal background image switching effect, the normal background image is switched in the mode of the modification 02. Various modifications may be applied to each of the background image switching effects.

The period during which the background image is invisible (second period) in the normal background image switching effect is shorter than the period during which the background image is invisible (second period) in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach". May be good.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 04 shown in FIG. 430 is shorter than the length of the second period in the modified example 03 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period in which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) and the period in which the background image in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" are invisible (second period) are the same length. May be.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

Make the period in which the background image is invisible (second period) in the normal background image switching effect longer than the period in which the background image is invisible (second period) in the "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach". May be good.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 03 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the second period in the modified example 04 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (third period), and the period in which the background image in "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see (third period). ) May be shorter.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 430 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (third period) and the period in which the background image in "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see (third period). ) May be the same length.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (third period), and the period in which the background image in "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach" gradually becomes easier to see (third period). ) May be longer.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

The period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period) is based on the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It may be shorter than the period after returning (fourth period).

Based on the period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period), and the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". The period after returning (fourth period) may be the same length.

The period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period) is based on the visibility of the background image in "Giant Tank Reach" and "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach". It may be longer than the period after returning (fourth period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430 is longer than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIGS. 416 and 397.

As described above, at the end of the special reach, the reserved image with high expectation displayed in the reserved image display area may be displayed as it is, or may be returned to the white reserved image and displayed.

On the other hand, for the reserved image in the present embodiment, the reserved image is moved while the background concealed images A to E are being displayed (at least one period of the first period, the second period, and the third period; the same applies hereinafter). You may. Further, while displaying the background concealed images A to E, it may be possible to change the mode of the reserved image or the reserved image to a reserved image having a higher expectation. When the mode of the reserved image or the reserved image is changed to the reserved image with a higher expectation while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed, the changed mode of the reserved image or the reserved image can be recognized. , If the change starts in the 1st period, it is in any of the 1st to 4th periods, and if the change starts in the 2nd period, it is in any of the 2nd to 4th periods, and the 3rd period. When the change is started in, it is in any of the 3rd to 4th periods, and when the change is started in the 4th period, the mode of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change is recognized in the 4th period. It is good to set it to. For example, when the change starts in the first period and the mode of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change can be recognized in the first period, the mode of the reserved image or the reserved image after the change can be recognized at an early stage. Therefore, if it is an effect that a feeling of expectation can be provided at an early stage, or if the mode of the reserved image or the reserved image that starts to change in the first period and is changed in the fourth period can be recognized, which mode is used. It can provide a sense of expectation that it will change. If the change starts in the 4th period, it can provide the expectation that it may change even in the 1st to 3rd periods that have not changed, and each pattern has its own effect. Needless to say. Alternatively, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 430 and the like, an example of the effect in which the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is reduced by the background concealed image is shown, but the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 401. It may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or the reserved image is not deteriorated. For example, the display priority of the reserved image or the reserved image may be set higher than the display priority of the background hidden image.

At the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the hold image previously displayed in the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area is moved to the hold display area to the third hold display area. FIG. 432 (a) shows that the movement of the reserved image was started and ended from the period from the timing t0 when the variable display was started to the period of the timing t1. It should be noted that the movement of the reserved image may be started and ended within this period. This point is the same in the modified examples 01 to 07 shown in FIG. 432 (b).
FIG. 431 (a) shows a state in which the transfer of the reserved image from the first reserved display area to the reserved display area is completed before the display of the background hidden image A starts.

FIG. 432 (b) shows a modified example of the period during which the reserved image is moved.
Modification 01 shows that the movement of the reserved image is started and ended in the period from the timing t1 to the timing t2.
Modification 02 shows that the movement of the reserved image is started and ended in the period from the timing t2 to the timing t3.
Modification 03 shows that the movement of the reserved image is started and ended in the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4.
Modification 04 shows that the movement of the reserved image is started and ended in the period from the timing t4 to the timing t5.
Modification 05 shows that the movement of the reserved image is started and ended in the period from the timing t5 to the timing t6.
Modification 06 shows that the movement of the reserved image is started and ended in the period from the timing t6 to the timing t7.
Modification 07 shows that the movement of the reserved image is started and ended in the period from the timing t7 to the timing t8.

In the modified examples 01 to 07, it is shown that the start and end of the movement of the reserved image is performed over 1 second within the period from the timing t1 to the timing t8, but within the period from the timing t1 to the timing t8. The movement of the reserved image may be started at a predetermined timing, and the movement of the reserved image may be finished at a predetermined timing. Further, the time required to move the reserved image is not limited to 1 second, and may be shorter than 1 second or longer than 1 second.
For example, the movement of the reserved image may be started at the timing t1 and the movement of the reserved image may be ended at the timing t7. Alternatively, the movement of the reserved image may be started at the timing t6 and the movement of the reserved image may be ended at the timing t8.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to move the reserved image during the execution of the normal background image switching effect. On the other hand, the reserved image is not moved during the "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach" effect, and the position of the reserved image does not change before and after the reach effect.

An embodiment of displaying a strip-shaped look-ahead effect image shown with reference to FIG. 402 may be adopted in the present embodiment.
For example, after executing the normal background image switching effect, the display of the strip-shaped look-ahead effect image may be started based on the look-ahead result. Alternatively, the normal background image switching effect may be executed to change the normal background image while the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is displayed.
On the other hand, when the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is already displayed, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player who has a high expectation for a big hit from displaying an excessive effect by displaying the band-shaped look-ahead effect image.
A hold image (for example, a green or red hold image) having a higher expectation than a white hold image, which is a normal hold image, is displayed in the hold display area, the first hold display area to the fourth hold display area. Similarly, the normal background image switching effect may not be executed, and the same effect is obtained in this case as well.

The time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the start of the change of the normal background image (for example, the time until the display of the background concealed image is started) is from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It should be shorter than the time it takes for the special reach ("Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") to start.
Further, the time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the change of the normal background image (for example, the time until the display of the background concealed image ends) is after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. It should be shorter than the time it takes for the special reach ("Giant Tank Reach" or "Enemy Tank Destruction Reach") to start.
In addition, after the switching of the normal background image is completed and the display of the background concealed image is completed, the background concealed image is displayed at the start of the special reach ("giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach") after a predetermined time has elapsed. It should be configured so that can be started.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused between the switching of the normal background image and the switching of the background image at the time of special reach.

In the normal background image switching effect, an embodiment of displaying a background concealed image consisting of a huge bomb character or the like is shown, but a plurality of effect patterns can be executed as a normal background image switching effect, and one of the effect patterns is It may be executed. For example, instead of a huge bomb character, a huge tank may be displayed so that the normal background image can be switched.
In addition, the degree of expectation for the special lottery result may not be shown by executing the normal background image switching effect. That is, the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the special lottery result during the variable display. Specifically, in the next variation display in which the special reach is lost, the normal background image switching effect may be executed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/3). In addition, in the variation display after non-reach loss in FIG. 394 (a) and the variation display after reach loss (without background switching) shown in FIG. 394 (b), the normal background image switching effect is executed with a predetermined probability. May be good. In this case, in the next variation display where the special reach is lost, a predetermined probability (for example, 1/30 probability) lower than the probability of executing the normal background image switching effect (for example, 1/3 probability). You may also execute the normal background image switching effect with.
On the other hand, by executing the normal background image switching effect, the jackpot expectation degree for the changing decorative pattern may be shown. For example, when another normal background image is displayed instead of the normal background image A or the normal background image B, the degree of expectation is higher than when the normal background image A or the normal background image B is displayed. It is good to be. In this case, it is preferable that the degree of expectation indicated by switching the background image is lower than the degree of expectation indicated by the occurrence of special reach.

A plurality of effect patterns for the normal background image switching effect may be provided. For example, a plurality of displayed character types and color modes may be provided. In addition, different expectations for jackpots may be shown for each production pattern. Further, one of the modifications shown in FIG. 430 may be appropriately adopted for each effect pattern, and the first to third periods may be different.
For example, the length of the third period in the normal background image switching effect may be different depending on the type and color of the displayed character. Further, at this time, different expectations may be shown depending on the type and color of the displayed character.

In the production examples of the "giant tank reach" effect and the "enemy tank destruction reach" effect shown with reference to FIGS. 416 and 397, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, and the normal background image A is displayed even after the background concealed image ends. Although the background image A was displayed again, the background image B may be switched to the normal background image B instead of the normal background image A at the timing when the background hidden image C is displayed. The background image may be switched without fail, or the original normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability and another normal background image may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the effect example of the background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of fluctuation, and the normal background image A is displayed at the timing when the background concealed image C is displayed. A normal background image different from the normal background image (normal background image B in the present embodiment) is displayed. It should be noted that the normal background image A may be continuously displayed after the background concealed image is finished. In this case, the background image switching effect can be given unexpectedness.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B may be displayed from the beginning at the timing when the display of the background concealed image C is completed. Alternatively, the background hidden image is displayed in the situation where the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is displayed, the visibility of the normal background moving image A or the normal background moving image B is lowered, and the background hidden image is deleted. When the visibility of the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B is increased during the period, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed from the beginning even when the period for erasing the background hidden image has come. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are continuously displayed without doing so, and the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B are displayed from the beginning even after the period for erasing the background hidden image is over. The normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

As described above, in the effect of switching the normal background image, the display in which the visibility of the normal background image is gradually increased (hereinafter, may be referred to as “special display E”) is performed in the third period.

Hereinafter, the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 420 and the like will be compared with the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 429 and the like. In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 420 and the like, the background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking is displayed at the end of right-handed striking, and the background image is switched. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 429 and the like, the background image is switched at the start of the change of the decorative symbol.

The period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of right-handed stroke (third period) may be longer than the period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect (third period). ..
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is longer than the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 430.

Even if the period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of right-handed stroke (third period) and the period in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (third period) are the same length. good.
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430.

The period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see at the end of right-handed stroke (third period) may be shorter than the period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect (third period). ..
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430.

The period after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of right-handed stroke (fourth period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (fourth period). It may be longer than the period).

The period after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of right-handed stroke (fourth period) and the period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (fourth period). Period) may be the same length.

The period after the visibility of the background image is restored at the end of right-handed stroke (fourth period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (fourth period). It may be shorter than the period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 422 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430.

In the effect example at the end of right-handed striking shown with reference to FIG. 421 and the like, the normal background image C is displayed during right-handed striking, and the normal background image A is displayed after the display of the background concealed image is completed. However, the normal background image C may be displayed. For example, the normal background image A may be displayed with a predetermined probability, and the normal background image C may be displayed with a predetermined probability.
On the other hand, in the production example of the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431, the normal background image A is displayed at the start of fluctuation, and the normal background image is displayed at the timing when the background concealed image C is displayed. A normal background image different from A (normal background image B in this embodiment) is displayed. It should be noted that the normal background image A may be displayed even after the background concealed image is finished. In this case, the background image switching effect can be given unexpectedness.

Instead of the normal background image A and the normal background image B, the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
Further, instead of the normal background image C, the normal background moving image C which is displayed in a moving manner like the normal background moving image A and the normal background moving image B may be displayed.
The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be displayed from the beginning at the end of right-handed striking or at the timing when the display of the background concealed image C in the normal background image switching effect is completed. Alternatively, the background hidden image is displayed in the situation where the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C are displayed, the visibility of the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C is lowered, and the background hidden image is deleted. When the visibility of the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C is increased during the period, the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C are displayed from the beginning even when the period for erasing the background concealed image comes. The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C are continuously displayed without doing so, and the normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C are displayed from the beginning even after the period for erasing the background concealed image ends. The normal background moving image A to the normal background moving image C may be continuously displayed without being displayed.

When the right-handed state ends and the normal state is reached, the background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking is displayed. It is preferable to display the reserved image (white reserved image).
Further, during the period (third period) in which the background concealed image at the end of right-handed striking is displayed at the end of the right-handed striking state and the normal background image A and the normal background image B are gradually easily visible (third period), other reserved images are reserved. It is good not to change it to the image.

On the other hand, as for the reserved image in the normal background image switching effect, the reserved image may be moved while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed (first period to third period). Further, while displaying the background concealed images A to E, it may be possible to change the mode of the reserved image or the reserved image to a reserved image having a higher expectation. Alternatively, it may be prohibited to change the reserved image or the reserved image while the background hidden images A to E are being displayed.

As described above, in the third period at the end of the advantageous state, the display (“special display C”) in which the visibility of the normal background image is gradually increased is performed. Further, in the third period of the effect of switching the normal background image, the display (“special display E”) in which the visibility of the normal background image is gradually increased is performed.

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, an effect indicating the degree of expectation that the result of the special lottery is a big hit may be executed. Hereinafter, an embodiment in which it is possible to execute a dialogue advance notice effect for displaying a dialogue advance notice image will be described.

First, the dialogue preview image displayed in the dialogue preview production in the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 433 shows the serif advance notice image A to the serif advance notice image E displayed in the serif advance notice effect of the present embodiment.
The display priority of the dialogue preview image A to the dialogue preview image E is higher than that of the decorative pattern or the reserved image, and the dialogue preview image A to the dialogue preview image E is displayed on the front side of these images.
The dialogue preview image consists of a bomb character (white image) located in the center, dialogue (white image) consisting of four Chinese characters "bomb boy", and other areas (green background image). The background image referred to here is merely a background image for convenience in comparison with the image of the bomb character and the dialogue image.
The green background area of the dialogue preview image A and the dialogue preview image E has high transparency, the green background region of the dialogue preview image B and the dialogue preview image D has low transparency, and the green region of the dialogue preview image C has the highest transparency. It is low and the background image is invisible.
The dialogue preview image A has the Chinese character "bomb", the dialogue preview image B has the Chinese character "bomb", and the dialogue preview images C to the dialogue preview image E have the Chinese character "bomb boy". ..

FIG. 434 shows a time chart showing an example of the dialogue notice effect. Further, FIG. 435 shows a display example in which the serif preview image is displayed at a predetermined timing.

As shown in the time chart of FIG. 434 (a), the variable display of the decorative symbol is started at the timing t0. FIG. 435 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the background image A is usually displayed as the background image.
Next, in the period from timing t10 to timing t11, the dialogue preview image A is displayed. FIG. 435 (b) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in the period from timing t11 to timing t12, the dialogue preview image B is displayed. FIG. 435 (c) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in the period from timing t12 to timing t14, the dialogue preview image C is displayed. FIG. 435 (d) shows the display state at this time.
Next, in the period from timing t14 to timing t15, the dialogue preview image D is displayed. FIG. 435 (e) shows the display state at this time.
Then, in the period from the timing t15 to the timing t16, the dialogue preview image E is displayed. FIG. 435 (f) shows the display state at this time.
At the timing t16, the series of display of the dialogue preview image ends. FIG. 435 (g) shows a display state of a predetermined timing in the period from the timing t16 to the timing t20 (the period from the temporary stop of the left decorative symbol).
The left decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed at the timing t20, the right decorative symbol is displayed at the timing t25, and the middle decorative symbol is displayed at the timing t30.
At timing t31, all decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, indicating whether or not the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In this way, even in the dialogue preview production, the background image gradually becomes difficult to see due to the display of the dialogue preview image (first period), the background image becomes invisible (second period), and the background image gradually changes. It has a period (third period) in which it becomes easier to see, and a period (fourth period) in which the visibility of the background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. That is, the dialogue preview image also functions like the background concealed image.

When the dialogue notice effect for displaying a series of dialogue advance notice images is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern in this way, the expectation of a big hit is higher than the case where the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed. Whether or not to execute the dialogue notice effect is decided based on the special lottery result.
In some situations during the execution of the dialogue advance notice effect, the normal background image becomes invisible, but the normal background image is not changed to another normal background image before and after the execution of the dialogue advance notice effect. , The same normal background image is displayed.

It is possible to execute a plurality of dialogue advance notice effects having different display modes, and it may be configured so that any of the dialogue advance notice effects is executed. For example, it is preferable to use a dialogue preview image in which the content of the dialogue, the type of the character, the color of the background area, and the like are different. Further, the same expectation may be suggested or different expectations may be suggested depending on the type of dialogue advance notice effect.
For example, when the color of the background area is red, the degree of expectation may be higher than when the color of the background area is green.

The example of displaying the dialogue and the character has been given, but these are only examples, and may be configured to be feasible as a preview effect without displaying one of the dialogue or the character. Alternatively, instead of the dialogue or the character, another image may be displayed as a warning effect.

Although it has been shown that the dialogue advance notice effect is performed by displaying the dialogue advance notice image A to the dialogue advance notice image E, the dialogue advance notice effect may be performed by displaying the moving image. For example, the character or dialogue may be moved or the transparency change may be smoothed.

Comparing the normal background image switching effect in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 429 and the like and the dialogue advance notice effect in the present embodiment, the time for executing the dialogue advance notice effect is longer than that in the normal background image switching effect. good.
For example, the execution time of the effect is longer in the modified example 01 of the dialogue advance notice effect than in the modified example 02 of the normal background image switching effect.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the expectation of the big hit indicated by the dialogue notice effect. On the other hand, the expected degree of big hit is basically not shown by the execution of the normal background image switching effect. Therefore, even if the time for executing the effect is relatively shortened, the influence of the player overlooking the degree of expectation can be reduced.

The period in which the background image is invisible (second period) in the dialogue advance notice effect may be shorter than the period in which the background image is invisible (second period) in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 04 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the second period in the modified example 03 shown in FIG. 430.

The period in which the background image is invisible (second period) in the dialogue advance notice effect and the period in which the background image is invisible in the normal background image switching effect (second period) may be the same length.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 434 is the same as the length of the second period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430.

The period in which the background image is invisible (second period) in the dialogue advance notice effect may be longer than the period in which the background image is invisible (second period) in the normal background image switching effect.
For example, the length of the second period in the modified example 03 shown in FIG. 434 is longer than the length of the second period in the modified example 04 shown in FIG. 430.

The period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the dialogue advance notice effect (third period) may be shorter than the period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect (third period).
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430.

The period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the dialogue notice effect (third period) and the period in which the background image in the normal background image switching effect gradually becomes easier to see (third period) may be the same length. ..
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 434 is the same as the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430.

The period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the dialogue advance notice effect (third period) may be longer than the period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see in the normal background image switching effect (third period).
For example, the length of the third period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 434 is longer than the length of the third period in the modified example 02 shown in FIG. 430.

The period after the dialogue notice effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period). It may be shorter than the 4th period).
For example, the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 434 is shorter than the length of the fourth period in the modified example 01 shown in FIG. 430.

The period after the dialogue notice effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period). The length may be the same as that of the fourth period).

The period after the dialogue notice effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period), and the period after the normal background image switching effect is completed and the visibility of the background image is restored (4th period). It may be longer than the 4th period).

Both the dialogue advance notice effect shown in FIG. 434 and the normal background image switching effect shown in FIG. 430 may be configured to be feasible during one change of the decorative symbol.
For example, the normal background image switching effect may be executed during the period from timing t1 to timing t7, and the dialogue advance notice effect may be executed during the period from timing t10 to timing t16. Further, the modified examples in both embodiments may be combined and executed as appropriate.
It should be noted that the dialogue advance notice effect is not executed before the normal background image switching effect, and conversely, the dialogue advance notice effect may be executed after the normal background image switching effect. Further, it may be configured so that the normal background image switching effect may be executed regardless of the presence or absence of the dialogue advance notice effect.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the like, an example of the effect in which the visibility of the reserved image and the reserved image is reduced during the dialogue advance notice effect is shown, but the same as the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 401. It may be configured so that the visibility of the reserved image or the reserved image is not deteriorated. For example, the display priority of the reserved image or the reserved image may be set higher than the display priority of the dialogue preview image.

In both the dialogue notice effect shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 430, the hold image or the hold image becomes difficult to see or invisible during the effect execution. You may do it.
Alternatively, in both the dialogue advance notice effect shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 430, the reserved image or the reserved image is difficult to see even while the effect is being executed. It may be possible to maintain a state in which it is easy to see as before the effect is executed without becoming invisible.

Alternatively, in the dialogue advance notice effect shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the like, the reserved image and the reserved image are made difficult to see or invisible during the effect execution, and the normal background image switching shown with reference to FIG. 430 is switched. In the effect, the reserved image or the reserved image may not be difficult or invisible even during the effect execution, and the easily visible state may be maintained as before the effect is executed.
On the contrary, in the dialogue advance notice effect shown with reference to FIG. 434 and the like, the reserved image and the reserved image are not difficult or invisible even during the effect execution, and are as easy to see as before the effect execution. In the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 430, the reserved image or the reserved image may be difficult to see or invisible during the execution of the effect.

Even when the band-shaped look-ahead effect image shown with reference to FIG. 402 is displayed, it is preferable to configure the dialogue advance notice effect to be feasible.
On the other hand, when the band-shaped look-ahead effect image is displayed, it is preferable to configure it so that the background image switching effect is not normally executed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player's expectation is confused by executing the normal background image switching effect that does not necessarily indicate the expectation.

It is advisable to increase the degree of expectation when only the dialogue advance notice effect is executed, when only the dialogue advance notice effect is executed and when only the normal background image switching effect is executed.
Alternatively, the expected degree may be the same when both the dialogue advance notice effect and the normal background image switching effect are executed and when only the dialogue advance notice effect is executed.

Since the background image is not usually changed before and after the execution of the dialogue notice effect, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort even if the first period or the third period of the dialogue advance notice effect is shortened or the second period is lengthened.
Further, since the background image is not usually changed, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort even if the time until the end of the change of the decorative pattern is short.

The dialogue advance notice effect may be executed as a look-ahead effect based on the hold look-ahead. For example, in the display example shown in FIG. 435 (a), the number of holds is 2, and the hold image is displayed in the second hold display area, but corresponds to the hold image displayed in the second hold display area. The pre-reading of the hold may be performed, and the dialogue preview image may be displayed at each of the three variable displays until the hold image displayed in the second hold display area becomes the hold image. In this way, the dialogue notice effect may be displayed over a plurality of variable displays. In addition, it is preferable to show a predetermined degree of expectation depending on the display mode of the dialogue preview image.

On the other hand, the normal background image switching effect is not executed based on the look-ahead effect. Further, as described above, it may be executed in the next variable display resulting in the loss.
In addition, at the timing when the fluctuation display resulting in the loss is stopped and displayed, if there is a hold, the normal background image switching effect is executed with a predetermined probability, and if there is no hold, a start prize is generated. Even if the next variation display is started, the normal background image switching effect may not be performed.
Alternatively, a specific reach effect (a reach effect in which a special reach background image is displayed instead of the normal background image, such as the above-mentioned "giant tank reach" and "enemy tank destruction reach") is executed, and the loss is lost. On condition that the result is obtained, it is internally determined to execute the normal background image switching effect in the next variation display with a predetermined probability (including executing 100% of the normal background image switching effect). The background image switching effect may be executed based on the determined content when the next variable display is executed. As a specific mounting mode, it can be realized by turning on or off the normal background image switching effect execution flag provided in the predetermined storage area of the peripheral control board 1510. According to such a configuration, even if the number of holdings is 0, by turning on the normal background image switching effect execution flag, a start winning prize is generated and the next variable display is performed. In addition, the normal background image switching effect can be executed. The normal background image switching effect execution flag should be kept on until the next variable display is started.
Even if it is decided to execute the normal background image switching effect, the normal background image switching effect is not executed in the next variable display, provided that the start winning is not generated for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). The decision content may be changed (normally, the background image switching effect execution flag is turned off). At the same time as the lapse of a predetermined period, the display area may shift to the demo image display state in which the pachinko machine 1 is introduced. Even after shifting to the demo image display state, the normal background image switching effect execution flag is turned on, and the normal background image switching effect is executed when the start prize occurs in the demo image display state and the variable display is performed. , The normal background image switching effect execution flag may be turned off.

In this way, while the serif preview image is being erased, the display is usually performed so that the visibility of the background image is gradually increased (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special display F").

Although a plurality of embodiments and modifications thereof have been described with reference to FIGS. 388 to 435, all of the plurality of embodiments and modifications described can be executed in one pachinko machine 1. May be. Alternatively, some of the plurality of embodiments and modifications described may be feasible in one pachinko machine 1.

Further, before the start of the game, the player or the clerk of the game store decides which of the plurality of modes in the embodiments and modifications shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 435 is to be executed. It may be possible to select in advance. For example, the player himself may be able to set the length of the first period to the fourth period in each of the effects shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 435 on the customization screen or the like.
With such a configuration, the player can set so that the game effect of the mode suitable for his / her taste is executed. In addition, the clerk of the game store can be set so that the game effect suitable for the customer base of the game store is executed. As a result, the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

In each effect according to the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 388 to 435, the first period in which the visibility of the background image is lowered by starting the display of the image that hides the background image, and the visibility of the background image. It has a second period in which is the lowest and a third period in which the visibility of the background image is high. Further, after each effect is completed, the display of the image that hides the background image is completed, the visibility of the background image is restored, and the decorative pattern is stopped, which is the fourth period.

An example is shown in which the display of the background concealed image makes all the background images invisible in the second period, but the background concealed image is not completely invisible, as compared with the case where the background concealed image is not displayed. It may be difficult to see.
In this case, it is preferable to set the transparency of the background concealed image to be the lowest in the second period.
Alternatively, the size of the background concealed image is not the same as the display area, but is smaller than the display area so that even if the background concealed image is displayed, a part of the background image can be visually recognized. May be good. In this case, it is desirable that the ratio of the background concealed image to the display area is 50% or more or 2/3 or more.
The dialogue preview image can be similarly deformed.
On the other hand, the pseudo-ream number display image and the resurrection effect image (revival effect character and its dialogue) are originally smaller in size than the display area. The ratio of these images to the display area is preferably less than 50%.

In the background image switching effect at the start of the special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke, the pseudo-continuous effect, the normal background image switching effect, and the dialogue advancement effect that is part of the advance notice effect. It was shown that there are 1 to 4 periods, but the length of at least 1 of each period (1st to 4th periods) in each production is longer than the length of each state described below. It may be shortened or it may be shortened.

The special reach decorative design swings up and down in a predetermined cycle during the special reach, but each effect (background image switching effect at the start of the special reach, background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, background image at the end of right-handed hitting). Each period (1st to 4th period) in each period (1st to 4th period) in the switching effect, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue notice effect) may be longer or shorter than this cycle. You may. Alternatively, even if it is lengthened, it may be less than two cycles.
For example, the length of the first period in the background image switching effect at the start of the special reach is made longer than the predetermined cycle of the special reach decoration symbol displayed at the predetermined cycle during the special reach, so that the special reach decoration during the special reach is performed. Since the predetermined cycle of the design is relatively long (because it looks rushed if it is shortened and it is not possible to concentrate on the reach effect), it is special for a longer time by setting the first period in the background image switching effect at the start of the special reach. It has the effect of being able to provide the joy of reaching reach for a long time.
Further, for example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made shorter than the predetermined cycle of the special reach decorative symbol displayed at the predetermined cycle during the special reach, so that the fluctuation can be obtained. It has the effect of ending the feeling of expectation at an early stage and giving expectations to the next fluctuation (the ability to switch feelings quickly).
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

The reserved image or the reserved image may be used as a moving image and repeatedly displayed at a predetermined cycle. At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of the period (1st to 4th period), it may be longer or shorter than this cycle. Alternatively, even if it is lengthened, it may be less than two cycles.
For example, the length of the third period in the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach of the special reach that does not display the reserved image or the reserved image during the special reach is a predetermined period of the reserved image or the reserved image displayed as a moving image. By making it longer than that, since the reserved image and the reserved image are displayed for one cycle or more in the third period, it is possible to impress the player with the existence of the reserved image, and the player is instructed to operate the handle 302. It has the effect of reminding you.
For example, the length of the second period in the normal background image switching effect or the dialogue advance notice effect is made shorter than the predetermined period of the reserved image or the reserved image displayed as the moving image, so that the moving of the reserved image or the reserved image is performed. There is an effect that the visibility of a typical staging display is secured to a certain extent.
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

With reference to FIGS. 306 and 307, it is shown that there are four gaming states (normal state, time saving state, non-time saving probability change state, probability change state) other than the jackpot state. In these four gaming states, the special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, it is possible to display the decorative design in a variable manner at the same time as the special design.
In the normal state, the variable display is performed with a plurality of staging patterns having different variable display times (time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the decorative symbol), but compared with the shortest variable display time among them. , Each period (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of the first period to the fourth period), it may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the time saving state, the variable display is performed with a plurality of staging patterns having different variable display times (time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the decorative symbol), but compared with the shortest variable display time among them. , Each period (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of the first period to the fourth period), it may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the non-time saving probability variation state, the variation display is performed with a plurality of staging patterns having different variation display times (time from the start of the variation display to the stop display of the decorative symbol), but the variation display time is compared with the shortest variation display time. Then, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of the period (1st to 4th period), it may be longer or shorter than this length.
In the probabilistic state, the variable display is performed with a plurality of staging patterns having different variable display times (time from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the decorative symbol), but compared with the shortest variable display time among them. , Each period (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of the first period to the fourth period), it may be longer or shorter than this length.

The shortest time of the variable display time may be different depending on the number of holdings at the start of the variable of the decorative symbol. For example, the larger the number of holds, the shorter the shortest variable display time, and the smaller the number of holds, the longer the shortest variable display time.
At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching at the end of special reach) is compared with the shortest variation display time of the variation display time of the effect pattern that can occur corresponding to each hold number. For each period (1st to 4th period) in the production, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect), the length is longer than this. It may be long or short.

The effect pattern of the decorative pattern and the variable display time of the decorative pattern are also determined according to the game state and the number of holdings, but each effect (special) is compared with the shortest time of the variable display time that the pachinko machine 1 can take. Background image switching effect at the start of reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of 4 periods), it may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke (the fourth period is the period immediately after the display of a different type of decorative pattern is started). By making the length shorter than the shortest fluctuation display time of the staging patterns, there is an effect that the player does not misunderstand that a new fluctuation display has started and stopped.
For example, by making the length of the fourth period of the normal background image switching effect and the dialogue notice effect longer than the shortest variable display time of the effect patterns, the effect is produced after the normal background image switching effect and the dialogue advance notice effect are executed. There is an effect that it is possible to take sufficient time to develop (for example, to develop into a special reach or a pseudo-continuous production).
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

Although the embodiment of the pseudo-ream effect is shown with reference to FIGS. 425 to 428, a display for the player to recognize that the pseudo-ream effect has occurred (“continuation” as shown in FIG. 427 (b), etc. Compared to the time when the special symbol is displayed), each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal Each period (1st to 4th periods) in the background image switching effect and the dialogue notice effect) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right-handed stroke is shorter than the display that makes the player recognize that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. Since the transition is made promptly in the second period, it is possible to clarify the distinction between the pseudo-ream effect and the pseudo-ream effect, and the pseudo-ream effect has occurred. It may be difficult to recognize whether the production of the above has occurred), which has the effect of making it difficult for the player to make a mistake.
For example, the length of the fourth period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach and the background image switching effect at the end of the right-handed stroke is longer than the display that makes the player recognize that the pseudo-continuous effect has occurred. It is stopped and displayed as it is with the combination of the decorative symbols displayed temporarily (in the case of pseudo-continuous production, the re-variation display after temporary stop is always performed, but the background image switching effect at the end of special reach and the background at the end of right-handed stroke In the fourth period of the image switching effect, the player is made to clearly recognize that the decorative pattern displayed as a temporary stop is stopped and displayed as it is, except when the revival effect is executed and the result of success is obtained. It has the effect of giving up on variable display.
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

Compared to the shortest firing interval of the game ball fired in the game area, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-ream For each period (1st to 4th periods) in the staging, normal background image switching staging, and dialogue notice staging), it may be longer or shorter than the shortest firing interval. For example, when 100 game balls can be fired in 60 seconds, the shortest firing interval of the game balls is 0.6 seconds.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is shorter than the shortest firing interval of the game ball, which has the following effects.
When a special reach with high expectation of a big hit (for example, "giant tank reach" or "enemy tank destruction reach") is started, there are some players who have abundant game experience to stop the launch of the game ball. When the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, the player who has abundant game experience guesses that the result of the special lottery is a loss and operates the handle 302 to operate the game ball. Resume firing. In this case, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made shorter than the shortest firing interval of the game ball to restart the firing of the game ball, and the second game ball is fired. At that time, the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is completely unrecognizable, so the player remembers the conviction that the result of the special lottery was lost because he guessed it was lost. From the second game ball, you will be able to concentrate your attention on the whereabouts of the game ball (whether or not you will win the start). That is, it is possible to minimize the number of game balls that cannot be concentrated while smoothly changing the background.
For example, the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made longer than the shortest firing interval of the game ball, which has the following effects.
As described above, a player with abundant game experience operates the handle 302 by assuming that the result of the special lottery is lost when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started. Resume the launch of the game ball. At this time, since the special reach background image displayed during the special reach is displayed in the display area and can be recognized by the player, both the whereabouts of the launched game ball and the special reach background image are both concerned. Will be. Even if you are an experienced player, you can see the special reach background image that you have been watching for a long time in the hope that it will be a big hit, even if you are an experienced player. Will be. Due to such circumstances, it is expected that even an experienced player will be distracted by the display contents of the display area and will be upset, and it will be difficult to accurately launch the game ball. Experience. Therefore, the probability that the game ball launched in the first period will start and win a prize is lower than when the player accurately launches the game ball. In this way, by making the length of the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest firing interval of the game ball, it is possible to create a longer state of the player whose probability of winning a start is reduced. It can contribute to the sales of amusement stores.
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

After the variable display of the decorative pattern ends without holding and the predetermined waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the display area is displayed in the demo image display state where the image introducing the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. You may make the transition to. At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect) rather than the predetermined waiting time. , Each period (1st to 4th period) in the dialogue notice production) may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is shorter than the predetermined waiting time for shifting to the demo image display state, which has the following effects.
Even if the player does not necessarily have a lot of experience in playing, there are some players who stop launching the game ball during the special reach. However, a player who does not necessarily have abundant game experience, if a special reach is executed and a result of a loss is obtained even though it is strongly expected to result in a big hit, "Is it really? In many cases, I was shocked and couldn't recover for a while, and I often couldn't restart the launch of the game ball. You will be able to switch). In this way, if the screen is changed (transition to the demo production state) when the situation cannot be recovered for a while, the production (missing fact) that is stopped for the player who does not necessarily have abundant game experience It may seem like an exaggerated effect (this tendency is remarkable in pachinko machines that use a revival effect). Therefore, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the predetermined waiting time for shifting to the demo image display state, the player who does not necessarily have abundant game experience like this You can take care of your mind.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made longer than the predetermined waiting time, which has the following effects.
Players who do not necessarily have abundant game experience may be in a situation where they cannot recover for a while if the result of the special lottery results in a loss, because they are shocked by a big shock in their hearts. many. By promptly shifting to the demo image display state in such a shocked situation and causing a change in the screen, it is possible to make the person feel "Oh, maybe a revival effect has occurred !?" ( Such a tendency is remarkable in pachinko machines that adopt the revival effect. In addition, experienced players are calm under such circumstances). In this way, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the predetermined waiting time for transitioning to the demo image display state, for the player who does not necessarily have abundant gaming experience. It can give a feeling of exhilaration and motivate the player to restart the launch of the game ball.
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

In addition, when the game ball continuously wins a prize at a winning opening such as a start opening or a large winning opening that pays out when a prize is won by driving a payout motor 834, the payout corresponding to the first prize is made. After that, the payout corresponding to the second prize is made, but after the payout corresponding to the first prize is made, it takes a predetermined time (for example) to make the payout corresponding to the second prize. 1 second), but compared to this predetermined time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, Each period (1st to 4th periods) in the pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, and dialogue notice effect) may be longer or shorter than this time. ..
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made shorter than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, which has the following effects.
Since there is a possibility that the revival effect will be executed in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, if the game ball is paid out multiple times in the third period, an event that occurs due to the payout. Being distracted by (the collision sound generated when the game ball collides with the upper plate 321 and the management of the number of game balls existing in the upper plate 321), the revival effect is executed as "Resurrection!" There is a risk that the desire to play will be disturbed and the concentration on the game will be reduced, but the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach will be longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made. By shortening the length, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a situation where the concentration is interrupted. It should be noted that the reason why the payout is to be made once is that the player distrusts the player if he / she does not pay out immediately when he / she wins a prize in a predetermined winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, etc.) in the third period. Because I think.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made longer than the predetermined time until a new payout is made, which has the following effects.
Since the above-mentioned experienced player presumes that the result of the special lottery is lost when the first period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is started, it is natural that the game ball is launched in the third period. Is going. Therefore, it is conceivable that a plurality of game balls may win a prize in a predetermined winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, etc.) in the third period that comes after the first period. Experienced players understand that if a game ball wins in a predetermined winning slot (starting slot, general winning slot, etc.), the game ball will be paid out immediately, and the payout will be made immediately. Otherwise, there is a risk of distrust (such a tendency is caused by the player, for example, by suppressing the output of the variable effect sound or simplifying the display of the display area in the background image switching effect. It is remarkable when it is possible to pay a certain amount of attention to the payout), but the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is set to the specified time until a new payout is made. By making it longer than that, it is possible to prevent such distrust from being felt.
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

When the result of the normal lottery is the result of winning, the second starting port 2004 is opened by driving and moving a movable piece (not shown), and it is possible to enter a game ball that rolls in the game area 5a. After a lapse of a predetermined time, the movable piece is returned to the original position, so that the second starting port 2004 is closed and the game ball rolling in the game area 5a cannot enter the ball. A plurality of different times are set as the time (opening time) from the opening of the second starting port 2004 to the closing by the movement of the movable piece, and the game ball is placed in the second starting port 2004 at any of the opening times. The ball may be allowed to enter, or the second starting port 2004 may generate a state in which the game ball can be entered multiple times for one winning of the ordinary lottery (movable piece). Is realized by driving and moving multiple times). At this time, compared with the shortest time during which the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can enter (opening time in the pattern when the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is only one pattern). , Each period (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of the first period to the fourth period), it may be longer or shorter than this time.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is shorter than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, which has the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image displayed during the special reach. During the period, the background image is usually visually recognized, and it often causes a big shock in my heart, such as "Is it really?", And I cannot recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach shorter than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be achieved. If the start of the third period and the timing at which the second starting port 2004 becomes able to enter the ball are the same, the special reach ends before the second starting port 2004 becomes unable to enter the ball. The third period of the time background image switching effect can be terminated. When the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered, a special symbol lottery is performed when the game ball can be won in the second starting port 2004, so that the game experience is not necessarily abundant. The person operates the handle 302 in order to make the second starting port 2004 win the game ball, and the interest is improved again. When the open state of the second starting port 2004 is completed, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is performed. Since the three periods have ended, it is possible to make people forget that a special reach has occurred and that the result was a loss, and to switch their minds to a new change in the decorative design.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is made longer than the shortest opening time of the second starting port 2004, which has the following effects.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the normal background image is displayed instead of the special reach background image displayed during the special reach. During the period, the background image is usually visually recognized, and it often causes a big shock in my heart, such as "Is it really?", And I cannot recover for a while. In such a situation, by making the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach longer than the shortest opening time of the second start port 2004, for example, the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach can be achieved. If the start of the third period and the timing at which the second start port 2004 is ready to enter the ball are the same, the first before the end of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. (Ii) The starting port 2004 can be made in a state where the ball cannot enter. When the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the ball can be entered, a special symbol lottery is performed when the game ball can be won in the second starting port 2004, so that the game experience is not necessarily abundant. The person operates the handle 302 to win the game ball in the second starting port 2004, and even if the second starting port 2004 cannot win the game ball, the special reach ends. Since the third period of the time-background image switching effect continues, it can be expected that the revival effect will be executed, so that the shock received by the player can be alleviated as a whole.
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIGS. 397 and 416, the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 and the mission button 3700 is set to 3 seconds (only one type of operation valid period), but other operations are performed. As the effect pattern, an effect pattern in which the operation validity period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is longer than 3 seconds or a short effect pattern may be executed.
For example, an effect pattern A in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, 2 seconds and an effect pattern B in which the operation valid period of the attack button 3710 or the mission button 3700 is, for example, 4 seconds may be adopted. In this way, a plurality of operation validity periods may be provided.
At this time, each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect) For each period of the period (first period to fourth period), the operation valid period of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B may be longer. In addition, each period in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect). For each of the (1st to 4th periods), it may be longer than the operation valid period of the effect pattern A and shorter than the operation valid period of the effect pattern B. In addition, each period in each effect (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed hit, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect). Each period of (1st to 4th periods) may be shorter than the operation valid period of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern B.
In the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, an effect (effect pattern A or effect pattern B) in which the operation unit can be operated may be executed. In that case, the effects described below may be executed. Can be expected. Further, when the operation unit can be operated in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the operation valid period does not extend to the fourth period or after the variation display is stopped (that is, the third period). The operation validity period may end within 3 periods), or the 4th period may be deleted. In that case, the effects described below can be expected.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach has a plurality of operation effective times as the operation effective time, and is longer than the shortest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can be expected to display the operation instruction image (display such as "PUSH!") As the revival effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach has a plurality of operation effective times as the operation effective time, and is longer than the longest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can be expected to display the operation instruction image (display such as "PUSH!") As the revival effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach has a plurality of operation effective times as the operation effective time, and is shorter than the shortest operation effective time among the plurality of operation effective times. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it can be recognized that the operation instruction image (display such as "PUSH!") As the revival effect is not displayed. It has the effect of being able to switch feelings to expectations for the display at an early stage.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach has a plurality of operation effective times as the operation effective time, which is longer than one of the plurality of operation effective times, but the other. By making it shorter than the operation valid period of 1, the operation instruction image (display such as "PUSH!") As the revival effect is displayed in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach. It has the effect of making people expect.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach has 1 operation effective time as the operation effective time (only 1 operation effective time), and is longer than the operation effective time. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, the player can be expected to display the operation instruction image (display such as "PUSH!") As the revival effect. be.
For example, the length of the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach has 1 operation effective time as the operation effective time (only 1 operation effective time), and is shorter than the operation effective time. Then, in the third period of the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach, it can be recognized that the operation instruction image (display such as "PUSH!") As the revival effect is not displayed. It has the effect of being able to switch feelings to expectations for the display at an early stage.
Needless to say, the other modified examples also have an effect for each modified example.

By displaying the special display A to the special display F, the degree of expectation for the big hit may be different. Further, in the relationship between the special display of any one of the special display A to the special display F and the special display of any one of the special display A to the special display F, the expectation of one of them may be increased, or both. The expectations may be the same, or one of them may be lower.
Similarly, in the relationship of three or more special displays, even if the expectation of a certain special display is increased, the expectation of a plurality of special displays is the same, or the expectation of a certain special display is lowered. good.

For example, in the case where the special display A is displayed and the case where the special display E is displayed, the degree of expectation may be higher than in the case where the special display B or the special display D is displayed. Further, in the case where the special display A is displayed and the case where the special display E is displayed, the degree of expectation when the special display A is displayed may be increased, or when the special display B is displayed. Expectations may be high.
Further, the degree of expectation when the special display C is displayed may be lower than the special display A or the special display E and higher than the special display B or the special display D. Alternatively, it may be lower than the special display A, the special display B, the special display D, or the special display E.

The light emitting decoration means provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc.) may be made to emit light at the time of executing the special display.
For example, the door frame left side unit 530 or the door frame right side unit 550 may be made to emit light in the light emission patterns A to the light emission patterns F corresponding to the special display A to the special display F. In the relationship between the special display of any one of the special display A to the special display F and the special display of any one of the special display A to the special display F, the emission patterns are different or the same. May be good.
For example, for a display with a high degree of expectation such as special display A and a display indicating that the gaming state is changed such as special display C, a unique light emission pattern is adopted for each, and special display B and special display C are used. , The same light emission pattern may be adopted for the special display E.
In this way, by making the light emission pattern different for each special display, even if the player is looking away without looking at the display area, the door frame left side unit 530, the door frame right side unit 550, etc. By entering the field of view, it is possible to recognize which special display has been executed.
As a method of making the light emission pattern different for each special display, a method such as lighting or blinking, different light emission colors and different light emission times may be adopted.

A light emission pattern corresponding to the color of the image used for the special display may be adopted. For example, when a black background concealed image is displayed, the brightness of the door frame left side unit 530 or the door frame right side unit 550 may be reduced or turned off. When the white background concealed image is displayed, the door frame left side unit 530 or the door frame right side unit 550 may be made to emit white light. When other background concealed images are displayed, the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 may be made to emit light in the color of the displayed character, or the background area of the displayed background concealed image may be emitted. It may be made to emit light in the color of.

The light emission pattern corresponding to each special display may end earlier than the special display, may end at the same time as the special display, or may end later than the special display.
After the light emission pattern corresponding to each special display is completed, the light may be turned off or the light may be emitted in a light emission mode suitable for the BGM.

Although the embodiment of the "giant tank reach" is shown with reference to FIG. 416 and the like, a plurality of types of "giant tank reach" having different display modes and operating units of enemy tanks may be configured to be executable. .. Further, the degree of expectation of the "giant tank reach" may be different depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Even in this case, the expectation of "giant tank reach" should be higher than the expectation of "enemy tank destruction reach". Further, even in the "giant tank reach" of different modes as described above, it is preferable to switch and display the background image in the same mode. For example, in a plurality of "giant tank reach", a background concealed image composed of a bomb character or the like may be displayed and the background image may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

Although the embodiment of the "enemy tank destruction reach" is shown with reference to FIG. 397 and the like, a plurality of types of "enemy tank destruction reach" having different display modes and operating units of the enemy tank are configured to be executable. May be good. Further, the degree of expectation of "enemy tank destruction reach" may be different depending on the display mode of the enemy tank and the display unit to be operated. Even in this case, the degree of expectation should be lower than that of the "giant tank reach". Further, even in the "enemy tank destruction reach" of different modes as described above, it is preferable to switch and display the background image in the same mode. For example, in a plurality of "giant tank reach", a black background concealed image may be displayed and the background image may be switched and displayed in the same manner.

In the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 397, a simulated image imitating the operation unit is displayed during the operation valid period to suggest the special lottery result, but the background image switching effect at the end of the special reach is produced. During the execution, the operation was not valid and the simulated image imitating the operation unit was not displayed.
Similarly, in each of the other effects (background image switching effect at the start of special reach, background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke, pseudo-continuous effect, normal background image switching effect, dialogue notice effect), the first to third periods are the same. In the above, it is preferable not to set the operation valid period and not to display the simulated image imitating the operation unit (that is, the simulated image imitating the operation unit is not always displayed).
In this way, in the first to third periods of all reach effects, it is preferable not to set the operation valid period and not to display a simulated image imitating the operation unit (that is, imitating the operation unit). The simulated image is not always displayed).
It should be noted that the operation valid period is not set, and the period from the first period to the third period is set so that the simulated image imitating the operation unit is not displayed (that is, the simulated image imitating the operation unit is not always displayed). The period is merely an example, and may include a fourth period, any one of the first to fourth periods, or any plurality of periods in these periods.
With such a configuration, the display content of the display area becomes simple, and the player may not be aware that the operation reception of the operation unit is valid, and the operation unit may not be operated. Can be prevented.

Although the variable effect sound is output during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the output of the variable effect sound may be suppressed in the special display A to the special display F.
Hereinafter, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 416 and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (a). Similarly, an embodiment obtained by modifying the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 434 will be described with reference to FIG. 436 (b).
In the effect example shown in FIG. 436 (a), the variable effect sound is suppressed during the period from the timing t13 to the timing t19 when the background concealed image is displayed. Further, the variable staging sound is suppressed during the period from the timing t36 to the timing t42.
In the effect example shown in FIG. 436 (b), the variable effect sound is not suppressed even during the period from the timing t10 to the timing t16 when the background concealed image is displayed, and the output in the normal state is maintained.
As described above, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 436 (a), the first period, which is a period in which the background image gradually becomes difficult to see, and the second period, which is a period in which the background image is invisible, In the third period, which is the period in which the background image gradually becomes easier to see, the output state of the variable effect sound is suppressed.
On the other hand, in the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 436 (b), the output state of the fluctuating staging sound of the fluctuating staging sound is not suppressed but maintained in the normal state even in the first to third periods. Was.
When the background image is switched in this way, the output state of the variable effect sound may be suppressed, and when the background image is not switched, the normal state may be maintained as the output state of the variable effect sound.

An example in which the first to third periods are set to the suppressed state is shown, but among the first to third periods, the fourth period, which is the period until the visibility of the background image is restored and the decorative pattern is stopped. The variable effect sound may be suppressed for at least one period of the above. After the fourth period, the suppressed state may be maintained even during the period when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the normal state may be set at the timing when the next variable display is started.

The suppressed state may be a state in which the volume of the variable staging sound is output at a lower volume than in the normal state. Alternatively, the variable production sound may not be output. In this case, although the variable effect sound is internally reproduced, the variable effect sound may not be output from the speaker by internally setting (muting) the output volume to 0. Alternatively, the variation effect sound may not be output from the speaker by ending or interrupting the reproduction of the variation effect sound itself.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 436 (a), the normal state is set from timing t19 to timing t36, but during this period, even if a special variable effect sound corresponding to the type of special reach is output. good. In this case, it is preferable to start the output of the special variable effect sound from the timing t16 during the suppression state or the timing t19 at the end of the suppression state. Further, it is preferable to end the output of the special variable effect sound at the timing t36 at the start of the suppression state and the timing t39 during the suppression state.

Not limited to the embodiment shown with reference to FIG. 416 and the like, the “enemy tank destruction reach” effect shown with reference to FIG. 397 and the background image switching effect at the end of right-handed stroke shown with reference to FIG. 421 and the like. In the pseudo-continuous effect shown with reference to FIG. 425 and the like, and the normal background image switching effect shown with reference to FIG. 430 and the like, the same mode may be adopted to suppress the variable effect sound.

In the embodiment, each technical matter in the structure of the gaming machine may be combined and applied to form the embodiment. Further, each effect example and each technical matter in each effect example may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Further, each technical item in each accessory configuration may be combined and applied to form an embodiment. Further, each of these technical matters may be combined and applied as an embodiment.
Further, one embodiment obtained by modifying an embodiment may be applied to another embodiment obtained by modifying an embodiment to form another embodiment.
Further, a plurality of embodiments that can be conceived by those skilled in the art in this way may be adopted in one gaming machine.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5'Game board 5a Game area 190 Glass unit 530 Door frame left side unit 550 Door frame right side unit 570 Door frame top unit 931 Power supply board 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1100 Game panel 1100a Game panel opening 1110 Panel plate 1110a Obstacle nail through hole 1110b Panel plate back rough surface 1110c Panel plate back 1st rough surface 1110d Panel plate back 2nd rough surface 1110e Panel plate back metal glossy part 1110f Panel board back 1st metal glossy part 1110g Panel board back 2nd metal glossy part 1110h Panel board back bright color visual recognition part 1110i Panel board back 1st bright color visual recognition part 1110j Panel board back 2nd bright color visual recognition part 1110m Panel board front decoration Opaque thin layer part 1110p Panel plate boss insertion hole 1110q Panel plate screw insertion hole 1117 Panel convex part 1200 Obstacle nail 1201 Obstacle nail 1201a Obstacle nail head 1201b Obstacle nail 1st body part 1201c Obstacle nail spiral shape part 1201d Obstacle nail 2nd body Part 1202 Obstacle nail 1203 Obstacle nail 1205 Obstacle nail 1206 Obstacle nail 1207 Obstacle nail 1208 Obstacle nail 1209 Obstacle nail 1210 Obstacle nail 1211 Obstacle nail 1212 Obstacle nail 1214 Obstacle nail 1215 Obstacle nail 1216 Obstacle nail 1219 Obstacle nail 1220 Obstacle nail 1222 Obstacle nail 1223 Obstacle nail 1224 Obstacle nail 1230 Life nail 1231 Jump nail 1232 Left guide nail 1233 Right guide nail 1402 Normal design display 1403 First special design display 1404 Hold number display 1405 Second special hold number display 1406 Second special hold number display 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Display area 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002 No. 1 Start port 2003 Gate part 2004 2nd start port 2005 Grand prize opening 2400 Panel plate lower light emitting board 2410 Panel plate rear decorative member 2410a Panel plate rear decorative member Rough surface part 2410b Nell plate rear decorative member Metal gloss part 2410c Panel plate rear decorative member Rotating shaft 2420 Panel plate rear substrate 2425 Panel plate rear substrate light emitting part 2450 Panel plate front decorative member 2450a Panel plate front decorative member through hole 2452 Panel plate front decorative member Colorless transparent part 2454 Panel plate front decorative member Opaque part 2456 Panel plate front decorative member Colored transparent part 2460 Light guide plate 2460a Light guide plate uneven part 2470 Decorative member 2470a Decorative member front part 2470b Decorative member rear surface part 2470c Decorative member boss 2470d Decorative member Inclined part 2470e Decorative member screw insertion hole 2470f Decorative member 1st sloping part 2470g Decorative member 2nd sloping part 2471 Decorative member mounting screw 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 2600 Area cover member 2600a Area cover member 2610 Penetration part 2610a Penetration part 2611 Penetration part 2612 Penetration part 2613 Penetration part 2614 2615 Penetration part 2616 Penetration part 2617 Penetration part 2617a Notch end part 2618 Penetration part 2619 Penetration part 2620 Penetration part 2630 Mounting boss 2631 Mounting boss 2632 Mounting boss 2633 Mounting boss 2640 Ball regulation protrusion 2650 Penetration part 2651 Penetration part 26 Part 2660 Boss part 2670 Accommodating recess 2700 Flow path device 2710a First flow path entry port 2710b Second flow path entry port 2720a First flow path forming member 2720b Second flow path forming member 2730a First flow path outlet 2730b Second flow path exit 3700 Mission Button 3710 Attack Button 3720 Left Lever 3722 Left Lever Vibration Source 3724 Left Lever Light Source 3730 Right Lever 3732 Right Lever Vibration Source 3734 Right Lever Light Source 3740 Defense Button 3770 Tank Accessory 5000 Nail Sheet 5100 Film Sheet 5110 1st Area Printing Body 5120 Second area print body 5200 Obstacle nail print body 5950 Rail member 6000 Rabbit accessory 6010 Face cover part 6011 Face cover part Front part 6011a First face light scattering part 6011b Second face light scattering part 6012 Face cover part Top surface part 6013 Face cover right side 6014 Face cover bottom surface 6015 Face cover left side 6016 First arm 6 017 2nd arm 6020 Face substrate 6021 1st ear light emitting part 6021a 1st ear decoration part 6022 2nd ear decoration part 6022a 2nd ear decoration part 6023 Face light emitting part 6023a 1st face light emitting part 6023b 2nd face light emitting part 6024 Mouth decoration part 6025 Control element 6026 Driver 6027 Resistance 6027a 1st resistance 6027b 2nd resistance 6027c 3rd resistance 6027d 4th resistance 6027e 5th resistance 6027f 6th resistance 6028 Condenser 6028a 1st capacitor 6028b 2nd capacitor 6029 Connector 6030 Body part 6100 6200 Stump part 6210 Stump plate part 6210a Stump opening 6300 Stump box part 6310 Box upper wall part 6320 Box right wall part 6330 Box lower wall part 6340 Box left wall part 6350 Box rear wall part 6352 Rear wall board 6352a First rear wall board 6352b 2nd rear wall substrate 6354 rear wall light emitting part 6354a 1st rear wall light emitting part 6354b 2nd rear wall light emitting part 6356 rear wall cover 6358 rear wall cover light scattering part 6358a 1st rear wall cover light scattering part 6358b 2nd rear wall Cover light scattering part 6360 1st grass moving part 6360a 1st grass decoration part 6370 2nd grass moving part 6370a 2nd grass decoration part 6380 Rear wall board part 6381 Grass board part 6381a Grass board colored transparent part 6381b Grass board colorless transparent part 6382a Grassboard center decoration part 6382b Grassboard upper decoration part 6382c Grassboard right decoration part 6382d Grassboard bottom decoration part 6382e Grassboard left decoration part 6400 Grass accessory 6420 Grass board 6422 Grass board front light emitting part 6422a Grass board front first light emitting part 6422b Grass substrate front surface second light emitting part 6422c Grass substrate front surface third light emitting part 6424 Grass substrate rear surface light emitting part 6424a Grass substrate rear surface first light emitting part 6424b Grass substrate rear surface second light emitting part 6426 Grass substrate opening 6426a Grass substrate first opening 6426b Grass substrate 2nd opening 6440 Grass front cover 6442 Grass front cover Transparent part 6442a Grass front cover colorless transparent part 6442b Grass front cover Colored transparent part 6444 Grass front cover Light scattering part 6444a Grass front cover Colorless light scattering part 6444b Grass front cover Colored light scattering part 6446 Grass front cover Opaque part 6448 Grass front cover opening 6448a Grass front cover 1st opening 644 8b Grass front cover 2nd opening 6460 Grass back cover transparent part 6462a Grass back cover colorless transparent part 6462b Grass back cover colored transparent part 6464 Grass back cover light scattering part 6464a Grass back cover colorless light scattering part 6464b Grass back Cover Colored light scattering part 6466 Grass back cover Opaque part 6470 1st grass role 6475 2nd grass role 6480 3rd grass role 6485 4th grass role 6500 Mountain role 6520 Mountain board 6522 Mountain board Front light emitting part 6522a Mountain Board front 1st light emitting part 6522b Mountain board front 2nd light emitting part 6522c Mountain board front 3rd light emitting part 6522d Mountain board front 4th light emitting part 6522e Mountain board front 5th light emitting part 6522f Mountain board front 6th light emitting part 6522g Mountain board front 7th light emitting part 6522h Mountain board front surface 8 light emitting part 6522i Mountain board front surface 9th light emitting part 6524 Mountain board opening 6540 1st mountain front cover 6542 1st mountain front cover colored transparent part 6544 1st mountain front cover colored light scattering part 6548 1st Yamamae cover opening 6560 2nd Yamamae cover 6562 2nd Yamamae cover colorless transparent part 6564 2nd Yamamae cover colorless light scattering part 6600 1st giant tree accessory 6610 1st giant tree trunk board 6630 1st giant tree leaf Board 6650 2nd giant tree accessory 6660 2nd giant tree trunk substrate 6680 2nd giant tree leaf substrate 6700 1st cloud accessory 6750 2nd cloud accessory 6800 Board back grass accessory 6820 Board back grass substrate 6822 Board back grass substrate front light emitting part 6824 Board back grass board opening 6824a Board back grass board first opening 6824b Board back grass board second opening 6824c Board back grass board third opening 6824d Board back grass board fourth opening 6840 Board back grass front cover 6842 Board back grass front cover Colored transparent part 6844 Board back grass front cover Colored light scattering part 6848 Board back grass front cover opening 6848a Board back grass front cover 1st opening 6848b Board back grass front cover 2nd opening 6848c Board back grass front cover Front cover 3rd opening 6848d Board back grass Front cover 4th opening 7000 Door frame top unit upper right ear opening 7002 Door frame top unit upper 1st right ear opening 7004 Door frame top unit upper 2nd right ear opening 7010 Door frame top unit upper left ear opening 7012 Door frame top unit upper first left ear opening 7014 Door frame top unit upper second left ear opening 7020 Door frame top Unit lower right ear opening 7022 Door frame top unit lower first right ear opening 7024 Door frame top unit lower second right ear opening 7030 Door frame top unit lower left ear opening 7032 Door frame top unit lower first left ear Opening 7034 Door frame top unit lower second left ear opening 7040 Door frame top unit upper binaural opening 7050 Door frame top unit right light emitting part 7052 Door frame top unit left light emitting part 7100 Right ear frame movable body 7110 Right Ear frame movable body 1st surface 7112 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface inner decorative part 7114 Right ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decorative part 7116 Right ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7118 Right ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7120 Right ear frame movable body 2nd surface 7140 Right ear frame movable body Rotating axis 7200 Left ear frame movable body 7210 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface 7212 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface Inner decorative part 7214 Left ear frame movable body 1st surface outer decoration part 7216 left ear frame movable body inner light emitting part 7218 left ear frame movable body outer light emitting part 7220 left ear frame movable body 2nd surface 7240 left ear frame movable body rotation axis 7300 right ear inner frame movable body 7310 Right ear medial frame movable body 1st surface 7320 Right ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7330 Right ear medial frame movable body light emitting part 7340 Right ear medial frame movable body Rotating axis 7350 Right ear lateral frame movable body 7360 Right ear lateral frame Movable body 1st surface 7370 Right ear outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7380 Right ear outer frame movable body Light emitting part 7390 Right ear outer frame movable body Rotating axis 7400 Left ear inner frame movable body 7410 Left ear inner frame movable body 1st Surface 7420 Left ear medial frame movable body 2nd surface 7430 Left ear medial frame movable body Light emitting part 7440 Left ear medial frame movable body Rotating axis 7450 Left ear lateral frame movable body 7460 Left ear lateral frame movable body 1st surface 7470 Left ear Outer frame movable body 2nd surface 7480 Left ear outer frame movable body light emitting part 7490 Left ear outer frame movable body rotation axis 7500 Door frame top unit Face decoration part 7510 Door frame top unit Face movable body 7512 Door frame top unit Right eye decoration Part 7514 Door frame top unit Left eye decoration part 7520 Door frame top unit Face lower part 7522 Door frame top unit Face lower nose movable body 7524 Door frame top unit Face lower mouth movable body 7600 Door frame side unit Right arm part 7610 Door frame Side unit Right arm case Part 7620 Door frame side unit Right arm Upper arm part 7630 Door frame Side unit Right arm Lower arm part 7650 Door frame side unit left arm 7660 door frame side unit left arm case 7670 door frame side unit left arm upper arm 7680 door frame side unit left arm lower arm 7700 curtain plate bottom unit right foot movable body 7710 curtain plate bottom unit right foot sneak part 7720 curtain plate Bottom unit right foot tip 7750 curtain plate bottom unit left foot movable body 7760 curtain plate bottom unit left foot sneaker part 7770 curtain plate bottom unit left foot tip 7800 root vegetable frame movable body 7802 root vegetable frame movable body 1st cover part 7804 root vegetable frame movable body 2nd Cover part 7810 Root vegetable frame movable body light emitting part 7820 Right side connecting linear member 7825 Right vertical movement drive mechanism 7830 Left side connecting linear member 7835 Left side vertical movement drive mechanism 7850 Root vegetable frame movable body cover unit 7852 Cover unit frame 7854 Cover unit front part 7856 Cover unit right side 7858 Cover unit left side HKB whitening part YGK game ball

Claims (1)

A lottery means to perform a predetermined lottery,
A determination means for determining whether or not the lottery result by the lottery means is advantageous, and
A display means capable of performing a predetermined display and
The display means can display a predetermined display based on the determination result of the determination means, and is provided with an effect control means for variablely controlling the decorative pattern.
Specific reach production is possible,
When the specific reach effect is performed, it is possible to execute a special effect that changes the visibility of the decorative pattern.
The special effect execution period includes a first period in which the visibility of the decorative symbol is lower than before the special effect is executed, and a period after the first period, in which the decorative symbol is executed. A second period in which it is impossible or difficult to visually recognize the decorative pattern, and a third period in which the visibility of the decorative pattern is improved as compared with the second period, which is a period after the second period. Is included,
It is possible to make the background display different between the first period and the third period in which the special effect is executed.
The size of the decorative design in the first period and the decorative design in the third period are different.
A gaming machine characterized in that the background display in the third period is dynamically displayed.

Images